INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FOR
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SYSTEM
BE1-851

Publication: 9 2899 00 990

Revision: F 3/2000
 INTRODUCTION
This instruction manual provides information about the operation and installation of the BE1-851
Overcurrent Protection System. A summary of the information provided is listed below.

 General information, specifications, and a Quick Start guide.

 Functional description and setting parameters for the inputs and outputs, protection and
control functions, metering functions, and reporting and alarm functions.
 BESTlogic programmable logic design and programming.
 Documentation of the preprogrammed logic schemes and application tips.
 Description of security and the user interface setup including ASCII communication and
the Human-Machine Interface (HMI).
 Installation procedures, dimension drawings, and connection diagrams.
 Description of the front panel HMI and ASCII command interface with write access
security procedures.
 A summary of setting, metering, reporting, control, and miscellaneous commands.
 Testing and maintenance procedures.
 Appendices containing characteristic curves, an ASCII command–HMI cross reference,
relay settings record forms, terminal emulation guidelines, and an index.

WARNING!
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, ONLY
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM THE PROCEDURES
PRESENTED IN THIS MANUAL.

BE1-851 Introduction i
 First Printing March 1997

Printed in USA

© 1997, 1999, 2000 Basler Electric Co., Highland, IL 62249

March 2000

CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

OF BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY, HIGHLAND, IL. IT IS LOANED FOR

CONFIDENTIAL USE, SUBJECT TO RETURN ON REQUEST, AND WITH THE
MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING THAT IT WILL NOT BE USED IN ANY MANNER
DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTEREST OF BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY.

It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this
manual provide data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The
availability and design of all features and options are subject to modification without notice.
Should further information be required, contact Basler Electric Company.

BASLER ELECTRIC
ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE 618-654-2341 FAX 618-654-2351

ii Introduction BE1-851
PHONE 618-654-2341 FAX 618-654-2351

PRODUCT REVISION
The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to the embedded
software (firmware) and hardware of this device. The corresponding revisions made to this
instruction manual are also summarized. This revision history is separated into three categories:
Software Changes, Hardware Changes, and Manual Revisions. All revisions are listed in
chronological order.

Software Version Change

2.15/05-30-97 Initial Release.

2.27/01-26-98 Improved 62 timer performance. C

hanged minimum breaker failure time from 100 ms to 50 ms
Added functionality to enable or disable targets for each protective
function.
Added functionality to allow HMI Alarm Reset pushbutton to be used
as a logic variable (RSTKEY).
Improved fault recording functions as follows:
• Phase, neutral, and negative sequence currents are recorded
one cycle after the TRIP trigger logic becomes TRUE.
• Added programmable alarm for Fault Record Time Out, and
changed the error readout to show N/A for this condition with
BREAKER OPERATE TIME and FAULT CLEARING TIME.
• Change the RF-TRIG to show RF=TRIG instead of SERIAL for
EVENT TYPE and FAULT TRIGGER.
• Second oscillographic record triggering point was changed from
when the TRIP trigger logic became TRUE, to when both PU
and LOGIC trigger logic became FALSE.
• Second oscillographic record was changed to record without a
gap between the first and second records during specific
conditions.

2.31/02-19-98 Increase the range of the programmable 51 curve, A coefficient, from

0 - 100 to 0 - 600.

2.36/09-23-98 Added Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 with limited read and
control functions.

2.37/11-16-98 Increased the range of breaker duty I or I2 accumulation from 2.17e7

to 4.2e7.

2.41.00/06-14-99 Added Modbus™ full write functionality; changed version format from
x.xx to x.xx.xx; added Transducer Network Lite Protocol (TNP Lite);
improved trip circuit monitor to allow use with ac trip voltage.

BE1-851 Introduction iii

 Software Version Change

Changes are Improved target reporting function:

applicable to • The trip LED only latches when there are targets to be displayed
versions: on the HMI. The “pickup” condition, indicated by the Trip LED
2.42.01/11-29-99 flashing, is now a higher priority than latching to indicate that
and targets are being displayed on the HMI.
3.42.01/11-29-99 • Improved HMI target screen format. Screen now reports targets
in a text format. Additional information such as fault current
magnitudes and time and date of the fault were moved to a
lower menu branch so that the targets are all that is displayed
unless the user wants more detail.
• Added functionality to reset targets using a programmable logic
expression in addition to the HMI reset key and the ASCII
command interface using the RG-TARG=0 command. Allows
targets to be reset by pulsing a contact sensing input.

Improved COMTRADE oscillography recording function:

• Added *.HDR (header) file to the COMTRADE mandatory files,
*.CFG and *.DAT. The new *.HDR file is a text file that contains
the fault summary report and the appropriate settings that were
active at the time of the event.
• Added all BESTlogic programmable logic bit status to
oscillography files as digital channels. Logic variables with user
programmable names are reported using the programmable
name instead of the generic name.

Improved Sequence of Events Recording function:

• Increased the number of events recorded from 127 to 255.
• Added additional reporting options. It is now possible to retrieve
SER data for: Alarm Events only, RS-ALM; Input/Output Events
only, RS-IO; and Logic Variable Events only, RS-LGC.

Improved BESTlogic functionality:

• Eliminated the setting required to specify which logic scheme is
active. Now the user’s logic settings are always active. This
setting used to be made from the ASCII command interface
using the SP-LOGIC command.
• Changed default logic settings from everything disabled to a
simple logic scheme with 50 and 51 protection enabled.

iv Introduction BE1-851
 Software Version Change

2.42.01/11-29-99 Added several new programmable Alarm functions.

and • Added Logic = None Alarm to alert the user if the relay has no
3.42.01/11-29-99 programmable logic settings.
- Continued • Added Changes Lost Alarm to alert the user if the user has been
editing settings and the access timer times out without an Exit;
Save Settings? Yes command being entered.
• Added functionality to reset alarms using a programmable logic
expression in addition to the HMI reset key and the ASCII
command interface using the RA=0 command. Allows alarms to
be reset by pulsing a contact sensing input.
• Added new alarm logic variable to BESTlogic. ALMLGC can be
used to link programmable alarm functions to your logic scheme
without activating an Alarm LED on the HMI.
• Removed the relay trouble alarm logic variable, ALMREL, from
programmable logic. Since programmable logic is disabled when
this condition is true, it was a superfluous variable. For rearward
compatibility, the relay will not give an alarm if this logic variable is
used in a logic expression.

Improved the virtual switches 43 and 101 functions:

• Added functionality to set four modes of operation for the 43
virtual selector switch.
• Added functionality to set two modes of operation for the 101
virtual selector switch.
• Change the preprogrammed logic schemes to include the new
virtual switch functionality.

Improved the 62 timer functions:

• Added mode 5, integrating timer and mode 6, latch.
• Added targeting to 62 timer functions.

Added functionality to allow the breaker monitoring duty accumulation

to be blocked by a logic expression.

Added automatic day light saving time adjustment to the real time
clock.

Added functionality to the automatic setting group selection function

to allow it to monitor protective functions in addition to the 51P
function. These functions are as follows:
• Setting groups can be changed based on unbalanced currents
by monitoring the 51N and 51Q functions.
• Settings groups can be changed during the reclosing sequence
by monitoring the 79 shot counter.

Changed the default settings for programmable variable names.

Defaults are now all set to generic variable names with state names
of TRUE and FALSE.

Reordered the output of the S command to match the order of

settings as listed in the Instruction Manual, Appendix C.

BE1-851 Introduction v
 Software Version Change

Changes are Added DNP 3.0, Level 2 compliance. Requires Version 3.xx
applicable only to hardware;
version:
3.42.01/11-29-99

Added support for Version 3 hardware with additional memory.

Oscillographic recording is as follows:

Feature Version 3.XX

Number of Oscillographic 16
Records

Length of Oscillographic 15 cycles each

Records

Sample Resolution * 24 samples per cycle

Changes Updated the GF-VER and RG-VER commands to report

applicable to Model Number : BE1-851G, for style type Gxxxxx. And
version: Model Number : BE1-851 for style type Hxxxxx.
3.43.00/02-23-00
Updated to support sensing type G (Florida Power Light)
which replaces 51Q with 151N, 50TQ with 250TN and
150TQ with 350TN. (This hex file version only works with
Style Type H)

Hardware Version Change

05-30-97 Initial Release.

10-26-98 Changed serialization to Hxxxxxxxx

vi Introduction BE1-851
Hardware Version Change

11-29-99 Label placed on the front panel stating a WARNING to BESTCOMS

USERS: When using BESTCOMS software you must upgrade to
VER 1.31.00 or higher prior to communicating with this unit. Failure
to do so will result in corruption of the settings database.

Contact sensing input circuits redesigned to turn on at specific

voltage ranges. These ranges are specified in the instruction
manual. Previous versions of the relay, contact sensing input circuits
may turn on at voltages outside of these specified ranges.

Manual Version Change

and ECO/ECA

D/16672 Manual was revised to reflect improvements in embedded software

versions 2.29, 2.30, 2.31, and 2.32. SG-TARG and RSTKEY
commands were added. Replaced the text after and includeing
Current Demand Reporting of Section 3 with new alarms and outputs
information. Changed BF timer range in section 1 from 100 -
999msec to 50 - 999msec. In table 1-3 the “A” parameter of curve “P”
was changed from 0 -100 to 0 - 600. Added new style chart, figure 1-
4, with S1 cover and DNP 3.0 options. Curve names in Tables 1-4
and 1-5 through 1-20 were changed to match the names in figures 1-
5 through 1-20. Added missing connection in logic diagram figure 5-
1. Addec UL and CSA logos to the style label shown on the front
cover graphics.

E/5135 Changed manual to a two volume set. Updated manual to reflect

extended oscillographic reporting. Added modes 5 and 6 to 62/162
timer functionality. Updated logic scheme tables and diagrams to
reflect new default settings. Changed all of the default settings in the
manual. Removed the SP logic serial command from the manual.
Added SA-LGC and RA-LGC commands to the manual. Changed
the sequence of events recorder maximum number of events to 255
from 127 in all references.

F/8304 Added paragraphs on Breaker Failure in section 4. Updated the

manual to reflect the sensing input type G units. Converted entire
manual to a single volume.

BE1-851 Introduction vii

 CONTENTS

VOLUME 1, APPLICATION
SECTION 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
SECTION 3 Input and Output Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SECTION 4 Protection and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SECTION 5 Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
SECTION 6 Reporting and Alarm Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
SECTION 7 BESTlogic Programmable Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
SECTION 8 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
SECTION 9 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
SECTION 10 Human-Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
SECTION 11 ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
SECTION 12 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
SECTION 13 Testing and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
APPENDIX A Time-Current Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
APPENDIX B Command Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
APPENDIX C Relay Setting Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
APPENDIX D Setting Terminal Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
I/O Functions (Section 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Power System Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Contact Sensing Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Contact Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Protection and Control Functions (Section 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Breaker Failure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
General Purpose Logic Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Setting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Virtual Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Metering Functions (Section 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Reporting and Alarm Functions (Section 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Relay Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
General Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Demand Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Breaker Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Trip Circuit Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fault Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Sequence Of Events Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Version Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
BESTlogic Programmable Logic (Section 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Write Access Security (Section 9) (Section 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Human Machine Interface (HMI) (Section 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Communication (Section 9) (Section 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
PRIMARY APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Sample Style Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Metered Current Values And Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Calculated Values And Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
IRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Contact Inputs Recognition Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Time Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Instantaneous Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Reclosing Timers (79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Breaker Fail Timer (BF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
General Purpose Timers (62, 162) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Automatic Setting Group Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
AC Current Inputs With 5 A CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
AC Current Inputs with 1 A CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Analog To Digital Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Output Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

BE1-851 General Information i

 Control Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Surge Withstand Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
U.L. Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
C.S.A. Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Figures
Figure 1-1. Style Number Identification Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Tables
Table 1-1. Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

ii General Information BE1-851

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION

General
The BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System is an economical, microprocessor based, multifunction system.
It is available in S1(Basler/GE style), H1(Half-rack), and F1(Westinghouse FT-11 Size) configurations. BE1-
851 features include:

 Time & Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection  Breaker Monitoring

 Control  Metering Functions
 Automatic Reclosing  Communication
 Breaker Failure Protection

BE1-851 relays have four programmable contact sensing inputs, five programmable outputs, and one alarm
output. Outputs can be assigned to perform protection, control, or indicator operations through logical
programming. For example, protection functions could be programmed to cause a protective trip. Control
functions could be programmed to cause a manual trip, manual close, or automatic reclose. Indicators could
be configured to annunciate relay failure, a settings group change, and others.
Protection scheme designers may select from a number of pre-programmed logic schemes that perform the
most common protection and control requirements. Alternately, a custom scheme can be created using
BESTlogic.

A simplified "How To Get Started" procedure for BE1-851 users is provided in Section 2, Quick Start.

FEATURES
The BE1-851 relay includes many features for the protection, monitoring, and control of power system
equipment. These features include protection and control functions, metering functions, and reporting and
alarm functions. A highly flexible programmable logic system called BESTlogic allows the user to apply the
available functions with complete flexibility and customize the system to meet the requirements of the
protected power system. Programmable I/O, extensive communication features, and an advanced HMI
(Human Machine Interface) provide easy access to the features provided.
The following information summarizes the capabilities of this multifunction device. Each feature along with
how to set it up and how to use its outputs is described in complete detail in the later sections of this manual.

I/O Functions (Section 3)

Input functions consist of Power System Measurement and Contact Sensing Inputs. Programmable Contact
Outputs make up the output functions. Input and Output functions are described in the following paragraphs.

Power System Measurement Functions

BE1-851 relays are designed for operation on both 50 and 60 hertz systems and have four current inputs
to measure phase and neutral currents. It is a numerical device that samples the analog current waveforms
and uses mathematical algorithms to measure the operating quantities. One of three current measurement
algorithms may be individually selected for phase and neutral. Those are:
• Fundamental
• Average
• Wideband RMS
The fundamental algorithm responds to the fundamental component of the current and rejects the harmonic
components. The average algorithm emulates an RC measurement circuit and has a relatively flat response
characteristic over a wide frequency range. The wideband RMS algorithm measures all components of the
current up to the seventh harmonic.

BE1-851 General Information 1-1

In addition, the relay measures the magnitude of the negative sequence component of the fundamental
phase current quantities. The negative sequence measurement has by definition a fundamental response
characteristic.
Each current sensing circuit is low burden and isolated. Negative sequence current magnitudes are derived
from the three-phase currents. Neutral current input is available for direct measurement of the current in a
transformer neutral, tertiary winding, or flux balancing current transformer.

Contact Sensing Inputs

Four programmable contact sensing inputs (IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4) with programmable signal conditioning
provide a binary logic interface to the protection and control system. Each input's function and labeling is
programmable using BESTlogic. A user-meaningful name can be assigned to each input and to each state
(open and closed) for use in reporting functions.

Contact Outputs
Five programmable general purpose contact outputs (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4, and OUT5) provide a
binary logic interface to the protection and control system. One programmable, fail-safe contact output
(OUTA) provides an alarm output. Each output's function and labeling is programmable using BESTlogic.
A user-meaningful name can be assigned to each output and to each state (open and closed) for use in
reporting functions. Output logic can be overridden to open, close, or pulse each output contact for testing
or control purposes. All output contacts are trip rated.

Protection and Control Functions (Section 4)

Protection functions consist of Overcurrent, Breaker Reclosing, and Breaker Failure protection and general
purpose logic timers. Setting Groups and Virtual Control Switches make up the control functions. The
following paragraphs describe each protection and control function.

Overcurrent Protection
Overcurrent protection is provided by six instantaneous overcurrent functions and three time-overcurrent
functions.
Each instantaneous overcurrent function has a settable time delay. Sensing input type G relays have two
phase and four neutral elements. Sensing input type H relays have two phase, two neutral, and two
negative sequence elements. Phase elements include 50TP and 150TP. Neutral elements include 50TN,
150TN, 250TN, and 350TN. Negative Sequence elements include 50TQ and 150TQ.
A 51P phase element, 51Q negative sequence element, and 51N and 151N neutral elements are provided
for time-overcurrent functions. Sensing input type G relays have one phase and two neutral elements. And
sensing input type H units have one phase, one neutral, and one negative sequence elemnt.
Time-overcurrent functions employ a dynamic integrating timing algorithm covering a range from pickup to
40 times pickup with selectable instantaneous or integrated reset characteristics. Time-overcurrent curves
conform to the IEEE C37.112 document and include seven curves similar to Westinghouse/ABB CO curves,
five curves similar to GE IAC curves, IEC types A, B, C, and G, a fixed time curve, and a user programmable
curve.

Breaker Failure Protection

One breaker failure protection block (BF) provides programmable breaker failure protection.

General Purpose Logic Timers

Two general purpose logic timers (62, 162) with six modes of operation are provided.

Setting Groups
1-2 General Information BE1-851
Four setting groups allow adaptive relaying to be implemented to optimize BE1-851 settings for various
operating conditions. Automatic and external logic can be employed to select the active setting group.

Virtual Control Switches

BE1-851 virtual control switches include one virtual breaker control switch and four virtual switches.
Trip and close control of a selected breaker can be controlled by the virtual breaker control switch (101).
The virtual breaker control switch is accessed locally from the optional human machine interface (HMI) or
remotely from the communication ports.
Additional control is provided by the four virtual switches: 43, 143, 243, and 343. These virtual switches are
accessed locally from the optional HMI or remotely from the communication ports. Virtual switches can be
used to trip and close additional switches or breakers, or enable and disable certain functions.

Metering Functions (Section 5)

Metering is provided for all measured currents, and all derived neutral and negative sequence currents. 1%
meter accuracy is provided down to 10% of nominal current.

Reporting and Alarm Functions (Section 6)

Several reporting and alarm functions provide fault reporting, demand, breaker and trip circuit monitoring,
as well as relay diagnostic and firmware information.

Relay Identification
Two free-form fields are provided for the user to enter information to identify the relay. These fields are used
by many of the reporting functions to identify the relay that the report is from. Examples of relay identification
field uses are station name, circuit number, relay system, purchase order, and others.

Clock
A standard IRIG input is provided for receiving time synchronization signals from a master clock. Automatic
daylight saving time compensation can be enabled. Time reporting is settable for 12 or 24 hour format. The
date can be formatted as mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy.

General Status Reporting

The BE1-851 provides extensive general status reporting for monitoring, commissioning, and
troubleshooting. Status reports are available from the HMI or communication ports.

Demand Reporting
Ampere demand registers monitor phase A, B, C, Neutral, and Negative Sequence values. The demand
interval and demand calculation method are independently settable for phase, neutral and negative
sequence measurements. Demand reporting records today's peak, yesterday's peak, and peak since reset
with time stamps for each register.

Breaker Monitoring
Breaker statistics are recorded for a single breaker. They include the number of operations, accumulated
interrupted I or I2 and breaker time to trip. Each of these conditions can be set to trigger an alarm.

Trip Circuit Monitoring

A trip circuit monitor function is provided to monitor the trip circuit of a breaker or lockout relay for loss of
voltage (fuse blown) or loss of continuity (trip coil open). The monitoring input is internally connected across
OUT1. Additional trip or close circuit monitors can be implemented in BESTlogic using additional inputs,

BE1-851 General Information 1-3

logic timers, and programmable logic alarms.

Fault Reporting
Fault reports consist of simple target information, fault summary reports, and detailed oscillography records
to enable the user to retrieve information about disturbances in as much detail as is desired. The relay
records and reports oscillography data in industry standard IEEE, COMTRADE format to allow using any
fault analysis software.

Sequence Of Events Recorder

A 255 event Sequence of Events Recorder (SER) is provided that records and time stamps all relay inputs
and outputs as well as all alarm conditions monitored by the relay. Time stamp resolution is to the nearest
quarter-cycle. I/O and Alarm reports can be extracted from the records as well as reports of events recorded
during the time span associated with a specific fault report.

Alarm Function
Extensive self diagnostics will trigger a fatal relay trouble alarm if any of the relay's core functions are
adversely affected. Fatal relay trouble alarms are not programmable and are dedicated to the Alarm output
(OUTA) and the front panel Relay Trouble LED. Additional relay trouble alarms and all other alarm functions
are programmable for major or minor priority. Programmed alarms are indicated by major and minor alarm
LEDs on the front panel. Major and minor alarm points can also be programmed to any output contact
including OUTA. Over 20 alarm conditions are available to be monitored including user definable logic
conditions using BESTlogic.
Active alarms can be read and reset from the HMI or from the communication ports. A historical sequence
of events report with time stamps lists when each alarm occurred and cleared. These reports are available
through the communication ports.

Version Report
The version of the embedded software (firmware) is available from the optional HMI or the communication
ports. The unit serial number and style number is also available through the communication port.

BESTlogic Programmable Logic (Section 7)

Each BE1-851 protection and control function is implemented in an independent function block. Every
function block is equivalent to its single function, discrete device counterpart so it is immediately familiar to
the protection engineer. Each independent function block has all of the inputs and outputs that the discrete
component counterpart might have. Programming with BESTlogic is equivalent to choosing the devices
required by your protection and control scheme and then drawing schematic diagrams to connect the inputs
and outputs to obtain the desired operating logic.
Several preprogrammed logic schemes and a set of custom logic settings are provided. A preprogrammed
scheme can be activated by merely selecting it. Custom logic settings allow you to tailor the relay
functionality to match the needs of your operation's practices and power system requirements.

Write Access Security (Section 9) (Section 12)

Security can be defined for three distinct functional access areas: Settings, Reports, and Control. Each
access area can be assigned its own password. A global password provides access to all three functional
areas. Each of the four passwords can be unique or multiple access areas can share the same password.
A second dimension of security is provided by allowing the user to restrict access for any of the access areas
to only specific communication ports. For example, you could set up security to deny access to control
commands from the rear RS-232 port that is connected through a modem to a telephone line.
Security settings only affect write access. Read access is always available in any area through any port.

1-4 General Information BE1-851

Human Machine Interface (HMI) (Section 10)
Each BE1-851 comes with a front panel display with five LED indicators for Power Supply Status, Relay
Trouble Alarm, Minor Alarm, Major Alarm, and Trip. The lighted, liquid crystal display (LCD) allows the relay
to replace local indication and control functions such as panel metering, alarm annunciation, and control
switches. The LCD has automatic priority logic to govern what is being displayed on the screen so that when
an operator approaches, the information of most interest is automatically displayed without having to
navigate the menu structure. The order of priorities are:
Recloser active
Æ Targets
Ç Alarms
È Programmable automatic scrolling list
Up to 16 screens can be defined in the programmable, automatic scroll list.

Communication (Section 9) (Section 11)

Three independent, isolated communication ports provide access to all functions in the relay. COM0 is a
nine pin female RS-232 port located on the front of the case. COM1 is a nine pin female RS-232 port
located on the back of the case. COM2 is a two wire RS-485 port located on the back of the case.
An ASCII command interface allows easy interaction with the relay using standard, of the shelf
communication software. The ASCII command interface is optimized to allow automating of the relay setting
process. Settings files can be captured from the relay and edited using any software that supports the *.txt
file format. These ASCII text files can then be used to set the relay using the send text file function of your
communication software.
ModbusTM and other common protocols are optionally available for the RS-485 communication port. A
separate instruction manual is available for each available protocol. Consult the product bulletin or the
factory for availability of these options and instruction manuals.

PRIMARY APPLICATIONS
The BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System provides complete circuit protection with multiple overcurrent
elements and is intended for use in any non-directional overcurrent application. Its unique capabilities make
it ideally suited for applications where:
• Low burden is required to extend the linear range of CTs.
• One relay provides the flexibility of wide settings ranges, multiple settings groups, and multiple
coordination curves.
• A multifunction, multi-phase relay is desired for economical and space saving benefits. A single
BE1-851 provides all of the protection, local and remote indication, metering, and control required
on a typical circuit.
• Communication capability and protocol support is desired.
• Applications that require specific current response characteristics.
- The fundamental digital signal processing (DSP) algorithm provides rejection of harmonics and
low transient overreach
- The RMS DSP algorithm provides true wide band RMS measurement.
- The average DSP algorithm provides a flat response characteristic over a wide frequency range.
• Bus protection is provided by a high speed overcurrent blocking scheme on the transformer bus
mains instead of a bus differential circuit.
• The capabilities of intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) are used to decrease relay and equipment
maintenance costs.

BE1-851 General Information 1-5

 • Applications where the optional case configurations facilitate retrofit in existing substations. One
electromechanical overcurrent or reclosing relay can be replaced by a BE1-851 relay. The
remaining relays can be removed or left in service as backup.
• Applications where the capabilities of a digital multifunction relay are required, yet test paddles
and/or drawout construction are also required.

MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION

General
The BE1-851 Relay electrical characteristics and operational features are defined by a combination of letters
and numbers that make up the style number. The model number, together with the style number, describe
the options included in a specific device, and appear in the clear window on the front panel and on a sticker
located inside the case. Upon receipt of a relay, be sure to check the style number against the requisition
and the packing list to ensure that they agree.

Sample Style Number

Style number identification chart (Figure 1-1) defines the electrical characteristics and operational features
included in BE1-851 Relays. For example, if the style number were H5-N1S0, the device would have the
following:

(H) - 3 Phase and Neutral

(5) - 5A phase and Neutral CTs
(N) - Future use
(1) - 48/125V power supply
(S) - S1 type case
(0) - ASCII protocol communication via RS-485

Figure 1-1. Style Number Identification Chart.

1-6 General Information BE1-851

OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
BE1-851 relays have the following features and capabilities.

Metered Current Values And Accuracy

Current Range: 0.1 to 1.5 nominal
Accuracy (Phase and Neutral): ±1% of reading, ±1 least significant digit at 25C
Accuracy (Negative Sequence): ±1.5% of reading, ±1 least significant digit at 25C
Temperature Dependence:  ±0.02% per C

Calculated Values And Accuracy

Demand
Range: 0.1 to 1.5 nominal
Type: Exponential
Accuracy: ±1% of reading ± 1 digit at 25C
Interval: 1 to 60 minutes

Real Time Clock

Accuracy: 1 second per day at 25C (free running) or
±2 milliseconds (with IRIG synchronization)
Resolution: One millisecond
Date and Time Setting Provisions: Front panel, communications port and IRIG.
Leap year correction provided.

IRIG
Standard: 200-98, Format B002
Input Signal: Demodulated (dc level-shifted digital signal)
Logic-High Voltage: 3.5 Vdc, minimum
Logic-Low Voltage: 0.5 Vdc, maximum
Input Voltage Range: ±20 Vdc, maximum
Resistance: Non-linear, approximately 4 k$ at 3.5 Vdc,
approximately 3 k$ at 20 Vdc

Contact Inputs Recognition Time

Programmable, 4 to 255 milliseconds

NOTE
All timing specifications are for the worst case response. This includes output contact
operate times and standard BESTlogic operation timing, but excludes input debounce
timing and non standard logic configurations. If a non-standard logic scheme involves
feedback, then one or more BESTlogic update rate delays must be included to calculate
the worst case delay. An example of feedback is Virtual Outputs driving Function Block
Inputs. For more information, see Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic.

BE1-851 General Information 1-7

Time Overcurrent Functions
Current Pickup, Phase and Neutral (51P, 51N, 151N) Dropout/pickup ratio: 95%
Pickup Accuracy:
5 Ampere CT ±2% or ±50 mA
1 Ampere CT ±2% or ±10 mA
Current Pickup, Negative Sequence (51Q) Dropout/pickup ratio: 90%
Pickup Accuracy:
5 Ampere CT ±3% or ±75 mA
1 Ampere CT ±3% or ±15 mA
Current Input All 51 Functions
5 Ampere CT:
Range 0.50 to 16.0 A
Increments 0.01 from 0.50 to 9.99, 0.1 from 10.0 to 16.0
1 Ampere CT:
Range 0.10 to 3.20 A
Increments 0.01 A

Instantaneous Overcurrent Functions

Current Pickup Accuracy, Phase and Neutral
(50TP, 50TN, 150TP, 150TN, 250TN, 350TN): Dropout/pickup ratio: 90% or higher
5 Ampere CT ±2% or ±50 mA
1 Ampere CT ±2% or ±10 mA
Current Pickup Accuracy, Negative Sequence
(50TQ, 150TQ): Dropout/pickup ratio: 90% or higher
5 Ampere CT ±3% or ±75 mA
1 Ampere CT ±3% or ±15 mA
Current Pickup Ranges (50T, 150T):
5 Ampere CT
Range: 0.5 to 150.0 A
Increments 0.01 from 0.50 to 9.99 A, 0.1 from 10.0 to 99.9 A,
and 1.0 from 100 A to 150 A
1 Ampere CT
Range 0.1 to 30.0 A
Increments 0.01 from 0.01 to 9.99 A, 0.1 from 10.0 to 30.0 A
Settable Time Delay Characteristics (50T, 150T): Definite time for any current exceeding pickup
Time Range 0.00 to 60.0 seconds
Time Increments One millisecond from 0 to 999 milliseconds, 0.1
second from 1.0 to 9.9 seconds, 1 second from 10
to 60 seconds
Timing Accuracy (50TP, 50TN, 150TP, 150TN ±0.5% or ±¼ cycle whichever is greater plus trip time
250TN, and 350TN) for instantaneous response (0.0 setting)
Timing Accuracy (50TQ, 150TQ) ±0.5% or ±1 cycle whichever is greater plus trip time
for instantaneous response (0.0 setting)

1-8 General Information BE1-851

 Trip Time: For 0.0 delay setting:
(50TP, 50TN, 150TP, 150TN, 250TN, 350TN): 1¼ cycles maximum for currents  5 times the
pickup setting. Three cycles maximum for a current
of 1.5 times pickup. Four cycles maximum for a
current of 1.05 times the pickup setting
Trip Time For 0.0 delay setting:
(50TQ, 150TQ) 2¼ cycles maximum for currents  5 times the
pickup setting. 3 cycles maximum for a current of
1.5 times pickup. Five cycles maximum for a
current of 1.05 times the pickup setting

Reclosing Timers (79)

Delay (4), Reset (1), Max Cycle (1), Reclose Fail (1)
Range: 100 milliseconds to 600 seconds
Increments: 1 millisecond from 0 to 999 milliseconds; 0.1
second from 1.0 to 9.9 seconds; 1 second from 10
to 600 seconds
Accuracy: ±5% or (+1.75, -0 cycles) whichever is greater

Breaker Fail Timer (BF)

Current Detector Pickup: Fixed at 0.5 A for 5 A unit, 0.1 A for 1 A unit
Current Detector Pickup Accuracy: ±10%
Delay Range: 50 to 999 milliseconds
Increments: 1 millisecond
Reset Time (Fundamental): Within 1¼ cycles of the current being removed
(Excluding output contact operate time).
Timer Accuracy: ±5% or (+1¼, - ¼cycles) whichever is greater

General Purpose Timers (62, 162)

PU.DO, Integrating, Retriggerable,
Non-Retriggerable, Oscillator, and Latch
Range: 0 to 9,999 seconds
Increments: 1 millisecond from 0 to 999 milliseconds; 0.1
second from 1.0 to 9.9 seconds; 1 second from 10
to 9,999 seconds
Accuracy: ±5% or ±3/4cycles, whichever is greater

Automatic Setting Group Characteristics

Number of Setting Groups: Four
Switch Level Range: 0-150% of the setting group 0, 51 phase pickup
setting (S0-51P).
Switch Level Accuracy: ±2% or ±50 mA (5 A), ±2% or ±10 mA (1 A)
Switch Timer Range: 0 to 60 minutes with 1 minute increments.
(0 = disabled)
Switch Timer Accuracy: ±5% or ±2 sec whichever is greater

BE1-851 General Information 1-9

 ¼ cycle

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

AC Current Inputs With 5 A CT

Continuous Rating: 20 A
One Second Rating: 400 A
For other current levels, use the formula:
½
I = (K/t)
where t = time in seconds,
K= 160,000(S1 case); 90,000(H1/F1 case)
Saturation Limit: 150 A
Burden Four milliohms or less at 5 A

AC Current Inputs with 1 A CT

Continuous Rating: 4A
One Second Rating: 80 A
For other current levels, use the following formula
½
I = (K/t)
where t = time in seconds, K=6,400
Saturation Limit: 30 A
Burden: 10 milliohms or less at 1 A

Analog To Digital Converter

Type: 16 bit
Sampling Rate: 24 samples per cycle

Power Supply
Option 1
48, 110, and 125 Vdc Range 35-150 Vdc
67, 110, and 120 Vac Range 55-135 Vac
Option 2
110, 125, and 250 Vdc Range 90-300 Vdc
110, 120, and 240 Vac Range 90-270 Vac
Option 3
24 Vdc Range 17-32 Vdc
Burden
(Options 1, 2, and 3) 6 watts continuous, 8 watts maximum with all
outputs energized

Output Contacts
Make and Carry for Tripping Duty 30 A for 0.2 seconds per ANSI C37.90;
7 A Continuous
Break Resistive or Inductive 0.3 A at 125 or 250 Vdc (L/R = 0.04 maximum)

1-10 General Information BE1-851

Control Inputs
Voltage Range Same as control power
Input Burden Burden per contact for sensing depends on the
power supply model and the input voltage. Table
1-2 provides appropriate burden specifications.
Table 1-1. Burden
Power Supply Burden
1 (48/125V) 44 kohm
2 (125/250V) 94 kohm
3 (24V) 18 kohm

Communication Ports
Interface
Front RS-232 300 to 19200 baud, 8N1 full duplex
Rear RS-232 300 to 19200 baud, 8N1 full duplex
Rear RS-485 300 to 19200 baud, 8N1 half duplex

Display
Type Two line, 16 character alphanumeric LCD (liquid
crystal display) with LED (light emitting diode)
backlight
Operating Temperature 40 C ( 40 F) to +70 C (+158 F)
Display contrast may be impaired at temperatures
below 20 C ( 4 F)

Isolation
1500 Vac at 50/60 Hz in accordance with IEEE
C37.90 and IEC 255-5

Surge Withstand Capability

Oscillatory Qualified to IEEE C37.90.1-1989 Standard Surge

Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective
Relays and Relay Systems.
Fast Transient Qualified to IEEE C37.90.1-1989 Standard Surge
Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective
Relays and Relay Systems.

Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)

Type tested using a five watt, hand-held
transceiver in the ranges of 144 and 440 MHz with
the antenna placed within six inches of the relay.
Meets IEEE C37.90.2. - 1995

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

BE1-851 General Information 1-11

 8 kilovolts contact discharges and 15 kilovolts air
discharges applied in accordance with IEC
EN61000-4-2 Criterion.

U.L. Recognition
U.L. recognized per Standard 508, U.L. File
Number E97033. Note: Output contacts are not
U.L. recognized for voltages greater than 250 V.

C.S.A. Certification
C.S.A. certified per Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2
Number 14-M91, C.S.A. File Number LR23131.
Note: Output contacts are not C.S.A. certified for
voltages greater than 250 V.

Environment
Operating Temperature Range -40C to 70C (-40F to 158F)
Storage Temperature Range -40C to 70C (-40F to 158F)
Humidity Qualified to IEC 86-2-38, 1st Edition 1974, Basic
Environmental Test Procedures, Part 2: Test Z/AD:
Composite Temperature Humidity Cyclic Test

Shock
In standard tests, the relay has withstood 15 g in
each of three mutually perpendicular planes Shock
without structural damage or degradation of
performance

Vibration
In standard tests, the relay has withstood 2 g in
each of three mutually perpendicular planes, swept
over the range of 10 to 500 Hz for a total of six
sweeps, 15 minutes each sweep, without structural
damage or degradation of performance.

Weight
Maximum weight 12 pounds

1-12 General Information BE1-851

SECTION 2 • QUICK START
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 2 • QUICK START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
BESTLOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Characteristics of Protection and Control Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Function Block Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Output Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
USER INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Front Panel HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
ASCII Command Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Command Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Human-To-Machine ASCII Command Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Batch Command Text File Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
BESTCOMS for BE1-851, Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Entering Test Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Checking The State Of Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
FAQ/TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Tables
Table 2-1. Trip LED Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

BE1-851 Quick Start i

SECTION 2 • QUICK START

GENERAL
This section provides an overview of the BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System. You should be familiar
with the concepts behind the user interfaces and BESTLogic before you begin reading about the detailed
BE1-851 functions. Sections 3 through 6 describe each function of the BE1-851 in detail.
The following information is intended to provide the reader with a basic understanding of the three user
interfaces (front panel HMI, ASCII serial communications link, and the BE1-851 BESTCOMS software) and
the security features provided in the BE1-851 relay. Detailed information on the operation of the HMI
(Human Machine Interface) can be found in Section 10, HMI (Controls and Indicators), and the ASCII
command communications in Section 11, ASCII Command Interface.

Also covered in this section is an overview of BESTLogic which is fundamental to how each of the protection
and control functions are set-up and used in the BE1-851 relay. Detailed information on using BESTLogic
to design complete protection and control schemes for the protected circuit can be found in Section 7,
BESTLogic and Section 8, Application.
Sections 3 through 6 describe each function provided in the BE1-851 relay and include references to the
following items. Note that NOT all items are appropriate for each function.
 HMI screens for setting the operational parameters
 ASCII commands for setting the operational parameters
 ASCII commands for setting up the BESTLogic required to use the function in your protection and
control scheme.
 Outputs from the function such as Alarm and BESTLogic variables or data reports.
 HMI screens for operation or interrogation of the outputs and reports provided by each function.
 ASCII commands for operation or interrogation of the outputs and reports provided by each function.

BESTLOGIC
Each of the protection and control functions in the BE1-851 is implemented as an independent function block
that is equivalent to a single function, discrete device counterpart. Each independent function block has all
of the inputs and outputs that the discrete component counterpart might have. Programming BESTLogic
is equivalent to choosing the devices required by your protection and control scheme and drawing schematic
diagrams to connect the inputs and outputs to obtain the desired operational logic. The concept is the same
but the method is different in that you choose each function block by enabling it and use Boolean logic
expressions to connect the inputs and outputs. The result is that in designing your system, you have even
greater flexibility than you had using discrete devices. An added benefit is that you are not constrained by
the flexibility limitations inherent in many multifunction relays.
One user programmable, custom logic scheme is in the user settings. To save you time, several
preprogrammed logic schemes are also provided. Any of the preprogrammed schemes can be selected and
used directly without having to make any BESTLogic settings. The logic scheme that is active is determined
by a protection setting. Provisions have also been made to allow the protection engineer to copy one of the
preprogrammed logic schemes into the user programmed custom logic settings so that it can simply be
modified to fine tune it to the user’s requirements.
There are two types of BESTLogic settings: function block logic settings and output logic settings. These
are described briefly in the following paragraphs. Detailed information on using BESTLogic to design
complete protection and control schemes for the protected circuit can be found in Section 7, BESTLogic
Programmable Logic and Section 8, Application.

BE1-851 Quick Start 2-1

Characteristics of Protection and Control Function Blocks
As stated before, each function block is equivalent to a discrete device counterpart. For example, the
recloser function block in the BE1-851 has all of the characteristics of a version of the BE1-79M reclosing
relay with similar functionality. (Figure 4-7 on page 4-15 illustrates the inputs and outputs for the 79 recloser
function)

Four inputs:
 RI (reclose initiate)
 STATUS (breaker position)
 WAIT
 DTL/BLK (drive to lockout/block 79 operation)

Five outputs:
 79C (close)
 79RNG (recloser running)
 79F (reclose fail)
 79LO (lockout)
• 79SCB (sequence controlled block signal )
One mode setting selected from three available settings:
 Disabled, power up to lockout mode, or power up to close

Eight operational settings:

 Four reclose times (1, 2, 3, & 4)
 Reset time
 Reclose fail time
 Max cycle time
• Selected steps in the reclosing sequence that can be used to block tripping elements (same
functions as the toggle switches on the BE1-79M relay).

Of the above characteristics, the operational settings are not included in the logic settings. They are
contained in the protection settings. This is an important distinction. Since, changing logic settings is similar
to rewiring a panel, the logic settings are separate and distinct from the operational settings such as pickups
and time delays.
Function Block Logic Settings

To use a protection or control function block, there are two items that need to be set. The mode and the
input logic. The mode is equivalent to deciding which devices you want to install in your protection and
control scheme. You then must set the logic variables that will be connected to the inputs.

For example, the 51N function block has two modes (disabled and enabled), and one input, block (torque
control). To use this function block, the logic setting command might be SL-51N=1,/IN2 for Set Logic-51N
to be mode 1 (enabled) with the function blocked when contact sensing INput 2 is not (/) energized. Contact
sensing input 2 would be wired to a ground relay enable switch.

As noted before, the protection settings for this function block, pickup, time dial, and curve, must be set
separately in the setting group settings. The setting might be S0-51N=6.5,2.1,S1R for Set in group 0 - the
51N function = to pickup at 6.5 amps with a time dial of 2.1 using curve S1 with an integrating Reset
characteristic.
The 51N function block has two logic output variables, 51NT (Trip) and 51NPU (Picked Up). The
combination of the logic settings and the operational settings for the function block govern how these
variables respond to logic and current inputs.

2-2 Quick Start BE1-851

Output Logic Settings

BESTlogic, as implemented in the BE1-851, supports up to 16 output expressions. The output expressions
are called virtual outputs to distinguish them from the physical output relays. VOA and VO1 through VO5
drive physical outputs Out A (fail safe alarm output), and Out 1 through Out 5 respectively. The rest of the
virtual outputs can be used for intermediate logic expressions.

For example, OUT 1 is wired to the trip bus of the circuit breaker. To set up the logic to trip the breaker,
the BESTlogic setting command might be SL-VO1=VO11+101T+BFPU for Set Logic - Virtual Output 1 =
to Virtual Output 11 (which is the intermediate logic expression for all of the function block tripping
outputs) or (+) 101T (the trip output of the virtual breaker control switch) or (+) BFPU (the pickup output
of the breaker failure function block that indicates that breaker failure has been initiated).

USER INTERFACES
Three user interfaces are provided for interacting with the BE1-851 relay: the front panel HMI, ASCII
communications, and BESTCOMS communications software. The front panel HMI provides access to a
subset of the total functionality of the device. ASCII communications provides access to all settings,
controls, reports, and metering functions of the system. BESTCOMS for BE1-851 software provides a, user
friendly Windows® environment for editing settings files and uploading and downloading them from the
relay.
Front Panel HMI
The front panel HMI consists of a two line by 16 character LCD (liquid crystal display) with four scrolling
pushbuttons, an edit pushbutton, and a reset pushbutton. The edit pushbutton includes an LED to indicate
when edit mode is active. There are five other LEDs for indicating power supply status, relay trouble alarm
status, programmable major and minor alarm status, and a multipurpose trip LED that flashes to indicate that
a protective element is picked up. The trip LED lights continuously when the trip output is energized, and
seals in when a protective trip has occurred to indicate that target information is being displayed on the LCD.
A complete description of the HMI is included in Section 10, Human-Machine Interface (Controls And
Indicators).
The BE1-851 HMI is menu driven and organized into a menu tree structure with six branches. A complete
menu tree description with displays is also provided in Section 10. A list of the menu branches and a brief
description for scrolling through the menu is in the following paragraphs.
1. REPORT STATUS. Display and resetting of general status information such as targets, alarms,
recloser status.
2. CONTROL. Operation of manual controls such as virtual switches, selection of active setting group,
etc.
3. METERING. Display of realtime metering values.
4. REPORTS. Display and resetting of report information such as time and date, demand registers,
breaker duty statistics, etc.
5. PROTECTION. Display and setting of protective function setting parameters such as logic scheme,
pickups, time delays, etc.
6. GENERAL SETTINGS. Display and setting of non-protective function setting parameters such as
communication, LCD contrast, and CT ratios.
Each screen in the menu tree displays the path in the upper left hand corner of the screen. Additionally,
each screen is assigned a number in the HMI section. The number indicates the branch and level in the
menu tree structure. Screen numbering helps you to keep track of where you are when you leave the menu
tree top level. You view each branch of the menu tree by using the right and left scrolling pushbuttons. To
go to a level of greater detail, you use the down scrolling pushbutton. Each time a lower level in a menu
branch is reached, the screen number changes to reflect the lower level. The following paragraphs and
Figure 2-1 illustrate how the display screens are numbered in the menu tree.

BE1-851 Quick Start 2-3

For example, to check or change the 51N pickup setting in setting group 3, you would press the right or left
scrolling pushbuttons to get to Screen 5-PROTECTION LOGIC. You would then press the down scrolling
pushbutton to get to the next level of detail and the right or left scrolling pushbutton to get to Screen 5.4-
SETTING GROUP 3. You would continue to press down and right or left scrolling pushbuttons to get to
Screen 5.4.2-51 SETTINGS and then Screen 5.4.2.2-51N. On this screen, the pickup, time dial and curve
settings for the 51N function can be read and/or edited. To return to the top level from this location, you
would press the up scrolling pushbutton three times.

ASCII Command Communications

The BE1-851 relay has three independent communications ports for serial communications. A computer
terminal or PC running a terminal emulation program such as Windows® HyperTerminal® can be connected
to any of the three ports so that commands can be sent to the relay. Communication with the relay uses a
simple ASCII command language. When a command is entered via a serial port, the relay responds with
the appropriate action. ASCII command communication is designed for both human-to-machine interactions
and batch download type operations. The following paragraphs briefly describe the command structure and
discuss human-to-machine interactions and batch command text file operations. The operation of the ASCII
commands is described in detail in Section 11, ASCII Command Interface.
Command Structure.
An ASCII command consists of a command string made up of one or two letters followed by a hyphen and
an object name. The first letter specifies the general command function and the second a sub-group. The
object name is the specific function for which the command is intended. A command string entered by itself
is a read command. A command string followed by an equal sign and one or more parameters, it is a write
command. The general command groups are organized into five major groups plus several miscellaneous
commands. These commands are as follows:
C CONTROL. Commands to perform select before operate control actions such as tripping and
closing the circuit breaker, changing the active setting group, etc.. Subgroups include S for
Select and O for Operate.
G GLOBAL. Perform global operations that do not fall into the other general groups such as password
security. Subgroups include: S for security settings.
M METERING. Read all real time metering values. This general command group has no subgroups.
R REPORTS. Read and reset reporting functions such as time and date, demand registers, breaker
duty statistics, etc.. Subgroups include: A for Alarm functions, B for Breaker monitoring functions,
D for Demand recording functions, F for Fault summary reporting functions, G for General
information, and S for Sequence of events recorder functions.
S SETTINGS. Set all setting parameters that govern the functioning of the relay. Subgroups include:
0,1,2,3 for settings in setting groups, A for alarm settings, B for breaker monitoring settings, G for
general settings, L for logic settings.
MISCELLANEOUS. Miscellaneous commands include ACCESS, EXIT, and HELP.
Examples of object names would be 51N for the neutral inverse time overcurrent function or PIA for the A
phase, peak current demand register.
For example, to check the 51N pickup setting in setting group 3, you would enter S3-51N for Set, Group
3-51N. The relay would respond with the current pickup, time dial, and curve settings for the 51N function.
To edit these settings the same command would be used with an = followed by the new settings and the
enter pushbutton. Note that its necessary to use the ACCESS and EXIT commands when using the write
version of these commands.
Human-To-Machine ASCII Command Operations.
Using ASCII commands, settings can be read and changed on a function by function basis. The mnemonic
format of the commands helps you interact with the relay. It isn’t necessary to remember all of the object

2-4 Quick Start BE1-851

names. Most commands don’t require that you specify a complete object name. If the first two letters of a
command are entered, the relay will respond with all applicable object names.

Example Obtain a breaker operations count by entering RB (Report Breaker). The BE1-851
responds with the operations counter value along with all other breaker report objects. If
you know that the object name for the breaker operations counter is OPCNTR, you can
enter RB-OPCNTR and read only the number of breaker operations.
Partial object names are also supported. This allows multiple objects to be read or reset at the same time.

Example Read all peak-since-reset demand registers. Entering RD-PI (Report Demand - Peak
Current (I)) will return demand values and time stamps for phase A, B, C, Neutral, and
Negative Sequence current. To read only the Neutral demand value, the full object name
(RD-PIN) is entered. Entering RD-PI=0 resets all five of the peak-since-reset demand
registers.
Batch Command Text File Operations.
With a few exceptions, each function of the relay uses one command to set it and each setting command
operates on all of the parameters required by that function. See the example mentioned above in the
paragraph titled Command Structure. This format results in a great many commands to fully set the relay.
Also, the process of setting the relay does not use a prompting mode where the relay prompts you for each
parameter in turn until you exit the setting process. For these reasons, a method for setting the relay using
batch text files is recommended.
In batch download type operations, the user creates an ASCII text file of commands and sends it to the relay.
To facilitate this process, the response from a multiple read command is output from the BE1-851 in
command format. So the user need only enter S for Set (with no subgroup) and the relay responds with all
of the setting commands and their associated parameters. If the user enters S2 for Set Group 2, the relay
responds with all of the setting commands for setting group 2. The user can capture this response to a file,
edit it using any ASCII text editor, and then send the file back to the relay. See Section 11, ASCII Command
Interface for a more detailed discussion of how to use ASCII text files for setting the relay.
BESTCOMS for BE1-851, Graphical User Interface
Basler Electric's graphical user interface (GUI) software is an alternative method for quickly developing
setting files in a user-friendly, Windows® based environment. Using the GUI, you may prepare setting files
off-line (without being connected to the relay) and then upload the settings to the relay at your convenience.
These settings include protection and control, operating and logic, breaker and transformer monitoring,
metering, and fault recording. Engineering personnel can develop, test, and replicate the settings before
exporting it to a file and transmitting the file to technical personnel in the field. On the field end, the
technician simply imports the file into the BESTCOMS database and uploads the file to the relay where it
is stored in nonvolatile memory.
The GUI also has the same preprogrammed logic schemes that are stored in the relay. This gives the
engineer the option (off-line) of developing his setting file using a preprogrammed logic scheme, customizing
a preprogrammed logic scheme, or building a scheme from scratch. Files may be exported from the GUI to
a text editor where they can be reviewed or modified. The modified text file may then be uploaded to the
relay. After it is uploaded to the relay, it can be brought into the GUI, but it cannot be brought directly into
the GUI from the text file. The GUI logic builder uses basic AND/OR gate logic combined with point and click
variables to build the logic expressions. This reduces the design time and increases dependability.
The GUI also allows for downloading industry standard COMTRADE files for analysis of stored oscillography
data. Detailed analysis of the oscillography files may be accomplished using Basler Electric's BESTWAVE
software. For more information on Basler Electric's Windows® based BESTCOMS (GUI) software or
BESTWAVE, contact your local sales representative or Basler Electric Technical Support Services
Department in Highland, Illinois.

BE1-851 Quick Start 2-5

GETTING STARTED
Figure 12-9 in Section 12, shows typical external control connections. If your relay has power supply option
1 or 2, it can be supplied by normal 120V ac house power. These two power supply options (1 and 2) are
the midrange and high range ac/dc power supplies. The contact sensing inputs are half-wave rectified,
opto-isolators. The default contact recognition and debounce settings enable their use on ac signals as well
as dc signals.
Figure 3-8 shows typical external sensing connections. The relay measures the A phase, B phase, and C
phase current magnitudes directly from the three current sensing inputs on Circuit #1 (this is dependent on
style configuration). Circuit #2 measures the A phase, B phase, and C phase current magnitudes directly
from the three current sensing inputs. The neutral and negative sequence magnitudes are calculated from
the fundamental component of each of the three-phase currents. When evaluating the negative sequence
functions, the relay can be tested using a two-phase current source. To fully evaluate the operation of the
relay in the power system, it is desirable to use a three-phase current source.

Connect a computer to the front RS-232 port (refer to Section 12, Installation, for connection diagrams).
Apply power and set the clock using the RG-TIME= and RG-DATE= commands (refer to Appendix D, Setting
Terminal Communications, and Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, for additional information).

Entering Test Settings

Enter SG (Set General) to get a listing of the general setting commands with default parameters and put
them in a text file as described previously in Batch Command Text File Operations. Then enter S0 (Set
group 0) to get a listing of the group 0 protection setting commands with default parameters and put them
in a text file also. With these two sub-groups of settings, you will not see the global security settings, user
programmable BESTlogic settings, settings for protection setting groups 1, 2, and 3, settings for alarm
functions, and the settings for breaker monitoring functions.
Open the SG file in a text editor, change settings as required, and save the changes. For example:
• The ratios for the phase and neutral current transformers (CT2, CTG).
• The demand interval and CT circuit to monitor for the phase, neutral, and negative sequence
currents (DIP, DIN, DIQ).
• The nominal system frequency (FREQ).
• The normal phase sequence (ABC or ACB) for the system (PHROT).
• Open the S0 file in a text editor, change settings as required, and save the changes. For
example:
• The differential taps setting by putting the 87 function in manual and selecting tap values (87).
• The pickup, time dial, and curve for the 51 functions (51P, 51N, 51Q).
While editing this file, it is necessary to set a logic scheme to be active using the SL-N= (Set Protection
LOGIC) command.
Do not forget to add E;Y (Exit; Save Settings? Yes) to the end of both files. Enter A= to gain setting
access and then send each of these text files to the relay as described above under Batch Command
Text File Operations.
As you gain knowledge of the relay, you can experiment with the rest of the settings. To set up a file with
all user settings, enter S and the relay will respond with all settings in command format. The acceptance
test procedure in Section 13, Testing and Maintenance, provides a basic procedure for creating a file with
all user settings.
Checking The State Of Inputs
You can quickly review the state of the inputs in two different ways: one, through the front panel HMI, and
two, using the ASCII command interface. The front panel HMI displays the input status on screen 1.4.1,
\STAT\OPER\INPUT. A diagram showing all of the menu tree branches is located in Section 10, Human-
Machine Interface. To get to this screen, press the up scrolling pushbutton until you reach the top screen
in the current branch. You know when you have reached the top screen because the screen stops changing
2-6 Quick Start BE1-851
when you press the up scrolling pushbutton. From this position, press the right scrolling pushbutton until
you have reached the screen titled, \STATUS BE1-851 REPORT STATUS. From this position press the
down scrolling pushbutton one time (\STAT\TARGETS) and press the right scrolling pushbutton three times.
At this time, you should see the OPERATIONAL STATUS screen, \STAT\OPER_STAT. If you press the
down scrolling pushbutton from this screen, you should see the INPUTS screen, \STAT\OPER\INPUT.
Another method would be to use the ASCII command interface. One command that you can use to see the
status of the inputs is RG-STAT. This command will only read the status of the inputs and nothing else.
Testing
To determine if the relay is responding correctly to each test, the following commands are useful.
• RG-TARG, (report general targets): reports the targets from the last fault.
• RF, (report faults): reports a directory listing of the twelve fault summary reports. The fault summary
reports are numbered from 1 to 255 and then wrap around and start over. RF-### reports the ###
report.
• RS-##, (report sequence of events record), ## events: reports the most recent ## changes of state in
the protection and control logic.

FAQ/TROUBLE SHOOTING

Frequently Asked Questions

1.) Why won't the trip LED reset when I press the reset key on the front panel?
The Reset key is context sensitive. To reset the trip LED or the targets, the target screen must be
displayed. To reset the alarms, the alarm screen must be displayed.
2.) Is the power supply polarity sensitive?
No, the power supply will accept either an ac or dc voltage input. However, the contact sensing for
the programmable inputs is polarity sensitive. See Installation, Section 12, for a typical
interconnection diagram.
3.) What voltage level is used to develop current flow through the contact sensing inputs?
Voltage level is dependent on the power supply option (BE1-851 style) and the position of the
contact sensing jumper. See Installation, Section 12, for additional information.

8.) Does the BE1-851 trip output contact latch after a fault?
The answer to the question is yes and no. In general, once the fault goes away the output contacts
open. The BE1-851 does offer an option to ensure that the contact will stay closed for at least 200
milliseconds. See Application, Section 3, Input And Output Functions for additional information on
that function. But, BESTlogic can latch the relay outputs. Refer to, Application, Section 8,
Application Tips F1, for additional information.
9.) Why won't a function work when I put in settings such as the pickup and time delays?
Make sure that the protective element is enabled in BESTlogic.
11.) Can I make logic settings from the front panel?
No, the front panel can not program logic settings. Logic settings must be programmed using the
ASCII command interface or BESTCOMS communication software.
13.) Does the BE1-851 have a battery installed as the back-up power source for the internal clock on loss
of power?
No, the BE1-851 does not have a battery. You have to reset the time and date every time you lose
power. You can use the IRIG to automatically reset the time and date.

BE1-851 Quick Start 2-7

15.) Why do I keep getting access conflict errors when I am communicating with the relay?
Access can be granted to only one communication port at a time. The HMI is considered to be the
same port as the front RS-232 communication port. The unit has three different communication
ports. The front HMI and front RS-232 (COM 0) is the first port. The rear RS-232 (COM 1) is the
second and the rear RS-485 (COM 3) is the third port. If you have gained access at the front panel
HMI and the 5-minute time out has not ended, you can not gain access at another port. The front
RS-232 can still be accessed because HMI and the front RS-232 are considered to be the same
port. If you have tried to gain access to more than one port at a time, an access conflict results.
Access only needs to be gained when a change of a setting is needed. To read data or to get any
reports this can be done without gaining access. After gaining access though one of the ports a
session can be ended with an "Exit" command. If access is gained, but the session is not ended,
a 5-minute time out will end the session and any changes that were not saved will be lost. If you
are using the BESTcoms program, the gaining access and the exit commands are done for you.
16) Why doesn't the trip LED behave as expected when the relay picks up and trips? Another closely
related question would be why don't the targets work?
If the logic is setup to the point were the protective element is tripping at the desired current level,
but the targets, Trip LED, and fault records are not behaving as expected, then there are two
commands that need to be checked for proper operation. The SG-TRIGGER command needs to
have the PU trigger and TRIP trigger logic correctly programmed. This should initiate the fault
record. The SG-TARGET command needs that protective element (function) enabled to log targets.
Please refer Section 6 in the Instruction Manual under the section Fault Reporting to get further
details on how to program these commands correctly. The Trip LED has two different functions in
the relay. When the SG-TRIGGER PU expression is true, and the TRIP expression is false, the Trip
LED flashes. When both the SG-TRIGGER TRIP and PU expression are true, the Trip LED lights
solidly. When neither expression is true, the trip LED lights solidly if there are latched targets. A
flashing LED means one of the protection elements is in a pickup state and timing towards trip.
Once the trip occurs, the LED turns on solid. The LED will not change state until the target has
been reset. If the fault has not cleared, the LED turn on again.
Table 2-1. Trip LED Truth Table

SG-TRIGGER PU SG-TRIGGER TRIP Targets Latched Trip LED

TRUE FALSE NO FLASHES

TRUE TRUE NO Lights Solidly

FALSE FALSE YES Lights Solidly

17.) Is the IRIG signal modulated or demodulated?

The IRIG signal is demodulated (dc level-shifted digital signal). See Application, Section 1,
Specifications, for additional information.
18.) Can the IRIG signal be daisy-chained to multiple BE1-851 units?
Yes, multiple BE1-851 units can use the same IRIG-B input signal by daisy-chaining the BE1-851
inputs. The burden data is non-linear, approximately 4 kohms at 3.5 Vdc and 3 kohms at 20 Vdc.
See, Application, Section 8, and, Input and Output Functions, Section 3, Input And Output
Functions, for additional information.
19.) How can I find out what the version number is of my BE1-851?
The application version can be found in three different ways. One, use the HMI, screen 4.6. Two,
ASCII command interface with the RG-VER command. Three, use BE1-851 BESTCOMS (the
version is located on the general identification screen).

2-8 Quick Start BE1-851

SECTION 3 • INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 3 • INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
CURRENT INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Current Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Current Measurement Functions Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
SG-FREQ Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
SG-DSP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
SG-PHROT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
CONTACT SENSING INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Digital Input Conditioning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Setting Up the Digital Input Conditioning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
SG-IN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Retrieving Input Status Information From the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Hardware Outputs and Virtual Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Retrieving Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Relay Trouble Alarm Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Programmable Hold Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
SG-HOLD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Output Logic Override Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Enabling Logic Override Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Pulsing an Output Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Holding an Output Contact Open or Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Returning an Output Contact to Logic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
CS/CO-OUT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Retrieving Output Logic Override Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figures
Figure 3-1. Accuracy Characteristics, 60 Hz Nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figure 3-2. Accuracy Characteristics, 60Hz Nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-3. Output Logic, General Purpose Output Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-4. Output Logic, Fail-Safe Alarm Output Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Tables
Table 3-1. Current Measurement Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Table 3-2. Turn on Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3-3. SG-IN Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Table 3-4. Hold Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions i

SECTION 3 • INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS

GENERAL
BE1-851 inputs consist of three-phase current inputs, neutral current inputs, and four contact sensing inputs.
Five general purpose output contacts and one dedicated, fail-safe alarm output make up the BE1-851
outputs. Each input and output is isolated and terminated at separate terminal blocks. This section
describes the function and setup of each input and output.

CURRENT INPUTS
Secondary current from power system equipment CT is applied to current transformers inside the relay.
These internal transformers step down the monitored current to levels compatible with relay circuitry and
provide isolation. Secondary current from each internal CT is converted to a voltage signal and then filtered
by an analog, low-pass, anti-aliasing filter.

Current Measurement Functions

The power system analog quantities for phase, neutral, and negative sequence currents are calculated and
used by all of the current dependent functions of the relay. The filter response for phase and neutral
calculations can be independently programmed. Operation of the current measurement function is governed
by settings for nominal frequency (SG-FREQ), digital signal processing algorithm (SG-DSP), current
transformer ratio(SG-CT), and normal phase rotation (SG-PHROT).

Nominal Frequency. Input waveforms are sampled by an analog-to-digital converter at 24 samples per
cycle. A nominal frequency of either 50 or 60 Hz must be selected in order for the analog-to-digital converter
to sample analog quantities at appropriate time intervals to achieve 24 samples per cycle.

Digital Signal Processing.

The digital signal
processing (DSP) setting 10
governs how the phase
9
and neutral operating
quantities are measured. 8
The three choices are Fundamental-dashed line
fundamental, RMS, and 7
TrueRMS-dashdot line
average. This is 6
independently settable for Average-solid line
the phase and neutral Error 5
quantities. Each setting
4
causes the relay to
respond differently in the 3
presence of significant
harmonics and for 2
operation at significantly
1
off-nominal frequency.
Accuracy characteristics 0
55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
for each algorithm (funda-
F (55 t 65 H )
mental, RMS, and Figure 3-1. Accuracy Characteristics, 60 Hz Nominal
average) are shown in
Figure 3-1. This figure is for a 60 hertz nominal system with frequencies between 55 and 65 hertz. A 50
hertz nominal system would have similar characteristics.

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-1

The fundamental setting (F) uses a Fourier filter to extract the fundamental frequency component of the
measured current and reject the harmonic frequency components. This setting is best suited for most
protection purposes due to its superior transient overreach and fast dropout characteristics. It is also
recommended for applications where harmonic rejection is desired. For example, in a neutral circuit where
the third harmonic component is additive and can result in unwanted tripping.
The RMS setting uses a true RMS calculation to include harmonic components of the measured current. The
presence of significant levels of harmonics can cause heating in protected equipment and increased
sensitivity in electro-mechanical devices. This setting is recommended for equipment applications that
require thermal overload protection. It is also recommended for applications where the transient overreach
and sensitivity characteristics provide better coordination with induction disk type overcurrent relays.

The average setting uses

a digital measurement
circuit. This circuit 100
consists of a full wave
rectifier with a two pole, 90
low pass filter. A third
80
digital filter tuned to the
Fundamental - dashed line
nominal frequency 70
removes the ripple error TrueRMS - dash dot line
that is inherent in this 60
type of circuit. Due to the Average - solid line
Error 50
lowpass filter, this setting
has slower pickup and 40
dropout characteristics
than the other two 30
settings. This setting is
20
recommended In
applications where 10
protection is desired at
frequencies that deviate 0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
significantly from Frequency (Hz)
nominal. The Figure 3-2. Accuracy Characteristics, 60Hz Nominal
characteristics of the
three algorithms from 20 to 100 hertz is shown in Figure 3-4. This plot is based on a setting of 60 hertz
nominal (20 to 100 hertz). This setting also provides good coordination with induction disk type overcurrent
relays and provides superior transient overreach characteristics.

Neutral and Negative Sequence Current. Neutral and negative sequence components are measured from
the fundamental component of the three-phase current inputs. The relay can be set to accommodate ABC
or ACB phase sequence when calculating the negative sequence component.

Fast-Dropout Current Detector. A separate, fast-dropout current measurement algorithm is used by the
breaker failure function and the breaker trip-speed monitoring function. This measurement algorithm has
a sensitivity of 10 percent of nominal rating and detects current interruption in the circuit breaker much more
quickly than the regular current measurement functions.

3-2 Input and Output Functions BE1-851

Current Measurement Functions Setup

Current Input Circuit Settings. The BE1-851 requires information on the nominal system frequency, DSP
filtering, CT ratio, and phase rotation. These settings are used by the metering and fault reporting functions
to display measured quantities in primary units. These settings can be entered at the HMI, see section 10,
Human-Machine Interface, or through the communication ports using the SG-FREQ, SG-DSP, SG-CT, AND
SG-PHROT setting general commands. Settings relating to current measurement are summarized in Table
3-1.
Table 3-1. Current Measurement Function Settings

Password
Command Access Range Default Unit of Measure

SG-FREQ Privilege 50,60 60 Hertz

G or S

SG-DSP(Element selection, N) Privilege P (Phase) NA NA

G or S N (Neutral)

SG-DSP(Filter type, Filter) Privilege A (Average) F NA

G or S F (Fundamental)
R (Wideband RMS)

SG-CT(Phase Sequence) None ABC, ACB ABC NA

SG-CT(CT Ratio (Phase and None 1 to 50,000 1 Turns

Neutral) (Increment of 1)

SG-PHROT Privilege 1 or 2 1 NA
G or S

SG-FREQ Command
Purpose: Reads or changes the nominal power system frequency information used by the relay.
Syntax: SG-FREQ [= <Hz>]
Comments: Password Access Privilege G or Privilege S required to change settings
hz = 50/60. The default is 60.
Example 1. Change frequency setting
SG-FREQ=60

SG-DSP Command
Purpose: Read/Set the DSP filter used to calculate the magnitude of the analog inputs.
Syntax: SG-DSP[n][=<filter>]
Comments: Password Access Privilege G or Privilege S required to change settings
n = type of filter: P for phase or N for neutral
filter = (A/F/R). Designates type of digital filter used for calibration and subsequent analog
signal filtering (A=Average, F=Fundamental, R=Wideband RMS)
Example 1. Set the phase filter for wideband RMS and the neutral for fundamental response
SG-DSPP=R; SG-DSPN=F
SG-CT Command
Purpose: Read or set phase/neutral CT ratios.
Syntax: SG-CT[t][=<CT ratio>]
Comments: t = P (three-phase current input) or N (neutral input)
CT ratio = current transformer ratio entered as primary/secondary, primary:secondary, or turns.
CT ratio is always reported as turns.

Example 1. Enter a phase CT ratio of 800:5 and a neutral CT ratio of 50:5.

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-3

 >SG-CTP=800:5; SG-CTN=10

SG-PHROT Command
Purpose: Read/set Phase Rotation setting
Syntax: SG-PHROT[=<rotation sequence>]
Comments: Password Access Privilege G or Privilege S required to change settings
Rotation sequence = (1/2) where 1=ABC, 2=ACB
Used by 50Q, 51Q, and negative sequence metering and demand reporting functions to
determine proper phasing.
Default setting = 1 (ABC)
Example 1. Set phase rotation sequence to ACB
SG-PHROT=2

CONTACT SENSING INPUTS

BE1-851 relays have four contact sensing inputs to initiate BE1-851 relay actions. These inputs are isolated
and require an external wetting voltage. The voltage applied to the contact sensing inputs must fall within
the relay power supply input voltage range. To enhance user flexibility, the BE1-851 uses wide range ac/dc
power supplies that cover several common control voltage ratings in the same version of the relay. To
further enhance flexibility, the input circuits are designed to respond to voltages at the lower end of the
control voltage range while not overheating at the high end of the control voltage range.
The contact sensing inputs circuits are polarity sensitive. When an ac wetting voltage is applied, the input
signal is half-wave rectified by the opto-isolator diodes.
The contact sensing inputs drive BESTlogic variables IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4. Each contact sensing input
is completely programmable so meaningful labels can be assigned to each input and the logic-high and
logic-low states. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic provides more information about using contact
sensing inputs in your programmable logic scheme. See Table 3-2 for turn on thresholds.
Table 3-2. Turn on Thresholds

Nominal Control Voltage Turn-On Range

24 Vdc 13 to 19 Vdc

48/125 Vac/Vdc 26 to 38 V

125/250 Vac/Vdc 69 to 100 V

Digital Input Conditioning Function

Status of the contact sensing inputs is checked 24 times per cycle. When operating on a 60 hertz power
system, this results in the input status being sampled every 0.7 milliseconds (0.8 milliseconds on 50 hertz
systems). User settable digital contact recognition and denounce timers condition the signals applied to the
inputs. These parameters can be adjusted to obtain the optimum compromise between speed and security
for a specific application. Digital input conditioning is evaluated every quarter cycle.

If the sampled status of a monitored contact is detected to be closed for the recognition time, the logic
variable changes from an open (logic 0 or FALSE) state to a closed (logic 1 or TRUE) state. Once contact
closure is recognized, the logic variable remains in the closed state until the sampled status of the monitored
contact is detected to be open for a period that is longer than the de-bounce time. At this point, the logic
variable will change from a closed (logic 1 or TRUE) state to an open )logic 0 or FALSE) state.

Setting Up the Digital Input Conditioning Function

3-4 Input and Output Functions BE1-851

The settings for the digital input signal conditioning function are shown in Table 3-3. Digital input
conditioning settings are entered through the communication ports using the SG-IN (setting general-input)
command.
Table 3-3. SG-IN Command Settings
Unit of
Setting Range Increment Measure Default

Recognition 4 to 1* milliseconds 4
Time 255

Debounce Time 4 to 1* milliseconds 16

255
* Since the input conditioning function is evaluated every quarter cycle,
the setting is internally rounded to the nearest multiple of 4.16
milliseconds (60 Hz systems) or 5 milliseconds (50 Hz systems).
SG-IN Command
Purpose: Read or set contact sensing input recognition and debounce.
Syntax: SG-IN[#[=<r(ms)>,<db(ms)>]]
Comments: n = input number 1, 2, 3, or 4. Omitting n will read or set parameters for all inputs.

Example 1. Read the conditioning settings for input 3.

>SG-IN3
>4,16
If you are concerned about ac voltage being coupled into the contact sensing circuits, the recognition time
can be set to greater than one-half of the power system cycle period. This will take advantage of the half-
wave rectification provided by the input circuitry.
If an ac wetting voltage is used, the recognition time can be set to less than one-half of the power system
cycle period and the debounce timer can be set to greater than one-half of the power system cycle period.
The extended debounce time will keep the input energized during the negative half-cycle. The default
settings of 4 and 16 milliseconds are compatible with ac wetting voltages.

Retrieving Input Status Information From the Relay

Input status is determined through HMI screen 1.5.1 or through the communication ports using the RG-STAT
(report general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting
for more information.

OUTPUTS
BE1-851 relays have five general purpose output contacts (OUT1 through OUT5) and one fail-safe, normally
closed (when de-energized), alarm output contact (OUTA). Each output is isolated and rated for tripping
duty. OUT1 through OUT5 are Form A (normally open) and OUTA is Form B (normally closed).

Hardware Outputs and Virtual Outputs

Output contacts OUT1 through OUT5 and OUTA are driven by BESTLOGIC expressions for VO1 through
VO5 (virtual outputs 1 through 5) and VOA (virtual output A). The use of each output contact is completely
programmable so you can assign meaningful labels to each output and to the logic 0 and logic 1 states of
each output. Section 7, BESTLOGIC Programming Logic has more information about programming output
expressions in your programmable logic schemes.
A virtual output (VOn) exists only as a logical state inside the relay. A hardware output is a physical output
relay contact. BESTLOGIC expressions for VO1 through VO5 (virtual outputs 1 through 5) and VOA (virtual
output A) drive output contacts OUT1 through OUT5 and OUTA. The state of the output contacts can vary
from the state of the output logic expressions for three reasons.
BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-5
 • The relay trouble alarm disables all hardware outputs.
• The programmable hold timer is active.
• The select-before-operate function overrides a virtual output.
Figure 3-3 shows a diagram of the output contact logic for the general purpose output contacts. Figure 3-4
illustrates the output contact logic for the fail-safe alarm output contact.

VIRTUAL OUTPUT
CONTROLED BY SL-VO[n]
LOGIC EQUATION
OUTPUT
VO[n] STATUS HARDWARE
AND
OUTPUT
OUTPUT CONTROL
(CO-OUT COMMAND) OR 0 Sec OR
Control Override (0/1) AND AND OUT[n]
0.200 Sec
AND
Override State (0/1)
ONE SHOT TIMER

Hold State (0/1) ALMREL

HOLD ENA D2647-18

08-20-98
(SG-HOLD COMMAND)

Figure 3-3. Output Logic, General Purpose Output Contacts

Retrieving Output Status

Status of output contacts can be assessed at HMI screen 1.5.2 and through the communication ports using
the RG-STAT (report general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General
Status Reporting for more information.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
CONTROLED BY SL-VO[n]
LOGIC EQUATION OUTPUT
STATUS HARDWARE
VO[A]
AND OUTPUT
OUTPUT CONTROL
(CO-OUT COMMAND) OR 0 Sec
Control Override (0/1) AND OR NOT OUT[A]
0.200 Sec
AND
Override State (0/1)
ONE SHOT TIMER

ALMREL
Hold State (0/1)
HOLD ENA D2647-19
08-20-98
(SG-HOLD COMMAND)

Figure 3-4. Output Logic, Fail-Safe Alarm Output Contact

Relay Trouble Alarm Disable

When the BE1-851 self-diagnostics function detects a relay problem, an internal alarm condition is set. This
alarm condition disables the outputs and de-energizes the OUTA relay closing the OUTA contact. For more
details about this function see Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarms Function.

Programmable Hold Timer

Historically, electromechanical relays have provided trip contact seal-in circuits. These seal-in circuits
consisted of a dc coil in series with the relay trip contact and a seal-in contact in parallel with the trip contact.
The seal-in feature serves several purposes for electromechanical relays. One purpose is to provide
mechanical energy to drop the target. A second purpose is to carry the dc tripping current from the induction
disk contact which may not have significant closing torque for a low resistance connection. A third purpose
is to prevent the relay contact from dropping out until the current has been interrupted by the 52a contacts
in series with the trip coil. If the tripping contact opens before the dc current is interrupted, the contact may
be damaged. Of the three items, only item three is an issue for electronic relays like the BE1-851.

3-6 Input and Output Functions BE1-851

To prevent the output relay contacts from opening prematurely, a hold timer can hold the output contact
closed for a minimum of 200 milliseconds. If seal-in logic with feedback from the breaker position logic is
desired, the BESTlogic expression for the tripping output can be modified. This process is described in
Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Application Tips.

The hold timer can be enabled for each input using the SG-HOLD (setting general-hold) command. Hold
timer settings are shown in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4. Hold Timer Settings
Unit of
Setting Range Increment Measure Default
Output Hold 0=disabled N/A N/A OUTA=0
Timer 1=enabled OUT1=1
OUT2=1
OUT3=0
OUT4=0
OUT5=1

SG-HOLD Command
Purpose: Reads or programs output hold settings.
Syntax: SG-HOLD[n][=<1/0 hold ena>]
Comments: n = output number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or A
Example 1. Program all outputs except OUT2 to have a minimum hold time.
>SG-HOLDA=1; SG-HOLD1=1; SG-HOLD2=0; SG-HOLD3=1; SG-HOLD4=1; SG-HOLD5=1
Output Logic Override Control
Each output contact can be controlled directly using the select-before-operate output control function. The
virtual output logic expression that normally controls the state of an output contact can be overridden and
the contact pulsed, held open, or held closed. This function is useful for testing purposes. An alarm point
is available in the programmable alarm function for monitoring when the output logic has been overridden.
See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Functions for more information about programmable
alarms. Write access to control functions is required before using the select-before-operate control functions
through the HMI or ASCII command interface.

Enabling Logic Override Control

By default, logic override control is disabled. Output logic override must be enabled before the control can
be used. Enabling of the output logic override control is not possible at the front panel HMI. It can only be
enabled through a communication port using the CS/CO-OUT=ena/dis (control select/control operate-output
override=enable/disable) command. The CS/CO-OUT command only enables or disables override control
of the output logic; it doesn’t enable or disable the outputs themselves.

Pulsing an Output Contact

Pulsing BE1-851 outputs provides the same function as the push-to-energize feature of other Basler Electric
solid-state relays. This feature is useful when testing the protection and control system. When pulsed, an
output contact changes from the current state (as determined by the virtual output logic expression) to the
opposite state for 200 milliseconds. After 200 milliseconds, the output contact is returned automatically to
logic control.
Pulse override control is accessed at screen 2.4.1 of the HMI by entering a P in the field for the output
contact to be pulsed. Pulse control is accessed through a communication port by using the CS/CO-OUTn=P
(control select/control operate-output contact n=pulse) command.

Holding an Output Contact Open or Closed

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-7

Outputs can be forced to a closed (logic 1 or TRUE) state or to an open (logic 0 or FALSE) state. This
feature can be used to disable a contact during testing. Open or close logic override control is accessed
at screen 2.4.1 of the HMI by entering a 0 for open or 1 for closed in the field for the output contact to be
controlled. Outputs are forced open or closed through a communication port by using the
CS/CO-OUTn=P0/1 (control select/control operate-output contact n-0/1) command.

Returning an Output Contact to Logic Control

When the output logic has been overridden and the contact is held in an open or closed state, it’s necessary
to manually return the output to logic control. Outputs are returned to logic control through screen 2.4.1 of
the HMI. An L is entered in the field of the contact that is to be returned to logic control. Outputs are
returned to logic control through a communication port by using the CS/CO-OUTn=L (control select/control
operate-output contact n=logic control) command.

CS/CO-OUT Command
Purpose: Controls or reads output selection/operation.
Syntax: CS/CO-OUT[n][=<mode>]
Comments: n = output number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or A
mode = 0, 1, P, L, ENA, or DIS
The output control commands require the use of select-before-operate logic. First, the
command must be selected using the CS-OUT command. After the command is selected,
there is a 30 second window during which the CO-OUT control command an be entered. The
control selected and operation selected syntax must match exactly or the command will be
blocked. If the operate command isn’t entered within 30 seconds of the select command, the
operate command will be blocked. An error message is returned when a control command is
blocked.
Output control commands are acted on immediately except when the ENA and DIS modes are
used. ENA and DIS output control command changes aren’t executed until saved with the
EXIT command. Output control status is saved in non-volatile memory and is maintained when
relay operating power is lost.
Example1. Enable the output control feature.
>CS-OUT=ENA
>OUT=ENA SELECTED
>CO-OUT=ENA
>OUT=ENA EXECUTED (NOTE: Not effective until EXIT with SAVE(Y).)
Example2. Test all outputs by pulsing momentarily.
>CS-OUT=P
>OUT=P SELECTED
>CO-OUT=P
>OUT=P EXECUTED
Example3. Disable the trip output (OUT1) by holding it at logic 0.
>CS-OUT1=0
>OUT1=0 SELECTED
>CO-OUT1=0
>OUT1=0 EXECUTED
Example4. Return OUT1 to logic control.
>CS-OUT1=L
>OUT1=L SELECTED
>CO-OUT1=0
>OUT1=L EXECUTED

Retrieving Output Logic Override Status

3-8 Input and Output Functions BE1-851

The status of the output contact logic override control can be viewed at HMI screen 1.5.3. HMI screen 2.4.1
is used for output control but can also display the current status. Output logic status can also be viewed
using the RG-STAT (report general-status) command. An L indicates that the state of the output is controlled
by logic. A 0 or 1 indicates that the logic has been overridden and the contact is held open (0) or closed (1)
state. A P indicates that the contact is being pulsed and will return to logic control automatically. See
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting for more information.

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-9

SECTION 4 • PROTECTION AND CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4 • PROTECTION AND CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using Protection and Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SETTING GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Setting BESTlogic Settings, Setting Group Control Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
SL-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
SG-SGCON Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
SP-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Logic Override, Setting Group Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
CS/CO-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Retrieving Setting Group Status Information From the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
50T Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection with Settable Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
BESTlogic Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
SL-x50T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Operating Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
S<g>-50T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Retrieving Logic Output Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
51 Time Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
BESTlogic Settings for Time Overcurrent Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
SL-x51 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Operating Setting’s for Time Overcurrent Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
S<g>-x51 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Setting Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
SP-CURVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Retrieving Logic Output Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Negative Sequence Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Negative Sequence Coordination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Delta/Wye Transformer Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
BF BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Setting BESTlogic, BF Breaker Failure Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
SL-BF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Setting Operational Settings, BF (Breaker Failure) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
SP-BF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
RECLOSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Reclose Initiate (RI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Breaker Status (STAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Reclose Wait (WAIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Drive to Lockout/Block Recloser (DTL/BLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Close (79C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Recloser Running (79RNG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Lockout (79LO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Reclose Failure (79F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Recloser Sequence Control Block (79SCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Recloser BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
SL-79 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Recloser Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
S<g>-79 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Sequence Controlled Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
S<g>-79SCB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

BE1-851 Protection and Control i

 Zone Sequence Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
SP-79ZONE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
GENERAL PURPOSE LOGIC TIMERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Mode 1, Pickup/Dropout Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Mode 2, One-Shot Nonretriggerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Mode 3, One-Shot Retriggerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Mode 4, Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Mode 5, Integrating Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Mode 6, Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
BESTlogic Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
SL-x62 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Operating Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
S<g>-62/162 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Retrieving 62/162 Output Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
VIRTUAL SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
43 Virtual Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
BESTlogic Settings for x43 Virtual Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
SL-x43 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
CS/CO-x43 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
BESTlogic Settings for 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
SL-101 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Breaker Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
CS/CO-101Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Figures
Figure 4-1. Setting Group Control Function Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Figure 4-2. Input Control Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-3. Input Control Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-4. Automatic Operation Based on Load Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-5. Automatic Based on Cold Load Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-6. 50TP Function Block Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Figure 4-7. 51 Time Overcurrent Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Figure 4-8. Phase-to-Phase Fault Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Figure 4-9. Sequence Components For An A-B Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-10. BF Breaker Failure Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Figure 4-11. 79 Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Figure 4-12. Recognition Dropout and Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4-13. S#-79SCB=1/2/3/4/5 Logic Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Figure 4-14. S#-79SCB=2/3/4/5 Logic Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Figure 4-15. 62/162 Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Figure 4-16. Mode 1, Pickup/Dropout Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-17. Mode 2, One-Shot Nonretriggerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-18. Mode 3, One-Shot Retriggerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-19. Mode 4, Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-20. Mode 5, Integrating Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Figure 4-21. Mode 6, One-shot Nonretriggerable latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Figure 4-22. 43 Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Figure 4-23. 101 Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Figure 4-24. 101 Control Switch State Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

ii Protection and Control BE1-851

Tables
Table 4-1. Setting Group Control Function BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Table 4-2. Setting Group Binary Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Table 4-3. Setting Group Control Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Table 4-4. SL-x50T Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Table 4-5. Instantaneous Overcurrent Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-6. Time Overcurrent Function BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Table 4-7. Time Overcurrent Function Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Table 4-8. Definitions for Equations 4-6 and 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Table 4-9. Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Table 4-10. BF Breaker Failure Function BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Table 4-11. BF Breaker Failure Function Operational Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Table 4-12. Recloser BESTLogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Table 4-13. Zone Sequence Coordination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Table 4-14. 62/162 BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Table 4-15. 62/162 Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Table 4-16. x43 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Table 4-17. 101 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Equations
Equation 4-1. Time OC Characteristics for Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Equation 4-2. Time OC Characteristics for Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

BE1-851 Protection and Control iii

SECTION 4 • PROTECTION AND CONTROL

INTRODUCTION
BE1-851 relays provide many functions that can be used to protect and control power system equipment
in and around a protected zone.
BE1-851 type H protection functions include:
 Instantaneous Overcurrent with Settable Time Delay (50TP, 50TN, 50TQ, 150TP, 150TN, 150TQ)
 Time-Overcurrent (51P, 51N, 51Q)
 Breaker Failure (BF)
 General Purpose Logic Timers (62, 162)
BE1-851 type G protection functions include:
 Instantaneous Overcurrent with Settable Time Delay (50TP, 150TP, 50TN, 150TN, 250TN, 350TN)
 Time-Overcurrent (51P, 51N, 151N)
 Breaker Failure (BF)
 General Purpose Logic Timers (62, 162)
BE1-851 control functions include:
 Virtual Selector Switches (43, 143, 243, 343)
 Virtual Breaker Control Switches (101)
Four settings groups allow coordination to be adapted for changes in operating conditions. Setting groups
can be selected using automatic or programmable logic criteria.

Using Protection and Control Functions

Three steps must be taken before using a protection or control function block.
 The function block must be enabled in the active logic scheme by the SL-<function> command.
 Function inputs and outputs must be connected properly in a logic scheme.
 Function characteristics or settings must be programmed and based on the specific application
requirements.
If a preprogrammed logic scheme is used in a typical application, items 1 and 2 may be skipped. Most
preprogrammed schemes are general in nature. Unneeded capabilities can be disabled by a setting of zero.
For example, if the second negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent function is enabled but not
needed, disable it by setting the 150TQ pickup setting at zero (S#-150TQ=0).
More information about the individual function blocks of item 1 is provided in this section. Information
pertaining to items 2 and 3 is available in Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic and Section 8,
Application.

SETTING GROUPS
BE1-851 relays provide a normal setting group, SG0, and up to
three auxiliary setting groups SG1, SG2, and SG3. Auxiliary
setting groups allow adapting the coordination settings to Mode =
optimize them for a predictable situation. Sensitivity and time 0-disable SG0
coordination settings can be adjusted to optimize sensitivity or 1-discrete select
SETTING
2-binary select SG1
clearing time based upon source conditions or to improve GROUP
security during overload conditions. The possibilities for D0 LOGIC
SG2
improving protection by eliminating compromises in coordination D1 SL-GROUP
settings with adaptive setting groups is endless. Figure 4-1 D2 SG3
outlines the setting group control function block. D3
AUTO D2840-21.vsd
05-28-99
The group of settings that are active at any point in time is
controlled by the setting group control function block. This Figure 4-1. Setting Group Control
function block allows for manual (logic) or automatic control. Function Block.
BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-1
When manual control is enabled by the AUTO logic input not being asserted, the function block monitors
logic inputs D0, D1, D2, and D3 and changes the active setting group according to the status of these inputs.
These inputs can be connected to logic expressions such as contact sensing inputs. When automatic
control is enabled by the AUTO logic input being asserted, the relay monitors loading or unbalance
conditions and changes the active setting group according to the switch to and return criteria set. The
change criteria for manual and automatic control is described in more detail later in this section.
The function block has four logic variable outputs, SG0, SG1, SG2, and SG3. The appropriate variable is
asserted when each setting group is active. These logic variables can be used in programmable logic to
modify the logic based upon which setting group is active. For example, it may be desired for the 51P to trip
the low side breaker through OUT2 under normal conditions, but to trip the 86T lockout relay through OUT1
when in setting group 3. The logic for OUT1 would include the term 51PT*SG3 so that 51PT only actuates
OUT1 when SG3 is asserted.
The setting group control function block also has an alarm output variable SGC (Setting Group Changed).
This output is asserted whenever the relay switches from one setting group to another. The SGC alarm bit
is asserted for the SGCON time setting. This output can be used in the programmable alarms function if it
is desired to monitor when the relay changes to a new setting group. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarms
Functions, Alarms Function for more information on using alarm outputs.
The SGCON time setting also serves to provide anti-pump protection to prevent excessive changing
between groups. Once a change in active group has been made, another change cannot take place for two
times the SGCON setting.
When the relay switches to a new setting group, all functions are reset and initialized with the new operating
parameters. The settings change occurs instantaneously so at no time is the relay off line. The active
setting group is saved in non-volatile memory so that the relay will power up using the same setting group
as it was using when it was powered down. To prevent the relay from changing settings while a fault
condition is in process, setting group changes are blocked when the relay is in a picked-up state. Since the
relay is completely programmable, the fault condition is defined by the pickup logic expression in the fault
reporting functions. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting for more information.
The selection of the active setting group provided by this function block can also be overridden. When
the logic override is used, a setting group is made active and the relay stays in that group regardless of
the state of the automatic or manual logic control conditions.

Setting BESTlogic Settings, Setting Group Control Function Block

The logic settings for the setting group control function are provided in Table 4-1. These settings will
determine how the function selects the active setting group when manual (logic) selection is enabled.
Table 4-1. Setting Group Control Function BESTlogic Settings
Function Range/Purpose Default

Logic Mode 0=Disabled, 1=Discrete Input Selection, 0

2=Binary Coded Selection

Discrete Input 0 (D0) Logic Input Logic expression. Meaning dependent 0

upon Mode setting

Discrete Input 1 (D0) Logic Input Logic expression. Meaning dependent 0

upon Mode setting

Discrete Input 2 (D0) Logic Input Logic expression. Meaning dependent 0

upon Mode setting

Discrete Input 3 (D0) Logic Input Logic expression. Meaning dependent 0

upon Mode setting

Auto/Manual (AUTO) Logic Input Logic expression. When true enables 0

automatic control and when false enables
logic control

4-2 Protection and Control BE1-851

Manual (logic) control reads the status of the logic inputs to the setting group control function block to
determine what setting group should be active. For the logic inputs to determine which setting group should
be active, the AUTO input must be a logic 0. The function block logic mode setting determines how it reads
these logic inputs. There are three possible logic modes as shown in Table 4-1.
When the setting group control function block is enabled for Mode 1, there is a direct correspondence
between each discrete logic input and the setting group that will be selected. That is, when input D0 is
asserted SG0 will be selected, and when input D1 is asserted SG1 will be selected, etc. The active setting
group latches in after the input is read so they can be pulsed. It is not necessary that the input be
maintained. If one or more input is asserted at the same time, the numerically higher setting group will be
the one that is active. A pulse must be present for approximately one second for the setting group change
to occur. After a setting group change occurs, no setting group change can occur within two times the SGC
alarm-on time. Any pulses to the inputs will be ignored during that period.
Figure 4-2 shows an example of how the inputs are read when the setting group control function block is
enabled for Mode 1. Note that a pulse on the D3 input while D0 was also active does not cause a setting
group change to SG3 because the AUTO input is active.

D3
D2647-20
08-21-98
D2

D1

D0

AUTO

SG3

SG2

SG1

SG0

SGC

Figure 4-2. Input Control Mode 1

When the setting group control function block is enabled for Mode 2, the inputs on D0 and D1 are read as
binary encoded as shown in Table 4-2. Inputs D2 and D3 are ignored. A new coded input must be stable
for approximately 1 second for the setting group change to occur. After a setting group change occurs, no
setting group change can occur within two times the SGC alarm on time.

Table 4-2. Setting Group Binary Codes

Binary Code

D1 D0 Decimal Equivalent Setting Group

0 0 0 SG0

0 1 1 SG1

1 0 2 SG2

1 1 3 SG3

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-3

Input control mode 2 is when the active setting group is controlled by a binary signal applied to the discrete
inputs D0-D1. This requires separate logic equations for only D0 and D1 if all setting groups are to be used.
Figure 4-3 shows how the active setting group follows the binary sum of the D0 and D1 inputs except when
blocked by the AUTO input. Note that a pulse on the D1 input while D0 was also active does not cause a
setting group change to SG3 because the AUTO input is active.

D3
D2647-21
08-21-98
D2

D1

D0

AUTO

SG3

SG2

SG1

SG0

SGC

Figure 4-3. Input Control Mode 2

Figure 4-3 shows an example of how the inputs are read when the setting group control function block is
enabled for Mode 2. Note that a pulse on the D1 input while D0 was also active does not cause a setting
group change to SG3 because the AUTO input is active.
The BESTlogic settings can be made from the ASCII command interface using the SL-GROUP (settings
logic-group control) command.
SL-GROUP Command
Purpose: Used to program a logical mode of operation for the setting group control block.
Syntax: SL-GROUP[=<mode>,<D0 Logic>,<D1 Logic>,<D2 Logic>,<D3 Logic>,<AUTO Logic>]
Comments:
Example Set the setting group control such that automatic selection is overridden and emergency
overload settings (SG3) are in place when Transformer 2 is out of service. Contact sensing
input 2 is true when either the high side or low side breakers for Transformer 2 are open.
>SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,IN2,/IN2
>
or
>SL-GROUP=2,IN2,IN2,0,0,/IN2
>
Setting Operational Settings, Setting Group Control Function
The operating parameter settings for the setting group control function are provided in Table 4-3. The group
1, 2, and 3 switch to and return settings will determine how the function selects the active setting group when
automatic selection is enabled.

4-4 Protection and Control BE1-851

 Table 4-3. Setting Group Control Function Settings
Setting Range Increment Unit of Measure Default

SGC (Setting Group 0=disabled 1 Seconds 5

Change) Alarm On Time 1-10

Group 1 switch to time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 1 switch to threshold 0-150 1 % of SG0 51* Pickup 0

Group 1 return time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 1 return Threshold 0-150 1 % of SG0 51* Pickup 0

Group 1 monitored element See Note NA NA 51P

Group 2 switch to time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 2 switch to threshold 0-150 1 % of SG0 51* Pickup 0

Group 2 return time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 2 return Threshold 0-150 1 % 0

Group 2 monitored element See Note NA NA 51P

Group 3 switch to time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 3 switch to threshold 0-150 1 % 0

Group 3 return time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 3 return Threshold 0-150 1 % 0

Group 3 monitored element See Note NA NA 51P

Note: Sensing input type H is any 51 element: 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794.
Sensing input type G is any 51 element: 51P, 51N, 151N, 791, 792, 793, 794.
The SGC ACTIVE alarm output is typically used to provide an external acknowledgment that a setting group
change occurred. If SCADA was used to change the active group, then this signal could be monitored to
verify that the operation occurred. The SGC ACTIVE alarm output ON time is user programmable and
should be set greater than the SCADA scan rate. This can be set from the optional HMI using screen 6.7,
SETUP\AUX_STGS and from the ASCII command interface using the SG-SGCON (settings general-SGC
Alarm on time) command.
SG-SGCON Command
Purpose: Read/Program the SGC alarm output on time.
Syntax: SG-SGCON[=<time>]
Comments:
Example Set the SGC alarm output to pulse ON/TRUE for 1 sec. after a the setting group is changed.
>SG-SGCON=1
Automatic control of the active setting group allows the relay to automatically change configuration for
optimum protection based on the current system conditions. For example, in locations where seasonal
variations can cause large variations in loading, the overcurrent protection can be set with sensitive settings
during the majority of the time and switch to a setting group with lower sensitivity (higher pickups) during the
few days of the year when the loading is at peak.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-5

There are five settings for each group that are used for automatic control. Each group has a switch to
threshold and time delay, a return threshold and time delay, and a monitored element. The switch to and
return thresholds are a percentage of the SG0 pickup setting for the monitored element. The monitored
element can be any of the 51 protective functions. Thus, if you wish to switch settings based upon loading,
you could set it to monitor 51P. If you wish to switch settings based upon unbalance, you could set it to
monitor 51N or 51Q. When the monitored element is 51P, any one phase must be above the switch to
threshold for the switch to time delay for the criteria to be met. All phases must be below the return threshold
for the return time delay for the return criteria to be met.
Figure 4-4 shows an example of using the automatic setting group selection settings to change settings
groups based upon loading. Note that the AUTO input must be at a TRUE logic state in order to allow the
automatic logic to operate. At time = 0, current begins to increase. When current reaches 75 percent of
pickup, setting group two begins timing (30 minutes). When current reaches 90 percent of pickup, setting
group three begins timing (5 minutes). After 5 minutes, at time = 37, with the current still above setting group
three threshold, setting group three becomes active and the setting group change output pulses. At time
= 55, setting group two timer times out but no setting group change occurs because a higher setting group
takes precedence. The faint dashed line for SG2, between time = 55 and 75 shows that setting group two
would be active except for setting group three. Current decreases to 75 percent at time = 70, and setting
group three return timer begins timing. Current varies but stays below 75 percent for 5 minutes and at time
= 75, setting group two becomes active and the setting change output pulses. After 20 minutes, setting
group zero becomes active and the setting change output pulses.
This function can also be used to automatically change the active setting group for cold load pickup
conditions. If the switch to threshold for a group is set to 0%, the function will switch to that group when
there is no current flow for the time delay period indicating that the breaker is open or the circuit source is
out of service. The threshold for this is 10% nominal rating of the relay current input.

Load Current
as % of S0-51 <pickup>
150

140
SP-GROUP2=30,75,20,70,51P
130
SP-GROUP3=5,90,5,75,51P
120

110

100

90

80

70

60 30
5 5
50
20
40

30

20

10
TIME
(MINUTES)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

SG3

SG2

SG1

SG0
D2837-23.vsd
01-07-99
SGC

Figure 4-4. Automatic Operation Based on Load Change

4-6 Protection and Control BE1-851

Figure 4-5 shows how the active setting group follows the load current and time delay settings for setting
group 1. Note that the AUTO input must be at a TRUE (1) logic state in order to allow the automatic logic
to operate. When the breaker opens, the load current falls to zero at time = 15 minutes. After 10 minutes,
setting group one becomes active and the setting group change output pulses TRUE. When the breaker
is closed at time = 40 minutes, load current increases to approximately 90 percent of pickup. As the load
current decreases to 50 percent of pickup, the setting group one return timer begins timing. After ten
minutes, setting group one output goes FALSE, the setting group returns to setting group zero, and the
setting group change output pulses TRUE.
When the switch to criteria is met for more than one setting group at a time, the function will use the
numerically higher of the enabled settings groups. If the switch to time delay setting is set to 0 for a setting
group, automatic control for that group is disabled. If the return time delay setting is set to 0 for a setting
group, automatic return for that group is disabled and the relay will remain in that settings group until
returned manually of by logic override control.

Load Current
as % of S0-51 <pickup>
150

140

130
SP-GROUP1=10, 0, 10, 50, 51P
120
SP-GROUP2=0,0,0,0,0
110
SP-GROUP3=0,0,0,0,0
100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10 10 10
0 TIME
(0.5A) (MINUTES)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

SG3

SG2

SG1

SG0
D2840-22.vsd
01-28-99
SGC

Figure 4-5. Automatic Based on Cold Load Pickup

The automatic setting group control parameters can be set from the optional HMI using screen 6.7.1, 6.7.2,
6.7.3, SETUP\AUX\SG# and from the ASCII command interface using the SP-GROUP (settings
protection-group control) command.
SP-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/change automatic control settings for setting group
Syntax: SP-GROUP[n][=<switch time>,<switch level>,<return time>,<return level>,<prot element>]
Comments:
Example Read the setting group automatic operation settings.
>SP-GROUP
SP-GROUP1=30,0,15,75,51P; SP-GROUP2=15,75,5,70,151N
SP-GROUP3=5,70,5,50,51N

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-7

 SG1 is set to switch to cold load pickup settings when the loading in the CT circuit monitored by the 51P
protective function is 0 for 30 minutes. It will return after the current drops to 75% of SG0, 51P setting
for 15 minutes
SG2 is set to switch to overload settings when loading in the CT circuit monitored by the 151P protective
function is above 75% of the SG0, 151P pickup setting for 15 minutes. It will return after the current
drops below 70% for 5 minutes.
SG3 is set to switch to unbalance settings when the ground unbalance in the CT circuit monitored by
the 51N protective element is above 70% of the SG0 51N pickup setting for 5 minutes. It will return after
the ground unbalance current drops below 50% for 5 minutes.

Logic Override, Setting Group Control Function

Control of the active setting group from the setting group control function can be overridden. This can be
accomplished from the optional HMI from screen 2.3, \CTRL\SG or from the ASCII command interface using
the select before operate CS/CO-GROUP (control select-setting group/control operate-setting group)
command. A setting group change using logic override control is also blocked for two times the SGC on
setting after a setting group change and when the fault reporting pickup expression is true. The setting
group change takes place immediately without having to execute an exit-save settings command.
A group override alarm bit is set in the programmable alarm function when the logic has been overridden.
This output can be used in the programmable alarms function if it is desired to monitor when the function
has been overridden. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Functions, Alarms Function for more information
on using alarm outputs.
CS/CO-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/change active setting group
Syntax: CS/CO-GROUP[=<n>/L]
Comments: <n> = new setting group number 0-3
L = returns group control to the setting group control function.
The group control commands require the use of Select Before Operate logic. First the command must be
selected using the CS-GROUP command. After the command is selected there is a 30 second window
during which the CO-GROUP control command can be entered. The control selected and operation
selected must exactly match or the command is blocked. If the command is not entered within the 30
second window, the command is blocked. If the control command is blocked, an error message is output.

Example 1. Read the current status of setting group override which is overridden and held in SG0.
>CO-GROUP
0
>
Example 2. Override logic control and change the active setting group to SG3.
>CS-GROUP=3
GROUP=3 SELECTED
>CO-GROUP=3
GROUP=3 EXECUTED
>
Example 3. Return control of the active setting group to the setting group control function.
>CS-GROUP=L
GROUP=L SELECTED
>CO-GROUP=L
GROUP=L EXECUTED
>
Example 4. Group override error due to time out of select.
>CS-GROUP=3
GROUP=3 SELECTED
>CO-GROUP=3
ERROR:NO SELECT
?

4-8 Protection and Control BE1-851

Retrieving Setting Group Status Information From the Relay
The active setting group can be determined from the optional HMI from screen 1.4.4,
\STAT\OPER\ACTIVEG. The setting group can be determined from the ASCII command interface using the
RG-STAT or RG-GRPACTIVE commands. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status
Reporting for more information.
The status of logic override can be determined from the optional HMI from screen 2.3, \CTRL\SG. The
status of logic override can be determined from the ASCII command interface using the RG-STAT or
RG-GRPCNTRL commands. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting for
more information.

OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
BE1-851 overcurrent protection includes instantaneous elements for Phase, Neutral, and Negative
Sequence, as well as time-overcurrent elements for Phase, Neutral, and Negative Sequence.

50T Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection with Settable Time Delay

There are two independent BESTlogic function blocks for phase (50TP, 150TP), two for neutral (50TN,
150TN), and two for negative sequence (50TQ, 150TQ) instantaneous overcurrent protection. Sensing
input type G relays have four neutral elements and two phase elements. Sensing input type H units have
two neutral, two phase, and two negative sequence elements. Each function block can be connected to any
of the CT input circuits by the BESTlogic mode setting. The instantaneous overcurrent functions are labeled
50T and 150T because each function has an adjustable time delay. If a function block has a time delay
setting of zero, then that function block will operate as an instantaneous overcurrent relay.
A 50TP instantaneous overcurrent function
block has two logic outputs, pickup and trip.
Each function block has a Block (BLK) input that
can be used to disable the function. A
BESTlogic expression is used to define the BLK
input. When this expression is TRUE, the
function block is disabled by forcing the outputs
to logic zero and resetting the timers to zero.
This feature functions in a similar way to the
torque control contact of an electromechanical
relay. Figure 4-6. 50TP Function Block Example
Figure 4-5 illustrates a 50TP function block.Note that the logic outputs break down a follows.
50T<Element>, <Function>. Where element can be phase (P), neutral (N), or negative sequence (Q) and
function can be trip (T) or pickup (P).
A Logic Mode input allows each instantaneous overcurrent function block to be enabled or disabled. The
neutral function blocks (50TN, 150TN, 250TN, 350TN) have additional mode selections. Function block
operation can be based on calculated three-phase current values or on measured current through the
neutral CT input. More information about logic mode selections is provided in the following Bestlogic Settings
for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks subsection.
Each instantaneous overcurrent function has a pickup and time delay setting. When the measured current
increases above the pickup threshold, the pickup output (x50TpPU) becomes TRUE and the timer starts.
If the current stays above pickup for the duration of the time delay setting, the trip output (x50TpT) becomes
TRUE. If the current decreases below the dropout ratio, which is 95 percent, the timer is reset to zero.
The phase overcurrent protective functions include three independent comparators and timers, one for each
phase. If the current increases above the pickup setting for any one phase, the pickup output asserts. If the
trip condition is TRUE for any one phase, the trip logic output asserts.
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target for the
appropriate phase when the protective function trip output is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic
expression is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting for more information

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-9

about target reporting.

BESTlogic Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks

Logic settings for the 50T and 150T functions are made using the SL-x50T (settings logic-50T and 150T)
command. The settings of this command enable the x50T functions by connecting them to the CT input
circuits and provide blocking control as determined by the logic expression assigned to the BLK input. The
SL-x50T command is also used to define the way the x50TN function blocks obtain neutral current values.
SL-x50T command settings are summarized in Table 4-4.

Table 4-4. SL-x50T Command Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default
0 = Disabled
mode 0
1 = Enabled (x50TP, x50TN, and x50TQ)
Logic expression that disables function
BLK logic 0
when TRUE.
SL-x50T Command
Purpose: Read or set logic for instantaneous overcurrent function blocks.
Syntax: SL-x50T[p[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]]
Comments: x = 1 for 150 or no entry for 50
p = element type P (Phase), N (Neutral), or Q (Negative Sequence)

SL-x50T Command Examples

EXAMPLE1. Read the 50T phase element settings.
>SL-50TP
>1,0
These settings indicate that the 50T phase element is enabled and has no blocking.
EXAMPLE2. Change the 50TN logic so that a CT is selected. Block the 50TN function when input 1 is closed
(TRUE).
>SL-50TN=1,IN1

NOTE
If the relay has 5 ampere phase inputs and a 1 ampere independent neutral input, the
valid pickup setting range of the neutral overcurrent functions will depend on the logic
mode setting which designates whether the three-phase residual or the independent
neutral input is to be monitored. If changing logic schemes or settings causes a neutral
overcurrent setting to be OUT OF RANGE, the out of range setting will be forced in-
range by multiplying or dividing the current setting by 5.

Operating Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks

Operating settings for the 50T and 150T functions consist of pickup and time delay values. The pickup value
determines the level of current required for the function block to start timing toward a trip. Time delays can
be set in milliseconds, seconds, or cycles. The default is milliseconds if no unit of measure is specified.
Minimum timing resolution is to the nearest one-quarter cycle. A time delay setting of zero makes the
element instantaneous with no intentional time delay. Operating settings are made through the ASCII
command interface using the S<g>-x50T command. Settings can also be changed or viewed at the front
panel HMI using screens 5.x.3.1 through 5.x.3.6, where x equals 1 for setting group 0, 2 for setting group
1, 3 for setting group 2, and 4 for setting group 3. Instantaneous overcurrent operating settings are
summarized in Table 4-5.

4-10 Protection and Control BE1-851

 Table 4-5. Instantaneous Overcurrent Operating Settings
Range
Unit of
Setting 1A 5A Increment Measure Default
pu 0 = disabled 0 = disabled 0.01 for 0.01 to 9.99 Secondary
(pickup) 0.1 to 30 0.5 to 150 0.1 for 10.0 to 99.9 Amps 0
1.0 for 100 to 150

0 to 999 milliseconds 1 milliseconds

0.1 for 0.1 to 9.9 seconds

td 0.1 to 60 seconds
1.0 for 10 to 60 seconds 0
(time delay)
0 to 3600 cycles (60 Hz)
7 cycles
0 to 2500 cycles (50 Hz)

7 Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the HMI. All
time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time
delays entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds. Increment precision after
conversion is limited to that appropriate for each of those units of measure.
S<g>-50T Command
Purpose: Read or set protection settings for instantaneous overcurrent functions.
Syntax: S<g>-<f>50T[<p>][=<pu(A)>[,<td(m)>]]
Comments: g = setting group 0, 1, 2, or 3. Use # as a wildcard to read or change all groups.
f = 1 for 150 or no entry for 50

S<g>-50T Command Examples

EXAMPLE1. Set the group 0 50T phase setting at 25 amperes and 0 delay time.
>S0-50TP=25,0
EXAMPLE2. Set the 150TQ pickup for all setting groups at 2 amperes and set the time delay at 10
seconds.
>S#-150TQ=2,10s
If time delay settings are made in cycles, they are converted to seconds or milliseconds (per the nominal
frequency setting stored in EEPROM) before being stored. See Section 3, Input and Output Functions,
Current Measurement Functions for more information about this setting. If the nominal frequency setting is
being changed from the default (60 hertz) and time delay settings are being set in cycles, the frequency
setting should be entered and saved before making any time delay settings changes.
For setting up the negative sequence overcurrent protection, see Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
later in this section.

Retrieving Logic Output Status Information from the Relay

The status of each logic variable can be determined through the ASCII command interface using the
RG-STAT (report general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status
Reporting for more information.

51 Time Overcurrent Functions

Sensing Input type G relays have one function block for phase (51P), one for neutral (51N), and one for
negative sequence (51Q) inverse time overcurrent protection. Sensing Input type H relays have one function
block for phase (51P) and two for neutral (51N, 151N).

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-11

Figure 4-7 shows the 51P (phase time overcurrent) as a
typical 51 function. Each of the four independent function D 2849 -15
blocks has two logic outputs 51pPU (picked up) and #51pT M o de = 06-17-9 9
(trip) where n indicates whether it is a P (phase), N (neutral), 0-disab le PHASE
or Q (negative sequence) and the # differentiates between the 1-ena ble TO C
two protective functions (50 and 150). (5 1P ) 5 1P T
A Block logic input is provided to each function block that can B LK 5 1P P U
be used to disable the function. When this expression is true,
the function is disabled by forcing the outputs to logic zero and
resetting the timers to zero. For example, this could be used Figure 4-7. 51 Time
similar to a torque control contact on an electromechanical Overcurrent Function Block
relay.
Each inverse time overcurrent function has a pickup, a timedial, and a curve setting. See Appendix A,
Time Current Characteristics for details on each of the curves available. To make the protective element
use integrated reset and emulate an electromechanical induction disk reset characteristic, the user can
append an R to the selected time current characteristic curve. A programmable curve is available that can
be used to create a custom curve by selecting coefficients in the inverse time characteristic equation.
When the measured current is above the pickup threshold, the pickup logic output, 51PPU (for example)
= TRUE and inverse timing is started per the selected characteristic. If the current stays above pickup until
the function times out, the trip logic output, 51PT (for example) = TRUE. If the current falls below the dropout
ratio, which is 95%, the function will either reset instantaneously or begin timing to reset depending on the
user's setting.
The phase overcurrent protective functions include three independent comparators and timers, one for each
phase. If the current increases above the pickup setting for any one phase, the pickup output asserts. If the
trip condition is TRUE for any one phase, the trip logic output asserts.
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target for all phases
that are above pickup when the protective function trip output is true and the fault recording function trip logic
expression is true. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions for more
details on the target reporting function.

BESTlogic Settings for Time Overcurrent Function Blocks

The logic settings for the 51 inverse time overcurrent functions are provided in Table 4-6. These settings
will enable the function block by attaching it to one of the CT input circuits and provide blocking control as
determined by the logic expression assigned to the block input.

Table 4-6. Time Overcurrent Function BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default

Logic
Mode 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled 1
(mode)

Block Logic expression that disables function 0

Logic when TRUE.
(BLK logic)

BESTlogic settings for the time overcurrent functions can be made using the SL-x51 command.

SL-x51 Command
Purpose: Read or set logic for time overcurrent functions.
Syntax: SL-x51[<p>][=<mode>,<BLK logic>]
Comments: p = element type P/N/Q. No entry for p reads or changes all x51 logic settings. X=1 for 151
elements and is left blank for 51 elements.
4-12 Protection and Control BE1-851
SL-x51 Command Examples
EXAMPLE1. Read the logic for the 51P functions.
>SL-51P
>1,0
These settings indicate that the 51P function is enabled and has no blocking.
EXAMPLE2. Change the 51N logic to be blocked when input 1 is closed (TRUE).
>SL-51N=,IN1

Operating Setting’s for Time Overcurrent Function Blocks

The operating parameter settings for the 51 overcurrent functions are provided in Table 4-7.
See Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection later in this section for information about setting the negative
sequence overcurrent protection.

Table 4-7. Time Overcurrent Function Operating Settings

Range
Unit of
Setting 1A 5A Increment Measure Default
Pickup (pu) 0 = disabled 0 = disabled 0.01 for 0.01 to 9.99 Secondary
0
0.1 to 3.2 0.5 to 16 0.1 for 10.0 to 16.0 Amps

Time Dial (td) 0.0 to 9.9 0.1 N/A 0

Curve (crv) See Appendix A N/A N/A V2

Time overcurrent operating settings can be entered at the front panel HMI using screens 5.#.4.1 through
5.#.4.5 or through the communication ports using the S<g>-x51 (setting group number-51/151) command.
S<g>-x51 Command
Purpose: Read or set time overcurrent pickup level, time delay, and curve.
Syntax: S<g>-x51n[=<pu>,<td>,<crv>]
Comments: g = setting group number 0, 1, 2, or 3. Use # as a wildcard to select all setting groups.
n = element type P/N/Q
x = 1 for 151 elements and is left blank for 51 elements.

NOTE
Changing settings while the relay is in service will return an error message (PU
CONDITION) if the new setting is within approximately 90 percent of the metered
current level. This is intended to prevent the user from inadvertently causing a trip when
changing a setting.

S<g>-x51 Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1 Read the 51 setting data for the neutral element in setting group 0.
>S0-51N
>10,2.4,S1R
The data returned indicates a pickup setting of 10 amperes, a time dial setting of 2.4, and an S1 time
dial curve with integrating reset.
EXAMPLE.2 Change the 51 neutral element of setting group 0 so that the time dial setting is 3.0.
>S0-51N=,3.0
EXAMPLE.3 Disable the negative sequence time overcurrent function for all setting groups.
>S#-51Q=0

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-13

Setting Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients
Time current characteristics for trip and reset are defined by Equation 4-1 and Equation 4-2 respectively.
These equations comply with IEEE standard C37.112-1996. The curve specific coefficients are defined for
the standard curves as listed in Appendix A, Time-Current Characteristics. When time current characteristic
curve P is selected, the coefficients used in the equation are those defined by the user. Definitions for these
equations are provided in Table 4-8.

AD RD
TT = + BD+ K TR =
2
M N
-C M -1
Equation 4-1. Time OC Equation 4-2. Time OC
Characteristics for Trip Characteristics for Reset

Table 4-8. Definitions for Equations 4-6 and 4-7

Parameter Description Explanation
TT Time to trip Time that the 51 function will take to time out and trip.
D Time dial setting Time dial setting for the 51 function.
M Multiple of pickup Measured current in multiples of pickup. Timing algorithm has
a dynamic range of 0 to 40 times pickup.
A Coefficient specific Affects the effective range of the time dial.
to selected curve
B Coefficient specific Affects a constant term in the timing equation. Has greatest
to selected curve effect on curve shape at high multiples of tap.
C Coefficient specific Affects the multiple of PU where the curve would approach
to selected curve infinity if allowed to continue below pickup. Has greatest effect
on curve shape near pickup.
N Exponent specific to Affects how inverse the characteristic is. Has greatest effect on
selected curve curve shape at low to medium multiples of tap.
K Constant Characteristic minimum delay term.
TR Time to reset Relevant if 51 function is set for integrating reset.
R Coefficient specific Affects the speed of reset when integrating reset is selected.
to selected curve

Curve coefficients are entered using the SP-CURVE (Settings Protection-programmable curve) command.
Table 4-9 lists the programmable curve settings.
Table 4-9. Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients
Unit of
Setting Range Increment Measure Default
A Coefficient 0 to 600 0.0001 N/A 0.2663
B Coefficient 0 to 25 0.0001 N/A 0.0339
C Coefficient 0.0000 to 0.0001 N/A 1.0000
1.0000
N Coefficient 0.5 to 2.5 0.0001 N/A 1.2969
R Coefficient 0 to 30 0.0001 N/A 0.5000

4-14 Protection and Control BE1-851

SP-CURVE Command
Purpose: Reads or changes the user-programmable 51 curve parameters.
Syntax: SP-CURVE[=<A>,<B>,<C>,<N>,<R>]
SP-CURVE Command Example
Read the programmable 51 curve settings.
SP-CURVE
1,0,0,2,0

Retrieving Logic Output Status Information from the Relay

The status of each logic variable can be determined from the ASCII command interface using the RG-STAT
(report general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting
for more information.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
For years, protection engineers have enjoyed increased sensitivity to phase-to-ground unbalances with the
application of ground relays. Ground relays can be set more sensitively than phase relays because a
balanced load has no ground (3I0) current component. The negative sequence elements can provide similar
increased sensitivity to phase-to-phase faults because a balanced load has no negative sequence (I2)
current component.
Negative Sequence Pickup Settings
A typical setting for the negative sequence elements might be one-half the phase pickup setting in order to
achieve equal sensitivity to phase-to-phase faults as to three-phase faults. This number comes from the fact
that the magnitude of the current for a phase-to-phase fault is 3/2 (87%) of the three-phase fault at the
same location. This is illustrated in Figure 4-8.

Z
I3 P h F A U L T
V
I3 P h F A U L T = V
Z

Z
D2843-04.vsd
02-08-99

Z
IP h - P h F A U L T
V
IP h - P h F A U L T = V* √3 = I3 P h F A U L T* √3
Z *2 2

Figure 4-8. Phase-to-Phase Fault Magnitude

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-15

The phase-to-phase fault current is made up of both positive and negative sequence components as shown
in Figure 4-9. For a phase-to-phase fault, the magnitude of the negative sequence component is 1/ 3 (58%)
of the magnitude of the total phase current. When these two factors ( 3/2 and 1/ 3) are combined, the Ö3
factors cancel, which leaves the one-half factor.

D2843-05.vsd
02-02-99
IC1
IB2 I A2 = |I 2 | = I A Phase/ √3

I B Phase I A Phase

IB1 IA1
IC2
IC Phase = 0

Pos. Seq. (I 1 ) Neg. Seq. (I 2 ) Phase Current

Figure 4-9. Sequence Components For An A-B Fault

Negative Sequence Coordination Settings

The 51Q settings should be checked for coordination with phase-only sensing devices such as downstream
fuses and reclosers and/or ground relays. To plot the negative sequence time current characteristics on the
same plot for the phase devices, you need to multiply the negative sequence element pickup value by the
correct multiplier. The multiplier is the ratio of phase current to negative sequence current for the fault type
for which you are interested. To plot the negative sequence time current characteristics on the same plot
for the ground devices, you need to multiply the pickup value by the multiplier for phase-to-ground faults.
Fault Type Multiplier
Ph-Ph m = 1.732
Ph-Ph-G m > 1.732
Ph-G m=3
3-Phase m = Infinity
For example, a down-stream phase 51 element has a pickup of 150 amperes. The up-stream 51Q element
has a pickup of 200 amperes. To check the coordination between these two elements for a phase-to-phase
fault, the phase overcurrent element would be plotted normally with pickup at 150 amperes. The 51Q
element would be shifted to the right by the appropriate factor m. Thus, the characteristic would be plotted
on the coordination graph with pickup at: (200 amperes)*1.732 = 346 amperes.
Generally, for coordination with down-stream phase overcurrent devices, phase-to-phase faults are the most
critical to consider. All other fault types result in an equal or greater shift of the time current characteristic
curve to the right on the plot.
Delta/Wye Transformer Application.
Often, the phase relays on the delta side of a delta/wye transformer must provide backup protection for faults
on the wye side. For faults not involving ground, this is not a problem since the phase relays will see 1.0
per unit fault current for three-phase faults and 2/ 3 (1.15) per unit fault current for phase-to-phase faults.
However, for faults involving ground, the sensitivity is reduced because the zero sequence components are
trapped in the delta and not seen by the delta-side phase relays. The phase relays will see only 1/ 3 (0.577)
per unit current for phase-to-ground faults.
Negative sequence overcurrent protection is immune to the effect caused by the zero sequence trap and
30° phase shift provided by the delta/wye transformer. For a phase-to-ground fault, the magnitude of the
negative sequence components is 1/3 the magnitude of the total fault current. On a per unit basis, this is
true for the fault current on the delta side of the transformer as well. (The previous statement specifies per

4-16 Protection and Control BE1-851

unit since the actual magnitudes will be adjusted by the inverse of the voltage ratio of the delta/wye
transformer.) Thus, backup protection for phase-to-ground faults on the wye side of the transformer can be
obtained by using negative sequence overcurrent protection on the delta side with the pickup sensitivity set
at 1/3 per unit of the magnitude of the phase-to-ground fault for which you wish to have backup protection.

BF BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

BE1-851 relays provide one function block for breaker failure
protection. This function includes a timer and a current detector. Mode =
0-disable BFT
Figure 4-10 shows the BF function block. The function block has
two outputs BFPU (breaker failure pickup) and BFT (breaker SL-BF BFPU
failure trip). LOGIC
INI
An INI (Initiate) logic input is provided to start the breaker failure
timer. When this expression is true and current is flowing in the
BLK
assigned input circuit, the breaker failure timer is started. D2843-06.vsd
02-02-99
Supervision of the initiate signal can be designed in BESTlogic.
Figure 4-10. BF Breaker Failure
Function Block
A Block logic input is provided to block operation of the breaker
failure protection. When this expression is true, the function is disabled. For example, this may be an input
wired to a test switch such that breaker failure protection is disabled when the primary protective elements
are being tested to prevent inadvertent backup tripping during testing.
The breaker failure timer is stopped by the fast-dropout current detector function. See Section 3 Input and
Output Functions, Current Measurement Functions for more details on this function. The fast-dropout
current detector is designed to directly determine when the current in the poles of the breaker has been
interrupted without having to wait for the fault current samples to clear the one-cycle filter time used by the
normal current measurement function. This function has less than one cycle dropout time. The timer can
also be stopped by removal of the initiate signal or by the block logic input being asserted.
The current detector sensitivity is fixed at 10% nominal. A traditional breaker failure relay includes a fault
detector function which serves two independent purposes: current detector and fault detector. A current
detector is generally included to determine that the current has been successfully interrupted in all poles of
the breaker to stop breaker failure timing. The secondary function of a traditional fault detector is to provide
an independent confirmation that a fault exists on the system to increase security from misoperation caused
by an inadvertent initiate signal. To do this, a fault detector by definition must be set above load current--
reducing it’s sensitivity as a current detector. Since this breaker failure timer is included in a multifunction
protection system, fault detector supervision is not required.
If you are using external relays to initiate the breaker failure timer, it may be desirable to include fault
detector supervision of the initiate signal using an instantaneous overcurrent function in BESTlogic. For
example, if it is desired that certain initiate signals be supervised by a fault detector, it is possible to AND
them with one of the 50T protective functions using a virtual output expression. In other applications, it may
be desirable to have breaker failure timing with no current detector supervision. In this case, one of the
general purpose logic timers (device 62) can be used as a breaker failure timer. See Section 8, Application,
Application Tips for more details on this application.
When the breaker failure timer is picked up, the BFPU logic output is true. This output would typically be
used as a re-trip signal to the protected breaker. This can provide an independent tripping signal to the
breaker that may also open the breaker to prevent backup tripping.
If the initiate logic expression remains true for the duration of the breaker failure delay time and the current
detector is still picked up, the BFT output is asserted. This output would normally be used to trip an 86F
lockout relay which will trip and prevent closing of adjacent breakers and/or key transfer trip transmitters.
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target when the
protective function trip output is true and the fault recording function trip logic expression is true. See
Section 6 Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions for more details on the target reporting
function.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-17

An alarm variable is also provided in the programmable alarms function that can be used to indicate an
alarm condition when the breaker failure protection trips. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions,
Alarms Function for more details on the alarm reporting function.
Setting BESTlogic, BF Breaker Failure Function Block
The logic settings for the BF Breaker Failure function are provided in Table 4-10. These settings will enable
the function block by attaching it to one of the CT input circuits and provide initiate and blocking control as
determined by the logic expressions assigned to those inputs.

Table 4-10. BF Breaker Failure Function BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default
0=Disabled
Logic Mode 0
1=Enabled
INI (Initiate) Logic
Logic expression. Disables function when true 0
Input
Block Logic Input Logic expression. Disables function when true 0

The BESTlogic settings can be made from the ASCII command interface using the SL-BF (settings logic-
Breaker Failure) commands.
SL-BF Command

Purpose: Used to program a logical mode of operation for the Breaker Failure protection block.
Syntax: SL-BF[= <mode>, <INI logic>, <BLK logic>]
Comments:
Example 1.Read 50BF Logic (enabled winding 1, initiate controlled by input 4 and no blocking)
>SL-BF
1,IN4,0
>
Example 2. Change BF Logic to initiate if the TRIP output closes (VO1=1).
>SL-BF=,VO1
>
Setting Operational Settings, BF (Breaker Failure) Function
The operating parameter settings for the BF (breaker failure) function are provided in Table 4-11. This
setting is not included in the four settings groups.
The time delays can be set in milliseconds, seconds, or cycles. The default is milliseconds if no unit of
measure is specified. The minimum resolution of the timing is to the nearest 1/4 cycle. A time delay setting
of 0 makes the element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
If the time delay settings are made in cycles, they are converted to seconds or milliseconds before being
stored. This conversion is based on the nominal frequency setting stored in EEPROM. See Section 3, Input
and Output Functions, Current Measurement Functions for more information on this setting. If the user is
changing the nominal frequency setting from the default (60 Hz) and setting the time delays in cycles, the
frequency setting should be entered and saved to EEPROM first by entering E; Y.

Table 4-11. BF Breaker Failure Function Operational Settings

Unit of Default
Setting Range Increment Measure
0 = disabled
50 to 999 ms 1m milliseconds
Time Delay (td) 0
0.05 to 0.999 sec. 0.1 sec seconds
0 to 59.96 (60 Hz) or 0 to 49.97 (50 Hz) * cycles
NOTE: * Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the optional
HMI. All time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time

4-18 Protection and Control BE1-851

delays entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds. Increment precision after conversion
is limited to that appropriate for each of those units of measure.

The BF (breaker failure) setting may be entered from the optional front panel HMI from screen 5.5.1,
\PROT\GLOB\BF, or from the ASCII command interface using the SP-BF (settings protection-breaker failure)
command.
SP-BF Command
Purpose: Read/Set the breaker failure timer setting
Syntax: SP-BF[=<td [units] >]
Comments: units = m for milliseconds (default)
s for seconds
c for cycles
Example 1. Set BF time delay to 10 cycles
>SP-BF=10c
>
Example 2. Read breaker failure time delay setting after setting it in example 1. (Nominal frequency is
set to 60 hertz.)
>SP-BF
167m
>
Retrieving Logic Output Status Information From the Relay
The status of each logic variable can be determined from the ASCII command interface using the RG-STAT
(report general-status) or the RL (report logic) commands. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions,
General Status Reporting for more information.

RECLOSING
The BE1-851 reclosing function provides up to four
reclosing attempts that can be initiated by a
protective trip or by one of the contact sensing
inputs. The recloser allows supervisory control and
coordination of tripping and reclosing with other
system devices. Any of the four recloser shots can
be used to select a different setting group when the
appropriate shot is reached in a reclosing sequence.
For example, two fast 51 curves could be changed
to two slow 51 curves. Detailed information about
relay setting groups can be found earlier in this
section under the heading of Setting Groups.
Recloser function block inputs and outputs are Figure 4-11. 79 Function Block
shown in Figure 4-11 and are described in the
following paragraphs.

Reclose Initiate (RI)

The RI input is used with the 52 status input to start the reclose timers at each step of the reclosing
sequence. To start the automatic reclose timers, the RI input must be TRUE when the breaker status input
indicates that the breaker has tripped. To ensure that the RI input is recognized, a recognition dropout timer
holds the RI input TRUE for approximately 225 milliseconds after it goes to a FALSE state. This situation
might occur if the RI is driven by the trip output of a protective function. As soon as the breaker opens, the
protective function will drop out. The recognition dropout timer ensures that the RI signal will be recognized
as TRUE even if the breaker status input is slow in indicating breaker opening. Figure 4-12 illustrates the
recognition dropout logic and timing relationship.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-19

 Recognition
0 RI Dropout Time
RI
255

D2635-07
03-04-98
Initiate Holdup
Holdup Timer Reclose Timer
Timer
52 52
Status Status
Figure 4-12. Recognition Dropout and Timing

Breaker Status (STAT)

This input is used to indicate to the recloser function block that the breaker is closed. A TRUE signal at this
input indicates a closed breaker.

Reclose Wait (WAIT)

A TRUE signal at this input disables the reclosing function. In this condition, recloser timing is interrupted.
When this input returns to a FALSE state, reclosing is enabled and recloser timing resumes.

Drive to Lockout/Block Recloser (DTL/BLK)

When TRUE, this input forces the reclosing function into the Lockout position. Lockout persists for the period
defined by the Reset time after the Lockout input becomes FALSE and the breaker is closed.

Close (79C)
The 79C output becomes TRUE at the end of each reclose time delay. Any of the following conditions will
cause the 79C output to become FALSE.
 The STAT input indicates that the breaker is closed.
 The reclose fail timer times out.
 The recloser goes to Lockout.
 The Wait logic is asserted.

Recloser Running (79RNG)

The 79RNG output is TRUE when the reclose is running (i.e., not in Reset or Lockout). This output is
available to block the operation of a load tap changer on a substation transformer or voltage regulator during
the fault clearing and restoration process.

Lockout (79LO)
This output is TRUE when the recloser is in the Lockout state. It remains TRUE until the recloser goes to
the Reset state. The recloser will go to Lockout if any of the following conditions exist.
 More than the maximum number of programmed recloses are initiated before the recloser returns
to the Reset state.
 The BLK/DTL input is TRUE.
 The Reclose Fail (79F) output is TRUE.
 The maximum reclose cycle time is exceeded.

4-20 Protection and Control BE1-851

Reclose Failure (79F)
The 79F output is TRUE when the reclose fail timer times out. The reclose fail timer starts when the 79C
output becomes TRUE and is reset when the breaker closes (Status input is TRUE). The reclose fail timer
limits the duration of the 79C output signal. The 79F output remains TRUE until the recloser goes to the
Reset state.

Recloser Sequence Control Block (79SCB)

This output becomes TRUE when the sequence operation step matches one of the programmed steps
(defined with the S<g>-79SCB command) and the 79C output is TRUE or the STAT input is TRUE.

Recloser BESTlogic Settings

Reclosing is added to a protection scheme by enabling the Recloser Function Block and connecting the
inputs to the appropriate logic to provide control. This is done using the SL-79 command. The recloser logic
settings are summarized in Table 4-12. Additionally, one or more of the protection block outputs must be
connected to external block(s) that are controlled by the SL-<func> or SL-VO command.
Table 4-12. Recloser BESTLogic Settings
Function Range/Purpose Default
0 = Recloser disabled
1 = Standard power-up operation. After power-up, the STATUS logic
must be TRUE for the Reset time delay or the recloser automati-
cally goes to Lockout. If the STATUS logic stays TRUE for reset
time delay, the recloser goes to Reset.
mode 0
2 = Power-up to close. If the recloser was in the Reset state when
power was lost, and when power is restored the STATUS logic is
FALSE (breaker open) and the RI logic is TRUE, the recloser will
initiate the first reclose operation. If the STATUS logic stays TRUE
for the reset time delay, the recloser goes to Reset.
RI OR logic term to initiate the operation of the reclosing function 0
OR logic term to indicate breaker status. TRUE/1 = closed,
STATUS 0
FALSE/0 = open
WAIT OR logic term to momentarily disable but not reset the recloser 0
DTL/BLK OR logic term to disable the recloser (drive to Lockout/Block) 0

SL-79 Command
Purpose: Read or set 79 function block logic.
Syntax: SL-79[=<mode>,<RI logic>,<STATUS logic>,<WAIT logic>,<LOCKOUT logic>]
SL-79 Command Example
Read the recloser logic settings.
SL-79
1,VO1,/IN2,0,IN3
The reported settings are explained in the following paragraphs.
1 Indicates that the recloser is enabled for standard, power-up operation.
VO1 Recloser is initiated when output VO1 is TRUE.
/IN2 Breaker status is monitored at contact input 2. (Breaker is closed when IN2 is de-energized.)
0 Reclose Wait is disabled.
IN3 Energizing contact input 3 will block reclosing and drive the recloser to Lockout.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-21

Recloser Operating Settings
Recloser operating settings consist of settings for the reclose time delays, reset time delays, reclose fail time
delay, and the maximum reclose time delay. These settings can be accessed at HMI screens 5.x.7.1 through
5.x.7.5 or through the communication ports by using the S<g>-79 command.
S<g>-79 Command
Purpose: Read or set the 79 operating settings.
Syntax: S<g>-79[#][=<td>]
Comments: g = 0 for setting group 0, 1 for setting group 1, 2 for setting group 2, or 3 for setting group 3
# = 1, 2, 3, 4, R, F, or M
td = time delay in milliseconds (m), seconds (s), or cycles (c)
The # and td settings are described in the following paragraphs.
S<g>-79#, where # is 1, 2, 3, or 4, controls the automatic reclose delay which defines how long the recloser
waits before trying to reclose the breaker. The SL-79 RI logic must be TRUE and the SL-79 STATUS logic
must indicate that the breaker is open before a reclose time delay is initiated.
S<g>-79R, is the Reset time delay. If the SL-79 reset logic stays TRUE for the reset time delay, the
automatic reclose counter resets. Reset time provides a stabilizing period after a reclose has occurred
before beginning another reclose sequence.
S<g>-79F, is the Reclose Fail time delay. If, after the reclose output is TRUE, the breaker fails to close
before the 79F timer expires, the failure alarm asserts and the recloser goes to Lockout. The reclose fail
timer limits the duration of the closing signal to the breaker. If the fail timer is not desired, it can be disabled
by setting it at zero.
S<g>-79M, is the Reclose Maximum operation time. If a reclose operation isn’t completed before the
maximum operate time expires, the recloser goes to lockout. This timer limits the total fault clearing and
restoration sequence to a definable period. The 79M timer starts when the first trip command is issued from
a protective element of the relay. The 79M timer stops when the recloser is reset. If not desired, the 79M
timer can be disabled by setting it at zero.
Reclose time delay settings can be set from 100 to 999 milliseconds in 1 millisecond increments, 1 to 9.9
seconds in 0.1 second increments, 10 to 600 seconds in 1 second increments, or 6 to 36,000 cycles in 0.1
cycle increments. Default units are milliseconds (m), but cycles (c) or seconds (s) can be used by adding
the proper suffix (m/c/s) at the end of the time string. The recloser can be disabled by setting the automatic
reclose 1 time delay, S<g>-791 at 0 (zero). If any other automatic reclose delay is set at zero, then that
automatic reclose and all successive automatic reclosures are disabled.

S<g>-79 Command Example

In setting group 0, set Automatic Reclose 1 time delay at 6 cycles, Automatic Reclose 2 at 2.5 seconds, and
disable Automatic Reclose 3 and 4. Set the Reset time at 30 seconds, the Fail time for 2 minutes, and the
Max time for 2.5 minutes.
S0-791=6c; S0-792=2.5s; S0-793=0; S0-794=0;
S0-79R=30S; S0-79F=120S; S0-79M=150S

Sequence Controlled Block

The 79SCB output is TRUE when the breaker is closed, the 79 close output (79C) is TRUE, and the reclose
sequence step is enabled with a nonzero value in the S#-79SCB command. A 0 (zero) disables the 79SCB
output.
S<g>-79SCB Command
Purpose: Read or set the 79 Sequence Controlled Block output.
Syntax: S<g>-79SCB[=<step list>]
Comments: g = 0 for setting group 0, 1 for setting group 1, 2 for setting group 2, or 3 for setting group 3
step list = step number(s) 1 through 5, separated by /.

4-22 Protection and Control BE1-851

The reclose sequence steps are:
1. 79SCB TRUE during Reset and while timing to Reset after Lockout
2. 79SCB TRUE when 79C is TRUE for first reclose and while timing to Reset after first reclose
3. 79SCB TRUE when 79C is TRUE for second reclose and while timing to Reset after second reclose
4. 79SCB TRUE when 79C is TRUE for third reclose and while timing to Reset after third reclose
5. 79SCB TRUE when 79C is TRUE for fourth reclose and while timing to Reset after fourth reclose

Figure 4-13 shows a logic timing diagram showing all possible sequence control blocks enabled (TRUE).
In Figure 4-13, 79RTD is the reclose reset time delay and 79#TD is the reclose time delay where # is the
reclose shot number.

Manual Close
Closed
BREAKER STATUS

D2635-09
03-27-98
Open

RESET
79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD
TIMER

79C
RESET 791TD 792TD 793TD 794TD LOCKOUT RESET

SCB
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 1

79SCB 1 2 3 4 5 1

Figure 4-13. S#-79SCB=1/2/3/4/5 Logic Timing Diagram

S<g>-79SCB Command Example

Program the 79SCB output to be TRUE except during Reset and Lockout for all setting groups.
Figure 4-14 illustrates the logic timing diagram for this example.
S#-79SCB=2/3/4/5

Manual Close
Closed
BREAKER STATUS

D2635-10
11-29-98
Open

RESET
TIMER 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD

79C
RESET 791TD 792TD 793TD 794TD LOCKOUT RESET

SCB
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 1

79SCB 1 2 3 4 5 1

Figure 4-14. S#-79SCB=2/3/4/5 Logic Timing Diagram

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-23

Zone Sequence Coordination
To coordinate tripping and reclosing sequences with downstream protective relays and reclosers, the
BE1-851 senses fault current from downstream faults when a user programmable logic, set by the SP-
79ZONE command, picks up and then drops out without a trip output (defined with the SG-TRIGGER
command) occurring. Typically, the low-set instantaneous pickup outputs (50TPT and 50TNT) or the time-
overcurrent pickup outputs (51PPU and 51NPU) are used for the zone sequence settings (SP-
79ZONE=50TPPU+50TNPU or SP79ZONE=51PPU+51NPU).
If the upstream relay (BE1-851) senses that fault current has been interrupted by a downstream device, the
BE1-851 will increment the trip/reclose sequence by one operation. This occurs because the BE1-851
recognizes that a non-blocked low set (50TP or 50 TN) element picked up and reset before timing out to trip.
Table 4-13 summarizes the zone sequence coordination.
Table 4-13. Zone Sequence Coordination Settings
Function Range/Purpose Default

Zone Pickup The zone sequence pickup logic defines which logic elements should be 0
Logic considered zone sequence pickups. Only OR (+) logic can be used–no
AND (9) variables.

SP-79ZONE Command
Purpose: Read or set the 79 Zone Sequence Logic.
Syntax: SP-79ZONE[=<zone pickup logic>]
Comments: A logic zero disables zone sequence coordination.
Recloser zone sequence coordination detects when a fault has been cleared by a downstream recloser and
increments the upstream 79 automatic reclose count to maintain a consistent count with the other recloser.
A fault is presumed cleared downstream when one or more protective functions pickup and dropout with no
trip occurring. The zone sequence pickup logic defines which logic elements should be considered zone
sequence pickups. Only OR (+) logic can be used–no AND (*) variables. If the zone pickup logic becomes
TRUE and then FALSE without a trip output operating, then the 79 automatic reclose counter should be
incremented.

SP-79ZONE Command Example

Increment the 79 automatic reclose count if one or more 50 phase or neutral elements picks up and all are
cleared without a Trip operation.
SP-79ZONE=50TPPU+50TNPU+150TPPU+150TNPU

GENERAL PURPOSE LOGIC TIMERS

BE1-851 relays provide two general purpose logic timers
which are extremely versatile. Each can be set for one of five
modes of operation to emulate virtually any type of timer.
Each function block has one output, 62 or 162, that is
asserted when the timing criteria has been met according to
the BESTlogic mode setting. Figure 4-15 shows the 62
function block as an example. Each mode of operation is
described in detail in the following paragraphs.
An INI (Initiate) logic input is provided to start the timing
sequence.
A Block logic input is provided to block operation of the timer.
When this expression is true, the function is disabled.
Each timer has a T1 time setting and a T2 time setting. The
functioning of these settings is dependent upon the type of
timer as specified by the mode setting in BESTlogic. Figure 4-15. 62/162 Function Block
4-24 Protection and Control BE1-851
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target when the timer
output is true and the fault recording function trip logic expression is true. See Section 6, Reporting and
Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions for more details on the target reporting function.

Mode 1, Pickup/Dropout Timer

The output will change to logic TRUE if the 1 D2843-08.vsd
initiate expression is TRUE for the duration of BLK 02-02-99

PICKUP time delay setting T1 (see Figure 4-16). 0

If the initiate expression toggles to FALSE 1

before time T1, the T1 timer is reset. Once the INI
output of the timer toggles to TRUE, the initiate 0
expression must be FALSE for the duration of 1
DROPOUT time delay setting T2. If the initiate x62 X
t1 t1 t2
expression toggles to TRUE before time T2, the 0
output stays TRUE and the T2 timer is reset. Figure 4-16. Mode 1, Pickup/Dropout Timer

Mode 2, One-Shot Nonretriggerable Timer

A one-shot timer starts its timing sequence when 1 D2843-09.vsd
the initiate expression changes from FALSE to BLK 02-02-99
0
TRUE. The timer will time for DELAY time T1 and
then the output will toggle to TRUE for 1
INI
DURATION time T2 (see Figure 4-17). Additional 0
initiate input expression changes of state are
1
ignored until the timing sequence has x62
t1 t2
been completed. If the duration time (T2) is set to 0
0, this timer will not function. Figure 4-17. Mode 2, One-Shot
Nonretriggerable Timer
Mode 3, One-Shot Retriggerable Timer
This mode of operation is similar to Mode 2 except D2843-10.vsd
1
that if a new FALSE-to-TRUE transition occurs on BLK
02-02-99

the initiate input expression, the output is forced to 0

logic FALSE and the timing sequence is restarted 1
(see Figure 4-18). INI
0

1 t1 t1 t1
X
x62 X X
t1 t2 t2
0

Figure 4-18. Mode 3, One-Shot Retriggerable Timer

Mode 4, Oscillator
In this mode, the INI input (Figure 4-19) is ignored. 1 D2843-11.vsd
If the BLK input is FALSE, the output, x62, oscillates BLK 02-02-99
with an ON time of T1 and an OFF time of T2. 0
When the BLK input is held TRUE, the oscillator
stops and the output is held OFF. 1
INI DON'T CARE
0

1
x62 t2
t1
0
Figure 4-19. Mode 4, Oscillator

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-25

Mode 5, Integrating Timer
An integrating timer is similar to a pickup/dropout timer except that the PICKUP time T1 defines the rate that
the timer integrates toward timing out and setting the output to TRUE. Conversely, the RESET time T2
defines the rate that the timer integrates toward dropout and resetting the output to FALSE. PICKUP time
T1 defines the time delay for the output to change to TRUE if the initiate input becomes TRUE and stays
TRUE. RESET time T2 defines the time delay for the output to change to FALSE if it is presently TRUE and
the initiate input becomes FALSE and stays FALSE.
In the example shown in Figure 4-20, RESET time T2 is set to half of the PICKUP time T1 setting. The
initiate input expression becomes TRUE and the timer starts integrating toward pickup. Prior to timing out,
the initiate expression toggles to FALSE and the
timer starts resetting at twice the rate as it was 1 D2843-12.vsd
integrating toward time out. It stays FALSE long B L K 02-02-99
0
enough for the integrating timer to reset completely;
but, then toggles back to TRUE and stays TRUE for INI 1
the entire duration of time T1. At that point, the
0
output of the timer is toggled to TRUE. Then at some
time later, the initiate expression becomes FALSE 1 0 0 %
t1

t2
and stays FALSE for the duration of RESET time T2.

t2
Timer t1
At that point, the output of the timer is toggled to 0 %
FALSE. 1
x62
This type of timer is useful in applications where a 0
monitored signal may be hovering at its threshold Figure 4-20. Mode 5, Integrating Timer
between on and off. For example, it is desired to
take some action when current is above a certain
level for a certain period of time. A 50T function could be used to monitor the current level. Thus, if the
current level is near the threshold so that the initiate toggles between TRUE and FALSE from time to time,
the function will still time out as long as the time that it is TRUE is longer than the time that it is FALSE. With
a simple PU/DO timer, the timing function would reset to zero and start over each time the initiate expression
became FALSE.
Mode 6, Latch
A one-shot timer starts its timing sequence when the
1 D2863-07.vsd
initiate expression changes from FALSE to TRUE. BLK 10-11-99
The timer will time for DELAY time T1 and then the 0
output will latch TRUE (see Figure 4-21). Additional initiate
1
input expression changes of state are ignored. Time INI
(T2) is ignored. 0

1
x62
t1 t2
0

Figure 4-21. Mode 6, One-shot

Nonretriggerable latch

4-26 Protection and Control BE1-851

BESTlogic Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers
The logic settings for the 62/162 timer functions are listed in Table 4-14. These settings enable the function
block by selecting the mode of operation and providing initiate and blocking control as determined by the
logic expressions assigned to those inputs.

Table 4-14. 62/162 BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default

0 = Disabled 3 = 1 Shot Retriggerable 0

1 = Pickup/Dropout 4 = Oscillator
Logic Mode
2 = 1 Shot Nonretriggerable 5 = Integrating
6 = Latch

INI (Initiate) Logic Input Logic expression that initiates timing sequence. 0

BLK (Block) Logic Logic expression that disables function when TRUE. 0
Input

BESTlogic settings for the 62/162 function can be made using the SL-x62 (settings logic-timer) command.
SL-x62 Command
Purpose: Reads or sets the logic for the 62 and 162 functions.
Syntax: SL-[x]62[=[mode],[INI logic],[BLK logic]]
Comments: x = 1 for 162 or no entry for 62

SL-x62 Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1 Read the 62 function logic.
>SL-62
>2,IN2,0
The reported settings indicate that the function block is enabled for one-shot, nonretriggerable
operation with timing sequences initiated by IN2. Blocking is disabled.
EXAMPLE.2 Set contact input 3 to initiate timing sequences.
>SL-62=,IN3
Note that it isn’t necessary to enter the mode and the block expression since these settings aren’t changed.

Operating Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers

The operating parameter settings for the 62/162 timer functions are listed in Table 4-15.
Table 4-15. 62/162 Operating Settings
Setting Range Increment Unit of Measure Default
0 to 999 ms 1 milliseconds
0.1 for 0.1 to 9.9 sec
0.1 to 9999 sec seconds
T1, T2 1.0 for 10 to 9999 sec 0

0 to 599,940 (60 Hz)

9 cycles
0 to 499,950 (50 Hz)
9 Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle through the
HMI. All time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command
interface. Time delays entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds.
Increment precision after conversion is limited to that appropriate for each of those units
of measure.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-27

Operating settings for the 62/162 function can be read or entered at the HMI using screens 5.#.6.1 and
5.#.6.2. These settings can also be accessed through the communication ports using the S<g>-62/162
(settings group #–62/162) command.
S<g>-62/162 Command
Purpose: Read or set the 62 and 162 time settings.
Syntax: S[g]-[x]62[=[t1],[t2]]
Comments: g = setting group number (0, 1, 2, or 3)
x = 1 for 162 or no entry for 62

S<g>-62/162 Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1 Set the 62 function of setting group 0 to delay pickup for 100 milliseconds with an immediate
dropout. Set the 62 function of setting groups 1, 2, and 3 to delay pickup for 150 milliseconds
with a dropout of 50 milliseconds.
>S0-62=100,0;S1-62=150,50;S2-62=150,50;S3-62=150,50
EXAMPLE.2 Take advantage of the wildcard character (#) to make the same setting with only two
commands.
>S#-62=150,50;S0-62=100,0

Retrieving 62/162 Output Status Information from the Relay

The status of each logic variable can be determined from the ASCII command interface by using the
RG-STAT (report general-status) or the RL (report logic) commands. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions, General Status Reporting for more information.

VIRTUAL SWITCHES

43 Virtual Selector Switches

BE1-851relays have four virtual selector switches that can provide manual control, locally and remotely,
without using physical switches and/or interposing relays. Each virtual switch can be set for one of three
modes of operation to emulate virtually any type of binary (two position) switch. An example would be an
application that requires a recloser or 51N ground cutoff. The traditional approach might be to install a switch
on the panel and wire the output to a contact sensing input on the relay or in series with the differential trip
output of the relay. Instead, a virtual switch can be used to reduce costs with the added benefit of being able
to operate the switch both locally through the HMI and remotely from a substation computer or through a
modem connection to a remote operator’s console.
The state of the switches can be controlled from the optional HMI or ASCII command interface. Control
actions can be set by the BESTlogic mode setting. When set for Mode 1, each switch can be controlled to
open (logic 0), close (logic 1), or pulse such that the output toggles from its current state to the opposite state
and then returns. Additional modes allow the switch operation to be restricted. In Mode 2 (ON/OFF), the
switch emulates a two position selector switch, and only open and close commands are accepted. In Mode
3 (OFF/Momentary ON), a momentary close, spring return
switch is emulated and only the pulse command is
accepted. Because switch status information is saved in
nonvolatile memory, the relay powers up with the switches
in the same state as when the relay was powered down.
Each virtual selector switch function block (see Figure 4-
22) has one output: 43, 143, 243, or 343. The output
is TRUE when the switch is in the closed state; the output
is FALSE when the switch is the open state. Since both
the output and the inverse of the output of these switches
can be used as many times as desired in your
programmable logic, they can emulate a switch with as
many normally open and normally closed decks as
desired.
Figure 4-22. 43 Function Block
4-28 Protection and Control BE1-851
User specified labels can be assigned to each virtual switch and to both states of each switch. In the
previous differential cutoff switch example, you might enable one of the switches in BESTlogic as Mode 2,
ON/OFF and connect the output of that switch, to the blocking input of the 51P protection function block. This
would disable the differential when the switch is closed (logic 1) and enable it when the switch is open (logic
0). For the application, you might set the switch label to be 51_CUTOFF (10 character maximum). The
closed position on the switch might be labeled DISABLD (7 character maximum) and the open position might
be labeled NORMAL. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic has more details about setting user
programmable names for programmable logic variables.

BESTlogic Settings for x43 Virtual Selector Switches

The virtual selector switch logic settings are listed in Table 4-16. These settings enable the x43 function
block by selecting the mode of operation. There are no logic inputs.

Table 4-16. x43 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default

0 = Disabled 2 = On/Off
Logic Mode 0
1 = On/Off/Pulse 3 = Off/Momentary On

BESTlogic settings can be made through the ASCII command interface using the SL-x43 (settings logic-x43
switch) command.
SL-x43 Command
Purpose: Read or set virtual switch logic.
Syntax: SL-<x>43[=mode]
Comments: x = no entry for 43, 1 for 143, 2 for 243, or 3 for 343

SL-x43 Command Example

Read the logic setting for the 43 virtual selector switch.
>SL-43
>3
This mode setting indicates that the switch is set for OFF/Momentary ON operation.

Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Selector Switches

The state of each virtual selector switch can be controlled at the HMI through screens 2.1.1 through 2.1.4.
Control is also possible through the ASCII command interface by using the select-before-operate commands
CS-x43 (control select-virtual switch) and CO-x43 (operate select-virtual switch). A state change takes place
immediately without having to execute an exit-save settings command.
CS/CO-x43 Command
Purpose: Select and operate the virtual selector switches.
Syntax: CS/CO-x43[=<action>]
Comments: x = no entry for 43, 1 for 143, 2 for 243, or 3 for 343
action = 0 to open the switch
1 to close the switch
P to pulse the switch to the opposite state for 200 milliseconds, and then
automatically return to starting state
The virtual switch control commands require the use of select-before-operate logic. First, the command must
be selected using the CS-x43 command. After the select command is entered, there is a 30 second window
during which the CO-x43 control command will be accepted. The control selected and the operation selected
must match exactly or the operate command will be blocked. If the operate command is blocked, and error
message is output.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-29

CS/CO-x43 Command Examples
EXAMPLE.1 Read the current status of virtual switch 43.
>CO-43
>0
EXAMPLE.2 Momentarily toggle the state of switch 43 to closed.
>CS-43=P
>43=P SELECTED
>CO-43=P
>43=P EXECUTED
EXAMPLE.3 An example of an operate command not matching the select command.
>CS-743=P
>743=P SELECTED
>CO-743=1
>ERROR:NO SELECT
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay
The state of each virtual selector switch can be determined from HMI screen 1.5.4. This information is also
available through the ASCII command interface by using the RG-STAT or RG-43STAT commands. See
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting for more information.
HMI screens 2.1.1 through 2.1.4 provide switch control and can also display the current status of their
respective switches. ASCII command CO-x43 returns the state of each virtual selector switch in a read-only
mode. See the previous Example 1.

101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch

The virtual breaker control switch (shown in Figure 4-23) provides
manual control of a circuit breaker or
switch without using physical switches and/or interposing relays.
Both local and remote control is possible. A virtual switch can be
used instead of a physical switch to reduce costs with the added
benefit that the virtual switch can be operated both locally from the
HMI and remotely from a substation computer or modem
connection to an operator’s console.
The breaker control switch emulates a typical breaker control
switch with a momentary close, spring return, trip contact (output
101T), a momentary close, spring return, close contact (output
101C), and a slip contact (output 101SC). The slip contact output Figure 4-23. 101 Function Block
retains the status of the last control action. That is it is FALSE
(open) in the after-trip state and TRUE (closed) in the after-close
state. Figure 4-24 shows the state of the 101SC logic output with
respect to the state of the 101T and 101C outputs.
When the virtual control switch is controlled 1
to trip, the 101T output pulses TRUE 101T 200 ms
(closed) for approximately 200 milliseconds 0
and the 101SC output goes FALSE (open).
When the virtual control switch is controlled 1
to close, the 101SC output pulses TRUE 101C 200 ms
0
(closed). The status of the slip contact
output is saved to nonvolatile memory so
that the relay will power up with the contact 1
101SC D2843-15.vsd
in the same state as when the relay was 0 02-02-99
powered down.
Figure 4-24. 101 Control Switch State Diagram

4-30 Protection and Control BE1-851

BESTlogic Settings for 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch
Virtual selector switch logic settings enable the 101 function block by selecting the mode of operation. These
logic settings are listed in Table 4-17. There are no logic inputs. The user label for the 101 virtual breaker
control switch is entered using the SB-LOGIC command. More information about the SB-LOGIC command
is provided in Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Functions, Breaker Monitoring.

Table 4-17. 101 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default

Logic Mode 0 = Disabled, 1 = On/Off 0

BESTlogic settings for the 101 function are made through the ASCII command interface using the SL-101
(settings logic-101 switch) command.
SL-101 Command
Purpose: Read or set the logic for virtual breaker switch 101.
Syntax: SL-101[=mode]

SL-101 Command Example

>Read the 101 logic.
>SL-101
>1
The returned setting indicates that the 1-1 function block is enabled.

Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Breaker Control Switches

The state of each virtual selector switch can be controlled at the HMI through screen 2.2.1. Control is also
possible through the ASCII command interface by using the select-before-operate commands CS-101
(control select-virtual control switch) and CO-101 (control operate-virtual controls switch). A state change
takes place immediately without having to execute an exit-save settings command.
CS/CO-101Command
Purpose: Select and operate the virtual control switch.
Syntax: CS/CO-101[=<action>]
Comments: action = T to pulse the 101T output
C to pulse the 101C output
The virtual switch control commands require the use of select-before-operate logic. First, the command must
be selected using the CS-101 command. After the select command is entered, there is a 30 second window
during which the CO-101 control command will be accepted. The control selected and the operation selected
must match exactly or the operate command will be blocked. If the operate command is blocked, and error
message is output.

CS/CO-101 Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1 Read the current status of the virtual control switch.
>CO-101
>C
The returned setting indicates that the switch is in the after-close state.
EXAMPLE.1 Trip the breaker by closing the trip output of the virtual control switch.
>CS-101=T
>101=T SELECTED
>CO-101=T
>101=T EXECUTED

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-31

Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay
The virtual control switch state (after-trip or after-close) can be determined through the ASCII command
interface by using the RG-STAT (reports general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions, General Status Reporting for more information.
HMI screen 2.2.1 provides switch control and also displays the current status of the virtual control switches
(after-trip or after-close). As the previous Example 1 demonstrated, the state of each virtual selector switch
can be determined using the CO-101 command in a read-only mode.

4-32 Protection and Control BE1-851

SECTION 5 • METERING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5 • METERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
METERING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
METERING COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
M Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
M-I Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Tables
Table 5-1. Metering Functions Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

BE1-851 Metering i
SECTION 5 • METERING

GENERAL
The BE1-851 relay measures current inputs, displays those values in real time, records those values every
one-quarter second, and calculates other quantities from the measured inputs.

METERING FUNCTIONS
Metered values are viewed through any communication port using serial commands or at the front panel
HMI. Metering functions are summarized in the following paragraphs and in Table 5-1. For assistance with
navigating through the HMI metering screens, refer to Figure 10-5 of Section 10, Human-Machine Interface.

Current
Metered current includes A phase current, B phase current, C phase current, and neutral current. Other
metered current includes negative sequence current and three-phase zero sequence (residual) current.
Table 5-1. Metering Functions Summary
Metering Function Serial HMI
Command Screen
All metered values M N/A
Current, all values M-I N/A
Current, A-phase M-IA 3.4
Current, B-phase M-IB 3.4
Current, C-phase M-IC 3.4
Current, Negative Sequence M-IQ 3.6
Current, Neutral M-IN 3.6

METERING COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

The following paragraphs describe each metering command and provide examples for using the commands.

M Command
Purpose: Reads all metered values.
Syntax: M
Comments: This command returns all measured and calculated metered data.

Example Read all metered values.

>M
M-IA=4.99A; M-IB=5.00A; M-IC=4.99A; M-IN=0.00A
M-IQ=0.02A;

BE1-851 Metering 5-1

M-I Command
Purpose: Read metered current in primary units.
Syntax: M-I[<phase>]
Comments: phase = A/B/C/N/Q or no entry
Example1. Read metered current values.
>M-I
M-IA=4.99A; M-IB=5.00A; M-IC=4.99A;M-IN=0.00A
M-IQ=0.02A;
Example2. Read the Phase-C current
>M-IC
4.99A

5-2 Metering BE1-851

SECTION 6 • REPORTING AND ALARM
FUNCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6 • REPORTING AND ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
RELAY IDENTIFIER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
IRIG Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Setting the Clock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
SG-CLK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Reading and Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
RG-DATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
RG-TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
GENERAL STATUS REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
General Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Input (1234) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Output (A12345) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
CO-OUT (A12345) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
CO-43/143/243/343 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CO-101 (101SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CO-Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Active Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Recloser (79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Logic Var (00-31), Logic Var (32-63) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Active Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Breaker (52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Diag/Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Other Report-General Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
DEMAND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Demand Calculation and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Setting Demand Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
SG-DI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Retrieving Demand Reporting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
RD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
RD-TI/YI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
RD-PI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Overload and Unbalance Alarms Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
SA-DI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
BREAKER MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Breaker Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Programming the Breaker Status Reporting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
SB-LOGIC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
RB-OPCNTR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Breaker Duty Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Setting the Breaker Duty Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
SB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Retrieving Breaker Duty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
RB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Breaker Clearing Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Breaker Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
SA-BKR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions i

 TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
FAULT REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Fault Reporting Trigger Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
SG-TRIGGER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Setting the Targets Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
SG-TARG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Retrieving Target Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
RG-TARG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Fault Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Fault Summary Report Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Retrieving Fault Report Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
RF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Oscillographic Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Retrieving Oscillographic Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Retrieving SER Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
RS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
ALARMS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Relay Trouble Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Major, Minor, and Logic Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Programming Alarm Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
SA-MAJ/MIN/LGC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Retrieving and Resetting Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
RA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Links Between Programmable Alarms and BESTlogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Programmable Alarms Controlled by BESTlogic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Programmable Alarms Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
SA-RESET Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
BESTlogic Elements Controlled by Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
RG-VER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Figures
Figure 6-1. Protective Fault Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Figure 6-2. Trip Circuit Voltage And Continuity Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-3. TCM With Other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Figure 6-4. Programmable Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

Tables
Table 6-1. SG-ID Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Table 6-2. SG-CLK Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Table 6-3. Logic Variable Status Report Format For Sensing Input Type H Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Table 6-4. Logic Variable Status Report Format For Sensing Input Type G Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Table 6-5. SG-DI Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Table 6-6. SA-DI Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Table 6-7. Legend for Figure 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Table 6-8. SB-DUTY Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Table 6-9. SA-BKR Command Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Table 6-10. SG-TRIGGER Command Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table 6-11. Protective Functions with Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table 6-12. SG-TARG Command Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Table 6-13. Oscillographic Hardware Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Table 6-14. Relay Trouble Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

ii Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

Table 6-15. Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Table 6-16. Programmable Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

Equations
Equation 6-1. Demand Current Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Equation 6-2. Exponential Response Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Equation 6-3. Step Change Demand Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions iii

SECTION 6 • REPORTING AND ALARM
FUNCTIONS
GENERAL
This section describes all of the reports that are available from the BE1-851 relay, how to set the
reporting functions, and how to retrieve these reports. Alarm functions are included in this section
because they perform a reporting function. This section also describes all of the alarm functions, how to
set those functions, and how to program (map) the major and minor alarms.

RELAY IDENTIFIER INFORMATION

BE1-851 relays have two relay identification fields: Relay ID and Station ID. These fields are used in the
header information lines of the Fault Reports, the Oscillograph Records, and the Sequence of Events
Records. Relay and Station identification assignments are made using the SG-ID command.

Table 6-1. SG-ID Command Parameters

Setting Range Default

relayID 1 to 30 alphanumeric BE1-851

characters

stationID 1 to 30 alphanumeric SUBSTATION_1

characters
SG-ID Command
Purpose: Reads or changes the relay ID and station ID used in reports.
Syntax: SG–ID[=<relayID (up to 10 char)>,<stationID (up to 30 char)>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings. No spaces are allowed in
the label names. Command parameters are defined in Table 6-1.
Example1. Enter a relayID of FEEDER_3 and a stationID of HIGHLAND_NORTH.
>SG-ID=FEEDER_3,HIGHLAND_NORTH
Example2. Display the relayID and stationID labels.
>SG-ID
FEEDER_3,HIGHLAND_NORTH

CLOCK
The clock function is used by the demand reporting function, the fault reporting function, the oscillograph
recording function, and the sequence of events recorder function to time-stamp events. The clock function
records the year in two digit format. None of the functions that use the clock perform any date math
calculations or sorting of information by date so the year 2000 does not present a problem. The clock does
not have a battery backup. Each time the relay powers up, the clock must be reset via the IRIG port, the
HMI, or ASCII command interface.

IRIG Port
IRIG time code signal connections are located on the rear panel. When a valid time code signal is detected
at the IRIG port, it automatically synchronizes the internal clock to the time code signal. Note that the IRIG
time code signal doesn’t contain year information. For this reason, it is necessary to enter the date even
when using an IRIG signal. Year information is stored in nonvolatile memory so that when operating power
is restored after an outage and the clock is re-synchronized, the current year is restored. When the clock
rolls over to a new year, the year is automatically incremented in nonvolatile memory. An alarm bit is
included in the programmable alarm function for loss of IRIG signal. The alarm point monitors for IRIG signal
loss once a valid signal is detected at the IRIG port.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-1

The IRIG input is fully isolated and accepts a demodulated (dc level-shifted) signal. The input signal must
be 3.5 volts or higher to be recognized as a valid signal. Maximum input signal level is ±20 volts. Input
resistance is nonlinear and rated at 4 kilo-ohms at 3.5 volts. Section 12, Installation, Communication
Connectors and Settings identifies the terminal connections for the IRIG function.

Setting the Clock Function

Time reporting can be displayed in 12 or 24 hour format. When operating in the 24 hour format, the A.M./P.M.
parameter is placed between the minutes and seconds parameters (10:24P23.004 indicates 10:24 in the
evening). The default time format is 24 hours. Date reporting format can display the date in mm/dd/yy or
dd/mm/yy format. The default date format is mm/dd/yy. The relay clock can also accommodate daylight
saving time changes. Automatic daylight saving time adjustments are optional and are disabled by default.
Time and date settings are made using the SG-CLK command. See Table 6-2.

Table 6-2. SG-CLK Command Settings

Parameter Range Default
date format d (day first) m
m (month first)
time format 12 (12 hour format) 24
24 (24 hour format)
dst enable 0 (daylight saving time 0
disabled)
1 (daylight saving time enabled)

SG-CLK Command
Purpose: Reads or sets the format of the time and date display.
Syntax: SG-CLK[=<date format (M/D)>,<time format (12/24)>,<dst enable (0/1)>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings. Command settings are
defined in Table 6-2.
Example1. Read the clock format settings.
>SG-CLK
M,24,0
Example2. Enable daylight saving time correction.
>SG-CLK=,,1

Reading and Setting the Clock

Clock information can be read and set at the front panel HMI and through the communication ports. Write
access to reports is required to set the clock at the HMI and communication ports. An alarm point is
provided in the programmable alarms to detect when the relay has powered up and the clock has not been
set. Time and date information is read and set at HMI screen 4.6. Time and date information is read and
programmed through the communication ports using the RG-DATE and RG-TIME commands.

RG-DATE Command
Purpose: Report or set the clock’s date setting.
Syntax: RG-DATE[=<M/D/Y>] or RG-DATE[=<D-M-Y>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or R is required to change settings. d and m settings are
based on SG-CLK setting. Command settings are defined in

Example Enter the date for December 31, 1999.

>RG-DATE=12/31/99 or RG-DATE=12-31-99

6-2 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

RG-TIME Command
Purpose: Report or set the clock’s time setting.
Syntax: RG-TIME[=hr:mn:sc] or RG-TIME[=hr:mn<f>sc]
Comments: Password access privilege G or R is required to change settings. Default time setting on
power-up is 00:00:00. Command settings are defined in Table 6-4.
Example1. Read the clock’s current time setting (programmed in 12 hour format).
>RG-TIME
12:24P45
Example2. Set a new time in 12 hour format.
>RG-TIME=11:24P00

GENERAL STATUS REPORTING

BE1-851 relays have extensive capabilities for reporting relay status. This is important for determining the
health and status of the system for diagnostics and troubleshooting. Throughout this manual, reference is
made to the RG-STAT (report general, status) report and the appropriate HMI screens for determining the
status of various functions.

General Status Report

A General Status report is available through the communication ports using the RG-STAT command. This
report lists all of the information required to determine the status of the relay. An example of a typical
general status report follows. In the explanation of what each line represents, cross-references are made
to the corresponding HMI screens that contain that data.
INPUT(1234) STATUS : 0000
OUTPUT(A12345) STATUS : 000000
CO-OUT(A12345) STATUS : LLLLLL
CO-43/143/243/343 STATUS : 0000
CO-101(101SC) STATUS : AFTER CLOSE(1)
CO-GROUP STATUS : L
ACTIVE LOGIC STATUS : USER
LOGIC VAR(00-31) STATUS : 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
LOGIC VAR(32-63) STATUS : 00000000 00000000 00000010 00011000
RECLOSER(79) STATUS : OFF
ACTIVE GROUP STATUS : 0
BREAKER(52) STATUS : CLOSED
DIAG/ALARM STATUS : 2 RELAY, 0 LOGIC, 0 MAJOR, 0 MINOR

Input (1234)
This line reports the status of contact sensing inputs IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4. Input information is available
at HMI screen 1.5.1. A 0 indicates a de-energized input and a 1 indicates an energized input. See Section
3, Input and Output Functions for more information about contact sensing input operation.

Output (A12345)
Current output contact status is reported on this line. This information is also available at HMI screen 1.5.2.
A 0 indicates a de-energized output and a 1 indicates an energized output. More information about output
contact operation is available in Section 3, Input and Output Functions.

CO-OUT (A12345)
This line reports the logic override of the output contacts. Logic override status is reported at HMI screen
1.5.3 and through the CO-OUT command. Section 3, Input and Output Functions provides more information
about output logic override control.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-3

CO-43/143/243/343
Virtual switch function status is reported on this line. This information is also available at HMI screen 1.5.4.
See Section 4, Protection and Control Functions for more information about virtual switch operation.

CO-101 (101SC)
This line reports the current status of the virtual breaker control switch slip contact output. More information
about the virtual breaker control switch is available in Section 4, Protection and Control Functions.

CO-Group
The logic override status of the setting group selection function is reported on this line. For more information
about this function, refer to Section 4, Protection and Control Functions, Setting Groups.

Active Logic
This line reports the name of the active logic scheme. The active logic scheme name can also be viewed
at HMI screen 5 and through the SL-N command. See Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Logic
Scheme Names for more information about this function.

Recloser (79)
The status of the recloser is reported on this line. HMI screen 1.1 also reports this information. More
information about the recloser function is available in Section 4, Protection and Control Functions.

Logic Var (00-31), Logic Var (32-63)

These three lines report the status of each BESTlogic variable. These lines can be entered into Table 6-3
and 6-4 to determine the status of each logic variable. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic provides
more information about BESTlogic variables.

Active Group
The active setting group is indicated on this line. HMI screen 1.5.5 also provides this information. See
Section 4, Protection and Control Functions for more information about setting groups.

Breaker (52)
This line reports the state of the breaker. This information is also available at HMI screen 1.5.6. More
information about breaker status is provided in the Breaker Monitoring subsection.

Diag/Alarm
This line reports the status of the Relay Trouble Alarm, Major Alarm, Minor Alarm, and Logic Alarm. The
status of these alarms can be viewed at HMI screen 1.3. Front panel LEDs also indicate the status of the
Relay Trouble Alarm, Minor Alarm, and Major Alarm. Alarm status is also available through the
communication ports. The SA-MIN command repors the Minor Alarm status, the SA-MAJ command reports
the Major Alarm status, and the SA-LGC command reports the Logic Alarm status.

6-4 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Table 6-3. Logic Variable Status Report Format For Sensing Input Type H Relays.
1 1 1
1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 7 7
0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 T T T T T T B 1 1 1 9 7 9
T T T T T T B 1 1 1 P P N N Q Q F P N Q 1 1 2 3 7 R 9 7 S
P P N N Q Q F P N Q P P P P P P P P P P 6 6 4 4 4 4 9 N L 9 C
T T T T T T T T T T U U U U U U U U U U 2 2 3 3 3 3 C G O F B 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

O
R A A A U
1 S L L L T
V V V V V V 1 1 0 T M M M 1
V V V V V V V V V V O O O O O O I I I I 0 0 1 K L M M M S S S S
O O O O O O O O O O 1 1 1 1 1 1 N N N N 1 1 S E G A I O G G G G
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 T C C Y C J N N O 1 2 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

Table 6-4. Logic Variable Status Report Format For Sensing Input Type G Relays.

1 1 2 3 5 1 5 1 2 3 1
5 5 5 5 5 5 1 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 7
0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 T 0 T 0 0 0 B 1 1 1 9 7 9
T T T T T T B 1 1 1 P T N T T T F P N N 1 1 2 3 7 R 9 7 S
P P N N N N F P N N P P P N N N P P P P 6 6 4 4 4 4 9 N L 9 C
T T T T T T T T T T U P U P P P U U U U 2 2 3 3 3 3 C G O F B 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

R A A A O
1 S L L L U
V V V V V V 1 1 0 T M M M T
V V V V V V V V V V O O O O O O I I I I 0 0 1 K L M M 1 S S S S
O O O O O O O O O O 1 1 1 1 1 1 N N N N 1 1 S E G A I M G G G G
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 T C C Y C J N O O 1 2 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

See Table 7-1 for a cross-references of each BESTlogic variable name with a brief description of the variable
function.
Other Report-General Commands
There are several other RG commands in addition to the RG-STAT command. These include RG-TIME,
RG-DATE, RG-TARG, and RG-VER. These commands are covered in detail in respective paragraphs in
this section. As with other commands, a combination read command is available to read several items in
a group. If the command RG is entered by itself, the relay reports the time, date, target information, and
other reports in the following example. RG-VER and RG-STAT commands have multiple line outputs and
these are not read at the RG command.

Example Read the general reports.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-5

 >RG
RG-DATE=12/31/99
RG-TIME=23:59:59
RG-TARG=NONE

DEMAND FUNCTIONS
The demand reporting function continuously calculates demand values for the three-phase currents, neutral
current, and negative sequence current. Demand values are recorded with time stamps for Peak Since
Reset, Yesterday’s Peak, and Today’s Peak. Programmable alarm points can be set to alarm if thresholds
are exceeded for overload and unbalanced loading conditions.

Demand Calculation and Reporting

An algorithm in the demand reporting function digitally simulates a thermal or exponential response.
Demand values are computed by an exponential algorithm with the demand interval or response period
defined as the time taken by the meter to reach 90 percent of the final value for a step change in the current
being measured. Demand interval can be set independently for the phase, neutral, and negative sequence
demand calculations. The reactive power and power demand intervals always match the phase demand
interval setting.
The following equation is used to calculate demand current.

DI n = DI n -1+ K ( M I - DI n-1 ) Equation 6-1. Demand Current Equation

where
DI n = demand current for sampling period n (tn = 15 seconds)
MI n = average metered current value for sampling period n
K = exponential response constant

The following equation is used for K.

tn
-
Equation 6-2. Exponential Response Constant
K = ( 1- e
0 . 43 4 T I
)

where
TI = demand interval (programmed with SG-DI command)
tn = fixed demand update rate of 15 seconds

Demand is calculated for a step change in current by the following equation.

tn
-
Equation 6-3. Step Change Demand Calculation
DI = ( 1- e
0 . 43 4 T I
) ·M I

Demand Calculation Example for a Step Change in Current

If the current steps from 0 to 1,000 amperes, then the peak demand will change from 0 to 900 amperes after
one demand interval (t = TI).
Each time that the value in the current demand register is updated, it is compared to the values stored in the
Peak Since Reset and the Today’s Peak registers. If the new demand is greater, the new value and time
stamp is entered into the appropriate registers. In addition, the demand reporting function keeps an
additional set of registers for Yesterday’s Peak. Each day at midnight, the demand reporting function
replaces the values and time stamps stored in yesterday’s peak registers with the values and time stamps
from today’s peak registers. It then starts recording new information in Today’s Peak registers. Demand

6-6 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

registers are stored in volatile memory.
Today’s Peak and Yesterday’s Peak registers are read only. Values in the Peak Since Reset registers can
be reset to zero or preset to a predetermined value. For example, if some loads will be switched to remove
a feeder from service and you don’t want the abnormal loading to affect the Peak Since Reset register
values, these values can be read prior to switching the loads. Once the abnormal loading condition has
passed, the registers can be reset to the original values.

Setting Demand Reporting

Demand reporting is setup using the SG-DI (setting general, demand interval) command.

Table 6-5. SG-DI Command Settings

Setting Range Increment Unit of Measure Default

Phase Demand Interval 0 to 60 1 Minutes 15

Neutral Demand Interval 0 to 60 1 Minutes 1

Negative Sequence 0 to 60 1 Minutes 1

Demand Interval

SG-DI Command
Purpose: Read or set the Phase (IA/IB/IC/), Neutral, and Negative Sequence interval.
Syntax: SG-DI[p][=<interval>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings. Command settings are
defined in Table 6-4.

Example Set the Neutral demand for five minutes.

>SG-DIN=5

Retrieving Demand Reporting Information

Values and time stamps in the demand registers are reported in primary amperes. They can be read at the
front panel HMI and through the communication ports.
Today’s Peak, Yesterday’s Peak, and Peak Since Reset demand values are accessed through HMI screen
4.4, DEMAND REPORTS. Demand values viewed at the HMI can be reset by pressing the Reset key.
When the Reset key is pressed, the viewed register value is set to zero and then updated on the next
processing loop with the currently calculated demand value. No write access is needed to reset demand
register values at the HMI. Its also possible to preset a value into the Peak Since Demand registers. This
can be done by pressing the Edit key. Write access to the Reports functional area is required to preset
values at the HMI.
Values and time stamps in the demand registers can also be read through the communication ports by using
the RD (report demands) command.

RD Command
Purpose: Report all demand data.
Syntax: RD
Comments: RD reports Today’s Peak, Yesterday’s Peak, and Peak Since Reset demand data for all
Phase current, Neutral current, Negative Sequence current, three-phase reactive power,
and three-phase power.

Example Read all demand register data.

>RD

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-7

 RD-TIA:0.00A 01:21 01/01/99; RD-TIB:0.00A 01:21 01/01/99
RD-TIC:0.00A 01:21 01/01/99; RD-TIN:0.00A 01:21 01/01/99
RD-TIQ:0.02A 00:07 01/01/99
RD-YIA:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99; RD-YIB:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99
RD-YIC:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99; RD-YIN:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99
RD-YIQ:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99
RD-PIA=0.00A 01:21 01/01/99; RD-PIB=0.00A 01:21 01/01/99
RD-PIC=0.00A 01:21 01/01/99; RD-PIN=0.00A 01:21 01/01/99
RD-PIQ=0.02A 00:07 01/01/99
Demand information specific to current, can be obtained by including an object name with the command
function (R) and subgroup (D). Today’s Peak, Yesterday’s Peak, and Peak Since Reset information for
current is available using the RD-TI, RD-YI, and RD-PI commands.

RD-TI/YI Command
Purpose: Reads Today’s Peak (TI) or Yesterday’s Peak (YI) Demand current values.
Syntax: RD-TI[<p>] or RD-YI[<p>]
Comments: p = A/B/C/N/Q. RD-TI and RD-YI command settings are listed in Table 6-8.

Example1. Read today’s C phase ampere demand current.

>RD-TIC
8.77A 16:44 06/30/99
Example2. Read all demand current values for yesterday.
>RD-YI
RD-YIA:8.68A 17:15 01/01/99; RD-YIB:8.66A 17:15 01/01/99
RD-YIC:8.67A 17:15 01/01/99; RD-YIN:0.24A 17:15 01/01/99
RD-YIQ:0.25A 17:15 01/01/99

RD-PI Command
Purpose: Read or reset peak demand current values.
Syntax: RD-PI[<p>[=0]]
Comments: p = A/B/C/N/Q. RD-PI command settings are listed in Table 6-9 .

Example1. Read the peak demand current for phase A.

>RD-PIA
9.08A 12:09 08/02/99
Example2. Read all peak demand current values.
>RD-PI
RD-PIA=9.08A 14:33 07/10/99; RD-PIB=9.09A 14:33 07/10/99
RD-PIC=9.08A 14:33 07/10/99; RD-PIN=9.77A 18:05 07/05/99
RD-PIQ=8.77A 09:28 06/15/99
Example3. Reset all peak demand current values.
>RD-PI=0

Overload and Unbalance Alarms Function

The programmable demand alarm includes alarm points for monitoring phase demand thresholds for phase
overload alarms, and neutral and negative sequence demand thresholds for unbalanced loading alarms.
Each time the current demand register is updated, the register value is compared to the corresponding
demand alarm threshold. If a threshold is exceeded, the alarm point is set. The Alarm Functions subsection
provides more information about using the programmable alarms reporting function.
Demand alarm thresholds are for current is set using the SA-DI (setting alarm, demand current) command.

Table 6-6. SA-DI Command Settings

6-8 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Range

Setting 5A 1A Increment Unit of Measure Default

Demand 0 = disabled 0 = disabled 0.01 for 0.1 to 9.99 secondary 0

Alarm 0.5–16.0 0.1–3.2 0.1 for 10.0 to 16.0 amperes
Threshold

SA-DI Command
Purpose: Read or set current demand alarm thresholds.
Syntax: SA-DI[p][=<alarm level>]
Comments: Table 6-5 lists the specifications for the demand alarm settings.

Example Set the demand alarm thresholds at six amperes for A, B, and C Phase current and three
amperes for Neutral and negative sequence current.
>SA-DIP=6.0; SA-DIN=3.0; SA-DIQ=3.0

BREAKER MONITORING
Breaker monitoring helps manage equipment inspection and maintenance expenses by providing extensive
monitoring and alarms for the circuit breaker. Breaker monitoring functions include breaker status and
operations counter reporting, fault current interruption duty monitoring, and trip-speed monitoring. Each
function can be set up as a programmable alarm. The Alarm Functions subsection has more information
about the use of programmable alarms. The breaker trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor is a related
function and is described in the Trip Circuit Monitor subsection.

Breaker Status Reporting

The breaker status monitoring function monitors the position of the breaker for reporting purposes. Opening
breaker strokes are also counted and recorded in the breaker operations counter register. Circuit breaker
status is also used by the breaker trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor. The Trip Circuit Monitor
subsection provides more details.

Programming the Breaker Status Reporting Function

Since the relay is completely programmable, it’s necessary to program which logic variable will monitor
breaker status. This is done with the SB-LOGIC (setting breaker, logic) command. It should be noted that
even though a BESTlogic expression is used to make this setting, this setting isn’t included in the section
on BESTlogic settings. The SB-LOGIC command is included here because it is related to breaker
monitoring. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic has more information about programming the relay
with BESTlogic.

SB-LOGIC Command
Purpose: Read or set breaker status logic.
Syntax: SB-LOGIC[=<breaker close logic>]
Comments: breaker close logic = BESTlogic term that is TRUE when the breaker is closed (i.e., 52a
logic)

Example Set the relay to monitor input 3 so that when the breaker is closed, the input is FALSE. (The
52b contact is wired to IN3.

>SB-LOGIC=/IN3Retrieving Breaker Status and Operation Counter Information

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-9

 Breaker auxiliary Protective
Protective Protective contact changes element
element element state drops out
picks up trips

SG-TRIGGER
-Trip

-Pickup

-Logic

PU + logic Fast
dropout
Fast dropout current
current detector
detector drops out

Breaker (SB-LOGIC setting)

status

Fault summary
report triggered
A (When SG-TRIGGER (PU or Logic) is TRUE)

B
Targets logged

Fault clearing C (When SG-TRIGGER (PU or Logic) is TRUE)

time calculated

Breaker D
operate time
3 cycle
Post-trigger recording
1/4 to 5 cycles
E
Oscillographic pre-trigger (When SG-TRIGGER (PU or Logic) is TRUE) of pre-trigger Post-trigger
Record (Default: 15 cycle record, 3 cycle pre-trigger, 12 cycle post-trigger) When
SG-TRIGGER
Fault currents F (PU or Logic)
goes FALSE
recorded

Red TRIP LED G (When SG-TRIGGER (PU) is TRUE)

flashing

Red TRIP LED H (When SG-TRIGGER (Trip) is TRUE)

solid

Breaker interruption I
duty
D2849-09.vsd
05-26-99

Setting group J (When SG-TRIGGER (PU) is TRUE)

change blocked

Figure 6-1. Protective Fault Analysis

Table 6-7.

6-10 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Table 6-7. Legend for Figure 6-1
Call-Out Description

A A fault summary report and an oscillograph record is triggered when either the SG-TRIGGER
PICKUP or PICKUP expression becomes TRUE.

B During the time that the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression is TRUE, targets are logged from
each of the protective functions that reach a TRIP state. If a protective function is not being
used for tripping purposes, the associated target function can be disabled through the SG-
TARG setting.

C Fault clearing time is calculated as the duration of the time that either the SG-TRIGGER
PICKUP or PICKUP expression is TRUE.

D Breaker operate time is calculated as the time from when the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression
becomes TRUE until the fast-dropout current detector senses that the breaker has
successfully interrupted the current in all poles of the breaker.

E A second oscillograph record is triggered to record the end of the fault if the SG-TRIGGER
TRIP expression becoming TRUE. If the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression does not become
TRUE, (as would occur if the fault were cleared by a down stream device), the fault current
recorded in the fault summary report will be for the power system cycle ending two cycles
before the end of the fault record. This is also the case if the fault record was triggered using
the RF-TRIG command.

F The fault currents are recorded in the fault summary report and on the target screen of the
HMI for the power system cycle immediately following the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression
becoming true. If the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression does not become true, as would occur
if the fault were cleared by a down stream device, the fault current recorded in the fault
summary report will be for the power system cycle ending two cycles before the end of the
fault record. This is also the case if the fault record was triggered through the ASCII
command interface by the RF-Trig command.

G During the time that the SG-TRIGGER PICKUP expression is TRUE, the red Trip LED on the
front panel flashes indicating that the relay is picked up.

H During the time the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression is TRUE, the red Trip LED on the front
panel lights steadily indicating that the relay is in a tripped state. If targets have been logged
for the fault, the Trip LED is sealed in until the targets have been reset.

I Breaker operations and interruption duty functions are driven by the breaker status function.
The operations counter is incremented on breaker opening. The magnitude of the currents
that are used for accumulating breaker duty are recorded for the power system cycle ending
when the breaker status changes state. Thus, breaker duty is accumulated every time that
the breaker opens even if it isn’t opening under fault.

J Setting group changes are blocked when the SG-TRIGGER PICKUP expression is TRUE
to prevent protective functions from being reinitialized with new operating parameters while
a fault is occurring.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-11

 NOTE
When the NOT symbol (/) is used, the symbol is applied to the variable immediately
following the symbol.

Current breaker status can be read from HMI screen 1.5.6 and through the communication ports using
the RG-STAT command. The General Status Reporting subsection provides more information about this
command.
The number of breaker operations can be read at HMI screen 4.3.1. The counter value can be adjusted
using the Edit key. This allows the relay counter value to be matched to an existing mechanical cyclometer
on a breaker mechanism. Write access to the reports functions must be gained to edit this value at the HMI.
Breaker operations can be read or set through the communication ports using the RB-OPCNTR (report
breaker, operations counter) command.

RB-OPCNTR Command
Purpose: Read or set breaker operations counter.
Syntax: RB-OPCNTR[=<#operations>]
Comments: #operations = number of breaker operations recorded (0-99999)
If the counter exceeds 99999, the counter will wrap back to 0.

Read the number of breaker operations.

>RB-OPCNTR
14
Example1. Synchronize the relay breaker operations counter with an external counter reading of 65
operations.
>RB-OPCNTR=65
The breaker operations counter can be monitored to give an alarm when the value exceeds a threshold. See
Breaker Alarms in this section for more information about this feature.

Breaker Duty Monitoring

When the breaker opens, the current interrupted in each pole of the circuit breaker is accumulated by the
breaker duty monitor. Breaker opening is defined by the breaker status monitoring function (SB-LOGIC).
Figure 6-1 illustrates breaker status (SB-LOGIC) during a fault and protective trip. Table 6-6 serves as a
legend for the call-outs of Figure 6-1.
Each time the breaker trips, the breaker duty monitor updates two sets of registers for each pole of the
breaker. In the Accumulated I Duty registers, the breaker duty monitor adds the measured current in primary
amperes. In the Accumulated I2 Duty registers, the function adds the measured current squared in primary
amperes. The user selects which of the two sets of duty registers are reported and monitored when setting
up the breaker duty monitor.
Even though duty register values are calculated and stored in primary amperes or primary amperes-squared,
the duty value is reported as a percent of maximum. The user sets the value that the relay will use for 100
percent duty (DMAX). The value set for maximum duty is used directly for reporting the accumulated I Duty.
The square of the value set for maximum duty is used for reporting the accumulated I2 Duty.
Since the true measure of contact wear includes a factor for arcing time (t), an assumed arcing time for the
breaker should be included when choosing the setting for 100 percent interruption duty (DMAX).
When testing the relay by injecting currents into the relay, the values in the duty registers should be read
and recorded prior to the start of testing. Once testing is complete and the relay is returned to service, the
registers should be reset to the original pre-test values. A block accumulation logic input may be used when
testing so that simulated breaker duty is not added to the duty registers. The BLKBKR logic function is an
OR logic term (e.g. - IN1 or VO7) which blocks the breaker monitoring logic when TRUE (1). BLKBKR is
set to zero to disable blocking. When breaker monitoring is blocked (logic expression equals 1), breaker

6-12 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

duty is not accumulated.

Setting the Breaker Duty Monitoring Function

Breaker duty monitoring is programmed using the SB-DUTY (setting breaker, duty) command.
Table 6-8. SB-DUTY Command Settings
Function Range/Purpose Default

0 = disabled 0
mode 1=I
2 = I2

0 to 4.2e+7 0e+0
The dmax parameter represents the maximum duty
dmax that the breaker contacts can withstand before
needing service. dmax is programmed in primary
amperes using exponential floating point format.

OR logic term (e.g., IN1, or VO7) that blocks the 0

breaker monitoring logic when TRUE (1). A setting of
BLKBKR logic
0 disables blocking (breaker operations are no
longer counted).

SB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read or set the breaker contact duty.
Syntax: SB-DUTY[=<mode>,<dmax>,<BLKBKR logic>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings. Command specifications
are listed in Table 6-12.SB-DUTY Command Settings

Example Enable breaker monitoring with duty calculated as *I2. Maximum duty should be 20 kilo-
amperes. Breaker monitoring should be blocked when input 3 is energized.
>SB-DUTY=2,20E3,IN3

Retrieving Breaker Duty Information

Breaker duty values can be read at HMI screen 4.3.2. Duty values can be changed by using the front panel
Edit key. Write access to reports is required to edit breaker duty values. Duty values can also be read or
changed through the communication ports using the RB-DUTY command.

RB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read or set the breaker contact duty log.
Syntax: RB-DUTY[<phase>[=<%duty>]]
Comments: phase = A, B, or C. No entry for <phase> will read or write to all phases.
%duty = accumulated duty expressed in percent of DMAX (set by SB-DUTY command)

Example1. Read all contact duty values.

>RB-DUTY
RB-DUTYA=92%; RB-DUTYB=23%; RB-DUTYC=28%
Example2. Reset the A-phase duty after maintenance was performed.
>RB-DUTYA=0

Breaker Clearing Time Monitoring

The breaker clearing time monitor tracks the time from when a trip output occurs (defined by the TRIP logic
expression) to when the fast dropout current detector observes that current is zero in all three breaker poles.
This time is reported as a line in the fault summary reports. See the Fault Reporting subsection for more

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-13

information about the TRIP logic expression and Fault Summary Reports.
Breaker clearing time can be monitored to give an alarm when the value exceeds a threshold. The following
Breaker Alarms subsection provides more information about this feature.

Breaker Alarms
Three alarm points are included in the programmable alarms for checking breaker monitoring functions.
Each alarm point can be programmed to monitor any of the three breaker monitoring functions: operations
counter, interruption duty, or clearing time. An alarm threshold can be programmed to monitor each function.
Alternately, three different thresholds can be programmed to monitor one of the monitored functions. Breaker
alarms are programmed using the SA-BKR command. Command specifications are summarized in Table
6-9.
Table 6-9. SA-BKR Command Specifications
Function Range/Purpose Default

0=Disable, 1 equals breaker alarm function enabled and set 0

for percent duty, 2=equals breaker alarm function enabled and
Mode
set for operations counting, 3=breaker alarm function enabled
and set for breaker operate time.

0 to 100%, Increment=0.01, Measured in % of DMAX Which is 0

programmed using the SB-DUTY command. The breaker to
Alarm Limit (in mode 1)
be monitored (CT1 or CT2) Is also programmed using the SB-
DUTY command.

0 to 99999, Increment=1, Number of operations counter value 0

alarm limit (in mode 2)
which when reached would cause an alarm.

Ranges are 20 to 1000 milliseconds, and 2 to 60 cycles). 0

Setting is reported in milliseconds if less than 1 second, but
alarm limit (in mode 3)
may be entered in milliseconds (m), or seconds (s), or cycles
(c).

SA-BKR Command
Purpose: Read or set breaker alarm settings.
Syntax: SA-BKR[n][=<mode>,<alarm limit>]
Comments: mode = selects the breaker function to be monitored
alarm limit = expressed in a value defined by mode parameter. The alarm limit for mode 1 is
entered as a percentage of DMAX. The alarm limit for mode 2 represents the counter value
which when reached, causes an alarm. The alarm limit for mode 3 represents the fault
breaker operate time.

Example Program breaker alarm point number 1 at 20 operations, point 2 at 50 percent duty, and
point 3 for slow breaker alarm for clearing times greater than 8 cycles.
>SA-BKR1=2,20
>SA-BKR2=1,50
>SA-BKR3=3,8c

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR

The trip circuit monitor continually monitors the circuit breaker trip circuit for voltage and continuity. A closed
breaker with no voltage detected across the trip contacts can indicate that a trip circuit fuse is open or there
is a loss of continuity in the trip coil circuit.
The trip circuit monitor checks for voltage and continuity in the breaker trip circuit. A loss of voltage across
the trip contacts when the breaker is closed can indicate that either the fuse supplying the circuit is open or
the trip coil circuit lacks continuity. Breaker status (open or closed) is obtained through the breaker status

6-14 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

reporting function (configured by the SB-LOGIC command).
The detector circuit used by the trip circuit monitor is hardwired across the OUT1 contact. This contact is
used in all of the preprogrammed logic schemes as the main trip output. The detector circuit draws less than
1 milliampere of current through the trip coil when the breaker is closed. Figure 6-2 illustrates typical trip
circuit monitor connections for the BE1-851.
If the breaker status reporting function detects a closed breaker and no trip circuit voltage is sensed by the
trip circuit monitor after the appropriate coordination time delay (about 500 msec.), an alarm bit in the
programmable alarms function is set and the OUT1MON BESTlogic variable is set to TRUE.

Trip Circuit Relay Circuit

+ +
Monitor
Other 851 851 R
Relays IN6 OUT1 52

Trip
52 Status

851
52 IN3
TC
D2850-13.vsd
06-25-99
- -
Figure 6-2. Trip Circuit Voltage And Continuity Monitor

CAUTION
Applications that place other device inputs in parallel with the breaker trip coil may not
perform as desired. The connection of other devices in parallel with the trip coil causes
a voltage divider to occur when the breaker or trip circuit is open. This may cause false
tripping of the other devices and prevent the BE1-851 trip circuit monitor from reliably
detecting an open circuit. Contact Basler Electric for advice on using this application.
The circuit monitor sensing element has the same rating as the power supply voltage.
If the trip circuit voltage is significantly greater than the power supply voltage (for
example, when using a capacitor trip device), the user should program the BE1-851 to
use one of the other output relays for tripping. In this situation, the trip circuit monitor
function will not be available.

In Figure 6-3, a 62x auxillary relay is shown. In this case, the impedance of the 62x coil is small
compared to the impedance of the TCM circuit so the TCM is always at logic 1. This prevents the TCM
logic from working, even if the trip coil is open. Normally, when redundant systems are used, each relay
system is on an individual circuit and the sensing input for each relay system is isolated from the tripping
circuit.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-15

 +
Monitor +
Other 851 851 V TCM
R
Relays IN6 OUT1 -
Trip
Trip
D2863-15.vsd 52a
06-25-99

+
62X 52TC V 62X
-
-
Figure 6-3. TCM With Other Devices

FAULT REPORTING
The fault reporting function records and reports information about faults that have been detected by the
relay. The BE1-851 provides many fault reporting features. These features include Fault Summary Reports,
Sequence of Events Recorder Reports, Oscillographic Records, and Targets.
Logic expressions are used to define the three conditions for fault reporting. These conditions are Trip,
Pickup, and Logic trigger. Figure 6-1 and Table 6-7 illustrate how each of these logic expressions are used
by the various relay functions. Note that even though BESTlogic expressions are used to define these
conditions, these expressions aren’t included here. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic provides
information about using BESTlogic to program the relay.

Trip
Trip expressions are used by the fault reporting function to start logging targets for an event and to record
the fault current magnitudes at the time of trip. The HMI uses the trip expression to seal-in the Trip LED. The
breaker monitoring function uses the trip expression to start counting the breaker operate time.

Pickup
Pickup expressions are used by the fault reporting function to time-stamp the fault summary record, time the
length of the fault from pickup to dropout (fault clearing time), and to control the recording of oscillograph
data. The HMI uses the pickup expression to control the flashing of the Trip LED. A pickup expression is also
used by the setting group selection function to prevent a setting group change during a fault.

Logic
Logic trigger expressions allow the fault reporting function to be triggered even though the relay in not picked
up. A logic trigger expression provides an input to the fault reporting function much as the pickup expression
does. This logic expression is not used by the setting group selection or the HMI.

6-16 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

Fault Reporting Trigger Settings
Trigger settings for fault reports are made using the SG-TRIGGER (settings-general, trigger) command.

Table 6-10. SG-TRIGGER Command Specifications

Function Purpose Default

Logic expression used to define Trip fault reporting condition.

TRIP trigger When this expression becomes TRUE (1), it triggers data VO11+ BFT
recording.

Logic expression used to define Pickup fault reporting

PU trigger condition. When this expression becomes TRUE (1), it VO12 + BFPU
initiates the pickup timing sequence.

Logic expression used to define the trigger for fault reporting

LOGIC trigger when relay is not picked up. When this expression is TRUE 0
(1), fault reporting is triggered.

SG-TRIGGER Command
Purpose: Read or set fault reporting trigger logic.
Syntax: SG-TRIGGER[=<TRIP trigger>,<PU trigger>,<LOGIC trigger>]
Comments: The BESTlogic rules for input logic only allow OR and NOT operators in the Boolean logic
equations. Command specifications are summarized in Table 6-9.

Example Set the trigger logic so that targets start logging for an event when the trip logic expression
(VO11) is TRUE or when breaker failure trip is TRUE. Time-stamp the fault record and start
measuring fault clearing time when the pickup logic expression VO12 is TRUE.
>SG-TRIGGER=VO11+BFT,VO12,0

Targets
Each protective function logs target information to the fault reporting function when a trip condition occurs
and the trip output of the function block becomes TRUE (refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-17, call-out B).
Target information can be viewed and reset at the HMI and through the communication ports.
Target logging for a protective function can be disabled if the function is used in a supervisory or monitoring
capacity. The following paragraphs describe how the relay is programmed to define which protective
functions log targets. Table 6-11 lists the Protective functions and the associated targets.

Table 6-11. Protective Functions with Targets

Protective Function Name Default

Phase instantaneous OC with settable time delay 50TP Enabled

Neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 50TN Enabled

Negative sequence instantaneous OC with settable time delay 50TQ Enabled

(Sensing input type H only)

Second Phase instantaneous OC with settable time delay 150TP Enabled

Second Neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 150TN Enabled

Second Negative sequence instantaneous OC with settable time delay 150TQ Enabled
(Sensing input type H only)

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-17

 Protective Function Name Default

Third Neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 250TN Enabled

(Sensing input type G only)

Fourth Neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 350TN Enabled

(Sensing input type G only)

Phase inverse time OC 51P Enabled

Neutral inverse time OC 51N Enabled

Negative sequence inverse time OC (Sensing input type H only) 51Q Enabled

Second neutral time OC (Sensing input type G only) 151N Enabled

General purpose logic timer 62 Off

General purpose logic timer 162 Off

Setting the Targets Function

Using the SG-TARG command, you can select which protective elements trigger a target and what type of
logic condition will reset the targets.

Table 6-12. SG-TARG Command Specifications

Setting Range/Purpose Default

Protective function blocks List of protective functions from Table 6-10. Each Per Table 6-15
with targeting enabled protective function is separated by a slash (/)

Target reset logic (+ = OR, / = NOT) Logic expression that resets latched 0
expression targets when true

SG-TARG Command
Purpose: Read or set which protective elements log targets to the fault reporting function.
Syntax: SG-TARG[=<x/x/..x>,<rst TARG logic>]
Comments: Command specifications are summarized in Table 6-15.

Example Set the relay to log targets for 50T and 150T instantaneous overcurrent functions, and the
breaker failure function. Reset targets with input 1
>SG-TARG=50T/150T/BF, IN1

Retrieving Target Information

Targets can be viewed at HMI screen 1.2 and through the communication ports using the RG-TARG (report
general, targets) command. The relay provides target information from the most recent trip event. Target
information is specific to an event; it is not cumulative. Targets for previous events are recorded in the fault
summary reports which are described in the following subsection.
When a protective trip occurs and targets are logged, the HMI Trip LED seals-in and screen 1.2 is
automatically displayed. The LCD scrolls between the targets and the fault current magnitudes that were
recorded during the fault. Pressing the HMI Reset key will clear these targets and the Trip LED. Password
access isn’t required to reset targets at the HMI.
The RG-TARG (report general-targets) command is used to read and reset targets through the
communication ports.

6-18 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

RG-TARG Command
Purpose: Read or reset target status.
Syntax: RG-TARG[=0]
Comments: Entering RG-TARG returns the target information logged during the most recent trip event.
Entering RG-TARG=0 clears the latched target data.

Example Read the targets.

>RG-TARG
50A, 50N, 150A, 150N

Fault Summary Reports

The BE1-851 records information about faults and creates fault summary reports. A maximum of 16 fault
summary reports are stored in the relay. The two most recent reports are stored in nonvolatile memory.
When a new fault summary report is generated, the relay discards the oldest of the 16 fault records and
replaces it with a new one. Each fault summary report is assigned a sequential number (from 1 to 255) by
the relay. After event number 255 has been assigned, the numbering starts over at 1.

Fault Summary Report Example

A fault summary report collects several items of information about a fault that can aid in determining why a
fault occurred without having to sort through all of the detailed information available. The following example
illustrates a typical fault summary report. Call-outs shown in the report are references to the legend of Table
6-6.
Example Fault Summary Report

Fault Date and Time. These lines report the date and time of the initial trigger of the event. This is based on
either the pickup logic expression or the logic trigger expression becoming TRUE as defined by the
SG-TRIGGER command. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out A.
Station ID and Relay ID. These lines report station and device identifier information as defined by the SG-ID
command.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-19

Relay Address. This line reports the communications port address that the report was requested from. The
relay address number is assigned using the SG-COM command, described in Section 11, ASCII Command
Interface.
Fault Number. This line reports the sequential number (from 1 to 255) assigned to the report by the BE1-851.
Fault Trigger. This line reports the logic variables in the pickup or logic trigger expressions that became
TRUE to trigger the recording of the event.
Event Type. This line reports the type of event that occurred. There are five fault event categories.
• Trip: A fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression and the relay tripped to clear the
fault.
• Pickup: A fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression but the relay never tripped
indicating that the fault was cleared by another device.
• Logic: A fault report was recorded by the logic trigger expression but no fault was detected as
defined by the pickup expression.
• Breaker Failure: A fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression and the breaker
failure trip became TRUE before the fault was cleared.
• RF=TRIG: A fault report was recorded by the ASCII command interface.
Active Group. This line reports what setting group was active at the time that the fault occurred.
Targets. This line reports the targets that were logged to the fault report between the time that the trip
expression became TRUE until the end of the fault. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out B.
Recloser State. This line reports the state of the recloser shot counter prior to the fault that triggered the
report.
Fault Clearing Time. This line reports the time from when the relay detected the fault until the relay detected
that the fault had cleared. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out C.
If the fault report was triggered by the RF-TRIG command, the recording of the report was terminated after
60 seconds and this line is reported as N/A.
If the pickup or logic expressions stay TRUE for more than 60 seconds, an alarm bit in the programmable
alarm function is set and this line is reported as N/A. In this situation, the fault reporting functions (including
targets) won’t operate again until the pickup and logic trigger expressions return to a FALSE state to enable
another trigger.
Breaker Operate Time. This line reports the breaker trip time from the breaker monitoring and alarm function.
This is the time measured from when the breaker is tripped until the fast-dropout current detector function
detects that the arc has been extinguished. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out D.
Oscillographic Reports. This line reports the number of oscillographic records(1 or 2)that are stored in
memory for this fault report. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out E. Recording of oscillographic
records is described in the Oscillographic Records subsection.
IA, IB, IC, IN, IQ. These lines report the current magnitudes measured for the power system cycle
immediately following the trip. If the fault is cleared prior to the relay tripping, the recorded fault currents are
for the power system cycle two cycles prior to the end of the fault. If the relay has been set to the Average
current measurement algorithm, these currents may not be representative due to the time constant inherent
in the measurement algorithm. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out F.

Retrieving Fault Report Information from the Relay

Fault Summary Directory Report. The fault reporting function provides a directory of fault summary reports
that lists the number assigned to the fault summary report along with the date and time of the fault, the event
type, and the total number of oscillography records stored in memory for that event. The event number is
important because it is required to retrieve information about that event from the relay. This directory report
can be accessed by using the RF command.

6-20 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

RF Command
Purpose: Read or reset fault report data.
Syntax: RF[-n/NEW][=0/TRIG]
Comments: Use of RF command syntax is summarized in.

Example Fault summary Report

>RF
BE1-851 FAULT DIRECTORY
REPORT DATE : 01/01/99
REPORT TIME : 01:12:25
STATION ID : SUBSTATION_1
RELAY ID : BE1-851
RELAY ADDRESS : 0
NEW FAULTS : 3 (11:22:21 05/27/99-00:00:47 01/01/99)
TOTAL FAULTS : 3 (11:22:21 05/27/99-00:00:47 01/01/99)
-#- --DATE-- --TIME-- --EVENT TYPE-- --OSC--
197 01/01/99 00:00:47 TRIP 2
196 05/27/99 11:22:30 TRIP 0
195 05/27/99 11:22:21 TRIP 0
New Faults Counter. One line of the fault summary directory report contains the new faults counter. The new
faults counter tracks how many new fault reports have been recorded since the new faults counter was reset
to 0. This counter provides a way to check the fault information and then reset the new faults counter. Then,
the next time that the relay is checked, it’s easy to determine if any fault reports have been entered.
Resetting the new faults counter is achieved using the RF-NEW=0 command. Write access to Reports must
be gained to reset the new faults counter through the communication ports. The new faults counter can also
be viewed at HMI screen 4.1. The new faults counter cannot be reset at the HMI.
Fault Summary Reports. Individual fault summary reports can be retrieved using the RF-n command, where
n represents the number assigned to the fault summary report. To obtain the most recent report, use
RF-NEW. If additional detail is desired, Sequence of Events Recorder data and Oscillographic data can be
obtained for the faults also. This is discussed in greater detail later in this section. The following example
report was generated by entering RF-NEW immediately after creating a fault by entering RF-TRIG. Notice
that the FAULT TRIGGER and EVENT TYPE both show the event was caused by issuing the RF-TRIGGER
command.

Oscillographic Records
The fault reporting function can record up to 16 IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data
Exchange (COMTRADE) oscillographic records. Each record is 15 cycles long and records 24 samples per
cycle for the A, B, C, and N current inputs. The relay uses 24 samples per cycles in its operation. Each time
the fault reporting function starts recording a fault summary report, it freezes a 3 cycle pre-fault buffer and
records for 12 post-trigger cycles. If the fault isn’t cleared within that time, the fault reporting function records
a second oscillographic record. This second record provides a 15 cycle window of sample data to capture
the end of the fault. Oscillographic records are stored in volatile memory. As additional faults are recorded,
the oldest records are overwritten.
Table 6-13. Oscillographic Hardware Support
Feature Version 2.xx Version 3.xx

Number of Oscillographic Records 12 16

Length of Oscillographic Records 11 Cycles Each 15 Cycles Each

Sample Resolution 12 Samples per Cycle 24 Samples per Cycle

If a second oscillographic record is required, the fault recording function will continue to record sample data
in the second record with no gap. During this time, a 5 cycle buffer is being filled. If the fault is cleared within
5 cycles of the start of the second record, the record is terminated after it has recorded 15 cycles. If the fault
doesn’t clear in that period of time, the fault reporting function continues to save 5 cycles of sample data in

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-21

its buffer until the fault is cleared. At that point, it freezes the 5 cycle buffer, providing 5 cycles of end of fault
data and 10 cycles of post-fault data.

Retrieving Oscillographic Records

The fault summary directory and the fault summary reports list the numbers assigned to each fault record
and the number of oscillographic records associated with each fault. Oscillographic records can be retrieved
using the RO (report oscillography) command.

RO Command
Purpose: Read oscillographic COMTRADE .DAT or .CFG report.
Syntax: RO-nA/B[#].CFG/DAT/HDR
Comments: This is a read-only command. Command functions are summarized in Table 6-13.

Example1. Initiate transfer of a configuration report for the end of fault number 123.
RO-123B2.CFG (for binary format) or RO-123A2.CFG (for ASCII format)
Example2. Initiate transfer of a data report for the end of fault number 123.
RO-123B2.DAT (for binary format) or RO-123A2.DAT (for ASCII format)
Example3. To initiate transfer of the COMTRADE.HDR report for fault #155:
RO-155A.HDR (for ASCII)
Only one oscillographic report file can be requested at a time. Reports are transmitted in COMTRADE
format. Either a configuration file (CFG), a data file (DAT), or a header report(HDR) can be requested.
Header files contain the fault summary report followed by all the pertinent settings that are associated with
the requested fault record. These settings include the following.
• BESTlogic settings for User Programmable Logic Scheme.
• User Programmable Label settings, Global I/O settings.
• The protection setting group active during the fault.
• General protection settings.
• Fault reporting settings.
• Breaker Monitoring setttings.
• Alarm settings.
Files can be requested in ASCII or binary format but both file transfers use the same format. Binary file
transfer is much faster and consumes less disk space. ASCII format data is human readable and can be
analyzed by standard text editing software. Software for IBM compatible computers is available from Basler
Electric to convert binary files to ASCII format. The download protocol may be either XMODEM or XMODEM
CRC format. For ease of reference the name of the downloaded file should be the same as the command.
An Oscillographic record is triggered when the PU or LOGIC Expressions defined by the SG-TRIGGER logic
becomes TRUE. The Oscillographic record will contain 3 cycles of pre-trigger data and 8 cycles of post-
trigger data. Twelve samples will be stored every cycle. Each sample will contain 16-bit A/D values for all
4 analog channels (IA, IB, IC and IN) and a 1 or 0 for each of the 64 digital channels. The digital channels
are updated every ¼ cycle but recorded every 1/24 cycle. If the fault is not cleared by the end of the record,
then a second Oscillographic report will be triggered as soon as the first ends. The first report will cover the
initiation of the fault (start fault) and the second report will cover the breaker operate time (end fault).
Configuration and data files can be downloaded using any standard communications program. The
download protocol may be XMODEM or XMODEM CRC format. For ease of reference, use the command
name for the name of the downloaded file.

SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER

A sequence of events recorder (SER) report is very useful in reconstructing the exact sequence and timing
of events during a power disturbance or even normal system operations. The SER tracks over 100 data
points by monitoring the internal and external status of the relay. Data points are scanned every quarter-
cycle. All changes of state that occur during each scan are time tagged to 1 millisecond resolution. A total
of 255 changes are stored in volatile memory; when the SER memory becomes full, the oldest record is
replaced by the latest one acquired.

6-22 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

The SER monitors the following points and conditions.
 Single-state events such as resetting demands or targets, changing settings, etc.
 Programmable logic variables
 Targets
 Relay trouble alarm variables
 Programmable alarm variables
 Output contact status
 Fault reporting trigger expressions
When a monitored event occurs or a monitored variable changes state, the SER logs the time and date of
the event, the event or variable name, and the state that the variable changed to. For user programmable
logic variables (contact sensing inputs, virtual switches, and virtual outputs), the user-programmed variable
name and state names are logged in the SER report instead of the generic variable name and state names.
For more information, refer to Section 3, Input and Output Functions.

Retrieving SER Information

SER information is retrieved through SER Directory Reports, the New Events Counter, and by obtaining
specific SER Reports.
SER Directory Report. A directory report lists the number of events currently in memory and the time span
that the events cover. Directory reports are accessed using the RS (report SER) command.

New Events Counter. The new events counter tracks how many new entries have been logged to the SER
since the new events counter was reset to zero. After SER information is checked, the new events counter
can be reset. Then, the next time that the relay is checked, it’s easy to determine if there are new events that
haven’t been evaluated. One line of an SER directory report contains the new events counter information.
The new events counter is reset by obtaining write access to Reports and using the RS=0 command. The
new events counter can be viewed but not reset at HMI screen 4.2.
SER Report. A directory of SER reports can be obtained using the RS (report SER) command. Six sub-
reports are available through the RS command: RS-n, RS-Fn, RS-ALM, RS-I/O, RS-LGC, and RS-NEW.
These sub-reports give specific types of data without confusing the user with every internal state change and
event occurrence. Each sub-report is defined in the following paragraphs.
RS-n (report SER, number of most recent events). Events are retrieved for the most recent entries. Entering
RS-4 would view an SER report for the last four events.
RS-F<n> (report SER, for Fault <event number>). Events are retrieved for the period of time specific to a
fault event. The report includes all events within the time span of the fault plus one event before and after
the fault. Entering RS-F9 views a SER report associated with fault record 9.
RS-ALM (report SER, alarm). This command retrieves all alarm events that exist since the last RS=0
command was issued. (RS=0 resets the new records counter to zero.) This information can also be obtained
using the RA-SER command.
RS-I/O (report SER, input/output). This command reports all input and output events since the last RS=0
command was issued. (RS=0 resets the new records counter to zero.)
RS-LGC (report SER, logic). A report is retrieved for all logic events since the last RS=0 command was
issued. (RS=0 resets the new records counter to zero.)
RS-NEW(report SER, new events since RS=0 reset). Events are retrieved for the period of time covered
by the New Events Counter register.

RS Command
Purpose: Read or reset sequence of events record data.
Syntax: RS[-n/Fn/ALM/IO/LGC/NEW][=0]
Comments: n = number of events to be retrieved
Fn = fault record number to be retrieved

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-23

Example1. Read the directory report of records.
>RS
BE1-851 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS DIRECTORY
REPORT DATE : 06/1/99
REPORT TIME : 08:28:47
STATION ID : SUBSTATION_1
RELAY ID : BE1-851
RELAY ADDRESS : 3
NEW RECORDS : 15 (10:05:05.152 05/27/99 - 10:05:40.676 05/27/99)
TOTAL RECORDS :255 (10:03:59.514 05/27/99 - 10:05:40.676 05/27/99)
Example2. View fault record number 212.
>RS-F212
BE1-851 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS DIRECTORY
REPORT DATE : 06/1/99
REPORT TIME : 16:08:17
STATION ID : SUBSTATION_1
RELAY ID : BE1-851
RELAY ADDRESS : 3
--DATE-- ----TIME---- ----------POINT DESCRIPTION-----------STATUS--
05/28/99 15:13:17.481 OUTPUT 3 OPEN
05/28/99 15:13:17.356 PROT-PU NORMAL
51 PHASE PICKUP FALSE
PU TRIGGER FALSE
LOW-OC NORMAL
PROT-TRIP NORMAL
TRIP TRIGGER FALSE
05/28/99 15:13:17.281 51 PHASE B TRIP TRUE
LOW-OC TRIP
PROT-TRIP TRIP
OUTPUT 3 CLOSED
TRIP TRIGGER TRUE
05/28/99 15:13:16.417 51 PHASE PICKUP TRUE
PROT-PU PICKUP
PU TRIGGER

ALARMS FUNCTION
The alarms function monitors internal relay systems, external relay interfaces, and power system equipment.
Alarm points are segregated into Relay Trouble Alarms and Programmable Alarms. Alarm point status is
stored in nonvolatile memory and is retained when relay operating power is lost.
The ability to program the reporting and display of alarms along with the automatic display priority feature
of the HMI gives the relay the functionality of a local and remote alarm annunciator. See Section 10, Human-
Machine Interface for more information on the automatic display priority logic.

Relay Trouble Alarms

All internal circuitry and software that affects how the relay functions is monitored by the continuous self-test
diagnostics function of the relay trouble alarms. A detailed list of relay trouble alarms is provided in Table
6-14. If any one of these points asserts, the failsafe alarm output relay de-energizes and closes the OUTA
contact, the HMI Relay Trouble LED lights, all output relays are disabled and the relay is taken offline. The
relay trouble alarms function is not programmable.
If your application requires a normally closed contact that opens to indicate a relay trouble condition, use
BESTlogic to program the output logic. One of the output relays with normally open contacts (OUT1 through
OUT5) can be programmed to be held closed. For example, to open OUT5 for indication of relay trouble,
set the VO5 logic expression at /0 (SL-VO5=/0). A not zero setting is equal to logic 1. When the relay is fully
functional, the OUT5 output contact is closed. Since all output relays are disabled when a relay trouble alarm
exists, OUT5 opens when relay trouble occurs.

6-24 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Table 6-14. Relay Trouble Alarms
I.D. Number Diagnostic Description

1 RAM FAILURE Static RAM read/write error

2 ROM FAILURE EPROM program memory checksum error

3 uP FAILURE Microprocessor exception or self-test error

4 EEPROM FATAL ERROR EEPROM read/write error

5 ANALOG FAILURE Analog to digital converter error

6 CALIBRATION ERR Relay not calibrated or calibration checksum error

7 PWR SUPPLY ERR Power supply out of tolerance

8 WATCHDOG FAILURE Microprocessor watchdog circuit timed out

9 SET DFLTS LOADED Relay using setting defaults

10 CAL DFLTS LOADED Relay using calibration defaults

Relay trouble alarms, except for CALIBRATION ERR, EEPROM FATAL ERR, SET DFLTS LOADED, and
CALDFLTS LOADED indicate that the relay is not functional and causes the self-test diagnostics to force
a microprocessor reset to try to correct the problem.
CALIBRATION ERR, EEPROM FATAL ERROR, or DFLTS LOADED errors indicate that the relay is
functional but needs re-calibration or the settings reprogrammed.
Any relay trouble alarm will disable the protection functions, light the Relay Trouble LED, and place the
output contacts in their normal, de-energized state. If a relay trouble (RA-REL) alarm is cleared by pressing
the HMI Reset key while viewing screen 1.3 or using the RA=0 or RA-REL=0 commands, then the relay will
attempt to return back online by issuing a software reset. The relay resets by going through a full startup and
initialization cycle. If no problems are detected, the relay returns online and enables protection.

Major, Minor, and Logic Programmable Alarms

The programmable alarms function covers all circuits monitored by the continuous self-test diagnostics
function that do not affect the relay core functions. Alarm functions used to monitor the power system and
equipment are also part of the programmable alarms. Table 6-15 provides a detailed list of all programmable
alarms. The programmable alarm points can be prioritized into Major and Minor alarms using the SA-MAJ
(setting alarms, major) and SA-MIN (setting alarms, minor) commands. Major alarm points, when triggered,
cause the HMI Major Alarm LED to light and the BESTlogic variable ALMMAJ to assert. Minor alarm points,
when triggered, cause the HMI Minor Alarm LED to light and the BESTlogic variable ALMMIN to assert.

Table 6-15. Programmable Alarms

I.D. Number Diagnostic Description
1 OUT1 CKT OPEN ALARM 7 Trip circuit continuity and voltage monitor
2 BKR FAIL ALARM Breaker failure trip
3 RECLOSER FAIL ALARM 7 Reclose fail timer timed out before breaker closed
4 RECLOSER LOCKOUT ALARM 7 Recloser went through sequence without success
Breaker Alarm 1 threshold (SA-BKR1 setting)
5 BREAKER ALARM 1
exceeded
Breaker Alarm 2 threshold (SA-BKR2 setting)
6 BREAKER ALARM 2
exceeded

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-25

 I.D. Number Diagnostic Description
Breaker Alarm 3 threshold (SA-BKR3 setting)
7 BREAKER ALARM 3
exceeded
8 P DEMAND ALARM 7 Phase demand
9 N DEMAND ALARM 7 Neutral unbalance demand
10 Q DEMAND ALARM 7 Negative Sequence unbalance demand
11 GROUP OVERRIDE ALARM 7 Setting group control logic override
Excessive delay in HMI or serial communication
12 SYS I/O DELAY ALARM
operation
13 COMM ERROR ALARM Communication failure
14 CLOCK ERROR 7 Real-time clock not set
15 uP RESET ALARM Microprocessor has been reset
16 SETTING CHANGE ALARM Settings change made by user
17 EE NONFATAL ERR ALARM EEPROM nonfatal recoverable errot
One or more output contacts have logic override
18 OUTPUT OVERRIDE ALARM 7
condition
19 IRIG SYNC LOST ALARM Loss of IRIG synchronization
20 SGC ACTIVE ALARM 7 Active setting group changed
VO13 logic is TRUE. (User programmable logic
21 VO13 LOGIC ALRM 7
alarm)
VO14 logic is TRUE. (User programmable logic
22 VO14 LOGIC ALRM
alarm)
23 VO15 LOGIC ALRM 7 VO15 logic is TRE. (User programmable logic alarm)
TRUE if fault event trigger lasts longer than 60
24 FLT RPT TIMEOUT ALARM
seconds

25 LOGIC=NONE ALARM Active Logic = NONE

Changes made on serial port not saved after 5
26 CHANGES LOST ALARM
minutes.

Alarms with an asterisk (7) are non-latching. A non-latching alarm clears itself automatically when the
alarm condition goes away. All other alarms are latching and must be manually reset by using the HMI
Reset button or the RA=0 command.
The output of any programmable alarm can also be used in programmable logic expressions without being
programmed to be reported by the programmable alarm reporting function. The ALMLGC variable is
provided for this purpose. Programmable alarm variables can be masked to drive BESTlogic variable
ALMLGC by using the SA-LGC command.

Programming Alarm Priorities

Alarm settings include Major, Minor, and Logic alarm priorities, Demand alarm points, and the Breaker alarm
points. Programming details for Demand alarm points is available in the Demand Functions subsection.
Refer to the Breaker Monitoring subsection for details about programming Breaker alarm points. Major,
Minor, and Logic programmable alarm settings are summarized in Table 6-16.

6-26 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Table 6-16. Programmable Alarm Settings
Setting Range/Purpose Default

Major alarm points(Drives Major List of alarm functions per Table 6-14 25
Alarm LED and ALMMAJ logic Separated by forward slash (/)
variable

Minor alarm points(Drives Minor List of alarm functions per Table 6-14 29
Alarm LED and ALMMAJ logic Separated by forward slash (/)
variable

Logic alarm points (drives List of alarm functions per Table 6-14 0
ALMLGC logic variable) Separated by forward slash (/)

SA-MAJ/MIN/LGC Command
Purpose: Read or set major/minor/logic alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA[-<type>][=[<alarm num 1>][/<alarm num 2>]...[/<alarm num n>]]
Comments: type = MAJ (Major), MIN (Minor), or LGC (Logic)
alarm num = alarm identifier (see Table 6-20)
Privilege G or S password access is required to change settings.

Example Set the Major Alarm to trigger when the trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor asserts,
when breaker failure occurs, or when virtual output 15 is TRUE.
>SA-MAJ=1/2/23

Retrieving and Resetting Alarm Reports

When an alarm condition occurs, the appropriate front panel LED lights and HMI screen 1.3 is displayed.
(See Section 10, Human-Machine Interface for more information about automatic display priority logic.) The
HMI display scrolls between displaying all active alarm points. This includes alarms that are not
programmable (relay trouble alarms). Any latched alarms that aren’t currently active can be reset by pressing
the HMI Reset key. Refer to Table 6-14 for the list of latching alarm points and self clearing alarm points.
The reset key of the HMI is context sensitive. That is, the functionality depends upon what screen is
currently being displayed. BESTlogic variable RSTKEY takes advantage of this to allow the front panel
reset key on the relay to be used in the programmable logic scheme when the alarm screens 1.2,
(\STAT\ALARMS) is active. An example of the use of this logic variable is to break the seal-in for a logic
expression. The logic expression can be programmed so that the seal-in function uses VO13, VO14, or
VO15. If the virtual output expression is included in one of the programmable alarm masks, the automatic
display priority logic will cause the display to go to the alarm screens 1.2, (\STAT\ALARMS),. When the
reset key is pressed on the front of the relay, the RSTKEY
RSTKEY
logic variable is asserted and the logic expression seal-in
is broken. See Application, Section 8, Application,
HMI RESET KEY
Application Tips, for more information. Pressing the reset Alarm
key on the HMI while the alarm screen is displayed will R A - M A J = 0
RA-MIN=0 Reset
clear any latched alarms that are not currently active. Logic
Refer to Table 6-14 for a listing of alarm points that are Logic D2863-16.vsd
12-06-99
latching and those that are self clearing. Figure 6-4
Figure 6-4. Programmable Alarm Function
shows the alarm reset logic.
Logic variables for ALMMAJ, ALMMIN, and ALMLGC can also be set to operate any of the output contacts
to give an indication that an alarm condition exists. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic provides
more details about this feature.
The status of the three front-panel LEDs (Relay Trouble, Minor Alarm, and Major Alarm) can be read through
the communication ports by using the RG-STAT command. Alarm status is given in the DIAG/ALARM line

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-27

of the General Status Report. Refer to the General Status Reporting subsection for more information about
obtaining relay status with the RG-STAT command.
The RA (report alarms) command can be used to read detailed alarm reports and reset latched alarms.

RA Command
Purpose: Read or reset alarm information.
Syntax: RA[-<type>][=0]
Comments: type = LGC (Logic), MAJ (Major), MIN (Minor), or REL (Relay)
Privilege G or R password access is required to reset alarms.
Example1. Read the current alarm status.
>RA
RA-LGC NONE
RA-MAJ NONE
RA-MIN ALARM# 16 - SETTING CHANGE
RA-FAIL NONE
Example2. Clear the latched minor alarm
>RA-MIN=0

Links Between Programmable Alarms and BESTlogic

Several links between the programmable alarms and BESTlogic allow alarm functions to be used in the logic
scheme and programmable logic functions to be used in the alarm reporting function.

Programmable Alarms Controlled by BESTlogic Elements

Virtual outputs VO13, VO14, and VO15 are driven by BESTlogic expressions and are available in the
programmable alarms function. These three virtual outputs have labels that can be assigned meaningful
names. Then, when a logic condition that is used for an alarm exists, the label will be reported in the alarm
reporting function.

Programmable Alarms Reset

Programmable alarms can be reset by any one of three methods.
 The programmable alarms reset logic expression becomes TRUE.
 Pressing the front panel Reset key when HMI screen 1.3 is active.
 Using the SA-RESET command.

SA-RESET Command
Purpose: Read or program reset logic for programmable alarms.
Syntax: SA-RESET[=<rst alm logic>]
Comments: rst alm logic = logic used to reset the programmable alarms
Programmable alarms can be reset manually by entering SA-RESET=0. Privilege G or S
password access is required to change settings.

Example Reset the programmable alarms when contact input 3 or 4 becomes TRUE.
>SA-RESET=IN3+IN4

BESTlogic Elements Controlled by Programmable Alarms

Major, Minor, and Logic programmable alarm settings drive BESTlogic variables ALMMAJ, ALMMIN, and
ALMLGC. These variables can be used in logic expressions to control logic when the alarm is active. For
example, these variables could be used to actuate an output relay to signal a SCADA RTU that an alarm
condition exists.

6-28 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE VERSION
Hardware and software version reporting is used to determine what style chart selections are included in
the relay, the relay serial number, and the version of the embedded software (firmware).
Style and serial number information is contained on the label on the front panel. Embedded software
information can be obtained at HMI screen 4.7. The information of screen 4.7 is also displayed briefly when
operating power is applied to the relay.
A software and hardware version report is obtained using the RG-VER command.

RG-VER Command
Purpose: Read model number, style number, serial number, and program version information.
Syntax: RG-VER
Comments: No password privileges are required to read status information.

Example Obtain a hardware and software version report from the relay.
>RG-VER
Model Number : BE1-851
Style Number : H5-A1S50
App Program : VER 2.42.00 10/01/99
Boot Program : VER 2.05 10/21/98
Serial Number : H00039995

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-29

SECTION 7 • BESTlogic PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7 • BESTlogic PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
WORKING WITH PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Function Block Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Output Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Defining Output Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Virtual and Hardware Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Active Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Custom Logic Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Copying and Renaming Preprogrammed Logic Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Creating or Customizing a Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Debugging the Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
USER INPUT AND OUTPUT LOGIC VARIABLE NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
BESTlogic APPLICATION TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Figures
Figure 7-1. BESTlogic Sensing Input Type G Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Figure 7-2. BESTlogic Sensing Input Type H Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Figure 7-3. Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-3. Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Tables
Table 7-1. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Table 7-2. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Table 7-3. SN Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic i

SECTION 7 • BESTlogic PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC

INTRODUCTION
Multifunction relays are similar in nature to a panel of single-function protective relays. Both must be wired
together with ancillary devices to operate as a complete protection and control system. In the single-function
static and electromechanical environment, elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams provide direction for
wiring protective elements, switches, meters, and indicator lights into a unique protection and control system.
In the digital, multifunction environment, the process of wiring individual protection or control elements is
replaced with the entry of logic settings. The process of creating a logic scheme is the digital equivalent of
wiring a panel. It integrates the multifunction protection, control, and input/output elements into a unique
protection and control system.
BESTlogic is a programming method used for managing the input, output, protection, control, monitoring,
and reporting capabilities of Basler Electric’s digital, multifunction, protective relay systems. Each relay
system has multiple, self-contained function blocks that have all of the inputs and outputs of its discrete
component counterpart. Each independent function block interacts with control inputs, virtual outputs, and
hardware outputs based on logic variables defined in equation form with BESTlogic. BESTlogic equations
entered and saved in the relay system’s nonvolatile memory integrate (electronically wire) the selected or
enabled protection and control blocks with control inputs, virtual outputs, and hardware outputs. A group of
logic equations defining the function of the multifunction relay is called a logic scheme.
Several preprogrammed logic schemes are stored in relay memory. Each scheme is configured for a typical
protection application and virtually eliminates the need for start-from-scratch programming. Any of the
preprogrammed schemes can be copied and saved as the active logic. Preprogrammed logic schemes can
also be copied and then customized to suit your application. Detailed information about preprogrammed
logic schemes is provided later in this section.
BESTlogic isn’t used to define the operating settings (pickup thresholds and time delays) of the individual
protection and control functions. Operating settings and logic settings are interdependent, but separately
programmed functions. Changing logic settings is similar to rewiring a panel, and is separate and distinct
from making the operating settings that control the pickup thresholds and time delays of a relay. Detailed
information about operating settings is provided in Section 4, Protection and Control Functions.

WORKING WITH PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC

BESTlogic uses two types of logic settings: output logic settings and function block logic settings. These two
types of settings are discussed in the following subsections. Output logic settings are entered in equation
form and control the hardware outputs of the relay. BESTlogic function blocks are illustrated in Figures 7-1
and 7-2 and are discussed in the following paragraphs.
Names assigned to inputs, outputs, timers, and protection and control elements represent the logic variables
in the equations. Tables 7-1 and 7-2 lists the logic variable names and descriptions.

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-1

 Figure 7-1. BESTlogic Sensing Input Type G Function Blocks

7-2 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

 Figure 7-2. BESTlogic Sensing Input Type H Function Blocks

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-3

 Table 7-1. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions for Sensing Input Type H Relays
VARIABLE
VARIABLE NAME
NAME DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
Input and Output Logic Variables Time Overcurrent Logic Variables
IN1 - IN4 Inputs 1 through 4 Status 51PT 51 Phase Tripped
VOA Relay Trouble Alarm Output 51NT 51 Neutral Tripped
VO1 - VO5 Virtual Outputs 1 to 5 51QT 51T Negative Sequence Tripped
(Drives hardware outputs 1 through 5)
VO6 - VO15 Virtual Outputs 6 to 15 51PPU 51 Phase Picked Up
Control Logic Variables 51NPU 51 Neutral Picked Up
RSTKEY HMI Target Reset Key Instantaneous Overcurrent Logic Variables
50TPT 50T Phase Tripped
101T Virtual Breaker Control Switch Tripped 50TPPU 50T Phase Picked Up
101C Virtual Breaker Control Switch Close 50TNT 50T Neutral Tripped
101SC Virtual Breaker Control Switch 50TNPU 50T Neutral Picked Up
Slip Contact
62 62 Timer Output 50TQT 50T Negative Sequence Tripped
162 162 Timer Output 50TQPU 50T Negative Sequence Picked Up
43 Virtual Switch 43 Output 150T 150T Phase Tripped
143 Virtual Switch 143 Output 150TPPU 150T Phase Picked Up
243 Virtual Switch 243 Output 150TNT 150T Neutral Tripped
343 Virtual Switch 343 Output 150TQT Negative Sequence Tripped
SG0 Setting Group 0 Active (Default) 150TQPU 150T Negative Sequence Picked Up
SG1 Setting Group 1 Active
SG2 Setting Group 2 Active
SG3 Setting Group 3 Active
Monitor Logic Variables
ALMLGC Logic Alarm
ALMMAJ Major Alarm
ALMMIN Minor Alarm
OUT1MON Output 1 Monitor (Circuit Continuity)
Reclosing Logic Variables
79C 79 Close Signal
79RNG 79 Running/Block Tap Changer
79LO 79 Lock Out
79F 79 Reclose Fail
79SCB 79 Sequence Control Block
Breaker Failure Logic Variables
BFT Breaker Failure Tripped
BFPU Breaker Failure Picked Up

7-4 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

 Table 7-2. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions for Sensing Input Type G Relays
VARIABLE
VARIABLE NAME
NAME DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
Input and Output Logic Variables Time Overcurrent Logic Variables
IN1 - IN4 Inputs 1 through 4 Status 51PT 51 Phase Tripped
VOA Relay Trouble Alarm Output 51NT 51 Neutral Tripped
VO1 - VO5 Virtual Outputs 1 to 5 151NT 151 Neutral Tripped
(Drives hardware outputs 1 through 5)
VO6 - VO15 Virtual Outputs 6 to 15 51PPU 51 Phase Picked Up
Control Logic Variables 51NPU 51 Neutral Picked Up
RSTKEY HMI Target Reset Key Instantaneous Overcurrent Logic Variables
50TPT 50T Phase Tripped
101T Virtual Breaker Control Switch Tripped 50TPPU 50T Phase Picked Up
101C Virtual Breaker Control Switch Close 50TNT 50T Neutral Tripped
101SC Virtual Breaker Control Switch 50TNPU 50T Neutral Picked Up
Slip Contact
62 62 Timer Output 250TNT 250T Neutral Tripped
162 162 Timer Output 50TQPU 50T Negative Sequence Picked Up
43 Virtual Switch 43 Output 150T 150T Phase Tripped
143 Virtual Switch 143 Output 150TPPU 150T Phase Picked Up
243 Virtual Switch 243 Output 150TNT 150T Neutral Tripped
343 Virtual Switch 343 Output 350TNT 350T Neutral Tripped
SG0 Setting Group 0 Active (Default) 150TQPU 150T Negative Sequence Picked Up
SG1 Setting Group 1 Active .
SG2 Setting Group 2 Active
SG3 Setting Group 3 Active
Monitor Logic Variables
ALMLGC Logic Alarm
ALMMAJ Major Alarm
ALMMIN Minor Alarm
OUT1MON Output 1 Monitor (Circuit Continuity)
Reclosing Logic Variables
79C 79 Close Signal
79RNG 79 Running/Block Tap Changer
79LO 79 Lock Out
79F 79 Reclose Fail
79SCB 79 Sequence Control Block
Breaker Failure Logic Variables
BFT Breaker Failure Tripped
BFPU Breaker Failure Picked Up

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-5

Function Block Logic Settings
Each BESTlogic function block is equivalent to its discrete device counterpart. For example, the Reclosing
Logic Function Block of Figure 7-3 has many of the characteristics of a BE1-79M Multiple Shot Reclosing
Relay.
Before using a protection or control function block, two items must be set: the Mode and the Input Logic.
Setting the Mode is equivalent to deciding which protection or control functions will be used in a logic
scheme. The Input Logic establishes control of a function block.
Mode and input logic information is contained in logic setting command strings. Depending on the command,
the mode setting can either enable or disable a logic input or determine how a function block operates. Input
logic defines which logic variables control or disable a logic function. An example of an input logic equation
is SL-51P=1,IN3+VO6. In this frequency logic command string, the 1 parameter indicates that the 51P
function is enabled. The IN3+VO6 expression indicates that the 51P function is disabled when input 3 or
virtual output 6 are TRUE.
The AND operator may not be applied to the terms of an input logic equation. Any number of variables or
their inverse can be combined in a function block input logic expression. Section 4, Protection and Control
Functions provides detailed information about setting the logic for each function block.

Output Logic Settings

Defining Output Operation

Output operation is defined by Boolean logic equations. Each
variable in an equation corresponds to the current state
(evaluated every quarter cycle) of an input, output, or timer.
Figure 7-3 illustrates this relationship. Every quarter cycle, output
expressions are evaluated as TRUE or FALSE. If a logic output
that corresponds to a hardware output changes state, then the
corresponding output relay contact also changes state. Figure 7-3. Virtual Output Logic

When the relay is powered up, all logic outputs are disabled and most variables (including virtual outputs)
initialize as FALSE. Some variable states are stored in EEPROM and are restored to the last state prior to
loss of power. These variables include 43/143/243/343,101SC, and SG0 through SG3. All control
commands, including logic override control, are also stored in EEPROM. If you override output logic and
force an output to open, that condition will be maintained even if operating power is cycled.
When the logic is running and logic expression SL-VO[n] is FALSE, then output VO[n] = 0. When the logic
is running and logic expression SL-VO[n] is TRUE, then VO[n] = 1. Hardware outputs OUTA and OUT1
through OUT5 follow the corresponding logic outputs VOA and VO1 through VO6.
Logic equations are defined by logic variables, logic operators, and their position in an equation. The
available logic operators include AND (9), OR (+), and NOT (/). The NOT operator is applied to the variable
immediately following the symbol (/). For virtual output equations, OR logic can be applied to any number
of variables if no AND logic is used in the expression. Similarly, AND logic can be applied to any number
of variables if no OR logic is used. Any number of NOT operators may be used. For complex expressions
that use both AND and OR operators, OR logic is limited to four terms. Up to four AND terms with any
number of variables can be ORed together. When the relay is processing a complex expression, it performs
AND operations before performing OR operations.
Logic expressions for virtual outputs are entered with the SL-VO (settings logic, virtual outputs) command.

SL-VO Command
Purpose: Programs a logical mode of operation for a virtual output.
Syntax: SL-VO[x][=<equation>]
Comments: x = virtual output designator A or 1 - 15
equation = Boolean logic expression using variables: virtual inputs (Ix), logic module
outputs, virtual outputs (VOx) and operators AND (9), OR (+), and NOT (/). Area G or S
password access is required to change settings.
7-6 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851
Entering SL-VO by itself will normally read the output logic equation of the active logic. If entered while
programming a custom logic, it will read the output logic of the custom logic.

SL-VO Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1Turn on output 5 when the breaker failure logic trips.
>SL-VO5=BFT
EXAMPLE.2Turn on output 1 when any instantaneous or timed overcurrent element trips.
>SL-VO1=50TPT+50TN+150TP+150TN+51P+51N+50TQ+51Q
EXAMPLE.3Turn on output 2 when the low-set instantaneous overcurrent element (50) trips but the
corresponding high-set instantaneous overcurrent element (150) does not.
>SL-VO2=50TP9/150TP+50TN9/150TN

Virtual and Hardware Outputs

A virtual output exists only as a logical state inside the relay. A hardware output is a physical relay contact
that can be used for protection or control. Each BE1-851 relay has five isolated, normally open (NO) output
contacts (OUT1 – OUT5) and one isolated, normally closed (NC) alarm output (OUTA). Output contacts
OUT1 through OUT5 are controlled by the status of the internal virtual logic signals VO1 through VO5. If
VO[n] becomes TRUE, then the corresponding output relay OUT[n] energizes and closes the NO contacts.
For the alarm output, if VOA becomes TRUE, the ALM output de-energizes and opens. More information
about input and output functions is provided in Section 3, Input and Output Functions.
Hardware outputs can also be controlled by the CO-OUT (control operate, output) command. The CO-OUT
command overrides control of logic outputs. Outputs may be pulsed or latched in a 0 or 1 state
independently from the state of the virtual output logic. More information about overriding control of logic
outputs is available in Section 3, Input and Output Functions.

LOGIC SCHEMES
A logic scheme is a group of logic variables written in equation form that defines the operation of a multi-
function relay. Each logic scheme is given a unique name of one to eight alphanumeric characters. This
gives you the ability to select a specific scheme and be confident that the selected scheme is in operation.
Six logic schemes, configured for typical protection applications, are stored in nonvolatile memory. Only one
of these logic schemes can be active at a given time. In most applications, preprogrammed logic schemes
eliminate the need for custom programming. Preprogrammed logic schemes may provide more inputs,
outputs, or features than are needed for a particular application. This is because the preprogramed schemes
are designed for a large number of applications with no special programming required. Unneeded inputs or
outputs may be left open to disable a function, or a function block can be disabled through operating
settings. Unused current sensing inputs should be shorted to minimize noise pickup.
When a custom logic scheme is required, programming time can be reduced by copying a preprogrammed
scheme into the active logic. The logic scheme can then be modified to meet the specific application.

Active Logic Scheme

Digital, multifunction relays must have an active logic scheme in order to function. All Basler Electric
multifunction relays are delivered with a default, active logic loaded into memory. The default, active logic
scheme for the BE1-851 is named USER. If the function block configuration and output logic of USER meets
the requirements of your application, then only the operating settings (power system parameters and
threshold settings) need to be adjusted before placing the relay in service.

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-7

 Note

There has been a fundamental improvement to the way the user sets up BESTlogic in this
device. In some prior implementations or BESTlogic, it was necessary to make a separate
setting that determined whether the user’s logic scheme or if the one of the pre-programmed
logic schemes was to be made active. This setting was made from the ASCII command
interface using the SP-LOGIC (Set Protection Logic) command. This setting has been
eliminated in relays with firmware version 2.42 and higher.

In the implementation of BESTlogic used in this relay, the logic scheme defined by the user’s
logic settings is always active. If the user wishes to use a pre-programmed logic scheme,
he now copies it into his user logic settings. This process is accomplished from the ASCII
command interface using the SL-N (Set Logic Name) command in this and previous
BESTlogic implementations.
If a different preprogrammed logic scheme is required, it can be easily copied to active logic and used as
is, or customized to your specifications. To accomplish this, communication with the relay must be
established. This is referred to as the on-line method of setting or changing the active logic. It is
accomplished by connecting a computer to the front or rear RS-232 port and establishing communication
through compatible terminal emulation software such as Windows® HyperTerminal or Terminal (VT100
emulation). Section 11, ASCII Command Interface provides detailed information about command structure
and establishing communication with the relay. Appendix D, Setting Terminal Communications gives
instructions for configuring Windows® HyperTerminal and Terminal for use with the BE1-851.
Any of the six preprogrammed logic schemes stored in relay memory can be copied to the active logic and
customized or used as is. To copy a logic scheme into active logic, use the SL-N=<name> command.
The SL (settings logic) command is used to obtain a list of the logic schemes stored in memory or the
equations associated with a logic scheme. Entering SL: returns a list of the logic schemes available. The
first scheme listed is the active logic scheme. Entering SL: followed by the name of a preprogrammed
scheme returns all equations associated with the named scheme (SL:BUS for example). For custom
schemes, place an equals sign between SL and the logic name (SL=CUSTOM for example). Similarly,
preprogrammed logic commands and parameters are separated by a colon; custom logic commands and
parameters are separated by an equals sign.
SL Command Examples
EXAMPLE.1 Read the logic schemes available in memory.
>SL:
USER, FEEDER_1, FEEDER_2, FEEDER_3, FEEDER_4, BUS, BACKUP, NONE
EXAMPLE.2 Read all logic settings associated with the BACKUP logic scheme.
>sl:backup
SL-N:BACKUP
SL-50TP:1,0; SL-50TN:1,0; SL-50TQ:1,0
SL-150TP:1,0; SL-150TN:1,0; SL-150TQ:1,0
SL-51P:1,0; SL-51N:1,0; SL-51Q:1,0
SL-62:0,0,0
SL-162:0,0,0
SL-79:0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF:1,VO10,VO15
SL-GROUP:2,/IN2,0,0,0,0
SL-43:0
SL-143:0
SL-243:0
SL-343:2
SL-101:1
SL-VOA:ALMMAJ
SL-VO1:101T+VO8+BFPU+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2:101C
SL-VO3:/IN2
SL-VO4:VO9*/VO15
SL-VO5:BFT

7-8 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

 SL-VO6:0
SL-VO7:0
SL-VO8:51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9:50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10:VO11+150TPPU*IN3+150TNPU*IN3+150TQPU*IN3
SL-VO11:50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12:50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13:0
SL-VO14:0
SL-VO15:343+/IN4
>
EXAMPLE.3 Read the logic equation associated with logic variable VO1.
>SL-VO1
>BFPU+VO8+101T

Custom Logic Schemes

A custom logic scheme can be created from scratch by copying NONE to active logic and then renaming
the logic. A custom logic scheme can also be created by modifying any one of the preprogrammed logic
schemes after copying it to active logic and renaming. Preprogrammed logic schemes copied to active logic
with no name change are read-only schemes and cannot have their logic expressions altered. Before
modifying a logic scheme copied to active logic, the scheme must be assigned a unique name of one to eight
alphanumeric characters. This scheme is then referred to as a custom or user programmable logic scheme
because the variable expressions of the logic can be customized or created from scratch to suit the needs
of an application. A custom logic scheme may be revised many times, but only the most recent changes are
saved to active logic.

Copying and Renaming Preprogrammed Logic Schemes

CAUTION

Always remove the relay from service prior to changing or modifying the active logic
scheme. Attempting a logic scheme change while the relay is in service could generate
unexpected or unwanted outputs.

Copying a preprogrammed logic scheme to the active logic and assigning a unique name is accomplished
with the SL-N (settings logic, name) command. Changes are not activated until the EXIT and SAVE
commands are executed.
If the previous active logic was a customized scheme, the new custom logic scheme may be given the same
name as the previous scheme or it may be given an entirely new name. However, a custom logic scheme
must be different from any of the preprogrammed logic scheme names as previously discussed.

SL-N Command
Purpose: Reads or sets the active logic scheme name or copies a preprogrammed logic scheme to
the active logic scheme.
Syntax: SL-N[=<name>]
SL-N Command Examples
The following examples illustrate how a preprogrammed logic scheme is copied to active logic and then
renamed with a custom name.
EXAMPLE.1 Read the name of the active logic scheme. In this example, the active scheme is the
default USER scheme.
>SL-N
>USER
EXAMPLE.2 Copy a different preprogrammed scheme, FEEDER_1, to active logic.
>SL-N=FEEDER_1
>OVERWRITE CUSTOM (active) LOGIC SETTINGS (Y/N)?
>Y

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-9

EXAMPLE.3 If this preprogrammed scheme meets the needs of the application, the changes can be
saved.
>EXIT
>SAVE CHANGES (Y/N/C)? (Y = Yes, N = No, and C = Cancel, Continue editing)
>Y
>CHANGES SAVED
If an attempt was made to customize this read-only, preprogrammed logic, the relay would issue the
following message.
ERROR! CUSTOM LOGIC NAME EQUALS STANDARD LOGIC NAME
In order to customize the FEEDER_1 scheme (modify the logic expressions), the preprogrammed logic
name must be given a unique name that differs from any of the preprogrammed logic scheme names.
1. Rename the active FEEDER_1 logic with a unique, meaningful logic name.
SL-N=MYFEEDER
EXIT
SAVE CHANGES (Y/N/C)?
Y
CHANGES SAVED
MYFEEDER is now the active logic and the logic expressions can be changed as required. Remember,
changes must be saved to make them active.

Creating or Customizing a Logic Scheme

Before customizing a preprogrammed logic scheme, the scheme must be renamed. This process is outlined
in the previous SL-N Command Examples. The following procedure outlines the process of customizing or
creating a logic scheme. If a completely new logic scheme is to be created, begin with Step 5.
Step 1. Copy the preprogrammed scheme by using the SL-N=<preprogrammed logic name>
command.
Step 2. Name the preprogrammed scheme with a unique, non-preprogrammed name by using the
SL-N=<new name> command. This allows the logic scheme to be programmed.
Step 3. Obtain a list of the logic equations with the SL command.
Step 4. Disable unneeded outputs or function blocks by setting them equal to zero. For example,
SL-VO10=0
Alternately, all output equations can be programmed or disabled at once by not using a
number suffix. For example, entering SL-VO=0 clears all output equations before writing new
ones.
Another way to disable all logic settings is to copy the NONE logic to active logic. Renaming
the NONE logic will then permit the scheme to be programmed. The syntax used would be
SL-N=NONE;Y;SL-N=<new name>.
Step 5. Change the logic expressions as required by using the SL-<function> and SL-VO commands.
Step 6. Use the SL command to review the changes.
Step 7. Save the changes by using the EXIT command.

The active logic scheme can also be saved as a text file and modified off-line using any ASCII text editor.
The text file can then be uploaded to the relay through terminal communications. Also, a Microsoft® Excel
“Settings Record” spreadsheet is available with the BE1-851 and contains all of the preprogrammed logic
schemes. These schemes can be modified and saved as a text file and then uploaded to the relay’s active
logic. See Appendix C, Relay Setting Record for more information.

7-10 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

Debugging the Logic Scheme
If there are problems with a customized logic scheme, the RG-STAT command can be used to check the
status of all logic variables. More information about the RG-STAT command can be found in Section 6,
Reporting and Alarm Functions.

USER INPUT AND OUTPUT LOGIC VARIABLE NAMES

Assigning meaningful names to the inputs and outputs makes sequential events reports easier to analyze.
Input and output logic variable names are assigned with the SN command. All SN labels are used in the RS
(reports, sequence of events) reports. Entering SN by itself returns a list of all programmable names.
Table 7-3. SN Command Settings
Setting Range/Purpose Default

Name 1 to 10 Characters. NA
User name to replace <var> in the RS report.

TRUE label 1 to 7 Characters. TRUE

User label to replace default true label

FALSE label 1 to 7 Characters. FALSE

User label to replace default false label

SN Command
Purpose: Read or set user-programmable names.
Syntax: SN[-[var][=[name],[TRUE label],[FALSE label]]
Comments: var = logic variable 43/143/243/343, VOA, VO1 - VO15, or IN1 - IN4
name = 1 to 10 character user name to replace <var> in the RS report
TRUE label = 1 to 7 character user label to replace default TRUE label for <var>
FALSE label = 1 to 7 character user label to replace default FALSE label for <var>

SN Command Examples
EXAMPLE.1Read the current name setting for IN1.
>SN-IN1
>SN-IN1=IN1,CLOSED,OPEN
EXAMPLE.2 Change the name for IN1 to better describe its function as a 52b contact.
>SN-IN1=BREAKER,OPEN,CLOSED
EXAMPLE.3 Label the 43 switch operation for use on the HMI.
>SN-43=AUTO_SG,DISABLE,ENABLE

BESTlogic APPLICATION TIPS

When designing a completely new logic scheme, logic evaluation order should be considered. Contact
sensing inputs are evaluated first, then the function blocks, and then the virtual outputs. VO15 is evaluated
first and VOA is evaluated last. If a virtual output is used in a logic expression to control another virtual
output, the virtual output used in the expression should be numerically higher. Otherwise, a logic expression
for a numerically smaller virtual output won’t be available to a numerically higher virtual output until the next
processing interval. Logic is evaluated every quarter-cycle.
When designing custom protection schemes, avoid confusion by maintaining consistency between input and
output functions in the custom scheme and the preprogrammed schemes.
OUT1 through OUT5 have normally open contacts (coil is de-energized). Normally open contacts can be
used as normally closed outputs by inverting the logic expressions that drive them. Inverting an output logic
expression causes the coil to be energized with the contacts closed in the normal state. Caution should be
taken with normally closed contact logic because there are no shorting bars to maintain the closed condition
if the draw-out assembly is removed from the chassis. In applications where a normally closed output is
needed even when the electronics are removed, a normally open contact from the relay can be used to drive
a low-cost auxiliary relay. The normally closed output of the auxiliary relay will maintain the closed output
BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-11
when the draw-out assembly is removed from the case. Alternately, an external switch can be used to short
across a normally closed relay output when the draw-out assembly is removed. Extra care is required to
ensure that the switch is closed prior to removing the draw-out assembly and that the switch is open after
the relay is placed back in service.
Several links between the programmable alarms function and BESTlogic programmable logic allow alarm
functions to be used in a logic scheme and programmable logic functions to be used in the alarm reporting
function.
Programmable alarm settings for Major, Minor, and Logic alarms drive BESTlogic variables ALMMAJ,
ALMMIN, and ALMLGC. These variables can be used in logic expressions to control logic when an alarm
is active.
Virtual outputs VO13, VO14, and VO15 are driven by BESTlogic expressions. These three logic variables
are also available in the programmable alarm function. Virtual outputs can also be assigned user
programmable labels (described previously). With this feature, a logic condition can be designed and used
for an alarm. The virtual output label would then be reported in the alarm reporting function.

7-12 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

SECTION 8 • APPLICATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 8 • APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
EXPLANATION OF TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Virtual Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Radial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
OVERVIEW OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Factory Default Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FEEDER_1 Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FEEDER_2 Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FEEDER_3 Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FEEDER_4 Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
BUS Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
DETAILS OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Factory Default Logic Settings and Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays. . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Factory Default Logic Settings and Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays. . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
FEEDER_1 LOGIC SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Normal Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-Of-Service . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
FEEDER_1 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
FEEDER_1 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
FEEDER_2 LOGIC SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Normal Operation - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Normal Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Normal Operation - Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
FEEDER_2 Logic Settings And Equations For Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
FEEDER_3 LOGIC SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Normal Operation - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Normal Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Normal Operation - Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

BE1-851 Application i
 Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
FEEDER_3 Logic Settings And Equations Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
FEEDER_4 LOGIC SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Normal Operation - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Normal Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Normal Operation - Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
FEEDER_4 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
FEEDER_4 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
BUS AND BACKUP LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Normal Operation - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Bus Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For BUS Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For BACKUP Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
BUS Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
BUS Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
BACKUP Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
BACKUP Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
MISCELLANEOUS LOGIC SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
APPLICATION TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Trip Circuit Continuity And Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Close Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
High Speed Reclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Block Load Tap Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Block Neutral and Negative Sequence Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Output Contact Seal-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Oscillographic Recording of Breaker Closures and Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64

FIGURES
Figure 8-1. Typical One-Line Diagram for Factory Default Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 8-2. Factory Default Logic Settings Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Figure 8-3. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_1 Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figure 8-4. FEEDER_1 Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Figure 8-5. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_2 Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Figure 8-6. FEEDER_2 Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Figure 8-7. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_3 Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Figure 8-8. FEEDER_3 Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Figure 8-9. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_4 Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Figure 8-10. FEEDER_4 Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Figure 8-11. Typical One-Line Diagram for BUS Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Figure 8-12. Bus Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Figure 8-13. Typical One-Line Diagram for Backup Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Figure 8-14. Backup Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Figure 8-15. Interconnection Diagram for Integrated Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Figure 8-16. Trip circuit continuity and voltage monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59

ii Application BE1-851
Figure 8-17. Close circuit monitor logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Figure 8-18. High Speed Reclose interlock Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Figure 8-19. Output Seal-in logic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62

TABLES
Table 8-1. DEFAULT Contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-2. DEFAULT Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-3. DEFAULT Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-4. DEFAULT Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 8-5. FEEDER_1 contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Table 8-6. FEEDER_1 Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Table 8-7. FEEDER_1 Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Table 8-8. FEEDER_1 Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Table 8-9. FEEDER_2 contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Table 8-10. FEEDER_2 Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Table 8-11. FEEDER_2 Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Table 8-12. FEEDER_2 Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Table 8-13. FEEDER_3 contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Table 8-14. FEEDER_3 Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Table 8-15. FEEDER_3 Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Table 8-16. FEEDER_3 Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Table 8-17. FEEDER_4 contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Table 8-18. FEEDER_4 Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Table 8-19. FEEDER_4 Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Table 8-20. FEEDER_4 Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Table 8-21. BUS contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Table 8-22. BUS Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Table 8-23. BUS Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Table 8-24. BUS Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Table 8-25. BACKUP contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Table 8-26. BACKUP Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Table 8-27. BACKUP Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Table 8-28. BACKUP Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Table 8-29. Miscellaneous Logic Expessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49

BE1-851 Application iii

SECTION 8 • APPLICATION

GENERAL
This section discusses application of the BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System using the pre-programmed
logic schemes. The Details Of Preprogrammed Logic Schemes subsection describes the characteristics
of each logic scheme and how they combine to create an overcurrent protection system for a radial system
substation. A detailed description of each preprogrammed scheme is also provided. This section concludes
with application tips for programming a custom logic scheme to meet the requirements of your application.
The preprogrammed logic schemes are designed to accommodate most common distribution or
sub-transmission radial system overcurrent coordination schemes. The protection engineer can choose a
logic scheme that most closely meets his application practices and adapt it by changing the function block
operation and settings. This eliminates the need to create a custom logic scheme.
It should be noted that each preprogrammed logic scheme also illustrates typical ways of using or controlling
various functions. The user may choose to create a custom logic scheme by mixing the logic from several
of the preprogrammed schemes. The logic can also be modified to incorporate some of the features
described in the application tips provided at the end of this section. The flexibility of BESTlogic allows the
protection engineer to create a custom scheme that exactly meets the requirements of the application.
Appendix C, Relay Settings Record provides settings sheets for recording the settings used in your
protection system.

NOTE

All preprogramed schemes are shown for sensing input type H relays. Sensing input type
G relays do not have negative sequence elements.

EXPLANATION OF TERMS
The following terms and definitions will facilitate the understanding of the application discussions to follow.

Function block
A stand alone protection or control function that is equivalent to its discrete component counterpart.

Torque Control
Torque control refers to blocking the start of an overcurrent function block. The pickup and trip outputs are
held to zero and the timing function is not allowed to operate. This is in contrast to merely blocking the trip
output. This applies to all overcurrent function blocks including those that do not emulate induction disk type
(51) relays.

Virtual Switches
These logic switches emulate traditional switches used on relay and control panels such as the breaker
control switch (101) and selector switches (43). Virtual switches may be operated via communication
commands or the HMI. Operation of these switches can be disabled or password protected if the user
chooses not to use them without changing the preprogrammed BESTlogic schemes.

Radial System
As used in this section, a radial system is one where the loads are fed from only one source at a time.

BE1-851 Application 8-1

OVERVIEW OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES
There are six preprogrammed logic schemes available. Four logic schemes are intended for use on feeder
breakers. Two schemes are intended for use on the bus main breaker This is typically the low side bank
breaker of the step down power transformer.

Factory Default Logic Settings

BE1-851 relays are shipped from the factory with default logic settings that are designed to allow the relay
to be used directly in applications that do not require any of the relays advanced features. These default
settings provide a basic overcurrent protection scheme. The default setting for the logic scheme name is
“USER”. This scheme can be modified as outlined in section 7, Logic Schemes. However, if you choose
to change these settings, the defaults can only be brought back through manual programing or by reloading
all of the factory defaults.

FEEDER_1 Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides time and instantaneous overcurrent protection. Breaker failure protection is also
included. Functions such as manual control and automatic reclosing are not included. Logic is provided to
maintain feeder protection when the relay is out of service. A bus relay using the preprogrammed logic
scheme BACKUP will be signaled to continue protection.

FEEDER_2 Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides time and both high set and low set instantaneous overcurrent protection.
Automatic reclosing is included with reclosing initiated by a protective trip (reclose initiate scheme). Breaker
Failure and manual control functions are also included. Logic is included to signal a bus relay using the
preprogrammed logic scheme BACKUP to provide feeder protection when the relay is out of service.

FEEDER_3 Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides time and both high set and low set instantaneous overcurrent protection.
Automatic reclosing is included. Reclosing is initiated when the breaker opens. Reclosing is disabled after
a manual trip by a control switch slip contact. The recloser is disabled by driving the recloser to lockout.
Breaker Failure and manual control functions are also provided. Logic is included to signal a bus relay using
preprogrammed logic scheme BACKUP to provide feeder protection when the relay is out of service.

FEEDER_4 Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides time and instantaneous overcurrent protection. Automatic reclosing is included.
Reclosing is initiated when the breaker opens. The recloser is disabled by interrupting the reclose initiate
input. Reclosing is disabled after a manual trip by a control switch slip contact. Breaker Failure and manual
control functions are also included. Backup for an out of service relay is to be provided by redundant relays
on the feeder breaker. Logic is included to interconnect with the redundant relays for an external breaker
failure initiate and blocking of the external instantaneous.

BUS Logic Scheme

This logic scheme is applied to a bus main relay to provide primary bus overcurrent protection. It contains
logic to interconnect with the feeder logic schemes to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the bus
under normal conditions. It also contains logic to trip the feeder breakers while the feeder relays using
FEEDER_1, FEEDER_2, or FEEDER_3 logic schemes are out of service.
BACKUP Logic Scheme
This logic scheme is applied to a bus main relay to provide backup bus overcurrent protection as well as
breaker failure protection for the bus breaker under normal conditions. It also provides primary bus
overcurrent protection when the relay using BUS logic is providing feeder protection or when the primary
bus relay is out of service.

8-2 Application BE1-851

DETAILS OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES
The following sub-sections describe each of the six preprogrammed logic schemes in detail. For each
scheme, the operation of the protection and control logic under normal conditions is described. The features
of each logic scheme are broken down into functional groupings and described in detail. This is followed by
a discussion of how various contingencies are covered by each logic scheme.

FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC SETTINGS

Logic scheme USER is intended for applications requiring three-phase and neutral nondirectional
overcurrent protection. While not as elaborate as the other preprogrammed schemes, this logic scheme
provides an excellent base on which to create a custom scheme for a specific application.
The default components of USER logic are summarized in Tables 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, and 8-4.
A diagram of USER logic is shown in Figure 8-1.

Operation - Protection
The phase, neutral and negative sequence elements are activated to provide timed (51) and instantaneous
(50) overcurrent protection in this scheme. A function block is disabled by setting the pickup set-point at zero
in each of the four setting groups. Virtual output VO11 is assigned for all protective trips. When VO11
becomes TRUE, OUT1 will operate and trip the breaker. Contact outputs OUT2, OUT3, OUT4, and OUT5
are designated to specific function blocks. OUT2 operates for instantaneous phase overcurrent conditions,
OUT3 trips for timed phase overcurrent situations, OUT4 operates for instantaneous neutral and negative
sequence overcurrent conditions, and OUT5 operates for timed neutral and negative sequence overcurrent
conditions.
All contact sensing inputs are unassigned, but IN1 is typically assigned to monitor breaker status (52b).
Inputs IN2, IN3, and IN4 are available for user specified functions.
Voltage protection, frequency protection, automatic reclosing, breaker failure, breaker control, and virtual
switches are not included in this logic scheme.

Operation - Setting Group Selection

A setting group can be selected automatically or by using the communication ports or the front panel HMI.
Automatic setting group changes are based on current level and duration. Automatic setting group changes
for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustments are enabled by the SP-GROUP# command. Setting
group changes initiated by contact sensing inputs are not accommodated in this scheme, but IN2, IN3, or
IN4 can be programmed to provide this function.

Operation - Alarms
If the continuous self-test diagnostics of the relay detect an error, failsafe output contact OUTA will close and
the Relay Trouble LED of the HMI will light. OUTA will also close if relay operating power is lost. More
information about alarms is provided in Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions.

Table 8-1. Factory Default Contact Sensing Input Logic settings

State Labels

Input Purpose Variable Label Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 Not used INPUT_1 OPEN CLOSED
IN2 Not used INPUT_2 CLOSED OPEN
IN3 Not used INPUT_3 CLOSED OPEN

BE1-851 Application 8-3

 IN4 Not used INPUT_4 CLOSED OPEN

Table 8-2. Factory Default Function Blocks Logic Settings

BESTlogic
Function Purpose Expression Mode Setting
50TP Used for instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 0 1 (enabled)
50TN Used for instantaneous neutral overcurrent protection. 0 1 (enabled)
50TQ Used for instantaneous negative sequence overcurrent 0 1 (enabled)
protection.
150TP None 0 0 (disabled)
150TN None 0 0 (disabled)
150TQ None 0 0 (disabled)
51P Used for timed phase-overcurrent protection. 0 1 (enabled)
51N Used for timed neutral-overcurrent protection. 0 1 (enabled)
51Q Used for timed negative sequence overcurrent 0 1 (enabled)
protection.
62 None 0 0 (disabled)
162 None 0 0 (disabled)
79 None 0 0 (disabled)
BF None 0 0 (disabled)
Input 0 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0
Input 1 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0
1
Input 2 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0
GROUP (discrete input
Input 3 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0 selection)

Auto/Manual Logic: Set to 1 (/0) to enable automatic /0

selection. No manual selection is used.

Table 8-3. Factory Default Virtual Switch Logic Settings

State Labels

Switch Purpose Mode Variable Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)

43 Not used 1 (disabled) SWITCH_43 CLOSED OPEN
143 Not used 1 (disabled) SWITCH_143 CLOSED OPEN
243 Not used 1 (disabled) SWITCH_243 CLOSED OPEN
343 Not used 1 (disabled) SWITCH_343 CLOSED OPEN
101 Not used 1 (disabled) N/A N/A N/A

8-4 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-4. Factory Default Virtual Output Logic Settings

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
VOA Alarm contact closes automatically
Alarm Output Contact. ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA) when relay trouble alarm occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = 0
VO1 Contact closes when protective trip
Breaker Trip Contact. BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1) expression is TRUE.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO11
VO2 Instantaneous Phase OC Contact closes when instantaneous
50TP_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT2) Auxiliary Contact. phase-overcurrent trip occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 50TPT
VO3 Timed Phase OC Contact closes when timed phase-
51P_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT3) Auxiliary Contact. overcurrent trip occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = 51PT
Contact closes when instantaneous
Instantaneous Neutral
VO4 neutral or instantaneous negative-
and Negative Sequence INST_N&Q TRIP NORMAL
(OUT4) sequence overcurrent condition
OC.
occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = 50TNT+50TQT
Contact closes when timed neutral
VO5 Timed Neutral and
or timed negative sequence 51N&QTRP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) Negative Sequence OC.
overcurrent condition exists.
BESTlogic Expression: VO5 = 51NT+51QT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
VO8 None VO8 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 0
VO9 None VO9 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = 0
VO10 None VO10 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = 0
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51 element
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51 element
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE

BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0

BE1-851 Application 8-5

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)

VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE

BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
VO15 Alarm Mask 23. VO15 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = 0

52

OUT2
TRIP
50P TRIP
OUT4
50N & 50Q
TRIP

50TP 50TN 50TQ

OUT1
ALL TRIPS

51P 51N 51Q

OUT5
51N & 51Q TRIP
OUT3
51P TRIP
D2871-7
BE1-851 12-13-99

Figure 8-1. Typical One-Line Diagram for Factory Default Logic Settings.

8-6 Application BE1-851

BE1-851
VOA - ALARM
D0 SG0 OUTPU
D1 ACTIVE SG1 OUT
T
D2862-8 SETTING SG2 A
D2 CO-OUTx LOGIC
10-10-99 GROUP
D3 SG3
0 CONTROL
AUTO VO11 PROT TRIP
6 VO1 - 52TC
OUTPU
OUT
T
CO-OUTx LOGIC 1
50TPT
PHASE
BLK IOC
IN1 50TPPU
OPTO (50TP)
OUTPU
OUT
T
IN2 2
OPTO 50TNT CO-OUTx LOGIC
NEUTRAL
BLK IOC
IN3 50TNPU
OPTO (50TN)
VO3 - 51PT
OUTPU
IN4 OUT
OPTO 50TQT T
NEG SEQ CO-OUTx LOGIC 3
BLK
IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ)
VO4
50TNT+50TQT

Application
51PT OUTPU
PHASE OUT
T
43 BLK TOC CO-OUTx LOGIC 4
CO-43 51PPU
(51P)
143
CO-143 VO5
51NT 51NT+51QT
NEUTRAL
243 BLK OUTPU
CO-243 TOC 51NPU OUT
T
(51N) CO-OUTx LOGIC 5

Figure 8-2. Factory Default Logic Settings Diagram

343
CO-343
51QT
NEG SEQ
BLK TOC 51QPU
(51Q)

VO12 PROT PU
6

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-7
Factory Default Logic Settings and Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays.
SL-N=USER
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0; SL-50TQ=1,0
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0
SL-51N=1,0
SL-51Q=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/0
SL-43=1
SL-143=1
SL-243=1
SL-343=1
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=1
SL-VO1=VO11
SL-VO2=50TPT
SL-VO3=51PT
SL-VO4=50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO5=51NT+51QT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=0
SL-VO10=0
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=0

Factory Default Logic Settings and Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays.
SL-N=USER
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0; SL-50TQ=1,0
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0
SL-51N=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/0
SL-43=1
SL-143=1
SL-243=1
SL-343=1
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=1
SL-VO1=VO11
SL-VO2=50TPT
SL-VO3=51PT
SL-VO4=50TNT

8-8 Application BE1-851

SL-VO5=51NT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=0
SL-VO10=0
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=0

FEEDER_1 LOGIC SCHEME

Logic scheme FEEDER_1 is meant for use on a feeder breaker and provides overcurrent and breaker failure
protection for a typical feeder in a non-directional overcurrent protection application. This logic scheme is
intended to be used in conjunction with other programmable relays using the BUS and BACKUP logic
schemes to provide protection when the relay is out of service. Automatic reclosing and other control
functions such as virtual switches are not provided. When used with other programmable relays using logic
scheme BUS and BACKUP, this scheme can provide complete high speed overcurrent protection for the
transformers, bus, and feeders in a radial system substation.
A diagram of FEEDER_1 logic is shown in Figure 8-2. The components used in this logic are explained in
Tables 8-5, 8-6, 8-7, and 8-8.

Normal Operation - Protection

The 51 function blocks and the breaker failure function block re-trip output are enabled in the logic for
tripping via OUT1. The 50T function blocks are enabled in the logic for tripping through OUT2. Each
overcurrent function block can be disabled by setting its pickup setting at 0 in each of the four setting groups.
The 50T ground (N), negative sequence (Q), and the 51 N and Q overcurrent function blocks are torque
controlled by IN3. All N & Q function blocks or only the 51 N & Q function blocks can be disabled by
modifying the inputs to these function blocks.

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection

Setting group selection can be done automatically or by communications command/HMI override. Automatic
setting group changes for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustment are enabled by the
SP-GROUP# commands. Setting group changes initiated by a contact sensing input is not accommodated
in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function if desired. The automatic
change logic can be disabled by IN2.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

When any of the 50T or 51 overcurrent function blocks are picked up, OUT4 closes. The signal from OUT4
is wired to IN2 of the upstream relay using BUS logic. The upstream relay blocks the 50T elements that are
set to trip the bus breaker or bus lockout relay. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 50T elements of the bus
relay are not blocked. The bus relay 50T elements are set with a time delay of 2 to 4 cycles to provide a
minimal coordination interval for feeder relay OUT4 to close. Should there be a problem with the blocking
logic, the bus relay 51 functions are not blocked to allow bus fault clearing with a traditional coordination
interval.
When used to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all
51 function timing curves be set for instantaneous reset.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to

BE1-851 Application 8-9

be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the feeder protection system if external test switches
are not installed on all outputs. When the relay is out of service for testing, the breaker failure, and block
upstream instantaneous functions are disabled. Backup by the upstream relay is enabled and the
instantaneous function block trips are redirected to OUT1.
De-energizing IN4 will put the logic scheme in the test mode. IN4 can be controlled by a panel mounted
selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state. IN4 can also be controlled by
a pole of a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED to provide indication when the relay
is in test mode.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Breaker Failure

OUT5 is programmed as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the bus breaker or a
lockout relay. The breaker failure pickup (BFPU) output trips the feeder breaker directly via output 1 to
provide a breaker retrip signal for added security.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is not accommodated in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4
can be programmed to provide this function or FEEDER_4 logic may be used. The breaker failure function
block is initiated by a protective trip. This function block has an independent fast drop out phase and ground
current detector that detects a breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker is detected when the
current drops below 10% of nominal.
The BF function block can be disabled by setting the time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial
systems backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping different breakers.
FEEDER_1 logic stops the block signal to allow the bus relay to trip the bus breaker through its 50T
elements if a direct trip is not desired. This provides clearing of the fault on the circuit with the failed breaker
in feeder relay breaker failure time (or bus relay 50T time whichever is greater) instead of the bus relay 51
time; but, is limited by the sensitivity constraints of the bus relay.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-Of-Service

When the relay is out of service or has failed, OUT3 opens to signal the upstream relays providing backup
protection. OUT3 operates in a fail safe mode where the outputs are closed during normal operation and
open during a relay failure. This provides backup mode signaling when the feeder relay is extracted from
the case.
Backup for relay failure can be implemented using the BUS and BACKUP preprogrammed logic schemes.
These logic schemes are described later in this section.

8-10 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-5. FEEDER_1 Contact Sensing Input Logic
State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Automatic setting group change SETGRPAUTO ENABLED DISABLD

logic auto/manual switch

IN3 Enable neutral and negative N&Q_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

sequence, 50 and 51 protection
when IN3 is energized.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
breaker failure is disabled and all
trips go through OUT1 when IN4
is de-energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-6. FEEDER_1 Function Block Logic

BESTlogic
Function Purpose Expression Mode Settings

50TP None 0 1 (enabled)

50TN Block When disabled by switch connected to /IN3 1 (enabled)

IN3.

50TQ Block when disabled by switch connected to /IN3

IN3

150TP None 0 0(disabled)

150TN None 0 0(disabled)

150TQ None 0 0(disabled)

51P None 0 1 (enabled)

51N Block when disabled by switch connected to /IN3

IN3. 1 (enabled)

51Q Block when disabled by switch connected to /IN3 1 (enabled)

IN3.

62 None 0 0(disabled)

162 None 0 0(disabled)

79 None 0 0(disabled)

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure V010

initiate expression is true
BF 1 (enabled)
Block breaker failure protection when relay is in
test mode /IN4

BE1-851 Application 8-11

 BESTlogic
Function Purpose Expression Mode Settings

No manual selection logic is used 0

No manual selection logic is used 0

Group No manual selection logic is used 0 1

No manual selection logic is used 0

Disable automatic selection when switch /IN2

connected to IN2 is in the manual position.

Table 8-7. FEEDER_1 Virtual Switches Logic

Function State Labels 

Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Not used SWITCH_43 CLOSED OPEN

143 Not used SWITCH_143 CLOSED OPEN

243 Not used SWITCH_243 CLOSED OPEN

343 Not used SWITCH_343 CLOSED OPEN

Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-8. Feeder_1 Virtual Outputs

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.

BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ

Close OUT1 when time

overcurrent trip is true OR when
VO1
50 Trip output breaker failure is initiated OR 51_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
when any protective trip occurs
while in test mode..
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO8*IN4+BFPU+VO11*/IN4
Trip breaker when instantaneous
VO2
50 Trip Output overcurrent trip is true and not in 50_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT2)
test mode.

8-12 Application BE1-851

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = VO9*IN4
Hold output closed if relay is not
VO3 Enable backup of relay out of service because it is in
IN_SERVICE NORMAL BACKUP
(OUT3) by upstream relay. test mode AND it is not out of
service due to relay failure
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = IN4
Block upstream Block upstream instantaneous
instantaneous elements elements when the protective
VO4
when relay is picked up pickup expression is true AND BLK_USTRM BLOCKED NORMAL
(OUT4)
for high speed bus over the relay is not in test mode AND
current protection logic. the breaker has not failed.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO12*/VO5*IN4
VO5 Breaker failure trip conact Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
True if any of the time
VO8 Time overcurrent trip. 51_TRIP TRIP FALSE
overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 51PT+51NT+51QT
Instantaneous over True if any of the instantaneous
VO9 50_TRIP TRIP FALSE
current tip. overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
Initiate breaker failure timing
Breaker failure initiate
VO10 when protective trip expression BFI INI NORMAL
expression
is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. element times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0

BE1-851 Application 8-13

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)

Alarm bit #23 indication

that the relay is in test
mode and that breaker
VO15 Trui if IN4 is de-energized. TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
failure is disabled and all
trips are rerouted to
OUT1.
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4

52

OUT2 TRIP
50 TRIP

50TP 50TN 50TQ

OUT1
51
TRIP 2

51P 51N 51Q

OUT5
BF
TRIP
BF

IN4 OUT3
TEST TEST D2871-3
MODE BE1-851 MODE 12-13-99
OUT
2 When IN4 is de-energized indicating test mode, the
50T element is diverted to out 1 for testing purposes.

Figure 8-3. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_1 Logic

8-14 Application BE1-851

 ALMLGC

BE1-851
VOA ALARM
ALMMAJ
SB-LOGIC
OUTPUT
ALARM ALMMIN OUTA
CO-OUTx LOGIC
OUT1MON

IN1 52B
OPTO

IN2 SET GRP AUTO

OPTO VO1 51TRIP
OUTPUT
IN3 N AND Q ENABLE OUT1
OPTO CO-OUTx LOGIC

IN4 TEST MODE

OPTO
50TPT
0 PHASE
BLK IOC 50TPPU
(50TP)
VO2 50TRIP
OUTPUT
50TNT OUT2
NEUTRAL LOGIC
BLK CO-OUTx
IOC 50TNPU
(50TN)
VO3 RELAY OUT OF SERVICE
50TQT
NEG SEQ OUTPUT
BLK OUT3
IOC 50TQPU CO-OUTx LOGIC
(50TQ)
VO4 BLOCK UPSTREAM
51PT INSTANTANEOUS
0 PHASE
BLK TOC OUTPUT
51PPU OUT4
(51P) CO-OUTx LOGIC

Application
51NT
NEUTRAL
BLK VO5 BF TRIP
TOC 51NPU
(51N) OUTPUT
OUT5
CO-OUTx LOGIC

51QT
NEG SEQ
BLK 3 VO8 51TRIP
IOC 51QPU
(51Q)

Figure 8-4. FEEDER_1 Logic Diagram

3
VO9 50TRIP
D0 SG0
D1 ACTIVE SG1 VO11 PROT TRIP
SG2 6
SETTING
D2 SG3
GROUP
D3 VO12 PROT PU
CONTROL 6
AUTO

VO15 TEST MODE

VO10 BFI
INI BREAKER BFT
FAILURE
D2863-01 BLK (BF) BFPU
10-10-99
Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR
Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-15
FEEDER_1 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays.
SL-N=FEEDER_1
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,/IN3; SL-50TQ=1,/IN3
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0; SL-150TQ=0,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3; SL-51Q=1,/IN3
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,IN2
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=0
SL-101=0
SL-VO1=VO8*IN4+VO11*/IN4+BFPU
SL-VO2=VO9*IN4
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4

FEEDER_1 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays.
SL-N=FEEDER_1
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,/IN3
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,IN2
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=0
SL-101=0
SL-VO1=VO8*IN4+VO11*/IN4+BFPU
SL-VO2=VO9*IN4
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+51PT+51NT

8-16 Application BE1-851

SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4

FEEDER_2 LOGIC SCHEME

Logic scheme FEEDER_2 is meant for use on a feeder breaker and provides overcurrent, breaker failure
protection, reclosing, and the control functions required for a typical feeder in a non-directional overcurrent
protection application. This logic scheme is intended to be used in conjunction with other programmable
relays using the BUS and BACKUP logic schemes to provide protection when the relay is out of service.
Automatic reclosing uses a reclose initiate scheme and is initiated by protective trip.
When used with other programmable relays using logic scheme BUS and BACKUP, this scheme can provide
complete high speed overcurrent protection for the transformers, bus and feeders in a radial system
substation. A diagram of FEEDER_2 logic is shown in Figure 8-3. The components used in this logic are
explained in Table 8-9, 8-10, 8-11, and 8-12.

Normal Operation - Control

The virtual breaker control switch is programmed to provide manual trip and close control of the breaker.
The control functions of this logic scheme use both traditional contact sensing inputs and virtual switches.
Virtual switches that are not needed may simply go unused. The protection engineer may choose to free
up contact sensing inputs for other uses by using the virtual switches exclusively for the various control
functions.

Normal Operation - Protection

All overcurrent function blocks and the breaker failure function block re-trip output are enabled in FEEDER_2
logic for tripping via OUT1. The 150T function blocks are set up as high set instantaneous functions which
drive the recloser to lockout when they trip. Each overcurrent function block can be individually disabled by
setting the pickup at 0 in the four setting groups. The 50TN, 50TQ, 51N, and 51Q function blocks are torque
controlled by either IN3 or virtual switch 243. All N and Q function blocks or only the 51N and 51Q function
blocks may be inhibited. This is done in BESTlogic by modifying the inputs to the function blocks.

Normal Operation - Reclosing

The reclosing logic in FEEDER_2 uses a reclose initiate (RI) scheme where each step in the reclosing
sequence is initiated by a protective trip. The recloser function block can be disabled by setting the first
reclose time at zero in the four setting groups.
Reclosing can be disabled by either IN2 or virtual switch 143 which is connected to the drive to lockout (DTL)
input of the recloser function block. In this scheme, enabling the recloser after a "one shot" trip will cause
the recloser to be in lockout. When the breaker is manually closed, the relay will time out to a reset
condition.
Drive to lockout also occurs if any of the 150TP/N/Q functions (typically used for high set instantaneous
protection) trip or a breaker failure occurs. It should be noted that the 150TP/N/Q functions drive both the
RI and the DTL inputs to the recloser function block. The DTL input takes priority over the RI input.
Zone sequence coordination can be enabled by setting an appropriate logic expression for 79ZONE. Zone
sequence uses a BESTlogic expression but is not within the logic settings. The FEEDER_2 logic scheme
uses the expression SP-79ZONE=VO12.
FEEDER_2 logic provides for the recloser to torque control the 50TP/N/Q functions (typically used for low
set instantaneous protection) during various steps in the reclosing sequence. Setting the recloser sequence
controlled blocking output in the four setting groups is done using the S#-79SCB commands.
Recloser timing is stopped by the wait input if an overcurrent protection function block is picked up and
timing. This prevents the reset timer from resetting the reclose function for a situation where a 51 element

BE1-851 Application 8-17

is just above pickup and the time to trip is longer than the reset time.
Initiation of the recloser function block by external relays is not accommodated in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or
IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function if desired.
A block load tap changer output is not provided in this scheme. OUT5 can be reprogrammed as a 79RNG
(recloser running/block tap changer) output and wired to energize a normally closed auxiliary relay.

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection

Setting group selection can be done automatically or externally by communications command/HMI override.
Automatic setting group changes for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustment are enabled by
SP-GROUP# commands. Setting group changes initiated by contact sensing inputs are not accommodated
in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function if desired. The automatic
change logic can be disabled by virtual switch 43.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

When any of the overcurrent function blocks are picked up, OUT4 closes. The signal from OUT4 is wired
to IN2 of the upstream relay using BUS logic. The upstream relay blocks the 50T elements that are set up
to trip the bus breaker or bus lockout relay. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 50T elements of the bus relay
are not blocked. The bus relay 50T elements are set with a time delay of 2 to 4 cycles to provide a minimal
coordination interval for the feeder relay OUT4 to close. Should there be a problem with the blocking logic,
the bus relay 51 functions are not blocked to allow bus fault clearing with a traditional coordination interval.
When used to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all
51 function timing curves be set for instantaneous reset.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to
be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the feeder protection and control system if external test
switches are not installed on all outputs. When the relay is out of service for testing, the breaker failure,
automatic reclosing, and block upstream instantaneous functions are disabled. Backup by the upstream
relay is enabled.
De-energizing IN4 or closing virtual switch 343 will put the logic scheme in the test mode. IN4 can be
controlled by a panel mounted selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state.
IN4 can also be controlled by a pole of a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test
switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED to provide indication when the relay is
in test mode.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Breaker Failure

OUT5 is configured as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the bus breaker or a lockout
relay. The breaker failure pickup (BFPU) output trips the feeder breaker directly via output 1 to provide a
breaker retrip signal for added security.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is not accommodated in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4
can be programmed to provide this function or FEEDER_4 logic may be used. The breaker failure function
block is initiated by a protective trip. This function block has an independent fast drop out phase and ground
current detector that detects a breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker is detected when the

8-18 Application BE1-851

current drops below 10% of nominal.
The BF function block is disabled by setting the time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial system
backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping different breakers.
FEEDER_2 logic stops the block signal to allow the bus relay to trip the bus breaker through its 50T
elements if a direct trip is not desired. This provides clearing of the fault on the circuit with the failed breaker
in feeder relay breaker failure time (or bus relay 50T time whichever is greater) instead of the bus relay 51
time; but, is limited by the sensitivity constraints of the bus relay.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service

When the relay is out of service or has failed, OUT3 opens to signal the upstream relays providing backup
protection. OUT3 operates in a fail safe mode; the output is closed during normal operation and open during
a relay failure. This provides backup mode signaling when the feeder relay is extracted from the case.
Backup for relay failure can be implemented using the BUS and BACKUP preprogrammed logic schemes.
These logic schemes are described later in this section.
Table 8-9. FEEDER_2 Contact Sensing Input Logic.
State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status. BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Enable recloser when IN2 is RCL_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

energized.

IN3 Enable neutral and negative N&Q_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

sequence, 50 and 51 protection
when IN3 is energized.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when IN4 is de-
energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-10. FEEDER_2 Function Block Logic

BESTlogic
Function Descriptoin Experession Settings

50TP Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB 1(enabled)

blocking output is true.

50TN Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+/IN3+243 1(enabled)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243

50TQ Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+/IN3+243 1(enabled)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
/IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243.

150TP None 0 1(enabled)

150TN None 0 1(enabled)

BE1-851 Application 8-19

 BESTlogic
Function Descriptoin Experession Settings

150TQ None 0 1(enabled)

51P None 0 1(enabled)

51N Block when disabled by IN3 or Virtual Switch /IN3+243 1(enabled)

243.

51Q Block when disabled by IN3 or Virtual Switch /IN3+243 1(enabled)

243.

62 None 0 0(disable)

162 None 0 0(disable)

Initiate when reclose initiate expression is true. VO8

Breaker closed when IN1 is de-energized . /IN1

Stop recloser timing when timing for a fault trip.

True when protection picked up expression is VO12
79 1(enabled)
true.

Drive recloser to lockout when recloser drive to

lockout expression is true or when relay is in VO9+/IN4+343
test mode.

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure V010

initiate expression is true
BF 1(enabled)

Block breaker failure protection when relay is in /IN4+343

test mode

Group Disable automatic selection when virtual switch /43 1(enabled)

43 is in the manual position.

Table 8-11. FEEDER_2 Virtual Switches Logic

State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Automatic setting group change logic SETGRP_MAN MANUAL AUTO

auto/manual switch.

143 Disable recloser when virtual switch is RCL_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

closed.

243 Disable neutral and negative N&Q_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

sequence, 50 and 51 protection when
virtual switch is closed.

343 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when virtual switch is closed.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

8-20 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-12. Feeder_2 Virtual Outputs
State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip breaker when protective trip
expression is true OR when
VO1
Breaker trip contact. breaker failure is initiated OR 51_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
when virtual breaker control
switch is operated to trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO11+BFPU+101T
Close breaker when recloser
VO2 close output is true OR when
Breaker close contact 50_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT2) virtual breaker control switch is
operated to close.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 79C+101C
Hold output closed if relay is not
VO3 Enable backup of relay out of service because it is in
IN_SERVICE NORMAL BACKUP
(OUT3) by upstream relay. test mode AND it is not out of
service due to relay failurr.
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = IN4*/343
Block upstream Block upstream instantaneous
instantaneous elements elements when the protective
VO4
when relay is picked up pickup expression is true AND BLK_USTRM BLOCKED NORMAL
(OUT4)
for high speed bus over the relay is not in test mode AND
current protection logic. the breaker has not failed.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
VO5 Breaker failure trip conact Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
Reclose initiate
VO8 True for any protective trip. RCL_INI INI NORMAL
expression
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 51PT+51NT+51QT
Drive recloser to lockout to
disable it when IN2 is de-
energized OR virtual switch 143
Recloser drive to lockout is closed OR when the breaker
VO9 RCL_DTL DTL NORMAL
expression. virtual control switch is in the
after trip state OR if the breaker
fails OR when the high set
instantaneous element trips.

BE1-851 Application 8-21

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = /IN2+143+V05+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT
Initiate breaker failure timing
Breaker failure initiate
VO10 when protective trip expression BFI INI NORMAL
expression
is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 , 150 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. erelement times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50, 150, or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+150TPPU+150TNPU+150TQPU+51PPU
+51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay is in test
True if IN4 is de-energized OR if
VO15 mode and that breaker TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
virtual switch 343 is closed.
failure and reclosing are
disabled
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

8-22 Application BE1-851

 VOA ALARM
ALMLGC

BE1-851
SB-LOGIC OUTPUT OUT
ALMMAJ
ALARM LOGIC A
CO-OUTx
ALMMIN 101T
OUT1MON 101C
CO-101
101SC
OPTO
IN1 52B
VO8
OPTO 79RI 79C
IN2 RCL ENABLE RI
PHASE 79 79RNG
0 BLK 150TPT STATUS 79LO
OPTO IOC RE-
IN3 N AND Q ENABLE 6 VO9 79DTL WAIT 79F
(150TP) CLOSER
150TPPU DTL/BLK 79SCB
OPTO
IN4 TEST MODE
NEUTRAL
0 BLK 150TNT
IOC
(150TN)
150TNPU
CO-43
43 SET GRP AUTO
0 NEG SEQ
BLK 150TQT
CO-143 IOC
143 RCL ENABLE (150TQ) 150TQPU
CO-243
243 N AND Q ENABLE
PHASE
343 TEST MODE BLK 50TPT VO1 52TC
CO-343 IOC
(50TP) OUTPUT OUT
50TPPU
LOGIC 1
CO-OUTx
50TNT
NEUTRAL
BLK IOC VO2 52CC
(50TN)
50TNPU OUTPUT OUT
LOGIC 2
CO-OUTx
50TQT
NEG SEQ

Application
BLK
IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ) VO3 RELAY OUT OF SERVICE

OUTPUT OUT
51PT LOGIC 3
PHASE CO-OUTx
0 BLK TOC 51PPU
(51P) VO4 BLOCK UPSTREAM
INSTANTANEOUS

51NT OUTPUT OUT

NEUTRAL LOGIC 4

Figure 8-6. FEEDER-2 Logic Diagram

BLK TOC CO-OUTx
51NPU
(51N)

VO5 BF TRIP
51QT
NEG SEQ OUT
BLK OUTPUT
IOC 5
VO15 TEST MODE CO-OUTx LOGIC
(51Q)
51QPU
9 VO11 PROT TRIP
D0 SG0
ACTIVE 9
VO12 PROT PU
D1
SETTING SG1
D2
GROUP SG2
D3
CONTROL SG3
AUTO
D2863-02 VO10 BFI
INI BREAKER BFT
10-10-99 FAILURE
BLK (BF) BFPU

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-23
FEEDER_2 Logic Settings And Equations For Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_2
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN3+243; SL-50TQ=1,79SCB+/IN3+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3+243; SL-51Q=1,/IN3+243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=VO11
SL-VO9=/IN2+143+VO5+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+50TQT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+50TQPU+150TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_2 Logic Settings And Equations For Sensing Input Type G Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_2
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN3+243; 79SCB+/IN3+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3+243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=VO11
SL-VO9=/IN2+143+VO5+150TPT+150TNT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+150TQT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0

8-24 Application BE1-851

SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_3 LOGIC SCHEME

Logic scheme FEEDER_3 is meant for use on a feeder breaker and provides all overcurrent and breaker
failure protection, reclosing, and control functions required for a typical feeder in a non-directional
over-current protection application. This logic scheme is intended for use in conjunction with other
programmable relays using BUS and BACKUP schemes to provide protection when the relay is out of
service.
Automatic reclosing is initiated by the breaker opening. Reclosing is disabled after a manual trip by a control
switch slip contact. In this logic scheme, the disable logic is connected to the drive to lockout (DTL) input.
The recloser will remain in lockout until the breaker closes and the reset timer times out.
When used with other programmable relays using logic scheme BUS and BACKUP, this scheme can provide
complete high speed overcurrent protection for the transformers, bus and feeders in a radial system
substation. A diagram of FEEDER_3 logic is shown in Figure 8-4. The components used in this logic are
explained in Tables 8-13, 8-14, 8-15, and 8-16.

Normal Operation - Control

The virtual breaker control switch is programmed to provide manual trip and close control of the breaker.
Control functions of this logic scheme use traditional contact sensing inputs and virtual switches. Virtual
switches that are not needed may simply go unused. The protection engineer may choose to free up contact
sensing inputs for other uses by using the virtual switches exclusively for control functions.

Normal Operation - Protection

All overcurrent function blocks and the breaker failure function block re-trip output are enabled in FEEDER_3
logic for tripping via OUT1. The 150T function blocks are set up as high set instantaneous functions which
drive the recloser to lockout when they trip. Each overcurrent function block can be individually disabled by
setting the pickup at 0 in the four setting groups. The 50TN, 50TQ, 51N, and 51Q function blocks are torque
controlled by either IN3 or virtual switch 243. All N and Q function blocks or only the 51N and 51Q function
blocks may be inhibited. This is done in BESTlogic by modifying the inputs to the function blocks.

Normal Operation - Reclosing

The reclosing logic in FEEDER_3 is initiated by the breaker opening. Automatic reclosing is disabled for a
manual trip by a control switch slip contact. The recloser function block can be disabled by setting the first
reclose time = 0 in the four setting groups.
Reclosing can be disabled by IN2 or virtual switch 143 which is connected to the drive to lockout (DTL) input
of the recloser function block. In this scheme, enabling the recloser after a "one shot" trip will cause the
recloser to be in lockout. Once the breaker is manually closed, the recloser will time out to a reset condition.
If an external control switch slip contact is used, it should be wired in series with the reclose enable switch
to IN2.
The BESTlogic can be modified so that the reclosing disable logic interrupts the RI input to the recloser
instead of driving the recloser to lockout. This is accomplished by using variables IN2, 143, and 101SC in
the RI expression instead of the DTL expression. This recloser control logic is used in preprogrammed logic
scheme FEEDER_4.
Drive to lockout also occurs if any of the 150TP/N/Q functions (typically used for high set instantaneous
protection) trip or breaker failure occurs. It should be noted that the 150TP/N/Q functions drive both the RI
and the DTL inputs to the recloser function block. The DTL input takes priority over the RI input.
Zone sequence coordination can be enabled by setting an appropriate logic expression for 79ZONE. Zone
sequence uses a BESTlogic expression but is not within the logic settings. The FEEDER_3 logic scheme
uses the expression SP-79ZONE=VO12.

BE1-851 Application 8-25

FEEDER_3 logic provides for the recloser to torque control the 50TP/N/Q functions (typically used for low
set instantaneous protection) during various steps in the reclosing sequence. Setting the recloser sequence
controlled blocking output in the four setting groups is done using the S#-79SCB commands.
Recloser timing is stopped by the wait input if an overcurrent protection function block is picked up and
timing. This prevents the reset timer from resetting the reclose function for a situation where a 51 element
is just above pickup and the time to trip is longer than the reset time.
A block load tap changer output is not provided in this scheme. OUT5 can be reprogrammed as a 79RNG
(recloser running/block tap changer) output and wired to energize a normally closed auxiliary relay.

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection

Setting group selection can be done automatically or externally by communications command/HMI override.
Automatic setting group changes for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustment are enabled by
SP-GROUP# commands. Setting group changes initiated by contact sensing inputs are not accommodated
in this scheme. IN3, or IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function instead of their programmed
functions if desired. The automatic change logic can be disabled by virtual switch 43.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

When any of the overcurrent function blocks are picked up, OUT4 closes. The signal from OUT4 is wired
to IN2 of the upstream relay using BUS logic. The upstream relay blocks the 50T elements that are set up
to trip the bus breaker or bus lockout relay. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 50T elements of the bus relay
are not blocked. The bus relay 50T elements are set with a time delay of 2 to 4 cycles to provide a minimal
coordination interval for the feeder relay OUT4 to close. Should there be a problem with the blocking logic,
the bus relay 51 functions are not blocked to allow bus fault clearing with a traditional coordination interval.
When used to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all
51 function timing curves be set for instantaneous reset.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to
be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the feeder protection and control system if external test
switches are not installed on all outputs. When the relay is out of service for testing, the breaker failure,
automatic reclosing, and block upstream instantaneous functions are disabled. Backup by the upstream
relay is enabled.
De-energizing IN4 or closing virtual switch 343 will put the logic in test mode. IN4 can be controlled by a
panel mounted selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state. IN4 can also be
controlled by a pole of a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED to provide indication when the relay is
in test mode.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Breaker Failure

OUT5 is configured as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the bus breaker or a lockout
relay. The breaker failure pickup (BFPU) output trips the feeder breaker directly via output 1 to provide a
breaker retrip signal for added security.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is not accommodated in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4

8-26 Application BE1-851

can be programmed to provide this function or FEEDER_4 logic may be used. The breaker failure function
block is initiated by a protective trip. This function block has an independent fast drop out phase and ground
current detector that detects a breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker is detected when the
current drops below 10% of nominal.
The BF function block is disabled by setting the time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial system
backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping different breakers.
FEEDER_3 logic stops the block signal to allow the bus relay to trip the bus breaker through its 50T
elements if a direct trip is not desired. This provides clearing of the fault on the circuit with the failed breaker
in feeder relay breaker failure time (or bus relay 50T time whichever is greater) instead of the bus relay 51
time; but, is limited by the sensitivity constraints of the bus relay.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Relay Out-of-Service

When the relay is out of service or has failed, OUT3 opens to signal the upstream relays providing backup
protection. OUT3 operates in a fail safe mode; the output is closed during normal operation and open during
a relay failure. This provides backup mode signaling when the feeder relay is extracted from the case.
Backup for relay failure can be implemented using the BUS and BACKUP preprogrammed logic schemes.
These logic schemes are described later in this section.
Table 8-13. FEEDER_3 Contact Sensing Input Logic
State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status. BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Enable recloser when IN2 is RCL_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

energized.

IN3 Enable neutral and negative N&Q_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

sequence, 50 and 51 protection
when IN3 is energized.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when IN4 is de-
energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-14. FEEDER_3 Function Block Logic

BESTlogic Mode
Function Purpose Experession Settings

50TP Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB 1(enable)

blocking output is true.

50TN Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+/IN3+243 1(enable)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243

50TQ Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+/IN3+243 1(enable)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243.

150TP None 0 1(enable)

BE1-851 Application 8-27

 BESTlogic Mode
Function Purpose Experession Settings

150TN None 0 1(enable)

150TQ None 0 1(enable)

51P None 0 1(enable)

51N Block when disabled by IN3 or Virtual Switch /IN3+243 1(enable)

243.

51Q Block when disabled by IN3 or Virtual Switch /IN3+243 1(enable)

243.

62 None 0 0(disable)

162 None 0 0(disable)

Strapped high /0

Breaker closed when IN1 is de-energized. /IN1

79 Stop recloser timing when timing for a fault VO12 1(enable)

trip. True when protection picked up
expression is true.

Drive recloser to lockout when recloser drive VO9+/IN4+343

to lockout expression is true or when relay is
in test mode.

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure V010

initiate expression is true
BF 1(enable)
Block breaker failure protection when relay is /IN4+343
in test mode

Group Disable automatic selection when virtual /43 1(enable)

switch 43 is in the manual position.
Table 8-15. FEEDER_3 Virtual Switches Logic
State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Automatic setting group change logic SETGRP_MAN MANUAL AUTO

auto/manual switch.

143 Disable recloser when virtual switch is RCL_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

closed.

243 Disable neutral and negative N&Q_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

sequence, 50 and 51 protection when
virtual switch is closed.

343 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when virtual switch is closed.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

8-28 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-16. Feeder_3 Virtual Outputs
State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip breaker when protective trip
expression is true OR when
VO1
Breaker trip contact. breaker failure is initiated OR when BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
virtual breaker control switch is
operated to trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO11+BFPU+101T
Close breaker when recloser close
VO2 output is true OR when virtual
Breaker close contact BKR_CLOSE CLOSE NORMAL
(OUT2) breaker control switch is operated
to close.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 79C+101C
Hold output closed if relay is not
VO3 Enable backup of relay out of service because it is in test
IN_SERVICE NORMAL BACKUP
(OUT3) by upstream relay. mode AND it is not out of service
due to relay failure.
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = IN4*/343
Block upstream Block upstream instantaneous
instantaneous elements elements when the protective
VO4
when relay is picked up pickup expression is true AND the BLK_USTRM BLOCKED NORMAL
(OUT4)
for high speed bus over relay is not in test mode AND the
current protection logic. breaker has not failed.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
VO5 Breaker failure trip Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) conact protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
VO8 None VO8 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 0
Drive recloser to lockout to disable
it when IN2 is de-energized OR
virtual switch 143 is closed OR
Recloser drive to lockout
VO9 when the breaker virtual control RCL_DTL DTL NORMAL
expression.
switch is in the after trip state OR if
the breaker fails OR when the high
set instantaneous element trips.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = /IN2+143+/101SC+V05+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT
Breaker failure initiate Initiate breaker failure timing when
VO10 BFI INI NORMAL
expression protective trip expression is true.

BE1-851 Application 8-29

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 , 150 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. element times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50, 150, or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+150TPPU+150TNPU+150TQPU+51PPU
+51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay is in test
True if IN4 is de-energized OR if
VO15 mode and that breaker TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
virtual switch 343 is closed.
failure and reclosing are
disabled
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

8-30 Application BE1-851

 52
IN1
52B

TRIP

CLOSE
IN3
N &Q
ENABLE
51P 51N 51Q

OUT1
TRIP

STATUS

50TP 50TN 50TQ 79 79

SCB

DTL 79C

OUT2
CLOSE
SC C

D2871-5
101 T 12-13-99
143
150TP 150TN 150TQ Disable
79
IN2
DTL OUT5
BF
43 TRIP
GROUP
BF 343 Auto CONTROL
Man.

IN4 OUT3
TEST TEST
MODE BE1-851 MODE OUT

Figure 8-7. Typical One - Line Diagram for FEEDER_3 Logic

BE1-851 Application 8-31

8-32
ALMLGC
VOA ALARM
ALMMAJ
SB-LOGIC
OUTPUT
ALARM ALMMIN OUTA
CO-OUTx LOGIC
OUT1MON 101T
101C
IN1 52B CO-101
OPTO 101SC

IN2 RCL ENABLE

OPTO
0 79C
IN3 N AND Q ENABLE 150TPT RI
OPTO PHASE 79 79RNG
0 BLK STATUS
IOC 150TPPU RE- 79LO
IN4 TEST MODE (150TP) 6 VO9 79DTL WAIT 79F
OPTO CLOSER
DTL/BLK 79SCB

150TNT
NEUTRAL
0 BLK IOC 150TNPU
(150TN)
43 SET GRP AUTO
CO-43
150TQT
NEG SEQ
143 RCL ENABLE 0 BLK
CO-143 IOC 150TQPU
(150TQ)
243 N AND Q ENABLE
CO-243
50TPT
PHASE
343 TEST MODE BLK IOC VO1 52TC
CO-343 50TPPU
(50TP) OUTPUT
OUT1
CO-OUTx LOGIC
50TNT
NEUTRAL
BLK IOC VO2 52CC
(50TN)
50TNPU
OUTPUT
OUT2
CO-OUTx LOGIC
50TQT
NEG SEQ
BLK
IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ) VO3 RELAY OUT OF SERVICE

Application
OUTPUT
51PT OUT3
PHASE CO-OUTx LOGIC
0 BLK TOC 51PPU
(51P) VO4 BLOCK UPSTREAM
INSTANTANEOUS
51NT OUTPUT

Figure 8-8. FEEDER_3 Logic Diagram

NEUTRAL OUT4
BLK CO-OUTx LOGIC
TOC 51NPU
(51N)

51QT VO5 BF TRIP

NEG SEQ
BLK IOC OUTPUT
51QPU OUT5
(51Q) VO15 TEST MODE LOGIC
CO-OUTx
9 VO11 PROT TRIP
0 D0 SG0
0 D1 ACTIVE SG1 9
VO12 PROT PU
SETTING SG2
0 D2
GROUP SG3
0 D3
CONTROL
AUTO
D2863-003 VO10 BFI
INI BREAKER BFT
10-10-99
FAILURE
BLK (BF) BFPU

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

BE1-851
FEEDER_3 Logic Settings And Equations Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_3
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN3+243; SL-50TQ=1,79SCB+/IN3+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3+243; SL-51Q=1,/IN3+243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,/0,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-VOA=ALMMAJ
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO3=IN4*/343
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=/IN2+143+/101SC+VO5+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+50TQT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+50TQPU+150TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_3 Logic Settings And Equations Sensing Input Type G Relays

SL-N=FEEDER_3
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN3+243; 79SCB+/IN3+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3+243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,/0,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-VOA=ALMMAJ
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO3=IN4*/343
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=/IN2+143+/101SC+VO5+150TPT+150TNT

BE1-851 Application 8-33

SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_4 LOGIC SCHEME

Logic scheme FEEDER_4 is meant for use on a feeder breaker and provides all overcurrent and breaker
failure protection, reclosing, and control functions required for a typical feeder in a non-directional
overcurrent protection application. This logic is intended to be used in conjunction with redundant protective
relays such as existing electromechanical relays to provide backup when the relay is out of service.
Automatic reclosing is initiated by the breaker opening. Reclosing is disabled after a manual trip by a control
switch slip contact. In this logic scheme, the disable logic is connected to the reclose initiate (RI) input.
Once re-enabled, the recloser will start the sequence and automatically close the breaker if it is open.
When used in conjunction with other programmable relays using logic scheme BUS, it can provide complete
overcurrent protection for the transformers, bus and feeders in a radial system substation.
A diagram of FEEDER_4 logic is shown in Figure 8-5. The components used in this logic are explained in
Tables 8-17, 8-18, 8-19, and 8-20.

Normal Operation - Control

The virtual breaker control switch is programmed to provide manual trip and close control of the breaker.
The control functions of this logic scheme use both traditional contact sensing inputs and virtual switches.
Virtual switches that are not needed may simply go unused. The protection engineer may choose to free
up contact sensing inputs for other uses by using the virtual switches exclusively for the various control
functions.

Normal Operation - Protection

The 50T and 51 function blocks and the breaker failure function block re-trip output are enabled in
FEEDER_4 logic for tripping via OUT1. Each overcurrent function block can be individually disabled by
setting the pickup at 0 in the four setting groups.
The 50TN, 50TQ, 51N, and 51Q function blocks are torque controlled by virtual switch 243. All N and Q
function blocks or only the 51N and 51Q function blocks may be inhibited. This is done in BESTlogic by
modifying the inputs to the function blocks.

Normal Operation - Reclosing

The reclosing logic in FEEDER_4 is initiated by the breaker opening. Automatic reclosing is disabled for a
manual trip by a control switch slip contact. The recloser function block can be disabled by setting the first
reclose time = 0 in the four setting groups.
Reclosing can be disabled by IN2 or virtual switch 143 which interrupts the RI input to the recloser function
block. In this scheme, enabling the recloser after a "one shot" trip will cause the recloser to start the
reclosing sequence and automatically close the breaker. If the control switch slip contact is in the after trip
position, the recloser will not automatically start. If an external control switch slip contact is used, it should
be wired in series with the reclose enable switch to IN2.
The BESTlogic can be modified so that the reclosing disable logic drives the recloser to lockout instead of
interrupting the RI input. This is accomplished by using variables IN2, 143, and 101SC in the DTL
expression instead of the RI expression. This recloser control logic is used in preprogrammed logic scheme
FEEDER_3. The recloser will be driven to lockout if a breaker failure occurs.

8-34 Application BE1-851

Zone sequence coordination can be enabled by setting an appropriate logic expression for 79ZONE. Zone
sequence uses a BESTlogic expression but is not within the logic settings. The FEEDER_4 logic scheme
uses the expression SP-79ZONE=VO12.
FEEDER_4 logic provides for the recloser to torque control the 50TP/N/Q functions (typically used for low
set instantaneous protection) during various steps in the reclosing sequence. Setting the recloser sequence
controlled blocking output in the four setting groups is done using the S#-79SCB commands. Blocking of
external instantaneous elements is done through OUT3.
Recloser timing is stopped by the wait input if an overcurrent protection function block is picked up and
timing. This prevents the reset timer from resetting the reclose function for a situation where a 51 element
is just above pickup and the time to trip is longer than the reset time.
A block load tap changer output is not provided in this scheme. OUT5 can be reprogrammed as a 79RNG
(recloser running/block tap changer) output and wired to energize a normally closed auxiliary relay.

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection

Setting group selection can be done automatically or externally by communications command/HMI override.
Automatic setting group changes for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustment are enabled by
SP-GROUP# commands. Setting group change by contact sensing input are not accommodated in this
scheme. IN3, or IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function instead of their programmed functions
if desired. The automatic change logic can be disabled by virtual switch 43.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

When any of the 50T or 51 function blocks are picked up, OUT4 closes. The signal from OUT4 is wired to
IN2 of the upstream relay using BUS logic. The upstream relay blocks the 150T elements that are set up
to trip the bus breaker or bus lockout relay. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 150T elements of the bus relay
are not blocked. The bus relay 150T elements are set with a time delay of 2 to 20 cycles to provide a
coordination interval for the feeder relay OUT4 to close or the redundant feeder relays to trip the feeder
breaker. Should there be a problem with the blocking logic, the bus relay 51 functions are not blocked to
allow bus fault clearing with a traditional coordination interval.
When used to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all
51 function timing curves be set for instantaneous reset. Use of this protection feature with redundant
electromechanical relays should be done with caution. Retrofit of the electromechanical relays with
BE1-50/51B solid state overcurrent relays can mitigate this concern.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to
be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the feeder protection and control system if external test
switches are not installed on all outputs. When the relay is out of service for testing, the breaker failure,
automatic reclosing, and block upstream instantaneous functions are disabled. Backup by the upstream
relay is enabled.
De-energizing IN4 or closing virtual switch 343 will put the logic in test mode. IN4 can be controlled by a
panel mounted selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state. IN4 can also be
controlled by a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED to provide indication when the relay is
in test mode.

BE1-851 Application 8-35

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Breaker Failure
OUT5 is configured as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the bus breaker or a lockout
relay. The breaker failure pickup (BFPU) output trips the feeder breaker directly via output 1 to provide a
breaker retrip signal for added security.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is provided by IN3. Fault detector supervision of the
external initiate signal is provided by the 150T function blocks. The logic uses the pickup outputs of the
function blocks. In this application, the time delay settings should be set a maximum so that they do not time
out and target. If the external BFI signal from protective relays such as 81 or 87T, where fault detector
supervision is not desired, the BESTlogic expression for VO12 which is the BFI logic expression in this logic
scheme can be modified.
The BF function block is also initiated by a protective trip. This function block has an independent fast drop
out phase and ground current detector that detects a breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker
is detected when the current drops below 10% of nominal. The BF function block is disabled by setting the
time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial system backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping
different breakers.
FEEDER_4 logic stops the block signal to allow the bus relay to trip the bus breaker through its 50T
elements if a direct trip is not desired. This provides clearing of the fault on the circuit with the failed breaker
in feeder relay breaker failure time (or bus relay 50T time whichever is greater) instead of the bus relay 51
time; but, is limited by the sensitivity constraints of the bus relay.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service

Primary protection for relay failure is provided by redundant relays applied to the feeder.

Table 8-17. FEEDER_4 Contact Sensing Input Logic

State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status. BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Enable recloser when IN2 is RCL_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

energized.

IN3 Enable neutral and negative N&Q_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

sequence, 50 and 51 protection
when IN3 is energized.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when IN4 is de-
energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

8-36 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-18. FEEDER_4 Function Block Logic
BESTlogic
Function Description Experession Settings

50TP Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB 1(enable)

blocking output is true.

50TN Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+243 1(enable)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243

50TQ Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+243 1(enable)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
Virtual Switch 243.

150TP None 0 1(enable)

150TN None 0 1(enable)

150TQ None 0 1(enable)

51P None 0 1(enable)

51N Block when disabled by Virtual Switch 243. 243 1(enable)

51Q Block when disabled by Virtual Switch 243. 243 1(enable)

62 None 0 0

162 None 0 0

Initiate when reclose initiate expression is true. VO8

Breaker closed when IN1 is de-energized. /IN1

Stop recloser timing when timing for a fault trip. VO12

True when protection picked up expression is
79 1(enable)
true.

Drive recloser to lockout when recloser drive to VO9+/IN4+343

lockout expression is true or when relay is in
test mode.

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure V010

initiate expression is true
BF 1(enable)

Block breaker failure protection when relay is in /IN4+343

test mode

Group Disable automatic selection when virtual switch /43 1(enable)

43 is in the manual position.

BE1-851 Application 8-37

 Table 8-19. FEEDER_4 Virtual Switches Logic
State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Automatic setting group SETGRP_MAN AUTO MANUAL

change logic auto/manual
switch.

143 Disable recloser when RCL_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

virtual switch is closed.

243 Disable neutral and N&Q_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

negative sequence, 50 and
51 protection when virtual
switch is closed.

343 Put the relay in test mode TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL

so that reclosing and
breaker failure are disabled
when virtual switch is
closed.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-20. FEEDER_4 Virtual Outputs

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)

Close alarm contact when relay

VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip breaker when protective trip
expression is true OR when
VO1
Breaker trip contact. breaker failure is initiated OR BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
when virtual breaker control
switch is operated to trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO11+BFPU+101T
Close breaker when recloser
VO2 close output is true OR when
Breaker close contact BKR_CLOSE CLOSE NORMAL
(OUT2) virtual breaker control switch is
operated to close.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 79C+101C
Close contact when recloser
VO3 Block external
sequence controlled blocking 79INST_BLK NORMAL BLOCK
(OUT3) instantaneous elements
output is not true.
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 =/79SCB
Block upstream Block upstream instantaneous
instantaneous elements elements when the protective
VO4
when relay is picked up pickup expression is true AND the BLK_USTRM BLOCKED NORMAL
(OUT4)
for high speed bus over relay is not in test mode AND the
current protection logic. breaker has not failed.

8-38 Application BE1-851

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
VO5 Breaker failure trip conact Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
Allow reclose when the recloser is
not disabled. To operate, reclose
Reclose initiate must be enabled by IN2 AND
VO8 RCL_INI INI NORMAL
expression virtual switch 143 AND virtual
breaker control switch slip
contact.
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = IN2*/143*101SC
Recloser drive to lockout Drive recloser to lockout to
VO9 RCL_DTL DTL NORMAL
expression. disable it if the breaker fails.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = VO5
Initiate breaker failure timing
when protective trip expression is
Breaker failure initiate
VO10 true or when external initiate BFI INI NORMAL
expression
contact is sensed and any of the
fault detectors is picked up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11+IN3*150TPPU+IN3*150TNPU+IN3*150TQPU
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. erelement times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay is in test
True if IN4 is de-energized OR if
VO15 mode and that breaker TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
virtual switch 343 is closed.
failure and reclosing are
disabled
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

BE1-851 Application 8-39

 52
IN1
52B

TRIP

CLOSE
51P 51N 51Q

OUT1
TRIP

STATUS

50TP 50TN 50TQ 79

DTL

RI 79C

OUT2
52CC

IN3 SC C

D2871-6
101 T 12-13-99

150TP 150TN 150TQ

143
Disable
79
OUT5
BF OUT
43
GROUP
BF 343 Auto CONTROL
Man.
BLOCK
IN4 OUT3
TEST TEST
MODE BE1-851 MODE OUT

Figure 8-9. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_4 Logic

8-40 Application BE1-851

 ALMLGC
VOA ALARM
ALMMAJ
OUTPUT OUT
ALARM ALMMIN LOGIC A
SB-LOGIC CO-OUTx
OUT1MON 101T

BE1-851
OPTO
IN1 52B 101C
CO-101
IN2 RCL ENABLE
OPTO 101SC

IN3 BFI
OPTO
VO8 79RI 79C
RI
IN4 TEST MODE 79RNG
OPTO STATUS 79
RE- 79LO
WAIT 79F
CLOSER
50TPT DTL/BLK 79SCB
PHASE
43 SET GRP AUTO BLK IOC VO9 79DTL
CO-43 50TPPU
(50TP)
143 RCL ENABLE
CO-143
50TNT
NEUTRAL
243 N AND Q ENABLE BLK IOC
CO-243 50TNPU
(50TN)
343 TEST MODE
CO-343
50TQT
NEG SEQ
BLK IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ)
VO1 52TC
OUTPUT OUT
51PT LOGIC 1
0 PHASE CO-OUTx
BLK TOC 51PPU
(51P)
VO2 52CC

51NT OUTPUT OUT

NEUTRAL LOGIC 2
BLK TOC CO-OUTx
51NPU
(51N)

Application
VO3 BLOCK EXT INSTANTANEOUS
51QT
BLK NEG SEQ OUTPUT OUT
TOC 51QPU LOGIC 3
(51Q) CO-OUTx

VO4 BLOCK UPSTREAM

150TPT INSTANTANEOUS
0 PHASE
BLK IOC 15TPPU OUTPUT OUT

Figure 8-10. FEEDER_4 Logic Diagram

(150TP) LOGIC 4
CO-OUTx

0 150TNT
NEUTRAL
BLK IOC VO5 BF TRIP
150TNPU 0 SG0
(150TN) D0
0 D1 ACTIVE SG1 OUTPUT OUT
VO15 TEST MODE SETTING SG2 LOGIC 5
0 D2 CO-OUTx
GROUP SG3
150TQT 6 VO11 PROT TRIP 0 D3
0 NEG SEQ CONTROL
BLK AUTO
IOC 150TQPU
6
VO12 PROT PU
(150TQ)

D2863-04 VO10 BFI

4 INI
10-10-99 BREAKER BFT
FAILURE
BLK (BF) BFPU

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-41
FEEDER_4 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_4
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+243; SL-50TQ=1,79SCB+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,243; SL-51Q=1,243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO3=/79SCB
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=IN2*/143*101SC
SL-VO9=VO5
SL-VO10=VO11+IN3*150TPPU+IN3*150TNPU+IN3*150TQPU
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_4 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_4
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO3=/79SCB
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0

8-42 Application BE1-851

SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=IN2*/143*101SC
SL-VO9=VO5
SL-VO10=VO11+IN3*150TPPU+IN3*150TNPU+IN3
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

BUS AND BACKUP LOGIC SCHEMES

Logic schemes BUS and BACKUP are meant for use on a bus main breaker and provide all overcurrent
protection, and control functions required for a typical bus main breaker in a non-directional overcurrent
protection application. These logic schemes are intended to be used in conjunction with other programmable
relays using the FEEDER_1, FEEDER_2, and FEEDER_3 logic schemes to provide complete overcurrent
protection for the transformers, bus and feeders in a radial system substation.
When interconnected with feeder relays using logic scheme FEEDER_1, FEEDER_2, FEEDER_3, it
provides complete backup, except for reclosing, for the feeder relays if relay failure occurs or when they are
out of service for testing or maintenance. Figure 5-7 at the end of this section shows the interconnection of
the FEEDER, BUS, and BACKUP relays to achieve this integrated protection system.
A diagram of BUS logic is shown in Figure 8-6 and the components used in this logic are explained in Tables
8-21, 8-22, 8-23, and 8-24. A diagram of BACKUP logic is shown in Figure 8-7 and the components used
in this logic are explained in Tables 8-25, 8-26, 8-27, and 8-28.

Normal Operation - Control

The virtual breaker control switch is programmed to provide manual trip and close control of the bus breaker
in both BUS and BACKUP logic. The control functions of these logic schemes use both traditional contact
sensing inputs and virtual switches. Virtual switches that are not needed may simply go unused. The
protection engineer may choose to free up contact sensing inputs for other uses by using the virtual switches
exclusively for the various control functions.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

The BUS relay primary task in normal operation is to provide high speed bus fault protection (2-4 cycles
coordination interval) and timed overload or high unbalanced load protection. The BACKUP relay primary
task is to backup the BUS relay for bus faults with a coordination interval of 18-20 cycles.
When any of the feeder relay overcurrent elements are picked up and timing, OUT4 on the feeder relay
closes. This signal is wired to IN2 of the upstream (primary) bus relay using BUS logic which blocks the 50T
elements. These are set with a delay of 2 to 4 cycles. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 50T elements of the
bus relays are not blocked. The 50T function blocks are set up to trip the bus breaker by an external bus
lockout relay (86B) via OUT4. The BACKUP relay does not get blocked when the feeder relays are picked
up so its 50T elements are set with a time delay long enough to allow the feeder breaker to interrupt the
fault. These are set up to trip the 86B relay also via OUT4. If a bus fault lockout relay is not used, OUT4 can
be wired in parallel with OUT1 to direct trip the bus breaker.
The BUS and BACKUP 50T functions should be set with a higher pickup than the highest feeder
instantaneous elements to ensure that they will not pickup before any feeder relay.
If there is a contingency problem such as a relay removed from service, 51 protection is still provided. The
BUS and BACKUP 51 functions are enabled for tripping via OUT1. The 51 functions are not blocked to allow
clearing a bus fault with a traditional coordination interval. When used to provide high speed overcurrent
protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all 51 function timing curves be set for
instantaneous reset.

BE1-851 Application 8-43

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection
For normal operation, the BUS and BACKUP relays are in setting group 0. In setting group 0, the two relays
will only trip the bus breaker. Input two to the BACKUP relay identifies when a feeder relay is out of service,
The BACKUP relay then closes OUT3 which is connected to input three of the BUS relay. The two relays
then switch to setting group 1. Setting group selection mode 2, binary coded selection, is used to recognize
the group setting state. When Input D0 to the setting group selection function block is a one, it is interpreted
as a binary 1 causing the logic to switch to group 1.
When the relay is in setting group 1, the relays are operating in feeder relay backup mode. This expression
is programmed to virtual output 13 of the BUS relay which drives alarm bit #21 in the pro-grammable alarm
mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED and alarm display to indicate when the BUS relay is in feeder
backup mode and to trip a feeder breaker instead of the bus breaker.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to
be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the protection and control system if external test
switches are not installed on all outputs. When the BUS relay is out of service for testing, the overcurrent
protection function trip outputs are routed to OUT1 only. When the BACKUP relay is out of service for
testing, the overcurrent protection function trip outputs are routed to OUT1 only and the breaker failure
function is disabled.
De-energizing IN4 or closing virtual switch 343 will put the logic in test mode. IN4 can be controlled by a
panel mounted selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state. IN4 can also be
controlled by a pole of a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED and HMI alarm display to provide
indication when the relay is in test mode.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Bus Breaker Failure

Bus breaker failure protection is provided by the main bus relay using pre-programmed logic scheme
BACKUP. OUT5 is configured as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the upstream
breaker or a bus breaker failure lockout relay or other lockout relay that trips the transformer high side such
as the 86T transformer differential lockout relay.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is provided by IN3. Fault detector supervision of the
external initiate signal is provided by the 150T function blocks. The logic uses the pickup outputs of the
function blocks. In this application, the time delay settings should be set a maximum so that they do not time
out and target. If the external BFI signal from protective relays such as 81 or 87T, where fault detector
supervision is not desired, the BESTlogic expression for VO12 which is the BFI logic expression in this logic
scheme can be modified. The BF function block is also initiated by a protective trip. If you are tripping for
a bus fault via a lockout relay, the additional time delay of the lockout relay should be added to your breaker
failure time setting.
This function block has an independent fast drop out phase and ground current detector that detects a
breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker is detected when the current drops below 10% of
nominal.

8-44 Application BE1-851

The BF function block is disabled by setting the time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial system
backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping different breakers.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For BUS Relay Out-of-Service

When the BUS relay is out of service, backup protection is provided by the BACKUP main bus relay. The
BACKUP main bus relay provides permanent backup protection for the BUS relay regardless of other feeder
contingencies. Under this contingency, protection for bus faults will be delayed by an 18-20 cycle
coordination interval.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For BACKUP Relay Out-of-Service

When the BACKUP relay is out of service, full high speed bus fault protection and overload protection are
provided by the BUS relay. Under this contingency, bus breaker failure protection is not provided as this is
a double contingency situation.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service

OUT3 of each of the feeder relays should be wired to an auxiliary transfer relay (83/Fn) with one normally
open and one normally closed contact. Under normal conditions, OUT3 of the feeder relay is closed and the
83 aux. relay is picked up. When the feeder relay is out of service due to failure, being in test mode, or if it
is drawn out from its case, the 83 auxiliary relay will drop out.
The normally open contact (NO in shelf state) of the 83/Fn aux. relay is wired to input 2 of the BACKUP relay
to signal the BUS and BACKUP relays to change to setting group 1. When the BUS relay is in setting group
1, the 50T and 51 overcurrent function blocks trip an auxiliary tripping relay (94/BU) via OUT5.
In setting group 1, the BACKUP relay 51 time settings must coordinate with the BUS relay 51 time dial
settings. Since the feeder relays provide a blocking signal to the BUS relay upon pickup of the 51 function
blocks, it is not necessary for the 51 time dial settings on the BUS relay to coordinate with the feeder relays
in setting group 1. Therefore, the 51 time dial settings of the BUS relay can be reduced in setting group 1
to provide the necessary coordination interval between the BUS relay and the BACKUP relay for this
contingency. This minimizes the time delay that needs to be added to the 51 time dial settings for the
BACKUP relay and provides a greater opportunity to keep the setting below the transformer damage curve.
The tripping output of the 94/BU auxiliary relay and the normally closed contacts (form B) of the 83/Fn
auxiliary relay are wired in series with the feeder breaker trip coil. This allows the 94/BU relay to trip the
feeder breaker when the feeder relay is out of service.
When the BUS and BACKUP relays are in feeder relay backup mode, operation for the various faults is as
follows:
• A fault on a feeder with its relay still in service will send a blocking signal to the BUS relay preventing
it from tripping high speed. The 51 functions of the BUS and BACKUP relays are set to coordinate
with each other and the feeder relays.
• A fault on the feeder with the relay out of service, will not send a blocking signal to the BUS relay so
it will trip the feeder breaker via the 94 and 83 relay contacts. Fault clearing will be after the 2 to 4
cycle coordination interval set on the BUS relay 50T functions or in BUS relay 51 time if the fault is
farther out. For this reason, the BACKUP relay 51 functions must be set to coordinate with the BUS
relay in this setting group.
• A fault on the bus will cause the BUS relay to trip the feeder breaker with the relay out of service
because no blocking signal will be sent by any of the feeder relays. Since this will not clear the fault,
the BACKUP relay will clear the fault with its 18-20 cycle coordination interval.

BE1-851 Application 8-45

 Table 8-21. BUS Contact Sensing Input Logic
State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Block instantaneous when feeder FEEDER_PU PICKDUP NORMAL

relay is picked up.

IN3 Signal from relay on bus source BACKUPMODE BACKUP NORMAL

that is using BACKUP logic that a
feeder relay is out of service

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
all trips are re-routed to OUT1
when IN4 is de-energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-22. BUS Function Block Logic

BESTlogic
Function Description Experession Settings

50TP Block when feeder relay is picked up indicating IN2 1(enable)

that the fault is on a feeder.

50TN Block when feeder relay is picked up indicating IN2 1(enable)

that the fault is on a feeder.

50TQ Block when feeder relay is picked up indicating IN2

that the fault is on a feeder. 1(enable)

150TP None 0 0(disabled)

150TN None 0 0(disabled)

150TQ None 0 0(disabled)

51P None 0 0(disabled)

51N None 0 0(disabled)

51Q None 0 1 (enable)

62 Initiate time delay when 51 trip expressions is VO8 0(disabled)

true to provide backup tripping of the bus
breaker when the relay is being used for
backup feeder protection

162 None 0 0(disabled)

79 None 0 0(disabled)

BF None 0 0(disabled)

8-46 Application BE1-851

 BESTlogic
Function Description Experession Settings

Switch to setting group 1 if feeder relay is out of IN#

service.
Group 2(Binary Coded
Fix Auto/Manual switch in the manual position Selection)
only. Selection by contact sensing only. No 0
automatic selection logic .

Table 8-23. BUS Virtual Switch Logic

State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Not used SWITCH_43 CLOSED OPEN

143 Not used SWITCH_143 CLOSED OPEN

243 Not used SWITCH_243 CLOSED OPEN

Put the relay in test mode so

that reclosing and breaker
failure are disabled when
343 virtual switch is closed. TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-24. BUS Virtual Outputs

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alrm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip bus breaker for virtual
control switch trip OR for 51 trip
when in normal mode. Trip bus
VO1 breaker for 41 trip after
Bus Breaker Trip BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1) coordination time delay when in
feeder backup mode. Close
OUT1 for any trip when in test
mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = 101T+V08*/SGO+62*SG1+V011*V015
Close breaker when virtual
VO2
Bus breaker close. breaker control switch is BKR_CLOSE CLOSE NORMAL
(OUT2)
operated to close
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 101C
VO3
Not Used. Not Used. VO3 TRUE FALSE
(OUT3)
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = 0

BE1-851 Application 8-47

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
Trip bus breaker via lockout for
VO4 bus faults (50T with 2-4 cycles
Bus fault trip (86B) BUS_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT4) delay) when in normal mode and
not in test mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO9*SG0*/VO15
Trip feeder breaker via auxilary
relay (94) for time (51) AND
VO5 instantaneous (50T with 2-4
Feeder breaker trip BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) cycles delay) when in feeder
relay backup mode AND not in
test mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11*SG1*/VO15
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
True if any of the time
VO8 Time overcurrent trip. 51_TRIP TRIP FALSE
overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 51PT+51NT+51QT
Instantaneous over True if any of the instantaneous
VO9 50_TRIP TRIP FALSE
current tip. overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
VO10 None VO10 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = 0
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. element times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13
Alarm Alarm that relay is in
True if in setting group 1 FEEDER_BU BACKUP NORMAL
mask feeder backup mode.
21
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = SG1
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay isn in test
True if IN4 is de-energized or if
VO15 mode, breaker failure is TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
virtual switch 343 is closed
disabled, and all trips are
re-routed to OUT1.
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

8-48 Application BE1-851

 52

TRIP

CLOSE
51P 51N 51Q

OUT1
T TRIP
IN2
INST 101
BLOCK
C OUT2
50TP 50TN 50TQ CLOSE
OUT5
FEEDER BU
TRIP
OUT4
GROUP
BUS FAULT
CONTROL TRIP

D2871-2
IN3 12-13-99
FEEDER BE1-851
BACKUP

Figure 8-11. Typical One-Line Diagram for BUS Logic

BE1-851 Application 8-49

8-50
ALMLGC
ALMMAJ VOA ALARM
SB-LOGIC
ALMMIN OUTPUT OUT
ALARM LOGIC A
CO-OUTx
OUT1MON 101T
101C
CO-101
101SC

VO1 52TC
INI 62 62 OUTPUT OUT
CO-OUTx LOGIC 1

IN1 52B
OPTO PHASE
BLK IOC 50TPT
IN2 BLOCK INST (50TP)
OPTO 50TPPU VO2 52CC

50TNT OUTPUT OUT

IN3 FEEDER BACKUP
OPTO NEUTRAL LOGIC 2
BLK CO-OUTx
IOC 50TNPU
IN4 TEST MODE (50TN)
OPTO
VO3 NOT USED
50TQT
NEG SEQ OUTPUT OUT
BLK
IOC CO-OUTx LOGIC 3
(50TQ)
43 50TQPU
CO-43
VO4 BUS FAULT TRIP (86B)
51PT
143 0 PHASE
CO-143 BLK TOC OUTPUT OUT
51PPU
(51P) CO-OUTx LOGIC 4
243
CO-243
51NT VO5 FEEDER BU TRIP
343 TEST MODE 0 NEUTRAL
CO-343 BLK TOC (94)
51NPU
(51N) OUTPUT OUT

Application
CO-OUTx LOGIC 5
51QT
NEG SEQ
0 BLK 3 VO8 51TRIP
IOC 51QPU

Figure 8-12. BUS Logic Diagram

(51Q)
3
VO9 50TRIP

6
VO11 PROT TRIP

6
VO12 PROT PU
D0 SG0
0 D1 ACTIVE SG1 VO13 FEEDER BU MODE
SETTING SG2
0 D2 SG3
GROUP
0 D3 NORMAL MODE
CONTROL
0 AUTO

VO15 TEST MODE

D2863-05
10-10-99
Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR
Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

BE1-851
BU
S Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=BUS
SL-50TP=1,IN2; SL-50TN=1,IN2; SL-50TQ=1,IN2
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0; SL-150TQ=0,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,0; SL-51Q=1,0
SL-62=1,VO8,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=2,IN3,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=101T+VO8*SG0+ 62*SG1+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2=101C
SL-VO3= 0
SL-VO4=VO9*SG0*/VO15
SL-VO5=VO11*SG1*/VO15
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10= 0
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=SG1
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

BUS Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays
SL-N=BUS
SL-50TP=1,IN2; SL-50TN=1,IN2
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,0
SL-62=1,VO8,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=2,IN3,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=101T+VO8*SG0+ 62*SG1+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2=101C
SL-VO3= 0
SL-VO4=VO9*SG0*/VO15
SL-VO5=VO11*SG1*/VO15
SL-VO6=0

BE1-851 Application 8-51

SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT
SL-VO10= 0
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=SG1
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

Table 8-25. BACKUP Contact Sensing Input Logic

State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Put relay in feeder backup mode FEEDERS_OK NORMAL FDR_OOS

when feeder relay out of service
is detected by open contact.

IN3 Breaker failure initiate by external BFI INI NORMAL

relays.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
breaker failure is disabled and all
trips go through OUT1 when IN4
is de-energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-26. BACKUP Virtual Switches Logic

State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Not used SWITCH_43 CLOSED OPEN

143 Not used SWITCH_143 CLOSED OPEN

243 Not used SWITCH_243 CLOSED OPEN

343 Put the relay in test mode so TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL

that breaker failure is disabled
and all trips are rerouted to
OUT1 when IN4 is de-
energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

8-52 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-27. BACKUP Function Block Logic
BESTlogic
Function Description Experession Settings

50TP None 0 1(enabled)

50TN None 0 1(enabled)

50TQ None 0 1(enabled)

150TP None 0 1(enabled)

150TN None 0 1(enabled)

150TQ None 0 1(enabled)

51P None 0 1(enabled)

51N None 0 1(enabled)

51Q None 0 1(enabled)

62 None 0 0(disabled)

162 None 0 0(disabled)

79 None 0 0(disabled)

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure

initiate expression is true V010
BF 1(enabled)
Block breaker failure protection when relay is in
test mode VO15

Switch to setting group 1 if feeder relay is out of /IN2

service as indicated by open contact from
feeder relays.
2(Bindary Coded
Group No manual selection logic is used 0 Selection)
No manual selection logic is used 0

No manual selection logic is used 0

Fix Auto/Manual switch in the manual position 0

only. Selection by contact sensing only. No
automatic selection logic.

BE1-851 Application 8-53

 Table 8-28. BACKUP Virtual Outputs
State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip bus breaker for virtual
control switch trip OR for 51 trip
VO1
Bus breaker trip OR when breaker failure is BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
picked up. Close OUT1 for any
trip when in test mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 =101T+VO8+BFPU+VO11*VO15
Close breaker when virtual
VO2
Bus breaker close breaker control switch is BKR_CLOSE CLOSE NORMAL
(OUT2)
operated to close.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 101C
Signal relay on bus
Feeder relay is out of service
VO3 source that is using BUS
as indicated by contact open BACKUPMODE BACKUP NORMAL
(OUT3) logic that feeder relay is
from the feeder relays.
out of service
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = /IN2
Trip bus breaker via lockout for
VO4 bus faults (50T with 18-20
Bus fault trip (86B) BUS_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT4) cycles delay) when not in test
mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO9*/VO15
VO5 Breaker failure trip Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) contact protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
True if any of the time
VO8 Time overcurrent trip. 51_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 51PT+51NT+51QT
Instantaneous over True if any of the instantaneous
VO9 50_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
current trip. overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
Initiate breaker failure timing
when protective trip expression
Breaker failure initiate is true OR when external
VO10 BFI INI NORMAL
expression initiate contact is sensed AND
any of the fault detectors is
picked up..
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11+IN3*150TPPU+IN3*150TNPU+IN3*150TQPU

8-54 Application BE1-851

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. element times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay is in test
mode and that breaker Trui if IN4 is de-energized or if
VO15 TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
failure is disabled and all virtual switch 343 is closed..
trips are rerouted to
OUT1.

BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

BE1-851 Application 8-55

 52

TRIP CLOSE

51P 51N 51Q

OUT1
TRIP
IN2 T
FEEDER RELAY 101
OUT OF
SERVICE
GROUP C
CONTROL OUT2
52CC
OUT3
OUT OF
SERVICE FEEDER
OUT4

50TP 50TN 50TQ

50TP 50TN 50TQ

IN3
BFI

BF D2871-1
12-13-99

OUT5
TRIP
BE1-851

Figure 8-13. Typical One-Line Diagram for Backup Logic

8-56 Application BE1-851

 VOA ALARM
ALMLGC
OUTPUT OUT
ALMMAJ
ALARM LOGIC A
CO-OUTx
SB-LOGIC ALMMIN 101T

BE1-851
OUT1MON 101C
CO-101
101SC

IN1 52B
OPTO

IN2 FEEDER RELAY OUT OF SERVICE

OPTO
VO1 52TC
OPTO IN3 BFI
OUTPUT OUT
0 PHASE LOGIC 1
IN4 TEST MODE BLK 50TPT CO-OUTx
OPTO IOC
(50TP)
50TPPU

0 NEUTRAL
CO-43 BLK 50TNT
43 IOC
(50TN)
50TNPU
CO-143
143
50TQT
0 NEG SEQ
CO-243 BLK
243 IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ)
CO-343
343 TEST MODE
VO2 52CC
PHASE
0 BLK 51PT OUTPUT OUT
TOC
LOGIC 2
(51P) CO-OUTx
51PPU

0 NEUTRAL VO3 FEEDER OUT OF SERVICE

BLK TOC 51NT
OUTPUT OUT
(51N)
51NPU LOGIC 3

Application
CO-OUTx

51QT
0 NEG SEQ
BLK VO4 BUS FAULT TRIP (86B)
TOC 51QPU
(51Q) OUT
OUTPUT
LOGIC 4
CO-OUTx

0 PHASE 150TPT

Figure 8-14. BACKUP Logic Diagram

BLK IOC 15TPPU
(150TP) VO5 BF TRIP
OUTPUT OUT
VO8 51TRIP LOGIC 5
0 NEUTRAL 3 CO-OUTx
BLK 150TNT
IOC 150TNPU
VO9 50TRIP D0
(150TN) 3 0 ACTIVE
D1 SG0
0 SETTING SG1
D2
6 VO11 PROT TRIP 0 GROUP SG2
D3
0 NEG SEQ 0 CONTROL SG3
150TQT AUTO
BLK IOC
6
VO12 PROT PU
(150TQ) 150TQPU

D2863-06 4
VO10 BFI INI BREAKER BFT
10-10-99 FAILURE
VO15 TEST MODE
BLK (BF) BFPU

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-57
BACKUP Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=BACKUP
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0; SL-50TQ=1,0
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,0; SL-51Q=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=1,VO10,VO15
SL-GROUP=2,/IN2,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=VO8+BFPU+101T+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2=101C
SL-VO3= /IN2
SL-VO4=VO9*/VO15
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10= VO11+IN3(150TPPU+IN3(150TNPU+IN3(150TQPU
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

BACKUP Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays
SL-N=BACKUP
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0; SL-50TQ=1,0
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,0; SL-51Q=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=1,VO10,VO15
SL-GROUP=2,/IN2,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=VO8+BFPU+101T+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2=101C
SL-VO3= /IN2
SL-VO4=VO9*/VO15
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0

8-58 Application BE1-851

 BACKUP RELAY CIRCUIT

83 83 83 TS

BE1-851
F1 F2 Fn BUS
SL-VO7=0

SL-VO14=0
SL-VO13=0

B3 B7

IN2 BACKUP IN4 BACKUP

07-20-99
D2861-02
RELAY FEEDER RELAY TEST
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

BACKUP MODE MODE

B4 B8

-
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT

FEEDER BREAKER CIRCUIT FEEDER RELAY CIRCUIT

+ +
94
BUS TS
OUT1 Fn
Fn
83
Fn

B7
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT

52A OUT3
Fn IN4 FEEDER Fn
RELAY

Application
52TC TEST MODE
Fn 83 IN2 94BUS
B8
SL-VO10= VO11+IN3(150TPPU+IN3(150TNPU+IN3(150TQPU

Fn BUS Fn
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU

- -

BUS RELAY CIRCUIT

OUT4 OUT4 OUT4 OUT3 TS OUT5 OUT4 OUT4

F1 F2 Fn BUS BUS BUS BUS BACKUP

Figure 8-15. Interconnection Diagram for Integrated Protection System

B3 B5 B7
TRIP TRIP TRIP 86B
IN2 BUS RELAY IN3 BUS RELAY
IN4 BUS RELAY F1 F2 ... Fn OPTIONAL
INSTANTANEOUS FEEDER BACKUP
TEST MODE
BLOCK MODE
94 86B
B4 B6 B8 BUS TC

8-59
MISCELLANEOUS LOGIC SETTINGS
There are five logic variables that are classified as miscellaneous logic expressions. These expressions
are: SG-TARG, SG-TRIGGER, SB-DUTY, SB-LOGIC, and SA-RESET. The equations associated with
these variables determine how the BE1-951 responds to conditions such as when to target, what triggers
fault reporting, defining breaker status monitoring, and setup for remote alarm/target reset provisions.
These variables aren’t included in any of the BESTlogic preprogrammed schemes. However, the factory
default equations are compatible with each scheme.
The default miscellaneous expressions are common among the preprogrammed and custom schemes.
When a preprogrammed scheme is modified, or a new scheme is created, the miscellaneous logic
expressions should be reviewed to ensure desired performance.
The default expressions for the miscellaneous logic settings are as follows.
SB-LOGIC=/IN1
SG-TRIGGER=BFT+VO11,BFPU+VO12,0
SP79ZONE=0
SG-TARG=BF/50TP/150TP/50TN/150TN/50TQ/150TQ/51P/51N/51Q,0
SA-RESET= 0
SB-DUTY=0,0.000e+00,0
Table 8-29 lists the miscellaneous commands and the sections of this manual where detailed information
about each command may be found.
Table 8-29. Miscellaneous Logic Expressions

Command Reference

SB-LOGIC Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (page 6-11)

SG-TRIGGER Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (page 6-18)

SP-79ZONE Section 4, Protection and Control, (page 4-18)

SG-TARG Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (Page 6-18)

SA-RESET Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (Page 6-29)

SB-DUTY Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (Page 6-15)

APPLICATION TIPS

Trip Circuit Continuity And Voltage Monitor

OUT1 has a built in trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor that drives logic variable OUT1MON. This
variable can be used to improve breaker failure logic or to automatically enhance security during testing.
If the relay detects a loss of voltage or continuity in the breaker trip circuit, it is possible to speed up fault
clearing time by bypassing the breaker failure timer. Since relay failure and breaker failure are covered by
different backup actions, it is desirable to reduce common mode failure mechanisms. It is recommended
that the feeder breaker and feeder protection circuits be supplied by separate control power fuses or
breakers. The equation for the Breaker Failure Trip logic (VO5) can be modified by ORing the Breaker
Failure Initiate with the expression VO10(OUT1MON. VO10 is designated in each of the pre-programmed
logic schemes as the Breaker Failure Initiate expression. Example 1 illustrates how the BFT logic
expression is modified. It is important that the breaker failure timer bypass logic also be disabled in test
mode. Example 2 shows the expression for blocking the upstream instantaneous element. Figure 8-16
illustrates using the trip circuit continuity monitor in breaker failure logic.

8-60 Application BE1-851

Example 1. Breaker failure trip ALM LGC
ALM MAY
expression: ALARMS
ALM MNL

SL-VO5=BFT+VO10*OUT1MON*IN4*/3 OUT 1 MON

43
Example 2. Block upstream + TESTMODE ENABLE
SWITCH
instantaneous expression: 1=NORMAL 0=ENABLED

SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*/OUT1MON*I VO4
BLOCK UPSTREAM
N4*/343 IN4
INSTANTANEOUS
-

If the internal breaker failure function block TESTMODE ENABLE

VIRTUAL SWITCH
is not being used, the trip circuit continuity 1=ENABLED 0=NORMAL

and voltage monitor alarm can be used to

343
detect when the test paddle or test
switches have been opened. This will
automatically place the relay in the test PURP OETXEPCRTEI SOSNI OPNI C K E D V O 1 2 BREAKER
FAILURE
INI BFT
mode. Each of the preprogrammed logic VO5
TRIP
BF
schemes has logic to detect when the B R E A K E R F A I L U R E BLK BFPU
D2582-03
relay is out of service for test. This INITIATE EXPRESSION V O 1 0 2-25-97

enables the backup logic and enhances Figure 8-16. Trip Circuit Continuity And Voltage Monitor.
security. It should be noted that if the test
mode logic is modified in this manner, it is not possible to differentiate between the relay being out of service
for test and a problem in the circuit breaker trip circuit. Otherwise, the internal breaker failure function block
would be disabled during a known problem in the trip circuit.

Close Circuit Monitor

A close circuit monitor is not 0 = BREAKER CLOSED
included in any of the 1 = BREAKER OPEN

p r e p r o g r am m ed logi c IN1
VOX INI 62 V O Y
schemes. This function may (52B) PICKUP
TIME
be added by using a 62
D2587-02
07-22-99

function block and a contact DROPOUT

sensing input (INX) to TIME
BLK
monitor the close circuit. INX 62 TIMER
The logic is shown in Figure (CLOSE CKT) VOX=IN1*/INX
8-17 The output of the 62 0 = CLOSE CKT OPEN SL-62=1,VOX
1 = CLOSE CKT OKAY S<g>-62=500,0
protection block will close SL-VOY=62
the designated output
contact (VOY) when an Figure 8-17. Close Circuit Monitor Logic
open breaker and open close circuit condition exists. The S<g>-62 command is used to provide a 500
millisecond time delay to inhibit the momentary alarm that will occur due the timing difference between the
two signals.

High Speed Reclose

Each reclose time delay can be set as low as 100 milliseconds. If the application requires a reclose time
delay of less than 250 milliseconds, it is recommended that the close logic expression be modified to prevent
mis-coordination between the TRIP and CLOSE outputs. A hold timer for each output relay is provided to
hold the output closed for approximately 200 milliseconds. This prevents the relay contacts from opening
before the breaker auxiliary contact interrupts the trip coil current. For high speed reclosing, the hold timer
must be disabled so that the output contact follows the VO1 output expression. To modify the logic, add the
expression, "reclose 79C AND NOT trip VO1 to the close logic. Examples 1 and 2 show a close expression
and hold disable setting for high speed reclosing. Figure 8-18 illustrates this high speed reclose interlock
logic scheme.
Example 1. Close expression: SL-VO2=79C*/VO1+101C
Example 2. Hold disable setting: SG-HOLD1=0

BE1-851 Application 8-61

 101T
VO1
101 TRIP
Block Load Tap Changer BREAKER 101C
CONTROL
A block load tap changer output is not SWITCH 101SC
VO2
provided in any of the preprogrammed logic CLOSE
schemes. One of the output relays can be
programmed to operate when the recloser is 79C
running (79RNG) and wired to energize a
79RNG
normally closed auxiliary relay. The 79RNG
logic variable is high when any of the timers 79 79F
is timing and low when the reclosing function RECLOSER
79LO
is in a lockout or reset state.
79SCB D2582-02
07-22-99
Block Neutral and Negative Sequence
Protection
BFT
The neutral and negative sequence
BF
overcurrent elements provide greater BFPU
sensitivity to unbalanced faults than the
phase overcurrent elements because they
can be set to pickup below balanced three PROTECTIVE VO11
TRIP
phase load. This can lead to a mis-operation EXPRESSION
during periods of load imbalance. The Figure 8-18. High Speed Reclose Interlock Logic
BE1-851 provides a neutral and negative
sequence demand function that allows monitoring and alarming to prevent load imbalances. However,
distribution systems with single pole fault clearing and switching devices or long single phase laterals, may
have mis-operations during switching activities.
The preprogrammed logic schemes provide for the use of a cutoff switch to block the ground and negative
sequence 50T (used for low set instantaneous) and the 51 (inverse time) function blocks during switching
activities. This is the most conservative approach. The protection engineer may wish to evaluate this
strategy based on his system, his operating practices, and his setting practices. For instance, on systems
with wye connected loads, the ground units are most sensitive to this situation. On systems with delta
connected loads the negative sequence units are most sensitive to this situation. It may not be necessary
to block the instantaneous units if their settings prevent them from tripping for a switching imbalance.
To maintain proper coordination, the logic of the feeder relays may be interconnected with the upstream bus
relay to block the equivalent ground and/or negative sequence function blocks in the upstream relay.

Setting Group Selection

The BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System provides multiple settings groups for adaptive relaying. The
preprogrammed logic schemes barely tap the flexibility that is available. The following examples illustrate
how the settings groups can be adapted for different conditions and how different setting groups can be used
to vary the system logic.
Example 1. Adapting the relay settings for different conditions
In overcurrent protection systems, the source conditions can have a major impact on sensitivity, coordination
intervals, and clearing times. Generally, the pickup and time dial settings are a compromise between a
normal condition and a worst case condition. Contact logic from the position of the source breakers can
select which settings group is active. To do this, assign input D0 or D1 to a contact sensing input. Set the
setting group selection mode at 2 for binary coded selection. If D0 is set, group 0 will be selected when the
input is off (binary code 00). Group 1 will be selected when the input is on (binary code 01). Similarly, if D1
is set, group 2 will be selected when the input is on (binary coded 10).
This logic is useful in a situation where two transformers feed a single bus or two busses have a bus tie
between them. The feeder and bus relays must be coordinated for the situation where only one source is
in service (bus tie open or one transformer out of service). However, when both sources are in service, such

8-62 Application BE1-851

as when the bus tie is closed, each bus relay sees only half of the current for a fault. This results in poor
sensitivity and slow clearing time for the bus relays.
Example 2. Adapting the logic in different setting groups
The logic in most of the preprogrammed logic schemes can be varied in each of the different setting groups.
This is accomplished by disabling functions by setting their primary settings at zero. It is also possible to
do more sophisticated modification of the logic in each of the different setting groups by using the active
setting group logic variables SG0, SG1, SG2, and SG3 in the BESTlogic expressions.

Output Contact Seal-In

Trip contact seal-in circuits have historically been provided with electro-mechanical relays. These seal-in
circuits consisted of a dc coil in series with the relay trip contact and a seal-in contact in parallel with the trip
contact. The seal-in feature serves several purposes for the EM relays. One is to provide mechanical
energy to drop the target. Second is to carry the dc tripping current from the induction disk contact which
may not have significant closing torque for a low resistance connection. The third is to prevent the relay
contact from dropping out until the current has been interupted by the 52a contacts in series with the trip coil.
If the tripping contact opens before the dc current is interrupted, the contact may be damaged. The first two
of these items are not an issue for solid state relays, but the third item is an issue.
To prevent the output relay contacts from opening prematurely, a 200 millisecond hold timer can be selected
with the SG-HOLDn=1 command. Refer to Section 3, Functional Description for more information on this
feature. If the protection engineer desires seal-in logic with feed back from the breaker position logic, he
can provid this logic by modifying the BESTlogic expression for the tripping output. To do this, use one of
the general purpose timers 62 or 162 and set it for mode 1 (Pickup/Dropout Timer). Set the timer logic so
that it is initiated by the breaker position input, and set the timer for two cycles pickup and two cycles
dropout. Then AND the timer output with the tripping outout and OR it into the expression for the tripping
output. The same can be done for the closing output. See Figure 8-13 for the seal-in logic diagram.

Oscillographic Recording of Breaker Closures and Opens

How do I program the relay to create an oscillographic record when the breaker closes or opens? Monitor
the circuit breaker status by connecting the 52b contacts to IN1. Set a general purpose timer (62) for mode
1 (pickup and dropout), initiated by not input one (/IN1) and no blocking, with T1 equal to 0.015 seconds,
and T2 equal to 0.015 seconds (SL-62=1,/IN1,0 and S<#>-62=0.015,0.015). Program a virtual output
(VO10) to be true (high) when the input to IN1 is false and the 62 output is false or when the IN1 input is true
and the 62 output is true (VO10=/IN1*/62+IN1*62). Set the SG-TRIGGER command for a logic trigger when
VO10 is true (SG-TRIGGER=<TRIP trigger>,<PICKUP trigger>,VO10).

Here is the scenario. The breaker has been open for awhile, therefore IN1 input is true, and 62 output is
false. When the breaker closes, the IN1 input becomes false and because the 62 output is false, virtual
output 10 goes true for the duration of T1 (15 milliseconds). After the T1 time delay, the 62 output goes
true and remains true until the initiate input (IN1) goes false for the duration of T2. Virtual output 10 was
true for the 15 milliseconds time delay of T1 and triggered the oscillographic record when the breaker
closed.

Before the breaker opens, IN1 is false and the 62 output is true. When the breaker opens, IN1 becomes
true longer than time delay T2. During time T2, virtual output 10 is true because both IN1 and the 62
output are true. This time, an oscillographic record is triggered because the circuit breaker opened.

BE1-851 Application 8-63

 + +

52b

+ VO6
IN1 INI 62 VO1 52TC OUTPUT
OPTO 62 OUT1
LOGIC
BLK
TRIPPING
LOGIC

VO7
VO2 52CC OUTPUT OUT2
LOGIC

CLOSING
LOGIC
52a 52b

52TC 52CC

D2590-10
- - 03-23-98

Figure 8-19. Output Seal-In Logic Diagram

NOTE
This example is based on FEEDER_2, _3, or _4 preprogrammed logic schemes.

Example 1.
Turn off the hold timer for output 1: SG-HOLD1=0; SG-HOLD2=0
Set the timer logic: SL-62=1,IN1,0
Set the pickup and dropout times: S#-62=2c,2c
Set the output logic: VO1=101T+BFPU+VO11+VO6*/62
VO2=101C+79C+VO7*62
VO6=VO1*/62
VO7=VO2*62

8-64 Application BE1-851

SECTION 9 • SECURITY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 9 • SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
GS-PW Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Tables
Table 9-1. Password Protection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

BE1-851 User Interface and Security i

SECTION 9 • SECURITY

GENERAL
This section describes security in the form of multilevel password protection, along with the information
required for protecting specific function groups and user interface components against unauthorized access.
Passwords provide access security for three distinct functional access areas: Settings, Reports, and Control.
Each functional area can be assigned a unique password or one password can be assigned to multiple
areas. A global password is used to access all three of the functional areas. BE1-851 passwords are not
case sensitive; either lowercase or uppercase letters may be entered. Password security only limits write
operations; passwords are never required to read information from any area.
Additional security is provided by controlling the functional areas that can be accessed from a particular
communication port. For example, security can be configured so that access to Control commands from the
rear RS-232 port (COM1) is denied. Then, an attempt to issue a Control command through COM1 will cause
the relay to respond with an ACCESS DENIED and/or INVALID PASSWORD message. This will occur
whether a valid password is entered or not. When configuring communication port access areas, you should
be aware that the front RS-232 port (COM0) and the front panel HMI are treated as the same port.
The communication ports and password parameters act as a two-level control to limit changes. For a
command to be accepted, the entered password must be correct and the command must be entered through
a valid port. Only one password can be active at one time for any area or port. For example, if a user gains
access at COM1, then users at other areas (COM0, front panel HMI, and COM2) won’t be able to gain
access until the user at COM1 uses the EXIT command to release access control.
If a port holding access privileges, sees no activity (command entered or HMI key pressed) for approximately
five minutes, access privileges and any pending changes will be lost. This feature ensures that password
protection can’t be accidentally left in a state where access privileges are enabled for one area and other
areas locked out for an indefinite period.
If password protection is disabled, then entering ACCESS= followed by no password or any alphanumeric
character string will obtain access to the unprotected area(s).

Setting Up Password Protection

Only one password can be active at a time for any area or port. If a user at COM1 has password access,
then users at other areas (COM0 and COM2) cannot obtain access until control is released at COM1 by
executing an EXIT command.
If a port holding access privileges sees no activity (command entered or Edit key pressed) for approximately
five minutes, then access privileges and any pending changes will be lost. This ensures that password
protection won’t be left in a state with access privileges enabled and other areas locked out for an indefinite
period.
Password protection is configured for each access area port and communication port with the GS-PW
command. Password protection settings are summarized in Table 1-1.
Table 9-1. Password Protection Settings
Setting Range/Purpose

User defined alphanumeric string with a maximum of 8 characters

password
A setting of 0 disables password protection.

0 = Front RS-232 port Multiple ports may be selected by using

com
1 = Rear RS-232 port a slash (/) between each port
ports
2 = Rear RS-485 port designator.

BE1-851 Security 9-1

GS-PW Command
Purpose: Reads or sets passwords, password access areas, and password access ports.
Syntax: GS-PW[ <t>[= <password>, <com ports(0/1/2)>]]
Comments: Global password access is required to change password settings.
t=C - provides write access to Control commands, G - provides Global write access to all
commands, R - provides write access to Report commands, S - provides write access to
Setting commands

Example1. Read the current passwords, assuming that the current privilege level G password has
already been entered with the ACCESS command.
>GS-PW
GS-PWG=G,0/1/2; GS-PWS=S,0/1/2; GS-PWC=C,0/1/2; GS-PWR=R,0/1/2
Example2. Program password S to be ABC and allow it to be accepted at the front panel HMI, the front
panel RS-232 port, and the rear RS-232 port. Program password R to be ABC and allow it
to be accepted at the front panel HMI and at the front RS-232 port.
>GS-PWS=ABC,0/1; GS-PWR=ABC,0

With these settings, if ACCESS=ABC is entered at the front RS-232 port (COM0), the relay
responds with ACCESS GRANTED: SETTING AND REPORT. If ACCESS=ABC is entered
at the rear RS-232 port (COM1), the relay responds with ACCESS GRANTED: SETTING.
Example3. Limit Global access to the front panel by assigning password ABC to it.
>GS-PWG=ABC,0
Example4. Limit Control operations to the RS-485 port (COM2) but don’t require a password.
>GS-PWC=0,2

9-2 Security BE1-851

SECTION 10  HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 10  HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Automatic HMI Display Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
HMI OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Entering Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Performing Control Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Resetting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Entering Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Automatic Display Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Figures
Figure 10-1. BE1-851 Front Panel HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Figure 10-2. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Report Status Branch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Figure 10-3. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Control And Metering Branches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Figure 10-4. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Reports Branch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Figure 10-5. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Protection Logic Branch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Figure 10-6. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Protection Logic Branch) for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . 10-6
Figure 10-7. BE1-851 Menu Tree (General Settings Branch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Figure 10-8. Virtual Control Switch 143 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Tables
Table 10-1. Automatic Screen Display Priority Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Table 10-2. Figure 4-7 Call-out Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Table 10-3. SG-SCREEN Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Table 10-4. BE1-851 Screen Numbers and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Table 10-5. Display Scrolling Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface i

SECTION 10  HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE

GENERAL
This section provides a description of the BE1-851 human machine interface and illustrates the menu tree.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

Figure 10-1 shows the front panel human-machine interface (HMI) for a BE1-851 Overcurrent Relay in an
H1 Case configuration. Refer to the callouts below Figure 10-1. F1 and S1 style relays have the same
controls and indicators with different layouts.

Figure 10-1. BE1-851 Front Panel HMI

Locator Description
A Two line by 16 character LCD display with backlighting. Primary source for receiving
information from the relay or when locally programming settings to the relay. Displays
active logic scheme name, targets, metering values, demand values, communications
parameters, diagnostic information, and the menu tree steps or branches.
B Power LED. When this LED is ON, indicates operating power is applied to the relay.
C Relay Trouble LED. When this LED is ON, indicates that the relay is off-line due to
start-up condition or a relay failure alarm.. Refer to Section 3 for a compete description
of the relay failure alarm diagnostics.
D Minor Alarm LED. When this LED is ON, indicates a minor alarm status. .. Refer to
Section 3 for a compete description of the Minor Alarms.
E Major Alarm LED. When this LED is ON, indicates a major alarm status.. Refer to
Section 3 for a compete description of the Major Alarms.
F Trip LED. When this LED is flashing ON, indicates that a protective element is picked
up. When this LED is ON continuously, indicates that a trip output is closed. The LED is
sealed-in if a protective trip has occurred and there are targets being displayed.

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-1

 Locator Description
G Communications Port 0. RS-232 serial communications port. A computer terminal or
PC running a terminal emulation program such as Windows( Terminal can be connected
to this port so that the user may send commands to the relay or receive reports from the
relay. Communication with the relay uses a simple ASCII command language.
H Reset pushbutton switch. Resets report data including: sealed-in Trip targets, Trip LED,
peak demand currents, and alarms.
I Scrolling pushbuttons (keys). Scrolls UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT through the menu tree or
when in the Edit mode, the LEFT/RIGHT scrolling pushbuttons select the variable to
change and the UP/DOWN scrolling pushbuttons change the variable.
J Edit pushbutton switch. Enables settings changes. When the Edit pushbutton is first
pushed, an LED on the pushbutton turns ON to indicate the edit mode is active. When
changes are complete (using the scrolling pushbuttons) and the Edit pushbutton is
pushed again, the LED turns OFF indicating that the changes are saved. If changes are
not completed and saved within five minutes, the edit mode is exited without saving
changes.
K Identification plate showing sensing input current range, power supply type, and serial
number.

Menu Tree
The menu tree has six branches. These branches are:
1. REPORT STATUS. Display and resetting of general status information such as targets, alarms,
recloser status, etc.
2. CONTROL. Operation of control functions such as controlling virtual switches, selection of
active setting group, etc.
3. METERING. Display of real time metering values.
4. REPORTS. Display and resetting of report information such as time and date, demand
registers, breaker duty statistics, etc.
5. PROTECTION LOGIC. Display and setting of protective function setting parameters such as
pickups, time delays, etc.
6. GENERAL SETTINGS. Display and setting of non protective function setting parameters such
as communication,
Each screen in the menu tree is numbered in the upper left hand corner of the screen. This number
indicates the current branch and level in the menu tree structure so that you do not loose track of where you
are when you have left the top level of the menu tree. You scroll through each level of the menu tree by
using the right and left scrolling keys. To go to a level of greater detail, you use the down scrolling key.
Each time you go to a lower level in the menu tree, another number is added to the screen number
separated by a period. Figures 10-2 through 10-6, illustrate all branches in the menu tree.

10-2 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

 1 REPORT STATUS

*^ *^
1.1 RECLOSER 1.2 TARGETS 1.3 ALARMS 1.4 SCREEN 1.5 OPERATIONAL
RESET YES xxxx SCROLL LIST STATUS

*
D2557-02 1.3.1 xxxxxxxxx
11-12-99 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

1.2.1 TARGETS 1.2.2 TARGETS

150TABC, 150TN 51ABC, 51N ETC.

FAULT IA10.4K FAULT FLTDATE 01/01/99

IB10.4K IC10.4K IN10.4K I010.4K TIME 00:05:05:324

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
1.5.1 IN 1234 1.5.2 OUT A12345 1.5.3 A12345 1.5.4 x43 0123 1.5.5 ACTIVE 1.5.6 BREAKER
xxxx xxxxxx CO-OUT xxxxxx xxxx GROUP x xxxxxxxxx

Figure 10-2. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Report Status Branch)

TO/FROM 1 REPORT
STATUS
3 METERING
2 CONTROL TO/FROM 4 REPORTS

2.1 43 AUX 2.2 BKR CONTROL 2.3 SETTING 2.4 OUTPUT

SWITCHES SWITCH GROUP CONTROL CONTROL OVERRIDE

^ ^ ^
2.2.1 BKR CONTROL 2.3.1 SET GROUP 2.4.1 OUT A12345
TRIP -> CLOSE LOGIC OVERRIDE x OVERRIDE xxxxxx

^ ^ ^ ^
2.1.1 xxxxxxxxxx 2.1.2 xxxxxxxxxx 2.1.3 xxxxxxxxxx 2.1.4 xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx xx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xx xxxxxxx

^ ^
D2557-03 3.1 IAxxxxu 3.2
04-10-97 IBxxxxu ICxxxxu INxxxxu IQxxxxu

Figure 10-3. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Control And Metering Branches)

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-3

 TO/FROM 3 METERING

4 REPORTS
TO/FROM 5 PROTECTION LOGIC

^ ^ ^
4.1 FAULT REPORT 4.2 EVENT REPORT 4.3 BREAKER 4.4 DEMAND 4.5 TIMExx:xx:xx 4.6 MDL: BE1-851
NEW FLTS: xxx NEW EVENTS: xxx REPORTS REPORTS DATEmm/dd/yy VER: xx.xx

^ ^
4.3.1 BKR OPCNTR 4.3.2 BKR DUTY
xxxxx A xxxB xxxC xxx

4.4.1 TODAY'S 4.4.2YESTERDAY'S 4.4.3 PEAK

PEAK PEAK SINCE RESET

*^ *^ *^ *^ *^
4.4.3.1 PIA 4.4.3.2 PIB 4.4.3.3 PIC 4.4.3.4 PIN 4.4.3.5 PIQ
xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd

4.4.2.1 YIA 4.4.2.2 YIB 4.4.2.3 YIC 4.4.2.4 YIN 4.4.2.5 YIQ
xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd

^ ^ ^ ^ ^
4.4.1.1 TIA 4.4.1.2 TIB 4.4.1.3 TIC 4.4.1.4 TIN 4.4.1.5 TIQ D2557-04
xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd 03-17-97

Figure 10-4. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Reports Branch)

10-4 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

 Fig
TO/FROM
4 REPORTS TO/FROM 6 GENERAL SETTINGS

BE1-851
5 PROTECTION
LOGIC xxxxxxxxxx

5.1 SETTING 5.2 SETTING 5.3 SETTING 5.4 SETTING 5.5 GLOBAL
GROUP 0 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 SETTINGS

5.5.1 50BF
SETTINGS

SIMILAR TO SETTING GROUP 0

5.5.1.1 50BF
TD:xxxu

5.1.1 50T 5.1.2 51 5.1.3 62 5.1.4 79

SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS

5.1.4.1 79 5.1.4.2 79 5.1.4.3 79 5.1.4.4 79 5.1.4.5 79

TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu TD3:xxxuTD4:xxxu TDR:xxxuTDF:xxxu TDM:xxxu SCB:xxxx

5.1.3.1 62 5.1.3.2 162

TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu

Human-Machine Interface
5.1.2.1 51P 5.1.2.2 51N 5.1.2.3 51Q
PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx

5.1.1.1 50TP 5.1.1.2 50TN 5.1.1.3 50TQ 5.1.1.4 150TP 5.1.1.5 150TN 5.1.1.6 150TQ
PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu
D2557-06
03-18-97

5. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Protection Logic Branch) for Sensing Input Type H Relays
ure 10-

10-5
10-6
TO/FROM
4 REPORTS TO/FROM 6 GENERAL SETTINGS
5 PROTECTION
LOGIC xxxxxxxxxx

5.1 SETTING 5.2 SETTING 5.3 SETTING 5.4 SETTING 5.5 GLOBAL
GROUP 0 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 SETTINGS

5.5.1 50BF
SETTINGS

SIMILAR TO SETTING GROUP 0

5.5.1.1 50BF
TD:xxxu

5.1.1 50T 5.1.2 51 5.1.3 62 5.1.4 79

SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS

5.1.4.1 79 5.1.4.2 79 5.1.4.3 79 5.1.4.4 79 5.1.4.5 79

TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu TD3:xxxuTD4:xxxu TDR:xxxuTDF:xxxu TDM:xxxu SCB:xxxx

Human-Machine Interface
5.1.3.1 62 5.1.3.2 162
TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu

5.1.2.1 51P 5.1.2.2 51N 5.1.2.3 51Q

PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx

5.1.1.1 50TP 5.1.1.2 50TN 5.1.1.3 150TP 5.1.1.4 150TN 5.1.1.5 250TN 5.1.1.6 350TN
PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu
D2875-20
03-08-00

Figure 10-6. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Protection Logic Branch) for Sensing Input Type G Relays

BE1-851
 6 GENERAL
TO/FROM 5 PROTECTION LOGIC
SETTINGS

6.1 COM SETTINGS 6.2 LCD CONTRAST 6.3 POWER

x SYSTEM SETTING

6.1.1 COMO F-232 6.1.2 COM1 R-232 6.1.3 COM2 R-485

BAUDxxxx BAUDxxxxADRxxxxx BAUDxxxxADRxxxxx

D2557-07
04-10-97
6.3.1 CT RATIO 6.3.2 FREQUENCY 6.3.3 PHASE ROT
B xxxxx N xxxxx xx x

Figure 10-7. BE1-851 Menu Tree (General Settings Branch)

Automatic HMI Display Priorities

If no front panel scrolling key has been pressed for approximately five minutes, the relay automatically
switches to and displays the highest priority REPORT STATUS menu screen. In a typical application, the
user would return to the relay and prefer to see the data that is of the most interest already on the screen.
The automatic screen display follows the priority logic described in Table 4-3. For example, if a trip has
occurred, the target display screen is the highest priority and will be displayed automatically.

Table 10-1. Automatic Screen Display Priority Status

Priority Priority Logic State Screen Displayed Data

1 Recloser (79) active 1.1 Recloser Status

2 Targets active 1.2.x Scrolling display of Target Elements and

Fault Currents

3 Alarms Active 1.3.x Scrolling display of Active Alarms

4 Scrolling Screens 1.4.x Scrolling display of user screens

active programmed with the SG-SCREEN
command

5 Scrolling screens 1.2 Default Target screen showing TARGETS

disabled NONE

If there are no targets or alarms, then the relay will automatically scroll through the user programmable
scroll list (there is a scrolling display of up to 16 screens). See Section 9, User Interface And Security
Setup for details on setting the automatic scroll list.
When the display is scrolling through the programmed scroll list, you can freeze the display and manually
scroll through the scroll list. Pressing the RIGHT or LEFT scroll pushbutton will freeze the display.
Repeatedly pressing the RIGHT scroll pushbutton will progress through the scroll list in ascending order.
Repeatedly pressing the LEFT scroll pushbutton will progress through the scroll list in descending order.

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-7

Pressing the UP scroll pushbutton will leave the automatic scroll list and place you in the menu tree at
screen 1.3, STAT\SCREENS.

Once the user has taken manual control of the display by pressing any of the scrolling pushbuttons,
automatic priority has been disabled until the display times out. Thus, if a trip or alarm occurs during this
time, the trip or alarm LED will light up, but the display will not jump to the appropriate screen. It will be
necessary to manually scroll to the target or alarm screen to see this data and reset it.

The HMI can be returned to automatic priority immediately without waiting for the timer to time out by
scrolling to screen 1.3, STAT\SCREENS and pressing the DOWN scroll pushbutton to return to the
automatic scroll list.

HMI OPERATIONS
The following paragraphs describe how the HMI is used to set and control relay functions.

Entering Settings
Settings for protection functions can be edited at menu branch 5, PROTECTION LOGIC of the HMI LCD.
Settings for general and reporting functions can be edited from menu branch 6, GENERAL SETTINGS. To
edit a setting using the manual scrolling pushbuttons, perform the following procedures.
1. Scroll to the screen that displays the function to be edited.
2. Press the EDIT pushbutton to gain access. If password security has been initiated for settings, you
will be prompted to enter the appropriate password. See the paragraphs, Entering Passwords, for
details on entering passwords from the HMI. Once access has been gained, the EDIT LED will be
lighted and a cursor will appear in the first settings field on the screen.
3. Press the UP or DOWN scrolling key to select the desired setting. Some settings require entering a
number one character at a time. For example, to enter a 51 pickup as 7.3 amps, you would press
the UP pushbutton until the 7 is showing. Then, press the RIGHT pushbutton to move the cursor
over and press the UP pushbutton until the . is showing. Then, press the RIGHT pushbutton to
move the cursor over and press the UP pushbutton until the 3 is showing. Other settings require
scrolling through a list of selections. For example, you would move the cursor over to the CRV field
and then scroll through a list of available TCC curves.
4. Once all of the settings on the screen have been entered, press the EDIT pushbutton a second time
and the settings will be validated. If the settings are in range, the screen will flash CHANGES
SAVED, and the EDIT LED will go out. If you want to abort the edit session without changing any
settings, press the RESET pushbutton before you press the edit pushbutton the second time. The
screen will flash CHANGES LOST and the EDIT LED will go out.

Performing Control Operations

Control operations can be executed at menu branch 2,

CONTROL of the HMI LCD. These functions allow you
to control the state of virtual switches, override logic
and control the active setting group, and override the
logic and control the state of output contacts. All of
these functions work similarly to the process of entering
settings in that you press the EDIT pushbutton, use the
UP and DOWN scroll pushbuttons to select the desired
state, and press the EDIT pushbutton for the action to
be executed.
Figure 10-8 shows virtual switch 143 as an example of
a virtual switch screen. See Section 4, Protection And
Figure 10-8. Virtual Control Switch 143 Screen

10-8 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

Control Functions for more details on the x43 and 101 functions. Table 10-2 describes each of the call-outs
shown on Figure10-7. The user programmable label for this switch has been set to RCL_DISABL. The
TRUE (closed) state label has been set to DISABLD. And, the FALSE (open) state label has been set to
ENABLED. The logical mode for this application would be set to Mode 2 (On/Off switch).

Table 10-2. Figure 4-7 Call-out Descriptions

Locator Description

A Screen number. This number eases navigation by indicating the current branch and level
in the menu tree structure.

B User selectable label (meaningful name) for specific virtual switches. The switch 143
identification label is set to RCL_DISABL.

C User selectable label for the closed (1) state for virtual switch 143. The switch 143 closed
label is set to DISABLD.

D Arrow icon indicates the current switch position (status). In Figure 10-8, the current status
is the open state which is labeled ENABLD.

E User selectable label for the open (0) state for virtual switch 143. The switch 143 open
label is set to ENABLED.

To operate the switch, you would use the following procedure.

1. Using the manual scrolling pushbuttons, scroll to screen 2.1.x (43 AUX SWITCHES). Or, if the
screen has been placed in the automatic scroll list, simply wait for it to appear and press the RIGHT
or LEFT scroll pushbutton to freeze the display.
2. Press the EDIT pushbutton to gain access. If password security has been initiated for control
functions, you will be prompted to enter the appropriate password. See the following subsection
Entering Passwords for details on entering passwords for details on entering passwords at the HMI.
Once access is gained to the control function, the EDIT LED will light..
3. Press the UP or DOWN scrolling key to select the new state (as indicated by the arrow) that you
wish to place the switch in. The “P” selection will pulse the state of the switch from its present state
to the opposite state for approximately 200mSec. The allowable states are dependent upon the
logic mode setting for the switch. If the switch is set to Mode 1 (On/Off/Pulse), the “P” (pulse)
selection will give an “INVALID PARAMETER” error. If it set to Mode 3 (Off/Momentary On),
selecting one of the two state will give an “INVALID PARAMETER” ERROR.
4. Press the EDIT pushbutton a second time and the switch will change to the selected position, the
screen will flash CHANGES SAVED, and the EDIT LED will go out. If you want to abort the editing
session without changing any controls, press the RESET pushbutton before you press the EDIT
pushbutton the second time. The screen will flash CHANGES LOST and the EDIT LED will go out.

Resetting Functions
The reset pushbutton is context sensitive. Its function is dependent upon the screen that is presently being
displayed. For example, pressing the reset key when the demand screen is displayed will reset the
demands but it will not reset the alarms, etc. It is necessary to scroll through the menu tree to the alarm
screen to reset an alarm. You are not prompted for a password when using the reset key.
There are two BESTlogic variables associated with the HMI reset pushbutton. Logic variable TRSTKEY
becomes TRUE when the reset pushbutton is pressed while the target screen is displayed. Logic variable
ARSTKEY becomes true when the reset pushbutton is pressed while the alarm screen is displayed. See
Section 8, Applications, Application Tips for examples on the use of these variables.

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-9

Entering Passwords
If password security has been initiated for a function, the HMI will prompt you to enter a password when the
EDIT pushbutton is pressed. To gain access, you must enter the appropriate password. A field of eight
asterisks appears with the cursor located under the leftmost character position. You can enter passwords
by performing the following procedures.
1. Press the UP or DOWN scrolling pushbuttons until the proper first character of the password
appears. Pressing UP scrolls through the alphabet and then the numbers in ascending order.
Pressing DOWN scrolls through the numbers and then the alphabet in descending order.
2. Press the RIGHT scrolling pushbutton to move the cursor to the next character of the password and
select the appropriate character.
3. Continue the process until the entire password has been spelled out. If the password is less than
eight characters, leave the remaining asterisks in place instead of entering blanks.
4. Press the EDIT pushbutton to enter the password. If the proper password has been entered, the
screen will flash ACCESS GRANTED. If an incorrect password has been entered, the screen will
flash ACCESS DENIED, and the EDIT LED will go out.
5. Once you gain access, it remains in affect for five minutes. As long as you continue to press the edit
key for a function for which you have gained access, the five minute timer will be refreshed and you
will not be prompted for a password.

Automatic Display Scrolling

When the recloser is inactive, no targets or alarms exist, and no HMI keys have been pressed for five
minutes, the LCD automatically scrolls through a maximum of 16 user-programmable screens. The user can
select preferred display screens and designate the order in which they are scrolled. Each screen is displayed
in turn for four to five seconds. When the last screen of the scrolling list is displayed, the scrolling sequence
restarts. Automatic display scrolling is defined with the SG-SCREEN command.
Table 10-3. SG-SCREEN Command Settings
Setting Default Purpos/Range

SG-SCREEN1 4.5 To select the preferred display

order of HMI screens from 1
SG-SCREEN2 1.5.6 through 16. See Table 9-2 for a
list of screens and their default
SG-SCREEN3 4.3.1
settings.
SG-SCREEN4 1.1

SG-SCREEN5 3.1

SG-SCREEN6 3.2

SG-SCREEN7 4.4

SG-SCREEN8 4.4.3

SG-SCREEN9 4.4.3.1

SG-SCREEN10 4.4.3.2

SG-SCREEN11 4.4.3.3

SG-SCREEN12 4.4.3.4

SG-SCREEN13 4.4.3.5

SG-SCREEN14 0

SG-SCREEN15 0

SG-SCREEN16 0

10-10 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

SG-SCREEN Command
Purpose: Reads or programs the display scrolling settings.
Syntax: SG-SCREEN[n][=<default screen number>]
Comments: n = 1 to 16, corresponding to the scrolling order of 1 to 16
default screen number = number of menu screen to display. Screen numbers are located in
the upper lefthand corner of each display. A setting of 0 will skip the screen in the
sequence. If all <default screen number> parameters equal 0, display scrolling is disabled.

Example Program a display scrolling sequence that shows screens in the following order: three-
phase current (screen 3.4), neutral current (screen 3.5), and neutral and negative sequence
current (screen 3.6).
>SG-SCREEN1=3.4
>SG-SCREEN2=3.5
>SG-SCREEN3=3.6
Automatic display scrolling is interrupted when an HMI key is pressed, the recloser is activated, or a target
or alarm is triggered.
Pressing an HMI key during display scrolling causes scrolling to stop at the screen displayed when the key
was pressed.
Table 10-4. BE1-851 Screen Numbers and Descriptions

Screen Screen
Number Description Number Description

1 Report Status 4.4.3.5 PIQ

1.1 Recloser Reset 5 Protection Logic

1.2 Targets 5.1 Setting Group 0

1.3 Alarms 5.2 Setting Group 1

1.4 Screen Scroll list 5.3 Setting Group 2

1.5.3 CO- OUT A12345 5.4 Setting Group 3

1.5.4 X43 5.5 Global Settings

1.5.5 Active Group X 5.5.1 50BF Setting

1.5.6 Breaker 5.5.1.1 50 BF TD

2 Control 5.1.1 50 T Settings

2.1 43 aux switches 5.1.2 51 Settings

2.2 Breaker Control Trip Close 5.1.3 62 Settings

2.3 Setting Group Control 5.1.4 79 Settings

2.4 Output Control Overide 5.1.1.1 50TP

3 Metering 5.1.1.2 50 TN

3.1 3 Phase Current 5.1.1.3 50 TQ (150TP on G type relays)

3.2 Neutral and Negative Sequence 5.1.1.4 150 TP (150TN on G type relays)
Current

4 Reports 5.1.1.5 150 TN (250TN on G type relays)

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-11

 4.1 Fault Report 5.1.1.6 150 TQ (350TN on G type relays)

4.2 Event Report 5.1.2.1 51P

4.3 Breaker Report 5.1.2.2 51N

4.4 Demand Report 5.1.2.3 51Q (151N on G type relays)

4.5 Time and Date 5.1.3.1 62

4.6 Model and Version 5.1.3.2 162

4.3.1 Breaker operations Counter 5.1.4.1 79

4.3.2 Breaker Duty 5.1.4.2 79

4.4.1 Today’s Peak 5.1.4.3 79

4.4.2 Yesterday’s Peak 5.1.4.4 79

4.4.3 Peak Since Reset 5.1.4.5 79

4.4.1.1 TIA 6 General Settings

4.4.1.2 TIB 6.1 COM Settings

4.4.1.3 TIC 6.2 LCD Contrast

4.4.1.4 TN 6.3 Power System Setting

4.4.1.5 TQ 6.1.1 COM0 F-232

4.4.2.1 YIA 6.1.2 COM1 R-232

4.4.2.2 YIB 6.1.3 COM2 R485

4.4.2.3 YIC 6.3.1 CT RATIO

4.4.2.4 YIN 6.3.2 Frequency

4.4.2.5 YIQ 6.3.3 Phase ROT

4.4.3.1 PIA

4.4.3.2 PIB

4.4.3.3 PIC

10-12 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

During scrolling, if the recloser is activated or a target or alarm is triggered, scrolling is stopped and the
REPORT STATUS screen with the highest priority is displayed. Screens are displayed using the priority logic
described in Table 10-5.
Table 10-5. Display Scrolling Priority
Priority Priority Logic State Screen Displayed Data
1 Recloser (79) active 1.1 Recloser status
Scrolling display of target
2 Targets active 1.2.x
elements and fault currents
3 Alarms active 1.3.x Scrolling display of active alarms
Scrolling display of screens in
4 Display scrolling active 1.4.x
the user defined scrolling list
Default target screen showing
5 Display scrolling disabled 1.2
TARGETS NONE

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-13

SECTION 11 • ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 11 • ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
RS-485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
RS-232 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Using the ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Human to Machine ASCII Command Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Command Text File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Embedding Comments into ASCII Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Miscellaneous Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Obtaining Help Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Changing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Reading All Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Reading Specific Groups of Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Reading Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
COMMAND SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Metering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Report Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Setting Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Alarm Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Breaker Monitoring and Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
General Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Programmable Logic Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
User Programmable Name Setting Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Protection Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Tables
Table 11-1. Communication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface i

SECTION 11 • ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE
INTRODUCTION
Relay and power system information can be retrieved from a remote location using the ASCII command
interface. The ASCII command interface is also used to enter settings, retrieve reports and metering
information, and perform control operations. A communication port on the relay front panel provides a
temporary, local interface for communication. Communication ports on the rear panel provide a permanent
communication interface.
Front and rear panel communication ports can be connected to computers, terminals, serial printers,
modems, and intermediate communication/control interfaces such as RS-232 serial multiplexors. BE1-851
communication protocols support ASCII and binary data transmissions. ASCII data is used to send and
receive human readable data and commands. Binary data is used for computer communication and
transmission of raw oscillographic fault data if available.
Modbus™ and other common protocols are also available. An instruction manual (9 2899 00 992) for using
Modbus™ protocol with the BE1-851 is available as well as instruction manual (9 2899 00 995) for using
DNP protocol. For information about other protocols, consult your Basler Electric Representative.

SERIAL PORT
Communication connections consist of two standard RS-232 ports, one RS-485 port, and an IRIG port. BE1-
851 communication protocol is compatible with readily available modem/terminal software. If required,
password protection provides security against unauthorized operation. Detailed information about making
communication connections is provided in Section 12, Installation.

RS-485 Port
RS-485 terminal block connections are located on the rear panel and designated COM 2. This port supports
half-duplex, multi-drop operation. Multi-drop (polled mode) operation is possible if a polling address is
programmed for the port.

RS-232 Ports
Two female RS-232 (DB-9) connectors are provided. One port is located on the front panel and is
designated COM 0. Another port is located on the rear panel and is designated COM 1. Both ports support
full-duplex operation. Polled operation is possible at the rear port using a simple RS-232 splitter if a polling
address is programmed for COM 1.

ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE

A computer terminal or PC running terminal emulation software can be used at any of the three serial ports
to send commands to the relay. Simple ASCII command language is used to communicate with the relay.
When the relay receives a command, it responds with the appropriate action. ASCII commands can be used
in human to machine interactions and in batch download type operations.
Command Structure
An ASCII command consists of a string made up of one or two letters followed by a hyphen and an object
name.
xy-object name
Where: x Specifies the general command function.
y Specifies the command subgroup.
object name Defines the specific object to which the command refers.

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-1

Examples of object names include 51N (neutral inverse time overcurrent function) and PIA (phase A peak
current demand register). A command string entered by itself is a read command. A command string
followed by an equal sign (=) and one or more parameters is a write command.
General command functions are organized into five major groups plus one group of miscellaneous
commands.

CONTROL (C): Control commands perform select-before-operate control actions such as circuit
breaker tripping and closing and active setting group changes. Subgroups include
Select (S) and Operate (O).
GLOBAL (G): One Global command performs operations that don’t fall into the other general groups.
The command for reading and changing passwords (GS-PW) is the only global
command available.
METERING (M): Commands in this group report all real-time metering values. No subgroup is used
with metering commands.
REPORTS (R): Reports commands read and reset reporting functions such as time and date, demand
registers, and breaker duty statistics. Subgroups include Alarms (A), Breaker
Monitoring (B), Demand Recording (D), Fault Summary Reporting (F), General
Information (G), Sequence of Events Recorder (S), and Oscillography (O).
SETTINGS (S): This group contains all of the setting parameters that govern relay function.
Subgroups include Setting Groups 0, 1, 2, and 3 (0, 1, 2, 3), Protection Settings (P) not
in setting groups, Alarm Settings (A), Breaker Monitor Settings (B), General Settings
(G), and Logic Settings (L).
MISCELLANEOUS: Miscellaneous commands include Access, Exit, and Help. Note that only the first letter
of these commands must be entered; entering the full command name is optional.

Using the ASCII Command Interface

Human to Machine ASCII Command Operations

Using ASCII commands, settings can be read and changed on a function by function basis. The mnemonic
format of the commands helps you interact with the relay. It isn’t necessary to remember all of the object
names. Most commands don’t require that you specify a complete object name. If the first two letters of a
command are entered, the relay will respond with all applicable object names.

ASCII Command Examples

1. Obtain a breaker operations count by entering RB (Report Breaker). The BE1-851 responds with the
operations counter value along with all other breaker report objects. If you know that the object name
for the breaker operations counter is OPCNTR, you can enter RB-OPCNTR and read only the number
of breaker operations.
Partial object names are also supported. This allows multiple objects to be read or reset at the same time.

2. Read all peak-since-reset demand current registers. Entering RD-PI (Report Demand - Peak Current
(I)) will return demand values and time stamps for phase A, B, C, Neutral, and Negative Sequence
current. To read only the Neutral demand value, the full object name (RD-PIN) is entered. Entering RD-
PI=0 resets all five of the peak-since-reset current demand registers.

Command Text File Operations

In command text file operations, an ASCII text file of commands is created and sent to the relay. For
example, the S command is used to retrieve a complete list of settings from the relay in ASCII command
format. This list of commands is captured, saved to a file, edited with any ASCII text editor, and then
uploaded to the relay. Because the number of relay settings is so large, loading settings with a text file is
the preferred method of setting the BE1-851.

11-2 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

Embedding Comments into ASCII Text Files
Adding comments to ASCII settings files is an easy way to organize and label your settings. A comment line
is started with two forward slashes (//) followed by the comment text. When the relay encounters // in a text
file, it ignores all following characters until the next carriage return or linefeed character.

Example of embedding comments in a settings file.

//Group0 is used during normal operation
S0-50TP=7.50,0m;S0-50TN=2.5,0m . . .
//Group1 is used during cold load pickup
S1-50TP=0,0m; S1-50TN=0,0m; S1-50TQ=0,0m

Miscellaneous Command Descriptions

Obtaining Help Information

The HELP (H) command provides general information on command syntax and functionality when the
manual is not available. Entering HELP or H provides information about using the HELP command. HELP1
or H1 returns a complete list of relay commands. Entering HELP <cmd>, where <cmd> is a specific
command, returns information about the use and format of the command along with an example of how the
command is used.

HELP Command
Purpose: Obtain help with command information.
Syntax: HELP[x/<cmd>]

Changing Settings
Access Command. Before making settings changes through a communication port, the ACCESS command
must be used to obtain programming access. Enter ACCESS=<password> to obtain access to change
settings associated with the password. Different passwords give the ability or access to perform different
operations. The relay will deny access if an invalid password is entered or if another user has already been
granted programming access through another serial port or at the front panel. Only one user can have
access at any one time.
Even if password protection is not used, it is still necessary to obtain access so that accidental changes are
prevented. If password protection is disabled, then ACCESS= will be accepted in place of a password. The
relay will respond with ACCESS GRANTED: GLOBAL if the command entered was received and executed.
The relay will respond with an error message and a ? if the command could not be executed.
The ACCESS (A) command and the EXIT (E) command are used to change relay settings, reset report
registers, and enable control commands through a serial port. These commands prevent changes from
being made concurrently from two areas. For example, a user cannot make changes through COM0 at the
same time a remote user is making changes through COM2.

ACCESS Command
Purpose: Reads or sets access level in order to change settings.
Syntax: ACCESS[=<password>]
Comments: The ACCESS command must be used before any changes to settings can be made. Available
ACCESS privileges are summarized in the following paragraphs.
READ-ONLY. This is the default access privilege when no passwords are active. Read-only access allows
you to read settings and reports but not make settings changes.
PRIVILEGE G: GLOBAL ACCESS. Global access is obtained by password G (PWG). Global access
permits entry of any command with no restrictions.
PRIVILEGE S: SETTING ACCESS. Setting access is obtained by password S (PWS). Setting access
allows changes to any settings.
BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-3
PRIVILEGE C: CONTROL ACCESS. Control access is obtained by password C (PWC). Control access
enables relay control operations.
PRIVILEGE R: REPORT ACCESS. Report access is obtained by password R (PWR). Report access
enables report operations to be performed.
An access privilege is obtained only when the appropriate password is entered. When a valid password is
entered, the relay responds with the access privilege provided by the password entered. If an invalid
password is entered, an error message is returned. If password protection is disabled in one or more
privileges, then entering any string will provide access to the unprotected privileges.

ACCESS Command Examples

1. A valid password is entered.
ACCESS=OPENUP
ACCESS GRANTED: GLOBAL
2. An invalid password is entered.
ACCESS=POENUP
ACCESS DENIED
3. The current access privilege is read.
ACCESS
ACCESS: GLOBAL

Exit Command. After changes are made, the new data is saved or discarded using the EXIT command.
Prior to saving or discarding any changes, you must confirm that you wish to exit the programming mode.
There are three exit options: Y (Yes), N (No), or C (Continue).

EXIT Command
Purpose: Exit the programming mode.
Syntax: EXIT (Note: Relay will prompt for verification.)
Comments: It’s important to make all programming changes before executing the EXIT command. This
prevents a partial or incomplete protection scheme from being implemented.
When access privileges are obtained, all programming changes are made to a temporary, scratchpad copy
of relay settings. These changes aren’t saved to nonvolatile memory and initiated until the EXIT command
is invoked and confirmed. After the EXIT command is entered, the relay prompts to confirm that the new
data should be saved. Three options, Y, N, or C, or available. Entering Y will save the data. If N is entered,
the relay will clear the changes and resume operating with the old settings. Entering C will abort the EXIT
command and allow programming to continue.

EXIT Command Example

Release programming privileges and save settings changes.
EXIT<CR>
SAVE CHANGES (Y/N/C)? Prompt to save Yes, No, or Continue
Y<CR> Confirmation to save changes
CHANGES SAVED Confirmation that changes were saved

Reading All Settings

All user programmable settings can be listed using the S command. This read-only command is useful for
documenting relay status during installation. The settings retrieved by the S command can be saved to a
standard text file and sent to another relay to be configured with the same settings. This type of settings
transfer takes less than one minute.

S Command
Purpose: Read all relay setting parameters.
Syntax: S
The S command returns the values of relay setting parameters in the same form that they are programmed.
It can be used at the end of a programming session to make a record of the relay settings. If saved in a file,
the report can be sent to another BE1-851 that will use the same settings. Because the report that is created

11-4 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

is a set of commands, sending the report to a different relay re-programs that relay with the settings
contained in the S report.

Reading Specific Groups of Settings

While the S command is useful for reading all relay settings, several commands are available to read specific
groups of settings.
Note: In the examples of this section, relay responses are printed in Courier typeface.

SA Command
Purpose: Read all alarm settings for Major and Minor alarms.
Syntax: SA

SA Command Example
Read all alarm settings.
>SA
SA-BKR1=0,0; SA-BKR2=0,0; SA-BKR3=0,0
SA-DIP=0.00; SA-DIN=0.00; SA-DIQ=0.00
SA-LGC=0
SA-MAJ=0
SA-MIN=0
SA-RESET=0

SB Command
Purpose: Read all breaker settings.
Syntax: SB

SB Command Example
Read all breaker settings.
>SB
SB-DUTY=0,0.000e+00
SB-LOGIC=/IN1

SG Command
Purpose: Read all general settings.
Syntax: SG

SG Command Example
Obtain a report of all general settings.
>SG
SG-CLK=M,24,0
SG-COM0=9600,A0,P0,R1,X1; SG-COM1=9600,A0,P0,R1,X1
SG-COM2=9600,A0,P0,R1,X0
SG-CTP=1; SG-CTN=1
SG-DIP=15; SG-DIN= 1; SG-DIQ= 1
SG-DSPP=F; SG-DSPN=F
SG-FREQ=60
SG-HOLDA=0; SG-HOLD1=1; SG-HOLD2=1; SG-HOLD3=0
SG-HOLD4=0; SG-HOLD5=1
SG-ID=BE1-851,SUBSTATION_1
SG-IN1= 4, 16; SG-IN2= 4, 16; SG-IN3= 4, 16; SG-IN4= 4, 16
SG-PHROT=1
SG-SCREEN1=4.5; SG-SCREEN2=1.5.6; SG-SCREEN3=4.3.1; SG-SCREEN4=1.1
SG-SCREEN5=3.1; SG-SCREEN6=3.2; SG-SCREEN7=4.4; SG-SCREEN8=4.4.3
SG-SCREEN9=4.4.3.1; SG-SCREEN10=4.4.3.2;SG-SCREEN11=4.4.3.3;SG-SCREEN12=4.4.3.4
SG-SCREEN13=4.4.3.5;SG-SCREEN14=0; SG-SCREEN15=0; SG-SCREEN16=0
SG-SGCON= 5
SG-TARG=51A/51B/51C/51N/51Q/150TA/150TB/150TC/150TN/150TQ/50TA/50TB/50TC/50TN/50
TQ/62/162/BF,0
SG-TRIGGER=BFT+VO11,BFPU+VO12,0

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-5

SN Command
Purpose: Read/Set user programmable names.
Syntax: SN[-<var>[=<name>,<TRUE label>,<FALSE label>]

SN Command Example
Read the programmed labels for the alarm output (OUTA).
>SN-VOA
SN-VOA=VOA_LBL,TRUE,FALSE

S<g> Command
Purpose: Read all protection settings.
Syntax: S<g>

S <g> Command Example

Obtain a list of settings for setting group 2.
>S2
S2-50TP=0.00, 0m; S2-50TN=0.00, 0m; S2-50TQ=0.00, 0m
S2-150TP=0.00, 0m; S2-150TN=0.00, 0m; S2-150TQ=0.00, 0m
S2-51P=0.00,0.0,V2; S2-51N=0.00,0.0,V2; S2-51Q=0.00,0.0,V2
S2-62= 0m, 0m
S2-162= 0m, 0m
S2-791= 0m; S2-792= 0m; S2-793= 0m; S2-794= 0m
S2-79R= 10s; S2-79F=1.0s; S2-79M= 60s
S2-79SCB=0
SP-79ZONE=0
SP-BF= 0m
SP-CURVE= 0.2663, 0.0339, 1.0000, 1.2969, 0.5000
SP-GROUP1= 0, 0, 0, 0,51P; SP-GROUP2= 0, 0, 0, 0,51P
SP-GROUP3= 0, 0, 0, 0,51P
Reading Logic Settings
The SL command is used to view the names of available logic schemes in memory. It also will return all of
the logic equations for a specific logic scheme.

SL Command
Purpose: Obtain setting logic information.
Syntax: SL[:<name>]
Comments: No password access is required to read settings.
Entering SL by itself returns all of the logic equations associated with the active logic scheme. Entering SL:
returns the names of all available logic schemes. Entering SL:<name> returns all logic equations and
settings for the named logic scheme.

SL Command Examples
1. Read the available logic schemes in memory.
USER, BASIC-OC, OC-W-79, OC-W-CTL, FDR-W-IL, BUS, BACKUP, NONE
2. Read all logic settings associated with the BACKUP logic scheme.
>SL-N:BACKUP
SL-50TP:1,0; SL-50TN:1,0; SL-50TQ:1,0
SL-150TP:1,0; SL-150TN:1,0; SL-150TQ:1,0
SL-51P:1,0; SL-51N:1,0; SL-51Q:1,0
SL-62:0,0,0
SL-162:0,0,0
SL-79:0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF:1,VO10,VO15
SL-GROUP:2,/IN2,0,0,0,0
SL-43:0
SL-143:0
SL-243:0
SL-343:2
SL-101:1

11-6 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

 SL-VOA:ALMMAJ
SL-VO1:101T+VO8+BFPU+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2:101C
SL-VO3:/IN2
SL-VO4:VO9*/VO15
SL-VO5:BFT
SL-VO6:0
SL-VO7:0
SL-VO8:51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9:50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10:VO11+150TPPU*IN3+150TNPU*IN3+150TQPU*IN3
SL-VO11:50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12:50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13:0
SL-VO14:0
SL-VO15:343+/IN4

ASCII Command Interface

The BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System has three independent communications ports for serial
communications. A computer terminal or PC running a terminal emulation program such as Windows®
Terminal can be connected to any of the three ports so that commands may be sent to the relay.
Communication with the relay uses a simple ASCII command language. When a command is entered
through a serial port, the relay responds with the appropriate action. The ASCII command language is
designed to be used in both human to machine interactions and in batch download type operations.
Operation of the ASCII commands is described in detail in Section 11, ASCII Command Interface.
The ASCII communication byte framing parameters are fixed at 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.
Additional ASCII command interface using the SG-COM command. These parameters are also settable
from the HMI from screen 6.1.x. There are several additional settings described in Table 9-4 to further
customize the ASCII communications. The additional parameters for Page Length, Reply Acknowledge, and
Software Handshaking are only settable from the ASCII command interface using the SG-COM command.

Table 11-1. Communication Settings

Parameter Description Range Default

300, 600, 1200, 2400,

baud baud rate 9600
4800, 9600, or 19K

address for polled A0 (disabled)

A A0
operation A1 to A65534

P0 (no page mode)

P page length P0
P1 to P40

reply acknowledgement R0 (disabled)

R R1
level R1 (enabled)

X1
Xon/Xoff (hardware X0 (disabled)
X (COM0,1)
handshaking) setting X1 (enabled)
X0 (COM2)

SG-COM Command
Purpose: Read/Set serial communication protocol.
Syntax: SG-COM[#[=<baud>,A<addr>,P<pglen>,R<reply ack>,X<XON ena>]]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings.
# = port number. (0 = front, 1 = rear RS-232, 2 = rear RS-485)
Example3. Program the front communication port for 1200 baud.
>SG-COM0 = 1200
Example4. Read the communication settings for all ports.
>SG-COM
SG-COM0=1200,A0,P24,R1,X1

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-7

 SG-COM1=9600,A0,P24,R1,X1
SG-COM2=19K,A156,P0,R1,X0
If the ‘A’ parameter is set at a nonzero value, the relay will ignore all commands that are not preceded by
the proper address number. If an address of 0 is programmed, the relay will respond with an error message
for any command preceded by an address. With polling enabled, a command preceded by 0 is treated as
a global command. All networked relays will execute the command, but no relay will respond to the
command. This avoids communication bus conflicts. The front panel communication port (COM0) is not
configured for polling, so an attempt to program a nonzero address will result in an error message.

COMMAND SUMMARY
Miscellaneous Commands

ACCESS Command
Purpose: Read/Set access level in order to change settings.
Syntax: ACCESS[=<password>]
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Miscellaneous Command Descriptions

EXIT Command
Purpose: Exit programming mode.
Syntax: EXIT Note: Relay will prompt for verification.
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Miscellaneous Command Descriptions

HELP Command
Purpose: Obtain help with command operation.
Syntax: HELP <cmd> or H <cmd> gives help with a command; H1 gives command list
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Miscellaneous Command Descriptions

Metering Commands

M Command
Purpose: Read all metered values.
Syntax: M
Reference: Section 11, Metering, Metering Command Descriptions

M-I Command
Purpose: Read metered current in primary unit.
Syntax: M-I[<phase>]
Reference: Section 11, Metering, Metering Command Descriptions
Report Commands

Report Commands

RA Command
Purpose: Report/Reset alarm information.
Syntax: RA[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Function

RA-MAJ Command
Purpose: Report/Reset major alarm information.
Syntax: RA-MAJ[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Function

RA-MIN Command
Purpose: Report/Reset minor alarm information.
Syntax: RA-MIN[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Function

11-8 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

RA-REL Command
Purpose: Report/Reset relay alarm information.
Syntax: RA-REL[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Function

RB Command
Purpose: Read breaker status.
Syntax: RB
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker Monitoring

RB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker contact duty log.
Syntax: RB-DUTY[<phase>[=%duty>]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker Monitoring

RB-OPCNTR Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker operation counter.
Syntax: RB-OPCNTR[=<#operations>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker Monitoring

RD Command
Purpose: Report all demand data.
Syntax: RD
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Demand Functions

RD-PI Command
Purpose: Read/Reset peak demand current.
Syntax: RD-PI[<p>[=0]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Demand Functions

RD-TI Command
Purpose: Report today’s demand current.
Syntax: RD-TI[<p>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Demand Functions

RD-YI Command
Purpose: Report yesterday’s demand current.
Syntax: RD-YI[<p>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Demand Functions

RE Command
Purpose: Report all energy data.
Syntax: RE
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting

RF Command
Purpose: Read/Reset fault report data.
Syntax: RF[-n/NEW][=0/TRIG]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

RG Command
Purpose: Report general information.
Syntax: RG
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Clock

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-9

RG-DATE Command
Purpose: Read/Set date.
Syntax: RG-DATE[=<M/D/Y>] or RG-DATE[=<D-M-Y>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Clock

RG-STAT Command
Purpose: Report relay status.
Syntax: RG-STAT
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting

RG-TARG Command
Purpose: Report/Reset target status.
Syntax: RG-TARG[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

RG-TIME Command
Purpose: Report/Set time.
Syntax: RG-TIME[=hr:mn:sc] or RG-TIME[=hr:mn<f>sc]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Clock

RG-VER Command
Purpose: Read program version, model number, style number, and serial number.
Syntax: RG-VER
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Hardware and Software Version Reporting

RO Command
Purpose: Read oscillographic COMTRADE.DAT/.CFG fault report.
Syntax: RO-nA/B[#].CFG/DAT
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

RS Command
Purpose: Read/Reset sequence of events record data.
Syntax: RS[-n/Fn/ALM/IO/LGC/NEW][=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Sequence of Events Recorder

Setting Command

S Command
Purpose: Read all relay setting parameters.
Syntax: S
Comments: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

Alarm Setting Commands

SA Command
Purpose: Read all major and minor alarm settings.
Syntax: SA
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

SA-BKR Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker alarm settings.
Syntax: SA-BKR[n][=<mode>,<alarm limit>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Breaker Monitoring

11-10 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

SA-DI Command
Purpose: Read/Set demand alarm settings.
Syntax: SA-DI[p][=<alarm level>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Demand Functions

SA-LGC Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA-LGC[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . [<alarm num n>]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Alarms Function

SA-MAJ Command
Purpose: Read/Set major alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA-MAJ[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . [<alarm num n>]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Alarms Function

SA-MIN Command
Purpose: Read/Set minor alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA-MIN[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . [<alarm num n>]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Alarms Function

SA-RESET Command
Purpose: Read/Set programmable alarms reset logic.
Syntax: SA-RESET[=<rst alm logic>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Alarms Function

Breaker Monitoring and Setting Commands

SB Command
Purpose: Read all breaker settings.
Syntax: SB
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Breaker Monitoring

SB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker contact duty.
Syntax: SB-DUTY[=<mode>,<DMAX>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Breaker Monitoring

SB-LOGIC Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker contact logic.
Syntax: SB-LOGIC[=<breaker close logic>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Breaker Monitoring

General Setting Commands

SG Command
Purpose: Read all general settings.
Syntax: SG
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

SG-CLK Command
Purpose: Read/Program format of time and date display.
Syntax: SG-CLK[=<date format(M/D)>,<time format(12/24)>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Clock

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-11

SG-COM Command
Purpose: Read/Set serial communication protocol.
Syntax: SG-COM[#[=<baud>,A<addr>,P<pglen>,R<reply ack>,X<XON ena>]]
Reference: Section 9, User Interface and Security, User Interface
Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Serial Port Settings and Connections

SG-CT Command
Purpose: Read/Set Phase/Neutral CT ratio.
Syntax: SG-CT[t][=<CTratio>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Current Inputs

SG-DI Command
Purpose: Read/Set P(IA/IB/IC/var/watt), N and Q demand interval.
Syntax: SG-DI[p][=<interval>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Demand Functions

SG-HOLD Command
Purpose: Read/Program output hold operation.
Syntax: SG-HOLD[n][=<1/0 hold ena>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Outputs

SG-ID Command
Purpose: Read/Set relay ID and station ID used in reports.
Syntax: SG-ID[=<relayID(up to 10 char)>,<StationID(up to 30 char)>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Relay Identifier Information

SG-IN Command
Purpose: Read/Set input recognition/debounce.
Syntax: SG-IN[#[=<r(ms)>,<db(ms)>]]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Contact Sensing Inputs

SG-PHROT Command
Purpose: Read/Set phase rotation setting.
Syntax: SG-PHROT[=<phase rotation>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Voltage Inputs

SG-SCREEN Command
Purpose: Read/Set default screen(s).
Syntax: SG-SCREEN[n][=<default screen number>]
Reference: Section 10, Human-Machine Interface, Front Panel Display

SG-SGCON Command
Purpose: Read/Set SGC output on time.
Syntax: SG-SGCON[=<time>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups

SG-TARG Command
Purpose: Report/Enable Target List and Reset Target Logic.
Syntax: SG-TARG[=<x/x/...x>,<rst TARG logic>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

SG-TRIGGER Command
Purpose: Read/Set trigger logic.
Syntax: SG-TRIGGER[n][=<TRIP trigger>,<PU trigger>,<LOGIC trigger>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

11-12 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

Programmable Logic Setting Commands
SL Command
Purpose: Obtain setting logic information.
Syntax: SL[:<name>]
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

SL-50T Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for x50 function modules.
Syntax: SL-x50T[<p>[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

SL-51 Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for 51 function modules.
Syntax: SL-x51[<p>[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

SL-62 Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for 62 function modules.
Syntax: SL-<f>62[=<mode>,<INI logic>,<BLK logic>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, General Purpose Logic Timers (62/162)

SL-79 Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for 79 function
Syntax: SL-79[=<mode,<RI logic>,<STATUS logic>,<WAIT logic>,<LOCKOUT logic>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Reclosing

SL-BF Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for breaker failure function modules.
Syntax: SL-BF[<p>][=<mode>,<INI logic>,<BLK logic>]]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Breaker Failure Protection

SL-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for setting group module.
Syntax: SL-GROUP[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups

SL-N Command
Purpose: Read, set, or copy the name of the custom logic.
Syntax: SL-N[=<name>]
Reference: Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Logic Schemes

SL-VO Command
Purpose: Read/Set output logic.
Syntax: SL-VO[#[=<Boolean equation>]]
Reference: Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Working With Programmable Logic

User Programmable Name Setting Command

SN Command
Purpose: Read/Set user programmable names.
Syntax: SN[-<var>[=<name>,<TRUE label>,<FALSE label>]
Reference: Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, User Input and Output Logic Variable Names

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-13

Protection Setting Commands

S<g> Command
Purpose: Read all protection settings.
Syntax: S<g>
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

S<g>-50T Command
Purpose: Read/Set 50TN pickup level and time delay.
Syntax: S<g>-<f>50T[<p>][=<pu(A)>,<td(m)>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

S<g>-51 Command
Purpose: Read/Set 51 pickup level, time delay, and curve.
Syntax: S<g>-51[<p>][=<pu(A)>,<td(m)>,<crv>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

S<g>-62 Command
Purpose: Read/Set 62 time delay.
Syntax: S<g>-<f>62[=<t1>,<t2>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, General Purpose Logic Timers (62/162)

S<g>-79 Command
Purpose: Read/Set 79 time delay.
Syntax: S<g>-79[#][=<td>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Reclosing

S<g>-79SCB Command
Purpose: Read/Set 79 Sequence Controlled Block Output.
Syntax: S<g>-79SCB[=<step list>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Reclosing

SP-BF Command
Purpose: Read/Set the breaker failure timer setting.
Syntax: SP-BF[=<time>[m/s/c]]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Breaker Failure Protection

SP-CURVE Command
Purpose: Read/Set the user programmable 51 curve parameters.
Syntax: SP-CURVE[=<A>,<B>,<C>,<N>,<R>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

SP-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/Program auxiliary setting group auto operation.
Syntax: SP-GROUP<g>=[<sw(min)>,<sw level%>,<reset(min)>,<ret level%>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups

SP-79ZONE Command
Purpose: Read/Set 79 zone sequence logic.
Syntax: SP-79ZONE[=<zone pickup logic>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Reclosing

11-14 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

Global Commands

GS-PW Command

Purpose: Read or change a password.

Syntax: GS-PW<t>[=<password>,<com ports(0/1/2)>]]
Reference: Section 9, Security, User Interface

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-15

SECTION 12  INSTALLATION
Table of Contents

SECTION 12  INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Front/Rear RS-232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
RS-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
IRIG Input and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Terminal Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
PREPARING THE RELAY FOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
DOVETAILING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

Figures
Figure 12-1. BE1-851 S1, Case, Overall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Figure 12-2. BE1-851 S1, Case, Cutout Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Figure 12-3. Adaptor Plate (FT32 Opening to S1 Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Figure 12-4. Adaptor Plate (S2 and FT21 Opening to S1 Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Figure 12-5. BE1-851 H1 Case Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-6. Single Relay Mounting Plate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Figure 12-7. Single Relay Mounting Dimensions for Panel Mounting Without an Escutcheon Plate . 12-7
Figure 12-8. Two-Relay Mounting Plate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Figure 12-9. Two-Relay Mounting Dimensions for Panel Mounting Without an Escutcheon Plate . . 12-9
Figure 12-10. BE1-851 F1 Case Overall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Figure 12-11. BE1-851 F1 Case Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Figure 12-12. BE1-851 Typical AC Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Figure 12-13. Typical DC Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Figure 12-14. F1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Figure 12-15. H1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Figure 12-16. S1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Figure 12-17. RFL 9060 Protective Relay Switch To BE1-851 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Figure 12-18. Personal Computer To BE1-851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Figure 12-19. Modem to BE1-851 (Null Modem Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Figure 12-20. RS-485 DB-37 To BE1-851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Figure 12-21. IRIG , RS-485, and RS-232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Figure 12-22. Dovetailing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

Tables
Table 12-1. RS-232 Pinouts (COM0 And COM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Table 12-2. RS-485 Pinouts (COM2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Table 12-3. IRIG Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

BE1-851 Installation i
SECTION 12  INSTALLATION

GENERAL
BE1-851 Overcurrent Relays are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damages. Upon receipt of the
relay, check the Model and Style Number against the requisition and packaging list for agreement. Inspect for
damage, and if there is evidence of such, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the Basler Electric
Regional Sales Office, your Sales Representative or Sales Representative at Basler Electric, Highland, Illinois.
If the relay is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture and dust free
environment.

MOUNTING
Because the relay is of solid-state design, it does not have to be mounted vertically. Any convenient mounting
angle may be chosen. BE1-851 Overcurrent Relays are available in three case styles. These styles are the F1,
H1, and S1 cases. Overall dimensions for the S1 case are shown in Figure 12-1. S1 case cutout dimensions
are shown in Figure 12-4. Overall dimensions and cutout dimensions for the H1 case are shown in Figures 12-5
through 12-7. Overall dimensions for the F1 case are shown in Figure 12-10. F1 case cutout dimensions are
shown in Figure 12-11.

CONNECTIONS
Relay connections are dependent on the application and logic scheme used. All inputs or outputs may not be
used in a given installation. Incorrect wiring may result in damage to the relay. Be sure to check the model and
style number against the options listed in the Style Number identification chart in Section 1 before connecting
and energizing a particular relay.
NOTE
Be sure the relay is hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG copper wire
attached to the ground terminal on the rear of the relay case. When the relay is configured
in a system with other protective devices, it is recommended to use a separate lead to the
ground bus from each relay.
Except as noted above, connections should be made with minimum wire size of 14 AWG. Be sure to use the
correct input power for the power supply specified. Figure 12-12 is a typical ac connection diagram. Figure
12-13 is a typical DC connection diagram. Figure 12-14 is a rear view of the F1 style case showing the
terminal connections.

SETTINGS
The settings for your application need to be entered and confirmed prior to placing the relay in service.
Register settings such as breaker duty can be entered to match the current state of your system.

BE1-851 Installation 12-1

 Basler
R

BE1-851

Overcurrent Relay

Relay Minor Major Com 0

Power Trouble Alarm Alarm Trip Serial Port

STYLE NUMBER:
H5N1S0

SENSING INPUT
RANGE:
5A PH, 5A N

POWER SUPPLY:
48/125V AC/DC

SERIAL NUMBER:
Edit Reset UHM9743-003D

D2559-01
03-08-00

Figure 12-1. BE1-851 S1, Case, Overall Dimensions

12-2 Installation BE1-851

 5.69
(144.5)
2.84
(72.1)

8.25
8.63 (209.6)
(219.1)

4.13
4.31
(104.8)
(109.5)

.25 (6.35) DIA.

4 PLACES 3.03
(77.0)
6.06
D1427-04
(154.0) 1-23-93

Figure 12-2. BE1-851 S1, Case, Cutout Dimension

BE1-851 Installation 12-3

 BE1-851
.245 (6.22) P.005 DIA., C'SINK
100D TO .386 (9.8)DIA. (4 PLC'S)
.250 (6.34) DIA. (4 PLC'S)
6.218 (157.9)

Figure 12-3. Adaptor Plate (FT32 Opening to S1 Case)

5.970 (151.61)
Westinghouse FT-32 Cutout

Installation
.407 (10.33)
.158 (4.01)
D2863-18
12/7/99

12.380 (314.99)
4.130 (104.88)

16.125 (409.5)
.375 (9.52)

12-4
 6.381 (162.04)
10.063 (255.55) .258 (6.55)

9.339 (237.16)

8.000 (103.10)

CUTOUT

2.438 (61.91)
.250 DIA. (4 PLC'S)
(6.34)

1.089 (27.65) .245 P.005 DIA., C'SINK

(6.22)
.375 (9.52)

D2863-17
01-06-00
.290 (7.36)

.539 (13.68)

6.102 (154.96)
6.350 (161.26)

Figure 12-4. Adaptor Plate (S2 and FT21 Opening to S1 Case)

BE1-851 Installation 12-5

 Figure 12-5. BE1-851 H1 Case Dimensions

12-6 Installation BE1-851

 1.875 (47.625)
4.905 (124.587) 1.5 (38.1)

CL
0.25 (6.35)
Typical 4
4.45 (113.03)
places

CL

D2875-19
03-14-00

Figure 12-6. Single Relay Mounting Plate Dimensions

.25 (6.35) diameter

8.75
(222)

3.00 1.75 3.5

(76.2) (44.5) (88.9)

D2848-12
03-27-99

9.81
(249)

Figure 12-7. Single Relay Mounting Dimensions for Panel Mounting Without an Escutcheon Plate

BE1-851 Installation 12-7

 3.973(101.20)
4.458(113.55)
0.485(12.35)

1.040(26.49)

3.418(87.06)
0.729(18.56)

3.729(99.98)
C

C
(88.9)
3.49
0.344(8.76)
0.993(25.29)
1.023(26.05)
34.20(1.343)

18.312
17.03
(432)

(464)

D2875-18
03-09-00

17.657(449.71)
C

17.977(457.92)
18.007(458.51)
3.00 18.656(475.06)
(76.15)
19.00(483.98)

Figure 12-8. Two-Relay Mounting Plate Dimensions

12-8 Installation BE1-851

 Figure 12-9. Two-Relay Mounting Dimensions for Panel Mounting Without an
Escutcheon Plate

BE1-851 Installation 12-9

 5.835

7.850
8.150

TOP VIEW
Basler

BE1-851

Overcurrent Relay
Com 0
Serial Port
Relay Minor Major
Power Trouble Alarm Alarm Trip
6.500
7.250
(TYP.)

Style Number
H5N1HO

Sensing Input
Range:
5A PH, 5A N

Power Supply:
48/125v
AC/DC
Edit Reset
Serial Number:
UHM9806-001

5.563
(TYP.)

6.376 D2585-05
3-11-97

FRONT VIEW

Figure 12-10. BE1-851 F1 Case Overall Dimensions

12-10 Installation BE1-851

 5.563
(141.30)

.250 DIA., .190-32 MOUNTING

2.781 (6.35) SCREWS. (4 PLC'S)
(70.64)

CL

5.875 6.500
CL
(149.23) (165.1)

2.938
3.250
(74.6)
(82.55)

.125 R. (4 PLC'S)
(3.18)
2.938
(74.63)

5.875 D2582-05
(149.23) 2-28-97

Figure 12-11. BE1-851 F1 Case Cutout Dimensions

D1 D2

D3 D4

D5 D6

D8 D7

BREAKER

A B C D2569-04
03-09-00
LINE

Figure 12-12. BE1-851 Typical AC Connection Diagram

BE1-851 Installation 12-11

12-12
CONTROL
POWER
GROUND
RECLOSE TEST MOD 52 TRIP 52 CLOSE BACKUP BLOCK BUS BREAKER
52b NEG SEQ
ENABLE ENABLE COIL COIL DISABLE INSTANTANEOUS FAILURE ALARM
ENABLE
TRIP
D9 2
A6 B1 + B3 + B5 + B7 + C1 C3 C5 C7 C9 C11

POWER IN IN IN IN CIRCUIT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

BE1-851
SUPPLY 1 2 3 4 MONITOR 1 2 3 4 5 A

Installation
A7 B2 - B4 - B6 - B8 - C2 C4 C6 C8 C10 C12
D10 2
CONTROL
POWER

NOTES:

1.) CONNECTIONS SHOWN ARE FOR USE WITH PRE-PROGRAMMED LOGIC

SCHEME FEEDER-1. ALL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ARE FULLY
PROGRAMMABLE USING BEST LOGIC.

Figure 12-13. Typical DC Connection Diagram

D2569-05
2 ADDITIONAL OUTPUT 1 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS D9 & D10
2-25-97
WITH TEST PLUG ARE AVAILABLE IN S1 CASE VERSION ONLY.

BE1-851
 COM 2 GND Basler Electric
IRIG RS-485 PWR Highland, Illinois USA
+ - A B C
(618) 654-2341

!
WARNING
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 COM 1
+ - + - + - + -

RS-232
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 ALARM

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12

D8 D6 D4 D2

I I
I I A B
C N

D7 D5 D3 D1

D2585-06
3-13-97
Figure 12-14. F1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections
D2583-02
4-10-97

COM 2 GND Basler Electric

IRIG RS-485 PWR Highland, Illinois USA
+ - A B C
(618) 654-2341

IA IB IC IN
D1 D3 D5 D7
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 COM 1
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 RS-232
+ - + - + - + -

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 ALARM D2 D4 D6 D8

IA IB IC IN

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12

Figure 12-15. H1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections

BE1-851 Installation 12-13

 Basler Electric
Highland, Illinois USA
(618) 654-2341

COM 2
IRIG RS-485 PWR GND
+ - A B C
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

!
WARNING

COM 1
+ IN1 - + IN2 - + IN3 - + IN4 - RS-232
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 ALARM

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12

I I I I
OUT 1 N C B A

D9 D7 D5 D3 D1

D10 D8 D6 D4 D2

D2583-03
4-10-97
Figure 12-16. S1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections

COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS

Front/Rear RS-232 Connections

Front and rear RS-232 connectors are DB-9 female DCE connectors. Connector pin numbers, functions, names,
and signal directions are shown in Table 12-1. Figures 12-9 through 12-11 provide RS-232 cable connection
diagrams. For more information on communication settings, see Section 11.

Table 12-1. RS-232 Pinouts (COM0 And COM1)

Pin Function Name Direction
1 Shield ---- N/A
2 Transmit Data (TXD) From Relay
3 Receive Data (RXD) Into Relay
4 N/C ---- N/A
5 Signal Ground (GND) N/A
6 N/C ---- N/A
7 N/C ---- N/A
8 N/C ---- N/A
9 N/C ---- N/A

12-14 Installation BE1-851

 TO BE1-851
MALE DB-9
DCE
RFL 9660 REAR PORT
MATING CONNECTOR 1 N.C.
3 2 TXD
2 3 RXD
5 4 N.C.
5 SGND
6 N.C.
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
D2610-03
03-10-00 9 N.C.

Figure 12-17. RFL 9060 Protective Relay Switch To BE1-851 Cable

9-PIN PC-AT TO BE1-851
MALE DB-9 FEMALE DB-9
DTE DCE
1 1 N.C.
RXD 2 2 TXD
TXD 3 3 RXD
4 4 N.C.
SGND 5 5 SGND
6 N.C.
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
9 N.C.

D2557-08
02-19-97

25-PIN PC-XT TO BE1-851

MALE DB-25 FEMALE DB-9
DTE DCE

1 N.C.

RXD 3 2 TXD
TXD 2 3 RXD
N.C. 4 N.C.
SGND 7 5 SGND
6 N.C.
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
9 N.C.

Figure 12-18. Personal Computer To BE1-851(Straight Cable)

TO 25 PIN MODEM TO BE1-851

FEMALE DB-25, DCE FEMALE DB-9 DCE
GND 1 1 N.C.
TXD 2 2 TXD
RXD 3 3 RXD
+5V 6 4 N.C.
SGND 7 5 SGND
DTR 20 6 +10V *
CTS 5 7 CTS *
RTS 4 8 RTS *
9 N.C.

D2863-20
50 FEET MAX. 11-03-99

Figure 12-19. Modem to BE1-851 (Null Modem Cable)

BE1-851 Installation 12-15

RS-485 Connections
The RS-485 connector is a three position terminal block connector designed to interface to a standard
communication cable. A twisted-pair cable is recommended. Connector pin numbers, functions, names, and
signal directions are shown in Table 12-2. A cable connection diagram is provided in Figure 12-20.

Table 12-2. RS-485 Pinouts (COM2)

Terminal Function Name Direction

A Send/Receive A (SDA/RDA) In/Out

B Send/Receive B (SDB/RDB) In/Out

C Signal Ground (GND) N/A

TO RS422/RS485 TO BE1-851
DB-37 FEMALE 3 POSITION TB
4
6
22 Rt A A3
BE1-851
24 B A4 COM 2
19
C A5
A5

A A3
BE1-851
B A4 COM 2
C A5
4000
M 'A X
.

Rt A A3
BE1-851
B A4 COM 2
C A5

D2557-11
R t = OPTIONAL TERMINATING
02-20-97 RESISTOR (120 OHMS TYP.)

Figure 12-20. RS-485 DB-37 To BE1-851

IRIG Input and Connections

The IRIG input is fully isolated and supports IRIG Standard 200-98, Format B002. The demodulated (dc level-
shifted) input signal must be 3.5 volts or higher to be recognized as a high logic level. The maximum acceptable
input voltage range is ±20 volts. Input burden is nonlinear and rated at approximately 4 kilo-ohms at 3.5 Vdc
and approximately 3 kilo-ohms at 20 Vdc.
IRIG connections are located on a terminal block shared with the RS-485 and input power terminals. Terminal
designations and functions are shown in Table 3-3.
Table 12-3. IRIG Pinouts
Terminal Function

A1 + Signal

A2 - Reference

12-16 Installation BE1-851

Terminal Assignments
Figure 12-21 illustrates the location of the IRIG and RS-485 terminals and the pin assignments for an RS-232
connector. Pin assignments are identical for both RS-232 connectors.

Figure 12-21. IRIG , RS-485, and RS-232 Connections

PREPARING THE RELAY FOR SERVICE

Configuring
Prior to putting the relay into service it must be programmed to configure and set the relay for the application.
This involves entering a series of ASCII text based commands as described throughout this manual. These
commands are entered into the relay after establishing communication with the relay via a terminal emulation
program as previously described.

Setting
The task of programming the relay includes providing specific settings such as fault detector settings and timer
settings.

Testing
It is normal procedure that a relay be tested prior to putting the relay into service. A suggested testing routine
is provided in Section 13, Testing and Maintenance.

DOVETAILING PROCEDURE
Basler H1 cases can be interlocked by means of a tenon and mortise on the left and right sides of each case.
The following paragraphs describe the procedure of dovetailing two cases. Figure 12-22 illustrates the process.
Step 1. Remove the drawout assembly from each case the case. If you have difficulty removing this
by rotating the two captive, front panel screws screw, use the alternate method described in
counterclockwise and then sliding the assembly out of the Step 4a. Otherwise proceed to Step 5.
case. Observe electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions
Step 4a. Use a Torx® T15 driver to remove
when handling the drawout assemblies.
the two screws attaching Terminal Strip A to
Step 2. Remove the mounting bracket from the side of the rear panel. Remove the terminal strip
each case where the two cases will mate. Each bracket is and set it aside. Remove the remaining
held in place by four Phillips screws. Phillips screw from the rear panel and set the
rear panel aside.
Step 3. The rear panel must be removed from one of the
cases in order for the two cases to be joined. On that Step 5. Arrange the two cases so that the
panel, remove the Phillips screw from each corner of the rear dovetailed edge of the case without a
rear panel except for the screw at the upper lefthand rear panel is aligned with the front dovetailed
corner (when looking at the rear of the case). This screw edge of the case with the rear panel
is closest to Terminal Strip A. installed. Once the dovetails are aligned,
slide the cases together.
Step 4. Turn the screw nearest to Terminal Strip A
counterclockwise until the rear panel can be removed from Step 6. Position the rear panel on the case

BE1-851 Installation 12-17

from which it was removed. Make sure that the panel
orientation is correct. Perform Step 6a if Terminal Strip A
was not removed during the disassembly process.
Perform Step 6b if Terminal Strip A was removed during
disassembly.
Step 6a. Position the rear panel over the case and align
the screw closest to Terminal Strip A with its mating hole.
Tighten the screw while maintaining proper alignment
between the rear panel and case. Finish attaching the
panel to the case by installing the remaining three Phillips
screws. When installed, the rear panels prevent the two
cases from sliding apart.
Step 6b. Align the rear panel with the case and install the
four Phillips screws that hold the rear panel in place.
Position Terminal Strip A in its panel opening and replace
the two Torx® T15 screws. When installed, the rear panels
prevent the two cases from sliding apart.
Step 7. Mount the case assembly in the desired rack or
panel opening and reinstall the drawout assembly in each
case.

D2848-10
03-25-99

Figure 12-22. Dovetailing Procedure

12-18 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

SECTION 13  TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 13  TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
STYLE AND SERIAL NUMBER VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
IRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
CONTACT SENSING INPUTS AND OUTPUT CONTACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
PICKUP AND DROPOUT TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
50T Pickups And Dropouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
51 Pickups And Dropouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
TIMINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
50T Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
51 Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Figures
Figure 13-1. Terminals and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Tables
Table 13-1. Relay Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Table 13-2. Appropriate Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Table 13-3. Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Table 13-4. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Table 13-5. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Table 13-6. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Table 13-7. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Table 13-8. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Table 13-9. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Table 13-10. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Table 13-11. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-12. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-13. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-14. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-15. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Table 13-17. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Table 13-18. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Table 13-19. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Table 13-20. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Table 13-21. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Table 13-22. Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Table 13-23. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Table 13-24. Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Table 13-25. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Table 13-26. Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Table 13-27. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance i

SECTION 13  TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL
You may prefer to test your relay before installation. To function test BE1-851 relays, perform the
procedures provided in the following paragraphs. A relay terminals and connections diagram is provided
in Figure 13-1.

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
+ -
A B C
CHAS.
RS-485 PWR GND
IRIG
INPUT

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5 B1

C6 B2

C7 B3

C8 B4

C9 B5

C10 B6

C11 B7

C12 B8

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
D2518-03
04-25-97

Figure 13-1. Terminals and Connections

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-1

POWER-UP
Step 1. Apply voltage to power terminals A6 and A7. Table 13-1 shows the appropriate voltage for each
style of relay.
Table 13-1. Relay Voltages
Style Number Voltage Input

xxx1xx 48-125 Vac/dc

xxx2xx 125-250 Vac/dc

xxx3xx 24 Vdc

Step 2. Verify that the Power LED is illuminated, the display backlight is lit, and characters are displayed
on the display. Upon power-up of the relay, a brief self test is performed. During this five second test,
all of the front panel LEDs will flash, and the display will indicate each step of the test followed by a
screen showing the relay model number and software version.

COMMUNICATIONS
Either a VT-100 terminal or a computer with a serial port and suitable communications software may be used
to communicate with any of the BE1-851 relay's three communications ports. The relay default
communications settings are: a Baud Rate of 9600, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Parity-None, and Xon/Xoff Flow
Control.
Step 1. Connect the terminal cable to the rear RS-232 port on the relay.
Step 2. Transmit the command "ACCESS=851" to the relay. The relay should respond with "ACCESS
GRANTED: GLOBAL". Transmit "EXIT" after getting access.
Step 3. Connect the terminal cable to the front RS-232 port on the relay.
Step 4. Transmit the command "ACCESS=851" to the relay. The relay should respond with "ACCESS
GRANTED: GLOBAL". Transmit "EXIT" after getting access.
Step 5. Connect an RS232/RS485 converter box to the RS-232 port on the terminal. Connect the RS-485
output terminals of the converter box to the relay RS-485 terminals.
Step 6. Transmit the command "ACCESS=851" to the relay. The relay should respond with "ACCESS
GRANTED: GLOBAL". Transmit "EXIT" after getting access.

STYLE AND SERIAL NUMBER VERIFICATION

Over any communications port, transmit the command "RG-VER". The BE1-851 will respond with the Model
Number, Style Number, Program Version and Date, Boot Code Version and Date, as well as the relay Serial
Number. Verify that the part, style and serial numbers match the information on the relay front label.

IRIG
Step 1. Connect a suitable IRIG source to the relay IRIG terminals A1 and A2.
Step 2. Upon receiving the IRIG signal, the relay clock will be set with the current time, month and day. This
may be verified at screen 4.5 on the front panel display or by transmitting "RG-TIME" and "RG-DATE"
to any of the relay communications ports.

13-2 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

CONTACT SENSING INPUTS AND OUTPUT CONTACTS
Step 1. Apply voltage to the relay contact sensing inputs IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4. Table 13-2 shows the
appropriate voltage to apply.
Table 13-2. Appropriate Voltages
Style Number Input Voltage

xxx1xx 48 VDC

xxx2xx 125 VDC

xxx3xx 24 VDC
Step 2. Transmit the command "RG-STAT". Examine response line "INPUT(1-4) STATUS:" to verify that
all inputs were detected.
Step 3. Transmit the commands "ACCESS=851","CS-OUT=ENA", "CO-OUT=ENA", and "EXIT;Y" to enable
the output control override capability of the relay.
Step 4. Using Table 13-3 as a guide, transmit the commands listed and verify that the appropriate output
contacts change state. When each command is transmitted, the corresponding output will be pulsed
briefly. An ohm-meter or continuity tester may be used to monitor the output contacts status.
Table 13-3. Output Commands
Output Terminals Commands

OUT1 (N.O.) C1 & C2 CS-OUT1=P,CO-OUT1=P

OUT2 (N.O.) C3 & C4 CS-OUT2=P,CO-OUT2=P

OUT3 (N.O.) C5 & C6 CS-OUT3=P,CO-OUT3=P

OUT4 (N.O.) C7 & C8 CS-OUT4=P,CO-OUT4=P

OUT5 (N.O.) C9 & C10 CS-OUT5=P,CO-OUT5=P

ALARM (N.C.) C11 & C12 CS-OUTA=P,CO-OUTA=P

Step 5. Disable the control override ability if desired by transmitting the commands "ACCESS=851",
"CS-OUT=DIS", "CO-OUT=DIS", and "EXIT;Y" to the relay.

PICKUP AND DROPOUT TESTING

Transmit the frequency command, "SG-FREQ=50" or "SG-FREQ=60", depending on which frequency the
relay is to be tested at. Transmit the commands "ACCESS=851", "CS-GROUP=0", and "CO-GROUP=0"
to select settings group 0. Save the settings by transmitting the command "EXIT;Y".

50T Pickups And Dropouts

Step 1. Transmit the following scheme to the relay.
ACCESS=851
SL-N=NONE
YES
SL-N=PU50
SL-50T=1,0
SL-VO1=50TPT+50TNT
EXIT;Y

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-3

Step 2. Transmit the appropriate command from Table 13-4 to program the 50T pickup setting.
Table 13-4. Pickup Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=0.1A,0M S0-50TN=0.1A,0M

x3xxxx S0-50TP=0.5A,0M S0-50TN=0.1A,0M

x5xxxx S0-50TP=0.5A,0M S0-50TN=0.5A,0M

Step 3. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-5.

Table 13-5. Pickup Ranges

Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps

x3xxxx 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps

x5xxxx 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps

Step 4. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 90%
±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 5. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-6 to reprogram the pickup setting.

Table 13-6. Pickup Settings

Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=1.0A,0m S0-50TN=1.0A,0m

x3xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0m S0-50TN=1.0A,0m

x5xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0m S0-50TN=5.0A,0m

Step 6. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-7.

Table 13-7. Pickup Ranges

Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps

x3xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps

x5xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps

13-4 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

Step 7. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 90%
±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 8. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-8 to reprogram the pickup setting.
Table 13-8. Pickup Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0m S0-50TN=5.0A,0m

x3xxxx S0-50TP=25.0A,0m S0-50TN=5.0A,0m

x5xxxx S0-50TP=25.0A,0m S0-50TN=25.0A,0m

Step 9. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-9.
Table 13-9. Pickup Ranges
Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps

x3xxxx 24.5 Amps 25.5 Amps 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps

x5xxxx 24.5 Amps 25.5 Amps 24.5 Amps 25.5 Amps

Step 10. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at
90% ±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 11. Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the Phase B current input.
Step 12. Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the Phase C current input.
Step 13. Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the Neutral current input.

51 Pickups And Dropouts

Step 1. Transmit the following scheme to the relay.
ACCESS=851
SL-N=NONE
YES
SL-N=PU51
SL-51=1,0
SL-VO1=51PT+51NT
EXIT;Y
Step 2. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-10 to program the pickup setting.
Table 13-10. Pickup Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=0.1A,0M S0-51N=0.1A,0M

x3xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,0M S0-51N=0.1A,0M

x5xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,0M S0-51N=0.5A,0M

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-5

Step 3. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-11.
Table 13-11. Pickup Ranges
Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps

x3xxxx 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps

x5xxxx 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps

Step 4. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 95%
±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 5. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-12 to reprogram the pickup setting.

Table 13-12. Pickup Settings

Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=1.0A,0m S0-51N=1.0A,0m

x3xxxx S0-51P=5.0A,0m S0-51N=1.0A,0m

x5xxxx S0-51P=5.0A,0m S0-51N=5.0A,0m

Step 6. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-13.

Table 13-13. Pickup Ranges

Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps

x3xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps

x5xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps

Step 7. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 95%
±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 8. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-14 to reprogram the pickup setting.

Table 13-14. Pickup Settings

Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=3.2A,0m S0-51N=3.2A,0m

x3xxxx S0-51P=16.0A,0m S0-51N=3.2A,0m

13-6 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

 x5xxxx S0-51P=16.0A,0m S0-51N=16.0A,0m

Step 9. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-15.

Table 13-15. Pickup Ranges

Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 3.136 Amps 3.264 Amps 3.136 Amps 3.264 Amps

x3xxxx 15.68 Amps 16.32 Amps 3.136 Amps 3.264 Amps

x5xxxx 15.68 Amps 16.32 Amps 15.68 Amps 16.32 Amps

Step 10. When pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until dropout occurs. Dropout should occur
at 95% ±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 11. Repeat steps 2 through 10 for the Phase B input.
Step 12. Repeat steps 2 through 10 for the Phase C input.
Step 13. Repeat steps 2 through 10 for the Neutral input.

TIMINGS

50T Timings
Step 1. Transmit the following scheme to the relay.
ACCESS=851
SL-N=NONE
YES
SL-N=TIME50
SL-50T=1,0
SL-VO1=50TPT+50TNT
SG-DSP=F
EXIT; Y
Step 2. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-16 to program the pickup and timer settings.

Table 13-16. Pickup and Timer Settings

Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=1.0A,0.0m S0-50TN=1.0A,0.0m

x3xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0.0m S0-50TN=1.0A,0.0m

x5xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0.0m S0-50TN=5.0A,0.0m

Step 3. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-17.

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-7

 Table 13-17. Timing Ranges
Current/Frequency
Style Number Phase Neutral Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 1.05A/50 Hz 1.05A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.1 Sec

x1xxxx 1.05A/60 Hz 1.05A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.083 Sec.

x3xxxx 5.25A/50 Hz 1.05A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.1 Sec.

x3xxxx 5.25A/60 Hz 1.05A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.083 Sec.

x5xxxx 5.25A/50 Hz 5.25A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.1 Sec.

x5xxxx 5.25A/60 Hz 5.25A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.083 Sec.

Step 4. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A input and measure the time between the
application of current until OUT1 closes. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-18.
Table 13-18. Timing Ranges
Current/Frequency
Style Number Phase Neutral Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 1.5A/50 Hz 1.5A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.04 Sec.

x1xxxx 1.5A/60 Hz 1.5A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.033 Sec.

x3xxxx 7.5A/50 Hz 1.5A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.04 Sec

x3xxxx 7.5A/60 Hz 1.5A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.033 Sec.

x5xxxx 7.5A/50 Hz 7.5A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.04 Sec.

x5xxxx 7.5A/60 Hz 7.5A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.033 Sec.

Step 5. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-19.
Table 13-19. Timing Ranges
Current/Freque ncy
Style Number Phase Neutral Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 5.0A/50 Hz 5.0A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.025 Sec.

x1xxxx 5.0A/60 Hz 5.0A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.021 Sec.

x3xxxx 25.0A/50 Hz 5.0A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.025 Sec.

x3xxxx 25.0A/60 Hz 5.0A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.021 Sec.

x5xxxx 25.0A/50 Hz 25.0A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.025 Sec.

x5xxxx 25.0A/60 Hz 25.0A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.021 Sec

13-8 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

Step 6. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-20 to program the pickup setting.

Table 13-20. Pickup Settings

Comand
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=1.0A,5s S0-50TN=1.0A,5s

x3xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,5s S0-50TN=1.0A,5s

x5xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,5s S0-50TN=5.0A,5s

Step 7. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-21.
Table 13-21. Pickup Ranges
Current/Frequency
Style Number Phase Neutral Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 1.05A/50 Hz 1.05A/50 Hz 4.85 Sec. 5.35 Sec.

x1xxxx 1.05A/60 Hz 1.05A/60 Hz 4.833 Sec. 5.333 Sec.

x3xxxx 5.25A/50 Hz 1.05A/50 Hz 4.85 Sec. 5.35 Sec.

x3xxxx 5.25A/60 Hz 1.05A/60 Hz 4.833 Sec. 5.333 Sec.

x5xxxx 5.25A/50 Hz 5.25A/50 Hz 4.85 Sec. 5.35 Sec.

x5xxxx 5.25A/60 Hz 5.25A/60 Hz 4.833 Sec. 5.333 Sec.

Step 8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for the Phase B input.
Step 9. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for the Phase C input.
Step 10. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for the Neutral input.

51 Timings
Step 1. Transmit the following scheme to the relay.
ACCESS=851
SL-N=NONE
YES
SL-N=TIME51
SL-51=1,0
SL-VO1=51TP+51TN
EXIT;Y
Step 2. Transmit the appropriate command from Table 13-22 to program the pickup, time delay setting, and
curve type.
Table 13-22. Command Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=0.1A,0.5,I2 S0-51N=0.1A,0.5,I2

x3xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,0.5,I2 S0-51N=0.1A,0.5,I2

x5xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,0.5,I2 S0-51N=0.5A,0.5,I2

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-9

Step 3. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A current input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-23.
Table 13-23. Timing Ranges
Style Number Current Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.2 Amp 0.445 Sec 0.491 Sec

x1xxxx 1.0 Amp 0.151 Sec 0.166 Sec

x1xxxx 2.6 Amps 0.118 Sec 0.130 Sec

x1xxxx 4.0 Amps 0.109 Sec 0.119 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 1.0 Amp 0.445 Sec 0.491 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 5.0 Amps 0.151 Sec 0.166 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 13.0 Amps 0.118 Sec 0.130 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 20.0 Amps 0.109 Sec 0.119 Sec

Step 4. Transmit the appropriate command from Table 6-24 to reprogram the pickup, time delay setting, and
curve type.
Table 13-24. Command Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=0.1A,5.0,I2 S0-51N=0.1A,5.0,I2

x3xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,5.0,I2 S0-51N=0.1A,5.0,I2

x5xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,5.0,I2 S0-51N=0.5A,5.0,I2

Step 5. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A current input and meas ure the time between
the application of current and OUT1 closing.. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated
in Table 13-25.
Table 13-25. Timing Ranges
Style Number Current Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.2 Amp 4.205 Sec 4.647 Sec

x1xxxx 1.0 Amp 1.272 Sec 1.405 Sec

x1xxxx 2.6 Amps 0.935 Sec 1.033 Sec

x1xxxx 4.0 Amps 0.846 Sec 0.934 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 1.0 Amp 4.205 Sec 4.647 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 5.0 Amps 1.272 Sec 1.405 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 13.0 Amps 0.935 Sec 1.033 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 20.0 Amps 0.846 Sec 0.934 Sec

13-10 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

Step 6. Transmit the appropriate command from Table 13-26 to reprogram the pickup, time delay setting,
and curve type.
Table 13-26. Command Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51=0.1A,9.9,I2 S0-51=0.1A,9.9,I2

x3xxxx S0-51=0.5A,9.9,I2 S0-51=0.1A,9.9,I2

x5xxxx S0-51=0.5A,9.9,I2 S0-51=0.5A,9.9,I2

Step 7. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A current input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing.. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated
in Table 13-27.
Table 13-27. Timing Ranges
Style Number Current Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.2 Amp 8.300 Sec 9.172 Sec

x1xxxx 1.0 Amp 2.493 Sec 2.755 Sec

x1xxxx 2.6 Amps 1.824 Sec 2.016 Sec

x1xxxx 4.0 Amps 1.650 Sec 1.822 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 1.0 Amp 8.300 Sec 9.172 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 5.0 Amps 2.493 Sec 2.755 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 13.0 Amps 1.824 Sec 2.016 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 20.0 Amps 1.650 Sec 1.822 Sec

MAINTENANCE
BE1-851 Overcurrent Relays require no preventive maintenance. However, testing should be performed
according to scheduled practices. If the relay fails to function properly, consult the Customer Service
Department of the Power Systems Group, Basler Electric, for a return authorization number prior to shipping.

BE1-851 Installation 13-11

APPENDIX A • TIME-OVERCURRENT
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX A • TIME-OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
CURVE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
TIME-OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVE GRAPHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Using Table A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

List of Figures
Figure A-1. Time Characteristic Curve S, S1 Short Inverse,99-1369, (Similar to ABB CO-2) . . . . . . . A-5
Figure A-2. Time Characteristic Curve S2, Short Inverse,99-1595 (Similar to GE IAC-55) . . . . . . . . . A-6
Figure A-3. Time Characteristic Curve L, L1, Long Inverse,99-1370, (Similar to ABB CO-5) . . . . . . . A-7
Figure A-4. Time Characteristic Curve L2, Long Inverse,99-1594, (Similar to GE IAC-66) . . . . . . . . . A-8
Figure A-5. Time Characteristic Curve D, Definite Time,99-1371, (Similar to ABB CO-6) . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Figure A-6. Time Characteristic Curve M, Moderately Inverse,99-1372, (Similar to ABB CO-7) . . . . A-10
Figure A-7. Time Characteristic Curve I, I1 Inverse Time,99-1373 (Similar to ABB CO-8) . . . . . . . . A-11
Figure A-8. Time Characteristic Curve I2, Inverse Time,99-1597 (Similar to GE IAC-51) . . . . . . . . . A-12
Figure A-9. Time Characteristic Curve V, V1, Very Inverse,99-1374 (Similar to ABB CO-9) . . . . . . . A-13
Figure A-10. Time Characteristic Curve V2, Very Inverse,99-1596 (Similar to GE IAC-53) . . . . . . . . A-14
Figure A-11. Time Characteristic Curve E, E1, Extremely Inverse,99-1375 (Similar to GE IAC-11) . A-15
Figure A-12. Time Characteristic Curve E2, Extremely Inverse,99-1598 (Similar to GE IAC-77) . . . A-16
Figure A-13. Time Characteristic Curve A, Standard Inverse, 99-1621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Figure A-14. Time Characteristic Curve B, Very Inverse, 99-1376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Figure A-15. Time Characteristic Curve C, Extremely Inverse, 99-1377 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Figure A-16. Time Characteristic Curve G, Long Inverse, 99-1622 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20

List of Tables
Table A-1. 51P and 51N Time Characteristic Curve Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Table A-2. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Table A-3. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

BE1-851 Appendix i
APPENDIX 1 • TIME-OVERCURRENT
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

GENERAL
Basler Electric inverse time-overcurrent relays (ANSI Device 51) provide time/current characteristic curves
that closely emulate most of the common electromechanical, induction disk relays manufactured in North
America. To further improve relay coordination, selection of integrated reset or instantaneous reset
characteristics is also provided.

CURVE SPECIFICATIONS

Timing Accuracy (All 51 Functions) Within ±5% or ±1½ cycles (F/R response) or -1½ +3 cycles (A
response), whichever is greater for time dial settings of D greater
than 0.1 and multiples of 2 to 40 times the pickup setting but not
over 150 A for 5 A CT units or 30 A for 1 A CT units.
Sixteen inverse time functions and one fixed time function and
one programmable time function can be selected.
Characteristic curves for the inverse and definite time functions
are defined by the following equation.

A •D
TT =
N
+ B•D + K
M

R ·D
TR =
2
M -1

TT = Time to trip when M  1

TR = Time to reset if relay is set for integrating
reset when M < 1. Otherwise, reset is 50
milliseconds or less
D = TIME DIAL setting (0.0 to 9.9)
M = Multiple of PICKUP setting (0 to 40)
A, B, C, N, K = Constants for the particular curve
R = Constant defining the reset time.

Table 1-1 lists the time characteristic curve constants.

See Figures A-1 through A-16 for graphs of the
characteristics.

BE1-851 Appendix A-1

 Table 1-1. 51P and 51N Time Characteristic Curve Constants
N I
BE1-851 Trip Characteristic Constants
Reset
Curve BE Curve Name
Selection A B C N K R

S1 S, Short Inverse 0.2663 0.03393 1.000 1.2969 0.028 0.5000

S2 S2, Short Inverse 0.0286 0.02080 1.000 0.9844 0.028 0.0940

L1 L1, Long Inverse 5.6143 2.18592 1.000 1.000 0.028 15.750

L2 L2, Long Inverse 2.3955 0.00000 1.000 0.3125 0.028 7.8001

D D, Definite Time 0.4797 0.21359 1.000 1.5625 0.028 0.8750

M M, Moderately Inverse 0.3022 0.12840 1.000 0.5000 0.028 1.7500

I1 I, Inverse Time 8.9341 0.17966 1.000 2.0938 0.028 9.0000

I2 Inverse Time 0.2747 0.10426 1.000 0.4375 0.028 0.8868

V1 V, Very Inverse 5.4678 0.10814 1.000 2.0469 0.028 5.5000

V2 V2, Very Inverse 4.4309 0.09910 1.000 1.9531 0.028 5.8231

E1 Extremely Inverse 7.7624 0.02758 1.000 2.0938 0.028 7.7500

E2 E2, Extremely Inverse 4.9883 0.01290 1.000 2.0469 0.028 4.7742

A Standard Inverse 0.01414 0.00000 1.000 0.0200 0.028 2.0000

B B, Very Inverse (I2t) 1.4636 0.00000 1.000 1.0469 0.028 3.2500

C Extremely Inverse (I2t) 8.2506 0.00000 1.000 2.0469 0.028 8.0000

G Long Time Inverse (I2t) 12.1212 0.00000 1.000 1.0000 0.028 29.0000

F Fixed Time N 0.0000 1.00000 1.000 0.0000 0.028 1.0000

P Programmable 0 to 600 0 to 25 0 to 1 0.5 to 2.5 0.028 0 to 30

N Curve F has a fixed delay of one second times the Time Dial setting.
I For integrated reset, append R to the curve name. For example, curve S1 has instantaneous
reset. Curve S1R has integrated reset.

TIME-OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVE GRAPHS

Figures A-1 through A-16 illustrate the characteristic curves of the BE1-851 relay. Table A-2 cross-
references each curve to existing electromechanical relay characteristics. Equivalent time dial settings were
calculated at a value of five times pickup. A drawing number is provided in the caption of each graph.
Contact the Basler Electric Power Systems Group Customer Service Department at (618) 654-2341 and
request the drawing number to order a full-size (10 inches by 12 inches) Characteristic Curve graph on
transparent paper (vellum). A complete set of drawings is available by requesting Basler Publication
9 2520 00 990.

A-2 Appendix BE1-851

 Table 1-2. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference
BE1-
851
Curve Curve Name Drawing No. Similar To

S1 S, Short Inverse 99-1369 ABB CO-2

S2 S2, Short Inverse 99-1595 GE IAC-55

L1 L, L1, Long Inverse 99-1370 ABB CO-5

L2 L2, Long Inverse 99-1594 GE IAC-66

D D, Definite Time 99-1371 ABB CO-6

M M, Moderately Inverse 99-1372 ABB CO-7

I1 I, I1 Inverse Time 99-1373 ABB CO-8

I2 I2 Inverse Time 99-1597 GE IAC-51

V1 V, V1 Very Inverse 99-1374 ABB CO-9

V2 V2, Very Inverse 99-1596 GE IAC-53

E1 E, E1 Extremely Inverse 99-1375 ABB CO-11

E2 E2, Extremely Inverse 99-1598 GE IAC-77

A A Standard Inverse 99-1621 BS, IEC Standard Inverse

B B, Very Inverse (It) 99-1376 BS, IEC Very Inverse (I2t)

C Extremely Inverse (I2t) 99-1377 BS, IEC Extremely Inverse (I2t)

G Long Time Inverse 99-1622 BS, IEC Long Time Inverse

F Fixed Time N/A N/A

P Programmable N/A N/A

Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference

Although the time characteristic curve shapes have been optimized for each relay, time dial settings of
Basler Electric relays are not identical to the settings of electromechanical induction disk overcurrent relays.
Table A-3 helps you convert the time dial settings of induction disk relays to the equivalent setting for Basler
Electric relays. Enter time dial settings at HMI screens 5.X.4.1 (51P), 5.X.4.2 (51N), 5.X.4.3 (151N), and
5.X.4.4 (51Q). Enter time dial settings through the communication ports using the S<g>-51P/51N/151N/51Q
commands. For more information, refer to Volume 1, Section 4, Protection and Control Functions, 51
Overcurrent Functions.

Using Table A-3

Cross-reference table values were obtained by inspection of published electromechanical time current
characteristic curves. The time delay for a current of five times tap was entered into the time dial calculator
function for each time dial setting. The equivalent Basler Electric time dial setting was then entered into the
cross-reference table.
If your electromechanical relay time dial setting is between the values provided in the table, it will be
necessary to interpolate (estimate the correct intermediate value) between the electromechanical setting
and the Basler Electric setting.
Basler Electric relays have a maximum time dial setting of 9.9. The Basler Electric equivalent time dial

BE1-851 Appendix A-3

setting for the electromechanical maximum setting is provided in the cross reference table even if it exceeds
9.9. This allows interpolation as noted above.
Basler Electric time-current characteristics are determined by a linear mathematical equation. The induction
disk of an electromechanical relay has a certain degree of non linearity due to inertial and friction effects.
For this reason, even though every effort has been made to provide characteristic curves with minimum
deviation from the published electromechanical curves, slight deviations can exist between them.
In applications where the time coordination between curves is extremely close, we recommend that you
choose the optimal time dial setting by inspection of the coordination study. In applications where
coordination is tight, it is recommended that you retrofit your circuits with Basler Electric electronic relays
to ensure high timing accuracy.

Table 1-3. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference

Electromechanical Relay Time Dial Setting
0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0
Curve Name Equivalent to Drawing No. Basler Electric Equivalent Time Dial Setting
S, S1 ABB CO-2 99-1369 0.3 0.8 1.7 2.4 3.4 4.2 5.0 5.8 6.7 7.7 8.6 9.7
L, L1 ABB CO-5 99-1370 0.4 0.8 1.5 2.3 3.3 4.2 5.0 6.0 7.0 7.8 8.8 9.9
D ABB CO-6 99-1371 0.5 1.1 2.0 2.9 3.7 4.5 5.0 5.9 7.2 8.0 8.9 10.1
M ABB CO-7 99-1372 0.4 0.8 1.7 2.5 3.3 4.3 5.3 6.1 7.0 8.0 9.0 9.8
I, I1 ABB CO-8 99-1373 0.3 0.7 1.5 2.3 3.2 4.0 5.0 5.8 6.8 7.6 8.7 10.0
V, V1 ABB CO-9 99-1374 0.3 0.7 1.4 2.1 3.0 3.9 4.8 5.7 6.7 7.8 8.7 9.6
E, E1 ABB CO-11 99-1375 0.3 0.7 1.5 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.0 5.7 6.6 7.8 8.5 10.3
I2 GE IAC-51 99-1597 0.6 1.0 1.9 2.7 3.7 4.8 5.7 6.8 8.0 9.3 10.6
V2 GE IAC-53 99-1596 0.4 0.8 1.6 2.4 3.4 4.3 5.1 6.3 7.2 8.4 9.6
S2 GE IAC-55 99-1595 0.2 1.0 2.0 3.1 4.0 4.9 6.1 7.2 8.1 8.9 9.8
L2 GE IAC-66 99-1594 0.4 0.9 1.8 2.7 3.9 4.9 6.3 7.2 8.5 9.7 10.9
E2 GE IAC-77 99-1598 0.5 1.0 1.9 2.7 3.5 4.3 5.2 6.2 7.4 8.2 9.9

A-4 Appendix BE1-851

 Figure A-1. Time Characteristic Curve S, S1 Short Inverse,
99-1369, (Similar to ABB CO-2)
BE1-851 Appendix A-5
 Figure A-2. Time Characteristic Curve S2, Short Inverse,
99-1595 (Similar to GE IAC-55)
A-6 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-3. Time Characteristic Curve L, L1, Long Inverse,
99-1370, (Similar to ABB CO-5)
BE1-851 Appendix A-7
 Figure A-4. Time Characteristic Curve L2, Long Inverse,
99-1594, (Similar to GE IAC-66)
A-8 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-5. Time Characteristic Curve D, Definite Time,
99-1371, (Similar to ABB CO-6)
BE1-851 Appendix A-9
 Figure A-6. Time Characteristic Curve M, Moderately Inverse,
99-1372, (Similar to ABB CO-7)
A-10 Appendix BE1-851
 FigureA-7. Time Characteristic Curve I, I1 Inverse Time,
99-1373 (Similar to ABB CO-8)
BE1-851 Appendix A-11
 Figure A-8. Time Characteristic Curve I2, Inverse Time,
99-1597 (Similar to GE IAC-51)
A-12 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-9. Time Characteristic Curve V, V1, Very Inverse,
99-1374 (Similar to ABB CO-9)
BE1-851 Appendix A-13
 Figure A-10. Time Characteristic Curve V2, Very Inverse,
99-1596 (Similar to GE IAC-53)
A-14 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-11. Time Characteristic Curve E, E1, Extremely Inverse,
99-1375 (Similar to GE IAC-11)
BE1-851 Appendix A-15
 Figure A-12. Time Characteristic Curve E2, Extremely Inverse,
99-1598 (Similar to GE IAC-77)
A-16 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-13. Time Characteristic Curve A, Standard Inverse, 99-1621

BE1-851 Appendix A-17

 Figure A-14. Time Characteristic Curve B, Very Inverse, 99-1376

A-18 Appendix BE1-851

 Figure A-15. Time Characteristic Curve C, Extremely Inverse, 99-1377

BE1-851 Appendix A-19

 Figure A-16. Time Characteristic Curve G, Long Inverse, 99-1622

A-20 Appendix BE1-851

APPENDIX B • COMMAND CROSS-REFERENCE

INTRODUCTION
This appendix lists all ASCII commands, command syntax, brief command descriptions, and any
corresponding HMI screens. Commands are organized by function in the following groups and tables.
 Miscellaneous (Table B-1)  General Setting (Table B-7)
 Metering (Table B-2)  Breaker Monitoring and Setting (Table B-8)
 Control (Table B-3)  Programmable Logic Setting (Table B-9)
 Report (Table B-4)  User Programmable Name Setting (Table B-10)
 Setting (Table B-5)  Protection Setting (Table B-11)
 Alarm Setting (Table B-6)  Global (Table B-12)

An entry of x in the HMI Screen column represents 1 for Setting Group 0, 2 for Setting Group 1, 3 for Setting
Group 2, and 4 for Setting Group 3.

Table B-1. Miscellaneous Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
ACCESS[=<password>] Read/Set access level in order to change N/A
settings.
EXIT Exit programming mode. N/A
HELP <cmd> or H <cmd> Obtain help with command operation. N/A

Table B-2. Metering Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
M Read all metered values. N/A
M-I[<phase>] Read metered current in primary unit. 3.1, 3.2, 3.4,
3.5, 3.6

Table B-3. Control Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
CO-<control>[=<mode>] Control operation. N/A
CS-<control>[=<mode>] Control selection. N/A
CS/CO-GROUP[=<operation>} Group Overide Select and Operate 2.3.1
Controls
CS/CO-OUT[=<operation>] Output Overide Select and Operate 2.4.1
Controls
CS/CO-43/143/243/343[=<operation>] Virtual Switch Select and Operate 2.1.X
Controls
CS/CO-101[=<operation>] Breaker Control Select and Operate 2.2.1
Controls

BE1-851 Appendix B-1

 Table B-4. Report Commands
ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
RA[=0] Report/Reset alarm information. 1.3
RA-LGC[=0] Report/Reset logic alarm information. 1.3
RA-MAJ[=0] Report/Reset major alarm information. 1.3
RA-MIN[=0] Report/Reset minor alarm information. 1.3
RA-REL[=0] Report/Reset relay alarm information. 1.3
RB Read breaker status. 1.5.6
RB-DUTY[<phase>[=%duty>]] Read/Set breaker contact duty log. 4.3.2
RB-OPCNTR[=<#operations>] Read/Set breaker operation counter. 4.3.1
RD Report all demand data. N/A
RD-PI[<p>[=0]] Read/Reset peak demand current. 4.4.3.1-
4.4.3.5
RD-TI[<p>] Report today’s demand current. 4.4.1.1-
4.4.1.5
RD-YI[<p>] Report yesterday’s demand current. 4.4.2.1-
4.4.2.5
RF[-n/NEW][=0/TRIG] Read/Reset fault report data. 4.1
RG Report general information. N/A
RG-DATE[=<M/D/Y>] or RG-DATE[=<D-M-Y>] Read/Set date. 4.6
RG-STAT Report relay status. N/A
RG-TARG[=0] Report/Reset target status. 1.2
RG-TIME[=hr:mn:sc] or RG-TIME[=hr:mn<f>sc]] Report/Set time. 4.6
RG-VER Read program version, model number, 4.7
style number, and serial number.
RO-nA/B[#].CFG/DAT/HDR Read oscillographic fault report. N/A
RS[-n/Fn/ALM/IO/LGC/NEW][=0] Read oscillographic N/A
COMTRADE.DAT/.CFG fault report.

Table B-5. Setting Command

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
S Read all relay setting parameters. N/A

B-2 Appendix BE1-851

 Table B-6. Alarm Setting Commands
ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SA Read all major and minor alarm settings. N/A
SA-BKR[n][=<mode>,<alarm limit>] Read/Set breaker alarm settings. N/A
SA-DI[p][=<alarm level>] Read/Set demand alarm settings. N/A
SA-DVAR[=<alm lvl>,<alm lvl>] Read/Set var demand alarm setting. N/A
SA-DWATT[=<alm lvl>,<alm lvl>] Read/Set watt demand alarm setting. N/A
SA-LGC[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . Read/Set logic alarm setting mask. N/A
[<alarm num n>]]
SA-LGC[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . Read/Set logic alarm setting mask. N/A
[<alarm num n>]]
SA-MAJ[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . Read/Set major alarm setting mask. N/A
[<alarm num n>]]
SA-RESET[=<rst alm logic>] Read/Set programmable alarms reset N/A
logic.

Table B-7. General Setting Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SG Read all general settings. N/A
SG-CLK[=<date format(M/D)>,<timeformat(12/24)>] Read/Program time and date format . N/A
SG-COM[#[=<baud>,A<addr>,P<pglen>, Read/Set serial communication protocol. 6.1.1-6.1.3
R<reply ack>,X<XON ena>]]
SG-CT[t][=<CTratio>] Read/Set Phase/Neutral CT ratio. 6.3.1, 6.3.2
SG-DI[p][=<interval>] Read/Set P(IA/IB/IC/), N and Q demand N/A
interval.
SG-DSP[P/N] Read analog signal dsp filter type. N/A
SG-HOLD[n][=<1/0 hold ena>] Read/Program output hold operation. N/A
SG-ID[=<relayID>,<StationID>] Read/Set relay ID and station ID used in N/A
reports.
SG-IN[#[=<r(ms)>,<db(ms)>]] Read/Set input recognition/denounce. N/A
SG-PHROT[=<phase rotation>] Read/Set phase rotation setting. 6.3.7
SG-SCREEN[n][=<default screen number>] Read/Set default screen(s). N/A
SG-SGCON[=<time>] Read/Set SGC output on time. N/A
SG-TARG[=<x/x/...x>,<rst TARG logic>] Report/Enable Target List and Reset N/A
Target Logic.
SG-TRIGGER[n][=<TRIPtrigger>,<PUtrigger>, Read/Set trigger logic. N/A
<LOGIC trigger>]

BE1-851 Appendix B-3

 Table B-8. Breaker Monitoring and Setting Commands
ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SB Read all breaker settings. N/A
SB-DUTY[=<mode>,<DMAX>] Read/Set breaker contact duty. N/A
SB-LOGIC[=<breaker close logic>] Read/Set breaker contact logic. N/A

Table B-9. Programmable Logic Setting Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SL[:<name>] Obtain setting logic information. N/A
SL-x50T[<p>[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]] Read/Set logic for x50 function modules. N/A
SL-x51[<p>[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]] Read/Set logic for 51 function modules. N/A
SL-<f>62[=<mode>,<INI logic>,<BLK logic>] Read/Set logic for 62 function modules. N/A
SL-79[=<mode,<RI logic>,<STATUS logic>, Read/Set logic for 79 function N/A
<WAIT logic>,<LOCKOUT logic>]
SL-BF[<p>][=<mode>,<INI logic>,<BLK logic>]] Read/Set logic for breaker failure function N/A
modules.
SL-GROUP[=<mode>,<BLK logic>] Read/Set logic for setting group module. N/A
SL-N[=<name>] Read, set, or copy the name of the N/A
custom logic.
SL-VO[#[=<Boolean equation>]] Read/Set output logic. N/A

Table B-10. User Programmable Name Setting Command

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SN[-<var>[=<name>,<TRUE label>,<FALSE label>] Read/Set user programmable names. N/A

B-4 Appendix BE1-851

 Table B-11. Protection Setting Commands
ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
S<g> Read all protection settings. N/A
S<g>-50TP[=<pu>,<td>] Read/Set 50TP pickup level and time 5.x.3.x
delay.
S<g>-<f>50TN[=<pu>,<td>] Read/Set 50TN pickup level and time 5.x.3.x
delay.
S<g>-51P[=<pu>,<td>,<crv>] Read/Set 51 pickup level, time delay, and 5.x.4.x
curve.
S<g>-<f>51N[=<pu>,<td>,<crv>] Read/Set 51N pickup level, time delay, 5.x.4.x
and curve.
S<g>-<f>62[=<t1>,<t2>] Read/Set 62 time delay. 5.x.6.1
S<g>-79[#][=<td>] Read/Set 79 time delay. 5.x.7.1-
5.x.7.4
SP-BF[=<time>[m/s/c]] Read/Set the breaker failure timer setting 5.5.1.1
SP-CURVE[=<A>,<B>,<C>,<N>,<R>] Read/Set the user programmable 51 N/A
curve parameters.
SP-GROUP<g>=[<sw(min)>,<swlevel%>, Read/Program auxiliary setting group N/A
<reset(min)>,<ret level%><prot element>] auto operation.
SP-79ZONE[=<zone pickup logic>] Read/Set 79 zone sequence logic. N/A

Table B-12. Global Command

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
GS-PW<t>[=<password>,<com ports(0/1/2)>]] Read or change a password. N/A

BE1-851 Appendix B-5

APPENDIX C • RELAY SETTINGS RECORD

INTRODUCTION
This appendix provides a complete listing of all BE1-851 settings. This listing is in the form of a settings
record that you may use to record information relative to your protection system. These settings sheets
may be removed and photo copied. This listing is grouped in the following order with a reminder at the
end to exit with the save settings procedure.

 Global Security Settings

 BESTlogic Settings For User Programmable Logic Scheme
 Active Protection And Control Logic
 Protection Setting Groups
 General Protection Settings
 Alarm Settings
 Breaker Monitoring Settings
 Global Settings

BE1-851 Appendix C-1

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

GLOBAL SECURITY SETTINGS

Global PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWG = ,
Control PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWC = ,
Reports PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWR = ,
Settings PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWS = ,

BESTLOGIC SETTINGS FOR USER PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC SCHEME

The SL-N command is used to set the name of the logic scheme or to copy the pre-programmed logic scheme.
Copy Logic W/ Yes = Name
SL-N =
Function Blk Logic Settings
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Mode, 0,1, , Blk Input Expression
SL-50TP = ,
SL-50TN = ,
SL-150TP = ,
SL-150TN = ,
SL-250TN = ,
SL-350TN = ,
Time Overcurrent = Mode, 0,1,G * , Blk Input Expression
SL-51P = ,
SL-51N = ,
SL-151N = ,
General Purpose Logic Timer = Mode, 0,1,2,3,5,6 , Ini Input Expression , Blk Input Expr
SL-62 = , ,
SL-162 = , ,
Recloser = Mode, 0,1,2 , RI Input Expression , 52Stat Input Expr
SL-79 = , ,

Recloser-2nd Line = Delimiters , Wait Input Expression , DTL/Blk Input Expr

SL-79 = ,, , ,
Breaker Failure = Mode, 0,1 , BFI Input Expression , Blk Input Expr
SL-BF = , ,
Setting Group Selection = Mode, 0,1,2 , D0 Input Expression , D1 Input Expr
SL-GROUP = , ,
Setting Group Sel-2nd Line = Delimiters , D2 Input Expression , D3 Input Expr
SL-GROUP = ,, , ,
Setting Group Sel-3rd Line = Delimiters , Auto Input Expression
SL-GROUP = ,,,, ,

C-2 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Virtual Switches = Mode, 0,1,2,3

SL-43 =
SL-143 =
SL-243 =
SL-343 =
Virtual Bkr Control Switch = Mode, 0,1
SL-101 =
Virtual Output Logic Settings
VO w/ HW Outputs = Output Expression--AND *, OR +, NOT /
SL-VOA =
SL-VO1 =
SL-VO2 =
SL-VO3 =
SL-VO4 =
SL-VO5 =
Additional VO = Output Expression--AND *, OR +, NOT /
SL-VO6 =
SL-VO7 =
SL-VO8 =
SL-VO9 =
SL-VO10 =
SL-VO11 =
SL-VO12 =
SL-VO13 =
SL-VO14 =
SL-VO15 =

USER PROGRAMMABLE LABEL SETTINGS

Contact Sensing 10 Character 7 Character 7 Character
Input Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-IN1 = , ,
SN-IN2 = , ,
SN-IN3 = , ,
SN-IN4 = , ,
Virtual Switch Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-43 = , ,
SN-143 = , ,
SN-243 = , ,
SN-343 = , ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-3

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Virtual Output Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label

SN-VOA = , ,
SN-VO1 = , ,
SN-VO2 = , ,
SN-VO3 = , ,
SN-VO4 = , ,
SN-VO5 = , ,
SN-VO6 = , ,
SN-VO7 = , ,
SN-VO8 = , ,
SN-VO9 = , ,
SN-VO10 = , ,
SN-VO11 = , ,
SN-VO12 = , ,
SN-VO13 = , ,
SN-VO14 = , ,
SN-VO15 = , ,

GLOBAL I/O SETTINGS

Power System Settings
Nominal Frequency = Hz
SG-FREQ =
System Rotation = Mode,ABC,CBA
SG-PHROT =
Digital Signal Processing = Algorithm, F, R, A
SG-DSPP =
SG-DSPN =
CT Ratio = Ratio, Turns
SG-CTP =
SG-CTN
Input Conditioning = Recognition, mSec , Debounce, mSec
SG-IN1 = ,
SG-IN2 = ,
SG-IN3 = ,
SG-IN4 = ,

C-4 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Output Hold Attribute = Hold, 0,1

SG-HOLDA =
SG-HOLD1 =
SG-HOLD2 =
SG-HOLD3 =
SG-HOLD4 =
SG-HOLD5 =

PROTECTION SETTING GROUPS

GROUP 0
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M = mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-50TP = ,
S0-50TN = ,
S0-50TQ = ,
S0-150TP = ,
S0-150TN = ,
S0-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S0-51P = , ,
S0-51N = , ,
S0-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-62 = ,
S0-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-791 =
S0-792 =
S0-793 =
S0-794 =
S0-79R =
S0-79F =
S0-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S0-79SCB =
GROUP 1
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-50TP = ,
S1-50TN = ,
S1-50TQ = ,
S1-150TP = ,
S1-150TN = ,
S1-150TQ = ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-5

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve

S1-51P = , ,
S1-51N = , ,
S1-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time, M,C,S , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-62 = ,
S1-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-791 =
S1-792 =
S1-793 =
S1-794 =
S1-79R =
S1-79F =
S1-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S1-79SCB =
GROUP 2
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S2-50TP = ,
S2-50TN = ,
S2-50TQ = ,
S2-150TP = ,
S2-150TN = ,
S2-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S2-51P = , ,
S2-51N = , ,
S2-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S2-62 = ,
S2-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is if not specified)
S2-791 =
S2-792 =
S2-793 =
S2-794 =
S2-79R =
S2-79F =
S2-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S2-79SCB =

C-6 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

GROUP 3
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-50TP = ,
S3-50TN = ,
S3-50TQ = ,
S3-150TP = ,
S3-150TN = ,
S3-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S3-51P = , ,
S3-51N = , ,
S3-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-62 = ,
S3-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-791 =
S3-792 =
S3-793 =
S3-794 =
S3-79R =
S3-79F =
S3-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S3-79SCB =
GENERAL PROTECTION SETTINGS
Recloser Zone Sequence Logic = Logic Expression
SP-79ZONE =
Breaker Failure = Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
SP-BF =
Programmable Curve = A Coefficient , B Coefficient , C Coefficient , N Coefficient
SP-CURVE = , , ,
Programmable Curve-2nd Line = Delimiters , R Coefficient
SP-CURVE = ,,, ,
Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings
Grp 1 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP1 = , , ,
Grp 1 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP1 = ,,, ,
Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings
Grp 2 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP2 = , , ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-7

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Grp 2 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP2 = ,,, ,

Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings

Grp 3 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP3 = , , ,
Grp 3 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP3 = ,,, ,
Setting Group Changed Timer = Time, Sec
SG-SGCON =

REPORTING AND ALARM FUNCTION SETTINGS

DEMAND REPORTING SETTINGS
Demand Interval = Time, Min (DIP setting applies to Power Demands also)
SG-DIP =
SG-DIN =
SG-DIQ =

FAULT REPORTING SETTINGS

Targets = Protective Functions Separated by /'s
SG-TARG =
Targets-2nd Line = Delimiters , Target Reset via Programmable Logic Expr
SG-TARG = ,
Fault Record Triggers
Fault Record Trigger = Delimiters Trip Logic Expr
SG-TRIGGER =
Flt Record Trigger-2nd Line = Delimiters , PU Logic Expr
SG-TRIGGER = ,
Flt Record Trigger-3rd Line = Delimiters , Logic Trigger Expr
SG-TRIGGER = , ,

DISPLAY AND COMMUNICATION SETTINGS

Identifier Information = Relay ID, 10 Char--Used in COMTRADE file as "rec_dev_id" field
SG-ID =
,Station ID, 30 Char--Used in COMTRADE file as "station_name"
ID Information-2nd Line = field
SG-ID = ,
Clock Display Mode = Date, M or D , Time, 12 or 24 , Auto Daylight Savings Adjust, 0=OFF,1=ON
SG-CLK = , ,

C-8 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Auto Scroll List = HMI Screen #

SG-SCREEN1 =
SG-SCREEN2 =
SG-SCREEN3 =
SG-SCREEN4 =
SG-SCREEN5 =
SG-SCREEN6 =
SG-SCREEN7 =
SG-SCREEN8 =
SG-SCREEN9 =
SG-SCREEN10 =
SG-SCREEN11 =
SG-SCREEN12 =
SG-SCREEN13 =
SG-SCREEN14 =
SG-SCREEN15 =
SG-SCREEN16 =
Communications
Front RS232 Port = Baud , Address , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM0 = , A0 , ,
Front RS232 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake, X0,1
SG-COM0 = ,,, ,
Rear RS232 Port = Baud , Address, A0-65534 , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM1 = , , ,
Rear RS232 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake, X0,1
SG-COM1 = ,,, ,
Rear RS485 Port = Baud , Address, A0-65534 , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM2 = , , ,
Rear RS485 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake
SG-COM2 = ,,, , X0
The following settings are only for units with Modbus (Style # BE1-951 xx-xxx1).
Remote
RS485 Port Modbus Settings = EP Format, MF0,1 , Parity, MPN,O,E , Delay,MRmSec , Stop Bits, MS1,2
SG-COM2=,,,,, , , ,
BREAKER MONITORING SETTINGS
Breaker Duty = Mode, 1=I,2=I2 , 100% Duty, x.xxxE+xx,Amps
SB-DUTY = ,
Breaker Duty-2nd Line = Delimiters , Block Duty Accumulation via Programmable Logic Expression
SB-DUTY = , ,
Breaker Status
Breaker Status Logic = Logic Expression
SB-LOGIC =

BE1-851 Appendix C-9

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

ALARM SETTINGS
Breaker Alarms = Mode, 0,1,2,3 , Threshold
SA-BKR1 = ,
SA-BKR2 = ,
SA-BKR3 = ,
Current Demand Alarms = Threshold, Sec A
SA-DIP =
SA-DIN =
SA-DIQ =
Alarm Priority = Mask of Alarm Points, Separated by /'s See Alarm Point List
SA-LGC =
SA-MAJ =
SA-MIN =
Alarm Reset Logic = Alarm Reset via Programmable Logic Expression
SA-RESET =
EXIT WITH SAVE SETTINGS--YES
E
Y

C-10 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

GLOBAL SECURITY SETTINGS

Global PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWG = ,
Control PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWC = ,
Reports PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWR = ,
Settings PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWS = ,

BESTLOGIC SETTINGS FOR USER PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC SCHEME

The SL-N command is used to set the name of the logic scheme or to copy the pre-programmed logic scheme.
Copy Logic W/ Yes = Name
SL-N =
Function Blk Logic Settings
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Mode, 0,1, , Blk Input Expression
SL-50TP = ,
SL-50TN = ,
SL-50TQ = ,
SL-150TP = ,
SL-150TN = ,
SL-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Mode, 0,1,G * , Blk Input Expression
SL-51P = ,
SL-51N = ,
SL-51Q = ,
General Purpose Logic Timer = Mode, 0,1,2,3,5,6 , Ini Input Expression , Blk Input Expr
SL-62 = , ,
SL-162 = , ,
Recloser = Mode, 0,1,2 , RI Input Expression , 52Stat Input Expr
SL-79 = , ,

Recloser-2nd Line = Delimiters , Wait Input Expression , DTL/Blk Input Expr

SL-79 = ,, , ,
Breaker Failure = Mode, 0,1 , BFI Input Expression , Blk Input Expr
SL-BF = , ,
Setting Group Selection = Mode, 0,1,2 , D0 Input Expression , D1 Input Expr
SL-GROUP = , ,
Setting Group Sel-2nd Line = Delimiters , D2 Input Expression , D3 Input Expr
SL-GROUP = ,, , ,
Setting Group Sel-3rd Line = Delimiters , Auto Input Expression
SL-GROUP = ,,,, ,
Virtual Switches = Mode, 0,1,2,3
SL-43 =

BE1-851 Appendix C-11

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

SL-143 =
SL-243 =
SL-343 =
Virtual Bkr Control Switch = Mode, 0,1
SL-101 =
Virtual Output Logic Settings
VO w/ HW Outputs = Output Expression--AND *, OR +, NOT /
SL-VOA =
SL-VO1 =
SL-VO2 =
SL-VO3 =
SL-VO4 =
SL-VO5 =
Additional VO = Output Expression--AND *, OR +, NOT /
SL-VO6 =
SL-VO7 =
SL-VO8 =
SL-VO9 =
SL-VO10 =
SL-VO11 =
SL-VO12 =
SL-VO13 =
SL-VO14 =
SL-VO15 =

USER PROGRAMMABLE LABEL SETTINGS

Contact Sensing 10 Character 7 Character 7 Character
Input Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-IN1 = , ,
SN-IN2 = , ,
SN-IN3 = , ,
SN-IN4 = , ,
Virtual Switch Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-43 = , ,
SN-143 = , ,
SN-243 = , ,
SN-343 = , ,
Virtual Output Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-VOA = , ,
SN-VO1 = , ,
SN-VO2 = , ,
SN-VO3 = , ,

C-12 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

SN-VO4 = , ,
SN-VO5 = , ,
SN-VO6 = , ,
SN-VO7 = , ,
SN-VO8 = , ,
SN-VO9 = , ,
SN-VO10 = , ,
SN-VO11 = , ,
SN-VO12 = , ,
SN-VO13 = , ,
SN-VO14 = , ,
SN-VO15 = , ,

GLOBAL I/O SETTINGS

Power System Settings
Nominal Frequency = Hz
SG-FREQ =
Mode,1=ABC,2=CB
System Rotation = A
SG-PHROT =
Digital Signal Processing = Algorithm, F, R, A
SG-DSPP =
SG-DSPN =
CT Ratio = Ratio, Turns
SG-CTP =
SG-CTN
Input Conditioning = Recognition, mSec , Debounce, mSec
SG-IN1 = ,
SG-IN2 = ,
SG-IN3 = ,
SG-IN4 = ,
Output Hold Attribute = Hold, 0,1
SG-HOLDA =
SG-HOLD1 =
SG-HOLD2 =
SG-HOLD3 =
SG-HOLD4 =
SG-HOLD5 =

PROTECTION SETTING GROUPS

GROUP 0
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M = mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-50TP = ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-13

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

S0-50TN = ,
S0-50TQ = ,
S0-150TP = ,
S0-150TN = ,
S0-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S0-51P = , ,
S0-51N = , ,
S0-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-62 = ,
S0-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-791 =
S0-792 =
S0-793 =
S0-794 =
S0-79R =
S0-79F =
S0-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S0-79SCB =
GROUP 1
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-50TP = ,
S1-50TN = ,
S1-50TQ = ,
S1-150TP = ,
S1-150TN = ,
S1-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S1-51P = , ,
S1-51N = , ,
S1-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time, M,C,S , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-62 = ,
S1-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-791 =
S1-792 =
S1-793 =
S1-794 =

C-14 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

S1-79R =
S1-79F =
S1-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S1-79SCB =
GROUP 2
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S2-50TP = ,
S2-50TN = ,
S2-50TQ = ,
S2-150TP = ,
S2-150TN = ,
S2-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S2-51P = , ,
S2-51N = , ,
S2-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S2-62 = ,
S2-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is if not specified)
S2-791 =
S2-792 =
S2-793 =
S2-794 =
S2-79R =
S2-79F =
S2-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S2-79SCB =
GROUP 3
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-50TP = ,
S3-50TN = ,
S3-50TQ = ,
S3-150TP = ,
S3-150TN = ,
S3-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S3-51P = , ,
S3-51N = , ,
S3-51Q = , ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-15

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)

S3-62 = ,
S3-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-791 =
S3-792 =
S3-793 =
S3-794 =
S3-79R =
S3-79F =
S3-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S3-79SCB =
GENERAL PROTECTION SETTINGS
Recloser Zone Sequence Logic = Logic Expression
SP-79ZONE =
Breaker Failure = Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
SP-BF =
Programmable Curve = A Coefficient , B Coefficient , C Coefficient , N Coefficient
SP-CURVE = , , ,
Programmable Curve-2nd Line = Delimiters , R Coefficient
SP-CURVE = ,,, ,
Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings
Grp 1 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP1 = , , ,
Grp 1 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP1 = ,,, ,
Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings
Grp 2 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP2 = , , ,
Grp 2 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP2 = ,,, ,

Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings

Grp 3 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP3 = , , ,
Grp 3 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP3 = ,,, ,
Setting Group Changed Timer = Time, Sec
SG-SGCON =

REPORTING AND ALARM FUNCTION SETTINGS

DEMAND REPORTING SETTINGS

C-16 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

Demand Interval = Time, Min (DIP setting applies to Power Demands also)
SG-DIP =
SG-DIN =
SG-DIQ =

FAULT REPORTING SETTINGS

Targets = Protective Functions Separated by /'s
SG-TARG =
Targets-2nd Line = Delimiters , Target Reset via Programmable Logic Expr
SG-TARG = ,
Fault Record Triggers
Fault Record Trigger = Delimiters Trip Logic Expr
SG-TRIGGER =
Flt Record Trigger-2nd Line = Delimiters , PU Logic Expr
SG-TRIGGER = ,
Flt Record Trigger-3rd Line = Delimiters , Logic Trigger Expr
SG-TRIGGER = , ,

DISPLAY AND COMMUNICATION SETTINGS

Identifier Information = Relay ID, 10 Char--Used in COMTRADE file as "rec_dev_id" field
SG-ID =
,Station ID, 30 Char--Used in COMTRADE file as "station_name"
ID Information-2nd Line = field
SG-ID = ,
Clock Display Mode = Date, M or D , Time, 12 or 24 , Auto Daylight Savings Adjust, 0=OFF,1=ON
SG-CLK = , ,
Auto Scroll List = HMI Screen #
SG-SCREEN1 =
SG-SCREEN2 =
SG-SCREEN3 =
SG-SCREEN4 =
SG-SCREEN5 =
SG-SCREEN6 =
SG-SCREEN7 =
SG-SCREEN8 =
SG-SCREEN9 =
SG-SCREEN10 =
SG-SCREEN11 =
SG-SCREEN12 =
SG-SCREEN13 =
SG-SCREEN14 =
SG-SCREEN15 =
SG-SCREEN16 =

BE1-851 Appendix C-17

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

Communications
Front RS232 Port = Baud , Address , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM0 = , A0 , ,
Front RS232 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake, X0,1
SG-COM0 = ,,, ,
Rear RS232 Port = Baud , Address, A0-65534 , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM1 = , , ,
Rear RS232 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake, X0,1
SG-COM1 = ,,, ,
Rear RS485 Port = Baud , Address, A0-65534 , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM2 = , , ,
Rear RS485 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake
SG-COM2 = ,,, , X0
The following settings are only for units with Modbus (Style # BE1-951 xx-xxx1).
Remote
RS485 Port Modbus Settings = EP Format, MF0,1 , Parity, MPN,O,E , Delay,MRmSec , Stop Bits, MS1,2
SG-COM2=,,,,, , , ,
BREAKER MONITORING SETTINGS
Breaker Duty = Mode, 1=I,2=I2 , 100% Duty, x.xxxE+xx,Amps
SB-DUTY = ,
Breaker Duty-2nd Line = Delimiters , Block Duty Accumulation via Programmable Logic Expression
SB-DUTY = , ,
Breaker Status
Breaker Status Logic = Logic Expression
SB-LOGIC =
ALARM SETTINGS
Breaker Alarms = Mode, 0,1,2,3 , Threshold
SA-BKR1 = ,
SA-BKR2 = ,
SA-BKR3 = ,
Current Demand Alarms = Threshold, Sec A
SA-DIP =
SA-DIN =
SA-DIQ =
Alarm Priority = Mask of Alarm Points, Separated by /'s See Alarm Point List
SA-LGC =
SA-MAJ =
SA-MIN =
Alarm Reset Logic = Alarm Reset via Programmable Logic Expression
SA-RESET =
EXIT WITH SAVE SETTINGS--YES
E
Y

C-18 Appendix BE1-851

APPENDIX D • TERMINAL COMMUNICATION
This appendix provides instructions for configuring Windows 95® HyperTerminal and Windows® Terminal
to communicate with your BE1-851 relay.

WINDOWS 95® HYPERTERMINAL

Step 1. Click Start: Highlight Programs, Accessories, HyperTerminal.
Step 2. Click HyperTerminal to open the folder.
Step 3. Select the file or icon labeled Hypertrm or Hypertrm.exe. Once the program has started, you will be
presented with a series of dialog boxes.
Step 4. Dialog Box: CONNECTION DESCRIPTION
See Figure D-1.
a. Type the desired file name, for example,
BE1-851
b. Click “OK”
Step 5. Dialog Box: PHONE NUMBER
a. Click drop-down menu: CONNECT USING
Select Direct To ComX, where X is the port you
are using on your computer.
b. Click “OK”

Step 6. Dialog Box: COMX Properties Figure D-1. Connection Description Dialog Box

a. Make the following selections using Figure D-2

as a guide.
Set the bits per second setting so that it
matches the setting of the relay. The default
baud rate of the relay is 9600.
Set the data bits at 8.
Set the stop bits at 1.
Set flow control to Xon/Xoff.
b. Click “OK”. This creates an icon with the file
name entered in Step 4 and places it in the
HyperTerminal folder. Future communication
sessions can then be started by clicking the
appropriate icon.
Step 7. Click File/Properties on the menu bar. Click the
Settings tab.
a. Make the following selections:
Check the Terminal Keys radio button.
Figure D-2. COM Properties Dialog Box
Select VT-100 emulation.
Set the Backscroll Buffer to the maximum setting of 500.

BE1-851 Appendix D-1

 b. Click the ASCII Setup button. Make the
following selections using Figure D-3 as a
guide.
ASCII Sending
Place a check at Send line ends...
Place a check at Echo typed...
Select a line delay setting of 100 to 200
milliseconds.
Select the Character delay at 0.
ASCII Receiving
Disable Append line feeds... by leaving
unchecked.
Disable Force incoming... by leaving
unchecked.
Place a check at Wrap lines... Figure D-3. ASCII Setup Dialog Box
c. Click “OK”.
d. Click “OK”.
Step 8. Click File and click Save.

NOTE
Settings changes do not become active until the settings are saved.

Step 9. HyperTerminal is now ready to communicate with the relay. Table D-1 describes the required
connection for each RS-232 port.
Table D-1. RS-232 Communication Ports
Connection Type

Front Port 9-pin female DCE

PC to Front RS-232 port cable Straight

Rear Port 9-pin female DCE

Modem to Rear RS-232 port cable Null modem

PC to Rear RS-232 port cable Straight

WINDOWS® TERMINAL
Step 1. In Program Manager, open the Accessories program group and double click the Terminal icon to
start the program.
Step 2. On the menu bar, select Settings/Terminal Emulation.
a. In the dialog box, click DEC VT-100 (ANSI).
b. Click “OK”.

D-2 Appendix BE1-951

Step 3. Select Settings/Terminal Preferences.
a. Using Figure D-4 as a guide, make the
following selections in the dialog box:
Check the Line Wrap and Local Echo
boxes to enable these functions.
Disable the CR->CR/LF Inbound function.
Enable the CR->CR/LF Outbound function.
b. Set the Buffer Lines at 244.
c. Click “OK”.
Step 4. Select Settings/Text Transfers
a. Make the following selections using Figure
D-5 as a guide.
Figure D-4. Terminal Preferences Dialog Box
Set Flow Control at Line at a Time.
Enable Delay Between Lines and set the
delay at 1 or 2/10 Sec.
Disable Word Wrap...
b. Click “OK”.
Step 5. Select Settings/Communications
a. Make the following selections:
Under Connector, select the appropriate
communication port for your computer.
Adjust the Baud Rate setting so that it matches
the setting of the relay. The default baud rate
of the BE1-851 is 9600. Figure D-5. Text Transfers Dialog Box

Set the Data Bits at 8.

Disable Parity Check.
Set the Stop Bits at 1.
Set Flow Control to Xon/Xoff.
b. Click “OK”.
Step 6. Click File/Save. Enter a desired file name such as
BE1-851.trm. For future communication sessions,
click File and open this file. Terminal will
automatically be setup properly to communicate
with the BE1-851 relay.
Step 7. Terminal is now ready to communicate with the
relay. Table D-1 describes the required
connection for each RS-232 port. Figure D-6. Communications Dialog Box

BE1-851 Appendix D-3

 INDEX
RB-OPCNTR Command . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
A SB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
SB-LOGIC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Logic Programmable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
RB-OPCNTR Command . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Major, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
SB-LOGIC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Minor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Programming Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
RA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 C
Trouble Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3; 13-1
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 IRIG Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
SA-MAJ/MIN/LGC Command . . . . . . 6-27 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
SA-RESET Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 RG-DATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Breaker Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 RG-TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
SA-BKR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Application Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 SG-CLK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Command Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Negative Sequence Protection . . . . . 8-60 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
Reclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60 Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
Setting Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61 Metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
Trip Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
ARSTKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
SG-COM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
ASCII COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 RS-232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Command Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 RS-232 Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 RS-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 RS-485 Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Text File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 contact sensing inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2; 3-4
ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Current Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . 3-1
RS-232 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Digital Signal Processing. . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
RS-485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Current Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Negative Sequence Current. . . . . . . . . 3-2
Neutral Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
B Nominal Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Batch Command Text File Operations. . . . 2-5
SG-CT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
BESTCOMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
SG-DSP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
SG-FREQ Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
BESTlogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
SG-PHROT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Application Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Failure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 D
Duty Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
RB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Retrieving Breaker Duty Information . 6-14 Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
SB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Overload and Unbalance Alarms . . . . . 6-9
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 RD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

BE1-851 Index i
 RD-PI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Surge Withstand Capability . . . . . . . . 1-13
RD-TI/YI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 U.L. Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Reporting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
SA-DI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 General Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . 6-3; , 1-3
SG-DI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Conditioning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 H
SG-IN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Hardware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Dovetailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
RG-VER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
E Display Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Entering Test Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Control Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Entering Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
F Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Screen Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fault Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Fault Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
SG-SCREEN Command . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
SG-TRIGGER Command . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Fault Report Information . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
RF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 I
Identifier Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
G SG-ID Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection . . . . 4-9
General Purpose Logic Timers
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2; 4-20
Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
S<g>-50T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Integrating Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
SL-x50T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
IRIG Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
One-Shot Nonretriggerable Timer
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
IRIG Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
One-Shot Retriggerable Timer . . . . . . 4-21
Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Pickup/Dropout Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 L
S<g>-62/162 Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Logic Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
SL-x62 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
AC Current Inputs with 1 A CT . . . . . . 1-12 FEEDER_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
AC Current Inputs With 5 A CT . . . . . ,1-11 FEEDER_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Analog To Digital Converter . . . . . . . . 1-12 FEEDER_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
C.S.A. Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 FEEDER_4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Control Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . 1-13 Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 SL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7, 7-8
Output Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 SL-N Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) . . 1-13 Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

ii INDEX BE1-851
 SL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
P
Power System Measurement Functions . . . 1-1
M Programmable Time Current . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 SP-CURVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Metering Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Programmable Hold Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 SG-HOLD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
M Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Programmable Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Miscellaneous Command Descriptions . . . 11-3
Access Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
EXIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 R
HELP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
PRIVILEGE C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . 4-16, 4-17
PRIVILEGE R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Breaker Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
SA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Drive to Lockout/Block Recloser . . . . 4-16
SB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
SG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Reclose Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
SN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Reclose Initiate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Reclose Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
S<g>-79 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
SP-79ZONE Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
O Relay Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Operational Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Setting Group Characteristics . . . . . . . 1-11 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
BESTlogic Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Breaker Fail Timer (BF) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Values And Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Contact Inputs Recognition Time . . . . . . 1-7
General Purpose Timers (62, 162) . . . 1-11 S
Instantaneous Overcurrent Functions . . 1-9
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
IRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
GS-PW Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Metered Current Values And Accuracy . 1-7
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Reclosing Timers (79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Sequence Of Events Recorder . . . . 6-23; 1-4
Time Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . 1-8
Retrieving SER Information . . . . . . . . 6-23
Time-Current Characteristic Curves . . . 1-8
RS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Oscillographic Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Retrieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Settings Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2; 4-1
RO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
CS/CO-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Output Logic Override Control . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Logic Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
CS/CO-OUT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Retrieving Setting Group Status . . . . . 4-9
Enabling Logic Override Control . . . . . 3-7
Setting BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Pulsing an Output Contact . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
SG-SGCON Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Retrieving Output Logic Override Status 3-8
SL-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Output Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
SP-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Output Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
SL-VO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 T
Relay Trouble Alarm Disable . . . . . . . . 3-6 Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Retrieving Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Retrieving Target Information . . . . . . 6-19
Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 RG-TARG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
SG-TARG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Testing
Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

BE1-851 Index iii

 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Dropout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Relay Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
RG-VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Trip Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Trip Circuit Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Time Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
SL-x51 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Operating Setting’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
S<g>-x51 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

V
Variable Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4,7-10
SN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Version Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . 4-26
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
CS/CO-101Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
SL-101 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Virtual Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Virtual Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24, 4-25
CS/CO-x43 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
SL-x43 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

iv INDEX BE1-851
 ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE 618-654-2341 FAX 618-654-2351
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SYSTEM
BE1-851

Publication: 9 2899 00 990

Revision: F 3/2000
 INTRODUCTION
This instruction manual provides information about the operation and installation of the BE1-851
Overcurrent Protection System. A summary of the information provided is listed below.

 General information, specifications, and a Quick Start guide.

 Functional description and setting parameters for the inputs and outputs, protection and
control functions, metering functions, and reporting and alarm functions.
 BESTlogic programmable logic design and programming.
 Documentation of the preprogrammed logic schemes and application tips.
 Description of security and the user interface setup including ASCII communication and
the Human-Machine Interface (HMI).
 Installation procedures, dimension drawings, and connection diagrams.
 Description of the front panel HMI and ASCII command interface with write access
security procedures.
 A summary of setting, metering, reporting, control, and miscellaneous commands.
 Testing and maintenance procedures.
 Appendices containing characteristic curves, an ASCII command–HMI cross reference,
relay settings record forms, terminal emulation guidelines, and an index.

WARNING!
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, ONLY
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM THE PROCEDURES
PRESENTED IN THIS MANUAL.

BE1-851 Introduction i
 First Printing March 1997

Printed in USA

© 1997, 1999, 2000 Basler Electric Co., Highland, IL 62249

March 2000

CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

OF BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY, HIGHLAND, IL. IT IS LOANED FOR

CONFIDENTIAL USE, SUBJECT TO RETURN ON REQUEST, AND WITH THE
MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING THAT IT WILL NOT BE USED IN ANY MANNER
DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTEREST OF BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY.

It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this
manual provide data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The
availability and design of all features and options are subject to modification without notice.
Should further information be required, contact Basler Electric Company.

BASLER ELECTRIC
ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE 618-654-2341 FAX 618-654-2351

ii Introduction BE1-851
PHONE 618-654-2341 FAX 618-654-2351

PRODUCT REVISION
The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to the embedded
software (firmware) and hardware of this device. The corresponding revisions made to this
instruction manual are also summarized. This revision history is separated into three categories:
Software Changes, Hardware Changes, and Manual Revisions. All revisions are listed in
chronological order.

Software Version Change

2.15/05-30-97 Initial Release.

2.27/01-26-98 Improved 62 timer performance. C

hanged minimum breaker failure time from 100 ms to 50 ms
Added functionality to enable or disable targets for each protective
function.
Added functionality to allow HMI Alarm Reset pushbutton to be used
as a logic variable (RSTKEY).
Improved fault recording functions as follows:
• Phase, neutral, and negative sequence currents are recorded
one cycle after the TRIP trigger logic becomes TRUE.
• Added programmable alarm for Fault Record Time Out, and
changed the error readout to show N/A for this condition with
BREAKER OPERATE TIME and FAULT CLEARING TIME.
• Change the RF-TRIG to show RF=TRIG instead of SERIAL for
EVENT TYPE and FAULT TRIGGER.
• Second oscillographic record triggering point was changed from
when the TRIP trigger logic became TRUE, to when both PU
and LOGIC trigger logic became FALSE.
• Second oscillographic record was changed to record without a
gap between the first and second records during specific
conditions.

2.31/02-19-98 Increase the range of the programmable 51 curve, A coefficient, from

0 - 100 to 0 - 600.

2.36/09-23-98 Added Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 with limited read and
control functions.

2.37/11-16-98 Increased the range of breaker duty I or I2 accumulation from 2.17e7

to 4.2e7.

2.41.00/06-14-99 Added Modbus™ full write functionality; changed version format from
x.xx to x.xx.xx; added Transducer Network Lite Protocol (TNP Lite);
improved trip circuit monitor to allow use with ac trip voltage.

BE1-851 Introduction iii

 Software Version Change

Changes are Improved target reporting function:

applicable to • The trip LED only latches when there are targets to be displayed
versions: on the HMI. The “pickup” condition, indicated by the Trip LED
2.42.01/11-29-99 flashing, is now a higher priority than latching to indicate that
and targets are being displayed on the HMI.
3.42.01/11-29-99 • Improved HMI target screen format. Screen now reports targets
in a text format. Additional information such as fault current
magnitudes and time and date of the fault were moved to a
lower menu branch so that the targets are all that is displayed
unless the user wants more detail.
• Added functionality to reset targets using a programmable logic
expression in addition to the HMI reset key and the ASCII
command interface using the RG-TARG=0 command. Allows
targets to be reset by pulsing a contact sensing input.

Improved COMTRADE oscillography recording function:

• Added *.HDR (header) file to the COMTRADE mandatory files,
*.CFG and *.DAT. The new *.HDR file is a text file that contains
the fault summary report and the appropriate settings that were
active at the time of the event.
• Added all BESTlogic programmable logic bit status to
oscillography files as digital channels. Logic variables with user
programmable names are reported using the programmable
name instead of the generic name.

Improved Sequence of Events Recording function:

• Increased the number of events recorded from 127 to 255.
• Added additional reporting options. It is now possible to retrieve
SER data for: Alarm Events only, RS-ALM; Input/Output Events
only, RS-IO; and Logic Variable Events only, RS-LGC.

Improved BESTlogic functionality:

• Eliminated the setting required to specify which logic scheme is
active. Now the user’s logic settings are always active. This
setting used to be made from the ASCII command interface
using the SP-LOGIC command.
• Changed default logic settings from everything disabled to a
simple logic scheme with 50 and 51 protection enabled.

iv Introduction BE1-851
 Software Version Change

2.42.01/11-29-99 Added several new programmable Alarm functions.

and • Added Logic = None Alarm to alert the user if the relay has no
3.42.01/11-29-99 programmable logic settings.
- Continued • Added Changes Lost Alarm to alert the user if the user has been
editing settings and the access timer times out without an Exit;
Save Settings? Yes command being entered.
• Added functionality to reset alarms using a programmable logic
expression in addition to the HMI reset key and the ASCII
command interface using the RA=0 command. Allows alarms to
be reset by pulsing a contact sensing input.
• Added new alarm logic variable to BESTlogic. ALMLGC can be
used to link programmable alarm functions to your logic scheme
without activating an Alarm LED on the HMI.
• Removed the relay trouble alarm logic variable, ALMREL, from
programmable logic. Since programmable logic is disabled when
this condition is true, it was a superfluous variable. For rearward
compatibility, the relay will not give an alarm if this logic variable is
used in a logic expression.

Improved the virtual switches 43 and 101 functions:

• Added functionality to set four modes of operation for the 43
virtual selector switch.
• Added functionality to set two modes of operation for the 101
virtual selector switch.
• Change the preprogrammed logic schemes to include the new
virtual switch functionality.

Improved the 62 timer functions:

• Added mode 5, integrating timer and mode 6, latch.
• Added targeting to 62 timer functions.

Added functionality to allow the breaker monitoring duty accumulation

to be blocked by a logic expression.

Added automatic day light saving time adjustment to the real time
clock.

Added functionality to the automatic setting group selection function

to allow it to monitor protective functions in addition to the 51P
function. These functions are as follows:
• Setting groups can be changed based on unbalanced currents
by monitoring the 51N and 51Q functions.
• Settings groups can be changed during the reclosing sequence
by monitoring the 79 shot counter.

Changed the default settings for programmable variable names.

Defaults are now all set to generic variable names with state names
of TRUE and FALSE.

Reordered the output of the S command to match the order of

settings as listed in the Instruction Manual, Appendix C.

BE1-851 Introduction v
 Software Version Change

Changes are Added DNP 3.0, Level 2 compliance. Requires Version 3.xx
applicable only to hardware;
version:
3.42.01/11-29-99

Added support for Version 3 hardware with additional memory.

Oscillographic recording is as follows:

Feature Version 3.XX

Number of Oscillographic 16
Records

Length of Oscillographic 15 cycles each

Records

Sample Resolution * 24 samples per cycle

Changes Updated the GF-VER and RG-VER commands to report

applicable to Model Number : BE1-851G, for style type Gxxxxx. And
version: Model Number : BE1-851 for style type Hxxxxx.
3.43.00/02-23-00
Updated to support sensing type G (Florida Power Light)
which replaces 51Q with 151N, 50TQ with 250TN and
150TQ with 350TN. (This hex file version only works with
Style Type H)

Hardware Version Change

05-30-97 Initial Release.

10-26-98 Changed serialization to Hxxxxxxxx

vi Introduction BE1-851
Hardware Version Change

11-29-99 Label placed on the front panel stating a WARNING to BESTCOMS

USERS: When using BESTCOMS software you must upgrade to
VER 1.31.00 or higher prior to communicating with this unit. Failure
to do so will result in corruption of the settings database.

Contact sensing input circuits redesigned to turn on at specific

voltage ranges. These ranges are specified in the instruction
manual. Previous versions of the relay, contact sensing input circuits
may turn on at voltages outside of these specified ranges.

Manual Version Change

and ECO/ECA

D/16672 Manual was revised to reflect improvements in embedded software

versions 2.29, 2.30, 2.31, and 2.32. SG-TARG and RSTKEY
commands were added. Replaced the text after and includeing
Current Demand Reporting of Section 3 with new alarms and outputs
information. Changed BF timer range in section 1 from 100 -
999msec to 50 - 999msec. In table 1-3 the “A” parameter of curve “P”
was changed from 0 -100 to 0 - 600. Added new style chart, figure 1-
4, with S1 cover and DNP 3.0 options. Curve names in Tables 1-4
and 1-5 through 1-20 were changed to match the names in figures 1-
5 through 1-20. Added missing connection in logic diagram figure 5-
1. Addec UL and CSA logos to the style label shown on the front
cover graphics.

E/5135 Changed manual to a two volume set. Updated manual to reflect

extended oscillographic reporting. Added modes 5 and 6 to 62/162
timer functionality. Updated logic scheme tables and diagrams to
reflect new default settings. Changed all of the default settings in the
manual. Removed the SP logic serial command from the manual.
Added SA-LGC and RA-LGC commands to the manual. Changed
the sequence of events recorder maximum number of events to 255
from 127 in all references.

F/8304 Added paragraphs on Breaker Failure in section 4. Updated the

manual to reflect the sensing input type G units. Converted entire
manual to a single volume.

BE1-851 Introduction vii

 CONTENTS

VOLUME 1, APPLICATION
SECTION 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
SECTION 3 Input and Output Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SECTION 4 Protection and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SECTION 5 Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
SECTION 6 Reporting and Alarm Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
SECTION 7 BESTlogic Programmable Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
SECTION 8 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
SECTION 9 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
SECTION 10 Human-Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
SECTION 11 ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
SECTION 12 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
SECTION 13 Testing and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
APPENDIX A Time-Current Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
APPENDIX B Command Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
APPENDIX C Relay Setting Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
APPENDIX D Setting Terminal Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
I/O Functions (Section 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Power System Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Contact Sensing Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Contact Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Protection and Control Functions (Section 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Breaker Failure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
General Purpose Logic Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Setting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Virtual Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Metering Functions (Section 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Reporting and Alarm Functions (Section 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Relay Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
General Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Demand Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Breaker Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Trip Circuit Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fault Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Sequence Of Events Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Version Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
BESTlogic Programmable Logic (Section 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Write Access Security (Section 9) (Section 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Human Machine Interface (HMI) (Section 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Communication (Section 9) (Section 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
PRIMARY APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Sample Style Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Metered Current Values And Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Calculated Values And Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
IRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Contact Inputs Recognition Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Time Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Instantaneous Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Reclosing Timers (79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Breaker Fail Timer (BF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
General Purpose Timers (62, 162) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Automatic Setting Group Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
AC Current Inputs With 5 A CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
AC Current Inputs with 1 A CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Analog To Digital Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Output Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

BE1-851 General Information i

 Control Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Surge Withstand Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
U.L. Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
C.S.A. Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Figures
Figure 1-1. Style Number Identification Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Tables
Table 1-1. Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

ii General Information BE1-851

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION

General
The BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System is an economical, microprocessor based, multifunction system.
It is available in S1(Basler/GE style), H1(Half-rack), and F1(Westinghouse FT-11 Size) configurations. BE1-
851 features include:

 Time & Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection  Breaker Monitoring

 Control  Metering Functions
 Automatic Reclosing  Communication
 Breaker Failure Protection

BE1-851 relays have four programmable contact sensing inputs, five programmable outputs, and one alarm
output. Outputs can be assigned to perform protection, control, or indicator operations through logical
programming. For example, protection functions could be programmed to cause a protective trip. Control
functions could be programmed to cause a manual trip, manual close, or automatic reclose. Indicators could
be configured to annunciate relay failure, a settings group change, and others.
Protection scheme designers may select from a number of pre-programmed logic schemes that perform the
most common protection and control requirements. Alternately, a custom scheme can be created using
BESTlogic.

A simplified "How To Get Started" procedure for BE1-851 users is provided in Section 2, Quick Start.

FEATURES
The BE1-851 relay includes many features for the protection, monitoring, and control of power system
equipment. These features include protection and control functions, metering functions, and reporting and
alarm functions. A highly flexible programmable logic system called BESTlogic allows the user to apply the
available functions with complete flexibility and customize the system to meet the requirements of the
protected power system. Programmable I/O, extensive communication features, and an advanced HMI
(Human Machine Interface) provide easy access to the features provided.
The following information summarizes the capabilities of this multifunction device. Each feature along with
how to set it up and how to use its outputs is described in complete detail in the later sections of this manual.

I/O Functions (Section 3)

Input functions consist of Power System Measurement and Contact Sensing Inputs. Programmable Contact
Outputs make up the output functions. Input and Output functions are described in the following paragraphs.

Power System Measurement Functions

BE1-851 relays are designed for operation on both 50 and 60 hertz systems and have four current inputs
to measure phase and neutral currents. It is a numerical device that samples the analog current waveforms
and uses mathematical algorithms to measure the operating quantities. One of three current measurement
algorithms may be individually selected for phase and neutral. Those are:
• Fundamental
• Average
• Wideband RMS
The fundamental algorithm responds to the fundamental component of the current and rejects the harmonic
components. The average algorithm emulates an RC measurement circuit and has a relatively flat response
characteristic over a wide frequency range. The wideband RMS algorithm measures all components of the
current up to the seventh harmonic.

BE1-851 General Information 1-1

In addition, the relay measures the magnitude of the negative sequence component of the fundamental
phase current quantities. The negative sequence measurement has by definition a fundamental response
characteristic.
Each current sensing circuit is low burden and isolated. Negative sequence current magnitudes are derived
from the three-phase currents. Neutral current input is available for direct measurement of the current in a
transformer neutral, tertiary winding, or flux balancing current transformer.

Contact Sensing Inputs

Four programmable contact sensing inputs (IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4) with programmable signal conditioning
provide a binary logic interface to the protection and control system. Each input's function and labeling is
programmable using BESTlogic. A user-meaningful name can be assigned to each input and to each state
(open and closed) for use in reporting functions.

Contact Outputs
Five programmable general purpose contact outputs (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4, and OUT5) provide a
binary logic interface to the protection and control system. One programmable, fail-safe contact output
(OUTA) provides an alarm output. Each output's function and labeling is programmable using BESTlogic.
A user-meaningful name can be assigned to each output and to each state (open and closed) for use in
reporting functions. Output logic can be overridden to open, close, or pulse each output contact for testing
or control purposes. All output contacts are trip rated.

Protection and Control Functions (Section 4)

Protection functions consist of Overcurrent, Breaker Reclosing, and Breaker Failure protection and general
purpose logic timers. Setting Groups and Virtual Control Switches make up the control functions. The
following paragraphs describe each protection and control function.

Overcurrent Protection
Overcurrent protection is provided by six instantaneous overcurrent functions and three time-overcurrent
functions.
Each instantaneous overcurrent function has a settable time delay. Sensing input type G relays have two
phase and four neutral elements. Sensing input type H relays have two phase, two neutral, and two
negative sequence elements. Phase elements include 50TP and 150TP. Neutral elements include 50TN,
150TN, 250TN, and 350TN. Negative Sequence elements include 50TQ and 150TQ.
A 51P phase element, 51Q negative sequence element, and 51N and 151N neutral elements are provided
for time-overcurrent functions. Sensing input type G relays have one phase and two neutral elements. And
sensing input type H units have one phase, one neutral, and one negative sequence elemnt.
Time-overcurrent functions employ a dynamic integrating timing algorithm covering a range from pickup to
40 times pickup with selectable instantaneous or integrated reset characteristics. Time-overcurrent curves
conform to the IEEE C37.112 document and include seven curves similar to Westinghouse/ABB CO curves,
five curves similar to GE IAC curves, IEC types A, B, C, and G, a fixed time curve, and a user programmable
curve.

Breaker Failure Protection

One breaker failure protection block (BF) provides programmable breaker failure protection.

General Purpose Logic Timers

Two general purpose logic timers (62, 162) with six modes of operation are provided.

Setting Groups
1-2 General Information BE1-851
Four setting groups allow adaptive relaying to be implemented to optimize BE1-851 settings for various
operating conditions. Automatic and external logic can be employed to select the active setting group.

Virtual Control Switches

BE1-851 virtual control switches include one virtual breaker control switch and four virtual switches.
Trip and close control of a selected breaker can be controlled by the virtual breaker control switch (101).
The virtual breaker control switch is accessed locally from the optional human machine interface (HMI) or
remotely from the communication ports.
Additional control is provided by the four virtual switches: 43, 143, 243, and 343. These virtual switches are
accessed locally from the optional HMI or remotely from the communication ports. Virtual switches can be
used to trip and close additional switches or breakers, or enable and disable certain functions.

Metering Functions (Section 5)

Metering is provided for all measured currents, and all derived neutral and negative sequence currents. 1%
meter accuracy is provided down to 10% of nominal current.

Reporting and Alarm Functions (Section 6)

Several reporting and alarm functions provide fault reporting, demand, breaker and trip circuit monitoring,
as well as relay diagnostic and firmware information.

Relay Identification
Two free-form fields are provided for the user to enter information to identify the relay. These fields are used
by many of the reporting functions to identify the relay that the report is from. Examples of relay identification
field uses are station name, circuit number, relay system, purchase order, and others.

Clock
A standard IRIG input is provided for receiving time synchronization signals from a master clock. Automatic
daylight saving time compensation can be enabled. Time reporting is settable for 12 or 24 hour format. The
date can be formatted as mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy.

General Status Reporting

The BE1-851 provides extensive general status reporting for monitoring, commissioning, and
troubleshooting. Status reports are available from the HMI or communication ports.

Demand Reporting
Ampere demand registers monitor phase A, B, C, Neutral, and Negative Sequence values. The demand
interval and demand calculation method are independently settable for phase, neutral and negative
sequence measurements. Demand reporting records today's peak, yesterday's peak, and peak since reset
with time stamps for each register.

Breaker Monitoring
Breaker statistics are recorded for a single breaker. They include the number of operations, accumulated
interrupted I or I2 and breaker time to trip. Each of these conditions can be set to trigger an alarm.

Trip Circuit Monitoring

A trip circuit monitor function is provided to monitor the trip circuit of a breaker or lockout relay for loss of
voltage (fuse blown) or loss of continuity (trip coil open). The monitoring input is internally connected across
OUT1. Additional trip or close circuit monitors can be implemented in BESTlogic using additional inputs,

BE1-851 General Information 1-3

logic timers, and programmable logic alarms.

Fault Reporting
Fault reports consist of simple target information, fault summary reports, and detailed oscillography records
to enable the user to retrieve information about disturbances in as much detail as is desired. The relay
records and reports oscillography data in industry standard IEEE, COMTRADE format to allow using any
fault analysis software.

Sequence Of Events Recorder

A 255 event Sequence of Events Recorder (SER) is provided that records and time stamps all relay inputs
and outputs as well as all alarm conditions monitored by the relay. Time stamp resolution is to the nearest
quarter-cycle. I/O and Alarm reports can be extracted from the records as well as reports of events recorded
during the time span associated with a specific fault report.

Alarm Function
Extensive self diagnostics will trigger a fatal relay trouble alarm if any of the relay's core functions are
adversely affected. Fatal relay trouble alarms are not programmable and are dedicated to the Alarm output
(OUTA) and the front panel Relay Trouble LED. Additional relay trouble alarms and all other alarm functions
are programmable for major or minor priority. Programmed alarms are indicated by major and minor alarm
LEDs on the front panel. Major and minor alarm points can also be programmed to any output contact
including OUTA. Over 20 alarm conditions are available to be monitored including user definable logic
conditions using BESTlogic.
Active alarms can be read and reset from the HMI or from the communication ports. A historical sequence
of events report with time stamps lists when each alarm occurred and cleared. These reports are available
through the communication ports.

Version Report
The version of the embedded software (firmware) is available from the optional HMI or the communication
ports. The unit serial number and style number is also available through the communication port.

BESTlogic Programmable Logic (Section 7)

Each BE1-851 protection and control function is implemented in an independent function block. Every
function block is equivalent to its single function, discrete device counterpart so it is immediately familiar to
the protection engineer. Each independent function block has all of the inputs and outputs that the discrete
component counterpart might have. Programming with BESTlogic is equivalent to choosing the devices
required by your protection and control scheme and then drawing schematic diagrams to connect the inputs
and outputs to obtain the desired operating logic.
Several preprogrammed logic schemes and a set of custom logic settings are provided. A preprogrammed
scheme can be activated by merely selecting it. Custom logic settings allow you to tailor the relay
functionality to match the needs of your operation's practices and power system requirements.

Write Access Security (Section 9) (Section 12)

Security can be defined for three distinct functional access areas: Settings, Reports, and Control. Each
access area can be assigned its own password. A global password provides access to all three functional
areas. Each of the four passwords can be unique or multiple access areas can share the same password.
A second dimension of security is provided by allowing the user to restrict access for any of the access areas
to only specific communication ports. For example, you could set up security to deny access to control
commands from the rear RS-232 port that is connected through a modem to a telephone line.
Security settings only affect write access. Read access is always available in any area through any port.

1-4 General Information BE1-851

Human Machine Interface (HMI) (Section 10)
Each BE1-851 comes with a front panel display with five LED indicators for Power Supply Status, Relay
Trouble Alarm, Minor Alarm, Major Alarm, and Trip. The lighted, liquid crystal display (LCD) allows the relay
to replace local indication and control functions such as panel metering, alarm annunciation, and control
switches. The LCD has automatic priority logic to govern what is being displayed on the screen so that when
an operator approaches, the information of most interest is automatically displayed without having to
navigate the menu structure. The order of priorities are:
Recloser active
Æ Targets
Ç Alarms
È Programmable automatic scrolling list
Up to 16 screens can be defined in the programmable, automatic scroll list.

Communication (Section 9) (Section 11)

Three independent, isolated communication ports provide access to all functions in the relay. COM0 is a
nine pin female RS-232 port located on the front of the case. COM1 is a nine pin female RS-232 port
located on the back of the case. COM2 is a two wire RS-485 port located on the back of the case.
An ASCII command interface allows easy interaction with the relay using standard, of the shelf
communication software. The ASCII command interface is optimized to allow automating of the relay setting
process. Settings files can be captured from the relay and edited using any software that supports the *.txt
file format. These ASCII text files can then be used to set the relay using the send text file function of your
communication software.
ModbusTM and other common protocols are optionally available for the RS-485 communication port. A
separate instruction manual is available for each available protocol. Consult the product bulletin or the
factory for availability of these options and instruction manuals.

PRIMARY APPLICATIONS
The BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System provides complete circuit protection with multiple overcurrent
elements and is intended for use in any non-directional overcurrent application. Its unique capabilities make
it ideally suited for applications where:
• Low burden is required to extend the linear range of CTs.
• One relay provides the flexibility of wide settings ranges, multiple settings groups, and multiple
coordination curves.
• A multifunction, multi-phase relay is desired for economical and space saving benefits. A single
BE1-851 provides all of the protection, local and remote indication, metering, and control required
on a typical circuit.
• Communication capability and protocol support is desired.
• Applications that require specific current response characteristics.
- The fundamental digital signal processing (DSP) algorithm provides rejection of harmonics and
low transient overreach
- The RMS DSP algorithm provides true wide band RMS measurement.
- The average DSP algorithm provides a flat response characteristic over a wide frequency range.
• Bus protection is provided by a high speed overcurrent blocking scheme on the transformer bus
mains instead of a bus differential circuit.
• The capabilities of intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) are used to decrease relay and equipment
maintenance costs.

BE1-851 General Information 1-5

 • Applications where the optional case configurations facilitate retrofit in existing substations. One
electromechanical overcurrent or reclosing relay can be replaced by a BE1-851 relay. The
remaining relays can be removed or left in service as backup.
• Applications where the capabilities of a digital multifunction relay are required, yet test paddles
and/or drawout construction are also required.

MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION

General
The BE1-851 Relay electrical characteristics and operational features are defined by a combination of letters
and numbers that make up the style number. The model number, together with the style number, describe
the options included in a specific device, and appear in the clear window on the front panel and on a sticker
located inside the case. Upon receipt of a relay, be sure to check the style number against the requisition
and the packing list to ensure that they agree.

Sample Style Number

Style number identification chart (Figure 1-1) defines the electrical characteristics and operational features
included in BE1-851 Relays. For example, if the style number were H5-N1S0, the device would have the
following:

(H) - 3 Phase and Neutral

(5) - 5A phase and Neutral CTs
(N) - Future use
(1) - 48/125V power supply
(S) - S1 type case
(0) - ASCII protocol communication via RS-485

Figure 1-1. Style Number Identification Chart.

1-6 General Information BE1-851

OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
BE1-851 relays have the following features and capabilities.

Metered Current Values And Accuracy

Current Range: 0.1 to 1.5 nominal
Accuracy (Phase and Neutral): ±1% of reading, ±1 least significant digit at 25C
Accuracy (Negative Sequence): ±1.5% of reading, ±1 least significant digit at 25C
Temperature Dependence:  ±0.02% per C

Calculated Values And Accuracy

Demand
Range: 0.1 to 1.5 nominal
Type: Exponential
Accuracy: ±1% of reading ± 1 digit at 25C
Interval: 1 to 60 minutes

Real Time Clock

Accuracy: 1 second per day at 25C (free running) or
±2 milliseconds (with IRIG synchronization)
Resolution: One millisecond
Date and Time Setting Provisions: Front panel, communications port and IRIG.
Leap year correction provided.

IRIG
Standard: 200-98, Format B002
Input Signal: Demodulated (dc level-shifted digital signal)
Logic-High Voltage: 3.5 Vdc, minimum
Logic-Low Voltage: 0.5 Vdc, maximum
Input Voltage Range: ±20 Vdc, maximum
Resistance: Non-linear, approximately 4 k$ at 3.5 Vdc,
approximately 3 k$ at 20 Vdc

Contact Inputs Recognition Time

Programmable, 4 to 255 milliseconds

NOTE
All timing specifications are for the worst case response. This includes output contact
operate times and standard BESTlogic operation timing, but excludes input debounce
timing and non standard logic configurations. If a non-standard logic scheme involves
feedback, then one or more BESTlogic update rate delays must be included to calculate
the worst case delay. An example of feedback is Virtual Outputs driving Function Block
Inputs. For more information, see Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic.

BE1-851 General Information 1-7

Time Overcurrent Functions
Current Pickup, Phase and Neutral (51P, 51N, 151N) Dropout/pickup ratio: 95%
Pickup Accuracy:
5 Ampere CT ±2% or ±50 mA
1 Ampere CT ±2% or ±10 mA
Current Pickup, Negative Sequence (51Q) Dropout/pickup ratio: 90%
Pickup Accuracy:
5 Ampere CT ±3% or ±75 mA
1 Ampere CT ±3% or ±15 mA
Current Input All 51 Functions
5 Ampere CT:
Range 0.50 to 16.0 A
Increments 0.01 from 0.50 to 9.99, 0.1 from 10.0 to 16.0
1 Ampere CT:
Range 0.10 to 3.20 A
Increments 0.01 A

Instantaneous Overcurrent Functions

Current Pickup Accuracy, Phase and Neutral
(50TP, 50TN, 150TP, 150TN, 250TN, 350TN): Dropout/pickup ratio: 90% or higher
5 Ampere CT ±2% or ±50 mA
1 Ampere CT ±2% or ±10 mA
Current Pickup Accuracy, Negative Sequence
(50TQ, 150TQ): Dropout/pickup ratio: 90% or higher
5 Ampere CT ±3% or ±75 mA
1 Ampere CT ±3% or ±15 mA
Current Pickup Ranges (50T, 150T):
5 Ampere CT
Range: 0.5 to 150.0 A
Increments 0.01 from 0.50 to 9.99 A, 0.1 from 10.0 to 99.9 A,
and 1.0 from 100 A to 150 A
1 Ampere CT
Range 0.1 to 30.0 A
Increments 0.01 from 0.01 to 9.99 A, 0.1 from 10.0 to 30.0 A
Settable Time Delay Characteristics (50T, 150T): Definite time for any current exceeding pickup
Time Range 0.00 to 60.0 seconds
Time Increments One millisecond from 0 to 999 milliseconds, 0.1
second from 1.0 to 9.9 seconds, 1 second from 10
to 60 seconds
Timing Accuracy (50TP, 50TN, 150TP, 150TN ±0.5% or ±¼ cycle whichever is greater plus trip time
250TN, and 350TN) for instantaneous response (0.0 setting)
Timing Accuracy (50TQ, 150TQ) ±0.5% or ±1 cycle whichever is greater plus trip time
for instantaneous response (0.0 setting)

1-8 General Information BE1-851

 Trip Time: For 0.0 delay setting:
(50TP, 50TN, 150TP, 150TN, 250TN, 350TN): 1¼ cycles maximum for currents  5 times the
pickup setting. Three cycles maximum for a current
of 1.5 times pickup. Four cycles maximum for a
current of 1.05 times the pickup setting
Trip Time For 0.0 delay setting:
(50TQ, 150TQ) 2¼ cycles maximum for currents  5 times the
pickup setting. 3 cycles maximum for a current of
1.5 times pickup. Five cycles maximum for a
current of 1.05 times the pickup setting

Reclosing Timers (79)

Delay (4), Reset (1), Max Cycle (1), Reclose Fail (1)
Range: 100 milliseconds to 600 seconds
Increments: 1 millisecond from 0 to 999 milliseconds; 0.1
second from 1.0 to 9.9 seconds; 1 second from 10
to 600 seconds
Accuracy: ±5% or (+1.75, -0 cycles) whichever is greater

Breaker Fail Timer (BF)

Current Detector Pickup: Fixed at 0.5 A for 5 A unit, 0.1 A for 1 A unit
Current Detector Pickup Accuracy: ±10%
Delay Range: 50 to 999 milliseconds
Increments: 1 millisecond
Reset Time (Fundamental): Within 1¼ cycles of the current being removed
(Excluding output contact operate time).
Timer Accuracy: ±5% or (+1¼, - ¼cycles) whichever is greater

General Purpose Timers (62, 162)

PU.DO, Integrating, Retriggerable,
Non-Retriggerable, Oscillator, and Latch
Range: 0 to 9,999 seconds
Increments: 1 millisecond from 0 to 999 milliseconds; 0.1
second from 1.0 to 9.9 seconds; 1 second from 10
to 9,999 seconds
Accuracy: ±5% or ±3/4cycles, whichever is greater

Automatic Setting Group Characteristics

Number of Setting Groups: Four
Switch Level Range: 0-150% of the setting group 0, 51 phase pickup
setting (S0-51P).
Switch Level Accuracy: ±2% or ±50 mA (5 A), ±2% or ±10 mA (1 A)
Switch Timer Range: 0 to 60 minutes with 1 minute increments.
(0 = disabled)
Switch Timer Accuracy: ±5% or ±2 sec whichever is greater

BE1-851 General Information 1-9

 ¼ cycle

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

AC Current Inputs With 5 A CT

Continuous Rating: 20 A
One Second Rating: 400 A
For other current levels, use the formula:
½
I = (K/t)
where t = time in seconds,
K= 160,000(S1 case); 90,000(H1/F1 case)
Saturation Limit: 150 A
Burden Four milliohms or less at 5 A

AC Current Inputs with 1 A CT

Continuous Rating: 4A
One Second Rating: 80 A
For other current levels, use the following formula
½
I = (K/t)
where t = time in seconds, K=6,400
Saturation Limit: 30 A
Burden: 10 milliohms or less at 1 A

Analog To Digital Converter

Type: 16 bit
Sampling Rate: 24 samples per cycle

Power Supply
Option 1
48, 110, and 125 Vdc Range 35-150 Vdc
67, 110, and 120 Vac Range 55-135 Vac
Option 2
110, 125, and 250 Vdc Range 90-300 Vdc
110, 120, and 240 Vac Range 90-270 Vac
Option 3
24 Vdc Range 17-32 Vdc
Burden
(Options 1, 2, and 3) 6 watts continuous, 8 watts maximum with all
outputs energized

Output Contacts
Make and Carry for Tripping Duty 30 A for 0.2 seconds per ANSI C37.90;
7 A Continuous
Break Resistive or Inductive 0.3 A at 125 or 250 Vdc (L/R = 0.04 maximum)

1-10 General Information BE1-851

Control Inputs
Voltage Range Same as control power
Input Burden Burden per contact for sensing depends on the
power supply model and the input voltage. Table
1-2 provides appropriate burden specifications.
Table 1-1. Burden
Power Supply Burden
1 (48/125V) 44 kohm
2 (125/250V) 94 kohm
3 (24V) 18 kohm

Communication Ports
Interface
Front RS-232 300 to 19200 baud, 8N1 full duplex
Rear RS-232 300 to 19200 baud, 8N1 full duplex
Rear RS-485 300 to 19200 baud, 8N1 half duplex

Display
Type Two line, 16 character alphanumeric LCD (liquid
crystal display) with LED (light emitting diode)
backlight
Operating Temperature 40 C ( 40 F) to +70 C (+158 F)
Display contrast may be impaired at temperatures
below 20 C ( 4 F)

Isolation
1500 Vac at 50/60 Hz in accordance with IEEE
C37.90 and IEC 255-5

Surge Withstand Capability

Oscillatory Qualified to IEEE C37.90.1-1989 Standard Surge

Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective
Relays and Relay Systems.
Fast Transient Qualified to IEEE C37.90.1-1989 Standard Surge
Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective
Relays and Relay Systems.

Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)

Type tested using a five watt, hand-held
transceiver in the ranges of 144 and 440 MHz with
the antenna placed within six inches of the relay.
Meets IEEE C37.90.2. - 1995

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

BE1-851 General Information 1-11

 8 kilovolts contact discharges and 15 kilovolts air
discharges applied in accordance with IEC
EN61000-4-2 Criterion.

U.L. Recognition
U.L. recognized per Standard 508, U.L. File
Number E97033. Note: Output contacts are not
U.L. recognized for voltages greater than 250 V.

C.S.A. Certification
C.S.A. certified per Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2
Number 14-M91, C.S.A. File Number LR23131.
Note: Output contacts are not C.S.A. certified for
voltages greater than 250 V.

Environment
Operating Temperature Range -40C to 70C (-40F to 158F)
Storage Temperature Range -40C to 70C (-40F to 158F)
Humidity Qualified to IEC 86-2-38, 1st Edition 1974, Basic
Environmental Test Procedures, Part 2: Test Z/AD:
Composite Temperature Humidity Cyclic Test

Shock
In standard tests, the relay has withstood 15 g in
each of three mutually perpendicular planes Shock
without structural damage or degradation of
performance

Vibration
In standard tests, the relay has withstood 2 g in
each of three mutually perpendicular planes, swept
over the range of 10 to 500 Hz for a total of six
sweeps, 15 minutes each sweep, without structural
damage or degradation of performance.

Weight
Maximum weight 12 pounds

1-12 General Information BE1-851

SECTION 2 • QUICK START
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 2 • QUICK START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
BESTLOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Characteristics of Protection and Control Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Function Block Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Output Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
USER INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Front Panel HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
ASCII Command Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Command Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Human-To-Machine ASCII Command Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Batch Command Text File Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
BESTCOMS for BE1-851, Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Entering Test Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Checking The State Of Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
FAQ/TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Tables
Table 2-1. Trip LED Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

BE1-851 Quick Start i

SECTION 2 • QUICK START

GENERAL
This section provides an overview of the BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System. You should be familiar
with the concepts behind the user interfaces and BESTLogic before you begin reading about the detailed
BE1-851 functions. Sections 3 through 6 describe each function of the BE1-851 in detail.
The following information is intended to provide the reader with a basic understanding of the three user
interfaces (front panel HMI, ASCII serial communications link, and the BE1-851 BESTCOMS software) and
the security features provided in the BE1-851 relay. Detailed information on the operation of the HMI
(Human Machine Interface) can be found in Section 10, HMI (Controls and Indicators), and the ASCII
command communications in Section 11, ASCII Command Interface.

Also covered in this section is an overview of BESTLogic which is fundamental to how each of the protection
and control functions are set-up and used in the BE1-851 relay. Detailed information on using BESTLogic
to design complete protection and control schemes for the protected circuit can be found in Section 7,
BESTLogic and Section 8, Application.
Sections 3 through 6 describe each function provided in the BE1-851 relay and include references to the
following items. Note that NOT all items are appropriate for each function.
 HMI screens for setting the operational parameters
 ASCII commands for setting the operational parameters
 ASCII commands for setting up the BESTLogic required to use the function in your protection and
control scheme.
 Outputs from the function such as Alarm and BESTLogic variables or data reports.
 HMI screens for operation or interrogation of the outputs and reports provided by each function.
 ASCII commands for operation or interrogation of the outputs and reports provided by each function.

BESTLOGIC
Each of the protection and control functions in the BE1-851 is implemented as an independent function block
that is equivalent to a single function, discrete device counterpart. Each independent function block has all
of the inputs and outputs that the discrete component counterpart might have. Programming BESTLogic
is equivalent to choosing the devices required by your protection and control scheme and drawing schematic
diagrams to connect the inputs and outputs to obtain the desired operational logic. The concept is the same
but the method is different in that you choose each function block by enabling it and use Boolean logic
expressions to connect the inputs and outputs. The result is that in designing your system, you have even
greater flexibility than you had using discrete devices. An added benefit is that you are not constrained by
the flexibility limitations inherent in many multifunction relays.
One user programmable, custom logic scheme is in the user settings. To save you time, several
preprogrammed logic schemes are also provided. Any of the preprogrammed schemes can be selected and
used directly without having to make any BESTLogic settings. The logic scheme that is active is determined
by a protection setting. Provisions have also been made to allow the protection engineer to copy one of the
preprogrammed logic schemes into the user programmed custom logic settings so that it can simply be
modified to fine tune it to the user’s requirements.
There are two types of BESTLogic settings: function block logic settings and output logic settings. These
are described briefly in the following paragraphs. Detailed information on using BESTLogic to design
complete protection and control schemes for the protected circuit can be found in Section 7, BESTLogic
Programmable Logic and Section 8, Application.

BE1-851 Quick Start 2-1

Characteristics of Protection and Control Function Blocks
As stated before, each function block is equivalent to a discrete device counterpart. For example, the
recloser function block in the BE1-851 has all of the characteristics of a version of the BE1-79M reclosing
relay with similar functionality. (Figure 4-7 on page 4-15 illustrates the inputs and outputs for the 79 recloser
function)

Four inputs:
 RI (reclose initiate)
 STATUS (breaker position)
 WAIT
 DTL/BLK (drive to lockout/block 79 operation)

Five outputs:
 79C (close)
 79RNG (recloser running)
 79F (reclose fail)
 79LO (lockout)
• 79SCB (sequence controlled block signal )
One mode setting selected from three available settings:
 Disabled, power up to lockout mode, or power up to close

Eight operational settings:

 Four reclose times (1, 2, 3, & 4)
 Reset time
 Reclose fail time
 Max cycle time
• Selected steps in the reclosing sequence that can be used to block tripping elements (same
functions as the toggle switches on the BE1-79M relay).

Of the above characteristics, the operational settings are not included in the logic settings. They are
contained in the protection settings. This is an important distinction. Since, changing logic settings is similar
to rewiring a panel, the logic settings are separate and distinct from the operational settings such as pickups
and time delays.
Function Block Logic Settings

To use a protection or control function block, there are two items that need to be set. The mode and the
input logic. The mode is equivalent to deciding which devices you want to install in your protection and
control scheme. You then must set the logic variables that will be connected to the inputs.

For example, the 51N function block has two modes (disabled and enabled), and one input, block (torque
control). To use this function block, the logic setting command might be SL-51N=1,/IN2 for Set Logic-51N
to be mode 1 (enabled) with the function blocked when contact sensing INput 2 is not (/) energized. Contact
sensing input 2 would be wired to a ground relay enable switch.

As noted before, the protection settings for this function block, pickup, time dial, and curve, must be set
separately in the setting group settings. The setting might be S0-51N=6.5,2.1,S1R for Set in group 0 - the
51N function = to pickup at 6.5 amps with a time dial of 2.1 using curve S1 with an integrating Reset
characteristic.
The 51N function block has two logic output variables, 51NT (Trip) and 51NPU (Picked Up). The
combination of the logic settings and the operational settings for the function block govern how these
variables respond to logic and current inputs.

2-2 Quick Start BE1-851

Output Logic Settings

BESTlogic, as implemented in the BE1-851, supports up to 16 output expressions. The output expressions
are called virtual outputs to distinguish them from the physical output relays. VOA and VO1 through VO5
drive physical outputs Out A (fail safe alarm output), and Out 1 through Out 5 respectively. The rest of the
virtual outputs can be used for intermediate logic expressions.

For example, OUT 1 is wired to the trip bus of the circuit breaker. To set up the logic to trip the breaker,
the BESTlogic setting command might be SL-VO1=VO11+101T+BFPU for Set Logic - Virtual Output 1 =
to Virtual Output 11 (which is the intermediate logic expression for all of the function block tripping
outputs) or (+) 101T (the trip output of the virtual breaker control switch) or (+) BFPU (the pickup output
of the breaker failure function block that indicates that breaker failure has been initiated).

USER INTERFACES
Three user interfaces are provided for interacting with the BE1-851 relay: the front panel HMI, ASCII
communications, and BESTCOMS communications software. The front panel HMI provides access to a
subset of the total functionality of the device. ASCII communications provides access to all settings,
controls, reports, and metering functions of the system. BESTCOMS for BE1-851 software provides a, user
friendly Windows® environment for editing settings files and uploading and downloading them from the
relay.
Front Panel HMI
The front panel HMI consists of a two line by 16 character LCD (liquid crystal display) with four scrolling
pushbuttons, an edit pushbutton, and a reset pushbutton. The edit pushbutton includes an LED to indicate
when edit mode is active. There are five other LEDs for indicating power supply status, relay trouble alarm
status, programmable major and minor alarm status, and a multipurpose trip LED that flashes to indicate that
a protective element is picked up. The trip LED lights continuously when the trip output is energized, and
seals in when a protective trip has occurred to indicate that target information is being displayed on the LCD.
A complete description of the HMI is included in Section 10, Human-Machine Interface (Controls And
Indicators).
The BE1-851 HMI is menu driven and organized into a menu tree structure with six branches. A complete
menu tree description with displays is also provided in Section 10. A list of the menu branches and a brief
description for scrolling through the menu is in the following paragraphs.
1. REPORT STATUS. Display and resetting of general status information such as targets, alarms,
recloser status.
2. CONTROL. Operation of manual controls such as virtual switches, selection of active setting group,
etc.
3. METERING. Display of realtime metering values.
4. REPORTS. Display and resetting of report information such as time and date, demand registers,
breaker duty statistics, etc.
5. PROTECTION. Display and setting of protective function setting parameters such as logic scheme,
pickups, time delays, etc.
6. GENERAL SETTINGS. Display and setting of non-protective function setting parameters such as
communication, LCD contrast, and CT ratios.
Each screen in the menu tree displays the path in the upper left hand corner of the screen. Additionally,
each screen is assigned a number in the HMI section. The number indicates the branch and level in the
menu tree structure. Screen numbering helps you to keep track of where you are when you leave the menu
tree top level. You view each branch of the menu tree by using the right and left scrolling pushbuttons. To
go to a level of greater detail, you use the down scrolling pushbutton. Each time a lower level in a menu
branch is reached, the screen number changes to reflect the lower level. The following paragraphs and
Figure 2-1 illustrate how the display screens are numbered in the menu tree.

BE1-851 Quick Start 2-3

For example, to check or change the 51N pickup setting in setting group 3, you would press the right or left
scrolling pushbuttons to get to Screen 5-PROTECTION LOGIC. You would then press the down scrolling
pushbutton to get to the next level of detail and the right or left scrolling pushbutton to get to Screen 5.4-
SETTING GROUP 3. You would continue to press down and right or left scrolling pushbuttons to get to
Screen 5.4.2-51 SETTINGS and then Screen 5.4.2.2-51N. On this screen, the pickup, time dial and curve
settings for the 51N function can be read and/or edited. To return to the top level from this location, you
would press the up scrolling pushbutton three times.

ASCII Command Communications

The BE1-851 relay has three independent communications ports for serial communications. A computer
terminal or PC running a terminal emulation program such as Windows® HyperTerminal® can be connected
to any of the three ports so that commands can be sent to the relay. Communication with the relay uses a
simple ASCII command language. When a command is entered via a serial port, the relay responds with
the appropriate action. ASCII command communication is designed for both human-to-machine interactions
and batch download type operations. The following paragraphs briefly describe the command structure and
discuss human-to-machine interactions and batch command text file operations. The operation of the ASCII
commands is described in detail in Section 11, ASCII Command Interface.
Command Structure.
An ASCII command consists of a command string made up of one or two letters followed by a hyphen and
an object name. The first letter specifies the general command function and the second a sub-group. The
object name is the specific function for which the command is intended. A command string entered by itself
is a read command. A command string followed by an equal sign and one or more parameters, it is a write
command. The general command groups are organized into five major groups plus several miscellaneous
commands. These commands are as follows:
C CONTROL. Commands to perform select before operate control actions such as tripping and
closing the circuit breaker, changing the active setting group, etc.. Subgroups include S for
Select and O for Operate.
G GLOBAL. Perform global operations that do not fall into the other general groups such as password
security. Subgroups include: S for security settings.
M METERING. Read all real time metering values. This general command group has no subgroups.
R REPORTS. Read and reset reporting functions such as time and date, demand registers, breaker
duty statistics, etc.. Subgroups include: A for Alarm functions, B for Breaker monitoring functions,
D for Demand recording functions, F for Fault summary reporting functions, G for General
information, and S for Sequence of events recorder functions.
S SETTINGS. Set all setting parameters that govern the functioning of the relay. Subgroups include:
0,1,2,3 for settings in setting groups, A for alarm settings, B for breaker monitoring settings, G for
general settings, L for logic settings.
MISCELLANEOUS. Miscellaneous commands include ACCESS, EXIT, and HELP.
Examples of object names would be 51N for the neutral inverse time overcurrent function or PIA for the A
phase, peak current demand register.
For example, to check the 51N pickup setting in setting group 3, you would enter S3-51N for Set, Group
3-51N. The relay would respond with the current pickup, time dial, and curve settings for the 51N function.
To edit these settings the same command would be used with an = followed by the new settings and the
enter pushbutton. Note that its necessary to use the ACCESS and EXIT commands when using the write
version of these commands.
Human-To-Machine ASCII Command Operations.
Using ASCII commands, settings can be read and changed on a function by function basis. The mnemonic
format of the commands helps you interact with the relay. It isn’t necessary to remember all of the object

2-4 Quick Start BE1-851

names. Most commands don’t require that you specify a complete object name. If the first two letters of a
command are entered, the relay will respond with all applicable object names.

Example Obtain a breaker operations count by entering RB (Report Breaker). The BE1-851
responds with the operations counter value along with all other breaker report objects. If
you know that the object name for the breaker operations counter is OPCNTR, you can
enter RB-OPCNTR and read only the number of breaker operations.
Partial object names are also supported. This allows multiple objects to be read or reset at the same time.

Example Read all peak-since-reset demand registers. Entering RD-PI (Report Demand - Peak
Current (I)) will return demand values and time stamps for phase A, B, C, Neutral, and
Negative Sequence current. To read only the Neutral demand value, the full object name
(RD-PIN) is entered. Entering RD-PI=0 resets all five of the peak-since-reset demand
registers.
Batch Command Text File Operations.
With a few exceptions, each function of the relay uses one command to set it and each setting command
operates on all of the parameters required by that function. See the example mentioned above in the
paragraph titled Command Structure. This format results in a great many commands to fully set the relay.
Also, the process of setting the relay does not use a prompting mode where the relay prompts you for each
parameter in turn until you exit the setting process. For these reasons, a method for setting the relay using
batch text files is recommended.
In batch download type operations, the user creates an ASCII text file of commands and sends it to the relay.
To facilitate this process, the response from a multiple read command is output from the BE1-851 in
command format. So the user need only enter S for Set (with no subgroup) and the relay responds with all
of the setting commands and their associated parameters. If the user enters S2 for Set Group 2, the relay
responds with all of the setting commands for setting group 2. The user can capture this response to a file,
edit it using any ASCII text editor, and then send the file back to the relay. See Section 11, ASCII Command
Interface for a more detailed discussion of how to use ASCII text files for setting the relay.
BESTCOMS for BE1-851, Graphical User Interface
Basler Electric's graphical user interface (GUI) software is an alternative method for quickly developing
setting files in a user-friendly, Windows® based environment. Using the GUI, you may prepare setting files
off-line (without being connected to the relay) and then upload the settings to the relay at your convenience.
These settings include protection and control, operating and logic, breaker and transformer monitoring,
metering, and fault recording. Engineering personnel can develop, test, and replicate the settings before
exporting it to a file and transmitting the file to technical personnel in the field. On the field end, the
technician simply imports the file into the BESTCOMS database and uploads the file to the relay where it
is stored in nonvolatile memory.
The GUI also has the same preprogrammed logic schemes that are stored in the relay. This gives the
engineer the option (off-line) of developing his setting file using a preprogrammed logic scheme, customizing
a preprogrammed logic scheme, or building a scheme from scratch. Files may be exported from the GUI to
a text editor where they can be reviewed or modified. The modified text file may then be uploaded to the
relay. After it is uploaded to the relay, it can be brought into the GUI, but it cannot be brought directly into
the GUI from the text file. The GUI logic builder uses basic AND/OR gate logic combined with point and click
variables to build the logic expressions. This reduces the design time and increases dependability.
The GUI also allows for downloading industry standard COMTRADE files for analysis of stored oscillography
data. Detailed analysis of the oscillography files may be accomplished using Basler Electric's BESTWAVE
software. For more information on Basler Electric's Windows® based BESTCOMS (GUI) software or
BESTWAVE, contact your local sales representative or Basler Electric Technical Support Services
Department in Highland, Illinois.

BE1-851 Quick Start 2-5

GETTING STARTED
Figure 12-9 in Section 12, shows typical external control connections. If your relay has power supply option
1 or 2, it can be supplied by normal 120V ac house power. These two power supply options (1 and 2) are
the midrange and high range ac/dc power supplies. The contact sensing inputs are half-wave rectified,
opto-isolators. The default contact recognition and debounce settings enable their use on ac signals as well
as dc signals.
Figure 3-8 shows typical external sensing connections. The relay measures the A phase, B phase, and C
phase current magnitudes directly from the three current sensing inputs on Circuit #1 (this is dependent on
style configuration). Circuit #2 measures the A phase, B phase, and C phase current magnitudes directly
from the three current sensing inputs. The neutral and negative sequence magnitudes are calculated from
the fundamental component of each of the three-phase currents. When evaluating the negative sequence
functions, the relay can be tested using a two-phase current source. To fully evaluate the operation of the
relay in the power system, it is desirable to use a three-phase current source.

Connect a computer to the front RS-232 port (refer to Section 12, Installation, for connection diagrams).
Apply power and set the clock using the RG-TIME= and RG-DATE= commands (refer to Appendix D, Setting
Terminal Communications, and Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, for additional information).

Entering Test Settings

Enter SG (Set General) to get a listing of the general setting commands with default parameters and put
them in a text file as described previously in Batch Command Text File Operations. Then enter S0 (Set
group 0) to get a listing of the group 0 protection setting commands with default parameters and put them
in a text file also. With these two sub-groups of settings, you will not see the global security settings, user
programmable BESTlogic settings, settings for protection setting groups 1, 2, and 3, settings for alarm
functions, and the settings for breaker monitoring functions.
Open the SG file in a text editor, change settings as required, and save the changes. For example:
• The ratios for the phase and neutral current transformers (CT2, CTG).
• The demand interval and CT circuit to monitor for the phase, neutral, and negative sequence
currents (DIP, DIN, DIQ).
• The nominal system frequency (FREQ).
• The normal phase sequence (ABC or ACB) for the system (PHROT).
• Open the S0 file in a text editor, change settings as required, and save the changes. For
example:
• The differential taps setting by putting the 87 function in manual and selecting tap values (87).
• The pickup, time dial, and curve for the 51 functions (51P, 51N, 51Q).
While editing this file, it is necessary to set a logic scheme to be active using the SL-N= (Set Protection
LOGIC) command.
Do not forget to add E;Y (Exit; Save Settings? Yes) to the end of both files. Enter A= to gain setting
access and then send each of these text files to the relay as described above under Batch Command
Text File Operations.
As you gain knowledge of the relay, you can experiment with the rest of the settings. To set up a file with
all user settings, enter S and the relay will respond with all settings in command format. The acceptance
test procedure in Section 13, Testing and Maintenance, provides a basic procedure for creating a file with
all user settings.
Checking The State Of Inputs
You can quickly review the state of the inputs in two different ways: one, through the front panel HMI, and
two, using the ASCII command interface. The front panel HMI displays the input status on screen 1.4.1,
\STAT\OPER\INPUT. A diagram showing all of the menu tree branches is located in Section 10, Human-
Machine Interface. To get to this screen, press the up scrolling pushbutton until you reach the top screen
in the current branch. You know when you have reached the top screen because the screen stops changing
2-6 Quick Start BE1-851
when you press the up scrolling pushbutton. From this position, press the right scrolling pushbutton until
you have reached the screen titled, \STATUS BE1-851 REPORT STATUS. From this position press the
down scrolling pushbutton one time (\STAT\TARGETS) and press the right scrolling pushbutton three times.
At this time, you should see the OPERATIONAL STATUS screen, \STAT\OPER_STAT. If you press the
down scrolling pushbutton from this screen, you should see the INPUTS screen, \STAT\OPER\INPUT.
Another method would be to use the ASCII command interface. One command that you can use to see the
status of the inputs is RG-STAT. This command will only read the status of the inputs and nothing else.
Testing
To determine if the relay is responding correctly to each test, the following commands are useful.
• RG-TARG, (report general targets): reports the targets from the last fault.
• RF, (report faults): reports a directory listing of the twelve fault summary reports. The fault summary
reports are numbered from 1 to 255 and then wrap around and start over. RF-### reports the ###
report.
• RS-##, (report sequence of events record), ## events: reports the most recent ## changes of state in
the protection and control logic.

FAQ/TROUBLE SHOOTING

Frequently Asked Questions

1.) Why won't the trip LED reset when I press the reset key on the front panel?
The Reset key is context sensitive. To reset the trip LED or the targets, the target screen must be
displayed. To reset the alarms, the alarm screen must be displayed.
2.) Is the power supply polarity sensitive?
No, the power supply will accept either an ac or dc voltage input. However, the contact sensing for
the programmable inputs is polarity sensitive. See Installation, Section 12, for a typical
interconnection diagram.
3.) What voltage level is used to develop current flow through the contact sensing inputs?
Voltage level is dependent on the power supply option (BE1-851 style) and the position of the
contact sensing jumper. See Installation, Section 12, for additional information.

8.) Does the BE1-851 trip output contact latch after a fault?
The answer to the question is yes and no. In general, once the fault goes away the output contacts
open. The BE1-851 does offer an option to ensure that the contact will stay closed for at least 200
milliseconds. See Application, Section 3, Input And Output Functions for additional information on
that function. But, BESTlogic can latch the relay outputs. Refer to, Application, Section 8,
Application Tips F1, for additional information.
9.) Why won't a function work when I put in settings such as the pickup and time delays?
Make sure that the protective element is enabled in BESTlogic.
11.) Can I make logic settings from the front panel?
No, the front panel can not program logic settings. Logic settings must be programmed using the
ASCII command interface or BESTCOMS communication software.
13.) Does the BE1-851 have a battery installed as the back-up power source for the internal clock on loss
of power?
No, the BE1-851 does not have a battery. You have to reset the time and date every time you lose
power. You can use the IRIG to automatically reset the time and date.

BE1-851 Quick Start 2-7

15.) Why do I keep getting access conflict errors when I am communicating with the relay?
Access can be granted to only one communication port at a time. The HMI is considered to be the
same port as the front RS-232 communication port. The unit has three different communication
ports. The front HMI and front RS-232 (COM 0) is the first port. The rear RS-232 (COM 1) is the
second and the rear RS-485 (COM 3) is the third port. If you have gained access at the front panel
HMI and the 5-minute time out has not ended, you can not gain access at another port. The front
RS-232 can still be accessed because HMI and the front RS-232 are considered to be the same
port. If you have tried to gain access to more than one port at a time, an access conflict results.
Access only needs to be gained when a change of a setting is needed. To read data or to get any
reports this can be done without gaining access. After gaining access though one of the ports a
session can be ended with an "Exit" command. If access is gained, but the session is not ended,
a 5-minute time out will end the session and any changes that were not saved will be lost. If you
are using the BESTcoms program, the gaining access and the exit commands are done for you.
16) Why doesn't the trip LED behave as expected when the relay picks up and trips? Another closely
related question would be why don't the targets work?
If the logic is setup to the point were the protective element is tripping at the desired current level,
but the targets, Trip LED, and fault records are not behaving as expected, then there are two
commands that need to be checked for proper operation. The SG-TRIGGER command needs to
have the PU trigger and TRIP trigger logic correctly programmed. This should initiate the fault
record. The SG-TARGET command needs that protective element (function) enabled to log targets.
Please refer Section 6 in the Instruction Manual under the section Fault Reporting to get further
details on how to program these commands correctly. The Trip LED has two different functions in
the relay. When the SG-TRIGGER PU expression is true, and the TRIP expression is false, the Trip
LED flashes. When both the SG-TRIGGER TRIP and PU expression are true, the Trip LED lights
solidly. When neither expression is true, the trip LED lights solidly if there are latched targets. A
flashing LED means one of the protection elements is in a pickup state and timing towards trip.
Once the trip occurs, the LED turns on solid. The LED will not change state until the target has
been reset. If the fault has not cleared, the LED turn on again.
Table 2-1. Trip LED Truth Table

SG-TRIGGER PU SG-TRIGGER TRIP Targets Latched Trip LED

TRUE FALSE NO FLASHES

TRUE TRUE NO Lights Solidly

FALSE FALSE YES Lights Solidly

17.) Is the IRIG signal modulated or demodulated?

The IRIG signal is demodulated (dc level-shifted digital signal). See Application, Section 1,
Specifications, for additional information.
18.) Can the IRIG signal be daisy-chained to multiple BE1-851 units?
Yes, multiple BE1-851 units can use the same IRIG-B input signal by daisy-chaining the BE1-851
inputs. The burden data is non-linear, approximately 4 kohms at 3.5 Vdc and 3 kohms at 20 Vdc.
See, Application, Section 8, and, Input and Output Functions, Section 3, Input And Output
Functions, for additional information.
19.) How can I find out what the version number is of my BE1-851?
The application version can be found in three different ways. One, use the HMI, screen 4.6. Two,
ASCII command interface with the RG-VER command. Three, use BE1-851 BESTCOMS (the
version is located on the general identification screen).

2-8 Quick Start BE1-851

SECTION 3 • INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 3 • INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
CURRENT INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Current Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Current Measurement Functions Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
SG-FREQ Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
SG-DSP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
SG-PHROT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
CONTACT SENSING INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Digital Input Conditioning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Setting Up the Digital Input Conditioning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
SG-IN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Retrieving Input Status Information From the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Hardware Outputs and Virtual Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Retrieving Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Relay Trouble Alarm Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Programmable Hold Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
SG-HOLD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Output Logic Override Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Enabling Logic Override Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Pulsing an Output Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Holding an Output Contact Open or Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Returning an Output Contact to Logic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
CS/CO-OUT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Retrieving Output Logic Override Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figures
Figure 3-1. Accuracy Characteristics, 60 Hz Nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figure 3-2. Accuracy Characteristics, 60Hz Nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-3. Output Logic, General Purpose Output Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-4. Output Logic, Fail-Safe Alarm Output Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Tables
Table 3-1. Current Measurement Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Table 3-2. Turn on Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3-3. SG-IN Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Table 3-4. Hold Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions i

SECTION 3 • INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS

GENERAL
BE1-851 inputs consist of three-phase current inputs, neutral current inputs, and four contact sensing inputs.
Five general purpose output contacts and one dedicated, fail-safe alarm output make up the BE1-851
outputs. Each input and output is isolated and terminated at separate terminal blocks. This section
describes the function and setup of each input and output.

CURRENT INPUTS
Secondary current from power system equipment CT is applied to current transformers inside the relay.
These internal transformers step down the monitored current to levels compatible with relay circuitry and
provide isolation. Secondary current from each internal CT is converted to a voltage signal and then filtered
by an analog, low-pass, anti-aliasing filter.

Current Measurement Functions

The power system analog quantities for phase, neutral, and negative sequence currents are calculated and
used by all of the current dependent functions of the relay. The filter response for phase and neutral
calculations can be independently programmed. Operation of the current measurement function is governed
by settings for nominal frequency (SG-FREQ), digital signal processing algorithm (SG-DSP), current
transformer ratio(SG-CT), and normal phase rotation (SG-PHROT).

Nominal Frequency. Input waveforms are sampled by an analog-to-digital converter at 24 samples per
cycle. A nominal frequency of either 50 or 60 Hz must be selected in order for the analog-to-digital converter
to sample analog quantities at appropriate time intervals to achieve 24 samples per cycle.

Digital Signal Processing.

The digital signal
processing (DSP) setting 10
governs how the phase
9
and neutral operating
quantities are measured. 8
The three choices are Fundamental-dashed line
fundamental, RMS, and 7
TrueRMS-dashdot line
average. This is 6
independently settable for Average-solid line
the phase and neutral Error 5
quantities. Each setting
4
causes the relay to
respond differently in the 3
presence of significant
harmonics and for 2
operation at significantly
1
off-nominal frequency.
Accuracy characteristics 0
55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
for each algorithm (funda-
F (55 t 65 H )
mental, RMS, and Figure 3-1. Accuracy Characteristics, 60 Hz Nominal
average) are shown in
Figure 3-1. This figure is for a 60 hertz nominal system with frequencies between 55 and 65 hertz. A 50
hertz nominal system would have similar characteristics.

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-1

The fundamental setting (F) uses a Fourier filter to extract the fundamental frequency component of the
measured current and reject the harmonic frequency components. This setting is best suited for most
protection purposes due to its superior transient overreach and fast dropout characteristics. It is also
recommended for applications where harmonic rejection is desired. For example, in a neutral circuit where
the third harmonic component is additive and can result in unwanted tripping.
The RMS setting uses a true RMS calculation to include harmonic components of the measured current. The
presence of significant levels of harmonics can cause heating in protected equipment and increased
sensitivity in electro-mechanical devices. This setting is recommended for equipment applications that
require thermal overload protection. It is also recommended for applications where the transient overreach
and sensitivity characteristics provide better coordination with induction disk type overcurrent relays.

The average setting uses

a digital measurement
circuit. This circuit 100
consists of a full wave
rectifier with a two pole, 90
low pass filter. A third
80
digital filter tuned to the
Fundamental - dashed line
nominal frequency 70
removes the ripple error TrueRMS - dash dot line
that is inherent in this 60
type of circuit. Due to the Average - solid line
Error 50
lowpass filter, this setting
has slower pickup and 40
dropout characteristics
than the other two 30
settings. This setting is
20
recommended In
applications where 10
protection is desired at
frequencies that deviate 0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
significantly from Frequency (Hz)
nominal. The Figure 3-2. Accuracy Characteristics, 60Hz Nominal
characteristics of the
three algorithms from 20 to 100 hertz is shown in Figure 3-4. This plot is based on a setting of 60 hertz
nominal (20 to 100 hertz). This setting also provides good coordination with induction disk type overcurrent
relays and provides superior transient overreach characteristics.

Neutral and Negative Sequence Current. Neutral and negative sequence components are measured from
the fundamental component of the three-phase current inputs. The relay can be set to accommodate ABC
or ACB phase sequence when calculating the negative sequence component.

Fast-Dropout Current Detector. A separate, fast-dropout current measurement algorithm is used by the
breaker failure function and the breaker trip-speed monitoring function. This measurement algorithm has
a sensitivity of 10 percent of nominal rating and detects current interruption in the circuit breaker much more
quickly than the regular current measurement functions.

3-2 Input and Output Functions BE1-851

Current Measurement Functions Setup

Current Input Circuit Settings. The BE1-851 requires information on the nominal system frequency, DSP
filtering, CT ratio, and phase rotation. These settings are used by the metering and fault reporting functions
to display measured quantities in primary units. These settings can be entered at the HMI, see section 10,
Human-Machine Interface, or through the communication ports using the SG-FREQ, SG-DSP, SG-CT, AND
SG-PHROT setting general commands. Settings relating to current measurement are summarized in Table
3-1.
Table 3-1. Current Measurement Function Settings

Password
Command Access Range Default Unit of Measure

SG-FREQ Privilege 50,60 60 Hertz

G or S

SG-DSP(Element selection, N) Privilege P (Phase) NA NA

G or S N (Neutral)

SG-DSP(Filter type, Filter) Privilege A (Average) F NA

G or S F (Fundamental)
R (Wideband RMS)

SG-CT(Phase Sequence) None ABC, ACB ABC NA

SG-CT(CT Ratio (Phase and None 1 to 50,000 1 Turns

Neutral) (Increment of 1)

SG-PHROT Privilege 1 or 2 1 NA
G or S

SG-FREQ Command
Purpose: Reads or changes the nominal power system frequency information used by the relay.
Syntax: SG-FREQ [= <Hz>]
Comments: Password Access Privilege G or Privilege S required to change settings
hz = 50/60. The default is 60.
Example 1. Change frequency setting
SG-FREQ=60

SG-DSP Command
Purpose: Read/Set the DSP filter used to calculate the magnitude of the analog inputs.
Syntax: SG-DSP[n][=<filter>]
Comments: Password Access Privilege G or Privilege S required to change settings
n = type of filter: P for phase or N for neutral
filter = (A/F/R). Designates type of digital filter used for calibration and subsequent analog
signal filtering (A=Average, F=Fundamental, R=Wideband RMS)
Example 1. Set the phase filter for wideband RMS and the neutral for fundamental response
SG-DSPP=R; SG-DSPN=F
SG-CT Command
Purpose: Read or set phase/neutral CT ratios.
Syntax: SG-CT[t][=<CT ratio>]
Comments: t = P (three-phase current input) or N (neutral input)
CT ratio = current transformer ratio entered as primary/secondary, primary:secondary, or turns.
CT ratio is always reported as turns.

Example 1. Enter a phase CT ratio of 800:5 and a neutral CT ratio of 50:5.

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-3

 >SG-CTP=800:5; SG-CTN=10

SG-PHROT Command
Purpose: Read/set Phase Rotation setting
Syntax: SG-PHROT[=<rotation sequence>]
Comments: Password Access Privilege G or Privilege S required to change settings
Rotation sequence = (1/2) where 1=ABC, 2=ACB
Used by 50Q, 51Q, and negative sequence metering and demand reporting functions to
determine proper phasing.
Default setting = 1 (ABC)
Example 1. Set phase rotation sequence to ACB
SG-PHROT=2

CONTACT SENSING INPUTS

BE1-851 relays have four contact sensing inputs to initiate BE1-851 relay actions. These inputs are isolated
and require an external wetting voltage. The voltage applied to the contact sensing inputs must fall within
the relay power supply input voltage range. To enhance user flexibility, the BE1-851 uses wide range ac/dc
power supplies that cover several common control voltage ratings in the same version of the relay. To
further enhance flexibility, the input circuits are designed to respond to voltages at the lower end of the
control voltage range while not overheating at the high end of the control voltage range.
The contact sensing inputs circuits are polarity sensitive. When an ac wetting voltage is applied, the input
signal is half-wave rectified by the opto-isolator diodes.
The contact sensing inputs drive BESTlogic variables IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4. Each contact sensing input
is completely programmable so meaningful labels can be assigned to each input and the logic-high and
logic-low states. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic provides more information about using contact
sensing inputs in your programmable logic scheme. See Table 3-2 for turn on thresholds.
Table 3-2. Turn on Thresholds

Nominal Control Voltage Turn-On Range

24 Vdc 13 to 19 Vdc

48/125 Vac/Vdc 26 to 38 V

125/250 Vac/Vdc 69 to 100 V

Digital Input Conditioning Function

Status of the contact sensing inputs is checked 24 times per cycle. When operating on a 60 hertz power
system, this results in the input status being sampled every 0.7 milliseconds (0.8 milliseconds on 50 hertz
systems). User settable digital contact recognition and denounce timers condition the signals applied to the
inputs. These parameters can be adjusted to obtain the optimum compromise between speed and security
for a specific application. Digital input conditioning is evaluated every quarter cycle.

If the sampled status of a monitored contact is detected to be closed for the recognition time, the logic
variable changes from an open (logic 0 or FALSE) state to a closed (logic 1 or TRUE) state. Once contact
closure is recognized, the logic variable remains in the closed state until the sampled status of the monitored
contact is detected to be open for a period that is longer than the de-bounce time. At this point, the logic
variable will change from a closed (logic 1 or TRUE) state to an open )logic 0 or FALSE) state.

Setting Up the Digital Input Conditioning Function

3-4 Input and Output Functions BE1-851

The settings for the digital input signal conditioning function are shown in Table 3-3. Digital input
conditioning settings are entered through the communication ports using the SG-IN (setting general-input)
command.
Table 3-3. SG-IN Command Settings
Unit of
Setting Range Increment Measure Default

Recognition 4 to 1* milliseconds 4
Time 255

Debounce Time 4 to 1* milliseconds 16

255
* Since the input conditioning function is evaluated every quarter cycle,
the setting is internally rounded to the nearest multiple of 4.16
milliseconds (60 Hz systems) or 5 milliseconds (50 Hz systems).
SG-IN Command
Purpose: Read or set contact sensing input recognition and debounce.
Syntax: SG-IN[#[=<r(ms)>,<db(ms)>]]
Comments: n = input number 1, 2, 3, or 4. Omitting n will read or set parameters for all inputs.

Example 1. Read the conditioning settings for input 3.

>SG-IN3
>4,16
If you are concerned about ac voltage being coupled into the contact sensing circuits, the recognition time
can be set to greater than one-half of the power system cycle period. This will take advantage of the half-
wave rectification provided by the input circuitry.
If an ac wetting voltage is used, the recognition time can be set to less than one-half of the power system
cycle period and the debounce timer can be set to greater than one-half of the power system cycle period.
The extended debounce time will keep the input energized during the negative half-cycle. The default
settings of 4 and 16 milliseconds are compatible with ac wetting voltages.

Retrieving Input Status Information From the Relay

Input status is determined through HMI screen 1.5.1 or through the communication ports using the RG-STAT
(report general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting
for more information.

OUTPUTS
BE1-851 relays have five general purpose output contacts (OUT1 through OUT5) and one fail-safe, normally
closed (when de-energized), alarm output contact (OUTA). Each output is isolated and rated for tripping
duty. OUT1 through OUT5 are Form A (normally open) and OUTA is Form B (normally closed).

Hardware Outputs and Virtual Outputs

Output contacts OUT1 through OUT5 and OUTA are driven by BESTLOGIC expressions for VO1 through
VO5 (virtual outputs 1 through 5) and VOA (virtual output A). The use of each output contact is completely
programmable so you can assign meaningful labels to each output and to the logic 0 and logic 1 states of
each output. Section 7, BESTLOGIC Programming Logic has more information about programming output
expressions in your programmable logic schemes.
A virtual output (VOn) exists only as a logical state inside the relay. A hardware output is a physical output
relay contact. BESTLOGIC expressions for VO1 through VO5 (virtual outputs 1 through 5) and VOA (virtual
output A) drive output contacts OUT1 through OUT5 and OUTA. The state of the output contacts can vary
from the state of the output logic expressions for three reasons.
BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-5
 • The relay trouble alarm disables all hardware outputs.
• The programmable hold timer is active.
• The select-before-operate function overrides a virtual output.
Figure 3-3 shows a diagram of the output contact logic for the general purpose output contacts. Figure 3-4
illustrates the output contact logic for the fail-safe alarm output contact.

VIRTUAL OUTPUT
CONTROLED BY SL-VO[n]
LOGIC EQUATION
OUTPUT
VO[n] STATUS HARDWARE
AND
OUTPUT
OUTPUT CONTROL
(CO-OUT COMMAND) OR 0 Sec OR
Control Override (0/1) AND AND OUT[n]
0.200 Sec
AND
Override State (0/1)
ONE SHOT TIMER

Hold State (0/1) ALMREL

HOLD ENA D2647-18

08-20-98
(SG-HOLD COMMAND)

Figure 3-3. Output Logic, General Purpose Output Contacts

Retrieving Output Status

Status of output contacts can be assessed at HMI screen 1.5.2 and through the communication ports using
the RG-STAT (report general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General
Status Reporting for more information.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
CONTROLED BY SL-VO[n]
LOGIC EQUATION OUTPUT
STATUS HARDWARE
VO[A]
AND OUTPUT
OUTPUT CONTROL
(CO-OUT COMMAND) OR 0 Sec
Control Override (0/1) AND OR NOT OUT[A]
0.200 Sec
AND
Override State (0/1)
ONE SHOT TIMER

ALMREL
Hold State (0/1)
HOLD ENA D2647-19
08-20-98
(SG-HOLD COMMAND)

Figure 3-4. Output Logic, Fail-Safe Alarm Output Contact

Relay Trouble Alarm Disable

When the BE1-851 self-diagnostics function detects a relay problem, an internal alarm condition is set. This
alarm condition disables the outputs and de-energizes the OUTA relay closing the OUTA contact. For more
details about this function see Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarms Function.

Programmable Hold Timer

Historically, electromechanical relays have provided trip contact seal-in circuits. These seal-in circuits
consisted of a dc coil in series with the relay trip contact and a seal-in contact in parallel with the trip contact.
The seal-in feature serves several purposes for electromechanical relays. One purpose is to provide
mechanical energy to drop the target. A second purpose is to carry the dc tripping current from the induction
disk contact which may not have significant closing torque for a low resistance connection. A third purpose
is to prevent the relay contact from dropping out until the current has been interrupted by the 52a contacts
in series with the trip coil. If the tripping contact opens before the dc current is interrupted, the contact may
be damaged. Of the three items, only item three is an issue for electronic relays like the BE1-851.

3-6 Input and Output Functions BE1-851

To prevent the output relay contacts from opening prematurely, a hold timer can hold the output contact
closed for a minimum of 200 milliseconds. If seal-in logic with feedback from the breaker position logic is
desired, the BESTlogic expression for the tripping output can be modified. This process is described in
Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Application Tips.

The hold timer can be enabled for each input using the SG-HOLD (setting general-hold) command. Hold
timer settings are shown in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4. Hold Timer Settings
Unit of
Setting Range Increment Measure Default
Output Hold 0=disabled N/A N/A OUTA=0
Timer 1=enabled OUT1=1
OUT2=1
OUT3=0
OUT4=0
OUT5=1

SG-HOLD Command
Purpose: Reads or programs output hold settings.
Syntax: SG-HOLD[n][=<1/0 hold ena>]
Comments: n = output number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or A
Example 1. Program all outputs except OUT2 to have a minimum hold time.
>SG-HOLDA=1; SG-HOLD1=1; SG-HOLD2=0; SG-HOLD3=1; SG-HOLD4=1; SG-HOLD5=1
Output Logic Override Control
Each output contact can be controlled directly using the select-before-operate output control function. The
virtual output logic expression that normally controls the state of an output contact can be overridden and
the contact pulsed, held open, or held closed. This function is useful for testing purposes. An alarm point
is available in the programmable alarm function for monitoring when the output logic has been overridden.
See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Functions for more information about programmable
alarms. Write access to control functions is required before using the select-before-operate control functions
through the HMI or ASCII command interface.

Enabling Logic Override Control

By default, logic override control is disabled. Output logic override must be enabled before the control can
be used. Enabling of the output logic override control is not possible at the front panel HMI. It can only be
enabled through a communication port using the CS/CO-OUT=ena/dis (control select/control operate-output
override=enable/disable) command. The CS/CO-OUT command only enables or disables override control
of the output logic; it doesn’t enable or disable the outputs themselves.

Pulsing an Output Contact

Pulsing BE1-851 outputs provides the same function as the push-to-energize feature of other Basler Electric
solid-state relays. This feature is useful when testing the protection and control system. When pulsed, an
output contact changes from the current state (as determined by the virtual output logic expression) to the
opposite state for 200 milliseconds. After 200 milliseconds, the output contact is returned automatically to
logic control.
Pulse override control is accessed at screen 2.4.1 of the HMI by entering a P in the field for the output
contact to be pulsed. Pulse control is accessed through a communication port by using the CS/CO-OUTn=P
(control select/control operate-output contact n=pulse) command.

Holding an Output Contact Open or Closed

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-7

Outputs can be forced to a closed (logic 1 or TRUE) state or to an open (logic 0 or FALSE) state. This
feature can be used to disable a contact during testing. Open or close logic override control is accessed
at screen 2.4.1 of the HMI by entering a 0 for open or 1 for closed in the field for the output contact to be
controlled. Outputs are forced open or closed through a communication port by using the
CS/CO-OUTn=P0/1 (control select/control operate-output contact n-0/1) command.

Returning an Output Contact to Logic Control

When the output logic has been overridden and the contact is held in an open or closed state, it’s necessary
to manually return the output to logic control. Outputs are returned to logic control through screen 2.4.1 of
the HMI. An L is entered in the field of the contact that is to be returned to logic control. Outputs are
returned to logic control through a communication port by using the CS/CO-OUTn=L (control select/control
operate-output contact n=logic control) command.

CS/CO-OUT Command
Purpose: Controls or reads output selection/operation.
Syntax: CS/CO-OUT[n][=<mode>]
Comments: n = output number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or A
mode = 0, 1, P, L, ENA, or DIS
The output control commands require the use of select-before-operate logic. First, the
command must be selected using the CS-OUT command. After the command is selected,
there is a 30 second window during which the CO-OUT control command an be entered. The
control selected and operation selected syntax must match exactly or the command will be
blocked. If the operate command isn’t entered within 30 seconds of the select command, the
operate command will be blocked. An error message is returned when a control command is
blocked.
Output control commands are acted on immediately except when the ENA and DIS modes are
used. ENA and DIS output control command changes aren’t executed until saved with the
EXIT command. Output control status is saved in non-volatile memory and is maintained when
relay operating power is lost.
Example1. Enable the output control feature.
>CS-OUT=ENA
>OUT=ENA SELECTED
>CO-OUT=ENA
>OUT=ENA EXECUTED (NOTE: Not effective until EXIT with SAVE(Y).)
Example2. Test all outputs by pulsing momentarily.
>CS-OUT=P
>OUT=P SELECTED
>CO-OUT=P
>OUT=P EXECUTED
Example3. Disable the trip output (OUT1) by holding it at logic 0.
>CS-OUT1=0
>OUT1=0 SELECTED
>CO-OUT1=0
>OUT1=0 EXECUTED
Example4. Return OUT1 to logic control.
>CS-OUT1=L
>OUT1=L SELECTED
>CO-OUT1=0
>OUT1=L EXECUTED

Retrieving Output Logic Override Status

3-8 Input and Output Functions BE1-851

The status of the output contact logic override control can be viewed at HMI screen 1.5.3. HMI screen 2.4.1
is used for output control but can also display the current status. Output logic status can also be viewed
using the RG-STAT (report general-status) command. An L indicates that the state of the output is controlled
by logic. A 0 or 1 indicates that the logic has been overridden and the contact is held open (0) or closed (1)
state. A P indicates that the contact is being pulsed and will return to logic control automatically. See
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting for more information.

BE1-851 Input and Output Functions 3-9

SECTION 4 • PROTECTION AND CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4 • PROTECTION AND CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using Protection and Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SETTING GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Setting BESTlogic Settings, Setting Group Control Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
SL-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
SG-SGCON Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
SP-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Logic Override, Setting Group Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
CS/CO-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Retrieving Setting Group Status Information From the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
50T Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection with Settable Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
BESTlogic Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
SL-x50T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Operating Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
S<g>-50T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Retrieving Logic Output Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
51 Time Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
BESTlogic Settings for Time Overcurrent Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
SL-x51 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Operating Setting’s for Time Overcurrent Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
S<g>-x51 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Setting Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
SP-CURVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Retrieving Logic Output Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Negative Sequence Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Negative Sequence Coordination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Delta/Wye Transformer Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
BF BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Setting BESTlogic, BF Breaker Failure Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
SL-BF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Setting Operational Settings, BF (Breaker Failure) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
SP-BF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
RECLOSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Reclose Initiate (RI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Breaker Status (STAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Reclose Wait (WAIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Drive to Lockout/Block Recloser (DTL/BLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Close (79C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Recloser Running (79RNG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Lockout (79LO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Reclose Failure (79F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Recloser Sequence Control Block (79SCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Recloser BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
SL-79 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Recloser Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
S<g>-79 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Sequence Controlled Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
S<g>-79SCB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

BE1-851 Protection and Control i

 Zone Sequence Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
SP-79ZONE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
GENERAL PURPOSE LOGIC TIMERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Mode 1, Pickup/Dropout Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Mode 2, One-Shot Nonretriggerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Mode 3, One-Shot Retriggerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Mode 4, Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Mode 5, Integrating Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Mode 6, Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
BESTlogic Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
SL-x62 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Operating Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
S<g>-62/162 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Retrieving 62/162 Output Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
VIRTUAL SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
43 Virtual Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
BESTlogic Settings for x43 Virtual Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
SL-x43 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
CS/CO-x43 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
BESTlogic Settings for 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
SL-101 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Breaker Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
CS/CO-101Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Figures
Figure 4-1. Setting Group Control Function Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Figure 4-2. Input Control Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-3. Input Control Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-4. Automatic Operation Based on Load Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-5. Automatic Based on Cold Load Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-6. 50TP Function Block Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Figure 4-7. 51 Time Overcurrent Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Figure 4-8. Phase-to-Phase Fault Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Figure 4-9. Sequence Components For An A-B Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-10. BF Breaker Failure Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Figure 4-11. 79 Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Figure 4-12. Recognition Dropout and Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4-13. S#-79SCB=1/2/3/4/5 Logic Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Figure 4-14. S#-79SCB=2/3/4/5 Logic Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Figure 4-15. 62/162 Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Figure 4-16. Mode 1, Pickup/Dropout Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-17. Mode 2, One-Shot Nonretriggerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-18. Mode 3, One-Shot Retriggerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-19. Mode 4, Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-20. Mode 5, Integrating Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Figure 4-21. Mode 6, One-shot Nonretriggerable latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Figure 4-22. 43 Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Figure 4-23. 101 Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Figure 4-24. 101 Control Switch State Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

ii Protection and Control BE1-851

Tables
Table 4-1. Setting Group Control Function BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Table 4-2. Setting Group Binary Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Table 4-3. Setting Group Control Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Table 4-4. SL-x50T Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Table 4-5. Instantaneous Overcurrent Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-6. Time Overcurrent Function BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Table 4-7. Time Overcurrent Function Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Table 4-8. Definitions for Equations 4-6 and 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Table 4-9. Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Table 4-10. BF Breaker Failure Function BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Table 4-11. BF Breaker Failure Function Operational Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Table 4-12. Recloser BESTLogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Table 4-13. Zone Sequence Coordination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Table 4-14. 62/162 BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Table 4-15. 62/162 Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Table 4-16. x43 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Table 4-17. 101 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Equations
Equation 4-1. Time OC Characteristics for Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Equation 4-2. Time OC Characteristics for Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

BE1-851 Protection and Control iii

SECTION 4 • PROTECTION AND CONTROL

INTRODUCTION
BE1-851 relays provide many functions that can be used to protect and control power system equipment
in and around a protected zone.
BE1-851 type H protection functions include:
 Instantaneous Overcurrent with Settable Time Delay (50TP, 50TN, 50TQ, 150TP, 150TN, 150TQ)
 Time-Overcurrent (51P, 51N, 51Q)
 Breaker Failure (BF)
 General Purpose Logic Timers (62, 162)
BE1-851 type G protection functions include:
 Instantaneous Overcurrent with Settable Time Delay (50TP, 150TP, 50TN, 150TN, 250TN, 350TN)
 Time-Overcurrent (51P, 51N, 151N)
 Breaker Failure (BF)
 General Purpose Logic Timers (62, 162)
BE1-851 control functions include:
 Virtual Selector Switches (43, 143, 243, 343)
 Virtual Breaker Control Switches (101)
Four settings groups allow coordination to be adapted for changes in operating conditions. Setting groups
can be selected using automatic or programmable logic criteria.

Using Protection and Control Functions

Three steps must be taken before using a protection or control function block.
 The function block must be enabled in the active logic scheme by the SL-<function> command.
 Function inputs and outputs must be connected properly in a logic scheme.
 Function characteristics or settings must be programmed and based on the specific application
requirements.
If a preprogrammed logic scheme is used in a typical application, items 1 and 2 may be skipped. Most
preprogrammed schemes are general in nature. Unneeded capabilities can be disabled by a setting of zero.
For example, if the second negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent function is enabled but not
needed, disable it by setting the 150TQ pickup setting at zero (S#-150TQ=0).
More information about the individual function blocks of item 1 is provided in this section. Information
pertaining to items 2 and 3 is available in Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic and Section 8,
Application.

SETTING GROUPS
BE1-851 relays provide a normal setting group, SG0, and up to
three auxiliary setting groups SG1, SG2, and SG3. Auxiliary
setting groups allow adapting the coordination settings to Mode =
optimize them for a predictable situation. Sensitivity and time 0-disable SG0
coordination settings can be adjusted to optimize sensitivity or 1-discrete select
SETTING
2-binary select SG1
clearing time based upon source conditions or to improve GROUP
security during overload conditions. The possibilities for D0 LOGIC
SG2
improving protection by eliminating compromises in coordination D1 SL-GROUP
settings with adaptive setting groups is endless. Figure 4-1 D2 SG3
outlines the setting group control function block. D3
AUTO D2840-21.vsd
05-28-99
The group of settings that are active at any point in time is
controlled by the setting group control function block. This Figure 4-1. Setting Group Control
function block allows for manual (logic) or automatic control. Function Block.
BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-1
When manual control is enabled by the AUTO logic input not being asserted, the function block monitors
logic inputs D0, D1, D2, and D3 and changes the active setting group according to the status of these inputs.
These inputs can be connected to logic expressions such as contact sensing inputs. When automatic
control is enabled by the AUTO logic input being asserted, the relay monitors loading or unbalance
conditions and changes the active setting group according to the switch to and return criteria set. The
change criteria for manual and automatic control is described in more detail later in this section.
The function block has four logic variable outputs, SG0, SG1, SG2, and SG3. The appropriate variable is
asserted when each setting group is active. These logic variables can be used in programmable logic to
modify the logic based upon which setting group is active. For example, it may be desired for the 51P to trip
the low side breaker through OUT2 under normal conditions, but to trip the 86T lockout relay through OUT1
when in setting group 3. The logic for OUT1 would include the term 51PT*SG3 so that 51PT only actuates
OUT1 when SG3 is asserted.
The setting group control function block also has an alarm output variable SGC (Setting Group Changed).
This output is asserted whenever the relay switches from one setting group to another. The SGC alarm bit
is asserted for the SGCON time setting. This output can be used in the programmable alarms function if it
is desired to monitor when the relay changes to a new setting group. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarms
Functions, Alarms Function for more information on using alarm outputs.
The SGCON time setting also serves to provide anti-pump protection to prevent excessive changing
between groups. Once a change in active group has been made, another change cannot take place for two
times the SGCON setting.
When the relay switches to a new setting group, all functions are reset and initialized with the new operating
parameters. The settings change occurs instantaneously so at no time is the relay off line. The active
setting group is saved in non-volatile memory so that the relay will power up using the same setting group
as it was using when it was powered down. To prevent the relay from changing settings while a fault
condition is in process, setting group changes are blocked when the relay is in a picked-up state. Since the
relay is completely programmable, the fault condition is defined by the pickup logic expression in the fault
reporting functions. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting for more information.
The selection of the active setting group provided by this function block can also be overridden. When
the logic override is used, a setting group is made active and the relay stays in that group regardless of
the state of the automatic or manual logic control conditions.

Setting BESTlogic Settings, Setting Group Control Function Block

The logic settings for the setting group control function are provided in Table 4-1. These settings will
determine how the function selects the active setting group when manual (logic) selection is enabled.
Table 4-1. Setting Group Control Function BESTlogic Settings
Function Range/Purpose Default

Logic Mode 0=Disabled, 1=Discrete Input Selection, 0

2=Binary Coded Selection

Discrete Input 0 (D0) Logic Input Logic expression. Meaning dependent 0

upon Mode setting

Discrete Input 1 (D0) Logic Input Logic expression. Meaning dependent 0

upon Mode setting

Discrete Input 2 (D0) Logic Input Logic expression. Meaning dependent 0

upon Mode setting

Discrete Input 3 (D0) Logic Input Logic expression. Meaning dependent 0

upon Mode setting

Auto/Manual (AUTO) Logic Input Logic expression. When true enables 0

automatic control and when false enables
logic control

4-2 Protection and Control BE1-851

Manual (logic) control reads the status of the logic inputs to the setting group control function block to
determine what setting group should be active. For the logic inputs to determine which setting group should
be active, the AUTO input must be a logic 0. The function block logic mode setting determines how it reads
these logic inputs. There are three possible logic modes as shown in Table 4-1.
When the setting group control function block is enabled for Mode 1, there is a direct correspondence
between each discrete logic input and the setting group that will be selected. That is, when input D0 is
asserted SG0 will be selected, and when input D1 is asserted SG1 will be selected, etc. The active setting
group latches in after the input is read so they can be pulsed. It is not necessary that the input be
maintained. If one or more input is asserted at the same time, the numerically higher setting group will be
the one that is active. A pulse must be present for approximately one second for the setting group change
to occur. After a setting group change occurs, no setting group change can occur within two times the SGC
alarm-on time. Any pulses to the inputs will be ignored during that period.
Figure 4-2 shows an example of how the inputs are read when the setting group control function block is
enabled for Mode 1. Note that a pulse on the D3 input while D0 was also active does not cause a setting
group change to SG3 because the AUTO input is active.

D3
D2647-20
08-21-98
D2

D1

D0

AUTO

SG3

SG2

SG1

SG0

SGC

Figure 4-2. Input Control Mode 1

When the setting group control function block is enabled for Mode 2, the inputs on D0 and D1 are read as
binary encoded as shown in Table 4-2. Inputs D2 and D3 are ignored. A new coded input must be stable
for approximately 1 second for the setting group change to occur. After a setting group change occurs, no
setting group change can occur within two times the SGC alarm on time.

Table 4-2. Setting Group Binary Codes

Binary Code

D1 D0 Decimal Equivalent Setting Group

0 0 0 SG0

0 1 1 SG1

1 0 2 SG2

1 1 3 SG3

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-3

Input control mode 2 is when the active setting group is controlled by a binary signal applied to the discrete
inputs D0-D1. This requires separate logic equations for only D0 and D1 if all setting groups are to be used.
Figure 4-3 shows how the active setting group follows the binary sum of the D0 and D1 inputs except when
blocked by the AUTO input. Note that a pulse on the D1 input while D0 was also active does not cause a
setting group change to SG3 because the AUTO input is active.

D3
D2647-21
08-21-98
D2

D1

D0

AUTO

SG3

SG2

SG1

SG0

SGC

Figure 4-3. Input Control Mode 2

Figure 4-3 shows an example of how the inputs are read when the setting group control function block is
enabled for Mode 2. Note that a pulse on the D1 input while D0 was also active does not cause a setting
group change to SG3 because the AUTO input is active.
The BESTlogic settings can be made from the ASCII command interface using the SL-GROUP (settings
logic-group control) command.
SL-GROUP Command
Purpose: Used to program a logical mode of operation for the setting group control block.
Syntax: SL-GROUP[=<mode>,<D0 Logic>,<D1 Logic>,<D2 Logic>,<D3 Logic>,<AUTO Logic>]
Comments:
Example Set the setting group control such that automatic selection is overridden and emergency
overload settings (SG3) are in place when Transformer 2 is out of service. Contact sensing
input 2 is true when either the high side or low side breakers for Transformer 2 are open.
>SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,IN2,/IN2
>
or
>SL-GROUP=2,IN2,IN2,0,0,/IN2
>
Setting Operational Settings, Setting Group Control Function
The operating parameter settings for the setting group control function are provided in Table 4-3. The group
1, 2, and 3 switch to and return settings will determine how the function selects the active setting group when
automatic selection is enabled.

4-4 Protection and Control BE1-851

 Table 4-3. Setting Group Control Function Settings
Setting Range Increment Unit of Measure Default

SGC (Setting Group 0=disabled 1 Seconds 5

Change) Alarm On Time 1-10

Group 1 switch to time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 1 switch to threshold 0-150 1 % of SG0 51* Pickup 0

Group 1 return time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 1 return Threshold 0-150 1 % of SG0 51* Pickup 0

Group 1 monitored element See Note NA NA 51P

Group 2 switch to time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 2 switch to threshold 0-150 1 % of SG0 51* Pickup 0

Group 2 return time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 2 return Threshold 0-150 1 % 0

Group 2 monitored element See Note NA NA 51P

Group 3 switch to time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 3 switch to threshold 0-150 1 % 0

Group 3 return time 0=disabled 1 Minutes 0

1-60

Group 3 return Threshold 0-150 1 % 0

Group 3 monitored element See Note NA NA 51P

Note: Sensing input type H is any 51 element: 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794.
Sensing input type G is any 51 element: 51P, 51N, 151N, 791, 792, 793, 794.
The SGC ACTIVE alarm output is typically used to provide an external acknowledgment that a setting group
change occurred. If SCADA was used to change the active group, then this signal could be monitored to
verify that the operation occurred. The SGC ACTIVE alarm output ON time is user programmable and
should be set greater than the SCADA scan rate. This can be set from the optional HMI using screen 6.7,
SETUP\AUX_STGS and from the ASCII command interface using the SG-SGCON (settings general-SGC
Alarm on time) command.
SG-SGCON Command
Purpose: Read/Program the SGC alarm output on time.
Syntax: SG-SGCON[=<time>]
Comments:
Example Set the SGC alarm output to pulse ON/TRUE for 1 sec. after a the setting group is changed.
>SG-SGCON=1
Automatic control of the active setting group allows the relay to automatically change configuration for
optimum protection based on the current system conditions. For example, in locations where seasonal
variations can cause large variations in loading, the overcurrent protection can be set with sensitive settings
during the majority of the time and switch to a setting group with lower sensitivity (higher pickups) during the
few days of the year when the loading is at peak.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-5

There are five settings for each group that are used for automatic control. Each group has a switch to
threshold and time delay, a return threshold and time delay, and a monitored element. The switch to and
return thresholds are a percentage of the SG0 pickup setting for the monitored element. The monitored
element can be any of the 51 protective functions. Thus, if you wish to switch settings based upon loading,
you could set it to monitor 51P. If you wish to switch settings based upon unbalance, you could set it to
monitor 51N or 51Q. When the monitored element is 51P, any one phase must be above the switch to
threshold for the switch to time delay for the criteria to be met. All phases must be below the return threshold
for the return time delay for the return criteria to be met.
Figure 4-4 shows an example of using the automatic setting group selection settings to change settings
groups based upon loading. Note that the AUTO input must be at a TRUE logic state in order to allow the
automatic logic to operate. At time = 0, current begins to increase. When current reaches 75 percent of
pickup, setting group two begins timing (30 minutes). When current reaches 90 percent of pickup, setting
group three begins timing (5 minutes). After 5 minutes, at time = 37, with the current still above setting group
three threshold, setting group three becomes active and the setting group change output pulses. At time
= 55, setting group two timer times out but no setting group change occurs because a higher setting group
takes precedence. The faint dashed line for SG2, between time = 55 and 75 shows that setting group two
would be active except for setting group three. Current decreases to 75 percent at time = 70, and setting
group three return timer begins timing. Current varies but stays below 75 percent for 5 minutes and at time
= 75, setting group two becomes active and the setting change output pulses. After 20 minutes, setting
group zero becomes active and the setting change output pulses.
This function can also be used to automatically change the active setting group for cold load pickup
conditions. If the switch to threshold for a group is set to 0%, the function will switch to that group when
there is no current flow for the time delay period indicating that the breaker is open or the circuit source is
out of service. The threshold for this is 10% nominal rating of the relay current input.

Load Current
as % of S0-51 <pickup>
150

140
SP-GROUP2=30,75,20,70,51P
130
SP-GROUP3=5,90,5,75,51P
120

110

100

90

80

70

60 30
5 5
50
20
40

30

20

10
TIME
(MINUTES)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

SG3

SG2

SG1

SG0
D2837-23.vsd
01-07-99
SGC

Figure 4-4. Automatic Operation Based on Load Change

4-6 Protection and Control BE1-851

Figure 4-5 shows how the active setting group follows the load current and time delay settings for setting
group 1. Note that the AUTO input must be at a TRUE (1) logic state in order to allow the automatic logic
to operate. When the breaker opens, the load current falls to zero at time = 15 minutes. After 10 minutes,
setting group one becomes active and the setting group change output pulses TRUE. When the breaker
is closed at time = 40 minutes, load current increases to approximately 90 percent of pickup. As the load
current decreases to 50 percent of pickup, the setting group one return timer begins timing. After ten
minutes, setting group one output goes FALSE, the setting group returns to setting group zero, and the
setting group change output pulses TRUE.
When the switch to criteria is met for more than one setting group at a time, the function will use the
numerically higher of the enabled settings groups. If the switch to time delay setting is set to 0 for a setting
group, automatic control for that group is disabled. If the return time delay setting is set to 0 for a setting
group, automatic return for that group is disabled and the relay will remain in that settings group until
returned manually of by logic override control.

Load Current
as % of S0-51 <pickup>
150

140

130
SP-GROUP1=10, 0, 10, 50, 51P
120
SP-GROUP2=0,0,0,0,0
110
SP-GROUP3=0,0,0,0,0
100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10 10 10
0 TIME
(0.5A) (MINUTES)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

SG3

SG2

SG1

SG0
D2840-22.vsd
01-28-99
SGC

Figure 4-5. Automatic Based on Cold Load Pickup

The automatic setting group control parameters can be set from the optional HMI using screen 6.7.1, 6.7.2,
6.7.3, SETUP\AUX\SG# and from the ASCII command interface using the SP-GROUP (settings
protection-group control) command.
SP-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/change automatic control settings for setting group
Syntax: SP-GROUP[n][=<switch time>,<switch level>,<return time>,<return level>,<prot element>]
Comments:
Example Read the setting group automatic operation settings.
>SP-GROUP
SP-GROUP1=30,0,15,75,51P; SP-GROUP2=15,75,5,70,151N
SP-GROUP3=5,70,5,50,51N

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-7

 SG1 is set to switch to cold load pickup settings when the loading in the CT circuit monitored by the 51P
protective function is 0 for 30 minutes. It will return after the current drops to 75% of SG0, 51P setting
for 15 minutes
SG2 is set to switch to overload settings when loading in the CT circuit monitored by the 151P protective
function is above 75% of the SG0, 151P pickup setting for 15 minutes. It will return after the current
drops below 70% for 5 minutes.
SG3 is set to switch to unbalance settings when the ground unbalance in the CT circuit monitored by
the 51N protective element is above 70% of the SG0 51N pickup setting for 5 minutes. It will return after
the ground unbalance current drops below 50% for 5 minutes.

Logic Override, Setting Group Control Function

Control of the active setting group from the setting group control function can be overridden. This can be
accomplished from the optional HMI from screen 2.3, \CTRL\SG or from the ASCII command interface using
the select before operate CS/CO-GROUP (control select-setting group/control operate-setting group)
command. A setting group change using logic override control is also blocked for two times the SGC on
setting after a setting group change and when the fault reporting pickup expression is true. The setting
group change takes place immediately without having to execute an exit-save settings command.
A group override alarm bit is set in the programmable alarm function when the logic has been overridden.
This output can be used in the programmable alarms function if it is desired to monitor when the function
has been overridden. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Functions, Alarms Function for more information
on using alarm outputs.
CS/CO-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/change active setting group
Syntax: CS/CO-GROUP[=<n>/L]
Comments: <n> = new setting group number 0-3
L = returns group control to the setting group control function.
The group control commands require the use of Select Before Operate logic. First the command must be
selected using the CS-GROUP command. After the command is selected there is a 30 second window
during which the CO-GROUP control command can be entered. The control selected and operation
selected must exactly match or the command is blocked. If the command is not entered within the 30
second window, the command is blocked. If the control command is blocked, an error message is output.

Example 1. Read the current status of setting group override which is overridden and held in SG0.
>CO-GROUP
0
>
Example 2. Override logic control and change the active setting group to SG3.
>CS-GROUP=3
GROUP=3 SELECTED
>CO-GROUP=3
GROUP=3 EXECUTED
>
Example 3. Return control of the active setting group to the setting group control function.
>CS-GROUP=L
GROUP=L SELECTED
>CO-GROUP=L
GROUP=L EXECUTED
>
Example 4. Group override error due to time out of select.
>CS-GROUP=3
GROUP=3 SELECTED
>CO-GROUP=3
ERROR:NO SELECT
?

4-8 Protection and Control BE1-851

Retrieving Setting Group Status Information From the Relay
The active setting group can be determined from the optional HMI from screen 1.4.4,
\STAT\OPER\ACTIVEG. The setting group can be determined from the ASCII command interface using the
RG-STAT or RG-GRPACTIVE commands. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status
Reporting for more information.
The status of logic override can be determined from the optional HMI from screen 2.3, \CTRL\SG. The
status of logic override can be determined from the ASCII command interface using the RG-STAT or
RG-GRPCNTRL commands. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting for
more information.

OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
BE1-851 overcurrent protection includes instantaneous elements for Phase, Neutral, and Negative
Sequence, as well as time-overcurrent elements for Phase, Neutral, and Negative Sequence.

50T Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection with Settable Time Delay

There are two independent BESTlogic function blocks for phase (50TP, 150TP), two for neutral (50TN,
150TN), and two for negative sequence (50TQ, 150TQ) instantaneous overcurrent protection. Sensing
input type G relays have four neutral elements and two phase elements. Sensing input type H units have
two neutral, two phase, and two negative sequence elements. Each function block can be connected to any
of the CT input circuits by the BESTlogic mode setting. The instantaneous overcurrent functions are labeled
50T and 150T because each function has an adjustable time delay. If a function block has a time delay
setting of zero, then that function block will operate as an instantaneous overcurrent relay.
A 50TP instantaneous overcurrent function
block has two logic outputs, pickup and trip.
Each function block has a Block (BLK) input that
can be used to disable the function. A
BESTlogic expression is used to define the BLK
input. When this expression is TRUE, the
function block is disabled by forcing the outputs
to logic zero and resetting the timers to zero.
This feature functions in a similar way to the
torque control contact of an electromechanical
relay. Figure 4-6. 50TP Function Block Example
Figure 4-5 illustrates a 50TP function block.Note that the logic outputs break down a follows.
50T<Element>, <Function>. Where element can be phase (P), neutral (N), or negative sequence (Q) and
function can be trip (T) or pickup (P).
A Logic Mode input allows each instantaneous overcurrent function block to be enabled or disabled. The
neutral function blocks (50TN, 150TN, 250TN, 350TN) have additional mode selections. Function block
operation can be based on calculated three-phase current values or on measured current through the
neutral CT input. More information about logic mode selections is provided in the following Bestlogic Settings
for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks subsection.
Each instantaneous overcurrent function has a pickup and time delay setting. When the measured current
increases above the pickup threshold, the pickup output (x50TpPU) becomes TRUE and the timer starts.
If the current stays above pickup for the duration of the time delay setting, the trip output (x50TpT) becomes
TRUE. If the current decreases below the dropout ratio, which is 95 percent, the timer is reset to zero.
The phase overcurrent protective functions include three independent comparators and timers, one for each
phase. If the current increases above the pickup setting for any one phase, the pickup output asserts. If the
trip condition is TRUE for any one phase, the trip logic output asserts.
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target for the
appropriate phase when the protective function trip output is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic
expression is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting for more information

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-9

about target reporting.

BESTlogic Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks

Logic settings for the 50T and 150T functions are made using the SL-x50T (settings logic-50T and 150T)
command. The settings of this command enable the x50T functions by connecting them to the CT input
circuits and provide blocking control as determined by the logic expression assigned to the BLK input. The
SL-x50T command is also used to define the way the x50TN function blocks obtain neutral current values.
SL-x50T command settings are summarized in Table 4-4.

Table 4-4. SL-x50T Command Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default
0 = Disabled
mode 0
1 = Enabled (x50TP, x50TN, and x50TQ)
Logic expression that disables function
BLK logic 0
when TRUE.
SL-x50T Command
Purpose: Read or set logic for instantaneous overcurrent function blocks.
Syntax: SL-x50T[p[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]]
Comments: x = 1 for 150 or no entry for 50
p = element type P (Phase), N (Neutral), or Q (Negative Sequence)

SL-x50T Command Examples

EXAMPLE1. Read the 50T phase element settings.
>SL-50TP
>1,0
These settings indicate that the 50T phase element is enabled and has no blocking.
EXAMPLE2. Change the 50TN logic so that a CT is selected. Block the 50TN function when input 1 is closed
(TRUE).
>SL-50TN=1,IN1

NOTE
If the relay has 5 ampere phase inputs and a 1 ampere independent neutral input, the
valid pickup setting range of the neutral overcurrent functions will depend on the logic
mode setting which designates whether the three-phase residual or the independent
neutral input is to be monitored. If changing logic schemes or settings causes a neutral
overcurrent setting to be OUT OF RANGE, the out of range setting will be forced in-
range by multiplying or dividing the current setting by 5.

Operating Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Blocks

Operating settings for the 50T and 150T functions consist of pickup and time delay values. The pickup value
determines the level of current required for the function block to start timing toward a trip. Time delays can
be set in milliseconds, seconds, or cycles. The default is milliseconds if no unit of measure is specified.
Minimum timing resolution is to the nearest one-quarter cycle. A time delay setting of zero makes the
element instantaneous with no intentional time delay. Operating settings are made through the ASCII
command interface using the S<g>-x50T command. Settings can also be changed or viewed at the front
panel HMI using screens 5.x.3.1 through 5.x.3.6, where x equals 1 for setting group 0, 2 for setting group
1, 3 for setting group 2, and 4 for setting group 3. Instantaneous overcurrent operating settings are
summarized in Table 4-5.

4-10 Protection and Control BE1-851

 Table 4-5. Instantaneous Overcurrent Operating Settings
Range
Unit of
Setting 1A 5A Increment Measure Default
pu 0 = disabled 0 = disabled 0.01 for 0.01 to 9.99 Secondary
(pickup) 0.1 to 30 0.5 to 150 0.1 for 10.0 to 99.9 Amps 0
1.0 for 100 to 150

0 to 999 milliseconds 1 milliseconds

0.1 for 0.1 to 9.9 seconds

td 0.1 to 60 seconds
1.0 for 10 to 60 seconds 0
(time delay)
0 to 3600 cycles (60 Hz)
7 cycles
0 to 2500 cycles (50 Hz)

7 Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the HMI. All
time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time
delays entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds. Increment precision after
conversion is limited to that appropriate for each of those units of measure.
S<g>-50T Command
Purpose: Read or set protection settings for instantaneous overcurrent functions.
Syntax: S<g>-<f>50T[<p>][=<pu(A)>[,<td(m)>]]
Comments: g = setting group 0, 1, 2, or 3. Use # as a wildcard to read or change all groups.
f = 1 for 150 or no entry for 50

S<g>-50T Command Examples

EXAMPLE1. Set the group 0 50T phase setting at 25 amperes and 0 delay time.
>S0-50TP=25,0
EXAMPLE2. Set the 150TQ pickup for all setting groups at 2 amperes and set the time delay at 10
seconds.
>S#-150TQ=2,10s
If time delay settings are made in cycles, they are converted to seconds or milliseconds (per the nominal
frequency setting stored in EEPROM) before being stored. See Section 3, Input and Output Functions,
Current Measurement Functions for more information about this setting. If the nominal frequency setting is
being changed from the default (60 hertz) and time delay settings are being set in cycles, the frequency
setting should be entered and saved before making any time delay settings changes.
For setting up the negative sequence overcurrent protection, see Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
later in this section.

Retrieving Logic Output Status Information from the Relay

The status of each logic variable can be determined through the ASCII command interface using the
RG-STAT (report general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status
Reporting for more information.

51 Time Overcurrent Functions

Sensing Input type G relays have one function block for phase (51P), one for neutral (51N), and one for
negative sequence (51Q) inverse time overcurrent protection. Sensing Input type H relays have one function
block for phase (51P) and two for neutral (51N, 151N).

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-11

Figure 4-7 shows the 51P (phase time overcurrent) as a
typical 51 function. Each of the four independent function D 2849 -15
blocks has two logic outputs 51pPU (picked up) and #51pT M o de = 06-17-9 9
(trip) where n indicates whether it is a P (phase), N (neutral), 0-disab le PHASE
or Q (negative sequence) and the # differentiates between the 1-ena ble TO C
two protective functions (50 and 150). (5 1P ) 5 1P T
A Block logic input is provided to each function block that can B LK 5 1P P U
be used to disable the function. When this expression is true,
the function is disabled by forcing the outputs to logic zero and
resetting the timers to zero. For example, this could be used Figure 4-7. 51 Time
similar to a torque control contact on an electromechanical Overcurrent Function Block
relay.
Each inverse time overcurrent function has a pickup, a timedial, and a curve setting. See Appendix A,
Time Current Characteristics for details on each of the curves available. To make the protective element
use integrated reset and emulate an electromechanical induction disk reset characteristic, the user can
append an R to the selected time current characteristic curve. A programmable curve is available that can
be used to create a custom curve by selecting coefficients in the inverse time characteristic equation.
When the measured current is above the pickup threshold, the pickup logic output, 51PPU (for example)
= TRUE and inverse timing is started per the selected characteristic. If the current stays above pickup until
the function times out, the trip logic output, 51PT (for example) = TRUE. If the current falls below the dropout
ratio, which is 95%, the function will either reset instantaneously or begin timing to reset depending on the
user's setting.
The phase overcurrent protective functions include three independent comparators and timers, one for each
phase. If the current increases above the pickup setting for any one phase, the pickup output asserts. If the
trip condition is TRUE for any one phase, the trip logic output asserts.
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target for all phases
that are above pickup when the protective function trip output is true and the fault recording function trip logic
expression is true. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions for more
details on the target reporting function.

BESTlogic Settings for Time Overcurrent Function Blocks

The logic settings for the 51 inverse time overcurrent functions are provided in Table 4-6. These settings
will enable the function block by attaching it to one of the CT input circuits and provide blocking control as
determined by the logic expression assigned to the block input.

Table 4-6. Time Overcurrent Function BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default

Logic
Mode 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled 1
(mode)

Block Logic expression that disables function 0

Logic when TRUE.
(BLK logic)

BESTlogic settings for the time overcurrent functions can be made using the SL-x51 command.

SL-x51 Command
Purpose: Read or set logic for time overcurrent functions.
Syntax: SL-x51[<p>][=<mode>,<BLK logic>]
Comments: p = element type P/N/Q. No entry for p reads or changes all x51 logic settings. X=1 for 151
elements and is left blank for 51 elements.
4-12 Protection and Control BE1-851
SL-x51 Command Examples
EXAMPLE1. Read the logic for the 51P functions.
>SL-51P
>1,0
These settings indicate that the 51P function is enabled and has no blocking.
EXAMPLE2. Change the 51N logic to be blocked when input 1 is closed (TRUE).
>SL-51N=,IN1

Operating Setting’s for Time Overcurrent Function Blocks

The operating parameter settings for the 51 overcurrent functions are provided in Table 4-7.
See Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection later in this section for information about setting the negative
sequence overcurrent protection.

Table 4-7. Time Overcurrent Function Operating Settings

Range
Unit of
Setting 1A 5A Increment Measure Default
Pickup (pu) 0 = disabled 0 = disabled 0.01 for 0.01 to 9.99 Secondary
0
0.1 to 3.2 0.5 to 16 0.1 for 10.0 to 16.0 Amps

Time Dial (td) 0.0 to 9.9 0.1 N/A 0

Curve (crv) See Appendix A N/A N/A V2

Time overcurrent operating settings can be entered at the front panel HMI using screens 5.#.4.1 through
5.#.4.5 or through the communication ports using the S<g>-x51 (setting group number-51/151) command.
S<g>-x51 Command
Purpose: Read or set time overcurrent pickup level, time delay, and curve.
Syntax: S<g>-x51n[=<pu>,<td>,<crv>]
Comments: g = setting group number 0, 1, 2, or 3. Use # as a wildcard to select all setting groups.
n = element type P/N/Q
x = 1 for 151 elements and is left blank for 51 elements.

NOTE
Changing settings while the relay is in service will return an error message (PU
CONDITION) if the new setting is within approximately 90 percent of the metered
current level. This is intended to prevent the user from inadvertently causing a trip when
changing a setting.

S<g>-x51 Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1 Read the 51 setting data for the neutral element in setting group 0.
>S0-51N
>10,2.4,S1R
The data returned indicates a pickup setting of 10 amperes, a time dial setting of 2.4, and an S1 time
dial curve with integrating reset.
EXAMPLE.2 Change the 51 neutral element of setting group 0 so that the time dial setting is 3.0.
>S0-51N=,3.0
EXAMPLE.3 Disable the negative sequence time overcurrent function for all setting groups.
>S#-51Q=0

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-13

Setting Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients
Time current characteristics for trip and reset are defined by Equation 4-1 and Equation 4-2 respectively.
These equations comply with IEEE standard C37.112-1996. The curve specific coefficients are defined for
the standard curves as listed in Appendix A, Time-Current Characteristics. When time current characteristic
curve P is selected, the coefficients used in the equation are those defined by the user. Definitions for these
equations are provided in Table 4-8.

AD RD
TT = + BD+ K TR =
2
M N
-C M -1
Equation 4-1. Time OC Equation 4-2. Time OC
Characteristics for Trip Characteristics for Reset

Table 4-8. Definitions for Equations 4-6 and 4-7

Parameter Description Explanation
TT Time to trip Time that the 51 function will take to time out and trip.
D Time dial setting Time dial setting for the 51 function.
M Multiple of pickup Measured current in multiples of pickup. Timing algorithm has
a dynamic range of 0 to 40 times pickup.
A Coefficient specific Affects the effective range of the time dial.
to selected curve
B Coefficient specific Affects a constant term in the timing equation. Has greatest
to selected curve effect on curve shape at high multiples of tap.
C Coefficient specific Affects the multiple of PU where the curve would approach
to selected curve infinity if allowed to continue below pickup. Has greatest effect
on curve shape near pickup.
N Exponent specific to Affects how inverse the characteristic is. Has greatest effect on
selected curve curve shape at low to medium multiples of tap.
K Constant Characteristic minimum delay term.
TR Time to reset Relevant if 51 function is set for integrating reset.
R Coefficient specific Affects the speed of reset when integrating reset is selected.
to selected curve

Curve coefficients are entered using the SP-CURVE (Settings Protection-programmable curve) command.
Table 4-9 lists the programmable curve settings.
Table 4-9. Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients
Unit of
Setting Range Increment Measure Default
A Coefficient 0 to 600 0.0001 N/A 0.2663
B Coefficient 0 to 25 0.0001 N/A 0.0339
C Coefficient 0.0000 to 0.0001 N/A 1.0000
1.0000
N Coefficient 0.5 to 2.5 0.0001 N/A 1.2969
R Coefficient 0 to 30 0.0001 N/A 0.5000

4-14 Protection and Control BE1-851

SP-CURVE Command
Purpose: Reads or changes the user-programmable 51 curve parameters.
Syntax: SP-CURVE[=<A>,<B>,<C>,<N>,<R>]
SP-CURVE Command Example
Read the programmable 51 curve settings.
SP-CURVE
1,0,0,2,0

Retrieving Logic Output Status Information from the Relay

The status of each logic variable can be determined from the ASCII command interface using the RG-STAT
(report general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting
for more information.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
For years, protection engineers have enjoyed increased sensitivity to phase-to-ground unbalances with the
application of ground relays. Ground relays can be set more sensitively than phase relays because a
balanced load has no ground (3I0) current component. The negative sequence elements can provide similar
increased sensitivity to phase-to-phase faults because a balanced load has no negative sequence (I2)
current component.
Negative Sequence Pickup Settings
A typical setting for the negative sequence elements might be one-half the phase pickup setting in order to
achieve equal sensitivity to phase-to-phase faults as to three-phase faults. This number comes from the fact
that the magnitude of the current for a phase-to-phase fault is 3/2 (87%) of the three-phase fault at the
same location. This is illustrated in Figure 4-8.

Z
I3 P h F A U L T
V
I3 P h F A U L T = V
Z

Z
D2843-04.vsd
02-08-99

Z
IP h - P h F A U L T
V
IP h - P h F A U L T = V* √3 = I3 P h F A U L T* √3
Z *2 2

Figure 4-8. Phase-to-Phase Fault Magnitude

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-15

The phase-to-phase fault current is made up of both positive and negative sequence components as shown
in Figure 4-9. For a phase-to-phase fault, the magnitude of the negative sequence component is 1/ 3 (58%)
of the magnitude of the total phase current. When these two factors ( 3/2 and 1/ 3) are combined, the Ö3
factors cancel, which leaves the one-half factor.

D2843-05.vsd
02-02-99
IC1
IB2 I A2 = |I 2 | = I A Phase/ √3

I B Phase I A Phase

IB1 IA1
IC2
IC Phase = 0

Pos. Seq. (I 1 ) Neg. Seq. (I 2 ) Phase Current

Figure 4-9. Sequence Components For An A-B Fault

Negative Sequence Coordination Settings

The 51Q settings should be checked for coordination with phase-only sensing devices such as downstream
fuses and reclosers and/or ground relays. To plot the negative sequence time current characteristics on the
same plot for the phase devices, you need to multiply the negative sequence element pickup value by the
correct multiplier. The multiplier is the ratio of phase current to negative sequence current for the fault type
for which you are interested. To plot the negative sequence time current characteristics on the same plot
for the ground devices, you need to multiply the pickup value by the multiplier for phase-to-ground faults.
Fault Type Multiplier
Ph-Ph m = 1.732
Ph-Ph-G m > 1.732
Ph-G m=3
3-Phase m = Infinity
For example, a down-stream phase 51 element has a pickup of 150 amperes. The up-stream 51Q element
has a pickup of 200 amperes. To check the coordination between these two elements for a phase-to-phase
fault, the phase overcurrent element would be plotted normally with pickup at 150 amperes. The 51Q
element would be shifted to the right by the appropriate factor m. Thus, the characteristic would be plotted
on the coordination graph with pickup at: (200 amperes)*1.732 = 346 amperes.
Generally, for coordination with down-stream phase overcurrent devices, phase-to-phase faults are the most
critical to consider. All other fault types result in an equal or greater shift of the time current characteristic
curve to the right on the plot.
Delta/Wye Transformer Application.
Often, the phase relays on the delta side of a delta/wye transformer must provide backup protection for faults
on the wye side. For faults not involving ground, this is not a problem since the phase relays will see 1.0
per unit fault current for three-phase faults and 2/ 3 (1.15) per unit fault current for phase-to-phase faults.
However, for faults involving ground, the sensitivity is reduced because the zero sequence components are
trapped in the delta and not seen by the delta-side phase relays. The phase relays will see only 1/ 3 (0.577)
per unit current for phase-to-ground faults.
Negative sequence overcurrent protection is immune to the effect caused by the zero sequence trap and
30° phase shift provided by the delta/wye transformer. For a phase-to-ground fault, the magnitude of the
negative sequence components is 1/3 the magnitude of the total fault current. On a per unit basis, this is
true for the fault current on the delta side of the transformer as well. (The previous statement specifies per

4-16 Protection and Control BE1-851

unit since the actual magnitudes will be adjusted by the inverse of the voltage ratio of the delta/wye
transformer.) Thus, backup protection for phase-to-ground faults on the wye side of the transformer can be
obtained by using negative sequence overcurrent protection on the delta side with the pickup sensitivity set
at 1/3 per unit of the magnitude of the phase-to-ground fault for which you wish to have backup protection.

BF BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

BE1-851 relays provide one function block for breaker failure
protection. This function includes a timer and a current detector. Mode =
0-disable BFT
Figure 4-10 shows the BF function block. The function block has
two outputs BFPU (breaker failure pickup) and BFT (breaker SL-BF BFPU
failure trip). LOGIC
INI
An INI (Initiate) logic input is provided to start the breaker failure
timer. When this expression is true and current is flowing in the
BLK
assigned input circuit, the breaker failure timer is started. D2843-06.vsd
02-02-99
Supervision of the initiate signal can be designed in BESTlogic.
Figure 4-10. BF Breaker Failure
Function Block
A Block logic input is provided to block operation of the breaker
failure protection. When this expression is true, the function is disabled. For example, this may be an input
wired to a test switch such that breaker failure protection is disabled when the primary protective elements
are being tested to prevent inadvertent backup tripping during testing.
The breaker failure timer is stopped by the fast-dropout current detector function. See Section 3 Input and
Output Functions, Current Measurement Functions for more details on this function. The fast-dropout
current detector is designed to directly determine when the current in the poles of the breaker has been
interrupted without having to wait for the fault current samples to clear the one-cycle filter time used by the
normal current measurement function. This function has less than one cycle dropout time. The timer can
also be stopped by removal of the initiate signal or by the block logic input being asserted.
The current detector sensitivity is fixed at 10% nominal. A traditional breaker failure relay includes a fault
detector function which serves two independent purposes: current detector and fault detector. A current
detector is generally included to determine that the current has been successfully interrupted in all poles of
the breaker to stop breaker failure timing. The secondary function of a traditional fault detector is to provide
an independent confirmation that a fault exists on the system to increase security from misoperation caused
by an inadvertent initiate signal. To do this, a fault detector by definition must be set above load current--
reducing it’s sensitivity as a current detector. Since this breaker failure timer is included in a multifunction
protection system, fault detector supervision is not required.
If you are using external relays to initiate the breaker failure timer, it may be desirable to include fault
detector supervision of the initiate signal using an instantaneous overcurrent function in BESTlogic. For
example, if it is desired that certain initiate signals be supervised by a fault detector, it is possible to AND
them with one of the 50T protective functions using a virtual output expression. In other applications, it may
be desirable to have breaker failure timing with no current detector supervision. In this case, one of the
general purpose logic timers (device 62) can be used as a breaker failure timer. See Section 8, Application,
Application Tips for more details on this application.
When the breaker failure timer is picked up, the BFPU logic output is true. This output would typically be
used as a re-trip signal to the protected breaker. This can provide an independent tripping signal to the
breaker that may also open the breaker to prevent backup tripping.
If the initiate logic expression remains true for the duration of the breaker failure delay time and the current
detector is still picked up, the BFT output is asserted. This output would normally be used to trip an 86F
lockout relay which will trip and prevent closing of adjacent breakers and/or key transfer trip transmitters.
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target when the
protective function trip output is true and the fault recording function trip logic expression is true. See
Section 6 Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions for more details on the target reporting
function.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-17

An alarm variable is also provided in the programmable alarms function that can be used to indicate an
alarm condition when the breaker failure protection trips. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions,
Alarms Function for more details on the alarm reporting function.
Setting BESTlogic, BF Breaker Failure Function Block
The logic settings for the BF Breaker Failure function are provided in Table 4-10. These settings will enable
the function block by attaching it to one of the CT input circuits and provide initiate and blocking control as
determined by the logic expressions assigned to those inputs.

Table 4-10. BF Breaker Failure Function BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default
0=Disabled
Logic Mode 0
1=Enabled
INI (Initiate) Logic
Logic expression. Disables function when true 0
Input
Block Logic Input Logic expression. Disables function when true 0

The BESTlogic settings can be made from the ASCII command interface using the SL-BF (settings logic-
Breaker Failure) commands.
SL-BF Command

Purpose: Used to program a logical mode of operation for the Breaker Failure protection block.
Syntax: SL-BF[= <mode>, <INI logic>, <BLK logic>]
Comments:
Example 1.Read 50BF Logic (enabled winding 1, initiate controlled by input 4 and no blocking)
>SL-BF
1,IN4,0
>
Example 2. Change BF Logic to initiate if the TRIP output closes (VO1=1).
>SL-BF=,VO1
>
Setting Operational Settings, BF (Breaker Failure) Function
The operating parameter settings for the BF (breaker failure) function are provided in Table 4-11. This
setting is not included in the four settings groups.
The time delays can be set in milliseconds, seconds, or cycles. The default is milliseconds if no unit of
measure is specified. The minimum resolution of the timing is to the nearest 1/4 cycle. A time delay setting
of 0 makes the element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
If the time delay settings are made in cycles, they are converted to seconds or milliseconds before being
stored. This conversion is based on the nominal frequency setting stored in EEPROM. See Section 3, Input
and Output Functions, Current Measurement Functions for more information on this setting. If the user is
changing the nominal frequency setting from the default (60 Hz) and setting the time delays in cycles, the
frequency setting should be entered and saved to EEPROM first by entering E; Y.

Table 4-11. BF Breaker Failure Function Operational Settings

Unit of Default
Setting Range Increment Measure
0 = disabled
50 to 999 ms 1m milliseconds
Time Delay (td) 0
0.05 to 0.999 sec. 0.1 sec seconds
0 to 59.96 (60 Hz) or 0 to 49.97 (50 Hz) * cycles
NOTE: * Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the optional
HMI. All time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time

4-18 Protection and Control BE1-851

delays entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds. Increment precision after conversion
is limited to that appropriate for each of those units of measure.

The BF (breaker failure) setting may be entered from the optional front panel HMI from screen 5.5.1,
\PROT\GLOB\BF, or from the ASCII command interface using the SP-BF (settings protection-breaker failure)
command.
SP-BF Command
Purpose: Read/Set the breaker failure timer setting
Syntax: SP-BF[=<td [units] >]
Comments: units = m for milliseconds (default)
s for seconds
c for cycles
Example 1. Set BF time delay to 10 cycles
>SP-BF=10c
>
Example 2. Read breaker failure time delay setting after setting it in example 1. (Nominal frequency is
set to 60 hertz.)
>SP-BF
167m
>
Retrieving Logic Output Status Information From the Relay
The status of each logic variable can be determined from the ASCII command interface using the RG-STAT
(report general-status) or the RL (report logic) commands. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions,
General Status Reporting for more information.

RECLOSING
The BE1-851 reclosing function provides up to four
reclosing attempts that can be initiated by a
protective trip or by one of the contact sensing
inputs. The recloser allows supervisory control and
coordination of tripping and reclosing with other
system devices. Any of the four recloser shots can
be used to select a different setting group when the
appropriate shot is reached in a reclosing sequence.
For example, two fast 51 curves could be changed
to two slow 51 curves. Detailed information about
relay setting groups can be found earlier in this
section under the heading of Setting Groups.
Recloser function block inputs and outputs are Figure 4-11. 79 Function Block
shown in Figure 4-11 and are described in the
following paragraphs.

Reclose Initiate (RI)

The RI input is used with the 52 status input to start the reclose timers at each step of the reclosing
sequence. To start the automatic reclose timers, the RI input must be TRUE when the breaker status input
indicates that the breaker has tripped. To ensure that the RI input is recognized, a recognition dropout timer
holds the RI input TRUE for approximately 225 milliseconds after it goes to a FALSE state. This situation
might occur if the RI is driven by the trip output of a protective function. As soon as the breaker opens, the
protective function will drop out. The recognition dropout timer ensures that the RI signal will be recognized
as TRUE even if the breaker status input is slow in indicating breaker opening. Figure 4-12 illustrates the
recognition dropout logic and timing relationship.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-19

 Recognition
0 RI Dropout Time
RI
255

D2635-07
03-04-98
Initiate Holdup
Holdup Timer Reclose Timer
Timer
52 52
Status Status
Figure 4-12. Recognition Dropout and Timing

Breaker Status (STAT)

This input is used to indicate to the recloser function block that the breaker is closed. A TRUE signal at this
input indicates a closed breaker.

Reclose Wait (WAIT)

A TRUE signal at this input disables the reclosing function. In this condition, recloser timing is interrupted.
When this input returns to a FALSE state, reclosing is enabled and recloser timing resumes.

Drive to Lockout/Block Recloser (DTL/BLK)

When TRUE, this input forces the reclosing function into the Lockout position. Lockout persists for the period
defined by the Reset time after the Lockout input becomes FALSE and the breaker is closed.

Close (79C)
The 79C output becomes TRUE at the end of each reclose time delay. Any of the following conditions will
cause the 79C output to become FALSE.
 The STAT input indicates that the breaker is closed.
 The reclose fail timer times out.
 The recloser goes to Lockout.
 The Wait logic is asserted.

Recloser Running (79RNG)

The 79RNG output is TRUE when the reclose is running (i.e., not in Reset or Lockout). This output is
available to block the operation of a load tap changer on a substation transformer or voltage regulator during
the fault clearing and restoration process.

Lockout (79LO)
This output is TRUE when the recloser is in the Lockout state. It remains TRUE until the recloser goes to
the Reset state. The recloser will go to Lockout if any of the following conditions exist.
 More than the maximum number of programmed recloses are initiated before the recloser returns
to the Reset state.
 The BLK/DTL input is TRUE.
 The Reclose Fail (79F) output is TRUE.
 The maximum reclose cycle time is exceeded.

4-20 Protection and Control BE1-851

Reclose Failure (79F)
The 79F output is TRUE when the reclose fail timer times out. The reclose fail timer starts when the 79C
output becomes TRUE and is reset when the breaker closes (Status input is TRUE). The reclose fail timer
limits the duration of the 79C output signal. The 79F output remains TRUE until the recloser goes to the
Reset state.

Recloser Sequence Control Block (79SCB)

This output becomes TRUE when the sequence operation step matches one of the programmed steps
(defined with the S<g>-79SCB command) and the 79C output is TRUE or the STAT input is TRUE.

Recloser BESTlogic Settings

Reclosing is added to a protection scheme by enabling the Recloser Function Block and connecting the
inputs to the appropriate logic to provide control. This is done using the SL-79 command. The recloser logic
settings are summarized in Table 4-12. Additionally, one or more of the protection block outputs must be
connected to external block(s) that are controlled by the SL-<func> or SL-VO command.
Table 4-12. Recloser BESTLogic Settings
Function Range/Purpose Default
0 = Recloser disabled
1 = Standard power-up operation. After power-up, the STATUS logic
must be TRUE for the Reset time delay or the recloser automati-
cally goes to Lockout. If the STATUS logic stays TRUE for reset
time delay, the recloser goes to Reset.
mode 0
2 = Power-up to close. If the recloser was in the Reset state when
power was lost, and when power is restored the STATUS logic is
FALSE (breaker open) and the RI logic is TRUE, the recloser will
initiate the first reclose operation. If the STATUS logic stays TRUE
for the reset time delay, the recloser goes to Reset.
RI OR logic term to initiate the operation of the reclosing function 0
OR logic term to indicate breaker status. TRUE/1 = closed,
STATUS 0
FALSE/0 = open
WAIT OR logic term to momentarily disable but not reset the recloser 0
DTL/BLK OR logic term to disable the recloser (drive to Lockout/Block) 0

SL-79 Command
Purpose: Read or set 79 function block logic.
Syntax: SL-79[=<mode>,<RI logic>,<STATUS logic>,<WAIT logic>,<LOCKOUT logic>]
SL-79 Command Example
Read the recloser logic settings.
SL-79
1,VO1,/IN2,0,IN3
The reported settings are explained in the following paragraphs.
1 Indicates that the recloser is enabled for standard, power-up operation.
VO1 Recloser is initiated when output VO1 is TRUE.
/IN2 Breaker status is monitored at contact input 2. (Breaker is closed when IN2 is de-energized.)
0 Reclose Wait is disabled.
IN3 Energizing contact input 3 will block reclosing and drive the recloser to Lockout.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-21

Recloser Operating Settings
Recloser operating settings consist of settings for the reclose time delays, reset time delays, reclose fail time
delay, and the maximum reclose time delay. These settings can be accessed at HMI screens 5.x.7.1 through
5.x.7.5 or through the communication ports by using the S<g>-79 command.
S<g>-79 Command
Purpose: Read or set the 79 operating settings.
Syntax: S<g>-79[#][=<td>]
Comments: g = 0 for setting group 0, 1 for setting group 1, 2 for setting group 2, or 3 for setting group 3
# = 1, 2, 3, 4, R, F, or M
td = time delay in milliseconds (m), seconds (s), or cycles (c)
The # and td settings are described in the following paragraphs.
S<g>-79#, where # is 1, 2, 3, or 4, controls the automatic reclose delay which defines how long the recloser
waits before trying to reclose the breaker. The SL-79 RI logic must be TRUE and the SL-79 STATUS logic
must indicate that the breaker is open before a reclose time delay is initiated.
S<g>-79R, is the Reset time delay. If the SL-79 reset logic stays TRUE for the reset time delay, the
automatic reclose counter resets. Reset time provides a stabilizing period after a reclose has occurred
before beginning another reclose sequence.
S<g>-79F, is the Reclose Fail time delay. If, after the reclose output is TRUE, the breaker fails to close
before the 79F timer expires, the failure alarm asserts and the recloser goes to Lockout. The reclose fail
timer limits the duration of the closing signal to the breaker. If the fail timer is not desired, it can be disabled
by setting it at zero.
S<g>-79M, is the Reclose Maximum operation time. If a reclose operation isn’t completed before the
maximum operate time expires, the recloser goes to lockout. This timer limits the total fault clearing and
restoration sequence to a definable period. The 79M timer starts when the first trip command is issued from
a protective element of the relay. The 79M timer stops when the recloser is reset. If not desired, the 79M
timer can be disabled by setting it at zero.
Reclose time delay settings can be set from 100 to 999 milliseconds in 1 millisecond increments, 1 to 9.9
seconds in 0.1 second increments, 10 to 600 seconds in 1 second increments, or 6 to 36,000 cycles in 0.1
cycle increments. Default units are milliseconds (m), but cycles (c) or seconds (s) can be used by adding
the proper suffix (m/c/s) at the end of the time string. The recloser can be disabled by setting the automatic
reclose 1 time delay, S<g>-791 at 0 (zero). If any other automatic reclose delay is set at zero, then that
automatic reclose and all successive automatic reclosures are disabled.

S<g>-79 Command Example

In setting group 0, set Automatic Reclose 1 time delay at 6 cycles, Automatic Reclose 2 at 2.5 seconds, and
disable Automatic Reclose 3 and 4. Set the Reset time at 30 seconds, the Fail time for 2 minutes, and the
Max time for 2.5 minutes.
S0-791=6c; S0-792=2.5s; S0-793=0; S0-794=0;
S0-79R=30S; S0-79F=120S; S0-79M=150S

Sequence Controlled Block

The 79SCB output is TRUE when the breaker is closed, the 79 close output (79C) is TRUE, and the reclose
sequence step is enabled with a nonzero value in the S#-79SCB command. A 0 (zero) disables the 79SCB
output.
S<g>-79SCB Command
Purpose: Read or set the 79 Sequence Controlled Block output.
Syntax: S<g>-79SCB[=<step list>]
Comments: g = 0 for setting group 0, 1 for setting group 1, 2 for setting group 2, or 3 for setting group 3
step list = step number(s) 1 through 5, separated by /.

4-22 Protection and Control BE1-851

The reclose sequence steps are:
1. 79SCB TRUE during Reset and while timing to Reset after Lockout
2. 79SCB TRUE when 79C is TRUE for first reclose and while timing to Reset after first reclose
3. 79SCB TRUE when 79C is TRUE for second reclose and while timing to Reset after second reclose
4. 79SCB TRUE when 79C is TRUE for third reclose and while timing to Reset after third reclose
5. 79SCB TRUE when 79C is TRUE for fourth reclose and while timing to Reset after fourth reclose

Figure 4-13 shows a logic timing diagram showing all possible sequence control blocks enabled (TRUE).
In Figure 4-13, 79RTD is the reclose reset time delay and 79#TD is the reclose time delay where # is the
reclose shot number.

Manual Close
Closed
BREAKER STATUS

D2635-09
03-27-98
Open

RESET
79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD
TIMER

79C
RESET 791TD 792TD 793TD 794TD LOCKOUT RESET

SCB
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 1

79SCB 1 2 3 4 5 1

Figure 4-13. S#-79SCB=1/2/3/4/5 Logic Timing Diagram

S<g>-79SCB Command Example

Program the 79SCB output to be TRUE except during Reset and Lockout for all setting groups.
Figure 4-14 illustrates the logic timing diagram for this example.
S#-79SCB=2/3/4/5

Manual Close
Closed
BREAKER STATUS

D2635-10
11-29-98
Open

RESET
TIMER 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD

79C
RESET 791TD 792TD 793TD 794TD LOCKOUT RESET

SCB
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 1

79SCB 1 2 3 4 5 1

Figure 4-14. S#-79SCB=2/3/4/5 Logic Timing Diagram

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-23

Zone Sequence Coordination
To coordinate tripping and reclosing sequences with downstream protective relays and reclosers, the
BE1-851 senses fault current from downstream faults when a user programmable logic, set by the SP-
79ZONE command, picks up and then drops out without a trip output (defined with the SG-TRIGGER
command) occurring. Typically, the low-set instantaneous pickup outputs (50TPT and 50TNT) or the time-
overcurrent pickup outputs (51PPU and 51NPU) are used for the zone sequence settings (SP-
79ZONE=50TPPU+50TNPU or SP79ZONE=51PPU+51NPU).
If the upstream relay (BE1-851) senses that fault current has been interrupted by a downstream device, the
BE1-851 will increment the trip/reclose sequence by one operation. This occurs because the BE1-851
recognizes that a non-blocked low set (50TP or 50 TN) element picked up and reset before timing out to trip.
Table 4-13 summarizes the zone sequence coordination.
Table 4-13. Zone Sequence Coordination Settings
Function Range/Purpose Default

Zone Pickup The zone sequence pickup logic defines which logic elements should be 0
Logic considered zone sequence pickups. Only OR (+) logic can be used–no
AND (9) variables.

SP-79ZONE Command
Purpose: Read or set the 79 Zone Sequence Logic.
Syntax: SP-79ZONE[=<zone pickup logic>]
Comments: A logic zero disables zone sequence coordination.
Recloser zone sequence coordination detects when a fault has been cleared by a downstream recloser and
increments the upstream 79 automatic reclose count to maintain a consistent count with the other recloser.
A fault is presumed cleared downstream when one or more protective functions pickup and dropout with no
trip occurring. The zone sequence pickup logic defines which logic elements should be considered zone
sequence pickups. Only OR (+) logic can be used–no AND (*) variables. If the zone pickup logic becomes
TRUE and then FALSE without a trip output operating, then the 79 automatic reclose counter should be
incremented.

SP-79ZONE Command Example

Increment the 79 automatic reclose count if one or more 50 phase or neutral elements picks up and all are
cleared without a Trip operation.
SP-79ZONE=50TPPU+50TNPU+150TPPU+150TNPU

GENERAL PURPOSE LOGIC TIMERS

BE1-851 relays provide two general purpose logic timers
which are extremely versatile. Each can be set for one of five
modes of operation to emulate virtually any type of timer.
Each function block has one output, 62 or 162, that is
asserted when the timing criteria has been met according to
the BESTlogic mode setting. Figure 4-15 shows the 62
function block as an example. Each mode of operation is
described in detail in the following paragraphs.
An INI (Initiate) logic input is provided to start the timing
sequence.
A Block logic input is provided to block operation of the timer.
When this expression is true, the function is disabled.
Each timer has a T1 time setting and a T2 time setting. The
functioning of these settings is dependent upon the type of
timer as specified by the mode setting in BESTlogic. Figure 4-15. 62/162 Function Block
4-24 Protection and Control BE1-851
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target when the timer
output is true and the fault recording function trip logic expression is true. See Section 6, Reporting and
Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions for more details on the target reporting function.

Mode 1, Pickup/Dropout Timer

The output will change to logic TRUE if the 1 D2843-08.vsd
initiate expression is TRUE for the duration of BLK 02-02-99

PICKUP time delay setting T1 (see Figure 4-16). 0

If the initiate expression toggles to FALSE 1

before time T1, the T1 timer is reset. Once the INI
output of the timer toggles to TRUE, the initiate 0
expression must be FALSE for the duration of 1
DROPOUT time delay setting T2. If the initiate x62 X
t1 t1 t2
expression toggles to TRUE before time T2, the 0
output stays TRUE and the T2 timer is reset. Figure 4-16. Mode 1, Pickup/Dropout Timer

Mode 2, One-Shot Nonretriggerable Timer

A one-shot timer starts its timing sequence when 1 D2843-09.vsd
the initiate expression changes from FALSE to BLK 02-02-99
0
TRUE. The timer will time for DELAY time T1 and
then the output will toggle to TRUE for 1
INI
DURATION time T2 (see Figure 4-17). Additional 0
initiate input expression changes of state are
1
ignored until the timing sequence has x62
t1 t2
been completed. If the duration time (T2) is set to 0
0, this timer will not function. Figure 4-17. Mode 2, One-Shot
Nonretriggerable Timer
Mode 3, One-Shot Retriggerable Timer
This mode of operation is similar to Mode 2 except D2843-10.vsd
1
that if a new FALSE-to-TRUE transition occurs on BLK
02-02-99

the initiate input expression, the output is forced to 0

logic FALSE and the timing sequence is restarted 1
(see Figure 4-18). INI
0

1 t1 t1 t1
X
x62 X X
t1 t2 t2
0

Figure 4-18. Mode 3, One-Shot Retriggerable Timer

Mode 4, Oscillator
In this mode, the INI input (Figure 4-19) is ignored. 1 D2843-11.vsd
If the BLK input is FALSE, the output, x62, oscillates BLK 02-02-99
with an ON time of T1 and an OFF time of T2. 0
When the BLK input is held TRUE, the oscillator
stops and the output is held OFF. 1
INI DON'T CARE
0

1
x62 t2
t1
0
Figure 4-19. Mode 4, Oscillator

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-25

Mode 5, Integrating Timer
An integrating timer is similar to a pickup/dropout timer except that the PICKUP time T1 defines the rate that
the timer integrates toward timing out and setting the output to TRUE. Conversely, the RESET time T2
defines the rate that the timer integrates toward dropout and resetting the output to FALSE. PICKUP time
T1 defines the time delay for the output to change to TRUE if the initiate input becomes TRUE and stays
TRUE. RESET time T2 defines the time delay for the output to change to FALSE if it is presently TRUE and
the initiate input becomes FALSE and stays FALSE.
In the example shown in Figure 4-20, RESET time T2 is set to half of the PICKUP time T1 setting. The
initiate input expression becomes TRUE and the timer starts integrating toward pickup. Prior to timing out,
the initiate expression toggles to FALSE and the
timer starts resetting at twice the rate as it was 1 D2843-12.vsd
integrating toward time out. It stays FALSE long B L K 02-02-99
0
enough for the integrating timer to reset completely;
but, then toggles back to TRUE and stays TRUE for INI 1
the entire duration of time T1. At that point, the
0
output of the timer is toggled to TRUE. Then at some
time later, the initiate expression becomes FALSE 1 0 0 %
t1

t2
and stays FALSE for the duration of RESET time T2.

t2
Timer t1
At that point, the output of the timer is toggled to 0 %
FALSE. 1
x62
This type of timer is useful in applications where a 0
monitored signal may be hovering at its threshold Figure 4-20. Mode 5, Integrating Timer
between on and off. For example, it is desired to
take some action when current is above a certain
level for a certain period of time. A 50T function could be used to monitor the current level. Thus, if the
current level is near the threshold so that the initiate toggles between TRUE and FALSE from time to time,
the function will still time out as long as the time that it is TRUE is longer than the time that it is FALSE. With
a simple PU/DO timer, the timing function would reset to zero and start over each time the initiate expression
became FALSE.
Mode 6, Latch
A one-shot timer starts its timing sequence when the
1 D2863-07.vsd
initiate expression changes from FALSE to TRUE. BLK 10-11-99
The timer will time for DELAY time T1 and then the 0
output will latch TRUE (see Figure 4-21). Additional initiate
1
input expression changes of state are ignored. Time INI
(T2) is ignored. 0

1
x62
t1 t2
0

Figure 4-21. Mode 6, One-shot

Nonretriggerable latch

4-26 Protection and Control BE1-851

BESTlogic Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers
The logic settings for the 62/162 timer functions are listed in Table 4-14. These settings enable the function
block by selecting the mode of operation and providing initiate and blocking control as determined by the
logic expressions assigned to those inputs.

Table 4-14. 62/162 BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default

0 = Disabled 3 = 1 Shot Retriggerable 0

1 = Pickup/Dropout 4 = Oscillator
Logic Mode
2 = 1 Shot Nonretriggerable 5 = Integrating
6 = Latch

INI (Initiate) Logic Input Logic expression that initiates timing sequence. 0

BLK (Block) Logic Logic expression that disables function when TRUE. 0
Input

BESTlogic settings for the 62/162 function can be made using the SL-x62 (settings logic-timer) command.
SL-x62 Command
Purpose: Reads or sets the logic for the 62 and 162 functions.
Syntax: SL-[x]62[=[mode],[INI logic],[BLK logic]]
Comments: x = 1 for 162 or no entry for 62

SL-x62 Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1 Read the 62 function logic.
>SL-62
>2,IN2,0
The reported settings indicate that the function block is enabled for one-shot, nonretriggerable
operation with timing sequences initiated by IN2. Blocking is disabled.
EXAMPLE.2 Set contact input 3 to initiate timing sequences.
>SL-62=,IN3
Note that it isn’t necessary to enter the mode and the block expression since these settings aren’t changed.

Operating Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers

The operating parameter settings for the 62/162 timer functions are listed in Table 4-15.
Table 4-15. 62/162 Operating Settings
Setting Range Increment Unit of Measure Default
0 to 999 ms 1 milliseconds
0.1 for 0.1 to 9.9 sec
0.1 to 9999 sec seconds
T1, T2 1.0 for 10 to 9999 sec 0

0 to 599,940 (60 Hz)

9 cycles
0 to 499,950 (50 Hz)
9 Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle through the
HMI. All time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command
interface. Time delays entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds.
Increment precision after conversion is limited to that appropriate for each of those units
of measure.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-27

Operating settings for the 62/162 function can be read or entered at the HMI using screens 5.#.6.1 and
5.#.6.2. These settings can also be accessed through the communication ports using the S<g>-62/162
(settings group #–62/162) command.
S<g>-62/162 Command
Purpose: Read or set the 62 and 162 time settings.
Syntax: S[g]-[x]62[=[t1],[t2]]
Comments: g = setting group number (0, 1, 2, or 3)
x = 1 for 162 or no entry for 62

S<g>-62/162 Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1 Set the 62 function of setting group 0 to delay pickup for 100 milliseconds with an immediate
dropout. Set the 62 function of setting groups 1, 2, and 3 to delay pickup for 150 milliseconds
with a dropout of 50 milliseconds.
>S0-62=100,0;S1-62=150,50;S2-62=150,50;S3-62=150,50
EXAMPLE.2 Take advantage of the wildcard character (#) to make the same setting with only two
commands.
>S#-62=150,50;S0-62=100,0

Retrieving 62/162 Output Status Information from the Relay

The status of each logic variable can be determined from the ASCII command interface by using the
RG-STAT (report general-status) or the RL (report logic) commands. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions, General Status Reporting for more information.

VIRTUAL SWITCHES

43 Virtual Selector Switches

BE1-851relays have four virtual selector switches that can provide manual control, locally and remotely,
without using physical switches and/or interposing relays. Each virtual switch can be set for one of three
modes of operation to emulate virtually any type of binary (two position) switch. An example would be an
application that requires a recloser or 51N ground cutoff. The traditional approach might be to install a switch
on the panel and wire the output to a contact sensing input on the relay or in series with the differential trip
output of the relay. Instead, a virtual switch can be used to reduce costs with the added benefit of being able
to operate the switch both locally through the HMI and remotely from a substation computer or through a
modem connection to a remote operator’s console.
The state of the switches can be controlled from the optional HMI or ASCII command interface. Control
actions can be set by the BESTlogic mode setting. When set for Mode 1, each switch can be controlled to
open (logic 0), close (logic 1), or pulse such that the output toggles from its current state to the opposite state
and then returns. Additional modes allow the switch operation to be restricted. In Mode 2 (ON/OFF), the
switch emulates a two position selector switch, and only open and close commands are accepted. In Mode
3 (OFF/Momentary ON), a momentary close, spring return
switch is emulated and only the pulse command is
accepted. Because switch status information is saved in
nonvolatile memory, the relay powers up with the switches
in the same state as when the relay was powered down.
Each virtual selector switch function block (see Figure 4-
22) has one output: 43, 143, 243, or 343. The output
is TRUE when the switch is in the closed state; the output
is FALSE when the switch is the open state. Since both
the output and the inverse of the output of these switches
can be used as many times as desired in your
programmable logic, they can emulate a switch with as
many normally open and normally closed decks as
desired.
Figure 4-22. 43 Function Block
4-28 Protection and Control BE1-851
User specified labels can be assigned to each virtual switch and to both states of each switch. In the
previous differential cutoff switch example, you might enable one of the switches in BESTlogic as Mode 2,
ON/OFF and connect the output of that switch, to the blocking input of the 51P protection function block. This
would disable the differential when the switch is closed (logic 1) and enable it when the switch is open (logic
0). For the application, you might set the switch label to be 51_CUTOFF (10 character maximum). The
closed position on the switch might be labeled DISABLD (7 character maximum) and the open position might
be labeled NORMAL. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic has more details about setting user
programmable names for programmable logic variables.

BESTlogic Settings for x43 Virtual Selector Switches

The virtual selector switch logic settings are listed in Table 4-16. These settings enable the x43 function
block by selecting the mode of operation. There are no logic inputs.

Table 4-16. x43 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default

0 = Disabled 2 = On/Off
Logic Mode 0
1 = On/Off/Pulse 3 = Off/Momentary On

BESTlogic settings can be made through the ASCII command interface using the SL-x43 (settings logic-x43
switch) command.
SL-x43 Command
Purpose: Read or set virtual switch logic.
Syntax: SL-<x>43[=mode]
Comments: x = no entry for 43, 1 for 143, 2 for 243, or 3 for 343

SL-x43 Command Example

Read the logic setting for the 43 virtual selector switch.
>SL-43
>3
This mode setting indicates that the switch is set for OFF/Momentary ON operation.

Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Selector Switches

The state of each virtual selector switch can be controlled at the HMI through screens 2.1.1 through 2.1.4.
Control is also possible through the ASCII command interface by using the select-before-operate commands
CS-x43 (control select-virtual switch) and CO-x43 (operate select-virtual switch). A state change takes place
immediately without having to execute an exit-save settings command.
CS/CO-x43 Command
Purpose: Select and operate the virtual selector switches.
Syntax: CS/CO-x43[=<action>]
Comments: x = no entry for 43, 1 for 143, 2 for 243, or 3 for 343
action = 0 to open the switch
1 to close the switch
P to pulse the switch to the opposite state for 200 milliseconds, and then
automatically return to starting state
The virtual switch control commands require the use of select-before-operate logic. First, the command must
be selected using the CS-x43 command. After the select command is entered, there is a 30 second window
during which the CO-x43 control command will be accepted. The control selected and the operation selected
must match exactly or the operate command will be blocked. If the operate command is blocked, and error
message is output.

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-29

CS/CO-x43 Command Examples
EXAMPLE.1 Read the current status of virtual switch 43.
>CO-43
>0
EXAMPLE.2 Momentarily toggle the state of switch 43 to closed.
>CS-43=P
>43=P SELECTED
>CO-43=P
>43=P EXECUTED
EXAMPLE.3 An example of an operate command not matching the select command.
>CS-743=P
>743=P SELECTED
>CO-743=1
>ERROR:NO SELECT
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay
The state of each virtual selector switch can be determined from HMI screen 1.5.4. This information is also
available through the ASCII command interface by using the RG-STAT or RG-43STAT commands. See
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting for more information.
HMI screens 2.1.1 through 2.1.4 provide switch control and can also display the current status of their
respective switches. ASCII command CO-x43 returns the state of each virtual selector switch in a read-only
mode. See the previous Example 1.

101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch

The virtual breaker control switch (shown in Figure 4-23) provides
manual control of a circuit breaker or
switch without using physical switches and/or interposing relays.
Both local and remote control is possible. A virtual switch can be
used instead of a physical switch to reduce costs with the added
benefit that the virtual switch can be operated both locally from the
HMI and remotely from a substation computer or modem
connection to an operator’s console.
The breaker control switch emulates a typical breaker control
switch with a momentary close, spring return, trip contact (output
101T), a momentary close, spring return, close contact (output
101C), and a slip contact (output 101SC). The slip contact output Figure 4-23. 101 Function Block
retains the status of the last control action. That is it is FALSE
(open) in the after-trip state and TRUE (closed) in the after-close
state. Figure 4-24 shows the state of the 101SC logic output with
respect to the state of the 101T and 101C outputs.
When the virtual control switch is controlled 1
to trip, the 101T output pulses TRUE 101T 200 ms
(closed) for approximately 200 milliseconds 0
and the 101SC output goes FALSE (open).
When the virtual control switch is controlled 1
to close, the 101SC output pulses TRUE 101C 200 ms
0
(closed). The status of the slip contact
output is saved to nonvolatile memory so
that the relay will power up with the contact 1
101SC D2843-15.vsd
in the same state as when the relay was 0 02-02-99
powered down.
Figure 4-24. 101 Control Switch State Diagram

4-30 Protection and Control BE1-851

BESTlogic Settings for 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch
Virtual selector switch logic settings enable the 101 function block by selecting the mode of operation. These
logic settings are listed in Table 4-17. There are no logic inputs. The user label for the 101 virtual breaker
control switch is entered using the SB-LOGIC command. More information about the SB-LOGIC command
is provided in Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Functions, Breaker Monitoring.

Table 4-17. 101 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default

Logic Mode 0 = Disabled, 1 = On/Off 0

BESTlogic settings for the 101 function are made through the ASCII command interface using the SL-101
(settings logic-101 switch) command.
SL-101 Command
Purpose: Read or set the logic for virtual breaker switch 101.
Syntax: SL-101[=mode]

SL-101 Command Example

>Read the 101 logic.
>SL-101
>1
The returned setting indicates that the 1-1 function block is enabled.

Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Breaker Control Switches

The state of each virtual selector switch can be controlled at the HMI through screen 2.2.1. Control is also
possible through the ASCII command interface by using the select-before-operate commands CS-101
(control select-virtual control switch) and CO-101 (control operate-virtual controls switch). A state change
takes place immediately without having to execute an exit-save settings command.
CS/CO-101Command
Purpose: Select and operate the virtual control switch.
Syntax: CS/CO-101[=<action>]
Comments: action = T to pulse the 101T output
C to pulse the 101C output
The virtual switch control commands require the use of select-before-operate logic. First, the command must
be selected using the CS-101 command. After the select command is entered, there is a 30 second window
during which the CO-101 control command will be accepted. The control selected and the operation selected
must match exactly or the operate command will be blocked. If the operate command is blocked, and error
message is output.

CS/CO-101 Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1 Read the current status of the virtual control switch.
>CO-101
>C
The returned setting indicates that the switch is in the after-close state.
EXAMPLE.1 Trip the breaker by closing the trip output of the virtual control switch.
>CS-101=T
>101=T SELECTED
>CO-101=T
>101=T EXECUTED

BE1-851 Protection and Control 4-31

Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay
The virtual control switch state (after-trip or after-close) can be determined through the ASCII command
interface by using the RG-STAT (reports general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions, General Status Reporting for more information.
HMI screen 2.2.1 provides switch control and also displays the current status of the virtual control switches
(after-trip or after-close). As the previous Example 1 demonstrated, the state of each virtual selector switch
can be determined using the CO-101 command in a read-only mode.

4-32 Protection and Control BE1-851

SECTION 5 • METERING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5 • METERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
METERING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
METERING COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
M Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
M-I Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Tables
Table 5-1. Metering Functions Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

BE1-851 Metering i
SECTION 5 • METERING

GENERAL
The BE1-851 relay measures current inputs, displays those values in real time, records those values every
one-quarter second, and calculates other quantities from the measured inputs.

METERING FUNCTIONS
Metered values are viewed through any communication port using serial commands or at the front panel
HMI. Metering functions are summarized in the following paragraphs and in Table 5-1. For assistance with
navigating through the HMI metering screens, refer to Figure 10-5 of Section 10, Human-Machine Interface.

Current
Metered current includes A phase current, B phase current, C phase current, and neutral current. Other
metered current includes negative sequence current and three-phase zero sequence (residual) current.
Table 5-1. Metering Functions Summary
Metering Function Serial HMI
Command Screen
All metered values M N/A
Current, all values M-I N/A
Current, A-phase M-IA 3.4
Current, B-phase M-IB 3.4
Current, C-phase M-IC 3.4
Current, Negative Sequence M-IQ 3.6
Current, Neutral M-IN 3.6

METERING COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

The following paragraphs describe each metering command and provide examples for using the commands.

M Command
Purpose: Reads all metered values.
Syntax: M
Comments: This command returns all measured and calculated metered data.

Example Read all metered values.

>M
M-IA=4.99A; M-IB=5.00A; M-IC=4.99A; M-IN=0.00A
M-IQ=0.02A;

BE1-851 Metering 5-1

M-I Command
Purpose: Read metered current in primary units.
Syntax: M-I[<phase>]
Comments: phase = A/B/C/N/Q or no entry
Example1. Read metered current values.
>M-I
M-IA=4.99A; M-IB=5.00A; M-IC=4.99A;M-IN=0.00A
M-IQ=0.02A;
Example2. Read the Phase-C current
>M-IC
4.99A

5-2 Metering BE1-851

SECTION 6 • REPORTING AND ALARM
FUNCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6 • REPORTING AND ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
RELAY IDENTIFIER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
IRIG Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Setting the Clock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
SG-CLK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Reading and Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
RG-DATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
RG-TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
GENERAL STATUS REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
General Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Input (1234) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Output (A12345) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
CO-OUT (A12345) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
CO-43/143/243/343 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CO-101 (101SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CO-Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Active Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Recloser (79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Logic Var (00-31), Logic Var (32-63) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Active Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Breaker (52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Diag/Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Other Report-General Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
DEMAND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Demand Calculation and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Setting Demand Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
SG-DI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Retrieving Demand Reporting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
RD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
RD-TI/YI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
RD-PI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Overload and Unbalance Alarms Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
SA-DI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
BREAKER MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Breaker Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Programming the Breaker Status Reporting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
SB-LOGIC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
RB-OPCNTR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Breaker Duty Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Setting the Breaker Duty Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
SB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Retrieving Breaker Duty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
RB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Breaker Clearing Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Breaker Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
SA-BKR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions i

 TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
FAULT REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Fault Reporting Trigger Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
SG-TRIGGER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Setting the Targets Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
SG-TARG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Retrieving Target Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
RG-TARG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Fault Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Fault Summary Report Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Retrieving Fault Report Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
RF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Oscillographic Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Retrieving Oscillographic Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Retrieving SER Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
RS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
ALARMS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Relay Trouble Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Major, Minor, and Logic Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Programming Alarm Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
SA-MAJ/MIN/LGC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Retrieving and Resetting Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
RA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Links Between Programmable Alarms and BESTlogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Programmable Alarms Controlled by BESTlogic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Programmable Alarms Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
SA-RESET Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
BESTlogic Elements Controlled by Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
RG-VER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Figures
Figure 6-1. Protective Fault Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Figure 6-2. Trip Circuit Voltage And Continuity Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-3. TCM With Other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Figure 6-4. Programmable Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

Tables
Table 6-1. SG-ID Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Table 6-2. SG-CLK Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Table 6-3. Logic Variable Status Report Format For Sensing Input Type H Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Table 6-4. Logic Variable Status Report Format For Sensing Input Type G Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Table 6-5. SG-DI Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Table 6-6. SA-DI Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Table 6-7. Legend for Figure 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Table 6-8. SB-DUTY Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Table 6-9. SA-BKR Command Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Table 6-10. SG-TRIGGER Command Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table 6-11. Protective Functions with Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table 6-12. SG-TARG Command Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Table 6-13. Oscillographic Hardware Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Table 6-14. Relay Trouble Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

ii Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

Table 6-15. Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Table 6-16. Programmable Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

Equations
Equation 6-1. Demand Current Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Equation 6-2. Exponential Response Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Equation 6-3. Step Change Demand Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions iii

SECTION 6 • REPORTING AND ALARM
FUNCTIONS
GENERAL
This section describes all of the reports that are available from the BE1-851 relay, how to set the
reporting functions, and how to retrieve these reports. Alarm functions are included in this section
because they perform a reporting function. This section also describes all of the alarm functions, how to
set those functions, and how to program (map) the major and minor alarms.

RELAY IDENTIFIER INFORMATION

BE1-851 relays have two relay identification fields: Relay ID and Station ID. These fields are used in the
header information lines of the Fault Reports, the Oscillograph Records, and the Sequence of Events
Records. Relay and Station identification assignments are made using the SG-ID command.

Table 6-1. SG-ID Command Parameters

Setting Range Default

relayID 1 to 30 alphanumeric BE1-851

characters

stationID 1 to 30 alphanumeric SUBSTATION_1

characters
SG-ID Command
Purpose: Reads or changes the relay ID and station ID used in reports.
Syntax: SG–ID[=<relayID (up to 10 char)>,<stationID (up to 30 char)>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings. No spaces are allowed in
the label names. Command parameters are defined in Table 6-1.
Example1. Enter a relayID of FEEDER_3 and a stationID of HIGHLAND_NORTH.
>SG-ID=FEEDER_3,HIGHLAND_NORTH
Example2. Display the relayID and stationID labels.
>SG-ID
FEEDER_3,HIGHLAND_NORTH

CLOCK
The clock function is used by the demand reporting function, the fault reporting function, the oscillograph
recording function, and the sequence of events recorder function to time-stamp events. The clock function
records the year in two digit format. None of the functions that use the clock perform any date math
calculations or sorting of information by date so the year 2000 does not present a problem. The clock does
not have a battery backup. Each time the relay powers up, the clock must be reset via the IRIG port, the
HMI, or ASCII command interface.

IRIG Port
IRIG time code signal connections are located on the rear panel. When a valid time code signal is detected
at the IRIG port, it automatically synchronizes the internal clock to the time code signal. Note that the IRIG
time code signal doesn’t contain year information. For this reason, it is necessary to enter the date even
when using an IRIG signal. Year information is stored in nonvolatile memory so that when operating power
is restored after an outage and the clock is re-synchronized, the current year is restored. When the clock
rolls over to a new year, the year is automatically incremented in nonvolatile memory. An alarm bit is
included in the programmable alarm function for loss of IRIG signal. The alarm point monitors for IRIG signal
loss once a valid signal is detected at the IRIG port.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-1

The IRIG input is fully isolated and accepts a demodulated (dc level-shifted) signal. The input signal must
be 3.5 volts or higher to be recognized as a valid signal. Maximum input signal level is ±20 volts. Input
resistance is nonlinear and rated at 4 kilo-ohms at 3.5 volts. Section 12, Installation, Communication
Connectors and Settings identifies the terminal connections for the IRIG function.

Setting the Clock Function

Time reporting can be displayed in 12 or 24 hour format. When operating in the 24 hour format, the A.M./P.M.
parameter is placed between the minutes and seconds parameters (10:24P23.004 indicates 10:24 in the
evening). The default time format is 24 hours. Date reporting format can display the date in mm/dd/yy or
dd/mm/yy format. The default date format is mm/dd/yy. The relay clock can also accommodate daylight
saving time changes. Automatic daylight saving time adjustments are optional and are disabled by default.
Time and date settings are made using the SG-CLK command. See Table 6-2.

Table 6-2. SG-CLK Command Settings

Parameter Range Default
date format d (day first) m
m (month first)
time format 12 (12 hour format) 24
24 (24 hour format)
dst enable 0 (daylight saving time 0
disabled)
1 (daylight saving time enabled)

SG-CLK Command
Purpose: Reads or sets the format of the time and date display.
Syntax: SG-CLK[=<date format (M/D)>,<time format (12/24)>,<dst enable (0/1)>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings. Command settings are
defined in Table 6-2.
Example1. Read the clock format settings.
>SG-CLK
M,24,0
Example2. Enable daylight saving time correction.
>SG-CLK=,,1

Reading and Setting the Clock

Clock information can be read and set at the front panel HMI and through the communication ports. Write
access to reports is required to set the clock at the HMI and communication ports. An alarm point is
provided in the programmable alarms to detect when the relay has powered up and the clock has not been
set. Time and date information is read and set at HMI screen 4.6. Time and date information is read and
programmed through the communication ports using the RG-DATE and RG-TIME commands.

RG-DATE Command
Purpose: Report or set the clock’s date setting.
Syntax: RG-DATE[=<M/D/Y>] or RG-DATE[=<D-M-Y>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or R is required to change settings. d and m settings are
based on SG-CLK setting. Command settings are defined in

Example Enter the date for December 31, 1999.

>RG-DATE=12/31/99 or RG-DATE=12-31-99

6-2 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

RG-TIME Command
Purpose: Report or set the clock’s time setting.
Syntax: RG-TIME[=hr:mn:sc] or RG-TIME[=hr:mn<f>sc]
Comments: Password access privilege G or R is required to change settings. Default time setting on
power-up is 00:00:00. Command settings are defined in Table 6-4.
Example1. Read the clock’s current time setting (programmed in 12 hour format).
>RG-TIME
12:24P45
Example2. Set a new time in 12 hour format.
>RG-TIME=11:24P00

GENERAL STATUS REPORTING

BE1-851 relays have extensive capabilities for reporting relay status. This is important for determining the
health and status of the system for diagnostics and troubleshooting. Throughout this manual, reference is
made to the RG-STAT (report general, status) report and the appropriate HMI screens for determining the
status of various functions.

General Status Report

A General Status report is available through the communication ports using the RG-STAT command. This
report lists all of the information required to determine the status of the relay. An example of a typical
general status report follows. In the explanation of what each line represents, cross-references are made
to the corresponding HMI screens that contain that data.
INPUT(1234) STATUS : 0000
OUTPUT(A12345) STATUS : 000000
CO-OUT(A12345) STATUS : LLLLLL
CO-43/143/243/343 STATUS : 0000
CO-101(101SC) STATUS : AFTER CLOSE(1)
CO-GROUP STATUS : L
ACTIVE LOGIC STATUS : USER
LOGIC VAR(00-31) STATUS : 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
LOGIC VAR(32-63) STATUS : 00000000 00000000 00000010 00011000
RECLOSER(79) STATUS : OFF
ACTIVE GROUP STATUS : 0
BREAKER(52) STATUS : CLOSED
DIAG/ALARM STATUS : 2 RELAY, 0 LOGIC, 0 MAJOR, 0 MINOR

Input (1234)
This line reports the status of contact sensing inputs IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4. Input information is available
at HMI screen 1.5.1. A 0 indicates a de-energized input and a 1 indicates an energized input. See Section
3, Input and Output Functions for more information about contact sensing input operation.

Output (A12345)
Current output contact status is reported on this line. This information is also available at HMI screen 1.5.2.
A 0 indicates a de-energized output and a 1 indicates an energized output. More information about output
contact operation is available in Section 3, Input and Output Functions.

CO-OUT (A12345)
This line reports the logic override of the output contacts. Logic override status is reported at HMI screen
1.5.3 and through the CO-OUT command. Section 3, Input and Output Functions provides more information
about output logic override control.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-3

CO-43/143/243/343
Virtual switch function status is reported on this line. This information is also available at HMI screen 1.5.4.
See Section 4, Protection and Control Functions for more information about virtual switch operation.

CO-101 (101SC)
This line reports the current status of the virtual breaker control switch slip contact output. More information
about the virtual breaker control switch is available in Section 4, Protection and Control Functions.

CO-Group
The logic override status of the setting group selection function is reported on this line. For more information
about this function, refer to Section 4, Protection and Control Functions, Setting Groups.

Active Logic
This line reports the name of the active logic scheme. The active logic scheme name can also be viewed
at HMI screen 5 and through the SL-N command. See Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Logic
Scheme Names for more information about this function.

Recloser (79)
The status of the recloser is reported on this line. HMI screen 1.1 also reports this information. More
information about the recloser function is available in Section 4, Protection and Control Functions.

Logic Var (00-31), Logic Var (32-63)

These three lines report the status of each BESTlogic variable. These lines can be entered into Table 6-3
and 6-4 to determine the status of each logic variable. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic provides
more information about BESTlogic variables.

Active Group
The active setting group is indicated on this line. HMI screen 1.5.5 also provides this information. See
Section 4, Protection and Control Functions for more information about setting groups.

Breaker (52)
This line reports the state of the breaker. This information is also available at HMI screen 1.5.6. More
information about breaker status is provided in the Breaker Monitoring subsection.

Diag/Alarm
This line reports the status of the Relay Trouble Alarm, Major Alarm, Minor Alarm, and Logic Alarm. The
status of these alarms can be viewed at HMI screen 1.3. Front panel LEDs also indicate the status of the
Relay Trouble Alarm, Minor Alarm, and Major Alarm. Alarm status is also available through the
communication ports. The SA-MIN command repors the Minor Alarm status, the SA-MAJ command reports
the Major Alarm status, and the SA-LGC command reports the Logic Alarm status.

6-4 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Table 6-3. Logic Variable Status Report Format For Sensing Input Type H Relays.
1 1 1
1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 7 7
0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 T T T T T T B 1 1 1 9 7 9
T T T T T T B 1 1 1 P P N N Q Q F P N Q 1 1 2 3 7 R 9 7 S
P P N N Q Q F P N Q P P P P P P P P P P 6 6 4 4 4 4 9 N L 9 C
T T T T T T T T T T U U U U U U U U U U 2 2 3 3 3 3 C G O F B 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

O
R A A A U
1 S L L L T
V V V V V V 1 1 0 T M M M 1
V V V V V V V V V V O O O O O O I I I I 0 0 1 K L M M M S S S S
O O O O O O O O O O 1 1 1 1 1 1 N N N N 1 1 S E G A I O G G G G
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 T C C Y C J N N O 1 2 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

Table 6-4. Logic Variable Status Report Format For Sensing Input Type G Relays.

1 1 2 3 5 1 5 1 2 3 1
5 5 5 5 5 5 1 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 7
0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 T 0 T 0 0 0 B 1 1 1 9 7 9
T T T T T T B 1 1 1 P T N T T T F P N N 1 1 2 3 7 R 9 7 S
P P N N N N F P N N P P P N N N P P P P 6 6 4 4 4 4 9 N L 9 C
T T T T T T T T T T U P U P P P U U U U 2 2 3 3 3 3 C G O F B 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

R A A A O
1 S L L L U
V V V V V V 1 1 0 T M M M T
V V V V V V V V V V O O O O O O I I I I 0 0 1 K L M M 1 S S S S
O O O O O O O O O O 1 1 1 1 1 1 N N N N 1 1 S E G A I M G G G G
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 T C C Y C J N O O 1 2 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

See Table 7-1 for a cross-references of each BESTlogic variable name with a brief description of the variable
function.
Other Report-General Commands
There are several other RG commands in addition to the RG-STAT command. These include RG-TIME,
RG-DATE, RG-TARG, and RG-VER. These commands are covered in detail in respective paragraphs in
this section. As with other commands, a combination read command is available to read several items in
a group. If the command RG is entered by itself, the relay reports the time, date, target information, and
other reports in the following example. RG-VER and RG-STAT commands have multiple line outputs and
these are not read at the RG command.

Example Read the general reports.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-5

 >RG
RG-DATE=12/31/99
RG-TIME=23:59:59
RG-TARG=NONE

DEMAND FUNCTIONS
The demand reporting function continuously calculates demand values for the three-phase currents, neutral
current, and negative sequence current. Demand values are recorded with time stamps for Peak Since
Reset, Yesterday’s Peak, and Today’s Peak. Programmable alarm points can be set to alarm if thresholds
are exceeded for overload and unbalanced loading conditions.

Demand Calculation and Reporting

An algorithm in the demand reporting function digitally simulates a thermal or exponential response.
Demand values are computed by an exponential algorithm with the demand interval or response period
defined as the time taken by the meter to reach 90 percent of the final value for a step change in the current
being measured. Demand interval can be set independently for the phase, neutral, and negative sequence
demand calculations. The reactive power and power demand intervals always match the phase demand
interval setting.
The following equation is used to calculate demand current.

DI n = DI n -1+ K ( M I - DI n-1 ) Equation 6-1. Demand Current Equation

where
DI n = demand current for sampling period n (tn = 15 seconds)
MI n = average metered current value for sampling period n
K = exponential response constant

The following equation is used for K.

tn
-
Equation 6-2. Exponential Response Constant
K = ( 1- e
0 . 43 4 T I
)

where
TI = demand interval (programmed with SG-DI command)
tn = fixed demand update rate of 15 seconds

Demand is calculated for a step change in current by the following equation.

tn
-
Equation 6-3. Step Change Demand Calculation
DI = ( 1- e
0 . 43 4 T I
) ·M I

Demand Calculation Example for a Step Change in Current

If the current steps from 0 to 1,000 amperes, then the peak demand will change from 0 to 900 amperes after
one demand interval (t = TI).
Each time that the value in the current demand register is updated, it is compared to the values stored in the
Peak Since Reset and the Today’s Peak registers. If the new demand is greater, the new value and time
stamp is entered into the appropriate registers. In addition, the demand reporting function keeps an
additional set of registers for Yesterday’s Peak. Each day at midnight, the demand reporting function
replaces the values and time stamps stored in yesterday’s peak registers with the values and time stamps
from today’s peak registers. It then starts recording new information in Today’s Peak registers. Demand

6-6 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

registers are stored in volatile memory.
Today’s Peak and Yesterday’s Peak registers are read only. Values in the Peak Since Reset registers can
be reset to zero or preset to a predetermined value. For example, if some loads will be switched to remove
a feeder from service and you don’t want the abnormal loading to affect the Peak Since Reset register
values, these values can be read prior to switching the loads. Once the abnormal loading condition has
passed, the registers can be reset to the original values.

Setting Demand Reporting

Demand reporting is setup using the SG-DI (setting general, demand interval) command.

Table 6-5. SG-DI Command Settings

Setting Range Increment Unit of Measure Default

Phase Demand Interval 0 to 60 1 Minutes 15

Neutral Demand Interval 0 to 60 1 Minutes 1

Negative Sequence 0 to 60 1 Minutes 1

Demand Interval

SG-DI Command
Purpose: Read or set the Phase (IA/IB/IC/), Neutral, and Negative Sequence interval.
Syntax: SG-DI[p][=<interval>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings. Command settings are
defined in Table 6-4.

Example Set the Neutral demand for five minutes.

>SG-DIN=5

Retrieving Demand Reporting Information

Values and time stamps in the demand registers are reported in primary amperes. They can be read at the
front panel HMI and through the communication ports.
Today’s Peak, Yesterday’s Peak, and Peak Since Reset demand values are accessed through HMI screen
4.4, DEMAND REPORTS. Demand values viewed at the HMI can be reset by pressing the Reset key.
When the Reset key is pressed, the viewed register value is set to zero and then updated on the next
processing loop with the currently calculated demand value. No write access is needed to reset demand
register values at the HMI. Its also possible to preset a value into the Peak Since Demand registers. This
can be done by pressing the Edit key. Write access to the Reports functional area is required to preset
values at the HMI.
Values and time stamps in the demand registers can also be read through the communication ports by using
the RD (report demands) command.

RD Command
Purpose: Report all demand data.
Syntax: RD
Comments: RD reports Today’s Peak, Yesterday’s Peak, and Peak Since Reset demand data for all
Phase current, Neutral current, Negative Sequence current, three-phase reactive power,
and three-phase power.

Example Read all demand register data.

>RD

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-7

 RD-TIA:0.00A 01:21 01/01/99; RD-TIB:0.00A 01:21 01/01/99
RD-TIC:0.00A 01:21 01/01/99; RD-TIN:0.00A 01:21 01/01/99
RD-TIQ:0.02A 00:07 01/01/99
RD-YIA:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99; RD-YIB:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99
RD-YIC:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99; RD-YIN:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99
RD-YIQ:0.00A 00:00 01/01/99
RD-PIA=0.00A 01:21 01/01/99; RD-PIB=0.00A 01:21 01/01/99
RD-PIC=0.00A 01:21 01/01/99; RD-PIN=0.00A 01:21 01/01/99
RD-PIQ=0.02A 00:07 01/01/99
Demand information specific to current, can be obtained by including an object name with the command
function (R) and subgroup (D). Today’s Peak, Yesterday’s Peak, and Peak Since Reset information for
current is available using the RD-TI, RD-YI, and RD-PI commands.

RD-TI/YI Command
Purpose: Reads Today’s Peak (TI) or Yesterday’s Peak (YI) Demand current values.
Syntax: RD-TI[<p>] or RD-YI[<p>]
Comments: p = A/B/C/N/Q. RD-TI and RD-YI command settings are listed in Table 6-8.

Example1. Read today’s C phase ampere demand current.

>RD-TIC
8.77A 16:44 06/30/99
Example2. Read all demand current values for yesterday.
>RD-YI
RD-YIA:8.68A 17:15 01/01/99; RD-YIB:8.66A 17:15 01/01/99
RD-YIC:8.67A 17:15 01/01/99; RD-YIN:0.24A 17:15 01/01/99
RD-YIQ:0.25A 17:15 01/01/99

RD-PI Command
Purpose: Read or reset peak demand current values.
Syntax: RD-PI[<p>[=0]]
Comments: p = A/B/C/N/Q. RD-PI command settings are listed in Table 6-9 .

Example1. Read the peak demand current for phase A.

>RD-PIA
9.08A 12:09 08/02/99
Example2. Read all peak demand current values.
>RD-PI
RD-PIA=9.08A 14:33 07/10/99; RD-PIB=9.09A 14:33 07/10/99
RD-PIC=9.08A 14:33 07/10/99; RD-PIN=9.77A 18:05 07/05/99
RD-PIQ=8.77A 09:28 06/15/99
Example3. Reset all peak demand current values.
>RD-PI=0

Overload and Unbalance Alarms Function

The programmable demand alarm includes alarm points for monitoring phase demand thresholds for phase
overload alarms, and neutral and negative sequence demand thresholds for unbalanced loading alarms.
Each time the current demand register is updated, the register value is compared to the corresponding
demand alarm threshold. If a threshold is exceeded, the alarm point is set. The Alarm Functions subsection
provides more information about using the programmable alarms reporting function.
Demand alarm thresholds are for current is set using the SA-DI (setting alarm, demand current) command.

Table 6-6. SA-DI Command Settings

6-8 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Range

Setting 5A 1A Increment Unit of Measure Default

Demand 0 = disabled 0 = disabled 0.01 for 0.1 to 9.99 secondary 0

Alarm 0.5–16.0 0.1–3.2 0.1 for 10.0 to 16.0 amperes
Threshold

SA-DI Command
Purpose: Read or set current demand alarm thresholds.
Syntax: SA-DI[p][=<alarm level>]
Comments: Table 6-5 lists the specifications for the demand alarm settings.

Example Set the demand alarm thresholds at six amperes for A, B, and C Phase current and three
amperes for Neutral and negative sequence current.
>SA-DIP=6.0; SA-DIN=3.0; SA-DIQ=3.0

BREAKER MONITORING
Breaker monitoring helps manage equipment inspection and maintenance expenses by providing extensive
monitoring and alarms for the circuit breaker. Breaker monitoring functions include breaker status and
operations counter reporting, fault current interruption duty monitoring, and trip-speed monitoring. Each
function can be set up as a programmable alarm. The Alarm Functions subsection has more information
about the use of programmable alarms. The breaker trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor is a related
function and is described in the Trip Circuit Monitor subsection.

Breaker Status Reporting

The breaker status monitoring function monitors the position of the breaker for reporting purposes. Opening
breaker strokes are also counted and recorded in the breaker operations counter register. Circuit breaker
status is also used by the breaker trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor. The Trip Circuit Monitor
subsection provides more details.

Programming the Breaker Status Reporting Function

Since the relay is completely programmable, it’s necessary to program which logic variable will monitor
breaker status. This is done with the SB-LOGIC (setting breaker, logic) command. It should be noted that
even though a BESTlogic expression is used to make this setting, this setting isn’t included in the section
on BESTlogic settings. The SB-LOGIC command is included here because it is related to breaker
monitoring. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic has more information about programming the relay
with BESTlogic.

SB-LOGIC Command
Purpose: Read or set breaker status logic.
Syntax: SB-LOGIC[=<breaker close logic>]
Comments: breaker close logic = BESTlogic term that is TRUE when the breaker is closed (i.e., 52a
logic)

Example Set the relay to monitor input 3 so that when the breaker is closed, the input is FALSE. (The
52b contact is wired to IN3.

>SB-LOGIC=/IN3Retrieving Breaker Status and Operation Counter Information

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-9

 Breaker auxiliary Protective
Protective Protective contact changes element
element element state drops out
picks up trips

SG-TRIGGER
-Trip

-Pickup

-Logic

PU + logic Fast
dropout
Fast dropout current
current detector
detector drops out

Breaker (SB-LOGIC setting)

status

Fault summary
report triggered
A (When SG-TRIGGER (PU or Logic) is TRUE)

B
Targets logged

Fault clearing C (When SG-TRIGGER (PU or Logic) is TRUE)

time calculated

Breaker D
operate time
3 cycle
Post-trigger recording
1/4 to 5 cycles
E
Oscillographic pre-trigger (When SG-TRIGGER (PU or Logic) is TRUE) of pre-trigger Post-trigger
Record (Default: 15 cycle record, 3 cycle pre-trigger, 12 cycle post-trigger) When
SG-TRIGGER
Fault currents F (PU or Logic)
goes FALSE
recorded

Red TRIP LED G (When SG-TRIGGER (PU) is TRUE)

flashing

Red TRIP LED H (When SG-TRIGGER (Trip) is TRUE)

solid

Breaker interruption I
duty
D2849-09.vsd
05-26-99

Setting group J (When SG-TRIGGER (PU) is TRUE)

change blocked

Figure 6-1. Protective Fault Analysis

Table 6-7.

6-10 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Table 6-7. Legend for Figure 6-1
Call-Out Description

A A fault summary report and an oscillograph record is triggered when either the SG-TRIGGER
PICKUP or PICKUP expression becomes TRUE.

B During the time that the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression is TRUE, targets are logged from
each of the protective functions that reach a TRIP state. If a protective function is not being
used for tripping purposes, the associated target function can be disabled through the SG-
TARG setting.

C Fault clearing time is calculated as the duration of the time that either the SG-TRIGGER
PICKUP or PICKUP expression is TRUE.

D Breaker operate time is calculated as the time from when the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression
becomes TRUE until the fast-dropout current detector senses that the breaker has
successfully interrupted the current in all poles of the breaker.

E A second oscillograph record is triggered to record the end of the fault if the SG-TRIGGER
TRIP expression becoming TRUE. If the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression does not become
TRUE, (as would occur if the fault were cleared by a down stream device), the fault current
recorded in the fault summary report will be for the power system cycle ending two cycles
before the end of the fault record. This is also the case if the fault record was triggered using
the RF-TRIG command.

F The fault currents are recorded in the fault summary report and on the target screen of the
HMI for the power system cycle immediately following the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression
becoming true. If the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression does not become true, as would occur
if the fault were cleared by a down stream device, the fault current recorded in the fault
summary report will be for the power system cycle ending two cycles before the end of the
fault record. This is also the case if the fault record was triggered through the ASCII
command interface by the RF-Trig command.

G During the time that the SG-TRIGGER PICKUP expression is TRUE, the red Trip LED on the
front panel flashes indicating that the relay is picked up.

H During the time the SG-TRIGGER TRIP expression is TRUE, the red Trip LED on the front
panel lights steadily indicating that the relay is in a tripped state. If targets have been logged
for the fault, the Trip LED is sealed in until the targets have been reset.

I Breaker operations and interruption duty functions are driven by the breaker status function.
The operations counter is incremented on breaker opening. The magnitude of the currents
that are used for accumulating breaker duty are recorded for the power system cycle ending
when the breaker status changes state. Thus, breaker duty is accumulated every time that
the breaker opens even if it isn’t opening under fault.

J Setting group changes are blocked when the SG-TRIGGER PICKUP expression is TRUE
to prevent protective functions from being reinitialized with new operating parameters while
a fault is occurring.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-11

 NOTE
When the NOT symbol (/) is used, the symbol is applied to the variable immediately
following the symbol.

Current breaker status can be read from HMI screen 1.5.6 and through the communication ports using
the RG-STAT command. The General Status Reporting subsection provides more information about this
command.
The number of breaker operations can be read at HMI screen 4.3.1. The counter value can be adjusted
using the Edit key. This allows the relay counter value to be matched to an existing mechanical cyclometer
on a breaker mechanism. Write access to the reports functions must be gained to edit this value at the HMI.
Breaker operations can be read or set through the communication ports using the RB-OPCNTR (report
breaker, operations counter) command.

RB-OPCNTR Command
Purpose: Read or set breaker operations counter.
Syntax: RB-OPCNTR[=<#operations>]
Comments: #operations = number of breaker operations recorded (0-99999)
If the counter exceeds 99999, the counter will wrap back to 0.

Read the number of breaker operations.

>RB-OPCNTR
14
Example1. Synchronize the relay breaker operations counter with an external counter reading of 65
operations.
>RB-OPCNTR=65
The breaker operations counter can be monitored to give an alarm when the value exceeds a threshold. See
Breaker Alarms in this section for more information about this feature.

Breaker Duty Monitoring

When the breaker opens, the current interrupted in each pole of the circuit breaker is accumulated by the
breaker duty monitor. Breaker opening is defined by the breaker status monitoring function (SB-LOGIC).
Figure 6-1 illustrates breaker status (SB-LOGIC) during a fault and protective trip. Table 6-6 serves as a
legend for the call-outs of Figure 6-1.
Each time the breaker trips, the breaker duty monitor updates two sets of registers for each pole of the
breaker. In the Accumulated I Duty registers, the breaker duty monitor adds the measured current in primary
amperes. In the Accumulated I2 Duty registers, the function adds the measured current squared in primary
amperes. The user selects which of the two sets of duty registers are reported and monitored when setting
up the breaker duty monitor.
Even though duty register values are calculated and stored in primary amperes or primary amperes-squared,
the duty value is reported as a percent of maximum. The user sets the value that the relay will use for 100
percent duty (DMAX). The value set for maximum duty is used directly for reporting the accumulated I Duty.
The square of the value set for maximum duty is used for reporting the accumulated I2 Duty.
Since the true measure of contact wear includes a factor for arcing time (t), an assumed arcing time for the
breaker should be included when choosing the setting for 100 percent interruption duty (DMAX).
When testing the relay by injecting currents into the relay, the values in the duty registers should be read
and recorded prior to the start of testing. Once testing is complete and the relay is returned to service, the
registers should be reset to the original pre-test values. A block accumulation logic input may be used when
testing so that simulated breaker duty is not added to the duty registers. The BLKBKR logic function is an
OR logic term (e.g. - IN1 or VO7) which blocks the breaker monitoring logic when TRUE (1). BLKBKR is
set to zero to disable blocking. When breaker monitoring is blocked (logic expression equals 1), breaker

6-12 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

duty is not accumulated.

Setting the Breaker Duty Monitoring Function

Breaker duty monitoring is programmed using the SB-DUTY (setting breaker, duty) command.
Table 6-8. SB-DUTY Command Settings
Function Range/Purpose Default

0 = disabled 0
mode 1=I
2 = I2

0 to 4.2e+7 0e+0
The dmax parameter represents the maximum duty
dmax that the breaker contacts can withstand before
needing service. dmax is programmed in primary
amperes using exponential floating point format.

OR logic term (e.g., IN1, or VO7) that blocks the 0

breaker monitoring logic when TRUE (1). A setting of
BLKBKR logic
0 disables blocking (breaker operations are no
longer counted).

SB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read or set the breaker contact duty.
Syntax: SB-DUTY[=<mode>,<dmax>,<BLKBKR logic>]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings. Command specifications
are listed in Table 6-12.SB-DUTY Command Settings

Example Enable breaker monitoring with duty calculated as *I2. Maximum duty should be 20 kilo-
amperes. Breaker monitoring should be blocked when input 3 is energized.
>SB-DUTY=2,20E3,IN3

Retrieving Breaker Duty Information

Breaker duty values can be read at HMI screen 4.3.2. Duty values can be changed by using the front panel
Edit key. Write access to reports is required to edit breaker duty values. Duty values can also be read or
changed through the communication ports using the RB-DUTY command.

RB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read or set the breaker contact duty log.
Syntax: RB-DUTY[<phase>[=<%duty>]]
Comments: phase = A, B, or C. No entry for <phase> will read or write to all phases.
%duty = accumulated duty expressed in percent of DMAX (set by SB-DUTY command)

Example1. Read all contact duty values.

>RB-DUTY
RB-DUTYA=92%; RB-DUTYB=23%; RB-DUTYC=28%
Example2. Reset the A-phase duty after maintenance was performed.
>RB-DUTYA=0

Breaker Clearing Time Monitoring

The breaker clearing time monitor tracks the time from when a trip output occurs (defined by the TRIP logic
expression) to when the fast dropout current detector observes that current is zero in all three breaker poles.
This time is reported as a line in the fault summary reports. See the Fault Reporting subsection for more

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-13

information about the TRIP logic expression and Fault Summary Reports.
Breaker clearing time can be monitored to give an alarm when the value exceeds a threshold. The following
Breaker Alarms subsection provides more information about this feature.

Breaker Alarms
Three alarm points are included in the programmable alarms for checking breaker monitoring functions.
Each alarm point can be programmed to monitor any of the three breaker monitoring functions: operations
counter, interruption duty, or clearing time. An alarm threshold can be programmed to monitor each function.
Alternately, three different thresholds can be programmed to monitor one of the monitored functions. Breaker
alarms are programmed using the SA-BKR command. Command specifications are summarized in Table
6-9.
Table 6-9. SA-BKR Command Specifications
Function Range/Purpose Default

0=Disable, 1 equals breaker alarm function enabled and set 0

for percent duty, 2=equals breaker alarm function enabled and
Mode
set for operations counting, 3=breaker alarm function enabled
and set for breaker operate time.

0 to 100%, Increment=0.01, Measured in % of DMAX Which is 0

programmed using the SB-DUTY command. The breaker to
Alarm Limit (in mode 1)
be monitored (CT1 or CT2) Is also programmed using the SB-
DUTY command.

0 to 99999, Increment=1, Number of operations counter value 0

alarm limit (in mode 2)
which when reached would cause an alarm.

Ranges are 20 to 1000 milliseconds, and 2 to 60 cycles). 0

Setting is reported in milliseconds if less than 1 second, but
alarm limit (in mode 3)
may be entered in milliseconds (m), or seconds (s), or cycles
(c).

SA-BKR Command
Purpose: Read or set breaker alarm settings.
Syntax: SA-BKR[n][=<mode>,<alarm limit>]
Comments: mode = selects the breaker function to be monitored
alarm limit = expressed in a value defined by mode parameter. The alarm limit for mode 1 is
entered as a percentage of DMAX. The alarm limit for mode 2 represents the counter value
which when reached, causes an alarm. The alarm limit for mode 3 represents the fault
breaker operate time.

Example Program breaker alarm point number 1 at 20 operations, point 2 at 50 percent duty, and
point 3 for slow breaker alarm for clearing times greater than 8 cycles.
>SA-BKR1=2,20
>SA-BKR2=1,50
>SA-BKR3=3,8c

TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR

The trip circuit monitor continually monitors the circuit breaker trip circuit for voltage and continuity. A closed
breaker with no voltage detected across the trip contacts can indicate that a trip circuit fuse is open or there
is a loss of continuity in the trip coil circuit.
The trip circuit monitor checks for voltage and continuity in the breaker trip circuit. A loss of voltage across
the trip contacts when the breaker is closed can indicate that either the fuse supplying the circuit is open or
the trip coil circuit lacks continuity. Breaker status (open or closed) is obtained through the breaker status

6-14 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

reporting function (configured by the SB-LOGIC command).
The detector circuit used by the trip circuit monitor is hardwired across the OUT1 contact. This contact is
used in all of the preprogrammed logic schemes as the main trip output. The detector circuit draws less than
1 milliampere of current through the trip coil when the breaker is closed. Figure 6-2 illustrates typical trip
circuit monitor connections for the BE1-851.
If the breaker status reporting function detects a closed breaker and no trip circuit voltage is sensed by the
trip circuit monitor after the appropriate coordination time delay (about 500 msec.), an alarm bit in the
programmable alarms function is set and the OUT1MON BESTlogic variable is set to TRUE.

Trip Circuit Relay Circuit

+ +
Monitor
Other 851 851 R
Relays IN6 OUT1 52

Trip
52 Status

851
52 IN3
TC
D2850-13.vsd
06-25-99
- -
Figure 6-2. Trip Circuit Voltage And Continuity Monitor

CAUTION
Applications that place other device inputs in parallel with the breaker trip coil may not
perform as desired. The connection of other devices in parallel with the trip coil causes
a voltage divider to occur when the breaker or trip circuit is open. This may cause false
tripping of the other devices and prevent the BE1-851 trip circuit monitor from reliably
detecting an open circuit. Contact Basler Electric for advice on using this application.
The circuit monitor sensing element has the same rating as the power supply voltage.
If the trip circuit voltage is significantly greater than the power supply voltage (for
example, when using a capacitor trip device), the user should program the BE1-851 to
use one of the other output relays for tripping. In this situation, the trip circuit monitor
function will not be available.

In Figure 6-3, a 62x auxillary relay is shown. In this case, the impedance of the 62x coil is small
compared to the impedance of the TCM circuit so the TCM is always at logic 1. This prevents the TCM
logic from working, even if the trip coil is open. Normally, when redundant systems are used, each relay
system is on an individual circuit and the sensing input for each relay system is isolated from the tripping
circuit.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-15

 +
Monitor +
Other 851 851 V TCM
R
Relays IN6 OUT1 -
Trip
Trip
D2863-15.vsd 52a
06-25-99

+
62X 52TC V 62X
-
-
Figure 6-3. TCM With Other Devices

FAULT REPORTING
The fault reporting function records and reports information about faults that have been detected by the
relay. The BE1-851 provides many fault reporting features. These features include Fault Summary Reports,
Sequence of Events Recorder Reports, Oscillographic Records, and Targets.
Logic expressions are used to define the three conditions for fault reporting. These conditions are Trip,
Pickup, and Logic trigger. Figure 6-1 and Table 6-7 illustrate how each of these logic expressions are used
by the various relay functions. Note that even though BESTlogic expressions are used to define these
conditions, these expressions aren’t included here. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic provides
information about using BESTlogic to program the relay.

Trip
Trip expressions are used by the fault reporting function to start logging targets for an event and to record
the fault current magnitudes at the time of trip. The HMI uses the trip expression to seal-in the Trip LED. The
breaker monitoring function uses the trip expression to start counting the breaker operate time.

Pickup
Pickup expressions are used by the fault reporting function to time-stamp the fault summary record, time the
length of the fault from pickup to dropout (fault clearing time), and to control the recording of oscillograph
data. The HMI uses the pickup expression to control the flashing of the Trip LED. A pickup expression is also
used by the setting group selection function to prevent a setting group change during a fault.

Logic
Logic trigger expressions allow the fault reporting function to be triggered even though the relay in not picked
up. A logic trigger expression provides an input to the fault reporting function much as the pickup expression
does. This logic expression is not used by the setting group selection or the HMI.

6-16 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

Fault Reporting Trigger Settings
Trigger settings for fault reports are made using the SG-TRIGGER (settings-general, trigger) command.

Table 6-10. SG-TRIGGER Command Specifications

Function Purpose Default

Logic expression used to define Trip fault reporting condition.

TRIP trigger When this expression becomes TRUE (1), it triggers data VO11+ BFT
recording.

Logic expression used to define Pickup fault reporting

PU trigger condition. When this expression becomes TRUE (1), it VO12 + BFPU
initiates the pickup timing sequence.

Logic expression used to define the trigger for fault reporting

LOGIC trigger when relay is not picked up. When this expression is TRUE 0
(1), fault reporting is triggered.

SG-TRIGGER Command
Purpose: Read or set fault reporting trigger logic.
Syntax: SG-TRIGGER[=<TRIP trigger>,<PU trigger>,<LOGIC trigger>]
Comments: The BESTlogic rules for input logic only allow OR and NOT operators in the Boolean logic
equations. Command specifications are summarized in Table 6-9.

Example Set the trigger logic so that targets start logging for an event when the trip logic expression
(VO11) is TRUE or when breaker failure trip is TRUE. Time-stamp the fault record and start
measuring fault clearing time when the pickup logic expression VO12 is TRUE.
>SG-TRIGGER=VO11+BFT,VO12,0

Targets
Each protective function logs target information to the fault reporting function when a trip condition occurs
and the trip output of the function block becomes TRUE (refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-17, call-out B).
Target information can be viewed and reset at the HMI and through the communication ports.
Target logging for a protective function can be disabled if the function is used in a supervisory or monitoring
capacity. The following paragraphs describe how the relay is programmed to define which protective
functions log targets. Table 6-11 lists the Protective functions and the associated targets.

Table 6-11. Protective Functions with Targets

Protective Function Name Default

Phase instantaneous OC with settable time delay 50TP Enabled

Neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 50TN Enabled

Negative sequence instantaneous OC with settable time delay 50TQ Enabled

(Sensing input type H only)

Second Phase instantaneous OC with settable time delay 150TP Enabled

Second Neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 150TN Enabled

Second Negative sequence instantaneous OC with settable time delay 150TQ Enabled
(Sensing input type H only)

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-17

 Protective Function Name Default

Third Neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 250TN Enabled

(Sensing input type G only)

Fourth Neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 350TN Enabled

(Sensing input type G only)

Phase inverse time OC 51P Enabled

Neutral inverse time OC 51N Enabled

Negative sequence inverse time OC (Sensing input type H only) 51Q Enabled

Second neutral time OC (Sensing input type G only) 151N Enabled

General purpose logic timer 62 Off

General purpose logic timer 162 Off

Setting the Targets Function

Using the SG-TARG command, you can select which protective elements trigger a target and what type of
logic condition will reset the targets.

Table 6-12. SG-TARG Command Specifications

Setting Range/Purpose Default

Protective function blocks List of protective functions from Table 6-10. Each Per Table 6-15
with targeting enabled protective function is separated by a slash (/)

Target reset logic (+ = OR, / = NOT) Logic expression that resets latched 0
expression targets when true

SG-TARG Command
Purpose: Read or set which protective elements log targets to the fault reporting function.
Syntax: SG-TARG[=<x/x/..x>,<rst TARG logic>]
Comments: Command specifications are summarized in Table 6-15.

Example Set the relay to log targets for 50T and 150T instantaneous overcurrent functions, and the
breaker failure function. Reset targets with input 1
>SG-TARG=50T/150T/BF, IN1

Retrieving Target Information

Targets can be viewed at HMI screen 1.2 and through the communication ports using the RG-TARG (report
general, targets) command. The relay provides target information from the most recent trip event. Target
information is specific to an event; it is not cumulative. Targets for previous events are recorded in the fault
summary reports which are described in the following subsection.
When a protective trip occurs and targets are logged, the HMI Trip LED seals-in and screen 1.2 is
automatically displayed. The LCD scrolls between the targets and the fault current magnitudes that were
recorded during the fault. Pressing the HMI Reset key will clear these targets and the Trip LED. Password
access isn’t required to reset targets at the HMI.
The RG-TARG (report general-targets) command is used to read and reset targets through the
communication ports.

6-18 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

RG-TARG Command
Purpose: Read or reset target status.
Syntax: RG-TARG[=0]
Comments: Entering RG-TARG returns the target information logged during the most recent trip event.
Entering RG-TARG=0 clears the latched target data.

Example Read the targets.

>RG-TARG
50A, 50N, 150A, 150N

Fault Summary Reports

The BE1-851 records information about faults and creates fault summary reports. A maximum of 16 fault
summary reports are stored in the relay. The two most recent reports are stored in nonvolatile memory.
When a new fault summary report is generated, the relay discards the oldest of the 16 fault records and
replaces it with a new one. Each fault summary report is assigned a sequential number (from 1 to 255) by
the relay. After event number 255 has been assigned, the numbering starts over at 1.

Fault Summary Report Example

A fault summary report collects several items of information about a fault that can aid in determining why a
fault occurred without having to sort through all of the detailed information available. The following example
illustrates a typical fault summary report. Call-outs shown in the report are references to the legend of Table
6-6.
Example Fault Summary Report

Fault Date and Time. These lines report the date and time of the initial trigger of the event. This is based on
either the pickup logic expression or the logic trigger expression becoming TRUE as defined by the
SG-TRIGGER command. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out A.
Station ID and Relay ID. These lines report station and device identifier information as defined by the SG-ID
command.

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-19

Relay Address. This line reports the communications port address that the report was requested from. The
relay address number is assigned using the SG-COM command, described in Section 11, ASCII Command
Interface.
Fault Number. This line reports the sequential number (from 1 to 255) assigned to the report by the BE1-851.
Fault Trigger. This line reports the logic variables in the pickup or logic trigger expressions that became
TRUE to trigger the recording of the event.
Event Type. This line reports the type of event that occurred. There are five fault event categories.
• Trip: A fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression and the relay tripped to clear the
fault.
• Pickup: A fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression but the relay never tripped
indicating that the fault was cleared by another device.
• Logic: A fault report was recorded by the logic trigger expression but no fault was detected as
defined by the pickup expression.
• Breaker Failure: A fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression and the breaker
failure trip became TRUE before the fault was cleared.
• RF=TRIG: A fault report was recorded by the ASCII command interface.
Active Group. This line reports what setting group was active at the time that the fault occurred.
Targets. This line reports the targets that were logged to the fault report between the time that the trip
expression became TRUE until the end of the fault. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out B.
Recloser State. This line reports the state of the recloser shot counter prior to the fault that triggered the
report.
Fault Clearing Time. This line reports the time from when the relay detected the fault until the relay detected
that the fault had cleared. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out C.
If the fault report was triggered by the RF-TRIG command, the recording of the report was terminated after
60 seconds and this line is reported as N/A.
If the pickup or logic expressions stay TRUE for more than 60 seconds, an alarm bit in the programmable
alarm function is set and this line is reported as N/A. In this situation, the fault reporting functions (including
targets) won’t operate again until the pickup and logic trigger expressions return to a FALSE state to enable
another trigger.
Breaker Operate Time. This line reports the breaker trip time from the breaker monitoring and alarm function.
This is the time measured from when the breaker is tripped until the fast-dropout current detector function
detects that the arc has been extinguished. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out D.
Oscillographic Reports. This line reports the number of oscillographic records(1 or 2)that are stored in
memory for this fault report. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out E. Recording of oscillographic
records is described in the Oscillographic Records subsection.
IA, IB, IC, IN, IQ. These lines report the current magnitudes measured for the power system cycle
immediately following the trip. If the fault is cleared prior to the relay tripping, the recorded fault currents are
for the power system cycle two cycles prior to the end of the fault. If the relay has been set to the Average
current measurement algorithm, these currents may not be representative due to the time constant inherent
in the measurement algorithm. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-6, call-out F.

Retrieving Fault Report Information from the Relay

Fault Summary Directory Report. The fault reporting function provides a directory of fault summary reports
that lists the number assigned to the fault summary report along with the date and time of the fault, the event
type, and the total number of oscillography records stored in memory for that event. The event number is
important because it is required to retrieve information about that event from the relay. This directory report
can be accessed by using the RF command.

6-20 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

RF Command
Purpose: Read or reset fault report data.
Syntax: RF[-n/NEW][=0/TRIG]
Comments: Use of RF command syntax is summarized in.

Example Fault summary Report

>RF
BE1-851 FAULT DIRECTORY
REPORT DATE : 01/01/99
REPORT TIME : 01:12:25
STATION ID : SUBSTATION_1
RELAY ID : BE1-851
RELAY ADDRESS : 0
NEW FAULTS : 3 (11:22:21 05/27/99-00:00:47 01/01/99)
TOTAL FAULTS : 3 (11:22:21 05/27/99-00:00:47 01/01/99)
-#- --DATE-- --TIME-- --EVENT TYPE-- --OSC--
197 01/01/99 00:00:47 TRIP 2
196 05/27/99 11:22:30 TRIP 0
195 05/27/99 11:22:21 TRIP 0
New Faults Counter. One line of the fault summary directory report contains the new faults counter. The new
faults counter tracks how many new fault reports have been recorded since the new faults counter was reset
to 0. This counter provides a way to check the fault information and then reset the new faults counter. Then,
the next time that the relay is checked, it’s easy to determine if any fault reports have been entered.
Resetting the new faults counter is achieved using the RF-NEW=0 command. Write access to Reports must
be gained to reset the new faults counter through the communication ports. The new faults counter can also
be viewed at HMI screen 4.1. The new faults counter cannot be reset at the HMI.
Fault Summary Reports. Individual fault summary reports can be retrieved using the RF-n command, where
n represents the number assigned to the fault summary report. To obtain the most recent report, use
RF-NEW. If additional detail is desired, Sequence of Events Recorder data and Oscillographic data can be
obtained for the faults also. This is discussed in greater detail later in this section. The following example
report was generated by entering RF-NEW immediately after creating a fault by entering RF-TRIG. Notice
that the FAULT TRIGGER and EVENT TYPE both show the event was caused by issuing the RF-TRIGGER
command.

Oscillographic Records
The fault reporting function can record up to 16 IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data
Exchange (COMTRADE) oscillographic records. Each record is 15 cycles long and records 24 samples per
cycle for the A, B, C, and N current inputs. The relay uses 24 samples per cycles in its operation. Each time
the fault reporting function starts recording a fault summary report, it freezes a 3 cycle pre-fault buffer and
records for 12 post-trigger cycles. If the fault isn’t cleared within that time, the fault reporting function records
a second oscillographic record. This second record provides a 15 cycle window of sample data to capture
the end of the fault. Oscillographic records are stored in volatile memory. As additional faults are recorded,
the oldest records are overwritten.
Table 6-13. Oscillographic Hardware Support
Feature Version 2.xx Version 3.xx

Number of Oscillographic Records 12 16

Length of Oscillographic Records 11 Cycles Each 15 Cycles Each

Sample Resolution 12 Samples per Cycle 24 Samples per Cycle

If a second oscillographic record is required, the fault recording function will continue to record sample data
in the second record with no gap. During this time, a 5 cycle buffer is being filled. If the fault is cleared within
5 cycles of the start of the second record, the record is terminated after it has recorded 15 cycles. If the fault
doesn’t clear in that period of time, the fault reporting function continues to save 5 cycles of sample data in

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-21

its buffer until the fault is cleared. At that point, it freezes the 5 cycle buffer, providing 5 cycles of end of fault
data and 10 cycles of post-fault data.

Retrieving Oscillographic Records

The fault summary directory and the fault summary reports list the numbers assigned to each fault record
and the number of oscillographic records associated with each fault. Oscillographic records can be retrieved
using the RO (report oscillography) command.

RO Command
Purpose: Read oscillographic COMTRADE .DAT or .CFG report.
Syntax: RO-nA/B[#].CFG/DAT/HDR
Comments: This is a read-only command. Command functions are summarized in Table 6-13.

Example1. Initiate transfer of a configuration report for the end of fault number 123.
RO-123B2.CFG (for binary format) or RO-123A2.CFG (for ASCII format)
Example2. Initiate transfer of a data report for the end of fault number 123.
RO-123B2.DAT (for binary format) or RO-123A2.DAT (for ASCII format)
Example3. To initiate transfer of the COMTRADE.HDR report for fault #155:
RO-155A.HDR (for ASCII)
Only one oscillographic report file can be requested at a time. Reports are transmitted in COMTRADE
format. Either a configuration file (CFG), a data file (DAT), or a header report(HDR) can be requested.
Header files contain the fault summary report followed by all the pertinent settings that are associated with
the requested fault record. These settings include the following.
• BESTlogic settings for User Programmable Logic Scheme.
• User Programmable Label settings, Global I/O settings.
• The protection setting group active during the fault.
• General protection settings.
• Fault reporting settings.
• Breaker Monitoring setttings.
• Alarm settings.
Files can be requested in ASCII or binary format but both file transfers use the same format. Binary file
transfer is much faster and consumes less disk space. ASCII format data is human readable and can be
analyzed by standard text editing software. Software for IBM compatible computers is available from Basler
Electric to convert binary files to ASCII format. The download protocol may be either XMODEM or XMODEM
CRC format. For ease of reference the name of the downloaded file should be the same as the command.
An Oscillographic record is triggered when the PU or LOGIC Expressions defined by the SG-TRIGGER logic
becomes TRUE. The Oscillographic record will contain 3 cycles of pre-trigger data and 8 cycles of post-
trigger data. Twelve samples will be stored every cycle. Each sample will contain 16-bit A/D values for all
4 analog channels (IA, IB, IC and IN) and a 1 or 0 for each of the 64 digital channels. The digital channels
are updated every ¼ cycle but recorded every 1/24 cycle. If the fault is not cleared by the end of the record,
then a second Oscillographic report will be triggered as soon as the first ends. The first report will cover the
initiation of the fault (start fault) and the second report will cover the breaker operate time (end fault).
Configuration and data files can be downloaded using any standard communications program. The
download protocol may be XMODEM or XMODEM CRC format. For ease of reference, use the command
name for the name of the downloaded file.

SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER

A sequence of events recorder (SER) report is very useful in reconstructing the exact sequence and timing
of events during a power disturbance or even normal system operations. The SER tracks over 100 data
points by monitoring the internal and external status of the relay. Data points are scanned every quarter-
cycle. All changes of state that occur during each scan are time tagged to 1 millisecond resolution. A total
of 255 changes are stored in volatile memory; when the SER memory becomes full, the oldest record is
replaced by the latest one acquired.

6-22 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

The SER monitors the following points and conditions.
 Single-state events such as resetting demands or targets, changing settings, etc.
 Programmable logic variables
 Targets
 Relay trouble alarm variables
 Programmable alarm variables
 Output contact status
 Fault reporting trigger expressions
When a monitored event occurs or a monitored variable changes state, the SER logs the time and date of
the event, the event or variable name, and the state that the variable changed to. For user programmable
logic variables (contact sensing inputs, virtual switches, and virtual outputs), the user-programmed variable
name and state names are logged in the SER report instead of the generic variable name and state names.
For more information, refer to Section 3, Input and Output Functions.

Retrieving SER Information

SER information is retrieved through SER Directory Reports, the New Events Counter, and by obtaining
specific SER Reports.
SER Directory Report. A directory report lists the number of events currently in memory and the time span
that the events cover. Directory reports are accessed using the RS (report SER) command.

New Events Counter. The new events counter tracks how many new entries have been logged to the SER
since the new events counter was reset to zero. After SER information is checked, the new events counter
can be reset. Then, the next time that the relay is checked, it’s easy to determine if there are new events that
haven’t been evaluated. One line of an SER directory report contains the new events counter information.
The new events counter is reset by obtaining write access to Reports and using the RS=0 command. The
new events counter can be viewed but not reset at HMI screen 4.2.
SER Report. A directory of SER reports can be obtained using the RS (report SER) command. Six sub-
reports are available through the RS command: RS-n, RS-Fn, RS-ALM, RS-I/O, RS-LGC, and RS-NEW.
These sub-reports give specific types of data without confusing the user with every internal state change and
event occurrence. Each sub-report is defined in the following paragraphs.
RS-n (report SER, number of most recent events). Events are retrieved for the most recent entries. Entering
RS-4 would view an SER report for the last four events.
RS-F<n> (report SER, for Fault <event number>). Events are retrieved for the period of time specific to a
fault event. The report includes all events within the time span of the fault plus one event before and after
the fault. Entering RS-F9 views a SER report associated with fault record 9.
RS-ALM (report SER, alarm). This command retrieves all alarm events that exist since the last RS=0
command was issued. (RS=0 resets the new records counter to zero.) This information can also be obtained
using the RA-SER command.
RS-I/O (report SER, input/output). This command reports all input and output events since the last RS=0
command was issued. (RS=0 resets the new records counter to zero.)
RS-LGC (report SER, logic). A report is retrieved for all logic events since the last RS=0 command was
issued. (RS=0 resets the new records counter to zero.)
RS-NEW(report SER, new events since RS=0 reset). Events are retrieved for the period of time covered
by the New Events Counter register.

RS Command
Purpose: Read or reset sequence of events record data.
Syntax: RS[-n/Fn/ALM/IO/LGC/NEW][=0]
Comments: n = number of events to be retrieved
Fn = fault record number to be retrieved

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-23

Example1. Read the directory report of records.
>RS
BE1-851 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS DIRECTORY
REPORT DATE : 06/1/99
REPORT TIME : 08:28:47
STATION ID : SUBSTATION_1
RELAY ID : BE1-851
RELAY ADDRESS : 3
NEW RECORDS : 15 (10:05:05.152 05/27/99 - 10:05:40.676 05/27/99)
TOTAL RECORDS :255 (10:03:59.514 05/27/99 - 10:05:40.676 05/27/99)
Example2. View fault record number 212.
>RS-F212
BE1-851 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS DIRECTORY
REPORT DATE : 06/1/99
REPORT TIME : 16:08:17
STATION ID : SUBSTATION_1
RELAY ID : BE1-851
RELAY ADDRESS : 3
--DATE-- ----TIME---- ----------POINT DESCRIPTION-----------STATUS--
05/28/99 15:13:17.481 OUTPUT 3 OPEN
05/28/99 15:13:17.356 PROT-PU NORMAL
51 PHASE PICKUP FALSE
PU TRIGGER FALSE
LOW-OC NORMAL
PROT-TRIP NORMAL
TRIP TRIGGER FALSE
05/28/99 15:13:17.281 51 PHASE B TRIP TRUE
LOW-OC TRIP
PROT-TRIP TRIP
OUTPUT 3 CLOSED
TRIP TRIGGER TRUE
05/28/99 15:13:16.417 51 PHASE PICKUP TRUE
PROT-PU PICKUP
PU TRIGGER

ALARMS FUNCTION
The alarms function monitors internal relay systems, external relay interfaces, and power system equipment.
Alarm points are segregated into Relay Trouble Alarms and Programmable Alarms. Alarm point status is
stored in nonvolatile memory and is retained when relay operating power is lost.
The ability to program the reporting and display of alarms along with the automatic display priority feature
of the HMI gives the relay the functionality of a local and remote alarm annunciator. See Section 10, Human-
Machine Interface for more information on the automatic display priority logic.

Relay Trouble Alarms

All internal circuitry and software that affects how the relay functions is monitored by the continuous self-test
diagnostics function of the relay trouble alarms. A detailed list of relay trouble alarms is provided in Table
6-14. If any one of these points asserts, the failsafe alarm output relay de-energizes and closes the OUTA
contact, the HMI Relay Trouble LED lights, all output relays are disabled and the relay is taken offline. The
relay trouble alarms function is not programmable.
If your application requires a normally closed contact that opens to indicate a relay trouble condition, use
BESTlogic to program the output logic. One of the output relays with normally open contacts (OUT1 through
OUT5) can be programmed to be held closed. For example, to open OUT5 for indication of relay trouble,
set the VO5 logic expression at /0 (SL-VO5=/0). A not zero setting is equal to logic 1. When the relay is fully
functional, the OUT5 output contact is closed. Since all output relays are disabled when a relay trouble alarm
exists, OUT5 opens when relay trouble occurs.

6-24 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Table 6-14. Relay Trouble Alarms
I.D. Number Diagnostic Description

1 RAM FAILURE Static RAM read/write error

2 ROM FAILURE EPROM program memory checksum error

3 uP FAILURE Microprocessor exception or self-test error

4 EEPROM FATAL ERROR EEPROM read/write error

5 ANALOG FAILURE Analog to digital converter error

6 CALIBRATION ERR Relay not calibrated or calibration checksum error

7 PWR SUPPLY ERR Power supply out of tolerance

8 WATCHDOG FAILURE Microprocessor watchdog circuit timed out

9 SET DFLTS LOADED Relay using setting defaults

10 CAL DFLTS LOADED Relay using calibration defaults

Relay trouble alarms, except for CALIBRATION ERR, EEPROM FATAL ERR, SET DFLTS LOADED, and
CALDFLTS LOADED indicate that the relay is not functional and causes the self-test diagnostics to force
a microprocessor reset to try to correct the problem.
CALIBRATION ERR, EEPROM FATAL ERROR, or DFLTS LOADED errors indicate that the relay is
functional but needs re-calibration or the settings reprogrammed.
Any relay trouble alarm will disable the protection functions, light the Relay Trouble LED, and place the
output contacts in their normal, de-energized state. If a relay trouble (RA-REL) alarm is cleared by pressing
the HMI Reset key while viewing screen 1.3 or using the RA=0 or RA-REL=0 commands, then the relay will
attempt to return back online by issuing a software reset. The relay resets by going through a full startup and
initialization cycle. If no problems are detected, the relay returns online and enables protection.

Major, Minor, and Logic Programmable Alarms

The programmable alarms function covers all circuits monitored by the continuous self-test diagnostics
function that do not affect the relay core functions. Alarm functions used to monitor the power system and
equipment are also part of the programmable alarms. Table 6-15 provides a detailed list of all programmable
alarms. The programmable alarm points can be prioritized into Major and Minor alarms using the SA-MAJ
(setting alarms, major) and SA-MIN (setting alarms, minor) commands. Major alarm points, when triggered,
cause the HMI Major Alarm LED to light and the BESTlogic variable ALMMAJ to assert. Minor alarm points,
when triggered, cause the HMI Minor Alarm LED to light and the BESTlogic variable ALMMIN to assert.

Table 6-15. Programmable Alarms

I.D. Number Diagnostic Description
1 OUT1 CKT OPEN ALARM 7 Trip circuit continuity and voltage monitor
2 BKR FAIL ALARM Breaker failure trip
3 RECLOSER FAIL ALARM 7 Reclose fail timer timed out before breaker closed
4 RECLOSER LOCKOUT ALARM 7 Recloser went through sequence without success
Breaker Alarm 1 threshold (SA-BKR1 setting)
5 BREAKER ALARM 1
exceeded
Breaker Alarm 2 threshold (SA-BKR2 setting)
6 BREAKER ALARM 2
exceeded

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-25

 I.D. Number Diagnostic Description
Breaker Alarm 3 threshold (SA-BKR3 setting)
7 BREAKER ALARM 3
exceeded
8 P DEMAND ALARM 7 Phase demand
9 N DEMAND ALARM 7 Neutral unbalance demand
10 Q DEMAND ALARM 7 Negative Sequence unbalance demand
11 GROUP OVERRIDE ALARM 7 Setting group control logic override
Excessive delay in HMI or serial communication
12 SYS I/O DELAY ALARM
operation
13 COMM ERROR ALARM Communication failure
14 CLOCK ERROR 7 Real-time clock not set
15 uP RESET ALARM Microprocessor has been reset
16 SETTING CHANGE ALARM Settings change made by user
17 EE NONFATAL ERR ALARM EEPROM nonfatal recoverable errot
One or more output contacts have logic override
18 OUTPUT OVERRIDE ALARM 7
condition
19 IRIG SYNC LOST ALARM Loss of IRIG synchronization
20 SGC ACTIVE ALARM 7 Active setting group changed
VO13 logic is TRUE. (User programmable logic
21 VO13 LOGIC ALRM 7
alarm)
VO14 logic is TRUE. (User programmable logic
22 VO14 LOGIC ALRM
alarm)
23 VO15 LOGIC ALRM 7 VO15 logic is TRE. (User programmable logic alarm)
TRUE if fault event trigger lasts longer than 60
24 FLT RPT TIMEOUT ALARM
seconds

25 LOGIC=NONE ALARM Active Logic = NONE

Changes made on serial port not saved after 5
26 CHANGES LOST ALARM
minutes.

Alarms with an asterisk (7) are non-latching. A non-latching alarm clears itself automatically when the
alarm condition goes away. All other alarms are latching and must be manually reset by using the HMI
Reset button or the RA=0 command.
The output of any programmable alarm can also be used in programmable logic expressions without being
programmed to be reported by the programmable alarm reporting function. The ALMLGC variable is
provided for this purpose. Programmable alarm variables can be masked to drive BESTlogic variable
ALMLGC by using the SA-LGC command.

Programming Alarm Priorities

Alarm settings include Major, Minor, and Logic alarm priorities, Demand alarm points, and the Breaker alarm
points. Programming details for Demand alarm points is available in the Demand Functions subsection.
Refer to the Breaker Monitoring subsection for details about programming Breaker alarm points. Major,
Minor, and Logic programmable alarm settings are summarized in Table 6-16.

6-26 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

 Table 6-16. Programmable Alarm Settings
Setting Range/Purpose Default

Major alarm points(Drives Major List of alarm functions per Table 6-14 25
Alarm LED and ALMMAJ logic Separated by forward slash (/)
variable

Minor alarm points(Drives Minor List of alarm functions per Table 6-14 29
Alarm LED and ALMMAJ logic Separated by forward slash (/)
variable

Logic alarm points (drives List of alarm functions per Table 6-14 0
ALMLGC logic variable) Separated by forward slash (/)

SA-MAJ/MIN/LGC Command
Purpose: Read or set major/minor/logic alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA[-<type>][=[<alarm num 1>][/<alarm num 2>]...[/<alarm num n>]]
Comments: type = MAJ (Major), MIN (Minor), or LGC (Logic)
alarm num = alarm identifier (see Table 6-20)
Privilege G or S password access is required to change settings.

Example Set the Major Alarm to trigger when the trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor asserts,
when breaker failure occurs, or when virtual output 15 is TRUE.
>SA-MAJ=1/2/23

Retrieving and Resetting Alarm Reports

When an alarm condition occurs, the appropriate front panel LED lights and HMI screen 1.3 is displayed.
(See Section 10, Human-Machine Interface for more information about automatic display priority logic.) The
HMI display scrolls between displaying all active alarm points. This includes alarms that are not
programmable (relay trouble alarms). Any latched alarms that aren’t currently active can be reset by pressing
the HMI Reset key. Refer to Table 6-14 for the list of latching alarm points and self clearing alarm points.
The reset key of the HMI is context sensitive. That is, the functionality depends upon what screen is
currently being displayed. BESTlogic variable RSTKEY takes advantage of this to allow the front panel
reset key on the relay to be used in the programmable logic scheme when the alarm screens 1.2,
(\STAT\ALARMS) is active. An example of the use of this logic variable is to break the seal-in for a logic
expression. The logic expression can be programmed so that the seal-in function uses VO13, VO14, or
VO15. If the virtual output expression is included in one of the programmable alarm masks, the automatic
display priority logic will cause the display to go to the alarm screens 1.2, (\STAT\ALARMS),. When the
reset key is pressed on the front of the relay, the RSTKEY
RSTKEY
logic variable is asserted and the logic expression seal-in
is broken. See Application, Section 8, Application,
HMI RESET KEY
Application Tips, for more information. Pressing the reset Alarm
key on the HMI while the alarm screen is displayed will R A - M A J = 0
RA-MIN=0 Reset
clear any latched alarms that are not currently active. Logic
Refer to Table 6-14 for a listing of alarm points that are Logic D2863-16.vsd
12-06-99
latching and those that are self clearing. Figure 6-4
Figure 6-4. Programmable Alarm Function
shows the alarm reset logic.
Logic variables for ALMMAJ, ALMMIN, and ALMLGC can also be set to operate any of the output contacts
to give an indication that an alarm condition exists. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic provides
more details about this feature.
The status of the three front-panel LEDs (Relay Trouble, Minor Alarm, and Major Alarm) can be read through
the communication ports by using the RG-STAT command. Alarm status is given in the DIAG/ALARM line

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-27

of the General Status Report. Refer to the General Status Reporting subsection for more information about
obtaining relay status with the RG-STAT command.
The RA (report alarms) command can be used to read detailed alarm reports and reset latched alarms.

RA Command
Purpose: Read or reset alarm information.
Syntax: RA[-<type>][=0]
Comments: type = LGC (Logic), MAJ (Major), MIN (Minor), or REL (Relay)
Privilege G or R password access is required to reset alarms.
Example1. Read the current alarm status.
>RA
RA-LGC NONE
RA-MAJ NONE
RA-MIN ALARM# 16 - SETTING CHANGE
RA-FAIL NONE
Example2. Clear the latched minor alarm
>RA-MIN=0

Links Between Programmable Alarms and BESTlogic

Several links between the programmable alarms and BESTlogic allow alarm functions to be used in the logic
scheme and programmable logic functions to be used in the alarm reporting function.

Programmable Alarms Controlled by BESTlogic Elements

Virtual outputs VO13, VO14, and VO15 are driven by BESTlogic expressions and are available in the
programmable alarms function. These three virtual outputs have labels that can be assigned meaningful
names. Then, when a logic condition that is used for an alarm exists, the label will be reported in the alarm
reporting function.

Programmable Alarms Reset

Programmable alarms can be reset by any one of three methods.
 The programmable alarms reset logic expression becomes TRUE.
 Pressing the front panel Reset key when HMI screen 1.3 is active.
 Using the SA-RESET command.

SA-RESET Command
Purpose: Read or program reset logic for programmable alarms.
Syntax: SA-RESET[=<rst alm logic>]
Comments: rst alm logic = logic used to reset the programmable alarms
Programmable alarms can be reset manually by entering SA-RESET=0. Privilege G or S
password access is required to change settings.

Example Reset the programmable alarms when contact input 3 or 4 becomes TRUE.
>SA-RESET=IN3+IN4

BESTlogic Elements Controlled by Programmable Alarms

Major, Minor, and Logic programmable alarm settings drive BESTlogic variables ALMMAJ, ALMMIN, and
ALMLGC. These variables can be used in logic expressions to control logic when the alarm is active. For
example, these variables could be used to actuate an output relay to signal a SCADA RTU that an alarm
condition exists.

6-28 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-851

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE VERSION
Hardware and software version reporting is used to determine what style chart selections are included in
the relay, the relay serial number, and the version of the embedded software (firmware).
Style and serial number information is contained on the label on the front panel. Embedded software
information can be obtained at HMI screen 4.7. The information of screen 4.7 is also displayed briefly when
operating power is applied to the relay.
A software and hardware version report is obtained using the RG-VER command.

RG-VER Command
Purpose: Read model number, style number, serial number, and program version information.
Syntax: RG-VER
Comments: No password privileges are required to read status information.

Example Obtain a hardware and software version report from the relay.
>RG-VER
Model Number : BE1-851
Style Number : H5-A1S50
App Program : VER 2.42.00 10/01/99
Boot Program : VER 2.05 10/21/98
Serial Number : H00039995

BE1-851 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-29

SECTION 7 • BESTlogic PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7 • BESTlogic PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
WORKING WITH PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Function Block Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Output Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Defining Output Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Virtual and Hardware Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Active Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Custom Logic Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Copying and Renaming Preprogrammed Logic Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Creating or Customizing a Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Debugging the Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
USER INPUT AND OUTPUT LOGIC VARIABLE NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
BESTlogic APPLICATION TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Figures
Figure 7-1. BESTlogic Sensing Input Type G Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Figure 7-2. BESTlogic Sensing Input Type H Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Figure 7-3. Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-3. Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Tables
Table 7-1. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Table 7-2. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Table 7-3. SN Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic i

SECTION 7 • BESTlogic PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC

INTRODUCTION
Multifunction relays are similar in nature to a panel of single-function protective relays. Both must be wired
together with ancillary devices to operate as a complete protection and control system. In the single-function
static and electromechanical environment, elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams provide direction for
wiring protective elements, switches, meters, and indicator lights into a unique protection and control system.
In the digital, multifunction environment, the process of wiring individual protection or control elements is
replaced with the entry of logic settings. The process of creating a logic scheme is the digital equivalent of
wiring a panel. It integrates the multifunction protection, control, and input/output elements into a unique
protection and control system.
BESTlogic is a programming method used for managing the input, output, protection, control, monitoring,
and reporting capabilities of Basler Electric’s digital, multifunction, protective relay systems. Each relay
system has multiple, self-contained function blocks that have all of the inputs and outputs of its discrete
component counterpart. Each independent function block interacts with control inputs, virtual outputs, and
hardware outputs based on logic variables defined in equation form with BESTlogic. BESTlogic equations
entered and saved in the relay system’s nonvolatile memory integrate (electronically wire) the selected or
enabled protection and control blocks with control inputs, virtual outputs, and hardware outputs. A group of
logic equations defining the function of the multifunction relay is called a logic scheme.
Several preprogrammed logic schemes are stored in relay memory. Each scheme is configured for a typical
protection application and virtually eliminates the need for start-from-scratch programming. Any of the
preprogrammed schemes can be copied and saved as the active logic. Preprogrammed logic schemes can
also be copied and then customized to suit your application. Detailed information about preprogrammed
logic schemes is provided later in this section.
BESTlogic isn’t used to define the operating settings (pickup thresholds and time delays) of the individual
protection and control functions. Operating settings and logic settings are interdependent, but separately
programmed functions. Changing logic settings is similar to rewiring a panel, and is separate and distinct
from making the operating settings that control the pickup thresholds and time delays of a relay. Detailed
information about operating settings is provided in Section 4, Protection and Control Functions.

WORKING WITH PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC

BESTlogic uses two types of logic settings: output logic settings and function block logic settings. These two
types of settings are discussed in the following subsections. Output logic settings are entered in equation
form and control the hardware outputs of the relay. BESTlogic function blocks are illustrated in Figures 7-1
and 7-2 and are discussed in the following paragraphs.
Names assigned to inputs, outputs, timers, and protection and control elements represent the logic variables
in the equations. Tables 7-1 and 7-2 lists the logic variable names and descriptions.

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-1

 Figure 7-1. BESTlogic Sensing Input Type G Function Blocks

7-2 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

 Figure 7-2. BESTlogic Sensing Input Type H Function Blocks

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-3

 Table 7-1. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions for Sensing Input Type H Relays
VARIABLE
VARIABLE NAME
NAME DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
Input and Output Logic Variables Time Overcurrent Logic Variables
IN1 - IN4 Inputs 1 through 4 Status 51PT 51 Phase Tripped
VOA Relay Trouble Alarm Output 51NT 51 Neutral Tripped
VO1 - VO5 Virtual Outputs 1 to 5 51QT 51T Negative Sequence Tripped
(Drives hardware outputs 1 through 5)
VO6 - VO15 Virtual Outputs 6 to 15 51PPU 51 Phase Picked Up
Control Logic Variables 51NPU 51 Neutral Picked Up
RSTKEY HMI Target Reset Key Instantaneous Overcurrent Logic Variables
50TPT 50T Phase Tripped
101T Virtual Breaker Control Switch Tripped 50TPPU 50T Phase Picked Up
101C Virtual Breaker Control Switch Close 50TNT 50T Neutral Tripped
101SC Virtual Breaker Control Switch 50TNPU 50T Neutral Picked Up
Slip Contact
62 62 Timer Output 50TQT 50T Negative Sequence Tripped
162 162 Timer Output 50TQPU 50T Negative Sequence Picked Up
43 Virtual Switch 43 Output 150T 150T Phase Tripped
143 Virtual Switch 143 Output 150TPPU 150T Phase Picked Up
243 Virtual Switch 243 Output 150TNT 150T Neutral Tripped
343 Virtual Switch 343 Output 150TQT Negative Sequence Tripped
SG0 Setting Group 0 Active (Default) 150TQPU 150T Negative Sequence Picked Up
SG1 Setting Group 1 Active
SG2 Setting Group 2 Active
SG3 Setting Group 3 Active
Monitor Logic Variables
ALMLGC Logic Alarm
ALMMAJ Major Alarm
ALMMIN Minor Alarm
OUT1MON Output 1 Monitor (Circuit Continuity)
Reclosing Logic Variables
79C 79 Close Signal
79RNG 79 Running/Block Tap Changer
79LO 79 Lock Out
79F 79 Reclose Fail
79SCB 79 Sequence Control Block
Breaker Failure Logic Variables
BFT Breaker Failure Tripped
BFPU Breaker Failure Picked Up

7-4 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

 Table 7-2. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions for Sensing Input Type G Relays
VARIABLE
VARIABLE NAME
NAME DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
Input and Output Logic Variables Time Overcurrent Logic Variables
IN1 - IN4 Inputs 1 through 4 Status 51PT 51 Phase Tripped
VOA Relay Trouble Alarm Output 51NT 51 Neutral Tripped
VO1 - VO5 Virtual Outputs 1 to 5 151NT 151 Neutral Tripped
(Drives hardware outputs 1 through 5)
VO6 - VO15 Virtual Outputs 6 to 15 51PPU 51 Phase Picked Up
Control Logic Variables 51NPU 51 Neutral Picked Up
RSTKEY HMI Target Reset Key Instantaneous Overcurrent Logic Variables
50TPT 50T Phase Tripped
101T Virtual Breaker Control Switch Tripped 50TPPU 50T Phase Picked Up
101C Virtual Breaker Control Switch Close 50TNT 50T Neutral Tripped
101SC Virtual Breaker Control Switch 50TNPU 50T Neutral Picked Up
Slip Contact
62 62 Timer Output 250TNT 250T Neutral Tripped
162 162 Timer Output 50TQPU 50T Negative Sequence Picked Up
43 Virtual Switch 43 Output 150T 150T Phase Tripped
143 Virtual Switch 143 Output 150TPPU 150T Phase Picked Up
243 Virtual Switch 243 Output 150TNT 150T Neutral Tripped
343 Virtual Switch 343 Output 350TNT 350T Neutral Tripped
SG0 Setting Group 0 Active (Default) 150TQPU 150T Negative Sequence Picked Up
SG1 Setting Group 1 Active .
SG2 Setting Group 2 Active
SG3 Setting Group 3 Active
Monitor Logic Variables
ALMLGC Logic Alarm
ALMMAJ Major Alarm
ALMMIN Minor Alarm
OUT1MON Output 1 Monitor (Circuit Continuity)
Reclosing Logic Variables
79C 79 Close Signal
79RNG 79 Running/Block Tap Changer
79LO 79 Lock Out
79F 79 Reclose Fail
79SCB 79 Sequence Control Block
Breaker Failure Logic Variables
BFT Breaker Failure Tripped
BFPU Breaker Failure Picked Up

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-5

Function Block Logic Settings
Each BESTlogic function block is equivalent to its discrete device counterpart. For example, the Reclosing
Logic Function Block of Figure 7-3 has many of the characteristics of a BE1-79M Multiple Shot Reclosing
Relay.
Before using a protection or control function block, two items must be set: the Mode and the Input Logic.
Setting the Mode is equivalent to deciding which protection or control functions will be used in a logic
scheme. The Input Logic establishes control of a function block.
Mode and input logic information is contained in logic setting command strings. Depending on the command,
the mode setting can either enable or disable a logic input or determine how a function block operates. Input
logic defines which logic variables control or disable a logic function. An example of an input logic equation
is SL-51P=1,IN3+VO6. In this frequency logic command string, the 1 parameter indicates that the 51P
function is enabled. The IN3+VO6 expression indicates that the 51P function is disabled when input 3 or
virtual output 6 are TRUE.
The AND operator may not be applied to the terms of an input logic equation. Any number of variables or
their inverse can be combined in a function block input logic expression. Section 4, Protection and Control
Functions provides detailed information about setting the logic for each function block.

Output Logic Settings

Defining Output Operation

Output operation is defined by Boolean logic equations. Each
variable in an equation corresponds to the current state
(evaluated every quarter cycle) of an input, output, or timer.
Figure 7-3 illustrates this relationship. Every quarter cycle, output
expressions are evaluated as TRUE or FALSE. If a logic output
that corresponds to a hardware output changes state, then the
corresponding output relay contact also changes state. Figure 7-3. Virtual Output Logic

When the relay is powered up, all logic outputs are disabled and most variables (including virtual outputs)
initialize as FALSE. Some variable states are stored in EEPROM and are restored to the last state prior to
loss of power. These variables include 43/143/243/343,101SC, and SG0 through SG3. All control
commands, including logic override control, are also stored in EEPROM. If you override output logic and
force an output to open, that condition will be maintained even if operating power is cycled.
When the logic is running and logic expression SL-VO[n] is FALSE, then output VO[n] = 0. When the logic
is running and logic expression SL-VO[n] is TRUE, then VO[n] = 1. Hardware outputs OUTA and OUT1
through OUT5 follow the corresponding logic outputs VOA and VO1 through VO6.
Logic equations are defined by logic variables, logic operators, and their position in an equation. The
available logic operators include AND (9), OR (+), and NOT (/). The NOT operator is applied to the variable
immediately following the symbol (/). For virtual output equations, OR logic can be applied to any number
of variables if no AND logic is used in the expression. Similarly, AND logic can be applied to any number
of variables if no OR logic is used. Any number of NOT operators may be used. For complex expressions
that use both AND and OR operators, OR logic is limited to four terms. Up to four AND terms with any
number of variables can be ORed together. When the relay is processing a complex expression, it performs
AND operations before performing OR operations.
Logic expressions for virtual outputs are entered with the SL-VO (settings logic, virtual outputs) command.

SL-VO Command
Purpose: Programs a logical mode of operation for a virtual output.
Syntax: SL-VO[x][=<equation>]
Comments: x = virtual output designator A or 1 - 15
equation = Boolean logic expression using variables: virtual inputs (Ix), logic module
outputs, virtual outputs (VOx) and operators AND (9), OR (+), and NOT (/). Area G or S
password access is required to change settings.
7-6 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851
Entering SL-VO by itself will normally read the output logic equation of the active logic. If entered while
programming a custom logic, it will read the output logic of the custom logic.

SL-VO Command Examples

EXAMPLE.1Turn on output 5 when the breaker failure logic trips.
>SL-VO5=BFT
EXAMPLE.2Turn on output 1 when any instantaneous or timed overcurrent element trips.
>SL-VO1=50TPT+50TN+150TP+150TN+51P+51N+50TQ+51Q
EXAMPLE.3Turn on output 2 when the low-set instantaneous overcurrent element (50) trips but the
corresponding high-set instantaneous overcurrent element (150) does not.
>SL-VO2=50TP9/150TP+50TN9/150TN

Virtual and Hardware Outputs

A virtual output exists only as a logical state inside the relay. A hardware output is a physical relay contact
that can be used for protection or control. Each BE1-851 relay has five isolated, normally open (NO) output
contacts (OUT1 – OUT5) and one isolated, normally closed (NC) alarm output (OUTA). Output contacts
OUT1 through OUT5 are controlled by the status of the internal virtual logic signals VO1 through VO5. If
VO[n] becomes TRUE, then the corresponding output relay OUT[n] energizes and closes the NO contacts.
For the alarm output, if VOA becomes TRUE, the ALM output de-energizes and opens. More information
about input and output functions is provided in Section 3, Input and Output Functions.
Hardware outputs can also be controlled by the CO-OUT (control operate, output) command. The CO-OUT
command overrides control of logic outputs. Outputs may be pulsed or latched in a 0 or 1 state
independently from the state of the virtual output logic. More information about overriding control of logic
outputs is available in Section 3, Input and Output Functions.

LOGIC SCHEMES
A logic scheme is a group of logic variables written in equation form that defines the operation of a multi-
function relay. Each logic scheme is given a unique name of one to eight alphanumeric characters. This
gives you the ability to select a specific scheme and be confident that the selected scheme is in operation.
Six logic schemes, configured for typical protection applications, are stored in nonvolatile memory. Only one
of these logic schemes can be active at a given time. In most applications, preprogrammed logic schemes
eliminate the need for custom programming. Preprogrammed logic schemes may provide more inputs,
outputs, or features than are needed for a particular application. This is because the preprogramed schemes
are designed for a large number of applications with no special programming required. Unneeded inputs or
outputs may be left open to disable a function, or a function block can be disabled through operating
settings. Unused current sensing inputs should be shorted to minimize noise pickup.
When a custom logic scheme is required, programming time can be reduced by copying a preprogrammed
scheme into the active logic. The logic scheme can then be modified to meet the specific application.

Active Logic Scheme

Digital, multifunction relays must have an active logic scheme in order to function. All Basler Electric
multifunction relays are delivered with a default, active logic loaded into memory. The default, active logic
scheme for the BE1-851 is named USER. If the function block configuration and output logic of USER meets
the requirements of your application, then only the operating settings (power system parameters and
threshold settings) need to be adjusted before placing the relay in service.

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-7

 Note

There has been a fundamental improvement to the way the user sets up BESTlogic in this
device. In some prior implementations or BESTlogic, it was necessary to make a separate
setting that determined whether the user’s logic scheme or if the one of the pre-programmed
logic schemes was to be made active. This setting was made from the ASCII command
interface using the SP-LOGIC (Set Protection Logic) command. This setting has been
eliminated in relays with firmware version 2.42 and higher.

In the implementation of BESTlogic used in this relay, the logic scheme defined by the user’s
logic settings is always active. If the user wishes to use a pre-programmed logic scheme,
he now copies it into his user logic settings. This process is accomplished from the ASCII
command interface using the SL-N (Set Logic Name) command in this and previous
BESTlogic implementations.
If a different preprogrammed logic scheme is required, it can be easily copied to active logic and used as
is, or customized to your specifications. To accomplish this, communication with the relay must be
established. This is referred to as the on-line method of setting or changing the active logic. It is
accomplished by connecting a computer to the front or rear RS-232 port and establishing communication
through compatible terminal emulation software such as Windows® HyperTerminal or Terminal (VT100
emulation). Section 11, ASCII Command Interface provides detailed information about command structure
and establishing communication with the relay. Appendix D, Setting Terminal Communications gives
instructions for configuring Windows® HyperTerminal and Terminal for use with the BE1-851.
Any of the six preprogrammed logic schemes stored in relay memory can be copied to the active logic and
customized or used as is. To copy a logic scheme into active logic, use the SL-N=<name> command.
The SL (settings logic) command is used to obtain a list of the logic schemes stored in memory or the
equations associated with a logic scheme. Entering SL: returns a list of the logic schemes available. The
first scheme listed is the active logic scheme. Entering SL: followed by the name of a preprogrammed
scheme returns all equations associated with the named scheme (SL:BUS for example). For custom
schemes, place an equals sign between SL and the logic name (SL=CUSTOM for example). Similarly,
preprogrammed logic commands and parameters are separated by a colon; custom logic commands and
parameters are separated by an equals sign.
SL Command Examples
EXAMPLE.1 Read the logic schemes available in memory.
>SL:
USER, FEEDER_1, FEEDER_2, FEEDER_3, FEEDER_4, BUS, BACKUP, NONE
EXAMPLE.2 Read all logic settings associated with the BACKUP logic scheme.
>sl:backup
SL-N:BACKUP
SL-50TP:1,0; SL-50TN:1,0; SL-50TQ:1,0
SL-150TP:1,0; SL-150TN:1,0; SL-150TQ:1,0
SL-51P:1,0; SL-51N:1,0; SL-51Q:1,0
SL-62:0,0,0
SL-162:0,0,0
SL-79:0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF:1,VO10,VO15
SL-GROUP:2,/IN2,0,0,0,0
SL-43:0
SL-143:0
SL-243:0
SL-343:2
SL-101:1
SL-VOA:ALMMAJ
SL-VO1:101T+VO8+BFPU+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2:101C
SL-VO3:/IN2
SL-VO4:VO9*/VO15
SL-VO5:BFT

7-8 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

 SL-VO6:0
SL-VO7:0
SL-VO8:51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9:50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10:VO11+150TPPU*IN3+150TNPU*IN3+150TQPU*IN3
SL-VO11:50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12:50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13:0
SL-VO14:0
SL-VO15:343+/IN4
>
EXAMPLE.3 Read the logic equation associated with logic variable VO1.
>SL-VO1
>BFPU+VO8+101T

Custom Logic Schemes

A custom logic scheme can be created from scratch by copying NONE to active logic and then renaming
the logic. A custom logic scheme can also be created by modifying any one of the preprogrammed logic
schemes after copying it to active logic and renaming. Preprogrammed logic schemes copied to active logic
with no name change are read-only schemes and cannot have their logic expressions altered. Before
modifying a logic scheme copied to active logic, the scheme must be assigned a unique name of one to eight
alphanumeric characters. This scheme is then referred to as a custom or user programmable logic scheme
because the variable expressions of the logic can be customized or created from scratch to suit the needs
of an application. A custom logic scheme may be revised many times, but only the most recent changes are
saved to active logic.

Copying and Renaming Preprogrammed Logic Schemes

CAUTION

Always remove the relay from service prior to changing or modifying the active logic
scheme. Attempting a logic scheme change while the relay is in service could generate
unexpected or unwanted outputs.

Copying a preprogrammed logic scheme to the active logic and assigning a unique name is accomplished
with the SL-N (settings logic, name) command. Changes are not activated until the EXIT and SAVE
commands are executed.
If the previous active logic was a customized scheme, the new custom logic scheme may be given the same
name as the previous scheme or it may be given an entirely new name. However, a custom logic scheme
must be different from any of the preprogrammed logic scheme names as previously discussed.

SL-N Command
Purpose: Reads or sets the active logic scheme name or copies a preprogrammed logic scheme to
the active logic scheme.
Syntax: SL-N[=<name>]
SL-N Command Examples
The following examples illustrate how a preprogrammed logic scheme is copied to active logic and then
renamed with a custom name.
EXAMPLE.1 Read the name of the active logic scheme. In this example, the active scheme is the
default USER scheme.
>SL-N
>USER
EXAMPLE.2 Copy a different preprogrammed scheme, FEEDER_1, to active logic.
>SL-N=FEEDER_1
>OVERWRITE CUSTOM (active) LOGIC SETTINGS (Y/N)?
>Y

BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-9

EXAMPLE.3 If this preprogrammed scheme meets the needs of the application, the changes can be
saved.
>EXIT
>SAVE CHANGES (Y/N/C)? (Y = Yes, N = No, and C = Cancel, Continue editing)
>Y
>CHANGES SAVED
If an attempt was made to customize this read-only, preprogrammed logic, the relay would issue the
following message.
ERROR! CUSTOM LOGIC NAME EQUALS STANDARD LOGIC NAME
In order to customize the FEEDER_1 scheme (modify the logic expressions), the preprogrammed logic
name must be given a unique name that differs from any of the preprogrammed logic scheme names.
1. Rename the active FEEDER_1 logic with a unique, meaningful logic name.
SL-N=MYFEEDER
EXIT
SAVE CHANGES (Y/N/C)?
Y
CHANGES SAVED
MYFEEDER is now the active logic and the logic expressions can be changed as required. Remember,
changes must be saved to make them active.

Creating or Customizing a Logic Scheme

Before customizing a preprogrammed logic scheme, the scheme must be renamed. This process is outlined
in the previous SL-N Command Examples. The following procedure outlines the process of customizing or
creating a logic scheme. If a completely new logic scheme is to be created, begin with Step 5.
Step 1. Copy the preprogrammed scheme by using the SL-N=<preprogrammed logic name>
command.
Step 2. Name the preprogrammed scheme with a unique, non-preprogrammed name by using the
SL-N=<new name> command. This allows the logic scheme to be programmed.
Step 3. Obtain a list of the logic equations with the SL command.
Step 4. Disable unneeded outputs or function blocks by setting them equal to zero. For example,
SL-VO10=0
Alternately, all output equations can be programmed or disabled at once by not using a
number suffix. For example, entering SL-VO=0 clears all output equations before writing new
ones.
Another way to disable all logic settings is to copy the NONE logic to active logic. Renaming
the NONE logic will then permit the scheme to be programmed. The syntax used would be
SL-N=NONE;Y;SL-N=<new name>.
Step 5. Change the logic expressions as required by using the SL-<function> and SL-VO commands.
Step 6. Use the SL command to review the changes.
Step 7. Save the changes by using the EXIT command.

The active logic scheme can also be saved as a text file and modified off-line using any ASCII text editor.
The text file can then be uploaded to the relay through terminal communications. Also, a Microsoft® Excel
“Settings Record” spreadsheet is available with the BE1-851 and contains all of the preprogrammed logic
schemes. These schemes can be modified and saved as a text file and then uploaded to the relay’s active
logic. See Appendix C, Relay Setting Record for more information.

7-10 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

Debugging the Logic Scheme
If there are problems with a customized logic scheme, the RG-STAT command can be used to check the
status of all logic variables. More information about the RG-STAT command can be found in Section 6,
Reporting and Alarm Functions.

USER INPUT AND OUTPUT LOGIC VARIABLE NAMES

Assigning meaningful names to the inputs and outputs makes sequential events reports easier to analyze.
Input and output logic variable names are assigned with the SN command. All SN labels are used in the RS
(reports, sequence of events) reports. Entering SN by itself returns a list of all programmable names.
Table 7-3. SN Command Settings
Setting Range/Purpose Default

Name 1 to 10 Characters. NA
User name to replace <var> in the RS report.

TRUE label 1 to 7 Characters. TRUE

User label to replace default true label

FALSE label 1 to 7 Characters. FALSE

User label to replace default false label

SN Command
Purpose: Read or set user-programmable names.
Syntax: SN[-[var][=[name],[TRUE label],[FALSE label]]
Comments: var = logic variable 43/143/243/343, VOA, VO1 - VO15, or IN1 - IN4
name = 1 to 10 character user name to replace <var> in the RS report
TRUE label = 1 to 7 character user label to replace default TRUE label for <var>
FALSE label = 1 to 7 character user label to replace default FALSE label for <var>

SN Command Examples
EXAMPLE.1Read the current name setting for IN1.
>SN-IN1
>SN-IN1=IN1,CLOSED,OPEN
EXAMPLE.2 Change the name for IN1 to better describe its function as a 52b contact.
>SN-IN1=BREAKER,OPEN,CLOSED
EXAMPLE.3 Label the 43 switch operation for use on the HMI.
>SN-43=AUTO_SG,DISABLE,ENABLE

BESTlogic APPLICATION TIPS

When designing a completely new logic scheme, logic evaluation order should be considered. Contact
sensing inputs are evaluated first, then the function blocks, and then the virtual outputs. VO15 is evaluated
first and VOA is evaluated last. If a virtual output is used in a logic expression to control another virtual
output, the virtual output used in the expression should be numerically higher. Otherwise, a logic expression
for a numerically smaller virtual output won’t be available to a numerically higher virtual output until the next
processing interval. Logic is evaluated every quarter-cycle.
When designing custom protection schemes, avoid confusion by maintaining consistency between input and
output functions in the custom scheme and the preprogrammed schemes.
OUT1 through OUT5 have normally open contacts (coil is de-energized). Normally open contacts can be
used as normally closed outputs by inverting the logic expressions that drive them. Inverting an output logic
expression causes the coil to be energized with the contacts closed in the normal state. Caution should be
taken with normally closed contact logic because there are no shorting bars to maintain the closed condition
if the draw-out assembly is removed from the chassis. In applications where a normally closed output is
needed even when the electronics are removed, a normally open contact from the relay can be used to drive
a low-cost auxiliary relay. The normally closed output of the auxiliary relay will maintain the closed output
BE1-851 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-11
when the draw-out assembly is removed from the case. Alternately, an external switch can be used to short
across a normally closed relay output when the draw-out assembly is removed. Extra care is required to
ensure that the switch is closed prior to removing the draw-out assembly and that the switch is open after
the relay is placed back in service.
Several links between the programmable alarms function and BESTlogic programmable logic allow alarm
functions to be used in a logic scheme and programmable logic functions to be used in the alarm reporting
function.
Programmable alarm settings for Major, Minor, and Logic alarms drive BESTlogic variables ALMMAJ,
ALMMIN, and ALMLGC. These variables can be used in logic expressions to control logic when an alarm
is active.
Virtual outputs VO13, VO14, and VO15 are driven by BESTlogic expressions. These three logic variables
are also available in the programmable alarm function. Virtual outputs can also be assigned user
programmable labels (described previously). With this feature, a logic condition can be designed and used
for an alarm. The virtual output label would then be reported in the alarm reporting function.

7-12 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-851

SECTION 8 • APPLICATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 8 • APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
EXPLANATION OF TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Virtual Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Radial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
OVERVIEW OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Factory Default Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FEEDER_1 Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FEEDER_2 Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FEEDER_3 Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FEEDER_4 Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
BUS Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
DETAILS OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Factory Default Logic Settings and Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays. . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Factory Default Logic Settings and Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays. . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
FEEDER_1 LOGIC SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Normal Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-Of-Service . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
FEEDER_1 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
FEEDER_1 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
FEEDER_2 LOGIC SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Normal Operation - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Normal Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Normal Operation - Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
FEEDER_2 Logic Settings And Equations For Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
FEEDER_3 LOGIC SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Normal Operation - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Normal Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Normal Operation - Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

BE1-851 Application i
 Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
FEEDER_3 Logic Settings And Equations Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
FEEDER_4 LOGIC SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Normal Operation - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Normal Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Normal Operation - Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
FEEDER_4 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
FEEDER_4 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
BUS AND BACKUP LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Normal Operation - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Normal Operation - Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Normal Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Contingency Operation - Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Bus Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For BUS Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For BACKUP Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
BUS Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
BUS Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
BACKUP Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
BACKUP Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
MISCELLANEOUS LOGIC SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
APPLICATION TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Trip Circuit Continuity And Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Close Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
High Speed Reclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Block Load Tap Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Block Neutral and Negative Sequence Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Output Contact Seal-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Oscillographic Recording of Breaker Closures and Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64

FIGURES
Figure 8-1. Typical One-Line Diagram for Factory Default Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 8-2. Factory Default Logic Settings Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Figure 8-3. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_1 Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figure 8-4. FEEDER_1 Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Figure 8-5. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_2 Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Figure 8-6. FEEDER_2 Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Figure 8-7. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_3 Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Figure 8-8. FEEDER_3 Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Figure 8-9. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_4 Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Figure 8-10. FEEDER_4 Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Figure 8-11. Typical One-Line Diagram for BUS Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Figure 8-12. Bus Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Figure 8-13. Typical One-Line Diagram for Backup Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Figure 8-14. Backup Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Figure 8-15. Interconnection Diagram for Integrated Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Figure 8-16. Trip circuit continuity and voltage monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59

ii Application BE1-851
Figure 8-17. Close circuit monitor logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Figure 8-18. High Speed Reclose interlock Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Figure 8-19. Output Seal-in logic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62

TABLES
Table 8-1. DEFAULT Contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-2. DEFAULT Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-3. DEFAULT Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-4. DEFAULT Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 8-5. FEEDER_1 contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Table 8-6. FEEDER_1 Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Table 8-7. FEEDER_1 Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Table 8-8. FEEDER_1 Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Table 8-9. FEEDER_2 contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Table 8-10. FEEDER_2 Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Table 8-11. FEEDER_2 Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Table 8-12. FEEDER_2 Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Table 8-13. FEEDER_3 contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Table 8-14. FEEDER_3 Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Table 8-15. FEEDER_3 Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Table 8-16. FEEDER_3 Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Table 8-17. FEEDER_4 contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Table 8-18. FEEDER_4 Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Table 8-19. FEEDER_4 Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Table 8-20. FEEDER_4 Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Table 8-21. BUS contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Table 8-22. BUS Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Table 8-23. BUS Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Table 8-24. BUS Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Table 8-25. BACKUP contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Table 8-26. BACKUP Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Table 8-27. BACKUP Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Table 8-28. BACKUP Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Table 8-29. Miscellaneous Logic Expessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49

BE1-851 Application iii

SECTION 8 • APPLICATION

GENERAL
This section discusses application of the BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System using the pre-programmed
logic schemes. The Details Of Preprogrammed Logic Schemes subsection describes the characteristics
of each logic scheme and how they combine to create an overcurrent protection system for a radial system
substation. A detailed description of each preprogrammed scheme is also provided. This section concludes
with application tips for programming a custom logic scheme to meet the requirements of your application.
The preprogrammed logic schemes are designed to accommodate most common distribution or
sub-transmission radial system overcurrent coordination schemes. The protection engineer can choose a
logic scheme that most closely meets his application practices and adapt it by changing the function block
operation and settings. This eliminates the need to create a custom logic scheme.
It should be noted that each preprogrammed logic scheme also illustrates typical ways of using or controlling
various functions. The user may choose to create a custom logic scheme by mixing the logic from several
of the preprogrammed schemes. The logic can also be modified to incorporate some of the features
described in the application tips provided at the end of this section. The flexibility of BESTlogic allows the
protection engineer to create a custom scheme that exactly meets the requirements of the application.
Appendix C, Relay Settings Record provides settings sheets for recording the settings used in your
protection system.

NOTE

All preprogramed schemes are shown for sensing input type H relays. Sensing input type
G relays do not have negative sequence elements.

EXPLANATION OF TERMS
The following terms and definitions will facilitate the understanding of the application discussions to follow.

Function block
A stand alone protection or control function that is equivalent to its discrete component counterpart.

Torque Control
Torque control refers to blocking the start of an overcurrent function block. The pickup and trip outputs are
held to zero and the timing function is not allowed to operate. This is in contrast to merely blocking the trip
output. This applies to all overcurrent function blocks including those that do not emulate induction disk type
(51) relays.

Virtual Switches
These logic switches emulate traditional switches used on relay and control panels such as the breaker
control switch (101) and selector switches (43). Virtual switches may be operated via communication
commands or the HMI. Operation of these switches can be disabled or password protected if the user
chooses not to use them without changing the preprogrammed BESTlogic schemes.

Radial System
As used in this section, a radial system is one where the loads are fed from only one source at a time.

BE1-851 Application 8-1

OVERVIEW OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES
There are six preprogrammed logic schemes available. Four logic schemes are intended for use on feeder
breakers. Two schemes are intended for use on the bus main breaker This is typically the low side bank
breaker of the step down power transformer.

Factory Default Logic Settings

BE1-851 relays are shipped from the factory with default logic settings that are designed to allow the relay
to be used directly in applications that do not require any of the relays advanced features. These default
settings provide a basic overcurrent protection scheme. The default setting for the logic scheme name is
“USER”. This scheme can be modified as outlined in section 7, Logic Schemes. However, if you choose
to change these settings, the defaults can only be brought back through manual programing or by reloading
all of the factory defaults.

FEEDER_1 Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides time and instantaneous overcurrent protection. Breaker failure protection is also
included. Functions such as manual control and automatic reclosing are not included. Logic is provided to
maintain feeder protection when the relay is out of service. A bus relay using the preprogrammed logic
scheme BACKUP will be signaled to continue protection.

FEEDER_2 Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides time and both high set and low set instantaneous overcurrent protection.
Automatic reclosing is included with reclosing initiated by a protective trip (reclose initiate scheme). Breaker
Failure and manual control functions are also included. Logic is included to signal a bus relay using the
preprogrammed logic scheme BACKUP to provide feeder protection when the relay is out of service.

FEEDER_3 Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides time and both high set and low set instantaneous overcurrent protection.
Automatic reclosing is included. Reclosing is initiated when the breaker opens. Reclosing is disabled after
a manual trip by a control switch slip contact. The recloser is disabled by driving the recloser to lockout.
Breaker Failure and manual control functions are also provided. Logic is included to signal a bus relay using
preprogrammed logic scheme BACKUP to provide feeder protection when the relay is out of service.

FEEDER_4 Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides time and instantaneous overcurrent protection. Automatic reclosing is included.
Reclosing is initiated when the breaker opens. The recloser is disabled by interrupting the reclose initiate
input. Reclosing is disabled after a manual trip by a control switch slip contact. Breaker Failure and manual
control functions are also included. Backup for an out of service relay is to be provided by redundant relays
on the feeder breaker. Logic is included to interconnect with the redundant relays for an external breaker
failure initiate and blocking of the external instantaneous.

BUS Logic Scheme

This logic scheme is applied to a bus main relay to provide primary bus overcurrent protection. It contains
logic to interconnect with the feeder logic schemes to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the bus
under normal conditions. It also contains logic to trip the feeder breakers while the feeder relays using
FEEDER_1, FEEDER_2, or FEEDER_3 logic schemes are out of service.
BACKUP Logic Scheme
This logic scheme is applied to a bus main relay to provide backup bus overcurrent protection as well as
breaker failure protection for the bus breaker under normal conditions. It also provides primary bus
overcurrent protection when the relay using BUS logic is providing feeder protection or when the primary
bus relay is out of service.

8-2 Application BE1-851

DETAILS OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES
The following sub-sections describe each of the six preprogrammed logic schemes in detail. For each
scheme, the operation of the protection and control logic under normal conditions is described. The features
of each logic scheme are broken down into functional groupings and described in detail. This is followed by
a discussion of how various contingencies are covered by each logic scheme.

FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC SETTINGS

Logic scheme USER is intended for applications requiring three-phase and neutral nondirectional
overcurrent protection. While not as elaborate as the other preprogrammed schemes, this logic scheme
provides an excellent base on which to create a custom scheme for a specific application.
The default components of USER logic are summarized in Tables 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, and 8-4.
A diagram of USER logic is shown in Figure 8-1.

Operation - Protection
The phase, neutral and negative sequence elements are activated to provide timed (51) and instantaneous
(50) overcurrent protection in this scheme. A function block is disabled by setting the pickup set-point at zero
in each of the four setting groups. Virtual output VO11 is assigned for all protective trips. When VO11
becomes TRUE, OUT1 will operate and trip the breaker. Contact outputs OUT2, OUT3, OUT4, and OUT5
are designated to specific function blocks. OUT2 operates for instantaneous phase overcurrent conditions,
OUT3 trips for timed phase overcurrent situations, OUT4 operates for instantaneous neutral and negative
sequence overcurrent conditions, and OUT5 operates for timed neutral and negative sequence overcurrent
conditions.
All contact sensing inputs are unassigned, but IN1 is typically assigned to monitor breaker status (52b).
Inputs IN2, IN3, and IN4 are available for user specified functions.
Voltage protection, frequency protection, automatic reclosing, breaker failure, breaker control, and virtual
switches are not included in this logic scheme.

Operation - Setting Group Selection

A setting group can be selected automatically or by using the communication ports or the front panel HMI.
Automatic setting group changes are based on current level and duration. Automatic setting group changes
for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustments are enabled by the SP-GROUP# command. Setting
group changes initiated by contact sensing inputs are not accommodated in this scheme, but IN2, IN3, or
IN4 can be programmed to provide this function.

Operation - Alarms
If the continuous self-test diagnostics of the relay detect an error, failsafe output contact OUTA will close and
the Relay Trouble LED of the HMI will light. OUTA will also close if relay operating power is lost. More
information about alarms is provided in Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions.

Table 8-1. Factory Default Contact Sensing Input Logic settings

State Labels

Input Purpose Variable Label Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 Not used INPUT_1 OPEN CLOSED
IN2 Not used INPUT_2 CLOSED OPEN
IN3 Not used INPUT_3 CLOSED OPEN

BE1-851 Application 8-3

 IN4 Not used INPUT_4 CLOSED OPEN

Table 8-2. Factory Default Function Blocks Logic Settings

BESTlogic
Function Purpose Expression Mode Setting
50TP Used for instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 0 1 (enabled)
50TN Used for instantaneous neutral overcurrent protection. 0 1 (enabled)
50TQ Used for instantaneous negative sequence overcurrent 0 1 (enabled)
protection.
150TP None 0 0 (disabled)
150TN None 0 0 (disabled)
150TQ None 0 0 (disabled)
51P Used for timed phase-overcurrent protection. 0 1 (enabled)
51N Used for timed neutral-overcurrent protection. 0 1 (enabled)
51Q Used for timed negative sequence overcurrent 0 1 (enabled)
protection.
62 None 0 0 (disabled)
162 None 0 0 (disabled)
79 None 0 0 (disabled)
BF None 0 0 (disabled)
Input 0 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0
Input 1 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0
1
Input 2 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0
GROUP (discrete input
Input 3 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0 selection)

Auto/Manual Logic: Set to 1 (/0) to enable automatic /0

selection. No manual selection is used.

Table 8-3. Factory Default Virtual Switch Logic Settings

State Labels

Switch Purpose Mode Variable Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)

43 Not used 1 (disabled) SWITCH_43 CLOSED OPEN
143 Not used 1 (disabled) SWITCH_143 CLOSED OPEN
243 Not used 1 (disabled) SWITCH_243 CLOSED OPEN
343 Not used 1 (disabled) SWITCH_343 CLOSED OPEN
101 Not used 1 (disabled) N/A N/A N/A

8-4 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-4. Factory Default Virtual Output Logic Settings

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
VOA Alarm contact closes automatically
Alarm Output Contact. ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA) when relay trouble alarm occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = 0
VO1 Contact closes when protective trip
Breaker Trip Contact. BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1) expression is TRUE.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO11
VO2 Instantaneous Phase OC Contact closes when instantaneous
50TP_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT2) Auxiliary Contact. phase-overcurrent trip occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 50TPT
VO3 Timed Phase OC Contact closes when timed phase-
51P_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT3) Auxiliary Contact. overcurrent trip occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = 51PT
Contact closes when instantaneous
Instantaneous Neutral
VO4 neutral or instantaneous negative-
and Negative Sequence INST_N&Q TRIP NORMAL
(OUT4) sequence overcurrent condition
OC.
occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = 50TNT+50TQT
Contact closes when timed neutral
VO5 Timed Neutral and
or timed negative sequence 51N&QTRP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) Negative Sequence OC.
overcurrent condition exists.
BESTlogic Expression: VO5 = 51NT+51QT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
VO8 None VO8 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 0
VO9 None VO9 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = 0
VO10 None VO10 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = 0
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51 element
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51 element
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE

BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0

BE1-851 Application 8-5

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)

VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE

BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
VO15 Alarm Mask 23. VO15 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = 0

52

OUT2
TRIP
50P TRIP
OUT4
50N & 50Q
TRIP

50TP 50TN 50TQ

OUT1
ALL TRIPS

51P 51N 51Q

OUT5
51N & 51Q TRIP
OUT3
51P TRIP
D2871-7
BE1-851 12-13-99

Figure 8-1. Typical One-Line Diagram for Factory Default Logic Settings.

8-6 Application BE1-851

BE1-851
VOA - ALARM
D0 SG0 OUTPU
D1 ACTIVE SG1 OUT
T
D2862-8 SETTING SG2 A
D2 CO-OUTx LOGIC
10-10-99 GROUP
D3 SG3
0 CONTROL
AUTO VO11 PROT TRIP
6 VO1 - 52TC
OUTPU
OUT
T
CO-OUTx LOGIC 1
50TPT
PHASE
BLK IOC
IN1 50TPPU
OPTO (50TP)
OUTPU
OUT
T
IN2 2
OPTO 50TNT CO-OUTx LOGIC
NEUTRAL
BLK IOC
IN3 50TNPU
OPTO (50TN)
VO3 - 51PT
OUTPU
IN4 OUT
OPTO 50TQT T
NEG SEQ CO-OUTx LOGIC 3
BLK
IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ)
VO4
50TNT+50TQT

Application
51PT OUTPU
PHASE OUT
T
43 BLK TOC CO-OUTx LOGIC 4
CO-43 51PPU
(51P)
143
CO-143 VO5
51NT 51NT+51QT
NEUTRAL
243 BLK OUTPU
CO-243 TOC 51NPU OUT
T
(51N) CO-OUTx LOGIC 5

Figure 8-2. Factory Default Logic Settings Diagram

343
CO-343
51QT
NEG SEQ
BLK TOC 51QPU
(51Q)

VO12 PROT PU
6

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-7
Factory Default Logic Settings and Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays.
SL-N=USER
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0; SL-50TQ=1,0
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0
SL-51N=1,0
SL-51Q=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/0
SL-43=1
SL-143=1
SL-243=1
SL-343=1
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=1
SL-VO1=VO11
SL-VO2=50TPT
SL-VO3=51PT
SL-VO4=50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO5=51NT+51QT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=0
SL-VO10=0
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=0

Factory Default Logic Settings and Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays.
SL-N=USER
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0; SL-50TQ=1,0
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0
SL-51N=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/0
SL-43=1
SL-143=1
SL-243=1
SL-343=1
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=1
SL-VO1=VO11
SL-VO2=50TPT
SL-VO3=51PT
SL-VO4=50TNT

8-8 Application BE1-851

SL-VO5=51NT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=0
SL-VO10=0
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=0

FEEDER_1 LOGIC SCHEME

Logic scheme FEEDER_1 is meant for use on a feeder breaker and provides overcurrent and breaker failure
protection for a typical feeder in a non-directional overcurrent protection application. This logic scheme is
intended to be used in conjunction with other programmable relays using the BUS and BACKUP logic
schemes to provide protection when the relay is out of service. Automatic reclosing and other control
functions such as virtual switches are not provided. When used with other programmable relays using logic
scheme BUS and BACKUP, this scheme can provide complete high speed overcurrent protection for the
transformers, bus, and feeders in a radial system substation.
A diagram of FEEDER_1 logic is shown in Figure 8-2. The components used in this logic are explained in
Tables 8-5, 8-6, 8-7, and 8-8.

Normal Operation - Protection

The 51 function blocks and the breaker failure function block re-trip output are enabled in the logic for
tripping via OUT1. The 50T function blocks are enabled in the logic for tripping through OUT2. Each
overcurrent function block can be disabled by setting its pickup setting at 0 in each of the four setting groups.
The 50T ground (N), negative sequence (Q), and the 51 N and Q overcurrent function blocks are torque
controlled by IN3. All N & Q function blocks or only the 51 N & Q function blocks can be disabled by
modifying the inputs to these function blocks.

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection

Setting group selection can be done automatically or by communications command/HMI override. Automatic
setting group changes for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustment are enabled by the
SP-GROUP# commands. Setting group changes initiated by a contact sensing input is not accommodated
in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function if desired. The automatic
change logic can be disabled by IN2.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

When any of the 50T or 51 overcurrent function blocks are picked up, OUT4 closes. The signal from OUT4
is wired to IN2 of the upstream relay using BUS logic. The upstream relay blocks the 50T elements that are
set to trip the bus breaker or bus lockout relay. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 50T elements of the bus
relay are not blocked. The bus relay 50T elements are set with a time delay of 2 to 4 cycles to provide a
minimal coordination interval for feeder relay OUT4 to close. Should there be a problem with the blocking
logic, the bus relay 51 functions are not blocked to allow bus fault clearing with a traditional coordination
interval.
When used to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all
51 function timing curves be set for instantaneous reset.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to

BE1-851 Application 8-9

be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the feeder protection system if external test switches
are not installed on all outputs. When the relay is out of service for testing, the breaker failure, and block
upstream instantaneous functions are disabled. Backup by the upstream relay is enabled and the
instantaneous function block trips are redirected to OUT1.
De-energizing IN4 will put the logic scheme in the test mode. IN4 can be controlled by a panel mounted
selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state. IN4 can also be controlled by
a pole of a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED to provide indication when the relay
is in test mode.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Breaker Failure

OUT5 is programmed as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the bus breaker or a
lockout relay. The breaker failure pickup (BFPU) output trips the feeder breaker directly via output 1 to
provide a breaker retrip signal for added security.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is not accommodated in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4
can be programmed to provide this function or FEEDER_4 logic may be used. The breaker failure function
block is initiated by a protective trip. This function block has an independent fast drop out phase and ground
current detector that detects a breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker is detected when the
current drops below 10% of nominal.
The BF function block can be disabled by setting the time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial
systems backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping different breakers.
FEEDER_1 logic stops the block signal to allow the bus relay to trip the bus breaker through its 50T
elements if a direct trip is not desired. This provides clearing of the fault on the circuit with the failed breaker
in feeder relay breaker failure time (or bus relay 50T time whichever is greater) instead of the bus relay 51
time; but, is limited by the sensitivity constraints of the bus relay.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-Of-Service

When the relay is out of service or has failed, OUT3 opens to signal the upstream relays providing backup
protection. OUT3 operates in a fail safe mode where the outputs are closed during normal operation and
open during a relay failure. This provides backup mode signaling when the feeder relay is extracted from
the case.
Backup for relay failure can be implemented using the BUS and BACKUP preprogrammed logic schemes.
These logic schemes are described later in this section.

8-10 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-5. FEEDER_1 Contact Sensing Input Logic
State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Automatic setting group change SETGRPAUTO ENABLED DISABLD

logic auto/manual switch

IN3 Enable neutral and negative N&Q_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

sequence, 50 and 51 protection
when IN3 is energized.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
breaker failure is disabled and all
trips go through OUT1 when IN4
is de-energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-6. FEEDER_1 Function Block Logic

BESTlogic
Function Purpose Expression Mode Settings

50TP None 0 1 (enabled)

50TN Block When disabled by switch connected to /IN3 1 (enabled)

IN3.

50TQ Block when disabled by switch connected to /IN3

IN3

150TP None 0 0(disabled)

150TN None 0 0(disabled)

150TQ None 0 0(disabled)

51P None 0 1 (enabled)

51N Block when disabled by switch connected to /IN3

IN3. 1 (enabled)

51Q Block when disabled by switch connected to /IN3 1 (enabled)

IN3.

62 None 0 0(disabled)

162 None 0 0(disabled)

79 None 0 0(disabled)

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure V010

initiate expression is true
BF 1 (enabled)
Block breaker failure protection when relay is in
test mode /IN4

BE1-851 Application 8-11

 BESTlogic
Function Purpose Expression Mode Settings

No manual selection logic is used 0

No manual selection logic is used 0

Group No manual selection logic is used 0 1

No manual selection logic is used 0

Disable automatic selection when switch /IN2

connected to IN2 is in the manual position.

Table 8-7. FEEDER_1 Virtual Switches Logic

Function State Labels 

Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Not used SWITCH_43 CLOSED OPEN

143 Not used SWITCH_143 CLOSED OPEN

243 Not used SWITCH_243 CLOSED OPEN

343 Not used SWITCH_343 CLOSED OPEN

Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-8. Feeder_1 Virtual Outputs

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.

BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ

Close OUT1 when time

overcurrent trip is true OR when
VO1
50 Trip output breaker failure is initiated OR 51_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
when any protective trip occurs
while in test mode..
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO8*IN4+BFPU+VO11*/IN4
Trip breaker when instantaneous
VO2
50 Trip Output overcurrent trip is true and not in 50_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT2)
test mode.

8-12 Application BE1-851

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = VO9*IN4
Hold output closed if relay is not
VO3 Enable backup of relay out of service because it is in
IN_SERVICE NORMAL BACKUP
(OUT3) by upstream relay. test mode AND it is not out of
service due to relay failure
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = IN4
Block upstream Block upstream instantaneous
instantaneous elements elements when the protective
VO4
when relay is picked up pickup expression is true AND BLK_USTRM BLOCKED NORMAL
(OUT4)
for high speed bus over the relay is not in test mode AND
current protection logic. the breaker has not failed.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO12*/VO5*IN4
VO5 Breaker failure trip conact Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
True if any of the time
VO8 Time overcurrent trip. 51_TRIP TRIP FALSE
overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 51PT+51NT+51QT
Instantaneous over True if any of the instantaneous
VO9 50_TRIP TRIP FALSE
current tip. overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
Initiate breaker failure timing
Breaker failure initiate
VO10 when protective trip expression BFI INI NORMAL
expression
is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. element times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0

BE1-851 Application 8-13

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)

Alarm bit #23 indication

that the relay is in test
mode and that breaker
VO15 Trui if IN4 is de-energized. TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
failure is disabled and all
trips are rerouted to
OUT1.
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4

52

OUT2 TRIP
50 TRIP

50TP 50TN 50TQ

OUT1
51
TRIP 2

51P 51N 51Q

OUT5
BF
TRIP
BF

IN4 OUT3
TEST TEST D2871-3
MODE BE1-851 MODE 12-13-99
OUT
2 When IN4 is de-energized indicating test mode, the
50T element is diverted to out 1 for testing purposes.

Figure 8-3. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_1 Logic

8-14 Application BE1-851

 ALMLGC

BE1-851
VOA ALARM
ALMMAJ
SB-LOGIC
OUTPUT
ALARM ALMMIN OUTA
CO-OUTx LOGIC
OUT1MON

IN1 52B
OPTO

IN2 SET GRP AUTO

OPTO VO1 51TRIP
OUTPUT
IN3 N AND Q ENABLE OUT1
OPTO CO-OUTx LOGIC

IN4 TEST MODE

OPTO
50TPT
0 PHASE
BLK IOC 50TPPU
(50TP)
VO2 50TRIP
OUTPUT
50TNT OUT2
NEUTRAL LOGIC
BLK CO-OUTx
IOC 50TNPU
(50TN)
VO3 RELAY OUT OF SERVICE
50TQT
NEG SEQ OUTPUT
BLK OUT3
IOC 50TQPU CO-OUTx LOGIC
(50TQ)
VO4 BLOCK UPSTREAM
51PT INSTANTANEOUS
0 PHASE
BLK TOC OUTPUT
51PPU OUT4
(51P) CO-OUTx LOGIC

Application
51NT
NEUTRAL
BLK VO5 BF TRIP
TOC 51NPU
(51N) OUTPUT
OUT5
CO-OUTx LOGIC

51QT
NEG SEQ
BLK 3 VO8 51TRIP
IOC 51QPU
(51Q)

Figure 8-4. FEEDER_1 Logic Diagram

3
VO9 50TRIP
D0 SG0
D1 ACTIVE SG1 VO11 PROT TRIP
SG2 6
SETTING
D2 SG3
GROUP
D3 VO12 PROT PU
CONTROL 6
AUTO

VO15 TEST MODE

VO10 BFI
INI BREAKER BFT
FAILURE
D2863-01 BLK (BF) BFPU
10-10-99
Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR
Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-15
FEEDER_1 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays.
SL-N=FEEDER_1
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,/IN3; SL-50TQ=1,/IN3
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0; SL-150TQ=0,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3; SL-51Q=1,/IN3
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,IN2
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=0
SL-101=0
SL-VO1=VO8*IN4+VO11*/IN4+BFPU
SL-VO2=VO9*IN4
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4

FEEDER_1 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays.
SL-N=FEEDER_1
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,/IN3
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,IN2
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=0
SL-101=0
SL-VO1=VO8*IN4+VO11*/IN4+BFPU
SL-VO2=VO9*IN4
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+51PT+51NT

8-16 Application BE1-851

SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4

FEEDER_2 LOGIC SCHEME

Logic scheme FEEDER_2 is meant for use on a feeder breaker and provides overcurrent, breaker failure
protection, reclosing, and the control functions required for a typical feeder in a non-directional overcurrent
protection application. This logic scheme is intended to be used in conjunction with other programmable
relays using the BUS and BACKUP logic schemes to provide protection when the relay is out of service.
Automatic reclosing uses a reclose initiate scheme and is initiated by protective trip.
When used with other programmable relays using logic scheme BUS and BACKUP, this scheme can provide
complete high speed overcurrent protection for the transformers, bus and feeders in a radial system
substation. A diagram of FEEDER_2 logic is shown in Figure 8-3. The components used in this logic are
explained in Table 8-9, 8-10, 8-11, and 8-12.

Normal Operation - Control

The virtual breaker control switch is programmed to provide manual trip and close control of the breaker.
The control functions of this logic scheme use both traditional contact sensing inputs and virtual switches.
Virtual switches that are not needed may simply go unused. The protection engineer may choose to free
up contact sensing inputs for other uses by using the virtual switches exclusively for the various control
functions.

Normal Operation - Protection

All overcurrent function blocks and the breaker failure function block re-trip output are enabled in FEEDER_2
logic for tripping via OUT1. The 150T function blocks are set up as high set instantaneous functions which
drive the recloser to lockout when they trip. Each overcurrent function block can be individually disabled by
setting the pickup at 0 in the four setting groups. The 50TN, 50TQ, 51N, and 51Q function blocks are torque
controlled by either IN3 or virtual switch 243. All N and Q function blocks or only the 51N and 51Q function
blocks may be inhibited. This is done in BESTlogic by modifying the inputs to the function blocks.

Normal Operation - Reclosing

The reclosing logic in FEEDER_2 uses a reclose initiate (RI) scheme where each step in the reclosing
sequence is initiated by a protective trip. The recloser function block can be disabled by setting the first
reclose time at zero in the four setting groups.
Reclosing can be disabled by either IN2 or virtual switch 143 which is connected to the drive to lockout (DTL)
input of the recloser function block. In this scheme, enabling the recloser after a "one shot" trip will cause
the recloser to be in lockout. When the breaker is manually closed, the relay will time out to a reset
condition.
Drive to lockout also occurs if any of the 150TP/N/Q functions (typically used for high set instantaneous
protection) trip or a breaker failure occurs. It should be noted that the 150TP/N/Q functions drive both the
RI and the DTL inputs to the recloser function block. The DTL input takes priority over the RI input.
Zone sequence coordination can be enabled by setting an appropriate logic expression for 79ZONE. Zone
sequence uses a BESTlogic expression but is not within the logic settings. The FEEDER_2 logic scheme
uses the expression SP-79ZONE=VO12.
FEEDER_2 logic provides for the recloser to torque control the 50TP/N/Q functions (typically used for low
set instantaneous protection) during various steps in the reclosing sequence. Setting the recloser sequence
controlled blocking output in the four setting groups is done using the S#-79SCB commands.
Recloser timing is stopped by the wait input if an overcurrent protection function block is picked up and
timing. This prevents the reset timer from resetting the reclose function for a situation where a 51 element

BE1-851 Application 8-17

is just above pickup and the time to trip is longer than the reset time.
Initiation of the recloser function block by external relays is not accommodated in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or
IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function if desired.
A block load tap changer output is not provided in this scheme. OUT5 can be reprogrammed as a 79RNG
(recloser running/block tap changer) output and wired to energize a normally closed auxiliary relay.

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection

Setting group selection can be done automatically or externally by communications command/HMI override.
Automatic setting group changes for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustment are enabled by
SP-GROUP# commands. Setting group changes initiated by contact sensing inputs are not accommodated
in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function if desired. The automatic
change logic can be disabled by virtual switch 43.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

When any of the overcurrent function blocks are picked up, OUT4 closes. The signal from OUT4 is wired
to IN2 of the upstream relay using BUS logic. The upstream relay blocks the 50T elements that are set up
to trip the bus breaker or bus lockout relay. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 50T elements of the bus relay
are not blocked. The bus relay 50T elements are set with a time delay of 2 to 4 cycles to provide a minimal
coordination interval for the feeder relay OUT4 to close. Should there be a problem with the blocking logic,
the bus relay 51 functions are not blocked to allow bus fault clearing with a traditional coordination interval.
When used to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all
51 function timing curves be set for instantaneous reset.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to
be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the feeder protection and control system if external test
switches are not installed on all outputs. When the relay is out of service for testing, the breaker failure,
automatic reclosing, and block upstream instantaneous functions are disabled. Backup by the upstream
relay is enabled.
De-energizing IN4 or closing virtual switch 343 will put the logic scheme in the test mode. IN4 can be
controlled by a panel mounted selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state.
IN4 can also be controlled by a pole of a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test
switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED to provide indication when the relay is
in test mode.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Breaker Failure

OUT5 is configured as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the bus breaker or a lockout
relay. The breaker failure pickup (BFPU) output trips the feeder breaker directly via output 1 to provide a
breaker retrip signal for added security.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is not accommodated in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4
can be programmed to provide this function or FEEDER_4 logic may be used. The breaker failure function
block is initiated by a protective trip. This function block has an independent fast drop out phase and ground
current detector that detects a breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker is detected when the

8-18 Application BE1-851

current drops below 10% of nominal.
The BF function block is disabled by setting the time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial system
backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping different breakers.
FEEDER_2 logic stops the block signal to allow the bus relay to trip the bus breaker through its 50T
elements if a direct trip is not desired. This provides clearing of the fault on the circuit with the failed breaker
in feeder relay breaker failure time (or bus relay 50T time whichever is greater) instead of the bus relay 51
time; but, is limited by the sensitivity constraints of the bus relay.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service

When the relay is out of service or has failed, OUT3 opens to signal the upstream relays providing backup
protection. OUT3 operates in a fail safe mode; the output is closed during normal operation and open during
a relay failure. This provides backup mode signaling when the feeder relay is extracted from the case.
Backup for relay failure can be implemented using the BUS and BACKUP preprogrammed logic schemes.
These logic schemes are described later in this section.
Table 8-9. FEEDER_2 Contact Sensing Input Logic.
State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status. BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Enable recloser when IN2 is RCL_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

energized.

IN3 Enable neutral and negative N&Q_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

sequence, 50 and 51 protection
when IN3 is energized.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when IN4 is de-
energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-10. FEEDER_2 Function Block Logic

BESTlogic
Function Descriptoin Experession Settings

50TP Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB 1(enabled)

blocking output is true.

50TN Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+/IN3+243 1(enabled)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243

50TQ Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+/IN3+243 1(enabled)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
/IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243.

150TP None 0 1(enabled)

150TN None 0 1(enabled)

BE1-851 Application 8-19

 BESTlogic
Function Descriptoin Experession Settings

150TQ None 0 1(enabled)

51P None 0 1(enabled)

51N Block when disabled by IN3 or Virtual Switch /IN3+243 1(enabled)

243.

51Q Block when disabled by IN3 or Virtual Switch /IN3+243 1(enabled)

243.

62 None 0 0(disable)

162 None 0 0(disable)

Initiate when reclose initiate expression is true. VO8

Breaker closed when IN1 is de-energized . /IN1

Stop recloser timing when timing for a fault trip.

True when protection picked up expression is VO12
79 1(enabled)
true.

Drive recloser to lockout when recloser drive to

lockout expression is true or when relay is in VO9+/IN4+343
test mode.

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure V010

initiate expression is true
BF 1(enabled)

Block breaker failure protection when relay is in /IN4+343

test mode

Group Disable automatic selection when virtual switch /43 1(enabled)

43 is in the manual position.

Table 8-11. FEEDER_2 Virtual Switches Logic

State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Automatic setting group change logic SETGRP_MAN MANUAL AUTO

auto/manual switch.

143 Disable recloser when virtual switch is RCL_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

closed.

243 Disable neutral and negative N&Q_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

sequence, 50 and 51 protection when
virtual switch is closed.

343 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when virtual switch is closed.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

8-20 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-12. Feeder_2 Virtual Outputs
State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip breaker when protective trip
expression is true OR when
VO1
Breaker trip contact. breaker failure is initiated OR 51_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
when virtual breaker control
switch is operated to trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO11+BFPU+101T
Close breaker when recloser
VO2 close output is true OR when
Breaker close contact 50_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT2) virtual breaker control switch is
operated to close.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 79C+101C
Hold output closed if relay is not
VO3 Enable backup of relay out of service because it is in
IN_SERVICE NORMAL BACKUP
(OUT3) by upstream relay. test mode AND it is not out of
service due to relay failurr.
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = IN4*/343
Block upstream Block upstream instantaneous
instantaneous elements elements when the protective
VO4
when relay is picked up pickup expression is true AND BLK_USTRM BLOCKED NORMAL
(OUT4)
for high speed bus over the relay is not in test mode AND
current protection logic. the breaker has not failed.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
VO5 Breaker failure trip conact Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
Reclose initiate
VO8 True for any protective trip. RCL_INI INI NORMAL
expression
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 51PT+51NT+51QT
Drive recloser to lockout to
disable it when IN2 is de-
energized OR virtual switch 143
Recloser drive to lockout is closed OR when the breaker
VO9 RCL_DTL DTL NORMAL
expression. virtual control switch is in the
after trip state OR if the breaker
fails OR when the high set
instantaneous element trips.

BE1-851 Application 8-21

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = /IN2+143+V05+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT
Initiate breaker failure timing
Breaker failure initiate
VO10 when protective trip expression BFI INI NORMAL
expression
is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 , 150 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. erelement times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50, 150, or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+150TPPU+150TNPU+150TQPU+51PPU
+51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay is in test
True if IN4 is de-energized OR if
VO15 mode and that breaker TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
virtual switch 343 is closed.
failure and reclosing are
disabled
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

8-22 Application BE1-851

 VOA ALARM
ALMLGC

BE1-851
SB-LOGIC OUTPUT OUT
ALMMAJ
ALARM LOGIC A
CO-OUTx
ALMMIN 101T
OUT1MON 101C
CO-101
101SC
OPTO
IN1 52B
VO8
OPTO 79RI 79C
IN2 RCL ENABLE RI
PHASE 79 79RNG
0 BLK 150TPT STATUS 79LO
OPTO IOC RE-
IN3 N AND Q ENABLE 6 VO9 79DTL WAIT 79F
(150TP) CLOSER
150TPPU DTL/BLK 79SCB
OPTO
IN4 TEST MODE
NEUTRAL
0 BLK 150TNT
IOC
(150TN)
150TNPU
CO-43
43 SET GRP AUTO
0 NEG SEQ
BLK 150TQT
CO-143 IOC
143 RCL ENABLE (150TQ) 150TQPU
CO-243
243 N AND Q ENABLE
PHASE
343 TEST MODE BLK 50TPT VO1 52TC
CO-343 IOC
(50TP) OUTPUT OUT
50TPPU
LOGIC 1
CO-OUTx
50TNT
NEUTRAL
BLK IOC VO2 52CC
(50TN)
50TNPU OUTPUT OUT
LOGIC 2
CO-OUTx
50TQT
NEG SEQ

Application
BLK
IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ) VO3 RELAY OUT OF SERVICE

OUTPUT OUT
51PT LOGIC 3
PHASE CO-OUTx
0 BLK TOC 51PPU
(51P) VO4 BLOCK UPSTREAM
INSTANTANEOUS

51NT OUTPUT OUT

NEUTRAL LOGIC 4

Figure 8-6. FEEDER-2 Logic Diagram

BLK TOC CO-OUTx
51NPU
(51N)

VO5 BF TRIP
51QT
NEG SEQ OUT
BLK OUTPUT
IOC 5
VO15 TEST MODE CO-OUTx LOGIC
(51Q)
51QPU
9 VO11 PROT TRIP
D0 SG0
ACTIVE 9
VO12 PROT PU
D1
SETTING SG1
D2
GROUP SG2
D3
CONTROL SG3
AUTO
D2863-02 VO10 BFI
INI BREAKER BFT
10-10-99 FAILURE
BLK (BF) BFPU

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-23
FEEDER_2 Logic Settings And Equations For Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_2
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN3+243; SL-50TQ=1,79SCB+/IN3+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3+243; SL-51Q=1,/IN3+243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=VO11
SL-VO9=/IN2+143+VO5+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+50TQT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+50TQPU+150TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_2 Logic Settings And Equations For Sensing Input Type G Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_2
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN3+243; 79SCB+/IN3+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3+243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=VO11
SL-VO9=/IN2+143+VO5+150TPT+150TNT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+150TQT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0

8-24 Application BE1-851

SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_3 LOGIC SCHEME

Logic scheme FEEDER_3 is meant for use on a feeder breaker and provides all overcurrent and breaker
failure protection, reclosing, and control functions required for a typical feeder in a non-directional
over-current protection application. This logic scheme is intended for use in conjunction with other
programmable relays using BUS and BACKUP schemes to provide protection when the relay is out of
service.
Automatic reclosing is initiated by the breaker opening. Reclosing is disabled after a manual trip by a control
switch slip contact. In this logic scheme, the disable logic is connected to the drive to lockout (DTL) input.
The recloser will remain in lockout until the breaker closes and the reset timer times out.
When used with other programmable relays using logic scheme BUS and BACKUP, this scheme can provide
complete high speed overcurrent protection for the transformers, bus and feeders in a radial system
substation. A diagram of FEEDER_3 logic is shown in Figure 8-4. The components used in this logic are
explained in Tables 8-13, 8-14, 8-15, and 8-16.

Normal Operation - Control

The virtual breaker control switch is programmed to provide manual trip and close control of the breaker.
Control functions of this logic scheme use traditional contact sensing inputs and virtual switches. Virtual
switches that are not needed may simply go unused. The protection engineer may choose to free up contact
sensing inputs for other uses by using the virtual switches exclusively for control functions.

Normal Operation - Protection

All overcurrent function blocks and the breaker failure function block re-trip output are enabled in FEEDER_3
logic for tripping via OUT1. The 150T function blocks are set up as high set instantaneous functions which
drive the recloser to lockout when they trip. Each overcurrent function block can be individually disabled by
setting the pickup at 0 in the four setting groups. The 50TN, 50TQ, 51N, and 51Q function blocks are torque
controlled by either IN3 or virtual switch 243. All N and Q function blocks or only the 51N and 51Q function
blocks may be inhibited. This is done in BESTlogic by modifying the inputs to the function blocks.

Normal Operation - Reclosing

The reclosing logic in FEEDER_3 is initiated by the breaker opening. Automatic reclosing is disabled for a
manual trip by a control switch slip contact. The recloser function block can be disabled by setting the first
reclose time = 0 in the four setting groups.
Reclosing can be disabled by IN2 or virtual switch 143 which is connected to the drive to lockout (DTL) input
of the recloser function block. In this scheme, enabling the recloser after a "one shot" trip will cause the
recloser to be in lockout. Once the breaker is manually closed, the recloser will time out to a reset condition.
If an external control switch slip contact is used, it should be wired in series with the reclose enable switch
to IN2.
The BESTlogic can be modified so that the reclosing disable logic interrupts the RI input to the recloser
instead of driving the recloser to lockout. This is accomplished by using variables IN2, 143, and 101SC in
the RI expression instead of the DTL expression. This recloser control logic is used in preprogrammed logic
scheme FEEDER_4.
Drive to lockout also occurs if any of the 150TP/N/Q functions (typically used for high set instantaneous
protection) trip or breaker failure occurs. It should be noted that the 150TP/N/Q functions drive both the RI
and the DTL inputs to the recloser function block. The DTL input takes priority over the RI input.
Zone sequence coordination can be enabled by setting an appropriate logic expression for 79ZONE. Zone
sequence uses a BESTlogic expression but is not within the logic settings. The FEEDER_3 logic scheme
uses the expression SP-79ZONE=VO12.

BE1-851 Application 8-25

FEEDER_3 logic provides for the recloser to torque control the 50TP/N/Q functions (typically used for low
set instantaneous protection) during various steps in the reclosing sequence. Setting the recloser sequence
controlled blocking output in the four setting groups is done using the S#-79SCB commands.
Recloser timing is stopped by the wait input if an overcurrent protection function block is picked up and
timing. This prevents the reset timer from resetting the reclose function for a situation where a 51 element
is just above pickup and the time to trip is longer than the reset time.
A block load tap changer output is not provided in this scheme. OUT5 can be reprogrammed as a 79RNG
(recloser running/block tap changer) output and wired to energize a normally closed auxiliary relay.

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection

Setting group selection can be done automatically or externally by communications command/HMI override.
Automatic setting group changes for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustment are enabled by
SP-GROUP# commands. Setting group changes initiated by contact sensing inputs are not accommodated
in this scheme. IN3, or IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function instead of their programmed
functions if desired. The automatic change logic can be disabled by virtual switch 43.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

When any of the overcurrent function blocks are picked up, OUT4 closes. The signal from OUT4 is wired
to IN2 of the upstream relay using BUS logic. The upstream relay blocks the 50T elements that are set up
to trip the bus breaker or bus lockout relay. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 50T elements of the bus relay
are not blocked. The bus relay 50T elements are set with a time delay of 2 to 4 cycles to provide a minimal
coordination interval for the feeder relay OUT4 to close. Should there be a problem with the blocking logic,
the bus relay 51 functions are not blocked to allow bus fault clearing with a traditional coordination interval.
When used to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all
51 function timing curves be set for instantaneous reset.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to
be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the feeder protection and control system if external test
switches are not installed on all outputs. When the relay is out of service for testing, the breaker failure,
automatic reclosing, and block upstream instantaneous functions are disabled. Backup by the upstream
relay is enabled.
De-energizing IN4 or closing virtual switch 343 will put the logic in test mode. IN4 can be controlled by a
panel mounted selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state. IN4 can also be
controlled by a pole of a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED to provide indication when the relay is
in test mode.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Breaker Failure

OUT5 is configured as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the bus breaker or a lockout
relay. The breaker failure pickup (BFPU) output trips the feeder breaker directly via output 1 to provide a
breaker retrip signal for added security.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is not accommodated in this scheme. IN2, IN3, or IN4

8-26 Application BE1-851

can be programmed to provide this function or FEEDER_4 logic may be used. The breaker failure function
block is initiated by a protective trip. This function block has an independent fast drop out phase and ground
current detector that detects a breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker is detected when the
current drops below 10% of nominal.
The BF function block is disabled by setting the time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial system
backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping different breakers.
FEEDER_3 logic stops the block signal to allow the bus relay to trip the bus breaker through its 50T
elements if a direct trip is not desired. This provides clearing of the fault on the circuit with the failed breaker
in feeder relay breaker failure time (or bus relay 50T time whichever is greater) instead of the bus relay 51
time; but, is limited by the sensitivity constraints of the bus relay.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection for Feeder Relay Out-of-Service

When the relay is out of service or has failed, OUT3 opens to signal the upstream relays providing backup
protection. OUT3 operates in a fail safe mode; the output is closed during normal operation and open during
a relay failure. This provides backup mode signaling when the feeder relay is extracted from the case.
Backup for relay failure can be implemented using the BUS and BACKUP preprogrammed logic schemes.
These logic schemes are described later in this section.
Table 8-13. FEEDER_3 Contact Sensing Input Logic
State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status. BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Enable recloser when IN2 is RCL_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

energized.

IN3 Enable neutral and negative N&Q_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

sequence, 50 and 51 protection
when IN3 is energized.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when IN4 is de-
energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-14. FEEDER_3 Function Block Logic

BESTlogic Mode
Function Purpose Experession Settings

50TP Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB 1(enable)

blocking output is true.

50TN Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+/IN3+243 1(enable)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243

50TQ Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+/IN3+243 1(enable)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243.

150TP None 0 1(enable)

BE1-851 Application 8-27

 BESTlogic Mode
Function Purpose Experession Settings

150TN None 0 1(enable)

150TQ None 0 1(enable)

51P None 0 1(enable)

51N Block when disabled by IN3 or Virtual Switch /IN3+243 1(enable)

243.

51Q Block when disabled by IN3 or Virtual Switch /IN3+243 1(enable)

243.

62 None 0 0(disable)

162 None 0 0(disable)

Strapped high /0

Breaker closed when IN1 is de-energized. /IN1

79 Stop recloser timing when timing for a fault VO12 1(enable)

trip. True when protection picked up
expression is true.

Drive recloser to lockout when recloser drive VO9+/IN4+343

to lockout expression is true or when relay is
in test mode.

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure V010

initiate expression is true
BF 1(enable)
Block breaker failure protection when relay is /IN4+343
in test mode

Group Disable automatic selection when virtual /43 1(enable)

switch 43 is in the manual position.
Table 8-15. FEEDER_3 Virtual Switches Logic
State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Automatic setting group change logic SETGRP_MAN MANUAL AUTO

auto/manual switch.

143 Disable recloser when virtual switch is RCL_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

closed.

243 Disable neutral and negative N&Q_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

sequence, 50 and 51 protection when
virtual switch is closed.

343 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when virtual switch is closed.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

8-28 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-16. Feeder_3 Virtual Outputs
State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip breaker when protective trip
expression is true OR when
VO1
Breaker trip contact. breaker failure is initiated OR when BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
virtual breaker control switch is
operated to trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO11+BFPU+101T
Close breaker when recloser close
VO2 output is true OR when virtual
Breaker close contact BKR_CLOSE CLOSE NORMAL
(OUT2) breaker control switch is operated
to close.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 79C+101C
Hold output closed if relay is not
VO3 Enable backup of relay out of service because it is in test
IN_SERVICE NORMAL BACKUP
(OUT3) by upstream relay. mode AND it is not out of service
due to relay failure.
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = IN4*/343
Block upstream Block upstream instantaneous
instantaneous elements elements when the protective
VO4
when relay is picked up pickup expression is true AND the BLK_USTRM BLOCKED NORMAL
(OUT4)
for high speed bus over relay is not in test mode AND the
current protection logic. breaker has not failed.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
VO5 Breaker failure trip Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) conact protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
VO8 None VO8 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 0
Drive recloser to lockout to disable
it when IN2 is de-energized OR
virtual switch 143 is closed OR
Recloser drive to lockout
VO9 when the breaker virtual control RCL_DTL DTL NORMAL
expression.
switch is in the after trip state OR if
the breaker fails OR when the high
set instantaneous element trips.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = /IN2+143+/101SC+V05+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT
Breaker failure initiate Initiate breaker failure timing when
VO10 BFI INI NORMAL
expression protective trip expression is true.

BE1-851 Application 8-29

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 , 150 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. element times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50, 150, or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+150TPPU+150TNPU+150TQPU+51PPU
+51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay is in test
True if IN4 is de-energized OR if
VO15 mode and that breaker TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
virtual switch 343 is closed.
failure and reclosing are
disabled
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

8-30 Application BE1-851

 52
IN1
52B

TRIP

CLOSE
IN3
N &Q
ENABLE
51P 51N 51Q

OUT1
TRIP

STATUS

50TP 50TN 50TQ 79 79

SCB

DTL 79C

OUT2
CLOSE
SC C

D2871-5
101 T 12-13-99
143
150TP 150TN 150TQ Disable
79
IN2
DTL OUT5
BF
43 TRIP
GROUP
BF 343 Auto CONTROL
Man.

IN4 OUT3
TEST TEST
MODE BE1-851 MODE OUT

Figure 8-7. Typical One - Line Diagram for FEEDER_3 Logic

BE1-851 Application 8-31

8-32
ALMLGC
VOA ALARM
ALMMAJ
SB-LOGIC
OUTPUT
ALARM ALMMIN OUTA
CO-OUTx LOGIC
OUT1MON 101T
101C
IN1 52B CO-101
OPTO 101SC

IN2 RCL ENABLE

OPTO
0 79C
IN3 N AND Q ENABLE 150TPT RI
OPTO PHASE 79 79RNG
0 BLK STATUS
IOC 150TPPU RE- 79LO
IN4 TEST MODE (150TP) 6 VO9 79DTL WAIT 79F
OPTO CLOSER
DTL/BLK 79SCB

150TNT
NEUTRAL
0 BLK IOC 150TNPU
(150TN)
43 SET GRP AUTO
CO-43
150TQT
NEG SEQ
143 RCL ENABLE 0 BLK
CO-143 IOC 150TQPU
(150TQ)
243 N AND Q ENABLE
CO-243
50TPT
PHASE
343 TEST MODE BLK IOC VO1 52TC
CO-343 50TPPU
(50TP) OUTPUT
OUT1
CO-OUTx LOGIC
50TNT
NEUTRAL
BLK IOC VO2 52CC
(50TN)
50TNPU
OUTPUT
OUT2
CO-OUTx LOGIC
50TQT
NEG SEQ
BLK
IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ) VO3 RELAY OUT OF SERVICE

Application
OUTPUT
51PT OUT3
PHASE CO-OUTx LOGIC
0 BLK TOC 51PPU
(51P) VO4 BLOCK UPSTREAM
INSTANTANEOUS
51NT OUTPUT

Figure 8-8. FEEDER_3 Logic Diagram

NEUTRAL OUT4
BLK CO-OUTx LOGIC
TOC 51NPU
(51N)

51QT VO5 BF TRIP

NEG SEQ
BLK IOC OUTPUT
51QPU OUT5
(51Q) VO15 TEST MODE LOGIC
CO-OUTx
9 VO11 PROT TRIP
0 D0 SG0
0 D1 ACTIVE SG1 9
VO12 PROT PU
SETTING SG2
0 D2
GROUP SG3
0 D3
CONTROL
AUTO
D2863-003 VO10 BFI
INI BREAKER BFT
10-10-99
FAILURE
BLK (BF) BFPU

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

BE1-851
FEEDER_3 Logic Settings And Equations Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_3
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN3+243; SL-50TQ=1,79SCB+/IN3+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3+243; SL-51Q=1,/IN3+243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,/0,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-VOA=ALMMAJ
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO3=IN4*/343
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=/IN2+143+/101SC+VO5+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT
SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+50TQT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+50TQPU+150TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_3 Logic Settings And Equations Sensing Input Type G Relays

SL-N=FEEDER_3
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN3+243; 79SCB+/IN3+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,/IN3+243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,/0,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-VOA=ALMMAJ
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO3=IN4*/343
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=/IN2+143+/101SC+VO5+150TPT+150TNT

BE1-851 Application 8-33

SL-VO10=VO11
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_4 LOGIC SCHEME

Logic scheme FEEDER_4 is meant for use on a feeder breaker and provides all overcurrent and breaker
failure protection, reclosing, and control functions required for a typical feeder in a non-directional
overcurrent protection application. This logic is intended to be used in conjunction with redundant protective
relays such as existing electromechanical relays to provide backup when the relay is out of service.
Automatic reclosing is initiated by the breaker opening. Reclosing is disabled after a manual trip by a control
switch slip contact. In this logic scheme, the disable logic is connected to the reclose initiate (RI) input.
Once re-enabled, the recloser will start the sequence and automatically close the breaker if it is open.
When used in conjunction with other programmable relays using logic scheme BUS, it can provide complete
overcurrent protection for the transformers, bus and feeders in a radial system substation.
A diagram of FEEDER_4 logic is shown in Figure 8-5. The components used in this logic are explained in
Tables 8-17, 8-18, 8-19, and 8-20.

Normal Operation - Control

The virtual breaker control switch is programmed to provide manual trip and close control of the breaker.
The control functions of this logic scheme use both traditional contact sensing inputs and virtual switches.
Virtual switches that are not needed may simply go unused. The protection engineer may choose to free
up contact sensing inputs for other uses by using the virtual switches exclusively for the various control
functions.

Normal Operation - Protection

The 50T and 51 function blocks and the breaker failure function block re-trip output are enabled in
FEEDER_4 logic for tripping via OUT1. Each overcurrent function block can be individually disabled by
setting the pickup at 0 in the four setting groups.
The 50TN, 50TQ, 51N, and 51Q function blocks are torque controlled by virtual switch 243. All N and Q
function blocks or only the 51N and 51Q function blocks may be inhibited. This is done in BESTlogic by
modifying the inputs to the function blocks.

Normal Operation - Reclosing

The reclosing logic in FEEDER_4 is initiated by the breaker opening. Automatic reclosing is disabled for a
manual trip by a control switch slip contact. The recloser function block can be disabled by setting the first
reclose time = 0 in the four setting groups.
Reclosing can be disabled by IN2 or virtual switch 143 which interrupts the RI input to the recloser function
block. In this scheme, enabling the recloser after a "one shot" trip will cause the recloser to start the
reclosing sequence and automatically close the breaker. If the control switch slip contact is in the after trip
position, the recloser will not automatically start. If an external control switch slip contact is used, it should
be wired in series with the reclose enable switch to IN2.
The BESTlogic can be modified so that the reclosing disable logic drives the recloser to lockout instead of
interrupting the RI input. This is accomplished by using variables IN2, 143, and 101SC in the DTL
expression instead of the RI expression. This recloser control logic is used in preprogrammed logic scheme
FEEDER_3. The recloser will be driven to lockout if a breaker failure occurs.

8-34 Application BE1-851

Zone sequence coordination can be enabled by setting an appropriate logic expression for 79ZONE. Zone
sequence uses a BESTlogic expression but is not within the logic settings. The FEEDER_4 logic scheme
uses the expression SP-79ZONE=VO12.
FEEDER_4 logic provides for the recloser to torque control the 50TP/N/Q functions (typically used for low
set instantaneous protection) during various steps in the reclosing sequence. Setting the recloser sequence
controlled blocking output in the four setting groups is done using the S#-79SCB commands. Blocking of
external instantaneous elements is done through OUT3.
Recloser timing is stopped by the wait input if an overcurrent protection function block is picked up and
timing. This prevents the reset timer from resetting the reclose function for a situation where a 51 element
is just above pickup and the time to trip is longer than the reset time.
A block load tap changer output is not provided in this scheme. OUT5 can be reprogrammed as a 79RNG
(recloser running/block tap changer) output and wired to energize a normally closed auxiliary relay.

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection

Setting group selection can be done automatically or externally by communications command/HMI override.
Automatic setting group changes for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustment are enabled by
SP-GROUP# commands. Setting group change by contact sensing input are not accommodated in this
scheme. IN3, or IN4 can be reprogrammed to provide this function instead of their programmed functions
if desired. The automatic change logic can be disabled by virtual switch 43.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

When any of the 50T or 51 function blocks are picked up, OUT4 closes. The signal from OUT4 is wired to
IN2 of the upstream relay using BUS logic. The upstream relay blocks the 150T elements that are set up
to trip the bus breaker or bus lockout relay. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 150T elements of the bus relay
are not blocked. The bus relay 150T elements are set with a time delay of 2 to 20 cycles to provide a
coordination interval for the feeder relay OUT4 to close or the redundant feeder relays to trip the feeder
breaker. Should there be a problem with the blocking logic, the bus relay 51 functions are not blocked to
allow bus fault clearing with a traditional coordination interval.
When used to provide high speed overcurrent protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all
51 function timing curves be set for instantaneous reset. Use of this protection feature with redundant
electromechanical relays should be done with caution. Retrofit of the electromechanical relays with
BE1-50/51B solid state overcurrent relays can mitigate this concern.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to
be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the feeder protection and control system if external test
switches are not installed on all outputs. When the relay is out of service for testing, the breaker failure,
automatic reclosing, and block upstream instantaneous functions are disabled. Backup by the upstream
relay is enabled.
De-energizing IN4 or closing virtual switch 343 will put the logic in test mode. IN4 can be controlled by a
panel mounted selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state. IN4 can also be
controlled by a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED to provide indication when the relay is
in test mode.

BE1-851 Application 8-35

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Breaker Failure
OUT5 is configured as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the bus breaker or a lockout
relay. The breaker failure pickup (BFPU) output trips the feeder breaker directly via output 1 to provide a
breaker retrip signal for added security.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is provided by IN3. Fault detector supervision of the
external initiate signal is provided by the 150T function blocks. The logic uses the pickup outputs of the
function blocks. In this application, the time delay settings should be set a maximum so that they do not time
out and target. If the external BFI signal from protective relays such as 81 or 87T, where fault detector
supervision is not desired, the BESTlogic expression for VO12 which is the BFI logic expression in this logic
scheme can be modified.
The BF function block is also initiated by a protective trip. This function block has an independent fast drop
out phase and ground current detector that detects a breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker
is detected when the current drops below 10% of nominal. The BF function block is disabled by setting the
time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial system backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping
different breakers.
FEEDER_4 logic stops the block signal to allow the bus relay to trip the bus breaker through its 50T
elements if a direct trip is not desired. This provides clearing of the fault on the circuit with the failed breaker
in feeder relay breaker failure time (or bus relay 50T time whichever is greater) instead of the bus relay 51
time; but, is limited by the sensitivity constraints of the bus relay.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service

Primary protection for relay failure is provided by redundant relays applied to the feeder.

Table 8-17. FEEDER_4 Contact Sensing Input Logic

State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status. BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Enable recloser when IN2 is RCL_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

energized.

IN3 Enable neutral and negative N&Q_ENABLE ENABLED DISABLD

sequence, 50 and 51 protection
when IN3 is energized.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
reclosing and breaker failure are
disabled when IN4 is de-
energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

8-36 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-18. FEEDER_4 Function Block Logic
BESTlogic
Function Description Experession Settings

50TP Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB 1(enable)

blocking output is true.

50TN Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+243 1(enable)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
IN3 OR Virtual Switch 243

50TQ Block when recloser sequence controlled 79SCB+243 1(enable)

blocking output is true OR when disabled by
Virtual Switch 243.

150TP None 0 1(enable)

150TN None 0 1(enable)

150TQ None 0 1(enable)

51P None 0 1(enable)

51N Block when disabled by Virtual Switch 243. 243 1(enable)

51Q Block when disabled by Virtual Switch 243. 243 1(enable)

62 None 0 0

162 None 0 0

Initiate when reclose initiate expression is true. VO8

Breaker closed when IN1 is de-energized. /IN1

Stop recloser timing when timing for a fault trip. VO12

True when protection picked up expression is
79 1(enable)
true.

Drive recloser to lockout when recloser drive to VO9+/IN4+343

lockout expression is true or when relay is in
test mode.

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure V010

initiate expression is true
BF 1(enable)

Block breaker failure protection when relay is in /IN4+343

test mode

Group Disable automatic selection when virtual switch /43 1(enable)

43 is in the manual position.

BE1-851 Application 8-37

 Table 8-19. FEEDER_4 Virtual Switches Logic
State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Automatic setting group SETGRP_MAN AUTO MANUAL

change logic auto/manual
switch.

143 Disable recloser when RCL_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

virtual switch is closed.

243 Disable neutral and N&Q_DISABLE DISABLD ENABLED

negative sequence, 50 and
51 protection when virtual
switch is closed.

343 Put the relay in test mode TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL

so that reclosing and
breaker failure are disabled
when virtual switch is
closed.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-20. FEEDER_4 Virtual Outputs

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)

Close alarm contact when relay

VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip breaker when protective trip
expression is true OR when
VO1
Breaker trip contact. breaker failure is initiated OR BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
when virtual breaker control
switch is operated to trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = VO11+BFPU+101T
Close breaker when recloser
VO2 close output is true OR when
Breaker close contact BKR_CLOSE CLOSE NORMAL
(OUT2) virtual breaker control switch is
operated to close.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 79C+101C
Close contact when recloser
VO3 Block external
sequence controlled blocking 79INST_BLK NORMAL BLOCK
(OUT3) instantaneous elements
output is not true.
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 =/79SCB
Block upstream Block upstream instantaneous
instantaneous elements elements when the protective
VO4
when relay is picked up pickup expression is true AND the BLK_USTRM BLOCKED NORMAL
(OUT4)
for high speed bus over relay is not in test mode AND the
current protection logic. breaker has not failed.

8-38 Application BE1-851

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
VO5 Breaker failure trip conact Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
Allow reclose when the recloser is
not disabled. To operate, reclose
Reclose initiate must be enabled by IN2 AND
VO8 RCL_INI INI NORMAL
expression virtual switch 143 AND virtual
breaker control switch slip
contact.
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = IN2*/143*101SC
Recloser drive to lockout Drive recloser to lockout to
VO9 RCL_DTL DTL NORMAL
expression. disable it if the breaker fails.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = VO5
Initiate breaker failure timing
when protective trip expression is
Breaker failure initiate
VO10 true or when external initiate BFI INI NORMAL
expression
contact is sensed and any of the
fault detectors is picked up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11+IN3*150TPPU+IN3*150TNPU+IN3*150TQPU
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. erelement times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay is in test
True if IN4 is de-energized OR if
VO15 mode and that breaker TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
virtual switch 343 is closed.
failure and reclosing are
disabled
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

BE1-851 Application 8-39

 52
IN1
52B

TRIP

CLOSE
51P 51N 51Q

OUT1
TRIP

STATUS

50TP 50TN 50TQ 79

DTL

RI 79C

OUT2
52CC

IN3 SC C

D2871-6
101 T 12-13-99

150TP 150TN 150TQ

143
Disable
79
OUT5
BF OUT
43
GROUP
BF 343 Auto CONTROL
Man.
BLOCK
IN4 OUT3
TEST TEST
MODE BE1-851 MODE OUT

Figure 8-9. Typical One-Line Diagram for FEEDER_4 Logic

8-40 Application BE1-851

 ALMLGC
VOA ALARM
ALMMAJ
OUTPUT OUT
ALARM ALMMIN LOGIC A
SB-LOGIC CO-OUTx
OUT1MON 101T

BE1-851
OPTO
IN1 52B 101C
CO-101
IN2 RCL ENABLE
OPTO 101SC

IN3 BFI
OPTO
VO8 79RI 79C
RI
IN4 TEST MODE 79RNG
OPTO STATUS 79
RE- 79LO
WAIT 79F
CLOSER
50TPT DTL/BLK 79SCB
PHASE
43 SET GRP AUTO BLK IOC VO9 79DTL
CO-43 50TPPU
(50TP)
143 RCL ENABLE
CO-143
50TNT
NEUTRAL
243 N AND Q ENABLE BLK IOC
CO-243 50TNPU
(50TN)
343 TEST MODE
CO-343
50TQT
NEG SEQ
BLK IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ)
VO1 52TC
OUTPUT OUT
51PT LOGIC 1
0 PHASE CO-OUTx
BLK TOC 51PPU
(51P)
VO2 52CC

51NT OUTPUT OUT

NEUTRAL LOGIC 2
BLK TOC CO-OUTx
51NPU
(51N)

Application
VO3 BLOCK EXT INSTANTANEOUS
51QT
BLK NEG SEQ OUTPUT OUT
TOC 51QPU LOGIC 3
(51Q) CO-OUTx

VO4 BLOCK UPSTREAM

150TPT INSTANTANEOUS
0 PHASE
BLK IOC 15TPPU OUTPUT OUT

Figure 8-10. FEEDER_4 Logic Diagram

(150TP) LOGIC 4
CO-OUTx

0 150TNT
NEUTRAL
BLK IOC VO5 BF TRIP
150TNPU 0 SG0
(150TN) D0
0 D1 ACTIVE SG1 OUTPUT OUT
VO15 TEST MODE SETTING SG2 LOGIC 5
0 D2 CO-OUTx
GROUP SG3
150TQT 6 VO11 PROT TRIP 0 D3
0 NEG SEQ CONTROL
BLK AUTO
IOC 150TQPU
6
VO12 PROT PU
(150TQ)

D2863-04 VO10 BFI

4 INI
10-10-99 BREAKER BFT
FAILURE
BLK (BF) BFPU

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-41
FEEDER_4 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_4
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+243; SL-50TQ=1,79SCB+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,243; SL-51Q=1,243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO3=/79SCB
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=IN2*/143*101SC
SL-VO9=VO5
SL-VO10=VO11+IN3*150TPPU+IN3*150TNPU+IN3*150TQPU
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

FEEDER_4 Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays
SL-N=FEEDER_4
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+243
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,243
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12,VO9+/IN4+343
SL-BF=1,VO10,/IN4+343
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/43
SL-43=2
SL-143=2
SL-243=2
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=VO11+BFPU+101T
SL-VO2=79C+101C
SL-VO3=/79SCB
SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*IN4*/343
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0

8-42 Application BE1-851

SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=IN2*/143*101SC
SL-VO9=VO5
SL-VO10=VO11+IN3*150TPPU+IN3*150TNPU+IN3
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

BUS AND BACKUP LOGIC SCHEMES

Logic schemes BUS and BACKUP are meant for use on a bus main breaker and provide all overcurrent
protection, and control functions required for a typical bus main breaker in a non-directional overcurrent
protection application. These logic schemes are intended to be used in conjunction with other programmable
relays using the FEEDER_1, FEEDER_2, and FEEDER_3 logic schemes to provide complete overcurrent
protection for the transformers, bus and feeders in a radial system substation.
When interconnected with feeder relays using logic scheme FEEDER_1, FEEDER_2, FEEDER_3, it
provides complete backup, except for reclosing, for the feeder relays if relay failure occurs or when they are
out of service for testing or maintenance. Figure 5-7 at the end of this section shows the interconnection of
the FEEDER, BUS, and BACKUP relays to achieve this integrated protection system.
A diagram of BUS logic is shown in Figure 8-6 and the components used in this logic are explained in Tables
8-21, 8-22, 8-23, and 8-24. A diagram of BACKUP logic is shown in Figure 8-7 and the components used
in this logic are explained in Tables 8-25, 8-26, 8-27, and 8-28.

Normal Operation - Control

The virtual breaker control switch is programmed to provide manual trip and close control of the bus breaker
in both BUS and BACKUP logic. The control functions of these logic schemes use both traditional contact
sensing inputs and virtual switches. Virtual switches that are not needed may simply go unused. The
protection engineer may choose to free up contact sensing inputs for other uses by using the virtual switches
exclusively for the various control functions.

Normal Operation - Bus Protection

The BUS relay primary task in normal operation is to provide high speed bus fault protection (2-4 cycles
coordination interval) and timed overload or high unbalanced load protection. The BACKUP relay primary
task is to backup the BUS relay for bus faults with a coordination interval of 18-20 cycles.
When any of the feeder relay overcurrent elements are picked up and timing, OUT4 on the feeder relay
closes. This signal is wired to IN2 of the upstream (primary) bus relay using BUS logic which blocks the 50T
elements. These are set with a delay of 2 to 4 cycles. If the fault is not on a feeder, the 50T elements of the
bus relays are not blocked. The 50T function blocks are set up to trip the bus breaker by an external bus
lockout relay (86B) via OUT4. The BACKUP relay does not get blocked when the feeder relays are picked
up so its 50T elements are set with a time delay long enough to allow the feeder breaker to interrupt the
fault. These are set up to trip the 86B relay also via OUT4. If a bus fault lockout relay is not used, OUT4 can
be wired in parallel with OUT1 to direct trip the bus breaker.
The BUS and BACKUP 50T functions should be set with a higher pickup than the highest feeder
instantaneous elements to ensure that they will not pickup before any feeder relay.
If there is a contingency problem such as a relay removed from service, 51 protection is still provided. The
BUS and BACKUP 51 functions are enabled for tripping via OUT1. The 51 functions are not blocked to allow
clearing a bus fault with a traditional coordination interval. When used to provide high speed overcurrent
protection for the substation bus, it is recommended that all 51 function timing curves be set for
instantaneous reset.

BE1-851 Application 8-43

Normal Operation - Setting Group Selection
For normal operation, the BUS and BACKUP relays are in setting group 0. In setting group 0, the two relays
will only trip the bus breaker. Input two to the BACKUP relay identifies when a feeder relay is out of service,
The BACKUP relay then closes OUT3 which is connected to input three of the BUS relay. The two relays
then switch to setting group 1. Setting group selection mode 2, binary coded selection, is used to recognize
the group setting state. When Input D0 to the setting group selection function block is a one, it is interpreted
as a binary 1 causing the logic to switch to group 1.
When the relay is in setting group 1, the relays are operating in feeder relay backup mode. This expression
is programmed to virtual output 13 of the BUS relay which drives alarm bit #21 in the pro-grammable alarm
mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED and alarm display to indicate when the BUS relay is in feeder
backup mode and to trip a feeder breaker instead of the bus breaker.

Normal Operation - Alarms

Two alarm logic variables drive the front panel alarm LEDs: major alarm-(ALMMAJ), and minor
alarm-(ALMMIN). ALMMAJ is set to drive the fail safe output OUTA. ALMMIN is not set to drive an output
relay. The logic can be modified to place ALMMIN in the BESTlogic expression for VOA if all alarms are to
be combined. ALMMIN can be placed in the BESTlogic expression for another output if it is desired that
these conditions be enunciated separately.

Contingency Operation - Test Mode

The test mode is intended to increase the security of the protection and control system if external test
switches are not installed on all outputs. When the BUS relay is out of service for testing, the overcurrent
protection function trip outputs are routed to OUT1 only. When the BACKUP relay is out of service for
testing, the overcurrent protection function trip outputs are routed to OUT1 only and the breaker failure
function is disabled.
De-energizing IN4 or closing virtual switch 343 will put the logic in test mode. IN4 can be controlled by a
panel mounted selector switch that is closed in the normal state and open in the test state. IN4 can also be
controlled by a pole of a standard external test switch that is opened with the rest of the test switch poles.
The logic expression for test mode drives virtual output 15 (VO15). This virtual output is alarm bit #23 in the
programmable alarm mask. It can be masked to drive an alarm LED and HMI alarm display to provide
indication when the relay is in test mode.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Bus Breaker Failure

Bus breaker failure protection is provided by the main bus relay using pre-programmed logic scheme
BACKUP. OUT5 is configured as the breaker failure trip output. OUT5 can be wired to trip the upstream
breaker or a bus breaker failure lockout relay or other lockout relay that trips the transformer high side such
as the 86T transformer differential lockout relay.
Initiation of the BF function block by external relays is provided by IN3. Fault detector supervision of the
external initiate signal is provided by the 150T function blocks. The logic uses the pickup outputs of the
function blocks. In this application, the time delay settings should be set a maximum so that they do not time
out and target. If the external BFI signal from protective relays such as 81 or 87T, where fault detector
supervision is not desired, the BESTlogic expression for VO12 which is the BFI logic expression in this logic
scheme can be modified. The BF function block is also initiated by a protective trip. If you are tripping for
a bus fault via a lockout relay, the additional time delay of the lockout relay should be added to your breaker
failure time setting.
This function block has an independent fast drop out phase and ground current detector that detects a
breaker opening and stops timing. An open breaker is detected when the current drops below 10% of
nominal.

8-44 Application BE1-851

The BF function block is disabled by setting the time delay at zero. This permits the traditional radial system
backup scheme of coordinated relays tripping different breakers.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For BUS Relay Out-of-Service

When the BUS relay is out of service, backup protection is provided by the BACKUP main bus relay. The
BACKUP main bus relay provides permanent backup protection for the BUS relay regardless of other feeder
contingencies. Under this contingency, protection for bus faults will be delayed by an 18-20 cycle
coordination interval.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For BACKUP Relay Out-of-Service

When the BACKUP relay is out of service, full high speed bus fault protection and overload protection are
provided by the BUS relay. Under this contingency, bus breaker failure protection is not provided as this is
a double contingency situation.

Contingency Operation - Backup Protection For Feeder Relay Out-of-Service

OUT3 of each of the feeder relays should be wired to an auxiliary transfer relay (83/Fn) with one normally
open and one normally closed contact. Under normal conditions, OUT3 of the feeder relay is closed and the
83 aux. relay is picked up. When the feeder relay is out of service due to failure, being in test mode, or if it
is drawn out from its case, the 83 auxiliary relay will drop out.
The normally open contact (NO in shelf state) of the 83/Fn aux. relay is wired to input 2 of the BACKUP relay
to signal the BUS and BACKUP relays to change to setting group 1. When the BUS relay is in setting group
1, the 50T and 51 overcurrent function blocks trip an auxiliary tripping relay (94/BU) via OUT5.
In setting group 1, the BACKUP relay 51 time settings must coordinate with the BUS relay 51 time dial
settings. Since the feeder relays provide a blocking signal to the BUS relay upon pickup of the 51 function
blocks, it is not necessary for the 51 time dial settings on the BUS relay to coordinate with the feeder relays
in setting group 1. Therefore, the 51 time dial settings of the BUS relay can be reduced in setting group 1
to provide the necessary coordination interval between the BUS relay and the BACKUP relay for this
contingency. This minimizes the time delay that needs to be added to the 51 time dial settings for the
BACKUP relay and provides a greater opportunity to keep the setting below the transformer damage curve.
The tripping output of the 94/BU auxiliary relay and the normally closed contacts (form B) of the 83/Fn
auxiliary relay are wired in series with the feeder breaker trip coil. This allows the 94/BU relay to trip the
feeder breaker when the feeder relay is out of service.
When the BUS and BACKUP relays are in feeder relay backup mode, operation for the various faults is as
follows:
• A fault on a feeder with its relay still in service will send a blocking signal to the BUS relay preventing
it from tripping high speed. The 51 functions of the BUS and BACKUP relays are set to coordinate
with each other and the feeder relays.
• A fault on the feeder with the relay out of service, will not send a blocking signal to the BUS relay so
it will trip the feeder breaker via the 94 and 83 relay contacts. Fault clearing will be after the 2 to 4
cycle coordination interval set on the BUS relay 50T functions or in BUS relay 51 time if the fault is
farther out. For this reason, the BACKUP relay 51 functions must be set to coordinate with the BUS
relay in this setting group.
• A fault on the bus will cause the BUS relay to trip the feeder breaker with the relay out of service
because no blocking signal will be sent by any of the feeder relays. Since this will not clear the fault,
the BACKUP relay will clear the fault with its 18-20 cycle coordination interval.

BE1-851 Application 8-45

 Table 8-21. BUS Contact Sensing Input Logic
State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Block instantaneous when feeder FEEDER_PU PICKDUP NORMAL

relay is picked up.

IN3 Signal from relay on bus source BACKUPMODE BACKUP NORMAL

that is using BACKUP logic that a
feeder relay is out of service

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
all trips are re-routed to OUT1
when IN4 is de-energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-22. BUS Function Block Logic

BESTlogic
Function Description Experession Settings

50TP Block when feeder relay is picked up indicating IN2 1(enable)

that the fault is on a feeder.

50TN Block when feeder relay is picked up indicating IN2 1(enable)

that the fault is on a feeder.

50TQ Block when feeder relay is picked up indicating IN2

that the fault is on a feeder. 1(enable)

150TP None 0 0(disabled)

150TN None 0 0(disabled)

150TQ None 0 0(disabled)

51P None 0 0(disabled)

51N None 0 0(disabled)

51Q None 0 1 (enable)

62 Initiate time delay when 51 trip expressions is VO8 0(disabled)

true to provide backup tripping of the bus
breaker when the relay is being used for
backup feeder protection

162 None 0 0(disabled)

79 None 0 0(disabled)

BF None 0 0(disabled)

8-46 Application BE1-851

 BESTlogic
Function Description Experession Settings

Switch to setting group 1 if feeder relay is out of IN#

service.
Group 2(Binary Coded
Fix Auto/Manual switch in the manual position Selection)
only. Selection by contact sensing only. No 0
automatic selection logic .

Table 8-23. BUS Virtual Switch Logic

State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Not used SWITCH_43 CLOSED OPEN

143 Not used SWITCH_143 CLOSED OPEN

243 Not used SWITCH_243 CLOSED OPEN

Put the relay in test mode so

that reclosing and breaker
failure are disabled when
343 virtual switch is closed. TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-24. BUS Virtual Outputs

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alrm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip bus breaker for virtual
control switch trip OR for 51 trip
when in normal mode. Trip bus
VO1 breaker for 41 trip after
Bus Breaker Trip BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1) coordination time delay when in
feeder backup mode. Close
OUT1 for any trip when in test
mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 = 101T+V08*/SGO+62*SG1+V011*V015
Close breaker when virtual
VO2
Bus breaker close. breaker control switch is BKR_CLOSE CLOSE NORMAL
(OUT2)
operated to close
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 101C
VO3
Not Used. Not Used. VO3 TRUE FALSE
(OUT3)
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = 0

BE1-851 Application 8-47

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE
Trip bus breaker via lockout for
VO4 bus faults (50T with 2-4 cycles
Bus fault trip (86B) BUS_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT4) delay) when in normal mode and
not in test mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO9*SG0*/VO15
Trip feeder breaker via auxilary
relay (94) for time (51) AND
VO5 instantaneous (50T with 2-4
Feeder breaker trip BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) cycles delay) when in feeder
relay backup mode AND not in
test mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11*SG1*/VO15
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
True if any of the time
VO8 Time overcurrent trip. 51_TRIP TRIP FALSE
overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 51PT+51NT+51QT
Instantaneous over True if any of the instantaneous
VO9 50_TRIP TRIP FALSE
current tip. overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
VO10 None VO10 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = 0
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. element times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13
Alarm Alarm that relay is in
True if in setting group 1 FEEDER_BU BACKUP NORMAL
mask feeder backup mode.
21
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = SG1
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay isn in test
True if IN4 is de-energized or if
VO15 mode, breaker failure is TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
virtual switch 343 is closed
disabled, and all trips are
re-routed to OUT1.
BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

8-48 Application BE1-851

 52

TRIP

CLOSE
51P 51N 51Q

OUT1
T TRIP
IN2
INST 101
BLOCK
C OUT2
50TP 50TN 50TQ CLOSE
OUT5
FEEDER BU
TRIP
OUT4
GROUP
BUS FAULT
CONTROL TRIP

D2871-2
IN3 12-13-99
FEEDER BE1-851
BACKUP

Figure 8-11. Typical One-Line Diagram for BUS Logic

BE1-851 Application 8-49

8-50
ALMLGC
ALMMAJ VOA ALARM
SB-LOGIC
ALMMIN OUTPUT OUT
ALARM LOGIC A
CO-OUTx
OUT1MON 101T
101C
CO-101
101SC

VO1 52TC
INI 62 62 OUTPUT OUT
CO-OUTx LOGIC 1

IN1 52B
OPTO PHASE
BLK IOC 50TPT
IN2 BLOCK INST (50TP)
OPTO 50TPPU VO2 52CC

50TNT OUTPUT OUT

IN3 FEEDER BACKUP
OPTO NEUTRAL LOGIC 2
BLK CO-OUTx
IOC 50TNPU
IN4 TEST MODE (50TN)
OPTO
VO3 NOT USED
50TQT
NEG SEQ OUTPUT OUT
BLK
IOC CO-OUTx LOGIC 3
(50TQ)
43 50TQPU
CO-43
VO4 BUS FAULT TRIP (86B)
51PT
143 0 PHASE
CO-143 BLK TOC OUTPUT OUT
51PPU
(51P) CO-OUTx LOGIC 4
243
CO-243
51NT VO5 FEEDER BU TRIP
343 TEST MODE 0 NEUTRAL
CO-343 BLK TOC (94)
51NPU
(51N) OUTPUT OUT

Application
CO-OUTx LOGIC 5
51QT
NEG SEQ
0 BLK 3 VO8 51TRIP
IOC 51QPU

Figure 8-12. BUS Logic Diagram

(51Q)
3
VO9 50TRIP

6
VO11 PROT TRIP

6
VO12 PROT PU
D0 SG0
0 D1 ACTIVE SG1 VO13 FEEDER BU MODE
SETTING SG2
0 D2 SG3
GROUP
0 D3 NORMAL MODE
CONTROL
0 AUTO

VO15 TEST MODE

D2863-05
10-10-99
Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR
Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

BE1-851
BU
S Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=BUS
SL-50TP=1,IN2; SL-50TN=1,IN2; SL-50TQ=1,IN2
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0; SL-150TQ=0,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,0; SL-51Q=1,0
SL-62=1,VO8,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=2,IN3,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=101T+VO8*SG0+ 62*SG1+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2=101C
SL-VO3= 0
SL-VO4=VO9*SG0*/VO15
SL-VO5=VO11*SG1*/VO15
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10= 0
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=SG1
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

BUS Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays
SL-N=BUS
SL-50TP=1,IN2; SL-50TN=1,IN2
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,0
SL-62=1,VO8,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=2,IN3,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=101T+VO8*SG0+ 62*SG1+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2=101C
SL-VO3= 0
SL-VO4=VO9*SG0*/VO15
SL-VO5=VO11*SG1*/VO15
SL-VO6=0

BE1-851 Application 8-51

SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT
SL-VO10= 0
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+51PT+51NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+51PPU+51NPU
SL-VO13=SG1
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

Table 8-25. BACKUP Contact Sensing Input Logic

State Labels 

Input Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

IN1 52b Breaker Status BREAKER OPEN CLOSED

IN2 Put relay in feeder backup mode FEEDERS_OK NORMAL FDR_OOS

when feeder relay out of service
is detected by open contact.

IN3 Breaker failure initiate by external BFI INI NORMAL

relays.

IN4 Put the relay in test mode so that TESTDISABL NORMAL TSTMODE
breaker failure is disabled and all
trips go through OUT1 when IN4
is de-energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

Table 8-26. BACKUP Virtual Switches Logic

State Labels 

Function Purpose Variable Label • Closed (1) Open (0)

43 Not used SWITCH_43 CLOSED OPEN

143 Not used SWITCH_143 CLOSED OPEN

243 Not used SWITCH_243 CLOSED OPEN

343 Put the relay in test mode so TESTENABLE TSTMODE NORMAL

that breaker failure is disabled
and all trips are rerouted to
OUT1 when IN4 is de-
energized.
Notes:  Variable labels are limited to 10 characters.
• State labels are limited to 7 characters.

8-52 Application BE1-851

 Table 8-27. BACKUP Function Block Logic
BESTlogic
Function Description Experession Settings

50TP None 0 1(enabled)

50TN None 0 1(enabled)

50TQ None 0 1(enabled)

150TP None 0 1(enabled)

150TN None 0 1(enabled)

150TQ None 0 1(enabled)

51P None 0 1(enabled)

51N None 0 1(enabled)

51Q None 0 1(enabled)

62 None 0 0(disabled)

162 None 0 0(disabled)

79 None 0 0(disabled)

Initiate breaker failure when breaker failure

initiate expression is true V010
BF 1(enabled)
Block breaker failure protection when relay is in
test mode VO15

Switch to setting group 1 if feeder relay is out of /IN2

service as indicated by open contact from
feeder relays.
2(Bindary Coded
Group No manual selection logic is used 0 Selection)
No manual selection logic is used 0

No manual selection logic is used 0

Fix Auto/Manual switch in the manual position 0

only. Selection by contact sensing only. No
automatic selection logic.

BE1-851 Application 8-53

 Table 8-28. BACKUP Virtual Outputs
State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
Close alarm contact when relay
VOA
Alarm Output Contact. failure or major programmable ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
alarm is true.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA = ALMMAJ
Trip bus breaker for virtual
control switch trip OR for 51 trip
VO1
Bus breaker trip OR when breaker failure is BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1)
picked up. Close OUT1 for any
trip when in test mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1 =101T+VO8+BFPU+VO11*VO15
Close breaker when virtual
VO2
Bus breaker close breaker control switch is BKR_CLOSE CLOSE NORMAL
(OUT2)
operated to close.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2 = 101C
Signal relay on bus
Feeder relay is out of service
VO3 source that is using BUS
as indicated by contact open BACKUPMODE BACKUP NORMAL
(OUT3) logic that feeder relay is
from the feeder relays.
out of service
BESTlogic Expression: VO3 = /IN2
Trip bus breaker via lockout for
VO4 bus faults (50T with 18-20
Bus fault trip (86B) BUS_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT4) cycles delay) when not in test
mode.
BESTlogic Expression: VO4 = VO9*/VO15
VO5 Breaker failure trip Trip backup if breaker failure
BKR_FAIL TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) contact protection times out.
BESTlogic Expression: BFT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6 = 0
VO7 None VO7 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO7 = 0
True if any of the time
VO8 Time overcurrent trip. 51_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO8 = 51PT+51NT+51QT
Instantaneous over True if any of the instantaneous
VO9 50_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
current trip. overcurrent elements trip.
BESTlogic Expression: VO9 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
Initiate breaker failure timing
when protective trip expression
Breaker failure initiate is true OR when external
VO10 BFI INI NORMAL
expression initiate contact is sensed AND
any of the fault detectors is
picked up..
BESTlogic Expression: VO10 = VO11+IN3*150TPPU+IN3*150TNPU+IN3*150TQPU

8-54 Application BE1-851

 State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
Expression. element times out.
BESTlogic Expression: VO11 = 50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50 or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression. element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12 = 50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU +51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21. VO13 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO13 = 0
VO14 Alarm Mask 22. VO14 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO14 = 0
Alarm bit #23 indication
that the relay is in test
mode and that breaker Trui if IN4 is de-energized or if
VO15 TEST_MODE TEST NORMAL
failure is disabled and all virtual switch 343 is closed..
trips are rerouted to
OUT1.

BESTlogic Expression: VO15 = /IN4+343

BE1-851 Application 8-55

 52

TRIP CLOSE

51P 51N 51Q

OUT1
TRIP
IN2 T
FEEDER RELAY 101
OUT OF
SERVICE
GROUP C
CONTROL OUT2
52CC
OUT3
OUT OF
SERVICE FEEDER
OUT4

50TP 50TN 50TQ

50TP 50TN 50TQ

IN3
BFI

BF D2871-1
12-13-99

OUT5
TRIP
BE1-851

Figure 8-13. Typical One-Line Diagram for Backup Logic

8-56 Application BE1-851

 VOA ALARM
ALMLGC
OUTPUT OUT
ALMMAJ
ALARM LOGIC A
CO-OUTx
SB-LOGIC ALMMIN 101T

BE1-851
OUT1MON 101C
CO-101
101SC

IN1 52B
OPTO

IN2 FEEDER RELAY OUT OF SERVICE

OPTO
VO1 52TC
OPTO IN3 BFI
OUTPUT OUT
0 PHASE LOGIC 1
IN4 TEST MODE BLK 50TPT CO-OUTx
OPTO IOC
(50TP)
50TPPU

0 NEUTRAL
CO-43 BLK 50TNT
43 IOC
(50TN)
50TNPU
CO-143
143
50TQT
0 NEG SEQ
CO-243 BLK
243 IOC 50TQPU
(50TQ)
CO-343
343 TEST MODE
VO2 52CC
PHASE
0 BLK 51PT OUTPUT OUT
TOC
LOGIC 2
(51P) CO-OUTx
51PPU

0 NEUTRAL VO3 FEEDER OUT OF SERVICE

BLK TOC 51NT
OUTPUT OUT
(51N)
51NPU LOGIC 3

Application
CO-OUTx

51QT
0 NEG SEQ
BLK VO4 BUS FAULT TRIP (86B)
TOC 51QPU
(51Q) OUT
OUTPUT
LOGIC 4
CO-OUTx

0 PHASE 150TPT

Figure 8-14. BACKUP Logic Diagram

BLK IOC 15TPPU
(150TP) VO5 BF TRIP
OUTPUT OUT
VO8 51TRIP LOGIC 5
0 NEUTRAL 3 CO-OUTx
BLK 150TNT
IOC 150TNPU
VO9 50TRIP D0
(150TN) 3 0 ACTIVE
D1 SG0
0 SETTING SG1
D2
6 VO11 PROT TRIP 0 GROUP SG2
D3
0 NEG SEQ 0 CONTROL SG3
150TQT AUTO
BLK IOC
6
VO12 PROT PU
(150TQ) 150TQPU

D2863-06 4
VO10 BFI INI BREAKER BFT
10-10-99 FAILURE
VO15 TEST MODE
BLK (BF) BFPU

Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR

Gate are shown by a single line into the OR Gate.

8-57
BACKUP Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type H Relays
SL-N=BACKUP
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0; SL-50TQ=1,0
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,0; SL-51Q=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=1,VO10,VO15
SL-GROUP=2,/IN2,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=VO8+BFPU+101T+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2=101C
SL-VO3= /IN2
SL-VO4=VO9*/VO15
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10= VO11+IN3(150TPPU+IN3(150TNPU+IN3(150TQPU
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

BACKUP Logic Settings And Equations for Sensing Input Type G Relays
SL-N=BACKUP
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0; SL-50TQ=1,0
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0; SL-51N=1,0; SL-51Q=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF=1,VO10,VO15
SL-GROUP=2,/IN2,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=2
SL-101=1
SL-VOA=ALMREL+ALMMAJ
SL-VO1=VO8+BFPU+101T+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2=101C
SL-VO3= /IN2
SL-VO4=VO9*/VO15
SL-VO5=BFT
SL-VO6=0

8-58 Application BE1-851

 BACKUP RELAY CIRCUIT

83 83 83 TS

BE1-851
F1 F2 Fn BUS
SL-VO7=0

SL-VO14=0
SL-VO13=0

B3 B7

IN2 BACKUP IN4 BACKUP

07-20-99
D2861-02
RELAY FEEDER RELAY TEST
SL-VO15=/IN4+343

BACKUP MODE MODE

B4 B8

-
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT

FEEDER BREAKER CIRCUIT FEEDER RELAY CIRCUIT

+ +
94
BUS TS
OUT1 Fn
Fn
83
Fn

B7
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT

52A OUT3
Fn IN4 FEEDER Fn
RELAY

Application
52TC TEST MODE
Fn 83 IN2 94BUS
B8
SL-VO10= VO11+IN3(150TPPU+IN3(150TNPU+IN3(150TQPU

Fn BUS Fn
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU

- -

BUS RELAY CIRCUIT

OUT4 OUT4 OUT4 OUT3 TS OUT5 OUT4 OUT4

F1 F2 Fn BUS BUS BUS BUS BACKUP

Figure 8-15. Interconnection Diagram for Integrated Protection System

B3 B5 B7
TRIP TRIP TRIP 86B
IN2 BUS RELAY IN3 BUS RELAY
IN4 BUS RELAY F1 F2 ... Fn OPTIONAL
INSTANTANEOUS FEEDER BACKUP
TEST MODE
BLOCK MODE
94 86B
B4 B6 B8 BUS TC

8-59
MISCELLANEOUS LOGIC SETTINGS
There are five logic variables that are classified as miscellaneous logic expressions. These expressions
are: SG-TARG, SG-TRIGGER, SB-DUTY, SB-LOGIC, and SA-RESET. The equations associated with
these variables determine how the BE1-951 responds to conditions such as when to target, what triggers
fault reporting, defining breaker status monitoring, and setup for remote alarm/target reset provisions.
These variables aren’t included in any of the BESTlogic preprogrammed schemes. However, the factory
default equations are compatible with each scheme.
The default miscellaneous expressions are common among the preprogrammed and custom schemes.
When a preprogrammed scheme is modified, or a new scheme is created, the miscellaneous logic
expressions should be reviewed to ensure desired performance.
The default expressions for the miscellaneous logic settings are as follows.
SB-LOGIC=/IN1
SG-TRIGGER=BFT+VO11,BFPU+VO12,0
SP79ZONE=0
SG-TARG=BF/50TP/150TP/50TN/150TN/50TQ/150TQ/51P/51N/51Q,0
SA-RESET= 0
SB-DUTY=0,0.000e+00,0
Table 8-29 lists the miscellaneous commands and the sections of this manual where detailed information
about each command may be found.
Table 8-29. Miscellaneous Logic Expressions

Command Reference

SB-LOGIC Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (page 6-11)

SG-TRIGGER Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (page 6-18)

SP-79ZONE Section 4, Protection and Control, (page 4-18)

SG-TARG Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (Page 6-18)

SA-RESET Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (Page 6-29)

SB-DUTY Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, (Page 6-15)

APPLICATION TIPS

Trip Circuit Continuity And Voltage Monitor

OUT1 has a built in trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor that drives logic variable OUT1MON. This
variable can be used to improve breaker failure logic or to automatically enhance security during testing.
If the relay detects a loss of voltage or continuity in the breaker trip circuit, it is possible to speed up fault
clearing time by bypassing the breaker failure timer. Since relay failure and breaker failure are covered by
different backup actions, it is desirable to reduce common mode failure mechanisms. It is recommended
that the feeder breaker and feeder protection circuits be supplied by separate control power fuses or
breakers. The equation for the Breaker Failure Trip logic (VO5) can be modified by ORing the Breaker
Failure Initiate with the expression VO10(OUT1MON. VO10 is designated in each of the pre-programmed
logic schemes as the Breaker Failure Initiate expression. Example 1 illustrates how the BFT logic
expression is modified. It is important that the breaker failure timer bypass logic also be disabled in test
mode. Example 2 shows the expression for blocking the upstream instantaneous element. Figure 8-16
illustrates using the trip circuit continuity monitor in breaker failure logic.

8-60 Application BE1-851

Example 1. Breaker failure trip ALM LGC
ALM MAY
expression: ALARMS
ALM MNL

SL-VO5=BFT+VO10*OUT1MON*IN4*/3 OUT 1 MON

43
Example 2. Block upstream + TESTMODE ENABLE
SWITCH
instantaneous expression: 1=NORMAL 0=ENABLED

SL-VO4=VO12*/VO5*/OUT1MON*I VO4
BLOCK UPSTREAM
N4*/343 IN4
INSTANTANEOUS
-

If the internal breaker failure function block TESTMODE ENABLE

VIRTUAL SWITCH
is not being used, the trip circuit continuity 1=ENABLED 0=NORMAL

and voltage monitor alarm can be used to

343
detect when the test paddle or test
switches have been opened. This will
automatically place the relay in the test PURP OETXEPCRTEI SOSNI OPNI C K E D V O 1 2 BREAKER
FAILURE
INI BFT
mode. Each of the preprogrammed logic VO5
TRIP
BF
schemes has logic to detect when the B R E A K E R F A I L U R E BLK BFPU
D2582-03
relay is out of service for test. This INITIATE EXPRESSION V O 1 0 2-25-97

enables the backup logic and enhances Figure 8-16. Trip Circuit Continuity And Voltage Monitor.
security. It should be noted that if the test
mode logic is modified in this manner, it is not possible to differentiate between the relay being out of service
for test and a problem in the circuit breaker trip circuit. Otherwise, the internal breaker failure function block
would be disabled during a known problem in the trip circuit.

Close Circuit Monitor

A close circuit monitor is not 0 = BREAKER CLOSED
included in any of the 1 = BREAKER OPEN

p r e p r o g r am m ed logi c IN1
VOX INI 62 V O Y
schemes. This function may (52B) PICKUP
TIME
be added by using a 62
D2587-02
07-22-99

function block and a contact DROPOUT

sensing input (INX) to TIME
BLK
monitor the close circuit. INX 62 TIMER
The logic is shown in Figure (CLOSE CKT) VOX=IN1*/INX
8-17 The output of the 62 0 = CLOSE CKT OPEN SL-62=1,VOX
1 = CLOSE CKT OKAY S<g>-62=500,0
protection block will close SL-VOY=62
the designated output
contact (VOY) when an Figure 8-17. Close Circuit Monitor Logic
open breaker and open close circuit condition exists. The S<g>-62 command is used to provide a 500
millisecond time delay to inhibit the momentary alarm that will occur due the timing difference between the
two signals.

High Speed Reclose

Each reclose time delay can be set as low as 100 milliseconds. If the application requires a reclose time
delay of less than 250 milliseconds, it is recommended that the close logic expression be modified to prevent
mis-coordination between the TRIP and CLOSE outputs. A hold timer for each output relay is provided to
hold the output closed for approximately 200 milliseconds. This prevents the relay contacts from opening
before the breaker auxiliary contact interrupts the trip coil current. For high speed reclosing, the hold timer
must be disabled so that the output contact follows the VO1 output expression. To modify the logic, add the
expression, "reclose 79C AND NOT trip VO1 to the close logic. Examples 1 and 2 show a close expression
and hold disable setting for high speed reclosing. Figure 8-18 illustrates this high speed reclose interlock
logic scheme.
Example 1. Close expression: SL-VO2=79C*/VO1+101C
Example 2. Hold disable setting: SG-HOLD1=0

BE1-851 Application 8-61

 101T
VO1
101 TRIP
Block Load Tap Changer BREAKER 101C
CONTROL
A block load tap changer output is not SWITCH 101SC
VO2
provided in any of the preprogrammed logic CLOSE
schemes. One of the output relays can be
programmed to operate when the recloser is 79C
running (79RNG) and wired to energize a
79RNG
normally closed auxiliary relay. The 79RNG
logic variable is high when any of the timers 79 79F
is timing and low when the reclosing function RECLOSER
79LO
is in a lockout or reset state.
79SCB D2582-02
07-22-99
Block Neutral and Negative Sequence
Protection
BFT
The neutral and negative sequence
BF
overcurrent elements provide greater BFPU
sensitivity to unbalanced faults than the
phase overcurrent elements because they
can be set to pickup below balanced three PROTECTIVE VO11
TRIP
phase load. This can lead to a mis-operation EXPRESSION
during periods of load imbalance. The Figure 8-18. High Speed Reclose Interlock Logic
BE1-851 provides a neutral and negative
sequence demand function that allows monitoring and alarming to prevent load imbalances. However,
distribution systems with single pole fault clearing and switching devices or long single phase laterals, may
have mis-operations during switching activities.
The preprogrammed logic schemes provide for the use of a cutoff switch to block the ground and negative
sequence 50T (used for low set instantaneous) and the 51 (inverse time) function blocks during switching
activities. This is the most conservative approach. The protection engineer may wish to evaluate this
strategy based on his system, his operating practices, and his setting practices. For instance, on systems
with wye connected loads, the ground units are most sensitive to this situation. On systems with delta
connected loads the negative sequence units are most sensitive to this situation. It may not be necessary
to block the instantaneous units if their settings prevent them from tripping for a switching imbalance.
To maintain proper coordination, the logic of the feeder relays may be interconnected with the upstream bus
relay to block the equivalent ground and/or negative sequence function blocks in the upstream relay.

Setting Group Selection

The BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System provides multiple settings groups for adaptive relaying. The
preprogrammed logic schemes barely tap the flexibility that is available. The following examples illustrate
how the settings groups can be adapted for different conditions and how different setting groups can be used
to vary the system logic.
Example 1. Adapting the relay settings for different conditions
In overcurrent protection systems, the source conditions can have a major impact on sensitivity, coordination
intervals, and clearing times. Generally, the pickup and time dial settings are a compromise between a
normal condition and a worst case condition. Contact logic from the position of the source breakers can
select which settings group is active. To do this, assign input D0 or D1 to a contact sensing input. Set the
setting group selection mode at 2 for binary coded selection. If D0 is set, group 0 will be selected when the
input is off (binary code 00). Group 1 will be selected when the input is on (binary code 01). Similarly, if D1
is set, group 2 will be selected when the input is on (binary coded 10).
This logic is useful in a situation where two transformers feed a single bus or two busses have a bus tie
between them. The feeder and bus relays must be coordinated for the situation where only one source is
in service (bus tie open or one transformer out of service). However, when both sources are in service, such

8-62 Application BE1-851

as when the bus tie is closed, each bus relay sees only half of the current for a fault. This results in poor
sensitivity and slow clearing time for the bus relays.
Example 2. Adapting the logic in different setting groups
The logic in most of the preprogrammed logic schemes can be varied in each of the different setting groups.
This is accomplished by disabling functions by setting their primary settings at zero. It is also possible to
do more sophisticated modification of the logic in each of the different setting groups by using the active
setting group logic variables SG0, SG1, SG2, and SG3 in the BESTlogic expressions.

Output Contact Seal-In

Trip contact seal-in circuits have historically been provided with electro-mechanical relays. These seal-in
circuits consisted of a dc coil in series with the relay trip contact and a seal-in contact in parallel with the trip
contact. The seal-in feature serves several purposes for the EM relays. One is to provide mechanical
energy to drop the target. Second is to carry the dc tripping current from the induction disk contact which
may not have significant closing torque for a low resistance connection. The third is to prevent the relay
contact from dropping out until the current has been interupted by the 52a contacts in series with the trip coil.
If the tripping contact opens before the dc current is interrupted, the contact may be damaged. The first two
of these items are not an issue for solid state relays, but the third item is an issue.
To prevent the output relay contacts from opening prematurely, a 200 millisecond hold timer can be selected
with the SG-HOLDn=1 command. Refer to Section 3, Functional Description for more information on this
feature. If the protection engineer desires seal-in logic with feed back from the breaker position logic, he
can provid this logic by modifying the BESTlogic expression for the tripping output. To do this, use one of
the general purpose timers 62 or 162 and set it for mode 1 (Pickup/Dropout Timer). Set the timer logic so
that it is initiated by the breaker position input, and set the timer for two cycles pickup and two cycles
dropout. Then AND the timer output with the tripping outout and OR it into the expression for the tripping
output. The same can be done for the closing output. See Figure 8-13 for the seal-in logic diagram.

Oscillographic Recording of Breaker Closures and Opens

How do I program the relay to create an oscillographic record when the breaker closes or opens? Monitor
the circuit breaker status by connecting the 52b contacts to IN1. Set a general purpose timer (62) for mode
1 (pickup and dropout), initiated by not input one (/IN1) and no blocking, with T1 equal to 0.015 seconds,
and T2 equal to 0.015 seconds (SL-62=1,/IN1,0 and S<#>-62=0.015,0.015). Program a virtual output
(VO10) to be true (high) when the input to IN1 is false and the 62 output is false or when the IN1 input is true
and the 62 output is true (VO10=/IN1*/62+IN1*62). Set the SG-TRIGGER command for a logic trigger when
VO10 is true (SG-TRIGGER=<TRIP trigger>,<PICKUP trigger>,VO10).

Here is the scenario. The breaker has been open for awhile, therefore IN1 input is true, and 62 output is
false. When the breaker closes, the IN1 input becomes false and because the 62 output is false, virtual
output 10 goes true for the duration of T1 (15 milliseconds). After the T1 time delay, the 62 output goes
true and remains true until the initiate input (IN1) goes false for the duration of T2. Virtual output 10 was
true for the 15 milliseconds time delay of T1 and triggered the oscillographic record when the breaker
closed.

Before the breaker opens, IN1 is false and the 62 output is true. When the breaker opens, IN1 becomes
true longer than time delay T2. During time T2, virtual output 10 is true because both IN1 and the 62
output are true. This time, an oscillographic record is triggered because the circuit breaker opened.

BE1-851 Application 8-63

 + +

52b

+ VO6
IN1 INI 62 VO1 52TC OUTPUT
OPTO 62 OUT1
LOGIC
BLK
TRIPPING
LOGIC

VO7
VO2 52CC OUTPUT OUT2
LOGIC

CLOSING
LOGIC
52a 52b

52TC 52CC

D2590-10
- - 03-23-98

Figure 8-19. Output Seal-In Logic Diagram

NOTE
This example is based on FEEDER_2, _3, or _4 preprogrammed logic schemes.

Example 1.
Turn off the hold timer for output 1: SG-HOLD1=0; SG-HOLD2=0
Set the timer logic: SL-62=1,IN1,0
Set the pickup and dropout times: S#-62=2c,2c
Set the output logic: VO1=101T+BFPU+VO11+VO6*/62
VO2=101C+79C+VO7*62
VO6=VO1*/62
VO7=VO2*62

8-64 Application BE1-851

SECTION 9 • SECURITY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 9 • SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
GS-PW Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Tables
Table 9-1. Password Protection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

BE1-851 User Interface and Security i

SECTION 9 • SECURITY

GENERAL
This section describes security in the form of multilevel password protection, along with the information
required for protecting specific function groups and user interface components against unauthorized access.
Passwords provide access security for three distinct functional access areas: Settings, Reports, and Control.
Each functional area can be assigned a unique password or one password can be assigned to multiple
areas. A global password is used to access all three of the functional areas. BE1-851 passwords are not
case sensitive; either lowercase or uppercase letters may be entered. Password security only limits write
operations; passwords are never required to read information from any area.
Additional security is provided by controlling the functional areas that can be accessed from a particular
communication port. For example, security can be configured so that access to Control commands from the
rear RS-232 port (COM1) is denied. Then, an attempt to issue a Control command through COM1 will cause
the relay to respond with an ACCESS DENIED and/or INVALID PASSWORD message. This will occur
whether a valid password is entered or not. When configuring communication port access areas, you should
be aware that the front RS-232 port (COM0) and the front panel HMI are treated as the same port.
The communication ports and password parameters act as a two-level control to limit changes. For a
command to be accepted, the entered password must be correct and the command must be entered through
a valid port. Only one password can be active at one time for any area or port. For example, if a user gains
access at COM1, then users at other areas (COM0, front panel HMI, and COM2) won’t be able to gain
access until the user at COM1 uses the EXIT command to release access control.
If a port holding access privileges, sees no activity (command entered or HMI key pressed) for approximately
five minutes, access privileges and any pending changes will be lost. This feature ensures that password
protection can’t be accidentally left in a state where access privileges are enabled for one area and other
areas locked out for an indefinite period.
If password protection is disabled, then entering ACCESS= followed by no password or any alphanumeric
character string will obtain access to the unprotected area(s).

Setting Up Password Protection

Only one password can be active at a time for any area or port. If a user at COM1 has password access,
then users at other areas (COM0 and COM2) cannot obtain access until control is released at COM1 by
executing an EXIT command.
If a port holding access privileges sees no activity (command entered or Edit key pressed) for approximately
five minutes, then access privileges and any pending changes will be lost. This ensures that password
protection won’t be left in a state with access privileges enabled and other areas locked out for an indefinite
period.
Password protection is configured for each access area port and communication port with the GS-PW
command. Password protection settings are summarized in Table 1-1.
Table 9-1. Password Protection Settings
Setting Range/Purpose

User defined alphanumeric string with a maximum of 8 characters

password
A setting of 0 disables password protection.

0 = Front RS-232 port Multiple ports may be selected by using

com
1 = Rear RS-232 port a slash (/) between each port
ports
2 = Rear RS-485 port designator.

BE1-851 Security 9-1

GS-PW Command
Purpose: Reads or sets passwords, password access areas, and password access ports.
Syntax: GS-PW[ <t>[= <password>, <com ports(0/1/2)>]]
Comments: Global password access is required to change password settings.
t=C - provides write access to Control commands, G - provides Global write access to all
commands, R - provides write access to Report commands, S - provides write access to
Setting commands

Example1. Read the current passwords, assuming that the current privilege level G password has
already been entered with the ACCESS command.
>GS-PW
GS-PWG=G,0/1/2; GS-PWS=S,0/1/2; GS-PWC=C,0/1/2; GS-PWR=R,0/1/2
Example2. Program password S to be ABC and allow it to be accepted at the front panel HMI, the front
panel RS-232 port, and the rear RS-232 port. Program password R to be ABC and allow it
to be accepted at the front panel HMI and at the front RS-232 port.
>GS-PWS=ABC,0/1; GS-PWR=ABC,0

With these settings, if ACCESS=ABC is entered at the front RS-232 port (COM0), the relay
responds with ACCESS GRANTED: SETTING AND REPORT. If ACCESS=ABC is entered
at the rear RS-232 port (COM1), the relay responds with ACCESS GRANTED: SETTING.
Example3. Limit Global access to the front panel by assigning password ABC to it.
>GS-PWG=ABC,0
Example4. Limit Control operations to the RS-485 port (COM2) but don’t require a password.
>GS-PWC=0,2

9-2 Security BE1-851

SECTION 10  HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 10  HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Automatic HMI Display Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
HMI OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Entering Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Performing Control Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Resetting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Entering Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Automatic Display Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Figures
Figure 10-1. BE1-851 Front Panel HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Figure 10-2. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Report Status Branch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Figure 10-3. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Control And Metering Branches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Figure 10-4. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Reports Branch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Figure 10-5. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Protection Logic Branch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Figure 10-6. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Protection Logic Branch) for Sensing Input Type G Relays . . . . 10-6
Figure 10-7. BE1-851 Menu Tree (General Settings Branch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Figure 10-8. Virtual Control Switch 143 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Tables
Table 10-1. Automatic Screen Display Priority Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Table 10-2. Figure 4-7 Call-out Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Table 10-3. SG-SCREEN Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Table 10-4. BE1-851 Screen Numbers and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Table 10-5. Display Scrolling Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface i

SECTION 10  HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE

GENERAL
This section provides a description of the BE1-851 human machine interface and illustrates the menu tree.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

Figure 10-1 shows the front panel human-machine interface (HMI) for a BE1-851 Overcurrent Relay in an
H1 Case configuration. Refer to the callouts below Figure 10-1. F1 and S1 style relays have the same
controls and indicators with different layouts.

Figure 10-1. BE1-851 Front Panel HMI

Locator Description
A Two line by 16 character LCD display with backlighting. Primary source for receiving
information from the relay or when locally programming settings to the relay. Displays
active logic scheme name, targets, metering values, demand values, communications
parameters, diagnostic information, and the menu tree steps or branches.
B Power LED. When this LED is ON, indicates operating power is applied to the relay.
C Relay Trouble LED. When this LED is ON, indicates that the relay is off-line due to
start-up condition or a relay failure alarm.. Refer to Section 3 for a compete description
of the relay failure alarm diagnostics.
D Minor Alarm LED. When this LED is ON, indicates a minor alarm status. .. Refer to
Section 3 for a compete description of the Minor Alarms.
E Major Alarm LED. When this LED is ON, indicates a major alarm status.. Refer to
Section 3 for a compete description of the Major Alarms.
F Trip LED. When this LED is flashing ON, indicates that a protective element is picked
up. When this LED is ON continuously, indicates that a trip output is closed. The LED is
sealed-in if a protective trip has occurred and there are targets being displayed.

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-1

 Locator Description
G Communications Port 0. RS-232 serial communications port. A computer terminal or
PC running a terminal emulation program such as Windows( Terminal can be connected
to this port so that the user may send commands to the relay or receive reports from the
relay. Communication with the relay uses a simple ASCII command language.
H Reset pushbutton switch. Resets report data including: sealed-in Trip targets, Trip LED,
peak demand currents, and alarms.
I Scrolling pushbuttons (keys). Scrolls UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT through the menu tree or
when in the Edit mode, the LEFT/RIGHT scrolling pushbuttons select the variable to
change and the UP/DOWN scrolling pushbuttons change the variable.
J Edit pushbutton switch. Enables settings changes. When the Edit pushbutton is first
pushed, an LED on the pushbutton turns ON to indicate the edit mode is active. When
changes are complete (using the scrolling pushbuttons) and the Edit pushbutton is
pushed again, the LED turns OFF indicating that the changes are saved. If changes are
not completed and saved within five minutes, the edit mode is exited without saving
changes.
K Identification plate showing sensing input current range, power supply type, and serial
number.

Menu Tree
The menu tree has six branches. These branches are:
1. REPORT STATUS. Display and resetting of general status information such as targets, alarms,
recloser status, etc.
2. CONTROL. Operation of control functions such as controlling virtual switches, selection of
active setting group, etc.
3. METERING. Display of real time metering values.
4. REPORTS. Display and resetting of report information such as time and date, demand
registers, breaker duty statistics, etc.
5. PROTECTION LOGIC. Display and setting of protective function setting parameters such as
pickups, time delays, etc.
6. GENERAL SETTINGS. Display and setting of non protective function setting parameters such
as communication,
Each screen in the menu tree is numbered in the upper left hand corner of the screen. This number
indicates the current branch and level in the menu tree structure so that you do not loose track of where you
are when you have left the top level of the menu tree. You scroll through each level of the menu tree by
using the right and left scrolling keys. To go to a level of greater detail, you use the down scrolling key.
Each time you go to a lower level in the menu tree, another number is added to the screen number
separated by a period. Figures 10-2 through 10-6, illustrate all branches in the menu tree.

10-2 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

 1 REPORT STATUS

*^ *^
1.1 RECLOSER 1.2 TARGETS 1.3 ALARMS 1.4 SCREEN 1.5 OPERATIONAL
RESET YES xxxx SCROLL LIST STATUS

*
D2557-02 1.3.1 xxxxxxxxx
11-12-99 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

1.2.1 TARGETS 1.2.2 TARGETS

150TABC, 150TN 51ABC, 51N ETC.

FAULT IA10.4K FAULT FLTDATE 01/01/99

IB10.4K IC10.4K IN10.4K I010.4K TIME 00:05:05:324

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
1.5.1 IN 1234 1.5.2 OUT A12345 1.5.3 A12345 1.5.4 x43 0123 1.5.5 ACTIVE 1.5.6 BREAKER
xxxx xxxxxx CO-OUT xxxxxx xxxx GROUP x xxxxxxxxx

Figure 10-2. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Report Status Branch)

TO/FROM 1 REPORT
STATUS
3 METERING
2 CONTROL TO/FROM 4 REPORTS

2.1 43 AUX 2.2 BKR CONTROL 2.3 SETTING 2.4 OUTPUT

SWITCHES SWITCH GROUP CONTROL CONTROL OVERRIDE

^ ^ ^
2.2.1 BKR CONTROL 2.3.1 SET GROUP 2.4.1 OUT A12345
TRIP -> CLOSE LOGIC OVERRIDE x OVERRIDE xxxxxx

^ ^ ^ ^
2.1.1 xxxxxxxxxx 2.1.2 xxxxxxxxxx 2.1.3 xxxxxxxxxx 2.1.4 xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx xx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xx xxxxxxx

^ ^
D2557-03 3.1 IAxxxxu 3.2
04-10-97 IBxxxxu ICxxxxu INxxxxu IQxxxxu

Figure 10-3. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Control And Metering Branches)

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-3

 TO/FROM 3 METERING

4 REPORTS
TO/FROM 5 PROTECTION LOGIC

^ ^ ^
4.1 FAULT REPORT 4.2 EVENT REPORT 4.3 BREAKER 4.4 DEMAND 4.5 TIMExx:xx:xx 4.6 MDL: BE1-851
NEW FLTS: xxx NEW EVENTS: xxx REPORTS REPORTS DATEmm/dd/yy VER: xx.xx

^ ^
4.3.1 BKR OPCNTR 4.3.2 BKR DUTY
xxxxx A xxxB xxxC xxx

4.4.1 TODAY'S 4.4.2YESTERDAY'S 4.4.3 PEAK

PEAK PEAK SINCE RESET

*^ *^ *^ *^ *^
4.4.3.1 PIA 4.4.3.2 PIB 4.4.3.3 PIC 4.4.3.4 PIN 4.4.3.5 PIQ
xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd

4.4.2.1 YIA 4.4.2.2 YIB 4.4.2.3 YIC 4.4.2.4 YIN 4.4.2.5 YIQ
xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd

^ ^ ^ ^ ^
4.4.1.1 TIA 4.4.1.2 TIB 4.4.1.3 TIC 4.4.1.4 TIN 4.4.1.5 TIQ D2557-04
xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd xxxxuhh:mm mm/dd 03-17-97

Figure 10-4. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Reports Branch)

10-4 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

 Fig
TO/FROM
4 REPORTS TO/FROM 6 GENERAL SETTINGS

BE1-851
5 PROTECTION
LOGIC xxxxxxxxxx

5.1 SETTING 5.2 SETTING 5.3 SETTING 5.4 SETTING 5.5 GLOBAL
GROUP 0 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 SETTINGS

5.5.1 50BF
SETTINGS

SIMILAR TO SETTING GROUP 0

5.5.1.1 50BF
TD:xxxu

5.1.1 50T 5.1.2 51 5.1.3 62 5.1.4 79

SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS

5.1.4.1 79 5.1.4.2 79 5.1.4.3 79 5.1.4.4 79 5.1.4.5 79

TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu TD3:xxxuTD4:xxxu TDR:xxxuTDF:xxxu TDM:xxxu SCB:xxxx

5.1.3.1 62 5.1.3.2 162

TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu

Human-Machine Interface
5.1.2.1 51P 5.1.2.2 51N 5.1.2.3 51Q
PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx

5.1.1.1 50TP 5.1.1.2 50TN 5.1.1.3 50TQ 5.1.1.4 150TP 5.1.1.5 150TN 5.1.1.6 150TQ
PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu
D2557-06
03-18-97

5. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Protection Logic Branch) for Sensing Input Type H Relays
ure 10-

10-5
10-6
TO/FROM
4 REPORTS TO/FROM 6 GENERAL SETTINGS
5 PROTECTION
LOGIC xxxxxxxxxx

5.1 SETTING 5.2 SETTING 5.3 SETTING 5.4 SETTING 5.5 GLOBAL
GROUP 0 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 SETTINGS

5.5.1 50BF
SETTINGS

SIMILAR TO SETTING GROUP 0

5.5.1.1 50BF
TD:xxxu

5.1.1 50T 5.1.2 51 5.1.3 62 5.1.4 79

SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS

5.1.4.1 79 5.1.4.2 79 5.1.4.3 79 5.1.4.4 79 5.1.4.5 79

TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu TD3:xxxuTD4:xxxu TDR:xxxuTDF:xxxu TDM:xxxu SCB:xxxx

Human-Machine Interface
5.1.3.1 62 5.1.3.2 162
TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu TD1:xxxuTD2:xxxu

5.1.2.1 51P 5.1.2.2 51N 5.1.2.3 51Q

PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx PUxxxxTDxxxCVxxx

5.1.1.1 50TP 5.1.1.2 50TN 5.1.1.3 150TP 5.1.1.4 150TN 5.1.1.5 250TN 5.1.1.6 350TN
PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu PUxxxx TDxxxu
D2875-20
03-08-00

Figure 10-6. BE1-851 Menu Tree (Protection Logic Branch) for Sensing Input Type G Relays

BE1-851
 6 GENERAL
TO/FROM 5 PROTECTION LOGIC
SETTINGS

6.1 COM SETTINGS 6.2 LCD CONTRAST 6.3 POWER

x SYSTEM SETTING

6.1.1 COMO F-232 6.1.2 COM1 R-232 6.1.3 COM2 R-485

BAUDxxxx BAUDxxxxADRxxxxx BAUDxxxxADRxxxxx

D2557-07
04-10-97
6.3.1 CT RATIO 6.3.2 FREQUENCY 6.3.3 PHASE ROT
B xxxxx N xxxxx xx x

Figure 10-7. BE1-851 Menu Tree (General Settings Branch)

Automatic HMI Display Priorities

If no front panel scrolling key has been pressed for approximately five minutes, the relay automatically
switches to and displays the highest priority REPORT STATUS menu screen. In a typical application, the
user would return to the relay and prefer to see the data that is of the most interest already on the screen.
The automatic screen display follows the priority logic described in Table 4-3. For example, if a trip has
occurred, the target display screen is the highest priority and will be displayed automatically.

Table 10-1. Automatic Screen Display Priority Status

Priority Priority Logic State Screen Displayed Data

1 Recloser (79) active 1.1 Recloser Status

2 Targets active 1.2.x Scrolling display of Target Elements and

Fault Currents

3 Alarms Active 1.3.x Scrolling display of Active Alarms

4 Scrolling Screens 1.4.x Scrolling display of user screens

active programmed with the SG-SCREEN
command

5 Scrolling screens 1.2 Default Target screen showing TARGETS

disabled NONE

If there are no targets or alarms, then the relay will automatically scroll through the user programmable
scroll list (there is a scrolling display of up to 16 screens). See Section 9, User Interface And Security
Setup for details on setting the automatic scroll list.
When the display is scrolling through the programmed scroll list, you can freeze the display and manually
scroll through the scroll list. Pressing the RIGHT or LEFT scroll pushbutton will freeze the display.
Repeatedly pressing the RIGHT scroll pushbutton will progress through the scroll list in ascending order.
Repeatedly pressing the LEFT scroll pushbutton will progress through the scroll list in descending order.

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-7

Pressing the UP scroll pushbutton will leave the automatic scroll list and place you in the menu tree at
screen 1.3, STAT\SCREENS.

Once the user has taken manual control of the display by pressing any of the scrolling pushbuttons,
automatic priority has been disabled until the display times out. Thus, if a trip or alarm occurs during this
time, the trip or alarm LED will light up, but the display will not jump to the appropriate screen. It will be
necessary to manually scroll to the target or alarm screen to see this data and reset it.

The HMI can be returned to automatic priority immediately without waiting for the timer to time out by
scrolling to screen 1.3, STAT\SCREENS and pressing the DOWN scroll pushbutton to return to the
automatic scroll list.

HMI OPERATIONS
The following paragraphs describe how the HMI is used to set and control relay functions.

Entering Settings
Settings for protection functions can be edited at menu branch 5, PROTECTION LOGIC of the HMI LCD.
Settings for general and reporting functions can be edited from menu branch 6, GENERAL SETTINGS. To
edit a setting using the manual scrolling pushbuttons, perform the following procedures.
1. Scroll to the screen that displays the function to be edited.
2. Press the EDIT pushbutton to gain access. If password security has been initiated for settings, you
will be prompted to enter the appropriate password. See the paragraphs, Entering Passwords, for
details on entering passwords from the HMI. Once access has been gained, the EDIT LED will be
lighted and a cursor will appear in the first settings field on the screen.
3. Press the UP or DOWN scrolling key to select the desired setting. Some settings require entering a
number one character at a time. For example, to enter a 51 pickup as 7.3 amps, you would press
the UP pushbutton until the 7 is showing. Then, press the RIGHT pushbutton to move the cursor
over and press the UP pushbutton until the . is showing. Then, press the RIGHT pushbutton to
move the cursor over and press the UP pushbutton until the 3 is showing. Other settings require
scrolling through a list of selections. For example, you would move the cursor over to the CRV field
and then scroll through a list of available TCC curves.
4. Once all of the settings on the screen have been entered, press the EDIT pushbutton a second time
and the settings will be validated. If the settings are in range, the screen will flash CHANGES
SAVED, and the EDIT LED will go out. If you want to abort the edit session without changing any
settings, press the RESET pushbutton before you press the edit pushbutton the second time. The
screen will flash CHANGES LOST and the EDIT LED will go out.

Performing Control Operations

Control operations can be executed at menu branch 2,

CONTROL of the HMI LCD. These functions allow you
to control the state of virtual switches, override logic
and control the active setting group, and override the
logic and control the state of output contacts. All of
these functions work similarly to the process of entering
settings in that you press the EDIT pushbutton, use the
UP and DOWN scroll pushbuttons to select the desired
state, and press the EDIT pushbutton for the action to
be executed.
Figure 10-8 shows virtual switch 143 as an example of
a virtual switch screen. See Section 4, Protection And
Figure 10-8. Virtual Control Switch 143 Screen

10-8 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

Control Functions for more details on the x43 and 101 functions. Table 10-2 describes each of the call-outs
shown on Figure10-7. The user programmable label for this switch has been set to RCL_DISABL. The
TRUE (closed) state label has been set to DISABLD. And, the FALSE (open) state label has been set to
ENABLED. The logical mode for this application would be set to Mode 2 (On/Off switch).

Table 10-2. Figure 4-7 Call-out Descriptions

Locator Description

A Screen number. This number eases navigation by indicating the current branch and level
in the menu tree structure.

B User selectable label (meaningful name) for specific virtual switches. The switch 143
identification label is set to RCL_DISABL.

C User selectable label for the closed (1) state for virtual switch 143. The switch 143 closed
label is set to DISABLD.

D Arrow icon indicates the current switch position (status). In Figure 10-8, the current status
is the open state which is labeled ENABLD.

E User selectable label for the open (0) state for virtual switch 143. The switch 143 open
label is set to ENABLED.

To operate the switch, you would use the following procedure.

1. Using the manual scrolling pushbuttons, scroll to screen 2.1.x (43 AUX SWITCHES). Or, if the
screen has been placed in the automatic scroll list, simply wait for it to appear and press the RIGHT
or LEFT scroll pushbutton to freeze the display.
2. Press the EDIT pushbutton to gain access. If password security has been initiated for control
functions, you will be prompted to enter the appropriate password. See the following subsection
Entering Passwords for details on entering passwords for details on entering passwords at the HMI.
Once access is gained to the control function, the EDIT LED will light..
3. Press the UP or DOWN scrolling key to select the new state (as indicated by the arrow) that you
wish to place the switch in. The “P” selection will pulse the state of the switch from its present state
to the opposite state for approximately 200mSec. The allowable states are dependent upon the
logic mode setting for the switch. If the switch is set to Mode 1 (On/Off/Pulse), the “P” (pulse)
selection will give an “INVALID PARAMETER” error. If it set to Mode 3 (Off/Momentary On),
selecting one of the two state will give an “INVALID PARAMETER” ERROR.
4. Press the EDIT pushbutton a second time and the switch will change to the selected position, the
screen will flash CHANGES SAVED, and the EDIT LED will go out. If you want to abort the editing
session without changing any controls, press the RESET pushbutton before you press the EDIT
pushbutton the second time. The screen will flash CHANGES LOST and the EDIT LED will go out.

Resetting Functions
The reset pushbutton is context sensitive. Its function is dependent upon the screen that is presently being
displayed. For example, pressing the reset key when the demand screen is displayed will reset the
demands but it will not reset the alarms, etc. It is necessary to scroll through the menu tree to the alarm
screen to reset an alarm. You are not prompted for a password when using the reset key.
There are two BESTlogic variables associated with the HMI reset pushbutton. Logic variable TRSTKEY
becomes TRUE when the reset pushbutton is pressed while the target screen is displayed. Logic variable
ARSTKEY becomes true when the reset pushbutton is pressed while the alarm screen is displayed. See
Section 8, Applications, Application Tips for examples on the use of these variables.

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-9

Entering Passwords
If password security has been initiated for a function, the HMI will prompt you to enter a password when the
EDIT pushbutton is pressed. To gain access, you must enter the appropriate password. A field of eight
asterisks appears with the cursor located under the leftmost character position. You can enter passwords
by performing the following procedures.
1. Press the UP or DOWN scrolling pushbuttons until the proper first character of the password
appears. Pressing UP scrolls through the alphabet and then the numbers in ascending order.
Pressing DOWN scrolls through the numbers and then the alphabet in descending order.
2. Press the RIGHT scrolling pushbutton to move the cursor to the next character of the password and
select the appropriate character.
3. Continue the process until the entire password has been spelled out. If the password is less than
eight characters, leave the remaining asterisks in place instead of entering blanks.
4. Press the EDIT pushbutton to enter the password. If the proper password has been entered, the
screen will flash ACCESS GRANTED. If an incorrect password has been entered, the screen will
flash ACCESS DENIED, and the EDIT LED will go out.
5. Once you gain access, it remains in affect for five minutes. As long as you continue to press the edit
key for a function for which you have gained access, the five minute timer will be refreshed and you
will not be prompted for a password.

Automatic Display Scrolling

When the recloser is inactive, no targets or alarms exist, and no HMI keys have been pressed for five
minutes, the LCD automatically scrolls through a maximum of 16 user-programmable screens. The user can
select preferred display screens and designate the order in which they are scrolled. Each screen is displayed
in turn for four to five seconds. When the last screen of the scrolling list is displayed, the scrolling sequence
restarts. Automatic display scrolling is defined with the SG-SCREEN command.
Table 10-3. SG-SCREEN Command Settings
Setting Default Purpos/Range

SG-SCREEN1 4.5 To select the preferred display

order of HMI screens from 1
SG-SCREEN2 1.5.6 through 16. See Table 9-2 for a
list of screens and their default
SG-SCREEN3 4.3.1
settings.
SG-SCREEN4 1.1

SG-SCREEN5 3.1

SG-SCREEN6 3.2

SG-SCREEN7 4.4

SG-SCREEN8 4.4.3

SG-SCREEN9 4.4.3.1

SG-SCREEN10 4.4.3.2

SG-SCREEN11 4.4.3.3

SG-SCREEN12 4.4.3.4

SG-SCREEN13 4.4.3.5

SG-SCREEN14 0

SG-SCREEN15 0

SG-SCREEN16 0

10-10 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

SG-SCREEN Command
Purpose: Reads or programs the display scrolling settings.
Syntax: SG-SCREEN[n][=<default screen number>]
Comments: n = 1 to 16, corresponding to the scrolling order of 1 to 16
default screen number = number of menu screen to display. Screen numbers are located in
the upper lefthand corner of each display. A setting of 0 will skip the screen in the
sequence. If all <default screen number> parameters equal 0, display scrolling is disabled.

Example Program a display scrolling sequence that shows screens in the following order: three-
phase current (screen 3.4), neutral current (screen 3.5), and neutral and negative sequence
current (screen 3.6).
>SG-SCREEN1=3.4
>SG-SCREEN2=3.5
>SG-SCREEN3=3.6
Automatic display scrolling is interrupted when an HMI key is pressed, the recloser is activated, or a target
or alarm is triggered.
Pressing an HMI key during display scrolling causes scrolling to stop at the screen displayed when the key
was pressed.
Table 10-4. BE1-851 Screen Numbers and Descriptions

Screen Screen
Number Description Number Description

1 Report Status 4.4.3.5 PIQ

1.1 Recloser Reset 5 Protection Logic

1.2 Targets 5.1 Setting Group 0

1.3 Alarms 5.2 Setting Group 1

1.4 Screen Scroll list 5.3 Setting Group 2

1.5.3 CO- OUT A12345 5.4 Setting Group 3

1.5.4 X43 5.5 Global Settings

1.5.5 Active Group X 5.5.1 50BF Setting

1.5.6 Breaker 5.5.1.1 50 BF TD

2 Control 5.1.1 50 T Settings

2.1 43 aux switches 5.1.2 51 Settings

2.2 Breaker Control Trip Close 5.1.3 62 Settings

2.3 Setting Group Control 5.1.4 79 Settings

2.4 Output Control Overide 5.1.1.1 50TP

3 Metering 5.1.1.2 50 TN

3.1 3 Phase Current 5.1.1.3 50 TQ (150TP on G type relays)

3.2 Neutral and Negative Sequence 5.1.1.4 150 TP (150TN on G type relays)
Current

4 Reports 5.1.1.5 150 TN (250TN on G type relays)

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-11

 4.1 Fault Report 5.1.1.6 150 TQ (350TN on G type relays)

4.2 Event Report 5.1.2.1 51P

4.3 Breaker Report 5.1.2.2 51N

4.4 Demand Report 5.1.2.3 51Q (151N on G type relays)

4.5 Time and Date 5.1.3.1 62

4.6 Model and Version 5.1.3.2 162

4.3.1 Breaker operations Counter 5.1.4.1 79

4.3.2 Breaker Duty 5.1.4.2 79

4.4.1 Today’s Peak 5.1.4.3 79

4.4.2 Yesterday’s Peak 5.1.4.4 79

4.4.3 Peak Since Reset 5.1.4.5 79

4.4.1.1 TIA 6 General Settings

4.4.1.2 TIB 6.1 COM Settings

4.4.1.3 TIC 6.2 LCD Contrast

4.4.1.4 TN 6.3 Power System Setting

4.4.1.5 TQ 6.1.1 COM0 F-232

4.4.2.1 YIA 6.1.2 COM1 R-232

4.4.2.2 YIB 6.1.3 COM2 R485

4.4.2.3 YIC 6.3.1 CT RATIO

4.4.2.4 YIN 6.3.2 Frequency

4.4.2.5 YIQ 6.3.3 Phase ROT

4.4.3.1 PIA

4.4.3.2 PIB

4.4.3.3 PIC

10-12 Human-Machine Interface BE1-851

During scrolling, if the recloser is activated or a target or alarm is triggered, scrolling is stopped and the
REPORT STATUS screen with the highest priority is displayed. Screens are displayed using the priority logic
described in Table 10-5.
Table 10-5. Display Scrolling Priority
Priority Priority Logic State Screen Displayed Data
1 Recloser (79) active 1.1 Recloser status
Scrolling display of target
2 Targets active 1.2.x
elements and fault currents
3 Alarms active 1.3.x Scrolling display of active alarms
Scrolling display of screens in
4 Display scrolling active 1.4.x
the user defined scrolling list
Default target screen showing
5 Display scrolling disabled 1.2
TARGETS NONE

BE1-851 Human-Machine Interface 10-13

SECTION 11 • ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 11 • ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
RS-485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
RS-232 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Using the ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Human to Machine ASCII Command Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Command Text File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Embedding Comments into ASCII Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Miscellaneous Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Obtaining Help Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Changing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Reading All Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Reading Specific Groups of Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Reading Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
COMMAND SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Metering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Report Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Setting Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Alarm Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Breaker Monitoring and Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
General Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Programmable Logic Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
User Programmable Name Setting Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Protection Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Tables
Table 11-1. Communication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface i

SECTION 11 • ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE
INTRODUCTION
Relay and power system information can be retrieved from a remote location using the ASCII command
interface. The ASCII command interface is also used to enter settings, retrieve reports and metering
information, and perform control operations. A communication port on the relay front panel provides a
temporary, local interface for communication. Communication ports on the rear panel provide a permanent
communication interface.
Front and rear panel communication ports can be connected to computers, terminals, serial printers,
modems, and intermediate communication/control interfaces such as RS-232 serial multiplexors. BE1-851
communication protocols support ASCII and binary data transmissions. ASCII data is used to send and
receive human readable data and commands. Binary data is used for computer communication and
transmission of raw oscillographic fault data if available.
Modbus™ and other common protocols are also available. An instruction manual (9 2899 00 992) for using
Modbus™ protocol with the BE1-851 is available as well as instruction manual (9 2899 00 995) for using
DNP protocol. For information about other protocols, consult your Basler Electric Representative.

SERIAL PORT
Communication connections consist of two standard RS-232 ports, one RS-485 port, and an IRIG port. BE1-
851 communication protocol is compatible with readily available modem/terminal software. If required,
password protection provides security against unauthorized operation. Detailed information about making
communication connections is provided in Section 12, Installation.

RS-485 Port
RS-485 terminal block connections are located on the rear panel and designated COM 2. This port supports
half-duplex, multi-drop operation. Multi-drop (polled mode) operation is possible if a polling address is
programmed for the port.

RS-232 Ports
Two female RS-232 (DB-9) connectors are provided. One port is located on the front panel and is
designated COM 0. Another port is located on the rear panel and is designated COM 1. Both ports support
full-duplex operation. Polled operation is possible at the rear port using a simple RS-232 splitter if a polling
address is programmed for COM 1.

ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE

A computer terminal or PC running terminal emulation software can be used at any of the three serial ports
to send commands to the relay. Simple ASCII command language is used to communicate with the relay.
When the relay receives a command, it responds with the appropriate action. ASCII commands can be used
in human to machine interactions and in batch download type operations.
Command Structure
An ASCII command consists of a string made up of one or two letters followed by a hyphen and an object
name.
xy-object name
Where: x Specifies the general command function.
y Specifies the command subgroup.
object name Defines the specific object to which the command refers.

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-1

Examples of object names include 51N (neutral inverse time overcurrent function) and PIA (phase A peak
current demand register). A command string entered by itself is a read command. A command string
followed by an equal sign (=) and one or more parameters is a write command.
General command functions are organized into five major groups plus one group of miscellaneous
commands.

CONTROL (C): Control commands perform select-before-operate control actions such as circuit
breaker tripping and closing and active setting group changes. Subgroups include
Select (S) and Operate (O).
GLOBAL (G): One Global command performs operations that don’t fall into the other general groups.
The command for reading and changing passwords (GS-PW) is the only global
command available.
METERING (M): Commands in this group report all real-time metering values. No subgroup is used
with metering commands.
REPORTS (R): Reports commands read and reset reporting functions such as time and date, demand
registers, and breaker duty statistics. Subgroups include Alarms (A), Breaker
Monitoring (B), Demand Recording (D), Fault Summary Reporting (F), General
Information (G), Sequence of Events Recorder (S), and Oscillography (O).
SETTINGS (S): This group contains all of the setting parameters that govern relay function.
Subgroups include Setting Groups 0, 1, 2, and 3 (0, 1, 2, 3), Protection Settings (P) not
in setting groups, Alarm Settings (A), Breaker Monitor Settings (B), General Settings
(G), and Logic Settings (L).
MISCELLANEOUS: Miscellaneous commands include Access, Exit, and Help. Note that only the first letter
of these commands must be entered; entering the full command name is optional.

Using the ASCII Command Interface

Human to Machine ASCII Command Operations

Using ASCII commands, settings can be read and changed on a function by function basis. The mnemonic
format of the commands helps you interact with the relay. It isn’t necessary to remember all of the object
names. Most commands don’t require that you specify a complete object name. If the first two letters of a
command are entered, the relay will respond with all applicable object names.

ASCII Command Examples

1. Obtain a breaker operations count by entering RB (Report Breaker). The BE1-851 responds with the
operations counter value along with all other breaker report objects. If you know that the object name
for the breaker operations counter is OPCNTR, you can enter RB-OPCNTR and read only the number
of breaker operations.
Partial object names are also supported. This allows multiple objects to be read or reset at the same time.

2. Read all peak-since-reset demand current registers. Entering RD-PI (Report Demand - Peak Current
(I)) will return demand values and time stamps for phase A, B, C, Neutral, and Negative Sequence
current. To read only the Neutral demand value, the full object name (RD-PIN) is entered. Entering RD-
PI=0 resets all five of the peak-since-reset current demand registers.

Command Text File Operations

In command text file operations, an ASCII text file of commands is created and sent to the relay. For
example, the S command is used to retrieve a complete list of settings from the relay in ASCII command
format. This list of commands is captured, saved to a file, edited with any ASCII text editor, and then
uploaded to the relay. Because the number of relay settings is so large, loading settings with a text file is
the preferred method of setting the BE1-851.

11-2 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

Embedding Comments into ASCII Text Files
Adding comments to ASCII settings files is an easy way to organize and label your settings. A comment line
is started with two forward slashes (//) followed by the comment text. When the relay encounters // in a text
file, it ignores all following characters until the next carriage return or linefeed character.

Example of embedding comments in a settings file.

//Group0 is used during normal operation
S0-50TP=7.50,0m;S0-50TN=2.5,0m . . .
//Group1 is used during cold load pickup
S1-50TP=0,0m; S1-50TN=0,0m; S1-50TQ=0,0m

Miscellaneous Command Descriptions

Obtaining Help Information

The HELP (H) command provides general information on command syntax and functionality when the
manual is not available. Entering HELP or H provides information about using the HELP command. HELP1
or H1 returns a complete list of relay commands. Entering HELP <cmd>, where <cmd> is a specific
command, returns information about the use and format of the command along with an example of how the
command is used.

HELP Command
Purpose: Obtain help with command information.
Syntax: HELP[x/<cmd>]

Changing Settings
Access Command. Before making settings changes through a communication port, the ACCESS command
must be used to obtain programming access. Enter ACCESS=<password> to obtain access to change
settings associated with the password. Different passwords give the ability or access to perform different
operations. The relay will deny access if an invalid password is entered or if another user has already been
granted programming access through another serial port or at the front panel. Only one user can have
access at any one time.
Even if password protection is not used, it is still necessary to obtain access so that accidental changes are
prevented. If password protection is disabled, then ACCESS= will be accepted in place of a password. The
relay will respond with ACCESS GRANTED: GLOBAL if the command entered was received and executed.
The relay will respond with an error message and a ? if the command could not be executed.
The ACCESS (A) command and the EXIT (E) command are used to change relay settings, reset report
registers, and enable control commands through a serial port. These commands prevent changes from
being made concurrently from two areas. For example, a user cannot make changes through COM0 at the
same time a remote user is making changes through COM2.

ACCESS Command
Purpose: Reads or sets access level in order to change settings.
Syntax: ACCESS[=<password>]
Comments: The ACCESS command must be used before any changes to settings can be made. Available
ACCESS privileges are summarized in the following paragraphs.
READ-ONLY. This is the default access privilege when no passwords are active. Read-only access allows
you to read settings and reports but not make settings changes.
PRIVILEGE G: GLOBAL ACCESS. Global access is obtained by password G (PWG). Global access
permits entry of any command with no restrictions.
PRIVILEGE S: SETTING ACCESS. Setting access is obtained by password S (PWS). Setting access
allows changes to any settings.
BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-3
PRIVILEGE C: CONTROL ACCESS. Control access is obtained by password C (PWC). Control access
enables relay control operations.
PRIVILEGE R: REPORT ACCESS. Report access is obtained by password R (PWR). Report access
enables report operations to be performed.
An access privilege is obtained only when the appropriate password is entered. When a valid password is
entered, the relay responds with the access privilege provided by the password entered. If an invalid
password is entered, an error message is returned. If password protection is disabled in one or more
privileges, then entering any string will provide access to the unprotected privileges.

ACCESS Command Examples

1. A valid password is entered.
ACCESS=OPENUP
ACCESS GRANTED: GLOBAL
2. An invalid password is entered.
ACCESS=POENUP
ACCESS DENIED
3. The current access privilege is read.
ACCESS
ACCESS: GLOBAL

Exit Command. After changes are made, the new data is saved or discarded using the EXIT command.
Prior to saving or discarding any changes, you must confirm that you wish to exit the programming mode.
There are three exit options: Y (Yes), N (No), or C (Continue).

EXIT Command
Purpose: Exit the programming mode.
Syntax: EXIT (Note: Relay will prompt for verification.)
Comments: It’s important to make all programming changes before executing the EXIT command. This
prevents a partial or incomplete protection scheme from being implemented.
When access privileges are obtained, all programming changes are made to a temporary, scratchpad copy
of relay settings. These changes aren’t saved to nonvolatile memory and initiated until the EXIT command
is invoked and confirmed. After the EXIT command is entered, the relay prompts to confirm that the new
data should be saved. Three options, Y, N, or C, or available. Entering Y will save the data. If N is entered,
the relay will clear the changes and resume operating with the old settings. Entering C will abort the EXIT
command and allow programming to continue.

EXIT Command Example

Release programming privileges and save settings changes.
EXIT<CR>
SAVE CHANGES (Y/N/C)? Prompt to save Yes, No, or Continue
Y<CR> Confirmation to save changes
CHANGES SAVED Confirmation that changes were saved

Reading All Settings

All user programmable settings can be listed using the S command. This read-only command is useful for
documenting relay status during installation. The settings retrieved by the S command can be saved to a
standard text file and sent to another relay to be configured with the same settings. This type of settings
transfer takes less than one minute.

S Command
Purpose: Read all relay setting parameters.
Syntax: S
The S command returns the values of relay setting parameters in the same form that they are programmed.
It can be used at the end of a programming session to make a record of the relay settings. If saved in a file,
the report can be sent to another BE1-851 that will use the same settings. Because the report that is created

11-4 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

is a set of commands, sending the report to a different relay re-programs that relay with the settings
contained in the S report.

Reading Specific Groups of Settings

While the S command is useful for reading all relay settings, several commands are available to read specific
groups of settings.
Note: In the examples of this section, relay responses are printed in Courier typeface.

SA Command
Purpose: Read all alarm settings for Major and Minor alarms.
Syntax: SA

SA Command Example
Read all alarm settings.
>SA
SA-BKR1=0,0; SA-BKR2=0,0; SA-BKR3=0,0
SA-DIP=0.00; SA-DIN=0.00; SA-DIQ=0.00
SA-LGC=0
SA-MAJ=0
SA-MIN=0
SA-RESET=0

SB Command
Purpose: Read all breaker settings.
Syntax: SB

SB Command Example
Read all breaker settings.
>SB
SB-DUTY=0,0.000e+00
SB-LOGIC=/IN1

SG Command
Purpose: Read all general settings.
Syntax: SG

SG Command Example
Obtain a report of all general settings.
>SG
SG-CLK=M,24,0
SG-COM0=9600,A0,P0,R1,X1; SG-COM1=9600,A0,P0,R1,X1
SG-COM2=9600,A0,P0,R1,X0
SG-CTP=1; SG-CTN=1
SG-DIP=15; SG-DIN= 1; SG-DIQ= 1
SG-DSPP=F; SG-DSPN=F
SG-FREQ=60
SG-HOLDA=0; SG-HOLD1=1; SG-HOLD2=1; SG-HOLD3=0
SG-HOLD4=0; SG-HOLD5=1
SG-ID=BE1-851,SUBSTATION_1
SG-IN1= 4, 16; SG-IN2= 4, 16; SG-IN3= 4, 16; SG-IN4= 4, 16
SG-PHROT=1
SG-SCREEN1=4.5; SG-SCREEN2=1.5.6; SG-SCREEN3=4.3.1; SG-SCREEN4=1.1
SG-SCREEN5=3.1; SG-SCREEN6=3.2; SG-SCREEN7=4.4; SG-SCREEN8=4.4.3
SG-SCREEN9=4.4.3.1; SG-SCREEN10=4.4.3.2;SG-SCREEN11=4.4.3.3;SG-SCREEN12=4.4.3.4
SG-SCREEN13=4.4.3.5;SG-SCREEN14=0; SG-SCREEN15=0; SG-SCREEN16=0
SG-SGCON= 5
SG-TARG=51A/51B/51C/51N/51Q/150TA/150TB/150TC/150TN/150TQ/50TA/50TB/50TC/50TN/50
TQ/62/162/BF,0
SG-TRIGGER=BFT+VO11,BFPU+VO12,0

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-5

SN Command
Purpose: Read/Set user programmable names.
Syntax: SN[-<var>[=<name>,<TRUE label>,<FALSE label>]

SN Command Example
Read the programmed labels for the alarm output (OUTA).
>SN-VOA
SN-VOA=VOA_LBL,TRUE,FALSE

S<g> Command
Purpose: Read all protection settings.
Syntax: S<g>

S <g> Command Example

Obtain a list of settings for setting group 2.
>S2
S2-50TP=0.00, 0m; S2-50TN=0.00, 0m; S2-50TQ=0.00, 0m
S2-150TP=0.00, 0m; S2-150TN=0.00, 0m; S2-150TQ=0.00, 0m
S2-51P=0.00,0.0,V2; S2-51N=0.00,0.0,V2; S2-51Q=0.00,0.0,V2
S2-62= 0m, 0m
S2-162= 0m, 0m
S2-791= 0m; S2-792= 0m; S2-793= 0m; S2-794= 0m
S2-79R= 10s; S2-79F=1.0s; S2-79M= 60s
S2-79SCB=0
SP-79ZONE=0
SP-BF= 0m
SP-CURVE= 0.2663, 0.0339, 1.0000, 1.2969, 0.5000
SP-GROUP1= 0, 0, 0, 0,51P; SP-GROUP2= 0, 0, 0, 0,51P
SP-GROUP3= 0, 0, 0, 0,51P
Reading Logic Settings
The SL command is used to view the names of available logic schemes in memory. It also will return all of
the logic equations for a specific logic scheme.

SL Command
Purpose: Obtain setting logic information.
Syntax: SL[:<name>]
Comments: No password access is required to read settings.
Entering SL by itself returns all of the logic equations associated with the active logic scheme. Entering SL:
returns the names of all available logic schemes. Entering SL:<name> returns all logic equations and
settings for the named logic scheme.

SL Command Examples
1. Read the available logic schemes in memory.
USER, BASIC-OC, OC-W-79, OC-W-CTL, FDR-W-IL, BUS, BACKUP, NONE
2. Read all logic settings associated with the BACKUP logic scheme.
>SL-N:BACKUP
SL-50TP:1,0; SL-50TN:1,0; SL-50TQ:1,0
SL-150TP:1,0; SL-150TN:1,0; SL-150TQ:1,0
SL-51P:1,0; SL-51N:1,0; SL-51Q:1,0
SL-62:0,0,0
SL-162:0,0,0
SL-79:0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF:1,VO10,VO15
SL-GROUP:2,/IN2,0,0,0,0
SL-43:0
SL-143:0
SL-243:0
SL-343:2
SL-101:1

11-6 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

 SL-VOA:ALMMAJ
SL-VO1:101T+VO8+BFPU+VO11*VO15
SL-VO2:101C
SL-VO3:/IN2
SL-VO4:VO9*/VO15
SL-VO5:BFT
SL-VO6:0
SL-VO7:0
SL-VO8:51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9:50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10:VO11+150TPPU*IN3+150TNPU*IN3+150TQPU*IN3
SL-VO11:50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12:50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13:0
SL-VO14:0
SL-VO15:343+/IN4

ASCII Command Interface

The BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System has three independent communications ports for serial
communications. A computer terminal or PC running a terminal emulation program such as Windows®
Terminal can be connected to any of the three ports so that commands may be sent to the relay.
Communication with the relay uses a simple ASCII command language. When a command is entered
through a serial port, the relay responds with the appropriate action. The ASCII command language is
designed to be used in both human to machine interactions and in batch download type operations.
Operation of the ASCII commands is described in detail in Section 11, ASCII Command Interface.
The ASCII communication byte framing parameters are fixed at 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.
Additional ASCII command interface using the SG-COM command. These parameters are also settable
from the HMI from screen 6.1.x. There are several additional settings described in Table 9-4 to further
customize the ASCII communications. The additional parameters for Page Length, Reply Acknowledge, and
Software Handshaking are only settable from the ASCII command interface using the SG-COM command.

Table 11-1. Communication Settings

Parameter Description Range Default

300, 600, 1200, 2400,

baud baud rate 9600
4800, 9600, or 19K

address for polled A0 (disabled)

A A0
operation A1 to A65534

P0 (no page mode)

P page length P0
P1 to P40

reply acknowledgement R0 (disabled)

R R1
level R1 (enabled)

X1
Xon/Xoff (hardware X0 (disabled)
X (COM0,1)
handshaking) setting X1 (enabled)
X0 (COM2)

SG-COM Command
Purpose: Read/Set serial communication protocol.
Syntax: SG-COM[#[=<baud>,A<addr>,P<pglen>,R<reply ack>,X<XON ena>]]
Comments: Password access privilege G or S is required to change settings.
# = port number. (0 = front, 1 = rear RS-232, 2 = rear RS-485)
Example3. Program the front communication port for 1200 baud.
>SG-COM0 = 1200
Example4. Read the communication settings for all ports.
>SG-COM
SG-COM0=1200,A0,P24,R1,X1

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-7

 SG-COM1=9600,A0,P24,R1,X1
SG-COM2=19K,A156,P0,R1,X0
If the ‘A’ parameter is set at a nonzero value, the relay will ignore all commands that are not preceded by
the proper address number. If an address of 0 is programmed, the relay will respond with an error message
for any command preceded by an address. With polling enabled, a command preceded by 0 is treated as
a global command. All networked relays will execute the command, but no relay will respond to the
command. This avoids communication bus conflicts. The front panel communication port (COM0) is not
configured for polling, so an attempt to program a nonzero address will result in an error message.

COMMAND SUMMARY
Miscellaneous Commands

ACCESS Command
Purpose: Read/Set access level in order to change settings.
Syntax: ACCESS[=<password>]
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Miscellaneous Command Descriptions

EXIT Command
Purpose: Exit programming mode.
Syntax: EXIT Note: Relay will prompt for verification.
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Miscellaneous Command Descriptions

HELP Command
Purpose: Obtain help with command operation.
Syntax: HELP <cmd> or H <cmd> gives help with a command; H1 gives command list
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Miscellaneous Command Descriptions

Metering Commands

M Command
Purpose: Read all metered values.
Syntax: M
Reference: Section 11, Metering, Metering Command Descriptions

M-I Command
Purpose: Read metered current in primary unit.
Syntax: M-I[<phase>]
Reference: Section 11, Metering, Metering Command Descriptions
Report Commands

Report Commands

RA Command
Purpose: Report/Reset alarm information.
Syntax: RA[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Function

RA-MAJ Command
Purpose: Report/Reset major alarm information.
Syntax: RA-MAJ[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Function

RA-MIN Command
Purpose: Report/Reset minor alarm information.
Syntax: RA-MIN[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Function

11-8 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

RA-REL Command
Purpose: Report/Reset relay alarm information.
Syntax: RA-REL[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Function

RB Command
Purpose: Read breaker status.
Syntax: RB
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker Monitoring

RB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker contact duty log.
Syntax: RB-DUTY[<phase>[=%duty>]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker Monitoring

RB-OPCNTR Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker operation counter.
Syntax: RB-OPCNTR[=<#operations>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker Monitoring

RD Command
Purpose: Report all demand data.
Syntax: RD
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Demand Functions

RD-PI Command
Purpose: Read/Reset peak demand current.
Syntax: RD-PI[<p>[=0]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Demand Functions

RD-TI Command
Purpose: Report today’s demand current.
Syntax: RD-TI[<p>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Demand Functions

RD-YI Command
Purpose: Report yesterday’s demand current.
Syntax: RD-YI[<p>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Demand Functions

RE Command
Purpose: Report all energy data.
Syntax: RE
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting

RF Command
Purpose: Read/Reset fault report data.
Syntax: RF[-n/NEW][=0/TRIG]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

RG Command
Purpose: Report general information.
Syntax: RG
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Clock

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-9

RG-DATE Command
Purpose: Read/Set date.
Syntax: RG-DATE[=<M/D/Y>] or RG-DATE[=<D-M-Y>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Clock

RG-STAT Command
Purpose: Report relay status.
Syntax: RG-STAT
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting

RG-TARG Command
Purpose: Report/Reset target status.
Syntax: RG-TARG[=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

RG-TIME Command
Purpose: Report/Set time.
Syntax: RG-TIME[=hr:mn:sc] or RG-TIME[=hr:mn<f>sc]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Clock

RG-VER Command
Purpose: Read program version, model number, style number, and serial number.
Syntax: RG-VER
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Hardware and Software Version Reporting

RO Command
Purpose: Read oscillographic COMTRADE.DAT/.CFG fault report.
Syntax: RO-nA/B[#].CFG/DAT
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

RS Command
Purpose: Read/Reset sequence of events record data.
Syntax: RS[-n/Fn/ALM/IO/LGC/NEW][=0]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Sequence of Events Recorder

Setting Command

S Command
Purpose: Read all relay setting parameters.
Syntax: S
Comments: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

Alarm Setting Commands

SA Command
Purpose: Read all major and minor alarm settings.
Syntax: SA
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

SA-BKR Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker alarm settings.
Syntax: SA-BKR[n][=<mode>,<alarm limit>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Breaker Monitoring

11-10 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

SA-DI Command
Purpose: Read/Set demand alarm settings.
Syntax: SA-DI[p][=<alarm level>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Demand Functions

SA-LGC Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA-LGC[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . [<alarm num n>]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Alarms Function

SA-MAJ Command
Purpose: Read/Set major alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA-MAJ[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . [<alarm num n>]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Alarms Function

SA-MIN Command
Purpose: Read/Set minor alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA-MIN[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . [<alarm num n>]]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Alarms Function

SA-RESET Command
Purpose: Read/Set programmable alarms reset logic.
Syntax: SA-RESET[=<rst alm logic>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Alarms Function

Breaker Monitoring and Setting Commands

SB Command
Purpose: Read all breaker settings.
Syntax: SB
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Breaker Monitoring

SB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker contact duty.
Syntax: SB-DUTY[=<mode>,<DMAX>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Breaker Monitoring

SB-LOGIC Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker contact logic.
Syntax: SB-LOGIC[=<breaker close logic>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Breaker Monitoring

General Setting Commands

SG Command
Purpose: Read all general settings.
Syntax: SG
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

SG-CLK Command
Purpose: Read/Program format of time and date display.
Syntax: SG-CLK[=<date format(M/D)>,<time format(12/24)>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Clock

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-11

SG-COM Command
Purpose: Read/Set serial communication protocol.
Syntax: SG-COM[#[=<baud>,A<addr>,P<pglen>,R<reply ack>,X<XON ena>]]
Reference: Section 9, User Interface and Security, User Interface
Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Serial Port Settings and Connections

SG-CT Command
Purpose: Read/Set Phase/Neutral CT ratio.
Syntax: SG-CT[t][=<CTratio>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Current Inputs

SG-DI Command
Purpose: Read/Set P(IA/IB/IC/var/watt), N and Q demand interval.
Syntax: SG-DI[p][=<interval>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Demand Functions

SG-HOLD Command
Purpose: Read/Program output hold operation.
Syntax: SG-HOLD[n][=<1/0 hold ena>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Outputs

SG-ID Command
Purpose: Read/Set relay ID and station ID used in reports.
Syntax: SG-ID[=<relayID(up to 10 char)>,<StationID(up to 30 char)>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Relay Identifier Information

SG-IN Command
Purpose: Read/Set input recognition/debounce.
Syntax: SG-IN[#[=<r(ms)>,<db(ms)>]]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Contact Sensing Inputs

SG-PHROT Command
Purpose: Read/Set phase rotation setting.
Syntax: SG-PHROT[=<phase rotation>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Voltage Inputs

SG-SCREEN Command
Purpose: Read/Set default screen(s).
Syntax: SG-SCREEN[n][=<default screen number>]
Reference: Section 10, Human-Machine Interface, Front Panel Display

SG-SGCON Command
Purpose: Read/Set SGC output on time.
Syntax: SG-SGCON[=<time>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups

SG-TARG Command
Purpose: Report/Enable Target List and Reset Target Logic.
Syntax: SG-TARG[=<x/x/...x>,<rst TARG logic>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

SG-TRIGGER Command
Purpose: Read/Set trigger logic.
Syntax: SG-TRIGGER[n][=<TRIP trigger>,<PU trigger>,<LOGIC trigger>]
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting

11-12 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

Programmable Logic Setting Commands
SL Command
Purpose: Obtain setting logic information.
Syntax: SL[:<name>]
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

SL-50T Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for x50 function modules.
Syntax: SL-x50T[<p>[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

SL-51 Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for 51 function modules.
Syntax: SL-x51[<p>[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

SL-62 Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for 62 function modules.
Syntax: SL-<f>62[=<mode>,<INI logic>,<BLK logic>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, General Purpose Logic Timers (62/162)

SL-79 Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for 79 function
Syntax: SL-79[=<mode,<RI logic>,<STATUS logic>,<WAIT logic>,<LOCKOUT logic>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Reclosing

SL-BF Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for breaker failure function modules.
Syntax: SL-BF[<p>][=<mode>,<INI logic>,<BLK logic>]]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Breaker Failure Protection

SL-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for setting group module.
Syntax: SL-GROUP[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups

SL-N Command
Purpose: Read, set, or copy the name of the custom logic.
Syntax: SL-N[=<name>]
Reference: Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Logic Schemes

SL-VO Command
Purpose: Read/Set output logic.
Syntax: SL-VO[#[=<Boolean equation>]]
Reference: Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Working With Programmable Logic

User Programmable Name Setting Command

SN Command
Purpose: Read/Set user programmable names.
Syntax: SN[-<var>[=<name>,<TRUE label>,<FALSE label>]
Reference: Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, User Input and Output Logic Variable Names

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-13

Protection Setting Commands

S<g> Command
Purpose: Read all protection settings.
Syntax: S<g>
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

S<g>-50T Command
Purpose: Read/Set 50TN pickup level and time delay.
Syntax: S<g>-<f>50T[<p>][=<pu(A)>,<td(m)>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

S<g>-51 Command
Purpose: Read/Set 51 pickup level, time delay, and curve.
Syntax: S<g>-51[<p>][=<pu(A)>,<td(m)>,<crv>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

S<g>-62 Command
Purpose: Read/Set 62 time delay.
Syntax: S<g>-<f>62[=<t1>,<t2>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, General Purpose Logic Timers (62/162)

S<g>-79 Command
Purpose: Read/Set 79 time delay.
Syntax: S<g>-79[#][=<td>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Reclosing

S<g>-79SCB Command
Purpose: Read/Set 79 Sequence Controlled Block Output.
Syntax: S<g>-79SCB[=<step list>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Reclosing

SP-BF Command
Purpose: Read/Set the breaker failure timer setting.
Syntax: SP-BF[=<time>[m/s/c]]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Breaker Failure Protection

SP-CURVE Command
Purpose: Read/Set the user programmable 51 curve parameters.
Syntax: SP-CURVE[=<A>,<B>,<C>,<N>,<R>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection

SP-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/Program auxiliary setting group auto operation.
Syntax: SP-GROUP<g>=[<sw(min)>,<sw level%>,<reset(min)>,<ret level%>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups

SP-79ZONE Command
Purpose: Read/Set 79 zone sequence logic.
Syntax: SP-79ZONE[=<zone pickup logic>]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Reclosing

11-14 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

Global Commands

GS-PW Command

Purpose: Read or change a password.

Syntax: GS-PW<t>[=<password>,<com ports(0/1/2)>]]
Reference: Section 9, Security, User Interface

BE1-851 ASCII Command Interface 11-15

SECTION 12  INSTALLATION
Table of Contents

SECTION 12  INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Front/Rear RS-232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
RS-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
IRIG Input and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Terminal Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
PREPARING THE RELAY FOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
DOVETAILING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

Figures
Figure 12-1. BE1-851 S1, Case, Overall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Figure 12-2. BE1-851 S1, Case, Cutout Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Figure 12-3. Adaptor Plate (FT32 Opening to S1 Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Figure 12-4. Adaptor Plate (S2 and FT21 Opening to S1 Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Figure 12-5. BE1-851 H1 Case Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-6. Single Relay Mounting Plate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Figure 12-7. Single Relay Mounting Dimensions for Panel Mounting Without an Escutcheon Plate . 12-7
Figure 12-8. Two-Relay Mounting Plate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Figure 12-9. Two-Relay Mounting Dimensions for Panel Mounting Without an Escutcheon Plate . . 12-9
Figure 12-10. BE1-851 F1 Case Overall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Figure 12-11. BE1-851 F1 Case Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Figure 12-12. BE1-851 Typical AC Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Figure 12-13. Typical DC Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Figure 12-14. F1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Figure 12-15. H1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Figure 12-16. S1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Figure 12-17. RFL 9060 Protective Relay Switch To BE1-851 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Figure 12-18. Personal Computer To BE1-851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Figure 12-19. Modem to BE1-851 (Null Modem Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Figure 12-20. RS-485 DB-37 To BE1-851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Figure 12-21. IRIG , RS-485, and RS-232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Figure 12-22. Dovetailing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

Tables
Table 12-1. RS-232 Pinouts (COM0 And COM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Table 12-2. RS-485 Pinouts (COM2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Table 12-3. IRIG Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

BE1-851 Installation i
SECTION 12  INSTALLATION

GENERAL
BE1-851 Overcurrent Relays are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damages. Upon receipt of the
relay, check the Model and Style Number against the requisition and packaging list for agreement. Inspect for
damage, and if there is evidence of such, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the Basler Electric
Regional Sales Office, your Sales Representative or Sales Representative at Basler Electric, Highland, Illinois.
If the relay is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture and dust free
environment.

MOUNTING
Because the relay is of solid-state design, it does not have to be mounted vertically. Any convenient mounting
angle may be chosen. BE1-851 Overcurrent Relays are available in three case styles. These styles are the F1,
H1, and S1 cases. Overall dimensions for the S1 case are shown in Figure 12-1. S1 case cutout dimensions
are shown in Figure 12-4. Overall dimensions and cutout dimensions for the H1 case are shown in Figures 12-5
through 12-7. Overall dimensions for the F1 case are shown in Figure 12-10. F1 case cutout dimensions are
shown in Figure 12-11.

CONNECTIONS
Relay connections are dependent on the application and logic scheme used. All inputs or outputs may not be
used in a given installation. Incorrect wiring may result in damage to the relay. Be sure to check the model and
style number against the options listed in the Style Number identification chart in Section 1 before connecting
and energizing a particular relay.
NOTE
Be sure the relay is hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG copper wire
attached to the ground terminal on the rear of the relay case. When the relay is configured
in a system with other protective devices, it is recommended to use a separate lead to the
ground bus from each relay.
Except as noted above, connections should be made with minimum wire size of 14 AWG. Be sure to use the
correct input power for the power supply specified. Figure 12-12 is a typical ac connection diagram. Figure
12-13 is a typical DC connection diagram. Figure 12-14 is a rear view of the F1 style case showing the
terminal connections.

SETTINGS
The settings for your application need to be entered and confirmed prior to placing the relay in service.
Register settings such as breaker duty can be entered to match the current state of your system.

BE1-851 Installation 12-1

 Basler
R

BE1-851

Overcurrent Relay

Relay Minor Major Com 0

Power Trouble Alarm Alarm Trip Serial Port

STYLE NUMBER:
H5N1S0

SENSING INPUT
RANGE:
5A PH, 5A N

POWER SUPPLY:
48/125V AC/DC

SERIAL NUMBER:
Edit Reset UHM9743-003D

D2559-01
03-08-00

Figure 12-1. BE1-851 S1, Case, Overall Dimensions

12-2 Installation BE1-851

 5.69
(144.5)
2.84
(72.1)

8.25
8.63 (209.6)
(219.1)

4.13
4.31
(104.8)
(109.5)

.25 (6.35) DIA.

4 PLACES 3.03
(77.0)
6.06
D1427-04
(154.0) 1-23-93

Figure 12-2. BE1-851 S1, Case, Cutout Dimension

BE1-851 Installation 12-3

 BE1-851
.245 (6.22) P.005 DIA., C'SINK
100D TO .386 (9.8)DIA. (4 PLC'S)
.250 (6.34) DIA. (4 PLC'S)
6.218 (157.9)

Figure 12-3. Adaptor Plate (FT32 Opening to S1 Case)

5.970 (151.61)
Westinghouse FT-32 Cutout

Installation
.407 (10.33)
.158 (4.01)
D2863-18
12/7/99

12.380 (314.99)
4.130 (104.88)

16.125 (409.5)
.375 (9.52)

12-4
 6.381 (162.04)
10.063 (255.55) .258 (6.55)

9.339 (237.16)

8.000 (103.10)

CUTOUT

2.438 (61.91)
.250 DIA. (4 PLC'S)
(6.34)

1.089 (27.65) .245 P.005 DIA., C'SINK

(6.22)
.375 (9.52)

D2863-17
01-06-00
.290 (7.36)

.539 (13.68)

6.102 (154.96)
6.350 (161.26)

Figure 12-4. Adaptor Plate (S2 and FT21 Opening to S1 Case)

BE1-851 Installation 12-5

 Figure 12-5. BE1-851 H1 Case Dimensions

12-6 Installation BE1-851

 1.875 (47.625)
4.905 (124.587) 1.5 (38.1)

CL
0.25 (6.35)
Typical 4
4.45 (113.03)
places

CL

D2875-19
03-14-00

Figure 12-6. Single Relay Mounting Plate Dimensions

.25 (6.35) diameter

8.75
(222)

3.00 1.75 3.5

(76.2) (44.5) (88.9)

D2848-12
03-27-99

9.81
(249)

Figure 12-7. Single Relay Mounting Dimensions for Panel Mounting Without an Escutcheon Plate

BE1-851 Installation 12-7

 3.973(101.20)
4.458(113.55)
0.485(12.35)

1.040(26.49)

3.418(87.06)
0.729(18.56)

3.729(99.98)
C

C
(88.9)
3.49
0.344(8.76)
0.993(25.29)
1.023(26.05)
34.20(1.343)

18.312
17.03
(432)

(464)

D2875-18
03-09-00

17.657(449.71)
C

17.977(457.92)
18.007(458.51)
3.00 18.656(475.06)
(76.15)
19.00(483.98)

Figure 12-8. Two-Relay Mounting Plate Dimensions

12-8 Installation BE1-851

 Figure 12-9. Two-Relay Mounting Dimensions for Panel Mounting Without an
Escutcheon Plate

BE1-851 Installation 12-9

 5.835

7.850
8.150

TOP VIEW
Basler

BE1-851

Overcurrent Relay
Com 0
Serial Port
Relay Minor Major
Power Trouble Alarm Alarm Trip
6.500
7.250
(TYP.)

Style Number
H5N1HO

Sensing Input
Range:
5A PH, 5A N

Power Supply:
48/125v
AC/DC
Edit Reset
Serial Number:
UHM9806-001

5.563
(TYP.)

6.376 D2585-05
3-11-97

FRONT VIEW

Figure 12-10. BE1-851 F1 Case Overall Dimensions

12-10 Installation BE1-851

 5.563
(141.30)

.250 DIA., .190-32 MOUNTING

2.781 (6.35) SCREWS. (4 PLC'S)
(70.64)

CL

5.875 6.500
CL
(149.23) (165.1)

2.938
3.250
(74.6)
(82.55)

.125 R. (4 PLC'S)
(3.18)
2.938
(74.63)

5.875 D2582-05
(149.23) 2-28-97

Figure 12-11. BE1-851 F1 Case Cutout Dimensions

D1 D2

D3 D4

D5 D6

D8 D7

BREAKER

A B C D2569-04
03-09-00
LINE

Figure 12-12. BE1-851 Typical AC Connection Diagram

BE1-851 Installation 12-11

12-12
CONTROL
POWER
GROUND
RECLOSE TEST MOD 52 TRIP 52 CLOSE BACKUP BLOCK BUS BREAKER
52b NEG SEQ
ENABLE ENABLE COIL COIL DISABLE INSTANTANEOUS FAILURE ALARM
ENABLE
TRIP
D9 2
A6 B1 + B3 + B5 + B7 + C1 C3 C5 C7 C9 C11

POWER IN IN IN IN CIRCUIT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

BE1-851
SUPPLY 1 2 3 4 MONITOR 1 2 3 4 5 A

Installation
A7 B2 - B4 - B6 - B8 - C2 C4 C6 C8 C10 C12
D10 2
CONTROL
POWER

NOTES:

1.) CONNECTIONS SHOWN ARE FOR USE WITH PRE-PROGRAMMED LOGIC

SCHEME FEEDER-1. ALL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ARE FULLY
PROGRAMMABLE USING BEST LOGIC.

Figure 12-13. Typical DC Connection Diagram

D2569-05
2 ADDITIONAL OUTPUT 1 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS D9 & D10
2-25-97
WITH TEST PLUG ARE AVAILABLE IN S1 CASE VERSION ONLY.

BE1-851
 COM 2 GND Basler Electric
IRIG RS-485 PWR Highland, Illinois USA
+ - A B C
(618) 654-2341

!
WARNING
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 COM 1
+ - + - + - + -

RS-232
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 ALARM

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12

D8 D6 D4 D2

I I
I I A B
C N

D7 D5 D3 D1

D2585-06
3-13-97
Figure 12-14. F1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections
D2583-02
4-10-97

COM 2 GND Basler Electric

IRIG RS-485 PWR Highland, Illinois USA
+ - A B C
(618) 654-2341

IA IB IC IN
D1 D3 D5 D7
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 COM 1
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 RS-232
+ - + - + - + -

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 ALARM D2 D4 D6 D8

IA IB IC IN

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12

Figure 12-15. H1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections

BE1-851 Installation 12-13

 Basler Electric
Highland, Illinois USA
(618) 654-2341

COM 2
IRIG RS-485 PWR GND
+ - A B C
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

!
WARNING

COM 1
+ IN1 - + IN2 - + IN3 - + IN4 - RS-232
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 ALARM

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12

I I I I
OUT 1 N C B A

D9 D7 D5 D3 D1

D10 D8 D6 D4 D2

D2583-03
4-10-97
Figure 12-16. S1 Case, Rear View, Terminal Connections

COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS

Front/Rear RS-232 Connections

Front and rear RS-232 connectors are DB-9 female DCE connectors. Connector pin numbers, functions, names,
and signal directions are shown in Table 12-1. Figures 12-9 through 12-11 provide RS-232 cable connection
diagrams. For more information on communication settings, see Section 11.

Table 12-1. RS-232 Pinouts (COM0 And COM1)

Pin Function Name Direction
1 Shield ---- N/A
2 Transmit Data (TXD) From Relay
3 Receive Data (RXD) Into Relay
4 N/C ---- N/A
5 Signal Ground (GND) N/A
6 N/C ---- N/A
7 N/C ---- N/A
8 N/C ---- N/A
9 N/C ---- N/A

12-14 Installation BE1-851

 TO BE1-851
MALE DB-9
DCE
RFL 9660 REAR PORT
MATING CONNECTOR 1 N.C.
3 2 TXD
2 3 RXD
5 4 N.C.
5 SGND
6 N.C.
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
D2610-03
03-10-00 9 N.C.

Figure 12-17. RFL 9060 Protective Relay Switch To BE1-851 Cable

9-PIN PC-AT TO BE1-851
MALE DB-9 FEMALE DB-9
DTE DCE
1 1 N.C.
RXD 2 2 TXD
TXD 3 3 RXD
4 4 N.C.
SGND 5 5 SGND
6 N.C.
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
9 N.C.

D2557-08
02-19-97

25-PIN PC-XT TO BE1-851

MALE DB-25 FEMALE DB-9
DTE DCE

1 N.C.

RXD 3 2 TXD
TXD 2 3 RXD
N.C. 4 N.C.
SGND 7 5 SGND
6 N.C.
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
9 N.C.

Figure 12-18. Personal Computer To BE1-851(Straight Cable)

TO 25 PIN MODEM TO BE1-851

FEMALE DB-25, DCE FEMALE DB-9 DCE
GND 1 1 N.C.
TXD 2 2 TXD
RXD 3 3 RXD
+5V 6 4 N.C.
SGND 7 5 SGND
DTR 20 6 +10V *
CTS 5 7 CTS *
RTS 4 8 RTS *
9 N.C.

D2863-20
50 FEET MAX. 11-03-99

Figure 12-19. Modem to BE1-851 (Null Modem Cable)

BE1-851 Installation 12-15

RS-485 Connections
The RS-485 connector is a three position terminal block connector designed to interface to a standard
communication cable. A twisted-pair cable is recommended. Connector pin numbers, functions, names, and
signal directions are shown in Table 12-2. A cable connection diagram is provided in Figure 12-20.

Table 12-2. RS-485 Pinouts (COM2)

Terminal Function Name Direction

A Send/Receive A (SDA/RDA) In/Out

B Send/Receive B (SDB/RDB) In/Out

C Signal Ground (GND) N/A

TO RS422/RS485 TO BE1-851
DB-37 FEMALE 3 POSITION TB
4
6
22 Rt A A3
BE1-851
24 B A4 COM 2
19
C A5
A5

A A3
BE1-851
B A4 COM 2
C A5
4000
M 'A X
.

Rt A A3
BE1-851
B A4 COM 2
C A5

D2557-11
R t = OPTIONAL TERMINATING
02-20-97 RESISTOR (120 OHMS TYP.)

Figure 12-20. RS-485 DB-37 To BE1-851

IRIG Input and Connections

The IRIG input is fully isolated and supports IRIG Standard 200-98, Format B002. The demodulated (dc level-
shifted) input signal must be 3.5 volts or higher to be recognized as a high logic level. The maximum acceptable
input voltage range is ±20 volts. Input burden is nonlinear and rated at approximately 4 kilo-ohms at 3.5 Vdc
and approximately 3 kilo-ohms at 20 Vdc.
IRIG connections are located on a terminal block shared with the RS-485 and input power terminals. Terminal
designations and functions are shown in Table 3-3.
Table 12-3. IRIG Pinouts
Terminal Function

A1 + Signal

A2 - Reference

12-16 Installation BE1-851

Terminal Assignments
Figure 12-21 illustrates the location of the IRIG and RS-485 terminals and the pin assignments for an RS-232
connector. Pin assignments are identical for both RS-232 connectors.

Figure 12-21. IRIG , RS-485, and RS-232 Connections

PREPARING THE RELAY FOR SERVICE

Configuring
Prior to putting the relay into service it must be programmed to configure and set the relay for the application.
This involves entering a series of ASCII text based commands as described throughout this manual. These
commands are entered into the relay after establishing communication with the relay via a terminal emulation
program as previously described.

Setting
The task of programming the relay includes providing specific settings such as fault detector settings and timer
settings.

Testing
It is normal procedure that a relay be tested prior to putting the relay into service. A suggested testing routine
is provided in Section 13, Testing and Maintenance.

DOVETAILING PROCEDURE
Basler H1 cases can be interlocked by means of a tenon and mortise on the left and right sides of each case.
The following paragraphs describe the procedure of dovetailing two cases. Figure 12-22 illustrates the process.
Step 1. Remove the drawout assembly from each case the case. If you have difficulty removing this
by rotating the two captive, front panel screws screw, use the alternate method described in
counterclockwise and then sliding the assembly out of the Step 4a. Otherwise proceed to Step 5.
case. Observe electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions
Step 4a. Use a Torx® T15 driver to remove
when handling the drawout assemblies.
the two screws attaching Terminal Strip A to
Step 2. Remove the mounting bracket from the side of the rear panel. Remove the terminal strip
each case where the two cases will mate. Each bracket is and set it aside. Remove the remaining
held in place by four Phillips screws. Phillips screw from the rear panel and set the
rear panel aside.
Step 3. The rear panel must be removed from one of the
cases in order for the two cases to be joined. On that Step 5. Arrange the two cases so that the
panel, remove the Phillips screw from each corner of the rear dovetailed edge of the case without a
rear panel except for the screw at the upper lefthand rear panel is aligned with the front dovetailed
corner (when looking at the rear of the case). This screw edge of the case with the rear panel
is closest to Terminal Strip A. installed. Once the dovetails are aligned,
slide the cases together.
Step 4. Turn the screw nearest to Terminal Strip A
counterclockwise until the rear panel can be removed from Step 6. Position the rear panel on the case

BE1-851 Installation 12-17

from which it was removed. Make sure that the panel
orientation is correct. Perform Step 6a if Terminal Strip A
was not removed during the disassembly process.
Perform Step 6b if Terminal Strip A was removed during
disassembly.
Step 6a. Position the rear panel over the case and align
the screw closest to Terminal Strip A with its mating hole.
Tighten the screw while maintaining proper alignment
between the rear panel and case. Finish attaching the
panel to the case by installing the remaining three Phillips
screws. When installed, the rear panels prevent the two
cases from sliding apart.
Step 6b. Align the rear panel with the case and install the
four Phillips screws that hold the rear panel in place.
Position Terminal Strip A in its panel opening and replace
the two Torx® T15 screws. When installed, the rear panels
prevent the two cases from sliding apart.
Step 7. Mount the case assembly in the desired rack or
panel opening and reinstall the drawout assembly in each
case.

D2848-10
03-25-99

Figure 12-22. Dovetailing Procedure

12-18 ASCII Command Interface BE1-851

SECTION 13  TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 13  TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
POWER-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
STYLE AND SERIAL NUMBER VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
IRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
CONTACT SENSING INPUTS AND OUTPUT CONTACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
PICKUP AND DROPOUT TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
50T Pickups And Dropouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
51 Pickups And Dropouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
TIMINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
50T Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
51 Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Figures
Figure 13-1. Terminals and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Tables
Table 13-1. Relay Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Table 13-2. Appropriate Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Table 13-3. Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Table 13-4. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Table 13-5. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Table 13-6. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Table 13-7. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Table 13-8. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Table 13-9. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Table 13-10. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Table 13-11. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-12. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-13. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-14. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-15. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Table 13-17. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Table 13-18. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Table 13-19. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Table 13-20. Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Table 13-21. Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Table 13-22. Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Table 13-23. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Table 13-24. Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Table 13-25. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Table 13-26. Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Table 13-27. Timing Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance i

SECTION 13  TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL
You may prefer to test your relay before installation. To function test BE1-851 relays, perform the
procedures provided in the following paragraphs. A relay terminals and connections diagram is provided
in Figure 13-1.

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
+ -
A B C
CHAS.
RS-485 PWR GND
IRIG
INPUT

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5 B1

C6 B2

C7 B3

C8 B4

C9 B5

C10 B6

C11 B7

C12 B8

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
D2518-03
04-25-97

Figure 13-1. Terminals and Connections

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-1

POWER-UP
Step 1. Apply voltage to power terminals A6 and A7. Table 13-1 shows the appropriate voltage for each
style of relay.
Table 13-1. Relay Voltages
Style Number Voltage Input

xxx1xx 48-125 Vac/dc

xxx2xx 125-250 Vac/dc

xxx3xx 24 Vdc

Step 2. Verify that the Power LED is illuminated, the display backlight is lit, and characters are displayed
on the display. Upon power-up of the relay, a brief self test is performed. During this five second test,
all of the front panel LEDs will flash, and the display will indicate each step of the test followed by a
screen showing the relay model number and software version.

COMMUNICATIONS
Either a VT-100 terminal or a computer with a serial port and suitable communications software may be used
to communicate with any of the BE1-851 relay's three communications ports. The relay default
communications settings are: a Baud Rate of 9600, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Parity-None, and Xon/Xoff Flow
Control.
Step 1. Connect the terminal cable to the rear RS-232 port on the relay.
Step 2. Transmit the command "ACCESS=851" to the relay. The relay should respond with "ACCESS
GRANTED: GLOBAL". Transmit "EXIT" after getting access.
Step 3. Connect the terminal cable to the front RS-232 port on the relay.
Step 4. Transmit the command "ACCESS=851" to the relay. The relay should respond with "ACCESS
GRANTED: GLOBAL". Transmit "EXIT" after getting access.
Step 5. Connect an RS232/RS485 converter box to the RS-232 port on the terminal. Connect the RS-485
output terminals of the converter box to the relay RS-485 terminals.
Step 6. Transmit the command "ACCESS=851" to the relay. The relay should respond with "ACCESS
GRANTED: GLOBAL". Transmit "EXIT" after getting access.

STYLE AND SERIAL NUMBER VERIFICATION

Over any communications port, transmit the command "RG-VER". The BE1-851 will respond with the Model
Number, Style Number, Program Version and Date, Boot Code Version and Date, as well as the relay Serial
Number. Verify that the part, style and serial numbers match the information on the relay front label.

IRIG
Step 1. Connect a suitable IRIG source to the relay IRIG terminals A1 and A2.
Step 2. Upon receiving the IRIG signal, the relay clock will be set with the current time, month and day. This
may be verified at screen 4.5 on the front panel display or by transmitting "RG-TIME" and "RG-DATE"
to any of the relay communications ports.

13-2 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

CONTACT SENSING INPUTS AND OUTPUT CONTACTS
Step 1. Apply voltage to the relay contact sensing inputs IN1, IN2, IN3, and IN4. Table 13-2 shows the
appropriate voltage to apply.
Table 13-2. Appropriate Voltages
Style Number Input Voltage

xxx1xx 48 VDC

xxx2xx 125 VDC

xxx3xx 24 VDC
Step 2. Transmit the command "RG-STAT". Examine response line "INPUT(1-4) STATUS:" to verify that
all inputs were detected.
Step 3. Transmit the commands "ACCESS=851","CS-OUT=ENA", "CO-OUT=ENA", and "EXIT;Y" to enable
the output control override capability of the relay.
Step 4. Using Table 13-3 as a guide, transmit the commands listed and verify that the appropriate output
contacts change state. When each command is transmitted, the corresponding output will be pulsed
briefly. An ohm-meter or continuity tester may be used to monitor the output contacts status.
Table 13-3. Output Commands
Output Terminals Commands

OUT1 (N.O.) C1 & C2 CS-OUT1=P,CO-OUT1=P

OUT2 (N.O.) C3 & C4 CS-OUT2=P,CO-OUT2=P

OUT3 (N.O.) C5 & C6 CS-OUT3=P,CO-OUT3=P

OUT4 (N.O.) C7 & C8 CS-OUT4=P,CO-OUT4=P

OUT5 (N.O.) C9 & C10 CS-OUT5=P,CO-OUT5=P

ALARM (N.C.) C11 & C12 CS-OUTA=P,CO-OUTA=P

Step 5. Disable the control override ability if desired by transmitting the commands "ACCESS=851",
"CS-OUT=DIS", "CO-OUT=DIS", and "EXIT;Y" to the relay.

PICKUP AND DROPOUT TESTING

Transmit the frequency command, "SG-FREQ=50" or "SG-FREQ=60", depending on which frequency the
relay is to be tested at. Transmit the commands "ACCESS=851", "CS-GROUP=0", and "CO-GROUP=0"
to select settings group 0. Save the settings by transmitting the command "EXIT;Y".

50T Pickups And Dropouts

Step 1. Transmit the following scheme to the relay.
ACCESS=851
SL-N=NONE
YES
SL-N=PU50
SL-50T=1,0
SL-VO1=50TPT+50TNT
EXIT;Y

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-3

Step 2. Transmit the appropriate command from Table 13-4 to program the 50T pickup setting.
Table 13-4. Pickup Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=0.1A,0M S0-50TN=0.1A,0M

x3xxxx S0-50TP=0.5A,0M S0-50TN=0.1A,0M

x5xxxx S0-50TP=0.5A,0M S0-50TN=0.5A,0M

Step 3. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-5.

Table 13-5. Pickup Ranges

Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps

x3xxxx 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps

x5xxxx 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps

Step 4. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 90%
±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 5. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-6 to reprogram the pickup setting.

Table 13-6. Pickup Settings

Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=1.0A,0m S0-50TN=1.0A,0m

x3xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0m S0-50TN=1.0A,0m

x5xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0m S0-50TN=5.0A,0m

Step 6. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-7.

Table 13-7. Pickup Ranges

Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps

x3xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps

x5xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps

13-4 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

Step 7. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 90%
±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 8. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-8 to reprogram the pickup setting.
Table 13-8. Pickup Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0m S0-50TN=5.0A,0m

x3xxxx S0-50TP=25.0A,0m S0-50TN=5.0A,0m

x5xxxx S0-50TP=25.0A,0m S0-50TN=25.0A,0m

Step 9. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-9.
Table 13-9. Pickup Ranges
Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps

x3xxxx 24.5 Amps 25.5 Amps 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps

x5xxxx 24.5 Amps 25.5 Amps 24.5 Amps 25.5 Amps

Step 10. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at
90% ±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 11. Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the Phase B current input.
Step 12. Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the Phase C current input.
Step 13. Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the Neutral current input.

51 Pickups And Dropouts

Step 1. Transmit the following scheme to the relay.
ACCESS=851
SL-N=NONE
YES
SL-N=PU51
SL-51=1,0
SL-VO1=51PT+51NT
EXIT;Y
Step 2. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-10 to program the pickup setting.
Table 13-10. Pickup Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=0.1A,0M S0-51N=0.1A,0M

x3xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,0M S0-51N=0.1A,0M

x5xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,0M S0-51N=0.5A,0M

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-5

Step 3. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-11.
Table 13-11. Pickup Ranges
Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps

x3xxxx 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps 0.09 Amps 0.11 Amps

x5xxxx 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps 0.45 Amps 0.55 Amps

Step 4. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 95%
±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 5. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-12 to reprogram the pickup setting.

Table 13-12. Pickup Settings

Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=1.0A,0m S0-51N=1.0A,0m

x3xxxx S0-51P=5.0A,0m S0-51N=1.0A,0m

x5xxxx S0-51P=5.0A,0m S0-51N=5.0A,0m

Step 6. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-13.

Table 13-13. Pickup Ranges

Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps

x3xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 0.98 Amps 1.02 Amps

x5xxxx 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps 4.9 Amps 5.1 Amps

Step 7. After pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 95%
±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 8. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-14 to reprogram the pickup setting.

Table 13-14. Pickup Settings

Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=3.2A,0m S0-51N=3.2A,0m

x3xxxx S0-51P=16.0A,0m S0-51N=3.2A,0m

13-6 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

 x5xxxx S0-51P=16.0A,0m S0-51N=16.0A,0m

Step 9. Slowly ramp up the current applied at the relay Phase A input until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup
occurred within the acceptable range listed in Table 13-15.

Table 13-15. Pickup Ranges

Phase Neutral
Style Number Low Limit High Limit Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 3.136 Amps 3.264 Amps 3.136 Amps 3.264 Amps

x3xxxx 15.68 Amps 16.32 Amps 3.136 Amps 3.264 Amps

x5xxxx 15.68 Amps 16.32 Amps 15.68 Amps 16.32 Amps

Step 10. When pickup occurs, ramp the current down slowly until dropout occurs. Dropout should occur
at 95% ±2% of the pickup current magnitude.
Step 11. Repeat steps 2 through 10 for the Phase B input.
Step 12. Repeat steps 2 through 10 for the Phase C input.
Step 13. Repeat steps 2 through 10 for the Neutral input.

TIMINGS

50T Timings
Step 1. Transmit the following scheme to the relay.
ACCESS=851
SL-N=NONE
YES
SL-N=TIME50
SL-50T=1,0
SL-VO1=50TPT+50TNT
SG-DSP=F
EXIT; Y
Step 2. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-16 to program the pickup and timer settings.

Table 13-16. Pickup and Timer Settings

Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=1.0A,0.0m S0-50TN=1.0A,0.0m

x3xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0.0m S0-50TN=1.0A,0.0m

x5xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,0.0m S0-50TN=5.0A,0.0m

Step 3. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-17.

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-7

 Table 13-17. Timing Ranges
Current/Frequency
Style Number Phase Neutral Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 1.05A/50 Hz 1.05A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.1 Sec

x1xxxx 1.05A/60 Hz 1.05A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.083 Sec.

x3xxxx 5.25A/50 Hz 1.05A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.1 Sec.

x3xxxx 5.25A/60 Hz 1.05A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.083 Sec.

x5xxxx 5.25A/50 Hz 5.25A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.1 Sec.

x5xxxx 5.25A/60 Hz 5.25A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.083 Sec.

Step 4. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A input and measure the time between the
application of current until OUT1 closes. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-18.
Table 13-18. Timing Ranges
Current/Frequency
Style Number Phase Neutral Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 1.5A/50 Hz 1.5A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.04 Sec.

x1xxxx 1.5A/60 Hz 1.5A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.033 Sec.

x3xxxx 7.5A/50 Hz 1.5A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.04 Sec

x3xxxx 7.5A/60 Hz 1.5A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.033 Sec.

x5xxxx 7.5A/50 Hz 7.5A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.04 Sec.

x5xxxx 7.5A/60 Hz 7.5A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.033 Sec.

Step 5. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-19.
Table 13-19. Timing Ranges
Current/Freque ncy
Style Number Phase Neutral Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 5.0A/50 Hz 5.0A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.025 Sec.

x1xxxx 5.0A/60 Hz 5.0A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.021 Sec.

x3xxxx 25.0A/50 Hz 5.0A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.025 Sec.

x3xxxx 25.0A/60 Hz 5.0A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.021 Sec.

x5xxxx 25.0A/50 Hz 25.0A/50 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.025 Sec.

x5xxxx 25.0A/60 Hz 25.0A/60 Hz 0.0 Sec 0.021 Sec

13-8 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

Step 6. Transmit the appropriate command in Table 13-20 to program the pickup setting.

Table 13-20. Pickup Settings

Comand
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-50TP=1.0A,5s S0-50TN=1.0A,5s

x3xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,5s S0-50TN=1.0A,5s

x5xxxx S0-50TP=5.0A,5s S0-50TN=5.0A,5s

Step 7. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-21.
Table 13-21. Pickup Ranges
Current/Frequency
Style Number Phase Neutral Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 1.05A/50 Hz 1.05A/50 Hz 4.85 Sec. 5.35 Sec.

x1xxxx 1.05A/60 Hz 1.05A/60 Hz 4.833 Sec. 5.333 Sec.

x3xxxx 5.25A/50 Hz 1.05A/50 Hz 4.85 Sec. 5.35 Sec.

x3xxxx 5.25A/60 Hz 1.05A/60 Hz 4.833 Sec. 5.333 Sec.

x5xxxx 5.25A/50 Hz 5.25A/50 Hz 4.85 Sec. 5.35 Sec.

x5xxxx 5.25A/60 Hz 5.25A/60 Hz 4.833 Sec. 5.333 Sec.

Step 8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for the Phase B input.
Step 9. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for the Phase C input.
Step 10. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for the Neutral input.

51 Timings
Step 1. Transmit the following scheme to the relay.
ACCESS=851
SL-N=NONE
YES
SL-N=TIME51
SL-51=1,0
SL-VO1=51TP+51TN
EXIT;Y
Step 2. Transmit the appropriate command from Table 13-22 to program the pickup, time delay setting, and
curve type.
Table 13-22. Command Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=0.1A,0.5,I2 S0-51N=0.1A,0.5,I2

x3xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,0.5,I2 S0-51N=0.1A,0.5,I2

x5xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,0.5,I2 S0-51N=0.5A,0.5,I2

BE1-851 Testing and Maintenance 13-9

Step 3. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A current input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated in
Table 13-23.
Table 13-23. Timing Ranges
Style Number Current Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.2 Amp 0.445 Sec 0.491 Sec

x1xxxx 1.0 Amp 0.151 Sec 0.166 Sec

x1xxxx 2.6 Amps 0.118 Sec 0.130 Sec

x1xxxx 4.0 Amps 0.109 Sec 0.119 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 1.0 Amp 0.445 Sec 0.491 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 5.0 Amps 0.151 Sec 0.166 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 13.0 Amps 0.118 Sec 0.130 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 20.0 Amps 0.109 Sec 0.119 Sec

Step 4. Transmit the appropriate command from Table 6-24 to reprogram the pickup, time delay setting, and
curve type.
Table 13-24. Command Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51P=0.1A,5.0,I2 S0-51N=0.1A,5.0,I2

x3xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,5.0,I2 S0-51N=0.1A,5.0,I2

x5xxxx S0-51P=0.5A,5.0,I2 S0-51N=0.5A,5.0,I2

Step 5. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A current input and meas ure the time between
the application of current and OUT1 closing.. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated
in Table 13-25.
Table 13-25. Timing Ranges
Style Number Current Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.2 Amp 4.205 Sec 4.647 Sec

x1xxxx 1.0 Amp 1.272 Sec 1.405 Sec

x1xxxx 2.6 Amps 0.935 Sec 1.033 Sec

x1xxxx 4.0 Amps 0.846 Sec 0.934 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 1.0 Amp 4.205 Sec 4.647 Sec

x3xxxx or x5 xxxx 5.0 Amps 1.272 Sec 1.405 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 13.0 Amps 0.935 Sec 1.033 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 20.0 Amps 0.846 Sec 0.934 Sec

13-10 Testing and Maintenance BE1-851

Step 6. Transmit the appropriate command from Table 13-26 to reprogram the pickup, time delay setting,
and curve type.
Table 13-26. Command Settings
Command
Style Number Phase Neutral

x1xxxx S0-51=0.1A,9.9,I2 S0-51=0.1A,9.9,I2

x3xxxx S0-51=0.5A,9.9,I2 S0-51=0.1A,9.9,I2

x5xxxx S0-51=0.5A,9.9,I2 S0-51=0.5A,9.9,I2

Step 7. Apply the appropriate current value to the Phase A current input and measure the time between the
application of current and OUT1 closing.. Verify that the timing is within the acceptance range stated
in Table 13-27.
Table 13-27. Timing Ranges
Style Number Current Low Limit High Limit

x1xxxx 0.2 Amp 8.300 Sec 9.172 Sec

x1xxxx 1.0 Amp 2.493 Sec 2.755 Sec

x1xxxx 2.6 Amps 1.824 Sec 2.016 Sec

x1xxxx 4.0 Amps 1.650 Sec 1.822 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 1.0 Amp 8.300 Sec 9.172 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 5.0 Amps 2.493 Sec 2.755 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 13.0 Amps 1.824 Sec 2.016 Sec

x3xxxx or x5xxxx 20.0 Amps 1.650 Sec 1.822 Sec

MAINTENANCE
BE1-851 Overcurrent Relays require no preventive maintenance. However, testing should be performed
according to scheduled practices. If the relay fails to function properly, consult the Customer Service
Department of the Power Systems Group, Basler Electric, for a return authorization number prior to shipping.

BE1-851 Installation 13-11

APPENDIX A • TIME-OVERCURRENT
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX A • TIME-OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
CURVE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
TIME-OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVE GRAPHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Using Table A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

List of Figures
Figure A-1. Time Characteristic Curve S, S1 Short Inverse,99-1369, (Similar to ABB CO-2) . . . . . . . A-5
Figure A-2. Time Characteristic Curve S2, Short Inverse,99-1595 (Similar to GE IAC-55) . . . . . . . . . A-6
Figure A-3. Time Characteristic Curve L, L1, Long Inverse,99-1370, (Similar to ABB CO-5) . . . . . . . A-7
Figure A-4. Time Characteristic Curve L2, Long Inverse,99-1594, (Similar to GE IAC-66) . . . . . . . . . A-8
Figure A-5. Time Characteristic Curve D, Definite Time,99-1371, (Similar to ABB CO-6) . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Figure A-6. Time Characteristic Curve M, Moderately Inverse,99-1372, (Similar to ABB CO-7) . . . . A-10
Figure A-7. Time Characteristic Curve I, I1 Inverse Time,99-1373 (Similar to ABB CO-8) . . . . . . . . A-11
Figure A-8. Time Characteristic Curve I2, Inverse Time,99-1597 (Similar to GE IAC-51) . . . . . . . . . A-12
Figure A-9. Time Characteristic Curve V, V1, Very Inverse,99-1374 (Similar to ABB CO-9) . . . . . . . A-13
Figure A-10. Time Characteristic Curve V2, Very Inverse,99-1596 (Similar to GE IAC-53) . . . . . . . . A-14
Figure A-11. Time Characteristic Curve E, E1, Extremely Inverse,99-1375 (Similar to GE IAC-11) . A-15
Figure A-12. Time Characteristic Curve E2, Extremely Inverse,99-1598 (Similar to GE IAC-77) . . . A-16
Figure A-13. Time Characteristic Curve A, Standard Inverse, 99-1621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Figure A-14. Time Characteristic Curve B, Very Inverse, 99-1376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Figure A-15. Time Characteristic Curve C, Extremely Inverse, 99-1377 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Figure A-16. Time Characteristic Curve G, Long Inverse, 99-1622 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20

List of Tables
Table A-1. 51P and 51N Time Characteristic Curve Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Table A-2. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Table A-3. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

BE1-851 Appendix i
APPENDIX 1 • TIME-OVERCURRENT
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

GENERAL
Basler Electric inverse time-overcurrent relays (ANSI Device 51) provide time/current characteristic curves
that closely emulate most of the common electromechanical, induction disk relays manufactured in North
America. To further improve relay coordination, selection of integrated reset or instantaneous reset
characteristics is also provided.

CURVE SPECIFICATIONS

Timing Accuracy (All 51 Functions) Within ±5% or ±1½ cycles (F/R response) or -1½ +3 cycles (A
response), whichever is greater for time dial settings of D greater
than 0.1 and multiples of 2 to 40 times the pickup setting but not
over 150 A for 5 A CT units or 30 A for 1 A CT units.
Sixteen inverse time functions and one fixed time function and
one programmable time function can be selected.
Characteristic curves for the inverse and definite time functions
are defined by the following equation.

A •D
TT =
N
+ B•D + K
M

R ·D
TR =
2
M -1

TT = Time to trip when M  1

TR = Time to reset if relay is set for integrating
reset when M < 1. Otherwise, reset is 50
milliseconds or less
D = TIME DIAL setting (0.0 to 9.9)
M = Multiple of PICKUP setting (0 to 40)
A, B, C, N, K = Constants for the particular curve
R = Constant defining the reset time.

Table 1-1 lists the time characteristic curve constants.

See Figures A-1 through A-16 for graphs of the
characteristics.

BE1-851 Appendix A-1

 Table 1-1. 51P and 51N Time Characteristic Curve Constants
N I
BE1-851 Trip Characteristic Constants
Reset
Curve BE Curve Name
Selection A B C N K R

S1 S, Short Inverse 0.2663 0.03393 1.000 1.2969 0.028 0.5000

S2 S2, Short Inverse 0.0286 0.02080 1.000 0.9844 0.028 0.0940

L1 L1, Long Inverse 5.6143 2.18592 1.000 1.000 0.028 15.750

L2 L2, Long Inverse 2.3955 0.00000 1.000 0.3125 0.028 7.8001

D D, Definite Time 0.4797 0.21359 1.000 1.5625 0.028 0.8750

M M, Moderately Inverse 0.3022 0.12840 1.000 0.5000 0.028 1.7500

I1 I, Inverse Time 8.9341 0.17966 1.000 2.0938 0.028 9.0000

I2 Inverse Time 0.2747 0.10426 1.000 0.4375 0.028 0.8868

V1 V, Very Inverse 5.4678 0.10814 1.000 2.0469 0.028 5.5000

V2 V2, Very Inverse 4.4309 0.09910 1.000 1.9531 0.028 5.8231

E1 Extremely Inverse 7.7624 0.02758 1.000 2.0938 0.028 7.7500

E2 E2, Extremely Inverse 4.9883 0.01290 1.000 2.0469 0.028 4.7742

A Standard Inverse 0.01414 0.00000 1.000 0.0200 0.028 2.0000

B B, Very Inverse (I2t) 1.4636 0.00000 1.000 1.0469 0.028 3.2500

C Extremely Inverse (I2t) 8.2506 0.00000 1.000 2.0469 0.028 8.0000

G Long Time Inverse (I2t) 12.1212 0.00000 1.000 1.0000 0.028 29.0000

F Fixed Time N 0.0000 1.00000 1.000 0.0000 0.028 1.0000

P Programmable 0 to 600 0 to 25 0 to 1 0.5 to 2.5 0.028 0 to 30

N Curve F has a fixed delay of one second times the Time Dial setting.
I For integrated reset, append R to the curve name. For example, curve S1 has instantaneous
reset. Curve S1R has integrated reset.

TIME-OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVE GRAPHS

Figures A-1 through A-16 illustrate the characteristic curves of the BE1-851 relay. Table A-2 cross-
references each curve to existing electromechanical relay characteristics. Equivalent time dial settings were
calculated at a value of five times pickup. A drawing number is provided in the caption of each graph.
Contact the Basler Electric Power Systems Group Customer Service Department at (618) 654-2341 and
request the drawing number to order a full-size (10 inches by 12 inches) Characteristic Curve graph on
transparent paper (vellum). A complete set of drawings is available by requesting Basler Publication
9 2520 00 990.

A-2 Appendix BE1-851

 Table 1-2. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference
BE1-
851
Curve Curve Name Drawing No. Similar To

S1 S, Short Inverse 99-1369 ABB CO-2

S2 S2, Short Inverse 99-1595 GE IAC-55

L1 L, L1, Long Inverse 99-1370 ABB CO-5

L2 L2, Long Inverse 99-1594 GE IAC-66

D D, Definite Time 99-1371 ABB CO-6

M M, Moderately Inverse 99-1372 ABB CO-7

I1 I, I1 Inverse Time 99-1373 ABB CO-8

I2 I2 Inverse Time 99-1597 GE IAC-51

V1 V, V1 Very Inverse 99-1374 ABB CO-9

V2 V2, Very Inverse 99-1596 GE IAC-53

E1 E, E1 Extremely Inverse 99-1375 ABB CO-11

E2 E2, Extremely Inverse 99-1598 GE IAC-77

A A Standard Inverse 99-1621 BS, IEC Standard Inverse

B B, Very Inverse (It) 99-1376 BS, IEC Very Inverse (I2t)

C Extremely Inverse (I2t) 99-1377 BS, IEC Extremely Inverse (I2t)

G Long Time Inverse 99-1622 BS, IEC Long Time Inverse

F Fixed Time N/A N/A

P Programmable N/A N/A

Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference

Although the time characteristic curve shapes have been optimized for each relay, time dial settings of
Basler Electric relays are not identical to the settings of electromechanical induction disk overcurrent relays.
Table A-3 helps you convert the time dial settings of induction disk relays to the equivalent setting for Basler
Electric relays. Enter time dial settings at HMI screens 5.X.4.1 (51P), 5.X.4.2 (51N), 5.X.4.3 (151N), and
5.X.4.4 (51Q). Enter time dial settings through the communication ports using the S<g>-51P/51N/151N/51Q
commands. For more information, refer to Volume 1, Section 4, Protection and Control Functions, 51
Overcurrent Functions.

Using Table A-3

Cross-reference table values were obtained by inspection of published electromechanical time current
characteristic curves. The time delay for a current of five times tap was entered into the time dial calculator
function for each time dial setting. The equivalent Basler Electric time dial setting was then entered into the
cross-reference table.
If your electromechanical relay time dial setting is between the values provided in the table, it will be
necessary to interpolate (estimate the correct intermediate value) between the electromechanical setting
and the Basler Electric setting.
Basler Electric relays have a maximum time dial setting of 9.9. The Basler Electric equivalent time dial

BE1-851 Appendix A-3

setting for the electromechanical maximum setting is provided in the cross reference table even if it exceeds
9.9. This allows interpolation as noted above.
Basler Electric time-current characteristics are determined by a linear mathematical equation. The induction
disk of an electromechanical relay has a certain degree of non linearity due to inertial and friction effects.
For this reason, even though every effort has been made to provide characteristic curves with minimum
deviation from the published electromechanical curves, slight deviations can exist between them.
In applications where the time coordination between curves is extremely close, we recommend that you
choose the optimal time dial setting by inspection of the coordination study. In applications where
coordination is tight, it is recommended that you retrofit your circuits with Basler Electric electronic relays
to ensure high timing accuracy.

Table 1-3. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference

Electromechanical Relay Time Dial Setting
0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0
Curve Name Equivalent to Drawing No. Basler Electric Equivalent Time Dial Setting
S, S1 ABB CO-2 99-1369 0.3 0.8 1.7 2.4 3.4 4.2 5.0 5.8 6.7 7.7 8.6 9.7
L, L1 ABB CO-5 99-1370 0.4 0.8 1.5 2.3 3.3 4.2 5.0 6.0 7.0 7.8 8.8 9.9
D ABB CO-6 99-1371 0.5 1.1 2.0 2.9 3.7 4.5 5.0 5.9 7.2 8.0 8.9 10.1
M ABB CO-7 99-1372 0.4 0.8 1.7 2.5 3.3 4.3 5.3 6.1 7.0 8.0 9.0 9.8
I, I1 ABB CO-8 99-1373 0.3 0.7 1.5 2.3 3.2 4.0 5.0 5.8 6.8 7.6 8.7 10.0
V, V1 ABB CO-9 99-1374 0.3 0.7 1.4 2.1 3.0 3.9 4.8 5.7 6.7 7.8 8.7 9.6
E, E1 ABB CO-11 99-1375 0.3 0.7 1.5 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.0 5.7 6.6 7.8 8.5 10.3
I2 GE IAC-51 99-1597 0.6 1.0 1.9 2.7 3.7 4.8 5.7 6.8 8.0 9.3 10.6
V2 GE IAC-53 99-1596 0.4 0.8 1.6 2.4 3.4 4.3 5.1 6.3 7.2 8.4 9.6
S2 GE IAC-55 99-1595 0.2 1.0 2.0 3.1 4.0 4.9 6.1 7.2 8.1 8.9 9.8
L2 GE IAC-66 99-1594 0.4 0.9 1.8 2.7 3.9 4.9 6.3 7.2 8.5 9.7 10.9
E2 GE IAC-77 99-1598 0.5 1.0 1.9 2.7 3.5 4.3 5.2 6.2 7.4 8.2 9.9

A-4 Appendix BE1-851

 Figure A-1. Time Characteristic Curve S, S1 Short Inverse,
99-1369, (Similar to ABB CO-2)
BE1-851 Appendix A-5
 Figure A-2. Time Characteristic Curve S2, Short Inverse,
99-1595 (Similar to GE IAC-55)
A-6 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-3. Time Characteristic Curve L, L1, Long Inverse,
99-1370, (Similar to ABB CO-5)
BE1-851 Appendix A-7
 Figure A-4. Time Characteristic Curve L2, Long Inverse,
99-1594, (Similar to GE IAC-66)
A-8 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-5. Time Characteristic Curve D, Definite Time,
99-1371, (Similar to ABB CO-6)
BE1-851 Appendix A-9
 Figure A-6. Time Characteristic Curve M, Moderately Inverse,
99-1372, (Similar to ABB CO-7)
A-10 Appendix BE1-851
 FigureA-7. Time Characteristic Curve I, I1 Inverse Time,
99-1373 (Similar to ABB CO-8)
BE1-851 Appendix A-11
 Figure A-8. Time Characteristic Curve I2, Inverse Time,
99-1597 (Similar to GE IAC-51)
A-12 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-9. Time Characteristic Curve V, V1, Very Inverse,
99-1374 (Similar to ABB CO-9)
BE1-851 Appendix A-13
 Figure A-10. Time Characteristic Curve V2, Very Inverse,
99-1596 (Similar to GE IAC-53)
A-14 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-11. Time Characteristic Curve E, E1, Extremely Inverse,
99-1375 (Similar to GE IAC-11)
BE1-851 Appendix A-15
 Figure A-12. Time Characteristic Curve E2, Extremely Inverse,
99-1598 (Similar to GE IAC-77)
A-16 Appendix BE1-851
 Figure A-13. Time Characteristic Curve A, Standard Inverse, 99-1621

BE1-851 Appendix A-17

 Figure A-14. Time Characteristic Curve B, Very Inverse, 99-1376

A-18 Appendix BE1-851

 Figure A-15. Time Characteristic Curve C, Extremely Inverse, 99-1377

BE1-851 Appendix A-19

 Figure A-16. Time Characteristic Curve G, Long Inverse, 99-1622

A-20 Appendix BE1-851

APPENDIX B • COMMAND CROSS-REFERENCE

INTRODUCTION
This appendix lists all ASCII commands, command syntax, brief command descriptions, and any
corresponding HMI screens. Commands are organized by function in the following groups and tables.
 Miscellaneous (Table B-1)  General Setting (Table B-7)
 Metering (Table B-2)  Breaker Monitoring and Setting (Table B-8)
 Control (Table B-3)  Programmable Logic Setting (Table B-9)
 Report (Table B-4)  User Programmable Name Setting (Table B-10)
 Setting (Table B-5)  Protection Setting (Table B-11)
 Alarm Setting (Table B-6)  Global (Table B-12)

An entry of x in the HMI Screen column represents 1 for Setting Group 0, 2 for Setting Group 1, 3 for Setting
Group 2, and 4 for Setting Group 3.

Table B-1. Miscellaneous Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
ACCESS[=<password>] Read/Set access level in order to change N/A
settings.
EXIT Exit programming mode. N/A
HELP <cmd> or H <cmd> Obtain help with command operation. N/A

Table B-2. Metering Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
M Read all metered values. N/A
M-I[<phase>] Read metered current in primary unit. 3.1, 3.2, 3.4,
3.5, 3.6

Table B-3. Control Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
CO-<control>[=<mode>] Control operation. N/A
CS-<control>[=<mode>] Control selection. N/A
CS/CO-GROUP[=<operation>} Group Overide Select and Operate 2.3.1
Controls
CS/CO-OUT[=<operation>] Output Overide Select and Operate 2.4.1
Controls
CS/CO-43/143/243/343[=<operation>] Virtual Switch Select and Operate 2.1.X
Controls
CS/CO-101[=<operation>] Breaker Control Select and Operate 2.2.1
Controls

BE1-851 Appendix B-1

 Table B-4. Report Commands
ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
RA[=0] Report/Reset alarm information. 1.3
RA-LGC[=0] Report/Reset logic alarm information. 1.3
RA-MAJ[=0] Report/Reset major alarm information. 1.3
RA-MIN[=0] Report/Reset minor alarm information. 1.3
RA-REL[=0] Report/Reset relay alarm information. 1.3
RB Read breaker status. 1.5.6
RB-DUTY[<phase>[=%duty>]] Read/Set breaker contact duty log. 4.3.2
RB-OPCNTR[=<#operations>] Read/Set breaker operation counter. 4.3.1
RD Report all demand data. N/A
RD-PI[<p>[=0]] Read/Reset peak demand current. 4.4.3.1-
4.4.3.5
RD-TI[<p>] Report today’s demand current. 4.4.1.1-
4.4.1.5
RD-YI[<p>] Report yesterday’s demand current. 4.4.2.1-
4.4.2.5
RF[-n/NEW][=0/TRIG] Read/Reset fault report data. 4.1
RG Report general information. N/A
RG-DATE[=<M/D/Y>] or RG-DATE[=<D-M-Y>] Read/Set date. 4.6
RG-STAT Report relay status. N/A
RG-TARG[=0] Report/Reset target status. 1.2
RG-TIME[=hr:mn:sc] or RG-TIME[=hr:mn<f>sc]] Report/Set time. 4.6
RG-VER Read program version, model number, 4.7
style number, and serial number.
RO-nA/B[#].CFG/DAT/HDR Read oscillographic fault report. N/A
RS[-n/Fn/ALM/IO/LGC/NEW][=0] Read oscillographic N/A
COMTRADE.DAT/.CFG fault report.

Table B-5. Setting Command

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
S Read all relay setting parameters. N/A

B-2 Appendix BE1-851

 Table B-6. Alarm Setting Commands
ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SA Read all major and minor alarm settings. N/A
SA-BKR[n][=<mode>,<alarm limit>] Read/Set breaker alarm settings. N/A
SA-DI[p][=<alarm level>] Read/Set demand alarm settings. N/A
SA-DVAR[=<alm lvl>,<alm lvl>] Read/Set var demand alarm setting. N/A
SA-DWATT[=<alm lvl>,<alm lvl>] Read/Set watt demand alarm setting. N/A
SA-LGC[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . Read/Set logic alarm setting mask. N/A
[<alarm num n>]]
SA-LGC[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . Read/Set logic alarm setting mask. N/A
[<alarm num n>]]
SA-MAJ[=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] . . . Read/Set major alarm setting mask. N/A
[<alarm num n>]]
SA-RESET[=<rst alm logic>] Read/Set programmable alarms reset N/A
logic.

Table B-7. General Setting Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SG Read all general settings. N/A
SG-CLK[=<date format(M/D)>,<timeformat(12/24)>] Read/Program time and date format . N/A
SG-COM[#[=<baud>,A<addr>,P<pglen>, Read/Set serial communication protocol. 6.1.1-6.1.3
R<reply ack>,X<XON ena>]]
SG-CT[t][=<CTratio>] Read/Set Phase/Neutral CT ratio. 6.3.1, 6.3.2
SG-DI[p][=<interval>] Read/Set P(IA/IB/IC/), N and Q demand N/A
interval.
SG-DSP[P/N] Read analog signal dsp filter type. N/A
SG-HOLD[n][=<1/0 hold ena>] Read/Program output hold operation. N/A
SG-ID[=<relayID>,<StationID>] Read/Set relay ID and station ID used in N/A
reports.
SG-IN[#[=<r(ms)>,<db(ms)>]] Read/Set input recognition/denounce. N/A
SG-PHROT[=<phase rotation>] Read/Set phase rotation setting. 6.3.7
SG-SCREEN[n][=<default screen number>] Read/Set default screen(s). N/A
SG-SGCON[=<time>] Read/Set SGC output on time. N/A
SG-TARG[=<x/x/...x>,<rst TARG logic>] Report/Enable Target List and Reset N/A
Target Logic.
SG-TRIGGER[n][=<TRIPtrigger>,<PUtrigger>, Read/Set trigger logic. N/A
<LOGIC trigger>]

BE1-851 Appendix B-3

 Table B-8. Breaker Monitoring and Setting Commands
ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SB Read all breaker settings. N/A
SB-DUTY[=<mode>,<DMAX>] Read/Set breaker contact duty. N/A
SB-LOGIC[=<breaker close logic>] Read/Set breaker contact logic. N/A

Table B-9. Programmable Logic Setting Commands

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SL[:<name>] Obtain setting logic information. N/A
SL-x50T[<p>[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]] Read/Set logic for x50 function modules. N/A
SL-x51[<p>[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]] Read/Set logic for 51 function modules. N/A
SL-<f>62[=<mode>,<INI logic>,<BLK logic>] Read/Set logic for 62 function modules. N/A
SL-79[=<mode,<RI logic>,<STATUS logic>, Read/Set logic for 79 function N/A
<WAIT logic>,<LOCKOUT logic>]
SL-BF[<p>][=<mode>,<INI logic>,<BLK logic>]] Read/Set logic for breaker failure function N/A
modules.
SL-GROUP[=<mode>,<BLK logic>] Read/Set logic for setting group module. N/A
SL-N[=<name>] Read, set, or copy the name of the N/A
custom logic.
SL-VO[#[=<Boolean equation>]] Read/Set output logic. N/A

Table B-10. User Programmable Name Setting Command

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
SN[-<var>[=<name>,<TRUE label>,<FALSE label>] Read/Set user programmable names. N/A

B-4 Appendix BE1-851

 Table B-11. Protection Setting Commands
ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
S<g> Read all protection settings. N/A
S<g>-50TP[=<pu>,<td>] Read/Set 50TP pickup level and time 5.x.3.x
delay.
S<g>-<f>50TN[=<pu>,<td>] Read/Set 50TN pickup level and time 5.x.3.x
delay.
S<g>-51P[=<pu>,<td>,<crv>] Read/Set 51 pickup level, time delay, and 5.x.4.x
curve.
S<g>-<f>51N[=<pu>,<td>,<crv>] Read/Set 51N pickup level, time delay, 5.x.4.x
and curve.
S<g>-<f>62[=<t1>,<t2>] Read/Set 62 time delay. 5.x.6.1
S<g>-79[#][=<td>] Read/Set 79 time delay. 5.x.7.1-
5.x.7.4
SP-BF[=<time>[m/s/c]] Read/Set the breaker failure timer setting 5.5.1.1
SP-CURVE[=<A>,<B>,<C>,<N>,<R>] Read/Set the user programmable 51 N/A
curve parameters.
SP-GROUP<g>=[<sw(min)>,<swlevel%>, Read/Program auxiliary setting group N/A
<reset(min)>,<ret level%><prot element>] auto operation.
SP-79ZONE[=<zone pickup logic>] Read/Set 79 zone sequence logic. N/A

Table B-12. Global Command

ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
GS-PW<t>[=<password>,<com ports(0/1/2)>]] Read or change a password. N/A

BE1-851 Appendix B-5

APPENDIX C • RELAY SETTINGS RECORD

INTRODUCTION
This appendix provides a complete listing of all BE1-851 settings. This listing is in the form of a settings
record that you may use to record information relative to your protection system. These settings sheets
may be removed and photo copied. This listing is grouped in the following order with a reminder at the
end to exit with the save settings procedure.

 Global Security Settings

 BESTlogic Settings For User Programmable Logic Scheme
 Active Protection And Control Logic
 Protection Setting Groups
 General Protection Settings
 Alarm Settings
 Breaker Monitoring Settings
 Global Settings

BE1-851 Appendix C-1

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

GLOBAL SECURITY SETTINGS

Global PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWG = ,
Control PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWC = ,
Reports PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWR = ,
Settings PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWS = ,

BESTLOGIC SETTINGS FOR USER PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC SCHEME

The SL-N command is used to set the name of the logic scheme or to copy the pre-programmed logic scheme.
Copy Logic W/ Yes = Name
SL-N =
Function Blk Logic Settings
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Mode, 0,1, , Blk Input Expression
SL-50TP = ,
SL-50TN = ,
SL-150TP = ,
SL-150TN = ,
SL-250TN = ,
SL-350TN = ,
Time Overcurrent = Mode, 0,1,G * , Blk Input Expression
SL-51P = ,
SL-51N = ,
SL-151N = ,
General Purpose Logic Timer = Mode, 0,1,2,3,5,6 , Ini Input Expression , Blk Input Expr
SL-62 = , ,
SL-162 = , ,
Recloser = Mode, 0,1,2 , RI Input Expression , 52Stat Input Expr
SL-79 = , ,

Recloser-2nd Line = Delimiters , Wait Input Expression , DTL/Blk Input Expr

SL-79 = ,, , ,
Breaker Failure = Mode, 0,1 , BFI Input Expression , Blk Input Expr
SL-BF = , ,
Setting Group Selection = Mode, 0,1,2 , D0 Input Expression , D1 Input Expr
SL-GROUP = , ,
Setting Group Sel-2nd Line = Delimiters , D2 Input Expression , D3 Input Expr
SL-GROUP = ,, , ,
Setting Group Sel-3rd Line = Delimiters , Auto Input Expression
SL-GROUP = ,,,, ,

C-2 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Virtual Switches = Mode, 0,1,2,3

SL-43 =
SL-143 =
SL-243 =
SL-343 =
Virtual Bkr Control Switch = Mode, 0,1
SL-101 =
Virtual Output Logic Settings
VO w/ HW Outputs = Output Expression--AND *, OR +, NOT /
SL-VOA =
SL-VO1 =
SL-VO2 =
SL-VO3 =
SL-VO4 =
SL-VO5 =
Additional VO = Output Expression--AND *, OR +, NOT /
SL-VO6 =
SL-VO7 =
SL-VO8 =
SL-VO9 =
SL-VO10 =
SL-VO11 =
SL-VO12 =
SL-VO13 =
SL-VO14 =
SL-VO15 =

USER PROGRAMMABLE LABEL SETTINGS

Contact Sensing 10 Character 7 Character 7 Character
Input Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-IN1 = , ,
SN-IN2 = , ,
SN-IN3 = , ,
SN-IN4 = , ,
Virtual Switch Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-43 = , ,
SN-143 = , ,
SN-243 = , ,
SN-343 = , ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-3

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Virtual Output Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label

SN-VOA = , ,
SN-VO1 = , ,
SN-VO2 = , ,
SN-VO3 = , ,
SN-VO4 = , ,
SN-VO5 = , ,
SN-VO6 = , ,
SN-VO7 = , ,
SN-VO8 = , ,
SN-VO9 = , ,
SN-VO10 = , ,
SN-VO11 = , ,
SN-VO12 = , ,
SN-VO13 = , ,
SN-VO14 = , ,
SN-VO15 = , ,

GLOBAL I/O SETTINGS

Power System Settings
Nominal Frequency = Hz
SG-FREQ =
System Rotation = Mode,ABC,CBA
SG-PHROT =
Digital Signal Processing = Algorithm, F, R, A
SG-DSPP =
SG-DSPN =
CT Ratio = Ratio, Turns
SG-CTP =
SG-CTN
Input Conditioning = Recognition, mSec , Debounce, mSec
SG-IN1 = ,
SG-IN2 = ,
SG-IN3 = ,
SG-IN4 = ,

C-4 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Output Hold Attribute = Hold, 0,1

SG-HOLDA =
SG-HOLD1 =
SG-HOLD2 =
SG-HOLD3 =
SG-HOLD4 =
SG-HOLD5 =

PROTECTION SETTING GROUPS

GROUP 0
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M = mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-50TP = ,
S0-50TN = ,
S0-50TQ = ,
S0-150TP = ,
S0-150TN = ,
S0-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S0-51P = , ,
S0-51N = , ,
S0-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-62 = ,
S0-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-791 =
S0-792 =
S0-793 =
S0-794 =
S0-79R =
S0-79F =
S0-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S0-79SCB =
GROUP 1
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-50TP = ,
S1-50TN = ,
S1-50TQ = ,
S1-150TP = ,
S1-150TN = ,
S1-150TQ = ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-5

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve

S1-51P = , ,
S1-51N = , ,
S1-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time, M,C,S , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-62 = ,
S1-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-791 =
S1-792 =
S1-793 =
S1-794 =
S1-79R =
S1-79F =
S1-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S1-79SCB =
GROUP 2
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S2-50TP = ,
S2-50TN = ,
S2-50TQ = ,
S2-150TP = ,
S2-150TN = ,
S2-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S2-51P = , ,
S2-51N = , ,
S2-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S2-62 = ,
S2-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is if not specified)
S2-791 =
S2-792 =
S2-793 =
S2-794 =
S2-79R =
S2-79F =
S2-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S2-79SCB =

C-6 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

GROUP 3
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-50TP = ,
S3-50TN = ,
S3-50TQ = ,
S3-150TP = ,
S3-150TN = ,
S3-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S3-51P = , ,
S3-51N = , ,
S3-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-62 = ,
S3-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-791 =
S3-792 =
S3-793 =
S3-794 =
S3-79R =
S3-79F =
S3-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S3-79SCB =
GENERAL PROTECTION SETTINGS
Recloser Zone Sequence Logic = Logic Expression
SP-79ZONE =
Breaker Failure = Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
SP-BF =
Programmable Curve = A Coefficient , B Coefficient , C Coefficient , N Coefficient
SP-CURVE = , , ,
Programmable Curve-2nd Line = Delimiters , R Coefficient
SP-CURVE = ,,, ,
Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings
Grp 1 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP1 = , , ,
Grp 1 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP1 = ,,, ,
Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings
Grp 2 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP2 = , , ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-7

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Grp 2 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP2 = ,,, ,

Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings

Grp 3 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP3 = , , ,
Grp 3 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP3 = ,,, ,
Setting Group Changed Timer = Time, Sec
SG-SGCON =

REPORTING AND ALARM FUNCTION SETTINGS

DEMAND REPORTING SETTINGS
Demand Interval = Time, Min (DIP setting applies to Power Demands also)
SG-DIP =
SG-DIN =
SG-DIQ =

FAULT REPORTING SETTINGS

Targets = Protective Functions Separated by /'s
SG-TARG =
Targets-2nd Line = Delimiters , Target Reset via Programmable Logic Expr
SG-TARG = ,
Fault Record Triggers
Fault Record Trigger = Delimiters Trip Logic Expr
SG-TRIGGER =
Flt Record Trigger-2nd Line = Delimiters , PU Logic Expr
SG-TRIGGER = ,
Flt Record Trigger-3rd Line = Delimiters , Logic Trigger Expr
SG-TRIGGER = , ,

DISPLAY AND COMMUNICATION SETTINGS

Identifier Information = Relay ID, 10 Char--Used in COMTRADE file as "rec_dev_id" field
SG-ID =
,Station ID, 30 Char--Used in COMTRADE file as "station_name"
ID Information-2nd Line = field
SG-ID = ,
Clock Display Mode = Date, M or D , Time, 12 or 24 , Auto Daylight Savings Adjust, 0=OFF,1=ON
SG-CLK = , ,

C-8 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

Auto Scroll List = HMI Screen #

SG-SCREEN1 =
SG-SCREEN2 =
SG-SCREEN3 =
SG-SCREEN4 =
SG-SCREEN5 =
SG-SCREEN6 =
SG-SCREEN7 =
SG-SCREEN8 =
SG-SCREEN9 =
SG-SCREEN10 =
SG-SCREEN11 =
SG-SCREEN12 =
SG-SCREEN13 =
SG-SCREEN14 =
SG-SCREEN15 =
SG-SCREEN16 =
Communications
Front RS232 Port = Baud , Address , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM0 = , A0 , ,
Front RS232 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake, X0,1
SG-COM0 = ,,, ,
Rear RS232 Port = Baud , Address, A0-65534 , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM1 = , , ,
Rear RS232 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake, X0,1
SG-COM1 = ,,, ,
Rear RS485 Port = Baud , Address, A0-65534 , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM2 = , , ,
Rear RS485 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake
SG-COM2 = ,,, , X0
The following settings are only for units with Modbus (Style # BE1-951 xx-xxx1).
Remote
RS485 Port Modbus Settings = EP Format, MF0,1 , Parity, MPN,O,E , Delay,MRmSec , Stop Bits, MS1,2
SG-COM2=,,,,, , , ,
BREAKER MONITORING SETTINGS
Breaker Duty = Mode, 1=I,2=I2 , 100% Duty, x.xxxE+xx,Amps
SB-DUTY = ,
Breaker Duty-2nd Line = Delimiters , Block Duty Accumulation via Programmable Logic Expression
SB-DUTY = , ,
Breaker Status
Breaker Status Logic = Logic Expression
SB-LOGIC =

BE1-851 Appendix C-9

 Senaing Input Type G Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number G Serial Number Version Number

ALARM SETTINGS
Breaker Alarms = Mode, 0,1,2,3 , Threshold
SA-BKR1 = ,
SA-BKR2 = ,
SA-BKR3 = ,
Current Demand Alarms = Threshold, Sec A
SA-DIP =
SA-DIN =
SA-DIQ =
Alarm Priority = Mask of Alarm Points, Separated by /'s See Alarm Point List
SA-LGC =
SA-MAJ =
SA-MIN =
Alarm Reset Logic = Alarm Reset via Programmable Logic Expression
SA-RESET =
EXIT WITH SAVE SETTINGS--YES
E
Y

C-10 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

GLOBAL SECURITY SETTINGS

Global PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWG = ,
Control PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWC = ,
Reports PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWR = ,
Settings PW and Access Ports = Password, 8 Char , Ports, 0/1/2
GS-PWS = ,

BESTLOGIC SETTINGS FOR USER PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC SCHEME

The SL-N command is used to set the name of the logic scheme or to copy the pre-programmed logic scheme.
Copy Logic W/ Yes = Name
SL-N =
Function Blk Logic Settings
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Mode, 0,1, , Blk Input Expression
SL-50TP = ,
SL-50TN = ,
SL-50TQ = ,
SL-150TP = ,
SL-150TN = ,
SL-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Mode, 0,1,G * , Blk Input Expression
SL-51P = ,
SL-51N = ,
SL-51Q = ,
General Purpose Logic Timer = Mode, 0,1,2,3,5,6 , Ini Input Expression , Blk Input Expr
SL-62 = , ,
SL-162 = , ,
Recloser = Mode, 0,1,2 , RI Input Expression , 52Stat Input Expr
SL-79 = , ,

Recloser-2nd Line = Delimiters , Wait Input Expression , DTL/Blk Input Expr

SL-79 = ,, , ,
Breaker Failure = Mode, 0,1 , BFI Input Expression , Blk Input Expr
SL-BF = , ,
Setting Group Selection = Mode, 0,1,2 , D0 Input Expression , D1 Input Expr
SL-GROUP = , ,
Setting Group Sel-2nd Line = Delimiters , D2 Input Expression , D3 Input Expr
SL-GROUP = ,, , ,
Setting Group Sel-3rd Line = Delimiters , Auto Input Expression
SL-GROUP = ,,,, ,
Virtual Switches = Mode, 0,1,2,3
SL-43 =

BE1-851 Appendix C-11

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

SL-143 =
SL-243 =
SL-343 =
Virtual Bkr Control Switch = Mode, 0,1
SL-101 =
Virtual Output Logic Settings
VO w/ HW Outputs = Output Expression--AND *, OR +, NOT /
SL-VOA =
SL-VO1 =
SL-VO2 =
SL-VO3 =
SL-VO4 =
SL-VO5 =
Additional VO = Output Expression--AND *, OR +, NOT /
SL-VO6 =
SL-VO7 =
SL-VO8 =
SL-VO9 =
SL-VO10 =
SL-VO11 =
SL-VO12 =
SL-VO13 =
SL-VO14 =
SL-VO15 =

USER PROGRAMMABLE LABEL SETTINGS

Contact Sensing 10 Character 7 Character 7 Character
Input Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-IN1 = , ,
SN-IN2 = , ,
SN-IN3 = , ,
SN-IN4 = , ,
Virtual Switch Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-43 = , ,
SN-143 = , ,
SN-243 = , ,
SN-343 = , ,
Virtual Output Labels = Variable Label , 1 State Label , 0 State Label
SN-VOA = , ,
SN-VO1 = , ,
SN-VO2 = , ,
SN-VO3 = , ,

C-12 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

SN-VO4 = , ,
SN-VO5 = , ,
SN-VO6 = , ,
SN-VO7 = , ,
SN-VO8 = , ,
SN-VO9 = , ,
SN-VO10 = , ,
SN-VO11 = , ,
SN-VO12 = , ,
SN-VO13 = , ,
SN-VO14 = , ,
SN-VO15 = , ,

GLOBAL I/O SETTINGS

Power System Settings
Nominal Frequency = Hz
SG-FREQ =
Mode,1=ABC,2=CB
System Rotation = A
SG-PHROT =
Digital Signal Processing = Algorithm, F, R, A
SG-DSPP =
SG-DSPN =
CT Ratio = Ratio, Turns
SG-CTP =
SG-CTN
Input Conditioning = Recognition, mSec , Debounce, mSec
SG-IN1 = ,
SG-IN2 = ,
SG-IN3 = ,
SG-IN4 = ,
Output Hold Attribute = Hold, 0,1
SG-HOLDA =
SG-HOLD1 =
SG-HOLD2 =
SG-HOLD3 =
SG-HOLD4 =
SG-HOLD5 =

PROTECTION SETTING GROUPS

GROUP 0
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M = mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-50TP = ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-13

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

S0-50TN = ,
S0-50TQ = ,
S0-150TP = ,
S0-150TN = ,
S0-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S0-51P = , ,
S0-51N = , ,
S0-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-62 = ,
S0-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S0-791 =
S0-792 =
S0-793 =
S0-794 =
S0-79R =
S0-79F =
S0-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S0-79SCB =
GROUP 1
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-50TP = ,
S1-50TN = ,
S1-50TQ = ,
S1-150TP = ,
S1-150TN = ,
S1-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S1-51P = , ,
S1-51N = , ,
S1-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time, M,C,S , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-62 = ,
S1-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S1-791 =
S1-792 =
S1-793 =
S1-794 =

C-14 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

S1-79R =
S1-79F =
S1-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S1-79SCB =
GROUP 2
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S2-50TP = ,
S2-50TN = ,
S2-50TQ = ,
S2-150TP = ,
S2-150TN = ,
S2-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S2-51P = , ,
S2-51N = , ,
S2-51Q = , ,
Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S2-62 = ,
S2-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is if not specified)
S2-791 =
S2-792 =
S2-793 =
S2-794 =
S2-79R =
S2-79F =
S2-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S2-79SCB =
GROUP 3
Inst OC w/ Time Delay = Pick Up, Sec A , Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-50TP = ,
S3-50TN = ,
S3-50TQ = ,
S3-150TP = ,
S3-150TN = ,
S3-150TQ = ,
Time Overcurrent = Pick Up, Sec A , Time Dial , Curve
S3-51P = , ,
S3-51N = , ,
S3-51Q = , ,

BE1-851 Appendix C-15

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

Timers = T1 Time , T2 Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)

S3-62 = ,
S3-162 = ,
Recloser = Time, M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
S3-791 =
S3-792 =
S3-793 =
S3-794 =
S3-79R =
S3-79F =
S3-79M =
Recloser SCB Output = Trip Numbers
S3-79SCB =
GENERAL PROTECTION SETTINGS
Recloser Zone Sequence Logic = Logic Expression
SP-79ZONE =
Breaker Failure = Time M=mSec, C=Cyc, S=Sec (M is default if not specified)
SP-BF =
Programmable Curve = A Coefficient , B Coefficient , C Coefficient , N Coefficient
SP-CURVE = , , ,
Programmable Curve-2nd Line = Delimiters , R Coefficient
SP-CURVE = ,,, ,
Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings
Grp 1 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP1 = , , ,
Grp 1 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP1 = ,,, ,
Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings
Grp 2 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP2 = , , ,
Grp 2 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP2 = ,,, ,

Automatic Group Selection Switch Settings , Return Settings

Grp 3 Auto Settings = Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x , Time, Min , Level,%GRP0 51x
SP-GROUP3 = , , ,
Grp 3 Auto Settings-2nd Line = Delimiters , GRP0 51x element, 51P, 51N, 51Q, 791, 792, 793, 794
SP-GROUP3 = ,,, ,
Setting Group Changed Timer = Time, Sec
SG-SGCON =

REPORTING AND ALARM FUNCTION SETTINGS

DEMAND REPORTING SETTINGS

C-16 Appendix BE1-851

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

Demand Interval = Time, Min (DIP setting applies to Power Demands also)
SG-DIP =
SG-DIN =
SG-DIQ =

FAULT REPORTING SETTINGS

Targets = Protective Functions Separated by /'s
SG-TARG =
Targets-2nd Line = Delimiters , Target Reset via Programmable Logic Expr
SG-TARG = ,
Fault Record Triggers
Fault Record Trigger = Delimiters Trip Logic Expr
SG-TRIGGER =
Flt Record Trigger-2nd Line = Delimiters , PU Logic Expr
SG-TRIGGER = ,
Flt Record Trigger-3rd Line = Delimiters , Logic Trigger Expr
SG-TRIGGER = , ,

DISPLAY AND COMMUNICATION SETTINGS

Identifier Information = Relay ID, 10 Char--Used in COMTRADE file as "rec_dev_id" field
SG-ID =
,Station ID, 30 Char--Used in COMTRADE file as "station_name"
ID Information-2nd Line = field
SG-ID = ,
Clock Display Mode = Date, M or D , Time, 12 or 24 , Auto Daylight Savings Adjust, 0=OFF,1=ON
SG-CLK = , ,
Auto Scroll List = HMI Screen #
SG-SCREEN1 =
SG-SCREEN2 =
SG-SCREEN3 =
SG-SCREEN4 =
SG-SCREEN5 =
SG-SCREEN6 =
SG-SCREEN7 =
SG-SCREEN8 =
SG-SCREEN9 =
SG-SCREEN10 =
SG-SCREEN11 =
SG-SCREEN12 =
SG-SCREEN13 =
SG-SCREEN14 =
SG-SCREEN15 =
SG-SCREEN16 =

BE1-851 Appendix C-17

 Sensing Input Type H Relays
Substation ID Relay ID Date Page of
BE1-851 Style Number H Serial Number Version Number

Communications
Front RS232 Port = Baud , Address , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM0 = , A0 , ,
Front RS232 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake, X0,1
SG-COM0 = ,,, ,
Rear RS232 Port = Baud , Address, A0-65534 , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM1 = , , ,
Rear RS232 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake, X0,1
SG-COM1 = ,,, ,
Rear RS485 Port = Baud , Address, A0-65534 , Page Length,P0-40 , Reply Ack, R0,1
SG-COM2 = , , ,
Rear RS485 Port - 2nd Line = Delimiters , Handshake
SG-COM2 = ,,, , X0
The following settings are only for units with Modbus (Style # BE1-951 xx-xxx1).
Remote
RS485 Port Modbus Settings = EP Format, MF0,1 , Parity, MPN,O,E , Delay,MRmSec , Stop Bits, MS1,2
SG-COM2=,,,,, , , ,
BREAKER MONITORING SETTINGS
Breaker Duty = Mode, 1=I,2=I2 , 100% Duty, x.xxxE+xx,Amps
SB-DUTY = ,
Breaker Duty-2nd Line = Delimiters , Block Duty Accumulation via Programmable Logic Expression
SB-DUTY = , ,
Breaker Status
Breaker Status Logic = Logic Expression
SB-LOGIC =
ALARM SETTINGS
Breaker Alarms = Mode, 0,1,2,3 , Threshold
SA-BKR1 = ,
SA-BKR2 = ,
SA-BKR3 = ,
Current Demand Alarms = Threshold, Sec A
SA-DIP =
SA-DIN =
SA-DIQ =
Alarm Priority = Mask of Alarm Points, Separated by /'s See Alarm Point List
SA-LGC =
SA-MAJ =
SA-MIN =
Alarm Reset Logic = Alarm Reset via Programmable Logic Expression
SA-RESET =
EXIT WITH SAVE SETTINGS--YES
E
Y

C-18 Appendix BE1-851

APPENDIX D • TERMINAL COMMUNICATION
This appendix provides instructions for configuring Windows 95® HyperTerminal and Windows® Terminal
to communicate with your BE1-851 relay.

WINDOWS 95® HYPERTERMINAL

Step 1. Click Start: Highlight Programs, Accessories, HyperTerminal.
Step 2. Click HyperTerminal to open the folder.
Step 3. Select the file or icon labeled Hypertrm or Hypertrm.exe. Once the program has started, you will be
presented with a series of dialog boxes.
Step 4. Dialog Box: CONNECTION DESCRIPTION
See Figure D-1.
a. Type the desired file name, for example,
BE1-851
b. Click “OK”
Step 5. Dialog Box: PHONE NUMBER
a. Click drop-down menu: CONNECT USING
Select Direct To ComX, where X is the port you
are using on your computer.
b. Click “OK”

Step 6. Dialog Box: COMX Properties Figure D-1. Connection Description Dialog Box

a. Make the following selections using Figure D-2

as a guide.
Set the bits per second setting so that it
matches the setting of the relay. The default
baud rate of the relay is 9600.
Set the data bits at 8.
Set the stop bits at 1.
Set flow control to Xon/Xoff.
b. Click “OK”. This creates an icon with the file
name entered in Step 4 and places it in the
HyperTerminal folder. Future communication
sessions can then be started by clicking the
appropriate icon.
Step 7. Click File/Properties on the menu bar. Click the
Settings tab.
a. Make the following selections:
Check the Terminal Keys radio button.
Figure D-2. COM Properties Dialog Box
Select VT-100 emulation.
Set the Backscroll Buffer to the maximum setting of 500.

BE1-851 Appendix D-1

 b. Click the ASCII Setup button. Make the
following selections using Figure D-3 as a
guide.
ASCII Sending
Place a check at Send line ends...
Place a check at Echo typed...
Select a line delay setting of 100 to 200
milliseconds.
Select the Character delay at 0.
ASCII Receiving
Disable Append line feeds... by leaving
unchecked.
Disable Force incoming... by leaving
unchecked.
Place a check at Wrap lines... Figure D-3. ASCII Setup Dialog Box
c. Click “OK”.
d. Click “OK”.
Step 8. Click File and click Save.

NOTE
Settings changes do not become active until the settings are saved.

Step 9. HyperTerminal is now ready to communicate with the relay. Table D-1 describes the required
connection for each RS-232 port.
Table D-1. RS-232 Communication Ports
Connection Type

Front Port 9-pin female DCE

PC to Front RS-232 port cable Straight

Rear Port 9-pin female DCE

Modem to Rear RS-232 port cable Null modem

PC to Rear RS-232 port cable Straight

WINDOWS® TERMINAL
Step 1. In Program Manager, open the Accessories program group and double click the Terminal icon to
start the program.
Step 2. On the menu bar, select Settings/Terminal Emulation.
a. In the dialog box, click DEC VT-100 (ANSI).
b. Click “OK”.

D-2 Appendix BE1-951

Step 3. Select Settings/Terminal Preferences.
a. Using Figure D-4 as a guide, make the
following selections in the dialog box:
Check the Line Wrap and Local Echo
boxes to enable these functions.
Disable the CR->CR/LF Inbound function.
Enable the CR->CR/LF Outbound function.
b. Set the Buffer Lines at 244.
c. Click “OK”.
Step 4. Select Settings/Text Transfers
a. Make the following selections using Figure
D-5 as a guide.
Figure D-4. Terminal Preferences Dialog Box
Set Flow Control at Line at a Time.
Enable Delay Between Lines and set the
delay at 1 or 2/10 Sec.
Disable Word Wrap...
b. Click “OK”.
Step 5. Select Settings/Communications
a. Make the following selections:
Under Connector, select the appropriate
communication port for your computer.
Adjust the Baud Rate setting so that it matches
the setting of the relay. The default baud rate
of the BE1-851 is 9600. Figure D-5. Text Transfers Dialog Box

Set the Data Bits at 8.

Disable Parity Check.
Set the Stop Bits at 1.
Set Flow Control to Xon/Xoff.
b. Click “OK”.
Step 6. Click File/Save. Enter a desired file name such as
BE1-851.trm. For future communication sessions,
click File and open this file. Terminal will
automatically be setup properly to communicate
with the BE1-851 relay.
Step 7. Terminal is now ready to communicate with the
relay. Table D-1 describes the required
connection for each RS-232 port. Figure D-6. Communications Dialog Box

BE1-851 Appendix D-3

 INDEX
RB-OPCNTR Command . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
A SB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
SB-LOGIC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Logic Programmable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
RB-OPCNTR Command . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Major, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
SB-LOGIC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Minor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Programming Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
RA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 C
Trouble Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3; 13-1
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 IRIG Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
SA-MAJ/MIN/LGC Command . . . . . . 6-27 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
SA-RESET Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 RG-DATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Breaker Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 RG-TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
SA-BKR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Application Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 SG-CLK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Command Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Negative Sequence Protection . . . . . 8-60 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
Reclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60 Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
Setting Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61 Metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
Trip Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
ARSTKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4; 10-2
ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
SG-COM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
ASCII COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 RS-232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Command Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 RS-232 Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 RS-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 RS-485 Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Text File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 contact sensing inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2; 3-4
ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Current Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . 3-1
RS-232 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Digital Signal Processing. . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
RS-485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Current Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Negative Sequence Current. . . . . . . . . 3-2
Neutral Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
B Nominal Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Batch Command Text File Operations. . . . 2-5
SG-CT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
BESTCOMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
SG-DSP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
SG-FREQ Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
BESTlogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
SG-PHROT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Application Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Failure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 D
Duty Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
RB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Retrieving Breaker Duty Information . 6-14 Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
SB-DUTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Overload and Unbalance Alarms . . . . . 6-9
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 RD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

BE1-851 Index i
 RD-PI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Surge Withstand Capability . . . . . . . . 1-13
RD-TI/YI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 U.L. Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Reporting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
SA-DI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 General Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . 6-3; , 1-3
SG-DI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Conditioning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 H
SG-IN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Hardware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Dovetailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
RG-VER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
E Display Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Entering Test Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Control Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Entering Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
F Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Screen Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fault Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Fault Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
SG-SCREEN Command . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
SG-TRIGGER Command . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Fault Report Information . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
RF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 I
Identifier Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
G SG-ID Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection . . . . 4-9
General Purpose Logic Timers
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2; 4-20
Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
S<g>-50T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Integrating Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
SL-x50T Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
IRIG Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
One-Shot Nonretriggerable Timer
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
IRIG Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
One-Shot Retriggerable Timer . . . . . . 4-21
Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Pickup/Dropout Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 L
S<g>-62/162 Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Logic Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
SL-x62 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
AC Current Inputs with 1 A CT . . . . . . 1-12 FEEDER_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
AC Current Inputs With 5 A CT . . . . . ,1-11 FEEDER_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Analog To Digital Converter . . . . . . . . 1-12 FEEDER_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
C.S.A. Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 FEEDER_4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Control Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . 1-13 Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 SL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7, 7-8
Output Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 SL-N Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) . . 1-13 Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

ii INDEX BE1-851
 SL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
P
Power System Measurement Functions . . . 1-1
M Programmable Time Current . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 SP-CURVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Metering Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Programmable Hold Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 SG-HOLD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
M Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Programmable Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Miscellaneous Command Descriptions . . . 11-3
Access Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
EXIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 R
HELP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
PRIVILEGE C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . 4-16, 4-17
PRIVILEGE R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Breaker Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
SA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Drive to Lockout/Block Recloser . . . . 4-16
SB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
SG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Reclose Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
SN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Reclose Initiate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Reclose Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
S<g>-79 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
SP-79ZONE Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
O Relay Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Operational Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Setting Group Characteristics . . . . . . . 1-11 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
BESTlogic Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Breaker Fail Timer (BF) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Values And Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Contact Inputs Recognition Time . . . . . . 1-7
General Purpose Timers (62, 162) . . . 1-11 S
Instantaneous Overcurrent Functions . . 1-9
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
IRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
GS-PW Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Metered Current Values And Accuracy . 1-7
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Reclosing Timers (79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Sequence Of Events Recorder . . . . 6-23; 1-4
Time Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . 1-8
Retrieving SER Information . . . . . . . . 6-23
Time-Current Characteristic Curves . . . 1-8
RS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Oscillographic Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Retrieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Settings Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2; 4-1
RO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
CS/CO-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Output Logic Override Control . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Logic Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
CS/CO-OUT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Retrieving Setting Group Status . . . . . 4-9
Enabling Logic Override Control . . . . . 3-7
Setting BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Pulsing an Output Contact . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
SG-SGCON Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Retrieving Output Logic Override Status 3-8
SL-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Output Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
SP-GROUP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Output Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
SL-VO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 T
Relay Trouble Alarm Disable . . . . . . . . 3-6 Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Retrieving Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Retrieving Target Information . . . . . . 6-19
Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 RG-TARG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
SG-TARG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Testing
Pickup Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

BE1-851 Index iii

 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Dropout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Relay Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
RG-VER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Trip Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Trip Circuit Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Time Overcurrent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
SL-x51 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Operating Setting’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
S<g>-x51 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

V
Variable Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4,7-10
SN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Version Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . 4-26
BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
CS/CO-101Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
SL-101 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Virtual Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Virtual Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24, 4-25
CS/CO-x43 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
SL-x43 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

iv INDEX BE1-851
 ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE 618-654-2341 FAX 618-654-2351
 INSTRUCTION MANUAL
for

BE1-851
OVERCURRENT
PROTECTION SYSTEM

DISTRIBUTED NETWORK PROTOCOL

(DNP V3.00)

Publication Number: 9 2899 00 995

Revision : C 03/2000
 INTRODUCTION

This manual provides detail information for BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System with the Distributed
Network Protocol (DNP V3.00).

BE1-851 DNP Protocol i

 First Printing: April 1998

Printed in USA

© 1998, 1999, 2000 Basler Electric Co., Highland, IL 62249

March 2000

CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
OF BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY, HIGHLAND, IL. IT IS LOANED FOR
CONFIDENTIAL USE, SUBJECT TO RETURN ON REQUEST, AND WITH THE
MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING THAT IT WILL NOT BE USED IN ANY MANNER
DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTEREST OF BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY.

It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor
does this manual provide data for every possible contingency regarding installation or
operation. The availability and design of all features and options are subject to
modification without notice. Should further information be required, contact Basler
Electric Company, Highland, Illinois.

BASLER ELECTRIC
ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE 618-654-2341 FAX 618-654-2351
ii DNP Protocol BE1-851
 CONTENTS
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION................................................................................................. 1-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 1-1
REFERENCES ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1
SECTION 2 • DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE............................................................................................ 2-1

SECTION 3 • IMPLEMENTATION TABLE ............................................................................................... 3-1

DNP V3.00 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE................................................................................................ 3-1
SECTION 4 • DNP V3.00 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS................................................................. 4-1
DNP CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS............................................................................................... 4-1
SECTION 5 • DNP V3.00 POINT LIST...................................................................................................... 5-1
BINARY INPUT POINTS........................................................................................................................ 5-1
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS............................. 5-4
ANALOG INPUTS .................................................................................................................................. 5-5
ANALOG OUTPUT STATUS POINTS AND CONTROL BLOCKS...................................................... 5-11
8-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER, OBJECT 102 ........................................................................................ 5-15

BE1-851 DNP Protocol iii

SECTION 1 • GENERAL IN FORMATION
INTRODUCTION
This document describes the Basler Electric Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) implementation in the
BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System. BE1-851 is classified as an intelligent electronic device (IED)
that is capable of reacting or responding to specific requests conforming to a level two slave device, as
defined in the DNP V3.00 Subset Definitions Document. This manual contains a list of DNP data objects
accessible by a master station.
NOTE
This implementation of DNP V3.00 is fully compliant with DNP V3.00 Subset Definition
Level 2, contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even
beyond Subset Level 3.

REFERENCES
• Instruction Manual for BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System
• DNP V3.00 Basic 4 Document Set
• DNP Subset Definitions Document
• The DNP website (www.DNP.org)

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 1-1

SECTION 2 • DNP V3.00 D EVICE PROFILE
DOCUMENT
Table 1 provides a Device Profile Document in the standard format defined in the DNP V3.00 subset
definition document. The table, in combination with the implementation table provided in Section 3 and
the point list tables provided in Section 5, provide a complete application configuration guide for including
the BE1-851 DNP protocol in any DNP environment.
Table 1. DNP V3.00 Device Profile Document

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Vendor Name: Basler Electric Company
Device Name: BE1-851 Overcurrent Protection System
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
DNP-L2. Master Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the highest DNP levels supported
(the complete list is described in DNP V3.00 Implementation Table):
- For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01(start-stop), 07
and 08 limited quantity), and 17 and 28(index) are supported in addition to request qualifier code
06 (no range – or all points).
- Static object requests sent with qualifiers 00,01,06,07, and 08, will be responded to with qualifiers
00 or 01.
- Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 and 28 will be responded to with qualifiers 17 or 28.
- The read function code for object 102 (8-bit unsigned integer), variation 1, is supported.
- Time period when device requires time-synchronization from the master is configurable via object
41, point 22.
- Dead band for current analog inputs’ events is configurable via object 41, point 23.

Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted 292 Transmitted 2048
Received 292 Received 1024

Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

None None
Fixed at Fixed at
Configurable Configurable, range ______ to ______

Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:

Never
Always
Sometimes If 'Sometimes', when?
Configurable If 'Configurable', how?

Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

Never
Always (not recommended)
When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only)
When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 2-1

 DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm None Fixed at 3000 ms Variable Configurable

Complete Appl. Fragment None Fixed at Variable Configurable
Application Confirm None Fixed at 5000 ms Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Response None Fixed at Variable Configurable

Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable

SELECT/OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Count > 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events
specific variation requested (Slave Only): when no specific variation requested:
Never Never
Only time-tagged Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable to send both, one or the other Configurable (attach explanation)
(attach explanation)

Master Expects Binary Input Change Events:

Never
Either time-tagged or non-time-tagged for a single event
Both time-tagged and non-time-tagged for a single event
Configurable (attach explanation)

Sends Unsolicited Responses Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses

(Slave Only): (Slave Only):
Never
Configurable (attach explanation) Never
Only certain objects When Device Restarts
Sometimes (attach explanation) When Status Flags Change
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported No other options are permitted.

Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

No Counters Reported No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation) Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object 16 Bits
Default Variation 32 Bits
Point-by-point list attached Other Value:
Point- by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses (Slave Only): Yes No

2-2 DNP Protocol BE1-851

SECTION 3 • IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
DNP V3.00 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
Table 2 identifies which object variations, function codes, and qualifiers the BE1-851 DNP supports in
both request messages and in response messages.
For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08 will be responded
to with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded to with
qualifiers 17 or 28.
For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 and 28 are always responded.
Table 2. BE1-851 DNP Implementation Table
OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
(BE1-851 will parse) (BE1-851 will respond with)
Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes
No. No. Description (dec) (hex) (hex) (hex)
1 0 Binary Inputs – (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00,01 (start- stop)
used to request default 06 (no range)
variation) 07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
1 1 Single-Bit Binary Input 1 (read) 00,01 (start- stop) 81 00,01 (start-stop)
06 (no range)
(default – (response) 17,28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty)
see note 1)
17,28 (index)
Binary Input Change 06 (no range)
2 0 1 (read)
(Variation 0 is used to request 07,08 (limited qty)
default variation)
06 (no range)
2 1 Binary Input Change without 1 (read) 81 17,28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty)
time
(response)
06 (no range)
2 2 Binary Input Change with time 1 (read) 81 17,28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty)
(default – (response)
see note 1)
10 0 Binary Output – (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 00,01 (start- stop)
06 (no range)
used to request default
07,08 (limited qty)
variation)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start- stop)
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 81 00,01 (start-stop)
06 (no range)
(default – 07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
see note 1) 17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 81 echo of request
07,08 (limited qty)
4 (operate) 17,28 (index)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir op Noack)
00,01 (start- stop)
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is 1 (read) 81(response) 00,01 (start-stop)
used to request default 06 (no range)
07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
variation)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start- stop)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input With Flag 1 (read) 81 00,01 (start-stop)
06 (no range)
07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start- stop)
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input With Flag 1 (read) 81 00,01 (start-stop)
06 (no range)
07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
32-Bit Analog Input Without 00,01 (start- stop)
30 3 1 (read) 81 00,01 (start-stop)
Flag 06 (no range)
(default – 07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
see note 1) 17,28 (index)

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 3-1

 OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
(BE1-851 will parse) (BE1-851 will respond with)
Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes
No. No. Description (dec) (hex) (hex) (hex)
16-Bit Analog Input Without 00,01 (start- stop)
30 4 1 (read) 81 00,01 (start-stop)
Flag 06 (no range)
07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
06 (no range)
32 0 Analog Change Event 1 (read)
(Variation 0 is used to request 07,08 (limited qty)
default variation)
06 (no range)
32 1 32-Bit Analog Input without 1 (read) 81 17,28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty)
time
(default –
see note 1)
16-Bit Analog Input without 06 (no range)
32 2 1 (read) 81 17,28 (index)
time 07,08 (limited qty)
06 (no range)
32 3 32-Bit Analog Input with time 1 (read) 81 17,28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty)
32 4 16-Bit Analog Input with time 1 (read) 06 (no range) 81 17,28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty)
00,01 (start-stop)
40 0 Analog Output Status – 1
(Variation 0 is used to request 06 (no range)
default variation) 07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
40 1 32-bit Analog Output Status 1 (read) 81 00,01 (start-stop)
06 (no range)
07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
40 2 16-bit Analog Output Status 1 (read) 81 00,01 (start-stop)
06 (no range)
(default - 07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
see note 1) 17,28 (index)
3 (select) 4 00,01 (start-stop)
41 1 32-bit Analog Output Block 81 echo of request
(operate) 5 07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
(direct op) 6 (dir
op noack)
41 2 16-bit Analog Output Block 3 (select) 00,01 (start-stop) 81 echo of request
07,08 (limited qty)
4 (operate) 17,28 (index)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir op noack)
00,01 (start-stop)
50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 81 00,01 (start-stop)
06 (no range or all)
2 (write) 07 (limited qty=1) 17,28 (index)
08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
06 (no range or all)
60 1 Class 0 Data (Note 1) (Note 4) 1 (read) 81
06 (no range or all)
60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 81
07,08 (limited qty)
06 (no range or all)
60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 81
07,08 (limited qty)
06 (no range or all)
60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 81
07,08 (limited qty)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(index must=7)
00,01 (start- stop)
102 1 8-Bit Unsigned Integer (Note 1 (read) 81(response) 00,01 (start-stop)
06 (no range)
2)
07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
17,28 (index)
No Object(function code only) 13 (cold restart)
(See Note 3)
No Object(function code only) 14 (warm
(See Note 3) restart)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas)

3-2 DNP Protocol BE1-851

Notes for Table 2:
1. A Default variation refers to the variation responded to when variation 0 is requested and/or in class
0,1,2, or 3 scans.
2. Object 102 is not included in Class 0 poll response.
3. A cold restart is implemented as a warm restart – the DNP process is restarted.
4. In Class 0 are included all Binary Inputs (object 1), and a selected set of Analog Inputs (object 30).
Binary Output Status points and Analog Output Status points are not included in Class 0.

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 3-3

SECTION 4 • DNP V3.00 C ONFIGURATION
PARAMETERS
DNP CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
These paragraphs describe configuration settings that may be verified/changed from the BE1-851 front
panel or using ASCII protocol commands.

Relay Style Number

BE1-851 relays that support the DNP protocol must have a Style Number that ends with the number 3.
This can be verified by reading the relay Style Number via the front communication port using the
RG-VER ASCII command. (Reference the BE1-851 Instructional Manual, part number 9 2899 00 990).
Example:
>rg-ver
Model Number: BE1-851
Style Number: H5-N1H3
App Program: VER 3.42.00 08/16/99
Boot Program: VER
Serial Number:H12345678

BE1-851 Slave Address

BE1-851 relays support DNP through the rear RS-485 communication port, which is communication port
2 (COM2). This port supports Baud Rates: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200, and the default Baud
Rate is 9600.
DNP Slave IED Address Range is from 0 to 65534. Address 65535 (hex FFFF) is used to broadcast
messages to all devices. The communication address can be set by the SG-COM ASCII command. For
more information about changing the relay parameters, refer to the BE1-851 Instructional Manual, part
number 9 2899 00 990.
Example: Set the BE1-851 address to be 125, and baud rate to be 9600.
(In the following example, the operator’s commands are in bold.)
>a=<global_password> <enter> //enter global password
>ACCESS GRANTED: GLOBAL
> sg-com2=9600,a125(enter)
>exit (enter)
>SAVE CHANGES (Y/N/C) ?
>y <enter>
>CHANGE COMM PARAMETERS
>
To verify port address, enter command
>sg-com2(enter)
>SG-COM2=9600, A125, P0,R1,X0

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 4-1

SECTION 5 • DNP V3.00 P OINT LIST
BINARY INPUT POINTS
Binary Input changes are scanned every four milliseconds. Events are pending in the Slave application
buffer until the Master device sends conformation that response with pending events were received.
Table 3 describes the binary input points.
Table 3. Binary Input Points
Binary Input Points
Static Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes Supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation Reported When Variation 0 Requested: 1 (Binary Input Without Status)
Change Event Variation Reported When Variation 0 Requested: 2 (Binary Input Change With Time)

Point Description Change Event Notes

Index Assigned Class
(1,2,3 or none)
0 50T Phase A Tripped 1
1 50T Phase B Tripped 1
2 50T Phase C Tripped 1
3 150T Phase A Tripped 1
4 150T Phase B Tripped 1
5 150T Phase C Tripped 1
6 50T Neutral Tripped 1
7 150T Neutral Tripped 1
8 50T Negative Sequence Tripped if Sensing Input Type is H 1 1
250 Neutral Tripped if Sensing Input Type is G
9 150T Negative sequence Tripped if Sensing Input Type is H 1 1
350 Neutral Tripped if Sensing Input Type is G
10 Breaker Failure Tripped 1
11 51 Phase A Tripped 1
12 51 Phase B Tripped 1
13 51 Phase C Tripped 1
14 51 Neutral Tripped 1
15 51Q Tripped if Sensing Input Type is H. 1 1
151 Neutral Tripped if Sensing Input Type is G
16 62 1
17 162 1
18 43 1
19 143 1
20 243 1
21 343 1
22 79 Close Signal 1
23 79 Running 1
24 79 Locked Out 1
25 79 Reclose Fail 1
BE1-851 DNP Protocol 5-1
 Point Description Change Event Notes
Index Assigned Class
(1,2,3 or none)
26 79 Sequence Control Block 1
27 Input Contact 1 1
28 Input Contact 2 1
29 Input Contact 3 1
30 Input Contact 4 1
31 101 Trip 1
32 101 Close 1
33 101 Slip Contact ( 0= Breaker Tripped, 1 = Breaker Is Closed ) 1
34 Logic Alarm 1
35 Major Alarm 1
36 Minor Alarm 1
37 Output Trip Coil Monitor 1
38 Setting Group 0 Active 1
39 Setting Group 1 Active 1
40 Setting Group 2 Active 1
41 Setting Group 3 Active 1
Hardware Output Status (points 42 – 47)
42 Output A 1
43 Output 1 1
44 Output 2 1
45 Output 3 1
46 Output 4 1
47 Output 5 1
Programmable Alarms (points 48 – 73) See Note 3
48 Trip Circuit Monitor Alarm 1
49 Breaker Fail Alarm 1
50 Recloser Fail Alarm 1
51 Recloser Lockout 1
52 Breaker Alarm 1 1
53 Breaker Alarm 2 1
54 Breaker Alarm 3 1
55 P Demand Alarm 1
56 N Demand Alarm 1
57 Q Demand Alarm 1
58 Group Override (0=Local Control, 1= Group Override) 1
59 Sys I/O Delay Alarm 1
60 Communication Error Alarm 1
61 Clock Error Alarm 1
62 MPU Reset Alarm 1
63 Settings Changed 1
64 EEPROM Non fatal error 1

5-2 DNP Protocol BE1-851

 Point Description Change Event Notes
Index Assigned Class
(1,2,3 or none)
65 An override is active in one or more outputs 1
66 Loss of IRIG 1
67 Setting Group Change Active alarm 1
68 VO13 Logic Alarm 1
69 VO14 Logic Alarm 1
70 VO15 Logic Alarm 1
71 FLT RPT Time Out 1
72 Logic NONE alarm 1
73 Settings Changes Lost due to Access Time Out 1
Relay Trouble Alarms (points 74 - 78)
74 EEPROM Read/Write Fatal Error 1
75 Analog problem detected 1
76 Relay not calibrated or calibration checksum error 1
77 SETTING defaults loaded 1
78 Calibration defaults loaded 1
State Of Fault Trigger Logic Expressions (points 79 – 81) See Note 4
79 Pick Up trigger expressions state (1=TRUE,0 =FALSE) 1
80 Trip trigger logic expressions state (1=TRUE,0 =FALSE) 1
81 Logic trigger expressions state (1=TRUE,0 =FALSE) 1
82 1: New Fault triggered. Fault data will be saved as the “Most 1 2
Recent Fault Summary Report “, and available when this point
becomes 0.
0 : The “Most Recent Fault Summary Report “available.
Notes for Table 3:
1. This point’s mapping depends on Sensing Input Type (G or H) specified by relay Style Number.
2- The time stamp from transition 0 to 1 is a fault trigger time (equal to the time in the most recent
Fault Summary Report).
The time stamp from transition 1 to 0 is the time since fault data of the most recent fault is
available (see object 30 points from 17 to 36).
Total count of transitions from 0 to 1, reports the number of faults which have occurred between
two reporting. The missed Fault Summary Report Data can be retrieved through the Selected
Fault Summary Report (see object 30, points from 52 to 71).
3. Any alarm from this Programmable Alarms group may be declared as a major, minor, or logic
alarm. Refer to ASCII Serial Command SG-LGC, SA-MAJ, and SA-MIN.
4. Refer to ASCII Serial Command: SG-TRIGGER=<trip>,<pu>,<logic> .

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 5-3

BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Table 4 lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks
(Object 12). It is important to note that Binary Output Status Points are not included in Class 0.
Table 4. Binary Output Status Points And Control Relay Output Blocks
Binary Output Status Points:
Object Number: 10
Variations supported: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number: 12
Variations supported: 1
Request Function Codes supported: 3(select), 4(operate), 5(direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)

Point Description Control Codes And Their Description

Index
0 Hardware Output A State Latch On: Set Output x to state 1
Hardware Output 1 State Latch Off: Set Output x to state 0
1 Pulse On: Pulse output x to opposite of
2 Hardware Output 2 State current state then restore to
Hardware Output 3 State previous state ( pulsed output
3
is active 200 to 250 ms)
4 Hardware Output 4 State
5 Hardware Output 5 State
6 All Hardware Outputs State
7 Hardware Output A Local Control Latch On: Set Hardware Output x to relay
8 Hardware Output 1 Local Control logic

9 Hardware Output 2 Local Control

10 Hardware Output 3 Local Control
11 Hardware Output 4 Local Control
12 Hardware Output 5 Local Control
13 All Hardware Outputs Local Control
14 43 Selector Switch Status Latch On: Set x Selector Switch to 1
143 Selector Switch Status Latch Off: Set x Selector Switch to 0
15 Pulse On: Pulse x Selector Switch state
16 243 Selector Switch Status to opposite of the current state
343 Selector Switch Status then restore to previous state
17
(pulsed input is active 200 to
250 ms).
18 Setting Group 0 Latch On: Select Group x to be Active
19 Setting Group 1
20 Setting Group 2
21 Setting Group 3
22 Local Setting Group Control Switch Latch On: Return Setting Group Control
to relay local logic
23 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch Close: Close Breaker (changes 101C
Binary Input from 0 to 1 for 200
ms )
Trip: Trip Breaker (changes 101T
from 0 to 1 for 200 ms)

5-4 DNP Protocol BE1-851

Notes for Table 4:
1. Read Of Points
- Reads of points from 0 to 5, 7 to 12, and 14 to 22 return the current state of corresponding
point.
- Reads of points from 6, 13, and 23 always return zero.
2- The following restrictions should be observed when using object 12 to control the points listed in
Table 3.
• The Control Code field of object 12 is parsed the following way:
- If the Control Code is NULL, then the command will be accepted without any action being
taken.
- If Queue, and Clear sub-fields are not zero, the returned Control Status is 4 (Control
operation not supported).
- A Code sub-field of “Pulse On” (1) in combination with a value in the Trip/Close sub-field
form a “Trip” or “Close” value. A “Trip” value consists of a “PULSE ON” (1) in the Code
sub-field and a 2 in the Trip/Close sub-field. This results in a value of 81(hex) in the
Control Code field. A “Close” value consists of a “PULSE ON” (1) in the Code sub-field
and a 1 in the Trip/Close sub-field. This results in a value of 41 (hex) in the Control Code
field.
3. Valid Control Code values are:
- 0x00 = No action will be taken.
- 0x01 = Pulse output to opposite of current state, then restore to previous state. Pulsed output is
active 200 to 250 ms.
- 0x03 = Latch On
- 0x04 = Latch Off
- 0x41 = Close (Breaker Close)
- 0x81 = Trip (Breaker Open)
All operations not defined above are invalid and will be rejected. If the Control Code is legal, but not
supported for the requested point, the Status Return value is “Control operation not supported for this
point” (value 4).
- The Count, OnTime and OffTime fields are ignored.
- Arm timer value for all Select/Operate operations is 30 seconds.
It is important to notice that any control function may be rejected because of the relay internal state.
When this happens, the Status Return value is “Request not accepted because of hardware
problems” (value 6). One of the reasons for the rejection may be that that point Logic Function Block
has the Logic(Control) Mode disabled.
For example: Control functions for the hardware output points (points 0 to 13) will be rejected if the
Output Control for all hardware outputs is disabled.
The Logic(Control) Mode of any object 12 point can be changed (enabled/disabled) via the specific
point of object 41 (Analog Output Control Blocks). Refer to Analog Output Status Points and Analog
Output Control Block points from 0 to 6.

ANALOG INPUTS
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30/Object 32). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit
variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output Statuses are transmitted
through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the
15
maximum positive representation for a 16-bit variation is <2 -1> = 32,767. For a 32-bit variation the
31
maximum positive representation is <2 -1> = 2,147,483,647.
It is important to note that all analog points are not reported in Class 0 (or any other class). These points
are from point 52 to point 116. They have “none” in the column for “Event Class Assigned To” as shown
in Table 5. They can be read from the BE1-851 as object 30, with any variation or qualifier implemented
for object 30.
Change events for analog inputs are reported in CURRENT mode (when a change is detected, the report
of the change contains the current value of the time of the report - not the time the change was detected.

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 5-5

 Table 5. Analog Inputs
Analog Inputs
Static Object Number : 30
Change Event Object Number : 32
Request Function Codes Supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation Reported When Variation 0 Requested: 3 (32-bit Analog Input without Flag)
Change Event Variation Reported When Variation 0 Requested: 1 (32-bit Analog Change Event without
Time)

Index Description Change Event Notes

Assigned Class
(1, 2, 3, or none)
0 Primary Phase A Current Magnitude 2 1, 1*
1 Primary Phase B Current Magnitude 2 1, 1*
2 Primary Phase C Current Magnitude 2 1, 1*
3 Neutral Current Magnitude 2 1, 1*
4 Primary Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 2 1, 1*
5 Present Demand Current- Phase A 2 1, 1*
6 Present Demand Current- Phase B 2 1, 1*
7 Present Demand Current- Phase C 2 1, 1*
8 Present Neutral Demand Current 2 1, 1*
9 Present Negative Sequence Demand Current- Phase A 2 1, 1*
10 Breaker Duty – Phase A 2 12
11 Breaker Duty – Phase B 2 12
12 Breaker Duty – Phase C 2 12
13 Breaker Operation Counter 2 13
14 BF Status 1 15
15 Latched Targets- part 1 1 21
16 Latched Targets- part 2 1 21
The Most Recent Fault Summary Report
17 Fault Number 1 2, 16
18 Fault Trigger Time Stamp – part 1 ; days 1 3, 16
19 Fault Trigger Time Stamp – part 2; ms 1 3, 16
20 Active Setting Group 1 4, 16
21 Trigger 1 5, 16
22 System Status – part 1 1 22
23 System Status – part 2 1 22
24 System Status – part 3 1 22
25 System Status – part 4 1 22
26 Targets- part 1 1 6, 16
27 Targets- part 2 1 6, 16
28 Reclose Status 1 7, 16
29 Fault Clearing Time 1 8, 16
30 Breaker Operate Time 1 9, 16
31 Number of Oscillographic Reports 1 10, 16
32 Phase A Fault Current 1 1, 16
33 Phase B Fault Current 1 1, 16
34 Phase C Fault Current 1 1, 16
35 Neutral Fault Current 1 1, 16

5-6 DNP Protocol BE1-851

 36 Negative Sequence Fault Current 1 1, 16
Active Logic Name
st
37 1 . character of Active Logic Name 3 16
nd
38 2 . character of Active Logic Name 3 16
rd
39 3 . character of Active Logic Name 3 16
th
40 4 . character of Active Logic Name 3 16
th
41 5 . character of Active Logic Name 3 16
th
42 6 . character of Active Logic Name 3 16
th
43 7 . character of Active Logic Name 3 16
th
44 8 . character of Active Logic Name 3 16
Logic Function Blocks’ settings
45 Hardware Outputs’ Control Mode 3 17, 16
46 43 Aux Virtual Switch Logic Mode 3 18,16
47 143 Aux Virtual Switch Logic Mode 3 18,16
48 243 Aux Virtual Switch Logic Mode 3 18,16
49 343 Aux Virtual Switch Logic Mode 3 18,16
50 Setting Group Logic Mode 3 19, 16
51 101 Breaker Switch Control Mode 3 20, 16
Selected Fault Summary Report (See Note 14)
52 Fault Number none 2
53 Fault Trigger Time Stamp – part 1 ; days none 3
54 Fault Trigger Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 3
55 Active Setting Group none 4
56 Trigger none 5
57 System Status – part 1 none 22
58 System Status – part 2 none 22
59 System Status – part 3 none 22
60 System Status – part 4 none 22
61 Targets- part 1 none 6
62 Targets- part 2 none 6
63 Reclose Status none 7
64 Fault Clearing Time none 8
65 Breaker Operate Time none 9
66 Number of Oscillographic Reports none 10
67 Phase A Fault Current none 1
68 Phase B Fault Current none 1
69 Phase C Fault Current none 1
70 Neutral Fault Current none 1
71 Negative Sequence Fault Current none 1
Demand Currents Historical Data
Peak Demand Current Since Reset
72 Phase A current none 1
73 Phase A Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
74 Phase A Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
75 Phase B current none 1
76 Phase B Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
77 Phase B Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
BE1-851 DNP Protocol 5-7
 78 Phase C none 1
79 Phase C Time Stamp – part 1 ; days none 11
80 Phase C Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
81 Neutral none 1
82 Neutral Time Stamp – part 1 ; days none 11
83 Neutral Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
84 Negative Sequence none 1
85 Negative Sequence Time Stamp – part 1 ; days none 11
86 Negative Sequence Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
Today’s Peak Demand Current
87 Phase A current none 1
88 Phase A Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
89 Phase A Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
90 Phase B current none 1
91 Phase B Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
92 Phase B Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
93 Phase C none 1
94 Phase C Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
95 Phase C Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
96 Neutral none 1
97 Neutral Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
98 Neutral Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
99 Negative Sequence none 1
100 Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
101 Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current
102 Phase A current none 1
103 Phase A Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
104 Phase A Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
105 Phase B current none 1
106 Phase B Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
107 Phase B Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
108 Phase C none 1
109 Phase C Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
110 Phase C Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
111 Neutral none 1
112 Neutral Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
113 Neutral Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11
114 Negative Sequence none 1
115 Negative Sequence Time Stamp – part 1; days none 11
116 Negative Sequence Time Stamp – part 2; ms none 11

5-8 DNP Protocol BE1-851

Notes for Table 5:
1. All current values are in centiamps (value 1 represents 0.01 ampere).
1*. Current analog input point generates an analog event if the current value is bigger than the “pre-
vious current value plus dead band“, or smaller than the “previous current value minus dead
band”.
Dead band for an analog event is configurable via DNP Analog Output point 23, “Current Dead
band”. The default value for the dead band is set to be ±2.5% of the primary nominal current. For
more information about dead band configuration, see the description in the following paragraphs
Analog Output Status Points And Control Blocks, point 23, Note 14 for Table 10.
2. Fault Number range is from 1 to 255. For example, after 255, fault number is going to be 1.
3. This time is a fault trigger time presented in relay’s internal format: part 1 contains days ( 1 to
65535), and part 2 contains milliseconds (1 to 86,400,000) since January 1, 1984. This time is
equal to the time of Binary Input Event “New Fault “ triggered (transition from 0 to 1).
Notice, that the Binary Input Event time stamp is presented in DNP time stamp format, since
January 1, 1970.
4. Active setting group at time of fault (0 or 1 or 2 or 3).
5. Event type (value is 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 ) reports the classification assigned to the fault event. Fault
events are classified into five categories.
1. Breaker Failure (Event Type value is 1): A fault was initiated by the pickup expression and
the breaker failure trip became true before fault was cleared.
2. Trip (Event Type value is 2): A fault was initiated by overcurrent pickup and the relay tripped
to clear the fault.
3. Logic (Event Type value is 4): A fault was detected as defined by the relay logic trigger
expression, but no fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression.
4. Pickup (Event Type value is 8): A fault was initiated by the pickup expression but the relay
never tripped indicating that the fault was cleared by some other device.
5. RF=TRIG (Event Type value is 16): A Fault was triggered by the ASCII command
RF=TRIGGER received via the front panel communication RS-232 port or rear RS-232 port.
6. Targets-part 1 and targets-part 2 are bit mapped variables that report what targets were logged to
the fault report between the time that the trip expression became true until the end of the fault.
See Table 6 for the target format.
Table 6. Target Format
Value/Bit Mask Part 1 Description Part 2 Description
0001h 50TA 51A
0002h 50TB 51B
0004h 50TC 51C
0008h 50TN 51N
0010h 50TQ 51Q
0020h 62 spare
0040h. 162 spare
0080h BF spare
0100h 150TA 151A
0200h 150TB 151B
0400h 150TC 151C
0800h 150TN 151N
1000h 150TQ 151Q
2000h spare spare
4000h 250TN spare
8000h 350TN spare

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 5-9

 7. Reclose Status are bit mapped variables that report the state of the recloser shot counter prior to
the fault that triggered the fault (see format in the Table 7).
Table 7. Reclose Status Format
Value/Bit Mask Description
0001h Recloser active
0002h Recloser Reset
0004h Reclose Max Timing
0008h Reclose Failure
0010h Reclose Lockout
0020h Reclose Wait
0040h Reclose Enable
0080h Reclose Max Enable
0100h Reclose Fail Enable
0200h Reclose Wait Enable
0400h Reclose Timing 1
1000h Reclose Timing 2
2000h Reclose Timing 3
4000h Reclose Timing 4
8000h Reclose Timing Fail

8. Fault Clearing Time is time in milliseconds from 0 to 60,000.

9. Breaker Operate Time is time in milliseconds from 0 to 60,000.
10. A number of recorded oscillographic records per fault (read value of this point) can be 1 or 2.
11. Time presented in relay internal format: part 1 contains days (1 to 65,535), and part 2 milliseconds
(1 to 86,400,000) since January 1, 1984.
12. Point represents assigned phase accumulated breaker pole duty as a centipercent of the
maximum duty (DMAX) that the breaker contacts can withstand before they need service.
Breaker Accumulated Duty for Phase A, B, and C is calculated as ΣI or ΣI . This is defined by the
2

Breaker Contact Duty Operation Mode 0/1/2 entered via the ASCII protocol command SB-DUTY.
DMAX is defined through the same SB-DUTY command (for more information, see the BE1-851
Instruction Manual, Section 4, Protection And Control). Value range is from 0 to 20,000 where
20,000 represents 200% of DMAX. Delta of 20 centipercent will cause an event. This point can be
changed via object 41. See the paragraph for Analog Output Control Blocks, Note 9.
13. This is the number of recorded breaker operations (0 – 99,999). If the operations counter exceeds
99,999, the counter will wrap back to zero. This value can be changed via object 41, point 15 to
any value from 0 to 99,999. Delta of 1 will cause an event.
14. Selected Fault Summary Report contains fault data for fault number defined by the value of Analog
Output Status (object 40) point 21 ”Fault Number for Selected Fault Summary Report”.
15. BF status is the bit mapped variable with format as described in Table 8. Delta of 1 deviation will
cause en event.
Table 8. Breaker Failure Status Format
Value / Bit Mask (hex) Description
0001 Breaker Operation Control State {1=Breaker Operation Enabled;
0= Breaker Operation Disabled}
0002 Breaker State {1=Breaker Opened; 0= Breaker Closed}

16. Delta of 1 bit (any change) will cause an event.

17. Read values for Hardware Output Control is 1 = Enabled, and 0=Disabled.

5-10 DNP Protocol BE1-851

 18. Read values for x43 AUX Virtual Switch Logic Mode are 0 for Disabled, 1 = ON/OFF PULSE, 2 =
ON/OFF, and 3= OFF/MOMENTARY ON.
19. Read values for Setting Group Mode is 0= Disabled, 1=discrete select, and 2= binary select.
Setting groups can be controlled via DNP object 12 if value is 1 or 2.
20. Read values for 101 Breaker Control Switch Mode is 0=Disabled and 1=Enabled.
21. Latched Targets Status format is described in Table 6 under Note 6 to Table 5. Delta of 1
deviation will cause an event. Latched Targets Status can be reset via object 41 point 7.
22. BE1-851 Relay System Status is represented as 4 part, 16-bit mapped variables. Four part
System Status is described in Table 9. (For more information, see the BE1-851 Instruction
Manual, Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions). Delta of 1 deviation will cause en event.

Table 9. System Status

Value/Bit Part 1 Description Part 2 Description Part 3 Description Part 4 Description
Mask (hex)
0001h 50 Phase Tripped BF Picked Up Virtual Output A Input Contact 1
0002h 150 Phase Tripped 51 Phase Picked Up Virtual Output 1 Input Contact 2
0004h 50 Neutral Tripped 51 Neutral Picked UP Virtual Output 2 Input Contact 3
0008h 150 Neutral Tripped 151 Neutral Picked Up Virtual Output 3 Input Contact 4
for G Type
51 Q Picked Up for H
Type
0010h 250 Neutral Tripped for G 62 Tripped Virtual Output 4 101 TRIP
Type
50Q Tripped for H Type
0020h 350 Neutral Tripped for G 162 Tripped Virtual Output 5 101 CLOSE
Type
150Q Tripped for H Type
0040h. BF Tripped 43 Virtual Output 6 101 SLIP CONTACT
0080h 51 Phase Tripped 143 Virtual Output 7 HMI Reset Key
0100h 51 Neutral Tripped 243 Virtual Output 8 Logic Alarm
0200h 151 Neutral Tripped for G 343 Virtual Output 9 Major Alarm
Type
51 Q Tripped for H Type
0400h 50 Phase Picked Up 79 Close Virtual Output 10 Minor Alarm
0800h 150 Phase Picked Up 79 Enabled Virtual Output 11 Output 1 Trip Coil Monitor
1000h 50 Neutral Picked Up 79 Lockout Virtual Output 12 Setting Group 0
2000h 150 Neutral Picked Up 79 Reclose Fail Virtual Output 13 Setting Group 1
4000h 250N Picked Up for G Type 79 Block Output Virtual Output 14 Setting Group 2
50Q Picked Up for H Type
8000h 350N Picked Up for G Type Always False (zero) Virtual Output 15 Setting Group 3
150Q Picked Up for H Type

ANALOG OUTPUT STATUS POINTS AND CONTROL BLOCKS

Table 10 lists both the Analog Status Points (Object 40) and the Analog Output Control Blocks (Object
41). It is important to note that Analog Output Status Points are not included into Class 0.
The Return Status Value for object 41 for all control operations may be 6 (hardware problem) due to a
value out of range, or a relay internal state. One of the reasons for rejection may be if another
communication port or front panel HMI is actively programming. For more information, see the BE1-851
Instructional Manual, Section 7, Communications, Command Descriptions, Changing Settings Through
The Serial Port.

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 5-11

 Table 10. Analog Output Status Points and Control Blocks
Analog Output Status Points
Object Number: 40
Variations Supported: 1, 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation Reported When Variation 0 Requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Output Status)
Analog Output Blocks
Object Number: 41
Variations Supported: 1, 2
Request Function Codes supported: 3(select), 4(operate), 5(direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)

Index Description Notes

0 Hardware Output Logic Control Mode 1,2
1 43 Aux Virtual Switch Logic Mode 1,3
2 143 Aux Virtual Switch Logic Mode 1,3
3 243 Aux Virtual Switch Logic Mode 1,3
4 343 Aux Virtual Switch Logic Mode 1,3
5 Active Setting Group Control Mode 1,4
6 101 Breaker Control Switch Mode 1,5
7 Target Status Reset Control 6
8 Major Alarms Reset 7
9 Minor Alarms Reset 7
10 Logic Alarms Reset 7
11 Relay Trouble Alarms Reset 8
12 Breaker Accumulated Duty for Phase A 9
13 Breaker Accumulated Duty for Phase B 9
14 Breaker Accumulated Duty for Phase C 9
15 Breaker Operation Counter 10
16 Peak Demand Current Since Reset - Phase A 11
17 Peak Demand Current Since Reset - Phase B 11
18 Peak Demand Current Since Reset - Phase C 11
19 Peak Demand Current Since Reset - Neutral 11
20 Peak Demand Current Since Reset - Negative Sequence 11
21 Fault Number for Selected Fault Summary Report 12
22 Synchronization Time Period 13
23 Current Dead Band 14

Notes for Table 10:

1. This data is a setting, and as a such, takes effect after being saved to non-volatile memory.
Procedure of saving data to non-volatile memory is performed only once per request for all points
requested to be changed through function Operate(4), Direct Operate(5) or Direct Operate NoAck
(6).
Saving to a non-volatile memory is not implemented per point basis because it would significantly
prolong requested message processing time and cause response time-out. It is important to note
that object 12 (Binary Output Status ) points from 0 to 23 can be successfully controlled only if
their function blocks mode are enabled in the time of parsing. This is the reason that in the same
request, with FC= 5 or 6, specific Binary Output Status points can not be first Enabled via its
Mode point of object 41, and immediately after that controlled (object 12). For example: To control
any 43 Aux Control Relay Output Block, Master should do the following steps:

5-12 DNP Protocol BE1-851

 1. Enable control of 43x Aux Switch(s) via request(s) with FC=(3, 4) or 5 or 6 for specific point(s)
of object 41.
2. Control Binary Output Status point(s) (object 12) via next request(s).
2. Hardware Output Logic Control Mode can be 0 (Disable) or 1(Enable). If hardware outputs are to
be controlled via object 12 (Control Relay Output Blocks), their control must be Enabled through
this point. For more information see the BE1-851 Instructional Manual, Section 11, ASCII
Command Interface, CS/CO-OUT=ENA/DIS .
3. x43 AUX Virtual Switch Logic Mode can be 0 for Disabled, 1 = ON/OFF/PULSE, 2 = ON/OFF, and
3= OFF/MOMENTARY ON. Depending on the Logic Mode value, the AUX x43 Switch may or
may not be successfully controlled via the Control Relay Output Blocks; points 14 to 17.
4. Setting Group Mode can be 0(disable), 1 (discrete select ) or 2 ( binary select). If Setting Group is
to be switched via object 12 (Control Relay Output Blocks), this must be first Enabled through this
point.
5. Logic Mode of 101 Breaker Control Switch can be 0 (disabled)or 1 (enabled). Depending on Logic
Mode value, 101 Switch can or can not be successfully controlled via Control Relay Output Blocks;
point 23.
6. Target Status Reset Control can only be reset (the only acceptable value to write to point 7 is 0).
A read of this point returns 1 if there are active targets, or 0 if targets are not active. When
resetting this point, latched Targets Status is also reset ( see Analog Input Objects, points 15 and
16).
7. Major, Minor, and Logic Alarms are 32 bit mapped variables as described in Table 11. Writing
value 0 will reset the alarms. Note that only latched alarms will be cleared. Programmable Alarms
can be read as Binary Input (object 1) points from 48 to 73.
Table 11. Alarm Status
Bit Mask (hex) Name Bit Mask (hex) Name
00000001 OUT1 CKT OPEN 00010000 EE NON –FATAL ERR
00000002 Breaker Fail 00020000 OUTPUT OVERRIDE
00000004 Reclose Fail 00040000 LOSS OF IRIG
00000008 Reclose Lockout 00080000 Setting Group Change Alarm Active
00000010 Breaker Alarm #1 00100000 VO13 LOGIC ALARM
00000020 Breaker Alarm #2 00200000 VO14 LOGIC ALARM
00000040 Breaker Alarm #3 00400000 VO15 LOGIC ALARM
00000080 P Demand 00800000 FLT RPT TiMEOUT
00000100 N Demand 01000000 LOGIC=NONE
00000200 Q Demand 02000000 Setting Changes Lost due to Access
Time Out
00000400 Group Override 04000000 Spare
00000800 SYS I/O Delay 08000000 spare
00001000 Communication Error 10000000 spare
00002000 Clock Error 20000000 spare
00004000 uP Reset 40000000 spare
00008000 Settings Changed 80000000 spare

8. Relay Trouble Alarms can be reset by writing value 0 to this point. This is a 16-bit mapped
variable and is described in Table 12. Only alarms with a star (*) are implemented and can be
read as Binary Input (object 1) points from 74 to 78.

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 5-13

 Table 12. Relay Trouble Status Format
Bit Mask (hex) Name Bit Mask (hex) Name
0001 (spare) Reserved for RAM FAILURE 0040 (spare) Reserved for PWR SUPPLY
ERR
0002 (spare) Reserved for ROM FAILURE 0080 (spare) Reserved for WATCHDOG
FAILURE
0004 (spare) Reserved for uP FAILURE 0100 spare
0008 EEPROM FATAL ERROR * 0200 spare
0010 ANALOG FAILURE * 0400 spare
0020 CALIBRATION ERR * 0800 spare

9. Point represents assigned phase accumulated breaker pole duty as a centipercent of the
maximum duty (DMAX) the breaker contacts can withstand before they need service.
Breaker Accumulated Duty for Phase A, B and C is calculated as ΣI or ΣI . This is defined by
2

Breaker Contact Duty Operation Mode 0/1/2 entered via ASCII protocol command SB-DUTY.
DMAX is defined through the same SB-DUTY command.
Allowed value range for points 12 to 14 is from 0 to 20,000 where 20,000 represents 200% of
DMAX. Example: To change accumulated breaker duty for Phase B to 134% of DMAX, using
appropriate control function(s), set point 13 via object 41, Var1 or 2, to the value 13400.
To read the value of Breaker Accumulated Duty for Phase B, use Read point 13, Obj 40, Var1 or
2. The returned value of 13400 means 134% of DMAX.
10. Read value of this point (15) is a number of recorded breaker operations (0 – 99999). If the
operations counter exceeds 99,999, the counter will wrap back to zero. It acts as a counter, but is
implemented as an analog object so that the initial value can be set or current value changed to
any value from 0 to 99,999.
11. Peak Demand currents, points 16 to 20, can only be set to value 0 (Reset). Point read value
presents Peak Demand current in centiamps. For Example :670 represents 6.7 A.
12. . Fault Number for Selected Fault Summary Report. This value range is from 1 to 255. The Fault
Summary Report for this selected fault number will be available as an Analog Input object from
point 52 to 71.
13. Time period, in milliseconds, when the relay (slave) sets “NEED TIME” bit in first octet of the
Application Response Header Internal Indication. When time is set by the Master via object 50
(write function), the relay resets this 0 bit. Relay sets this bit again, periodically, if the time period
is not zero. Default value on Cold and Warm Restarts is 0. This means that on Cold and Warm
31
Restarts, this bit will never be set. Allowed value is from 0 to 2 -1 = 2,147,483,647 milliseconds.
14. Current dead band for analog events is configurable via this point. “Current Dead Band “ point
value must be entered as a percentage of primary nominal current multiplied by 10. Allowed
range is from 10 to 100 which represents from 1 to 10% in steps of 0.1%. Default value is 25
(2.5% of current primary nominal value).
Example: To configure current dead band to 4 % of primary nominal current, enter 40 for this point
value. The relay converts this value into a current value. For a 5 ampere relay, and phase CT
ratio =120 turns, dead band value in amperes for phase currents and Q current is 0.4 * 120 *5 = 24
primary amps (2400 centiamps). Phase threshold = previous current value ±24 amperes. If the
CT ratio for neutral is 12, then the utilized dead band for neutral current is 0.04 * 12 * 5 = 2.4
primary amperes (240 centiamps). Neutral threshold = previous neutral current value ±2.4 amps.

5-14 DNP Protocol BE1-851

8-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER, OBJECT 102
Table 13 is the point list for Object 102, and lists the 8-Bit Unsigned Integer Points. Note that this object
has only variation 1 and can not be requested with default variation 0.
Table 13. Object 102, 8-Bit Unsigned Integer Points
8-Bit Unsigned Integer
Object Number: 102
Variations Supported: 1
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)

Index Description
0-9 Model Number
10 - 28 Application Software Version Number and Date
29 - 47 Boot Software Version Number and Date
48 - 61 Serial Number
62 - 83 Style Number
84 - 99 Part Number
100 - 131 Relay ID
132 - 163 Station ID

Explanation:
Each point represents one character of a particular string.
Example: To read the Model Number, which is “BE1-851”, the returned read value for points 0 to 9 are:
Point 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Read Value in B E 1 - 8 5 1 Null Null Null
ASCII format

Object 102 is not included in Class 0 poll response.

BE1-851 DNP Protocol 5-15

 INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
BE1-851
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION SYSTEM
MODBUS PROTOCOL

D2590-07
05-15-97

Publication: 9 2899 00 992

Revision: C 03/2001
 INTRODUCTION

This manual provides detailed communications protocol information for the BE1-851, Overcurrent Protec-
tion System with the ModBus Protocol.

WARNING
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, ONLY
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD PERFORM THE PROCEDURES
PRESENTED IN THIS MANUAL.

CAUTION
MEGGERS AND HIGH POTENTIAL TEST EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE
USED WITH EXTREME CARE. INCORRECT USE OF SUCH
EQUIPMENT COULD DAMAGE COMPONENTS CONTAINED IN THE
DEVICE.

Introduction BE1-851 With Modbus™ Protocol i

 First Printing: May 1997

Printed in USA

© 1997 - 2001, Basler Electric Co., Highland, IL 62249

March 2001

CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
OF BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY, HIGHLAND, IL. IT IS LOANED
FOR CONFIDENTIAL USE, SUBJECT TO RETURN ON REQUEST,
AND WITH THE MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING THAT IT WILL NOT BE
USED IN ANY MANNER DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTEREST OF
BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY.

It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in
equipment, nor does this manual provide data for every possible
contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and
design of all features and options are subject to modification without
notice. Should further information be required, contact Basler Electric
Company, Highland, Illinois.

BASLER ELECTRIC
ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE 618-654-2341 FAX 618-654-2351
ii BE1-851 With Modbus™ Protocol Introduction
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION..........................................................................................................1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................1
Message Structure..........................................................................................................1
Device Address Field .........................................................................................1
Function Code Field ...........................................................................................2
Data Block Field .................................................................................................2
Error Check Field ...............................................................................................2
Serial Transmission Details.............................................................................................2
Message Framing And Timing Considerations ...............................................................2
Error Handling And Exception Responses......................................................................3
COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................3
DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE .....................................................................3
Read Holding Registers ..................................................................................................3
Query .................................................................................................................3
Response...........................................................................................................4
Return Query Data..........................................................................................................4
Restart Communications Option .....................................................................................4
Listen Only Mode ............................................................................................................5
Preset Multiple Registers ................................................................................................5
Query .................................................................................................................5
Response...........................................................................................................6
Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register) ..................................................6
Query .................................................................................................................6
Response...........................................................................................................6
DATA FORMATS .........................................................................................................................7
Floating Point Data Format (FP) ....................................................................................7
Double Precision Data Format (DP) ..............................................................................7
Long Integer Data Format (LI) .......................................................................................8
Integer Data Format (INT)...............................................................................................8
Short Integer Data Format (SI) .......................................................................................8
ASCII Character Data Format ( ASC(1) ).......................................................................8
ASCII String Data Format ( ASC(x) ) .............................................................................9
Bit Mapped Data Format ( BM(x) ) ..................................................................................9
CRC Error Check ............................................................................................................9
Session Access Registers ..............................................................................................10
MAPPING BE1-851 PARAMETERS INTO ..................................................................................13
MODICON HOLDING REGISTER ADDRESS SPACE ...............................................................13
General ...........................................................................................................................13
Conventions ....................................................................................................................13
REGISTER TABLE – ORDERED BY REGISTER NUMBER.......................................................14
Group Setting Parameters .................................................................................15
Global Setting Parameters .................................................................................16
Serial Port Setting Parameters...........................................................................16
System Data Setting Parameters.......................................................................17
Breaker Duty Setting Parameters ......................................................................17
Relay Data Setting Parameters .........................................................................17
Custom Logic Setting Parameters .....................................................................18
System Labels And Id Setting Parameters ........................................................22
Legacy: Product Information ..............................................................................24
Legacy: Time and Date......................................................................................24
Legacy: Breaker Duty ........................................................................................25

Introduction  Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus iii
 REGISTER TABLE – ORDERED BY REGISTER NUMBER - Continued
Legacy: Select Before Operate (SBO) and Control Commands........................25
Legacy: Metering - Primary Parameters ............................................................25
Legacy: Reporting ..............................................................................................25
Report Parameters.............................................................................................26
Metering Parameters..........................................................................................29
REGISTER DETAILS...................................................................................................................31
Logic Modes:......................................................................................................31
Logic Mask And Terms: .....................................................................................32
Logic Term Count:..............................................................................................34
Session Parameters...........................................................................................34
Template Parameters.........................................................................................34
Global Parameters .............................................................................................35
Control Parameters ............................................................................................36
Group Setting Parameters .................................................................................39
Global Setting Parameters .................................................................................40
Serial Port Setting Parameters...........................................................................40
System Data Setting Parameters.......................................................................42
Breaker Duty Setting Parameters ......................................................................42
Relay Data Setting Parameters..........................................................................42
Custom Logic Setting Parameters .....................................................................45
System Labels And Id Setting Parameters ........................................................45
Report Parameters.............................................................................................45
Metering Parameters..........................................................................................54
Legacy Map........................................................................................................54
Legacy: Product Information ..............................................................................54
Legacy: Time and Date ......................................................................................54
Legacy: Breaker Duty ........................................................................................54
Legacy: Select Before Operate (SBO) and Control Commands........................55
Legacy: Metering - Primary Parameters ............................................................55
Legacy: Reporting ..............................................................................................55
ASCII COMMAND VERSUS MODBUS REGISTER CROSS REFERENCE ...........................61

iv BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol Introduction

 PRODUCT REVISION HISTORY
The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to the embedded software
(firmware) of this device. The corresponding revisions made to this instruction manual are also
summarized. This revision history is separated into two categories: Application Program Embedded
Firmware Changes and Manual Revisions. All revisions are listed in reverse chronological order.

Application Program
Embedded Firmware Change
3.43.03. 03/2001 Added Password Security register 40989
3.42.00 and 2.42.00 – Added new registers 41110-41113 (Breaker Block Logic Mask), 41118-41121
11/1999 (Breaker Block Logic Term), 41269-41270 (Logic Alarm Mask), 41403-41406
(Reset Target Logic Mask), 41411-41414 (Reset Target Logic Term), 41419-
41422 (Reset Alarm Logic Mask), 41427-41430 (Reset Alarm Logic Term),
and 47486 (Reset Logic Alarm Information). Updated register 40039 to
support report #2 RA-LGC report..
3.41.00 and 2.41.00 – Added the Modbus Write support registers.
06/1999
2.15.00 – 05/1997 Initial release

The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to this manual. All revisions
are listed in reverse chronological order.

Revision / ECO / Date Change

C / 12575 / 03-2001 Changed the format of the manual to current standards and other Modbus™
Manuals. Corrected Floating Point Data Format on Page 7, added
conventions on Password Security on Page 13 and 14, added register 40989
on Page 17, expanded the Notes on registers 40001 to 40006, corrected the
value of # for Report Focus in the Table on 35, inserted paragraph under
Global Parameters on Page 36, and added register 40989 to Serial Port
Setting Parameters on Page 42.
B / 6543 / 10-1999 Corrected minor errors in the manual, and SN registers 43498 - 43900
ordering. Added new registers 41110-41113 (Breaker Block Logic Mask),
41118-41121 (Breaker Block Logic Term), 41269-41270 (Logic Alarm Mask),
41403-41406 (Reset Target Logic Mask), 41411-41414 (Reset Target Logic
Term), 41419-41422 (Reset Alarm Logic Mask), 41427-41430 (Reset Alarm
Logic Term), and 47486 (Reset Logic Alarm Information). Updated register
40039 to support report #2 RA-LGC report..
A / 4704/ 06-1999 Added the Modbus Write support registers.
None – May 1997 Initial release

Introduction  Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus v
 GENERAL INFORMATION

This document describes the Modbus communications protocol employed by BE1-851 relays, and how to
exchange information with BE1-851 relays over a Modbus network. The BE1-851 communicates by emulating
a subset of the Modicon 984 Programmable Controller.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Modbus communications use a master-slave technique in which only the master can initiate a transaction. This
transaction is called a query. When appropriate, a slave (BE1-851) responds to the query. When a Modbus
master communicates with a slave, information is provided or requested by the master. Information residing in the
BE1-851 is grouped categorically as follows:

Category
Session Parameters
Global Parameters
Control Parameters (Select Before Operate)
Setting Parameters
Report Parameters
Metering Parameters

All supported data can be read as specified in the register table. Abbreviations are used in the Register Table to
indicate the register type. Register types are:

Read/Write = RW
Read Only = R-

Select Before Operate (SBO) functions are used to change active settings groups and control outputs. There are
four settings groups in the BE1-851, one of which may be selected as active using SBO commands.

When a slave receives a query, the slave responds by either supplying the requested data to the master or
performing the requested action. A slave device never initiates communications on the Modbus, and will
always generate a response to the query unless certain error conditions occur. The BE1-851 is designed to
communicate on the Modbus only as a slave device.

A master can query slaves individually or universally. A universal (“broadcast”) query, when allowed, evokes no
response from any slave device. If a query to an individual slave device requests actions unable to be performed
by the slave, the slave response message contains an exception response code defining the error detected.
Exception response codes are quite often enhanced by the information found in the “Error Details” block of
holding registers.

Message Structure

Master initiated queries and BE1-851 responses share the same message structure. Each message is
comprised of four message fields. They are:

• Device Address (1 byte)

• Function Code (1 byte)
• Data Block (n bytes)
• Error Check field (2 bytes)

Device Address Field

The device address field contains the unique Modbus address of the slave being queried. The addressed
slave repeats the address in the device address field of the response message. This field is 1 byte.

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 1
Although Modbus protocol limits a device address from 1 - 247, a BE1-851 can be assigned a device address
in the range of 1 - 65534. The address is user-selectable at installation, and can be altered during real-time
operation.

Function Code Field

The function code field in the query message defines the action to be taken by the addressed slave. This field is
echoed in the response message, and is altered by setting the most significant bit (MSB) of the field to 1 if the
response is an error response. This field is 1 byte.

The BE1-851 maps all available data into the Modicon 984 holding register address space (4XXXX) and supports
the following function codes.

• Function 03 (03 hex) - read holding registers

• Function 06 (06 hex) - preset single register (write single holding register)
• Function 08 (08 hex), subfunction 00 - diagnostics: return query data
• Function 08 (08 hex), subfunction 01 - diagnostics: restart communications option
• Function 08 (08 hex), subfunction 04 - diagnostics: force listen only mode
• Function 16 (10 hex) - preset multiple registers, non-broadcast and broadcast
Data Block Field

The query data block contains additional information needed by the slave to perform the requested function. The
response data block contains data collected by the slave for the queried function. An error response will
substitute an exception response code for the data block. The length of this field varies with each query. See
the paragraphs on Register Definitions in this manual for interpretation of data.

Error Check Field

The error check field provides a method for the slave to validate the integrity of the query message contents and
allows the master to confirm the validity of response message contents. This field is 2 bytes.

Serial Transmission Details

A standard Modbus network offers two transmission modes for communication: ASCII or remote terminal unit
(RTU). The BE1-851 supports only the RTU mode.

Each 8-bit byte in a message contains two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. The message is transmitted in a
continuous stream with the LSB of each byte of data transmitted first. Transmission of each 8-bit data byte
occurs with one start bit and either one or two stop bits. Parity checking is performed, when enabled, and can be
either odd or even. The transmission baud rate is user-selectable, and can be set at installation and altered
during real-time operation. The BE1-851 Modbus supported baud rates are 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200.
The factory default baud rate is 9600.

BE1-851 supports both RS-232-C and RS-485 compatible serial interfaces. Both interfaces are accessible from
the rear panel of the BE1-851. The RS-232-C interfaces (front and rear) are configured for ASCII command mode
while the RS-485 interface is configured for Modbus communication, when this option is installed. The sixth
character of the relay style number must be ‘1’ for the relay to be configured for Modbus.
Message Framing And Timing Considerations

When receiving a message, the BE1-851 requires an inter-byte latency of 3.5 character times before considering
the message complete.

Once a valid query is received, the BE1-851 waits a specified amount of time before responding. This time delay
is set in the remote delay time parameter with the SG-COM ASCII command. This parameter contains a value
from 10 - 200 milliseconds. The default value is 10 milliseconds.

2 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

Table 1 provides the response message transmission time (in seconds) and 3.5 character times (in milliseconds)
for various message lengths and baud rates.

Table 1. Timing Considerations

Baud Rate 3.5 character Time (mSec) Message Tx Time (Sec.)
128 Bytes 256 Bytes
2400 16.04 0.59 1.17
4800 8.021 0.29 0.59
9600 4.0104 0.15 0.29
19200 2.0052 0.07 0.15

Error Handling And Exception Responses

Any query received that contains a non-existent device address, a framing error, or CRC error is ignored. No
response is transmitted. Queries addressed to a BE1-851 with an unsupported function or illegal values in the
data block result in an error response message with an exception response code. The exception response
codes supported by the BE1-851 are provided in Table 2.

Table 2. Supported Exception Response Codes

Code Name Meaning
01 Illegal Function The query Function/Subfunction Code is unsupported;
query read of more than 125 registers; query preset of
more than 100 registers
02 Illegal Data Address A register referenced in the data block does not support
queried read/write; query preset of a subset of a numerical
register group.
03 Illegal Data Value A preset register data block contains an incorrect number
of bytes or one or more data values out of range.

COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

The BE1-851 RS-485 physical interface is three positions of a terminal strip with locations for Send/Receive A
(A), Send/Receive B (B) and Signal Ground (C). Refer to the BE1-851 Instruction Manual ( 9 3289 00 990 ) for
further details.

DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE

A detailed description of BE1-851 supported message queries and responses is provided in the following
paragraphs.

Read Holding Registers

Query

This query message requests a register or block of registers to be read. The data block contains the starting
register address and the quantity of registers to be read. A register address of N will read holding register N+1. If
the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is returned.

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 3
Device Address
Function Code = 03 (hex)
Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo
No. of Registers Hi
No. of Registers Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

The number of registers cannot exceed 125 without causing an error response with the exception code for an
illegal function.

Response

The response message contains the data queried. The data block contains the block length in bytes followed by
the data (one Data Hi byte and one Data Lo byte) for each requested register.

Reading an unassigned holding register returns a value of zero.

Device Address
Function Code = 03 (hex)
Byte Count
Data Hi (For each requested register, there is one Data Hi and one Data Lo.)
Data Lo
.
.
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Return Query Data

This query contains data to be returned (looped back) in the response. The response and query messages
should be identical. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is returned.
Device Address
Function Code = 08 (hex)
Subfunction Hi = 00 (hex)
Subfunction Lo = 00 (hex)
Data Hi = xx (don't care)
Data Lo = xx (don't care)
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Restart Communications Option

This query causes the remote communications function of the BE1-851 to restart, terminating an active listen only
mode of operation. No effect is made upon primary relay operations. Only the remote communications function
is effected. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is returned.

If the BE1-851 receives this query while in the listen only mode, no response message is generated. Otherwise,
a response message identical to the query message is transmitted prior to the communications restart.

4 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

Device Address
Function Code = 08 (hex)
Subfunction Hi = 00 (hex)
Subfunction Lo = 01 (hex)
Data Hi = xx (don't care)
Data Lo = xx (don't care)
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Listen Only Mode

This query forces the addressed BE1-851 to the listen only mode for Modbus communications, isolating it from
other devices on the network. No responses are returned.

While in the listen only mode, the BE1-851 continues to monitor all queries. The BE1-851 does not respond to
any other query until the listen only mode is removed. All write requests with a query to Preset Multiple Registers
(Function Code = 16) are also ignored. When the BE1-851 receives the restart communications query, the listen
only mode is removed.

Device Address
Function Code = 08 (hex)
Subfunction Hi = 00 (hex)
Subfunction Lo = 04 (hex)
Data Hi = xx (don't care)
Data Lo = xx (don't care)
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Preset Multiple Registers

A preset multiple registers query could address multiple registers in one slave or multiple slaves. If the query is a
broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is returned.
Query

A Preset Multiple Register query message requests a register or block of registers to be written. The data block
contains the starting address and the quantity of registers to be written, followed by the Data Block byte count
and data. The BE1-851 will perform the write when the device address is the same as the BE1-851’s remote
address or when the device address is 0. A device address is 0 for a broadcast query.

A register address of N will write Holding Register N+1.

Data will cease to be written if any of the following exceptions occur.

• Queries to write to Read Only registers result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal Data
Address”.
• Queries attempting to write more than 100 registers cause an error response with Exception Code “Illegal
Function”.
• An incorrect Byte Count will result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal Data Value”.
• There are several instances of registers that are grouped together to collectively represent a single
numerical BE1-851 data value (i.e. - floating point data and 32-bit integer data). A query to write a subset
of such a register group will result in an error response with Exception Code “Illegal Data Address”.
• A query to write a not allowed value (out of range) to a register results in an error response with Exception
Code of “Illegal Data Value”.

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 5
Device Address
Function Code = 10 (hex)
Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo
No. of Registers Hi
No. of Registers Lo
Byte Count
Data Hi
Data Lo
.
.
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Response

The response message echoes the starting address and the number of registers. There is no response message
when the query is a broadcast (device address = 0).

Device Address
Function Code = 10 (hex)
Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo
No. of Registers Hi
No. of Registers Lo
CRC Hi Error Check
CRC Lo Error Check

Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register)

A Preset Single Register query message requests a single register to be written. The BE1-851 will perform the
write when the device address is the same as the BE1-851’s remote address.

Query

Data will cease to be written if any of the following exceptions occur.

• Queries to write to Read Only registers result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal Data
Address”.
• A query to write an unallowed value (out of range) to a register results in an error response with Exception
Code of “Illegal Data Value”.
Device Address
Function Code = 06 (hex)
Address Hi
Address Lo
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check

Response

The response message echoes the Query message after the register has been altered.

6 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

 DATA FORMATS
BE1-851 data varies from one to four bytes in length. Single byte data resides in the holding register least-
significant byte with the most-significant byte set to zero. Floating point data and long integer data (each 32-bits in
length) place the two most-significant bytes in the higher holding register address of the associated register pair.

Floating Point Data Format (FP)

The Modbus floating point data format uses two consecutive holding registers to represent a data value. The
first register contains the low-order 16 bits of the following 32 bit format:

• MSB is the sign bit for the floating point value (0 = positive).
• The next 8 bits are the exponent biased by 127 decimal.
• The 23 LSBs comprise the normalized mantissa. The most-significant bit of the mantissa is always
assumed to be 1 and is not explicitly stored, yielding an effective precision of 24 bits.
The value of the floating point number is obtained by multiplying the binary mantissa times two raised to the
power of the unbiased exponent. The assumed bit of the binary mantissa has the value of 1.0, with the
remaining 23 bits providing a fractional value. Table 3 shows the floating point format.
Table 3. Floating Point Format
Sign Exponent + 127 Mantissa
1 Bit 8 Bits 23 Bits
-37 38
The floating point format allows for values ranging from approximately 8.43X10 to 3.38X10 . A floating point
value of all zeroes is the value zero. A floating point value of all ones (not a number) signifies a value currently not
applicable or disabled.

Example: The value 95,800 represented in floating point format is hexadecimal 47BB1C00. This number will read
from two consecutive holding registers as follows:
Holding Register Value
K (Hi Byte) hex 1C
K (Lo Byte) hex 00
K+1 (Hi Byte) hex 47
K+1 (Lo Byte) hex BB
The same byte alignments are required to write.

Double Precision Data Format (DP)

The legacy version of BE1-851 Modbus supports the double precision data format, which uses two consecutive
registers to represent a data value. The first register (A) contains the high-order 16 bits of double precision data,
and is the actual data value divided by 10,000.

The second register(B) contains the low-order 16 bits of double precision data, and is the actual data value
modulus 10,000. The format is:
Double precision = A(10,000) + B

Example: The value 95,800 represented in double precision format is: 95800 = (9 x 10,000) + 5800, or
hexadecimal 000916A8. This number will read from two consecutive holding registers as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) hex 00
K (Lo Byte) hex 09
K+1 (Hi Byte) hex 16
K+1 (Lo Byte) hex A8

The same byte alignments are required to write.

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 7
Long Integer Data Format (LI)

The Modbus long integer data format uses two consecutive holding registers to represent a 32 bit data value.
The first register contains the low-order 16 bits and the second register contains the high-order 16 bits.

Example: The value 95,800 represented in long integer format is hexadecimal 0x00017638. This number will
read from two consecutive holding registers as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) hex 76
K (Lo Byte) hex 38
K+1 (Hi Byte) hex 00
K+1 (Lo Byte) hex 01

The same byte alignments are required to write.

Integer Data Format (INT)

The Modbus integer data format uses a single holding register to represent a 16 bit data value.

Example: The value 4660 represented in integer format is hexadecimal 0x1234. This number will read from a
holding register as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) hex 12
K (Lo Byte) hex 34

The same byte alignments are required to write.

Short Integer Data Format (SI)

The Modbus short integer data format uses a single holding register to represent an 8 bit data value. The
holding register high byte will always be zero.

Example: The value 132 represented in short integer format is hexadecimal 0x84. This number will read from a
holding register as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) hex 00
K (Lo Byte) hex 84

The same byte alignments are required to write.

ASCII Character Data Format ( ASC(1) )

The Modbus ASCII character data format uses a single holding register to represent a single character value.
The holding register high byte will always be zero with the ASCII character code in the low byte.

Example: The character ‘D’ represented in ASCII character format is hexadecimal 44. This number will read
from a holding register as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) hex 00
K (Lo Byte) hex 44

The same byte alignments are required to write.

8 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

ASCII String Data Format ( ASC(x) )

The Modbus ASCII string data format uses one or more holding registers to represent a sequence, or string, of
character values. If the string contains a single character, the holding register high byte will contain the ASCII
character code and the low byte will be zero.

Example: The string “PASSWORD” represented in ASCII string format will read as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) ‘P’
K (Lo Byte) ‘A’
K+1 (Hi Byte) ‘S’
K+1 (Lo Byte) ‘S’
K+2 (Hi Byte) ‘W’
K+2 (Lo Byte) ‘O’
K+3 (Hi Byte) ‘R’
K+3 (Lo Byte) ‘D’
Example: If the above string is changed to “P”, the new string will read as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) ‘P’
K (Lo Byte) hex 00
K+1 (Hi Byte) hex 00
K+1 (Lo Byte) hex 00
K+2 (Hi Byte) hex 00
K+2 (Lo Byte) hex 00
K+3 (Hi Byte) hex 00
K+3 (Lo Byte) hex 00

The same byte alignments are required to write.

Bit Mapped Data Format ( BM(x) )

The bit mapped data format uses two or more holding registers to represent a sequence of bit values. The
Modbus Bit Map data format can represent an 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit or 64 bit value.

Example: The Bit Map value of the hexidemal number 0x123456789ABCDEF0 using a BM64 format
will read as follows:

Holding Register Value

K (Hi Byte) 0x12
K (Lo Byte) 0x34
K+1 (Hi Byte) 0x56
K+1 (Lo Byte) 0x78
K+2 (Hi Byte) 0x9A
K+2 (Lo Byte) 0xBC
K+3 (Hi Byte) 0xDE
K+3 (Lo Byte) 0xF0

CRC Error Check

This field contains a two-byte CRC value for transmission error detection. The master first calculates the CRC
and appends it to the query message. The BE1-851 recalculates the CRC value for the received query and
performs a comparison to the query CRC value to determine if a transmission error has occurred. If so, no
response message is generated. If no transmission error has occurred, the slave calculates a new CRC value for
the response message and appends it to the message for transmission.

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 9
The CRC calculation is performed using all bytes of the device address, function code and data block fields. A
16-bit CRC-register is initialized to all 1's. Then each eight-bit byte of the message is used in the following
algorithm:
First, exclusive-OR the message byte with the low-order byte of the CRC-register. The result, stored in the
CRC-register, will then be right-shifted eight times. The CRC-register MSB is zero-filled with each shift. After
each shift, the CRC-register LSB is examined. If the LSB IS a 1, the CRC-register is then exclusive-ORed with
the fixed polynomial value A001 (hex) prior to the next shift. Once all bytes of the message have undergone the
above algorithm, the CRC-register will contain the message CRC value to be placed in the error check field.

Session Access Registers

The ACCESS REQUEST and the EXIT registers are used to access and release write privileges while
changing relay settings, resetting report registers, or using control commands through the Modbus port.
This feature is important because it prevents changes from being made concurrently from two areas. For
example, a user cannot make changes from COM0 at the same time a remote user is making changes via
Modbus from COM2.
Changing the settings through the Modbus port requires that the operator write to the ACCESS REQUEST
register to obtain programming access. This must follow writing the ACCESS PASSWORD register(s) with a
password to obtain access to change settings associated with the password. Different passwords give the
ability or access to perform different operations. The relay will deny access if an invalid password is entered
or if another user has already been granted programming access through another serial port or at the front
panel. Only one user can have access at any one time.

If no password protection is used, it is still necessary to obtain access in order to protect against accidental
changes. If password protection is disabled, then writing the ACCESS REQUEST register will be accepted in
place of a password. The relay will transmit a valid response message if the access query was received and
executed. The relay will respond with an error message if the access query could not be executed.

Changing settings through a Modbus communication port consists of the following sequence :

Step 1. Preset Multiple Registers query to ACCESS PASSWORD register(s) to specify password.
Step 2. Preset Multiple Registers query to ACCESS REQUEST register to access write privileges.
Step 3. Preset Multiple Registers queries to change the current settings.
Step 4. Preset Multiple Registers query to EXIT register to clear access and save.

Changes are not made to the working settings but to a scratch-pad copy of the settings. After the change(s)
are made, the new data will be copied to the working settings and saved to non-volatile memory when the
EXIT register is written with a ‘Y’. It is important to make all changes to relay parameters before writing the
EXIT register. This prevents a partial or incomplete protection scheme from being implemented.

Template Registers

The BE1-851 uses three templates. A template is a block of holding registers to which the user assigns one of a
number of similar groups of parameters. Templates are used for settings groups, fault summaries and report
generation. Modbus Template Registers 40036 (Settings Group Selection), 40038 (Fault Number Selection),
40039 (Report Selection) and 40040 (Report Focus) DO NOT REQUIRE any Write Password Access level
before they can be written to.

The BE1-851 has four settings groups. The GRP template is assigned the parameters of a settings group.
Therefore, before reading or writing settings group values, a user must first specify which settings group is to
be associated with the template. This is accomplished by writing the desired settings group number (0-3) into
the SETTINGS GROUP SELECTION Template holding register.

The BE1-851 stores up to 12 faults. Each fault is accessed by its fault number which ranges from 1 to 255. The
FLT template is assigned the parameters of a particular fault occurrence. Therefore, before reading fault
summary values, a user must first specify which fault number is to be associated with the template. This is
accomplished by writing the desired fault number (1-255) into the FAULT SELECTION Template holding
register.

10 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

The BE1-851 generates 10 ASCII reports. The RPT template is assigned the text of a report. Therefore, before
reading report text, a user must first specify which report is to be associated with the template. This is
accomplished by writing the desired report number into the REPORT SELECTION Template holding register
along with the associated report identifier, if any, into the REPORT FOCUS Template holding register.

Fault Summary Registers

The user can enter any fault number (1 – 255) into the FAULT SELECTION Template holding register to
associate summary parameters for that fault number with the FLT Template. The Fault Template Status
register (47513) indicates whether or not that fault number specifies a recent fault (one of 12 stored faults). If
so, the Fault Template Status register value is the fault number; otherwise, it is zero and all FLT template
values will read zero.

The Fault Indicator register (47512) value is the fault number (1 – 255) of the most recent fault. The user may
construct his front-end GUI to link this register value into the FAULT SELECTION Template holding register,
thereby automatically associating the FLT template with the most recent fault occurrence.

Report Generation Registers

The BE1-851 generates numerous ASCII reports available via serial commands. Several of these reports are
available intact via the Modbus communication port. The desired report is first specified by writing the
REPORT SELECTION holding register. If the report requires a number to be specified, such as a fault number
or number of events, that number is written into the REPORT FOCUS holding register. The report is then
available via the RPT template. The report can be read from 1 to 125 registers at a time, with each register
containing 2 ASCII characters of information. The report read queries can be interspersed among other query
types. The RPT template is continually re-read until the report has completed. Once the report is complete,
reading from the RPT template will continually return the ASCII character code of 127 (“7F” hexadecimal). The
report cannot be re-read or another report read until the REPORT SELECTION holding register is re-written.

Contiguous Poll Block Registers

The user may allocate up to 125 holding registers to the Contiguous Poll Block (49875-999). This allocation
allows dispersed registers which are frequently read to be polled via a single read query. A register is
assigned to a position in the Poll Block by writing its address value into the corresponding position in the
Contiguous Poll Block Assignments registers (40746-870). Writing a zero value leaves that Poll Block position
unassigned. Once assignments are made, the values of the assigned registers may be read by polling the
Contiguous Poll Block. Polling an unassigned position will return a value of zero.

For example, if you wanted to continuously monitor the Date (47364), Time (47365-66), Fault Indicator
(47512) and Breaker Status (47388) Holding Registers, you would first configure the Contiguous Poll Block
Registers by writing the desired register address values 7364, 7365, 7366, 7512 and 7388 into the
Contiguous Poll Block Assignment registers 40746 thru 40750, respectively. You may now begin monitoring
the specified registers by reading the first 5 locations in the Contiguous Poll Block; ie, reading register
49875 for the Date (as specified in it’s corresponding assignment register 40746), reading register
49876 and 77 for the Time (as specified in their corresponding assignment registers 40747 and 48),
reading register 49878 for the Fault Indicator (as specified in it’s corresponding assignment register
40749), and reading register 49879 for the Breaker Status (as specified in it’s corresponding
assignment register 40750).

Exception Code Enhancement Registers

When a BE1-851 responds to a Preset Multiple Register query with an error response message, additional
information detailing the cause of the error may be available in the ERROR DETAILS block of holding
registers (49835-54). The information is in ASCII format and available by reading the message string from the
ERROR DETAILS block. The message remains available until the next Preset Multiple Register query is
executed unless that query is to the FAULT SELECTION Template holding register. Since this register can be
written automatically and randomly in time, the ERROR DETAILS block will not be updated.

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 11
The ERROR DETAILS block will also contain the exit status following a Preset Multiple Register query to the
EXIT (40001) register. You may clear the ERROR DETAILS message at any time without affecting system
operation by sending a Preset Multiple Register query to any unassigned holding register.

12 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

 MAPPING BE1-851 PARAMETERS INTO
MODICON HOLDING REGISTER ADDRESS SPACE

General

Parameters are mapped into the holding register address space (40001 – 49999) in blocks according to access
type.

Any Holding Register not listed in the Register Table is an unassigned Holding Register. A value of zero
always results when reading an unassigned Holding Register. Writes to unassigned Holding Registers are
legal, but no action will be taken (the write is ignored).

Conventions

The Data Format column uses the following abbreviations.

ASC(x) - ASCII string, where x = the maximum defined string length

BM(x) - Bit-map, where x = the number of related bits
FP - Floating point
INT - Integer (16-bit integer)
LI - Long Integer (32-bit integer)
SI - Short Integer (8-bit integer)
DP - Double Precision (legacy BE1-851 only)

The Notes column uses the following abbreviations:

GRP - Group Template Member

FLT - Fault Template Member
RPT - Report Template Member
NS - Not Supported
TS - Time Stamp format: MSEC of the day (0 to 86,400,000 msec) and DAYs since 01/01/1984.
LEG851 - Original (legacy) BE1-851 Modbus parameter mapping.
PS - Effective only when the Password Security parameter is enabled. See REGISTER DETAILS for
Password Security holding register 40989.
PW - Effective for any communication port active with ASCII protocol and for the modbus port (COM 2)
when Password Security is enabled.

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 13
 REGISTER TABLE – ORDERED BY REGISTER NUMBER

Holding Read/Write Data

Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

Session Parameters

40001 Exit RW ASC(1) PS

40002-05 Access Password RW ASC(8) PS

40006 Access Request RW BM(16) PS

Template Parameters

40036 Settings Group Selection RW SI

40038 Fault Selection RW SI
40039 Report Selection RW SI
40040 Report Focus RW INT

Global Parameters

40080-83 Global Password RW ASC(8) PW

40084 Global Path RW BM(8) PW

40085-88 Setting Password RW ASC(8) PW

40089 Setting Path RW BM(8) PW

40090-93 Control Password RW ASC(8) PW

40094 Control Path RW BM(8) PW

40095-98 Report Password RW ASC(8) PW

40099 Report Path RW BM(8) PW

Control Parameters

40117 Select Group RW ASC(1)

40118 Operate Group RW ASC(1)

40119 Select Virtual Selector Switch 43 RW ASC(1)

40120 Operate Virtual Selector Switch 43 RW ASC(1)
40121 Select Virtual Selector Switch 143 RW ASC(1)
40122 Operate Virtual Selector Switch 143 RW ASC(1)
40123 Select Virtual Selector Switch 243 RW ASC(1)
40124 Operate Virtual Selector Switch 243 RW ASC(1)
40125 Select Virtual Selector Switch 343 RW ASC(1)
40126 Operate Virtual Selector Switch 343 RW ASC(1)

40135 Select 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch RW ASC(1)

40136 Operate 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch RW ASC(1)

40137 Select All Outputs RW ASC(1)

40138 Operate All Outputs RW ASC(1)

14 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

0139 Select Output A RW ASC(1)

40140 Operate Output A RW ASC(1)
40141 Select Output 1 RW ASC(1)
40142 Operate Output 1 RW ASC(1)
40143 Select Output 2 RW ASC(1)
40144 Operate Output 2 RW ASC(1)
40145 Select Output 3 RW ASC(1)
40146 Operate Output 3 RW ASC(1)
40147 Select Output 4 RW ASC(1)
40148 Operate Output 4 RW ASC(1)
40149 Select Output 5 RW ASC(1)
40150 Operate Output 5 RW ASC(1)

Group Setting Parameters

The following is the Group Template (GRP)

40269-70 50TP Pickup RW FP GRP

40271-72 50TP Time Delay RW LI GRP
40273-74 50TN Pickup RW FP GRP
40275-76 50TN Time Delay RW LI GRP
40277-78 50TQ Pickup RW FP GRP
40279-80 50TQ Time Delay RW LI GRP

40281-82 150TP Pickup RW FP GRP

40283-84 150TP Time Delay RW LI GRP
40285-86 150TN Pickup RW FP GRP
40287-88 150TN Time Delay RW LI GRP
40289-90 150TQ Pickup RW FP GRP
40291-92 150TQ Time Delay RW LI GRP

40305-06 51P Pickup RW FP GRP

40307-08 51P Time Dial RW FP GRP
40309-10 51P Curve Type RW ASC(3) GRP

40311-12 51N Pickup RW FP GRP

40313-14 51N Time Dial RW FP GRP
40315-16 51N Curve Type RW ASC(3) GRP

40317-18 51Q Pickup RW FP GRP

40319-20 51Q Time Dial RW FP GRP
40321-22 51Q Curve Type RW ASC(3) GRP

40359-60 62 Time Delay 1 RW LI GRP

40361-62 62 Time Delay 2 RW LI GRP
40363-64 162 Time Delay 1 RW LI GRP
40365-66 162 Time Delay 2 RW LI GRP

40406-07 79 First Automatic Reclose Delay RW LI GRP

40408-09 79 Second Automatic Reclose Delay RW LI GRP
40410-11 79 Third Automatic Reclose Delay RW LI GRP
40412-13 79 Fourth Automatic Reclose Delay RW LI GRP
40414-15 79 Reset Time Delay RW LI GRP
40416-17 79 Reclose Fail Time Delay RW LI GRP
40418-19 79 Maximum Reclose Time RW LI GRP
40420 79 Sequence Control RW BM(16) GRP

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 15
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

Global Setting Parameters

40606-07 Breaker Fail Time Delay RW LI

40608-09 Programmable 51 Curve Constant A RW FP

40610-11 Programmable 51 Curve Constant B RW FP
40612-13 Programmable 51 Curve Constant C RW FP
40614-15 Programmable 51 Curve Constant N RW FP
40616-17 Programmable 51 Curve Constant R RW FP

40618 Input 1 Contact Recognition Time Delay RW SI

40619 Input 1 Contact Debounce Time Delay RW SI
40620 Input 2 Contact Recognition Time Delay RW SI
40621 Input 2 Contact Debounce Time Delay RW SI
40622 Input 3 Contact Recognition Time Delay RW SI
40623 Input 3 Contact Debounce Time Delay RW SI
40624 Input 4 Contact Recognition Time Delay RW SI
40625 Input 4 Contact Debounce Time Delay RW SI

40746-870 Contiguous Poll Block Assignments RW INT

40871 Setting Group Control On Time RW INT

40872 Setting Group 1 Automatic Control Switch Time RW SI

40873 Setting Group 1 Automatic Control Switch Level RW SI
40874 Setting Group 1 Automatic Control Return Time RW SI
40875 Setting Group 1 Automatic Control Return Level RW SI

40877 Setting Group 2 Automatic Control Switch Time RW SI

40878 Setting Group 2 Automatic Control Switch Level RW SI
40879 Setting Group 2 Automatic Control Return Time RW SI
40880 Setting Group 2 Automatic Control Return Level RW SI

40882 Setting Group 3 Automatic Control Switch Time RW SI

40883 Setting Group 3 Automatic Control Switch Level RW SI
40884 Setting Group 3 Automatic Control Return Time RW SI
40885 Setting Group 3 Automatic Control Return Level RW SI

40887-90 79 Zone Sequence Logic Mask RW BM(64)

40895-98 79 Zone Sequence Logic Term RW BM(64)

Serial Port Setting Parameters

40962 Serial Port 0 Baud Rate RW INT

40964 Serial Port 0 Software Flow Control RW SI
40965 Serial Port 0 Page Length RW SI
40966 Serial Port 0 Acknowledgement Format RW SI

40971 Serial Port 1 Baud Rate RW INT

40972 Serial Port 1 Relay Address RW INT
40973 Serial Port 1 Software Flow Control RW SI
40974 Serial Port 1 Page Length RW SI
40975 Serial Port 1 Acknowledgement Format RW SI

40980 Serial Port 2 Baud Rate RW INT

40981 Serial Port 2 Relay Address RW INT
40986 Serial Port 2 Modbus Parity RW SI
40987 Serial Port 2 Modbus Remote Delay RW SI
16 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

40988 Serial Port 2 Modbus Stop Bits RW SI

40989 Password Security RW SI

System Data Setting Parameters

41019 System Frequency RW SI

41020 Phase Rotation RW SI
41021 Phase CT Ratio RW INT
41022 Neutral CT Ratio RW INT

Breaker Duty Setting Parameters

41092 Breaker Duty Type RW SI

41093-94 Maximum Breaker Duty RW FP

41096 Programmable Breaker Alarm #1 Mode RW INT

41097-98 Programmable Breaker Alarm #1 Limit RW FP

41099 Programmable Breaker Alarm #2 Mode RW INT

41100-01 Programmable Breaker Alarm #2 Limit RW FP

41102 Programmable Breaker Alarm #3 Mode RW INT

41103-04 Programmable Breaker Alarm #3 Limit RW FP

41110-13 Breaker Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)

41118-21 Breaker Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41126-29 Breaker Close Logic Mask RW BM(64)

41134-37 Breaker Close Logic Term RW BM(64)

Relay Data Setting Parameters

41259-60 Phase Demand Alarm Level RW FP

41261-62 Neutral Demand Alarm Level RW FP
41263-64 Negative Sequence Demand Alarm Level RW FP

41265-66 Major Alarm Mask RW BM(32)

41267-68 Minor Alarm Mask RW BM(32)
41269-70 Logic Alarm Mask RW BM(32)

41272 Clock Format – Date RW ASC(1)

41273 Clock Format – Time RW SI

41275 Phase Demand Interval RW SI

41276 Neutral Demand Interval RW SI
41277 Negative Sequence Demand Interval RW SI

41284 Output Hold Mask RW BM(8)

41287-88 Target Mask RW BM(32)

41291-94 Programmable Screen #1 RW ASC(7)

41295-98 Programmable Screen #2 RW ASC(7)
41299-302 Programmable Screen #3 RW ASC(7)
41303-06 Programmable Screen #4 RW ASC(7)
41307-10 Programmable Screen #5 RW ASC(7)
41311-14 Programmable Screen #6 RW ASC(7)
41315-18 Programmable Screen #7 RW ASC(7)
41319-22 Programmable Screen #8 RW ASC(7)
 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 17
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

41323-26 Programmable Screen #9 RW ASC(7)

41327-30 Programmable Screen #10 RW ASC(7)
41331-34 Programmable Screen #11 RW ASC(7)
41335-38 Programmable Screen #12 RW ASC(7)
41339-42 Programmable Screen #13 RW ASC(7)
41343-46 Programmable Screen #14 RW ASC(7)
41347-50 Programmable Screen #15 RW ASC(7)
41351-54 Programmable Screen #16 RW ASC(7)

41355-58 Fault Record Trigger (Trip) Logic Mask RW BM(64)

41363-66 Fault Record Trigger (Trip) Logic Term RW BM(64)

41371-74 Fault Record Trigger (Pickup) Logic Mask RW BM(64)

41379-82 Fault Record Trigger (Pickup) Logic Term RW BM(64)

41387-90 Fault Record Trigger (Logic) Logic Mask RW BM(64)

41395-98 Fault Record Trigger (Logic) Logic Term RW BM(64)

41403-06 Reset Target Logic Mask RW BM(64)

41411-14 Reset Target Logic Term RW BM(64)

41419-22 Reset Alarm Logic Mask RW BM(64)

41427-30 Reset Alarm Logic Term RW BM(64)

41435 Filter Type for Phase DSP RW ASC(1)

41436 Filter Type for Neutral DSP RW ASC(1)

Custom Logic Setting Parameters

41465-68 User Custom Logic Name RW ASC(8)

41469-72 Current Active Logic Scheme RW ASC(8)
41473-76 Custom Logic Name R- ASC(8)
41477-80 Standard Logic #1 Name R- ASC(8)
41481-84 Standard Logic #2 Name R- ASC(8)
41485-88 Standard Logic #3 Name R- ASC(8)
41489-92 Standard Logic #4 Name R- ASC(8)
41493-96 Standard Logic #5 Name R- ASC(8)
41497-500 Standard Logic #6 Name R- ASC(8)
41501-04 Standard Logic #7 Name R- ASC(8)

41505 Programmable 50TP Block Logic Mode RW INT

41506-09 Programmable 50TP Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41514-17 Programmable 50TP Block Logic Term RW BM(64)
41522 Programmable 50TN Block Logic Mode RW INT
41523-26 Programmable 50TN Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41531-34 Programmable 50TN Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41539 Programmable 50TQ Block Logic Mode RW INT

41540-43 Programmable 50TQ Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41548-51 Programmable 50TQ Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41556 Programmable 150TP Block Logic Mode RW INT

41557-60 Programmable 150TP Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41565-68 Programmable 150TP Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41573 Programmable 150TN Block Logic Mode RW INT

41574-77 Programmable 150TN Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41582-85 Programmable 150TN Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

18 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

41590 Programmable 150TQ Block Logic Mode RW INT

41591-94 Programmable 150TQ Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41599-602 Programmable 150TQ Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41658 Programmable Breaker Fail Logic Mode RW INT

41659-62 Programmable Breaker Fail Initiate Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41667-70 Programmable Breaker Fail Initiate Logic Term RW BM(64)
41675-78 Programmable Breaker Fail Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41683-86 Programmable Breaker Fail Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41691 Programmable 51P Logic Mode RW INT

41692-95 Programmable 51P Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41700-03 Programmable 51P Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41708 Programmable 51N Logic Mode RW INT

41709-12 Programmable 51N Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41717-20 Programmable 51N Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41725 Programmable 51Q Logic Mode RW INT

41726-29 Programmable 51Q Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41734-37 Programmable 51Q Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41844 Programmable 62 Timer Logic Mode RW INT

41845-48 Programmable 62 Timer Start Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41853-56 Programmable 62 Timer Start Logic Term RW BM(64)
41861-64 Programmable 62 Timer Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41869-72 Programmable 62 Timer Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

41877 Programmable 162 Timer Logic Mode RW INT

41878-81 Programmable 162 Timer Start Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41886-89 Programmable 162 Timer Start Logic Term RW BM(64)
41894-97 Programmable 162 Timer Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
41902-05 Programmable 162 Timer Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

42010 Programm Settings Group Logic Mode RW INT

42011-14 Programm Settings Group Block Logic Mask RW BM(64)
42019-22 Programm Settings Group Block Logic Term RW BM(64)

42027-30 Programm Settings Group0 Select Logic Mas RW BM(64)

42035-38 Programm Settings Group0 Select Logic Ter RW BM(64)

42043-46 Programm Settings Group1 Select Logic Mas RW BM(64)

42051-54 Programm Settings Group1 Select Logic Ter RW BM(64)

42059-62 Programm Settings Group2 Select Logic Mas RW BM(64)

42067-70 Programm Settings Group2 Select Logic Ter RW BM(64)
42075-78 Programm Settings Group3 Select Logic Mas RW BM(64)
42083-86 Programm Settings Group3 Select Logic Ter RW BM(64)

42133 Programmable Virtual Output A Term Count RW SI

42134-37 Programmable Virtual Output A Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42142-45 Programmable Virtual Output A Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42150-53 Programmable Virtual Output A Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42158-61 Programmable Virtual Output A Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42166-69 Programmable Virtual Output A Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42174-77 Programmable Virtual Output A Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42182-85 Programmable Virtual Output A Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 19
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

42190-93 Programmable Virtual Output A Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42198 Programmable Virtual Output 1 Term Count RW SI

42199-202 Programmable Virtual Output 1 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42207-10 Programmable Virtual Output 1 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42215-18 Programmable Virtual Output 1 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42223-26 Programmable Virtual Output 1 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42231-34 Programmable Virtual Output 1 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42239-42 Programmable Virtual Output 1 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42247-50 Programmable Virtual Output 1 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42255-58 Programmable Virtual Output 1 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42263 Programmable Virtual Output 2 Term Count RW SI

42264-67 Programmable Virtual Output 2 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42272-75 Programmable Virtual Output 2 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42280-83 Programmable Virtual Output 2 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42288-91 Programmable Virtual Output 2 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42296-99 Programmable Virtual Output 2 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42304-07 Programmable Virtual Output 2 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42312-15 Programmable Virtual Output 2 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42320-23 Programmable Virtual Output 2 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42328 Programmable Virtual Output 3 Term Count RW SI

42329-32 Programmable Virtual Output 3 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42337-40 Programmable Virtual Output 3 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42345-48 Programmable Virtual Output 3 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42353-56 Programmable Virtual Output 3 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42361-64 Programmable Virtual Output 3 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42369-72 Programmable Virtual Output 3 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42377-80 Programmable Virtual Output 3 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42385-88 Programmable Virtual Output 3 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42393 Programmable Virtual Output 4 Term Count RW SI

42394-97 Programmable Virtual Output 4 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42402-05 Programmable Virtual Output 4 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42410-13 Programmable Virtual Output 4 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42418-21 Programmable Virtual Output 4 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42426-29 Programmable Virtual Output 4 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42434-37 Programmable Virtual Output 4 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42442-45 Programmable Virtual Output 4 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42450-53 Programmable Virtual Output 4 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42458 Programmable Virtual Output 5 Term Count RW SI

42459-62 Programmable Virtual Output 5 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42467-70 Programmable Virtual Output 5 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42475-78 Programmable Virtual Output 5 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42483-86 Programmable Virtual Output 5 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42491-94 Programmable Virtual Output 5 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42499-502 Programmable Virtual Output 5 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42507-10 Programmable Virtual Output 5 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42515-18 Programmable Virtual Output 5 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42523 Programmable Virtual Output 6 Term Count RW SI

42524-27 Programmable Virtual Output 6 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42532-35 Programmable Virtual Output 6 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42540-43 Programmable Virtual Output 6 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42548-51 Programmable Virtual Output 6 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42556-59 Programmable Virtual Output 6 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
20 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

42564-67 Programmable Virtual Output 6 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)

42572-75 Programmable Virtual Output 6 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42580-83 Programmable Virtual Output 6 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42588 Programmable Virtual Output 7 Term Count RW SI

42589-92 Programmable Virtual Output 7 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42597-600 Programmable Virtual Output 7 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42605-08 Programmable Virtual Output 7 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42613-16 Programmable Virtual Output 7 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42621-24 Programmable Virtual Output 7 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42629-32 Programmable Virtual Output 7 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42637-40 Programmable Virtual Output 7 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42645-48 Programmable Virtual Output 7 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42653 Programmable Virtual Output 8 Term Count RW SI

42654-57 Programmable Virtual Output 8 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42662-65 Programmable Virtual Output 8 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42670-73 Programmable Virtual Output 8 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42678-81 Programmable Virtual Output 8 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42686-89 Programmable Virtual Output 8 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42694-97 Programmable Virtual Output 8 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42702-05 Programmable Virtual Output 8 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42710-13 Programmable Virtual Output 8 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42718 Programmable Virtual Output 9 Term Count RW SI

42719-22 Programmable Virtual Output 9 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42727-30 Programmable Virtual Output 9 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42735-38 Programmable Virtual Output 9 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42743-46 Programmable Virtual Output 9 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42751-54 Programmable Virtual Output 9 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42759-62 Programmable Virtual Output 9 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42767-70 Programmable Virtual Output 9 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42775-78 Programmable Virtual Output 9 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42783 Programmable Virtual Output 10 Term Count RW SI

42784-87 Programmable Virtual Output 10 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42792-95 Programmable Virtual Output 10 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42800-03 Programmable Virtual Output 10 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42808-11 Programmable Virtual Output 10 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42816-19 Programmable Virtual Output 10 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42824-27 Programmable Virtual Output 10 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42832-35 Programmable Virtual Output 10 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42840-43 Programmable Virtual Output 10 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42848 Programmable Virtual Output 11 Term Count RW SI

42849-52 Programmable Virtual Output 11 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42857-60 Programmable Virtual Output 11 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42865-68 Programmable Virtual Output 11 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
42873-76 Programmable Virtual Output 11 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
42881-84 Programmable Virtual Output 11 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42889-92 Programmable Virtual Output 11 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42897-900 Programmable Virtual Output 11 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42905-08 Programmable Virtual Output 11 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42913 Programmable Virtual Output 12 Term Count RW SI

42914-17 Programmable Virtual Output 12 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42922-25 Programmable Virtual Output 12 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42930-33 Programmable Virtual Output 12 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 21
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

42938-41 Programmable Virtual Output 12 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)

42946-49 Programmable Virtual Output 12 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
42954-57 Programmable Virtual Output 12 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
42962-65 Programmable Virtual Output 12 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
42970-73 Programmable Virtual Output 12 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

42978 Programmable Virtual Output 13 Term Count RW SI

42979-82 Programmable Virtual Output 13 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
42987-90 Programmable Virtual Output 13 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
42995-98 Programmable Virtual Output 13 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
43003-06 Programmable Virtual Output 13 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
43011-14 Programmable Virtual Output 13 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
43019-22 Programmable Virtual Output 13 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
43027-30 Programmable Virtual Output 13 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
43035-38 Programmable Virtual Output 13 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

43043 Programmable Virtual Output 14 Term Count RW SI

43044-47 Programmable Virtual Output 14 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
43052-55 Programmable Virtual Output 14 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
43060-63 Programmable Virtual Output 14 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
43068-71 Programmable Virtual Output 14 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
43076-79 Programmable Virtual Output 14 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
43084-87 Programmable Virtual Output 14 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
43092-95 Programmable Virtual Output 14 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
43100-03 Programmable Virtual Output 14 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

43108 Programmable Virtual Output 15 Term Count RW SI

43109-12 Programmable Virtual Output 15 Logic Mask 1 RW BM(64)
43117-20 Programmable Virtual Output 15 Logic Term 1 RW BM(64)
43125-28 Programmable Virtual Output 15 Logic Mask 2 RW BM(64)
43133-36 Programmable Virtual Output 15 Logic Term 2 RW BM(64)
43141-44 Programmable Virtual Output 15 Logic Mask 3 RW BM(64)
43149-52 Programmable Virtual Output 15 Logic Term 3 RW BM(64)
43157-60 Programmable Virtual Output 15 Logic Mask 4 RW BM(64)
43165-68 Programmable Virtual Output 15 Logic Term 4 RW BM(64)

43173 Programm 79 Logic Mode RW INT

43174-77 Programm Reclose Initiate Logic Mask RW BM(64)
43182-85 Programm Reclose Initiate Logic Term RW BM(64)
43190-93 Programm Reclose Status Logic Mask RW BM(64)
43198-201 Programm Reclose Status Logic Term RW BM(64)
43206-09 Programm Reclose Wait Logic Mask RW BM(64)
43214-17 Programm Reclose Wait Logic Term RW BM(64)
43222-25 Programm Reclose DTL Logic Mask RW BM(64)
43230-33 Programm Reclose DTL Logic Term RW BM(64)

System Labels And Id Setting Parameters

43438-42 Relay ID RW ASC(10)

43453-67 Station ID RW ASC(30)

43498-502 Virtual Selector Switch 43 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43503-06 Virtual Selector Switch 43 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43507-10 Virtual Selector Switch 43 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43511-15 Virtual Selector Switch 143 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43516-19 Virtual Selector Switch 143 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43520-23 Virtual Selector Switch 143 – False Label RW ASC(7)
22 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

43524-28 Virtual Selector Switch 243 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43529-32 Virtual Selector Switch 243 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43533-36 Virtual Selector Switch 243 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43537-41 Virtual Selector Switch 343 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43542-45 Virtual Selector Switch 343 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43546-49 Virtual Selector Switch 343 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43602-06 Virtual Output A – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43607-10 Virtual Output A – True Label RW ASC(7)
43611-14 Virtual Output A – False Label RW ASC(7)

43615-19 Virtual Output 1 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43620-23 Virtual Output 1 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43624-27 Virtual Output 1 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43628-32 Virtual Output 2 – Name Label RW ASC(10))

43633-36 Virtual Output 2 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43637-40 Virtual Output 2 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43641-45 Virtual Output 3 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43646-49 Virtual Output 3 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43650-53 Virtual Output 3 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43654-58 Virtual Output 4 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43659-62 Virtual Output 4 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43663-66 Virtual Output 4 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43667-71 Virtual Output 5 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43672-75 Virtual Output 5 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43676-79 Virtual Output 5 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43680-84 Virtual Output 6 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43685-88 Virtual Output 6 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43689-92 Virtual Output 6 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43693-97 Virtual Output 7 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43698-701 Virtual Output 7 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43702-05 Virtual Output 7 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43706-10 Virtual Output 8 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43711-14 Virtual Output 8 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43715-18 Virtual Output 8 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43719-23 Virtual Output 9 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43724-27 Virtual Output 9 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43728-31 Virtual Output 9 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43732-36 Virtual Output 10 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43737-40 Virtual Output 10 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43741-44 Virtual Output 10 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43745-49 Virtual Output 11 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43750-53 Virtual Output 11 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43754-57 Virtual Output 11 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43758-62 Virtual Output 12 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 23
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

43763-66 Virtual Output 12 – True Label RW ASC(7)

43767-70 Virtual Output 12 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43771-75 Virtual Output 13 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43776-79 Virtual Output 13 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43780-83 Virtual Output 13 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43784-88 Virtual Output 14 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43789-92 Virtual Output 14 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43793-96 Virtual Output 14 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43797-801 Virtual Output 15 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43802-05 Virtual Output 15 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43806-09 Virtual Output 15 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43849-53 Input 1 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43854-57 Input 1 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43858-61 Input 1 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43862-66 Input 2 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43867-70 Input 2 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43871-74 Input 2 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43875-79 Input 3 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43880-83 Input 3 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43884-87 Input 3 – False Label RW ASC(7)

43888-92 Input 4 – Name Label RW ASC(10)

43893-96 Input 4 – True Label RW ASC(7)
43897-900 Input 4 – False Label RW ASC(7)

Legacy: Product Information

The Range 44011 – 45626 is the original (legacy) BE1-851 Modbus map

44011-18 Application Software Version Number R- ASC(14) LEG851

44021-27 Boot Software Version and Date R- ASC(14) LEG851

44031-37 Serial Number R- ASC(14) LEG851

44046-56 Style Number R- ASC(22) LEG851

44061 Part Number R- INT LEG851

44081-85 Model Number R- ASC(10) LEG851

44171-86 Customer Identification 1 (Relay ID) R- ASC(32) LEG851

44187-202 Customer Identification 2 (Station ID) R- ASC(32) LEG851

Legacy: Time and Date

44241 Date and Time – Day RW INT LEG851

44242-43 Date and Time – Milliseconds RW DP LEG851

24 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

Legacy: Breaker Duty

44251-52 Breaker Duty Phase A RW DP LEG851

44253-54 Breaker Duty Phase B RW DP LEG851
44255-56 Breaker Duty Phase C RW DP LEG851

44261-62 Breaker Operations Counter RW DP LEG851

Legacy: Select Before Operate (SBO) and Control Commands

44301 Control Select RW INT LEG851

44303 Control Operate RW INT LEG851

Legacy: Metering - Primary Parameters

44401-02 Phase A Current Magnitude R- DP LEG851

44404-05 Phase B Current Magnitude R- DP LEG851
44407-08 Phase C Current Magnitude R- DP LEG851
44410-11 Neutral Current Magnitude R- DP LEG851
44413-14 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude R- DP LEG851

Legacy: Reporting

44601-02 PK Demd Current - Phase A RW DP LEG851

44603 PK Demd Current - Phase A DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44604-05 PK Demd Current - Phase A MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44606-07 PK Demd Current - Phase B RW DP LEG851

44608 PK Demd Current - Phase B DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44609-10 PK Demd Current - Phase B MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44611-12 PK Demd Current - Phase C RW DP LEG851

44613 PK Demd Current - Phase C DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44614-15 PK Demd Current - Phase C MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44616-17 PK Demd Current – Neutral RW DP LEG851

44618 PK Demd Current - Neutral DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44619-20 PK Demd Current - Neutral MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44621-22 PK Demd Current – Neg Sequence RW DP LEG851

44623 PK Demd Current - Neg Sequence DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44624-25 PK Demd Current - Neg Sequence MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44631-32 Today’s PK Demd Current - Phase A R- DP LEG851

44633 Today's PK Demd Current - Phase A DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44634-35 Today's PK Demd Current - Phase A MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44636-37 Today’s PK Demd Current - Phase B R- DP LEG851

44638 Today's PK Demd Current - Phase B DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44639-40 Today's PK Demd Current - Phase B MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44641-42 Today’s PK Demd Current - Phase C R- DP LEG851

44643 Today's PK Demd Current - Phase C DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44644-45 Today's PK Demd Current - Phase C MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44646-47 Today’s PK Demd Current - Neutral R- DP LEG851

44648 Today's PK Demd Current - Neutral DAY R- INT TS,LEG851

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 25
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

44649-50 Today's PK Demd Current - Neutral MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44651-52 Today’s PK Demd Current – Neg Seq R- DP LEG851

44653 Today's PK Demd Current - Neg Seq DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44654-55 Today's PK Demd Current - Neg Seq MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851
44661-62 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Phase A R- DP LEG851
44663 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Phase A DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44664-65 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Phase A MSE CR - DP TS,LEG851

44666-67 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Phase B R- DP LEG851

44668 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Phase B DAY R - INT TS,LEG851
44669-70 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Phase B MSEC R - DP TS,LEG851

44671-72 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Phase C R- DP LEG851

44673 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Phase C DAY R - INT TS,LEG851
44674-75 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Phase C MSEC R - DP TS,LEG851

44676-77 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Neutral R- DP LEG851

44678 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Neutral DAY R- INT TS,LEG851
44679-80 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Neutral MSEC R- DP TS,LEG851

44681-82 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current – Negative Seq R - DP LEG851

44683 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Neg Seq DAY R - INT TS,LEG851
44684-85 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current - Neg Seq MSEC R - DP TS,LEG851

45601-02 General Status R- BM(32) LEG851

45603-04 Diagnostic Alarm Status R- BM(32) LEG851

45605-06 Major Alarm Status R- BM(32) LEG851

45607-08 Minor Alarm Status R- BM(32) LEG851

45609-12 System Status R- BM(64) LEG851

45617 Hardware Output Status R- BM(16) LEG851

45618 Active Setting Group R- INT LEG851
45619 Active Logic R- INT LEG851
45620 Recloser Status R- BM(16) LEG851

45621 50 Target Status RW BM(16) LEG851

45623 51 Target Status RW BM(16) LEG851
45625 BF Target Status RW BM(16) LEG851

Report Parameters

47274-77 Model Number R- ASC(8)

47282-89 Application SW Version # / Date R- ASC(16)

47296-302 Boot SW Version # / Date R- ASC(14)

47310-16 Serial Number R- ASC(13)

47324-34 Style Number R- ASC(21)

47364 Date and Time – Day RW INT TS

47365-66 Date and Time – Milliseconds RW LI TS
26 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

47367-70 System Status R– BM(64)

47373 Current Active Group Setting R– SI

47374 Current Group Control Setting R- ASC(1)
47375-76 Current Output Control Settings (OutputPulse) R- BM(32)
47377-78 Current Output Control Settings (OutputLatch) R– BM(32)
47379 Current Output Contact Status R– BM(16)
47380-81 Active Alarm Flags (SumFlags) R– BM(32)
47382-83 Active Alarm Flags (ProgAlarms) R– BM(32)
47384-85 Target Status RW BM(32)

47388 Current Breaker Status R- ASC(1)

47389-92 Current Active Logic R- ASC(8)
47393 Reclose Status R- INT

47394-95 Breaker Contact Duty Log – Phase A RW FP

47396-97 Breaker Contact Duty Log – Phase B RW FP
47398-99 Breaker Contact Duty Log – Phase C RW FP
47400-01 Breaker Operation Counter RW LI

47410-11 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current – Phase A R- FP

47412 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47413-14 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R - LI TS

47415-16 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current – Phase B R- FP

47417 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47418-19 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R - LI TS

47420-21 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current – Phase C R- FP

47422 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47423-24 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R - LI TS

47425-26 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current – Neutral R- FP

47427 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47428-29 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R - LI TS

47430-31 Yesterday’s PK Demd Current – Negative Seq R - FP

47432 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47433-34 Yesterday’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R - LI TS

47435-36 Today’s PK Demd Current – Phase A R- FP

47437 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47438-39 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R- LI TS

47440-41 Today’s PK Demd Current – Phase B R- FP

47442 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47443-44 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R- LI TS

47445-46 Today’s PK Demd Current – Phase C R- FP

47447 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47448-49 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R- LI TS

47450-51 Today’s PK Demd Current – Neutral R- FP

47452 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47453-54 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R- LI TS

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 27
Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

47455-56 Today’s PK Demd Current – Negative Seq R- FP

47457 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47458-59 Today’s PK Demd Timestamp – Millisecond R- LI TS

47460-61 PK Demd Current Since Reset – Phase A RW FP

47462 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47463-64 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond R- LI TS
47465-66 PK Demd Current Since Reset – Phase B RW FP
47467 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47468-69 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond R- LI TS

47470-71 PK Demd Current Since Reset – Phase C RW FP

47472 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47473-74 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond R - LI TS

47475-76 PK Demd Current Since Reset – Neutral RW FP

47477 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47478-79 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond R - LI TS

47480-81 PK Demd Current Since Reset – Negative Seq R W FP

47482 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp - Day R- INT TS
47483-84 PK Demd Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond R – LI TS

47486 Reset Logic Alarm Information RW SI

47487 Reset Major Alarm Information RW SI
47488 Reset Minor Alarm Information RW SI
47489 Reset Relay Alarm Information RW SI

47491 Clear Fault Log RW SI

47492 Trigger Fault Record RW SI
47493 Clear Events Report RW SI

47512 Fault Indicator R- SI

47513 Fault Template Status R- SI

The following is the Fault Template (FLT)

47514 Fault Date and Time – Day R- INT FLT, TS

47515-16 Fault Date and Time – Milliseconds R- LI FLT, TS
47517 Fault Event Type R- BM(16) FLT
47518 Fault Active Group R- SI FLT
47519-20 Fault Targets R- BM(32) FLT
47523 Fault Recloser State R- BM(16) FLT
47524 Fault Clearing Time Status R- SI FLT
47525-26 Fault Clearing Time R- FP FLT
47527 Fault Breaker Operate Time Status R- SI FLT
47528-29 Fault Breaker Operate Time R- FP FLT

47530-31 Fault Phase A Current Magnitude R- FP FLT

47533-34 Fault Phase B Current Magnitude R- FP FLT
47536-37 Fault Phase C Current Magnitude R- FP FLT
47539-40 Fault Residual Current Magnitude R- FP FLT
47542-43 Fault Negative Seq. Current Magnitude R- FP FLT

The following is the Report Template (RPT)

47595-719 Report Text R- ASC(250) RPT

28 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

Holding Read/Write Data
Register Parameter Supported Format Notes

Metering Parameters

49720 Part Number R- INT

49726-27 Phase A Current Magnitude R- FP

49729-30 Phase B Current Magnitude R- FP

49732-33 Phase C Current Magnitude R- FP

49735-36 Residual Current Magnitude R- FP

49738-39 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude R- FP

49835-74 Error Details R- ASC(40)

49875-999 Contiguous Poll Block R- Mixed

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 29
 REGISTER DETAILS

This section details the register formats and data ranges of the previous section. The two sections combined
provide all information necessary to communicate with the BE1-851 Modbus Holding Registers.

Any Holding Register not listed in the Register Table is an unassigned Holding Register. A value of zero always
results when reading an unassigned Holding Register. Writes to unassigned Holding Registers are legal, but no
action will be taken (the write is ignored).

Logic Settings

Logic settings consist of a combination of modes, masks, terms and term counts. Logic modes are specific to
each logic set, while the masks, terms and term counts have value definitions consistent throughout all logic
sets. A single logic equation consists of a “mask” and “term” pair. The logic ”term count” is used only in VOA,
VO1-VO15 virtual output logic blocks.

The logic “mode” enables or disables the logic equation for that logic block. The logic “mask” corresponds to
the SystemStatus bits to be evaluated. These bits are referenced in the desired logic equation and are set to 1
(non-used bits masked out as 0‘s). The logic “term” corresponds to the SystemStatus bit’s TRUE or FALSE
state, referenced in the desired logic equation where only the TRUE bits in the equation are set to 1. The logic
“term count” may be of one of four logic types which are NONE (logic disabled), OR only ( a + b + c), AND
only (a*b*c) or MIXED (a*b + b*c).

The following defines all logic set parameters.

Logic Modes:

41505 Programmable 50TP Block Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

41522 Programmable 50TN Block Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

41539 Programmable 50TQ Block Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

41556 Programmable 150TP Block Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

41573 Programmable 150TN Block Logic ModeINT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

41590 Programmable 150TQ Block Logic ModeINT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 31
41658 Programmable Breaker Fail Logic Mode INT
Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

41691 Programmable 51P Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

41708 Programmable 51N Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

41725 Programmable 51Q Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for enabled

41844 Programmable 62 Timer Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for Privilege Triggered
2 for Edge Triggered
3 for Retriggerable
4 for Oscillator
5 for Integrator
6 for Edge Triggered Latch

41877 Programmable 162 Timer Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 for Privilege Triggered
2 for Edge Triggered
3 for Retriggerable
4 for Oscillator
5 for Integrator
6 for Edge Triggered Latch

42010 Programmable Settings Group Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for all setting groups disabled except group 0
1 for selecting setting group via pulsed input logic
2 for selecting setting group via sustained input logic

43173 Programmable 79 Logic Mode INT

Read and Write:
0 for Recloser disabled
1 for Recloser standard power-up operation
2 for Recloser power-up to close operation

Logic Mask And Terms:

Each set bit in the "mask" parameter indicates a significant variable in the equation. A corresponding bit in the
"term" parameter indicates that the variable must be TRUE / 1 if set or FALSE / 0 if not set.

Mask and Term – First Register (Logic Var 0 to 15) BM(16)

Read and Write:
Bit 15 – 150Q picked-up
32 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
 Bit 14 – 50Q picked-up
Bit 13 – 150 neutral picked-up
Bit 12 – 50 neutral picked-up
Bit 11 – 150 phase picked-up
Bit 10 – 50 phase picked-up
Bit 9 – 51Q tripped
Bit 8 – 51 neutral tripped
Bit 7 – 51 phase tripped
Bit 6 – BF tripped
Bit 5 – 150Q tripped
Bit 4 – 50Q tripped
Bit 3 – 150 neutral tripped
Bit 2 – 50 neutral tripped
Bit 1 – 150 phase tripped
Bit 0 – 50 phase tripped

Mask and Term – Second Register (Logic Var 16 to 31) BM(16)

Read and Write:
Bit 15 – Logic always false L-VOx=0
Bit 14 – 79 block output
Bit 13 – 79 reclose fail
Bit 12 – 79 lockout
Bit 11 – 79 enable / active / block tap changer
Bit 10 – 79 close
Bit 9 – Serial controlled switch 343
Bit 8 – Serial controlled switch 243
Bit 7 – Serial controlled switch 143
Bit 6 – Serial controlled switch 43
Bit 5 – 162 tripped
Bit 4 – 62 tripped
Bit 3 – 51Q picked-up
Bit 2 – 51 neutral picked-up
Bit 1 – 51 phase picked-up
Bit 0 – BF picked-up

Mask and Term – Third Register (Logic Var 32 to 47) BM(16)

Read and Write:
Bit 15 – Virtual Output 15 status
Bit 14 – Virtual Output 14 status
Bit 13 – Virtual Output 13 status
Bit 12 – Virtual Output 12 status
Bit 11 – Virtual Output 11 status
Bit 10 – Virtual Output 10 status
Bit 9 – Virtual Output 9 status
Bit 8 – Virtual Output 8 status
Bit 7 – Virtual Output 7 status
Bit 6 – Virtual Output 6 status
Bit 5 – Virtual Output 5 status
Bit 4 – Virtual Output 4 status
Bit 3 – Virtual Output 3 status
Bit 2 – Virtual Output 2 status
Bit 1 – Virtual Output 1 status
Bit 0 – Virtual Output A status

Mask and Term – Fourth Register (Logic Var 48 to 63) BM(16)

Read and Write:
Bit 15 – Setting Group 3 active
Bit 14 – Setting Group 2 active
Bit 13 – Setting Group 1 active
Bit 12 – Setting Group 0 active
BE1-851 With Modbus  Protocol 33
 Bit 11 – Output 1 trip coil monitor
Bit 10 – Alarm minor
Bit 9 – Alarm major
Bit 8 – Alarm logic
Bit 7 – HMI reset key
Bit 6 – 101 slip contact
Bit 5 – 101 close
Bit 4 – 101 trip
Bit 3 – Input 4 status
Bit 2 – Input 3 status
Bit 1 – Input 2 status
Bit 0 – Input 1 status

Logic Term Count:

Term Count Register SI

Read and Write:
0 means the logic equation is disabled (NONE)
-1 means the logic equation consists of a single term of ORed variables
1 means the logic equation consists of a single term of ANDed variables
2 means the logic equation consists of the ORing of 2 terms of ANDed variables
3 means the logic equation consists of the ORing of 3 terms of ANDed variables
4 means the logic equation consists of the ORing of 4 terms of ANDed variables

Session Parameters

40001 Exit ASC(1)

Read: always the ASCII character ‘0’ (zero)
Write: ASCII characters ‘Y’ or ‘N’ (‘Y’ to save changes, ‘N’ to ignore changes)
Note 1: ERROR DETAIL block (49835-54) contains Exit status message following a write.
Note 2: Writing to this register is effective only when Password Security register 40989 is enabled.

40002-5 Access Password ASC(8)

Read: always the ASCII character ‘*’
Write: access password in ASCII character(s).
Note 1: If password written is less than 8 characters long, a binary zero value must be included
following the final password character.
Note 2: Writing to this register is effective only when Password Security register 40989 is enabled.

40006 Access Request BM(16)

Read: returns the current write access available to the Modbus user
Bit 3 is set for Global Access
Bit 2 is set for Setting Access
Bit 1 is set for Control Access
Bit 0 is set for Report Access
Zero value for Read Only Access
Write: To request write privileges using the password written into Access Password registers. Value
written into Access Request register is arbitrary (any value will initiate the request).
Note 1: If write access is denied, the response message will be an error response message with
Illegal Function exception code.
Step1. Write the desired password to PASSWORD registers 40002 to 40005
Step2. Write any value to ACCESS REQUEST register 40006
Step3. Read Access Level from ACCESS REQUEST register 40006
Note 2: Writing to this register is effective only when Password Security register 40989 is enabled.

Template Parameters

40036 Settings Group Selection SI

Read: returns the current value of Settings Group Selection.
Write: the desired value to assign a Settings Group to the Group (GRP) Template.

34 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

 O for Settings Group 0
1 for Settings Group 1
2 for Settings Group 2
3 for Settings Group 3

40038 Fault Selection SI

Read: returns the current value of Fault Selection.
Write: the desired value to assign a Fault Record to the Fault (FLT) Template.
Allowed values are 1 – 255.
Note: Refer to Fault Indicator (47512) and Fault Template Status (47513) Registers.

40039 Report Selection SI

Read: returns the current value of Report Selection.
Writing to Report Selection terminates previous report and initializes new report. See table for values.

40040 Report Focus INT

Read: returns the current value of Report Focus.
Write: see table for values.
Note: If an illegal Report Focus value is written, the user is not notified until a read of the Report Text
is attempted.

Note: Write to Report Selection and Report Focus to specify the report which will be made available
via the Report (RPT) Template. The template is the Report Text Block at 47595-719.

Report Text Report Selection Report Focus

47595-719 40039 40040
RA-LGC Report 1 Not used
RA-MAJ Report 2 Not used
RA-MIN Report 3 Not used
RA-REL Report 4 Not used
RF Report 7 Not used
RF-# Report 8 Value of # ( 1 – 255 )
RF-NEW Report 9 Not used
RS Report 10 Not used
RS-# Report 11 Value of # ( 1 – 255 )
RS-NEW Report 12 Not used
RS-F# Report 13 Value of # ( 1 – 255 )

Global Parameters
Global Parameter registers 40080 – 40099 are effective only for serial communication ports active with ASCII
protocol and for the modbus serial port, COM2, when Password Security register 40989 is enabled.

40080-83 Global Password ASC(8)

40085-88 Setting Password ASC(8)
40090-93 Control Password ASC(8)
40095-98 Report Password ASC(8)
Read: If global access granted, password ASCII characters are read. Otherwise,
The ASCII character ‘*’ is read.
Write: Password in ASCII character(s).
Note: If password written is less than 8 characters long, a binary zero value must be included
following the final password character.

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 35
40084 Global Path BM(8)
40089 Setting Path BM(8)
40094 Control Path BM(8)
40099 Report Path BM(8)
Read: path associated with password.
Write: path associated with password.
Bit 2 is set for COM 2 access.
Bit 1 is set for COM1 access.
Bit 0 is set for COM0 / FP access.

Control Parameters

All values read from and written to Select and Operate registers are ASCII characters. Select registers must
be written first, followed by a write to the Operate register. A 30 second window starts after the first write to
the Select register. If the second write to the Operate register is not received within the 30 second window, an
error response will be returned.

Writes to Operate registers 40138, 40140 to 40150 with ASCII data ‘E ‘ (Enable Output override control) or ‘D’
(Disable Output override control) requires an additional write of ‘Y’ to Exit register 40001 to allow these control
settings to be saved to the relay internal EEPROM.

NOTE
Do not use Control Parameter Registers interchangeably with the Legacy Control Registers.

40117 Select Group ASC(1)

Read: To read a value other than ASCII character ‘X’, the Select Group register must be the most
recent control register written AND must have been written within the previous 30 seconds.
0 if Group 0 selection has been made.
1 if Group 1 selection has been made.
2 if Group 2 selection has been made.
3 if Group 3 selection has been made.
L if Logic selection has been made.
X if Group control not selected or control timer has expired
Write: the desired ASCII character.
0 to select Group 0.
1 to select Group 1.
2 to select Group 2.
3 to select Group 3.
L to select Logic.

40118 Operate Group ASC(1)

Read: Current control.
0 if Group 0.
1 if Group 1.
2 if Group 2.
3 if Group 3.
L if Logic.
Write: the desired ASCII character to alter control (corresponding Select register must contain same
value, written within previous 30 seconds).
0 to select Group 0.
1 to select Group 1.
2 to select Group 2.
3 to select Group 3.
L to select Logic.

40119 Select Virtual Selector Switch 43ASC(1)

40121 Select Virtual Selector Switch 143 ASC(1)
36 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
40123 Select Virtual Selector Switch 243 ASC(1)
40125 Select Virtual Selector Switch 343 ASC(1)
Read: To read a value other than ASCII character ‘X’, the Select Virtual Selector Switch register must
be the most recent control register written AND must have been written within the previous 30
seconds.
P if Pulse Switch selection has been made.
0 if Latch Switch at 0 selection has been made.
1 if Latch Switch at 1 selection has been made.
X if Virtual Selector Switch control not selected or control timer has expired
Write: the desired ASCII character.
P to select Pulsing the Switch.
0 to select Latching the Switch at 0.
1 to select Latching the Switch at 1.

40120 Operate Virtual Selector Switch 43 ASC(1)

40122 Operate Virtual Selector Switch 143 ASC(1)
40124 Operate Virtual Selector Switch 243 ASC(1)
40126 Operate Virtual Selector Switch 343 ASC(1)
Read: Current control.
P if Pulse Switch.
0 if Latch Switch at 0.
1 if Latch Switch at 1.
Write: the desired ASCII character to alter control (corresponding Select register must contain same
value, written within previous 30 seconds).
P to Pulse Switch.
0 to Latch Switch at 0.
1 to Latch Switch at 1.

40135 Select 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch ASC(1)

Read: To read a value other than ASCII character ‘X’, the Select 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch
register must be the most recent control register written AND must have been written within the
previous 30 seconds.
C if Close selection has been made.
T if Trip selection has been made.
X if 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch control not selected or control timer has expired
Write: the desired ASCII character.
C to select Closing the Switch.
T to select Tripping the Switch.

40136 Operate 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch ASC(1)

Read: Current control.
C if Close Switch.
T if Trip Switch.
Write: the desired ASCII character to alter control (corresponding Select register must contain same
value, written within previous 30 seconds).
C to Close Switch.
T to Trip Switch.

40137 Select All Outputs ASC(1)

Read: To read a value other than ASCII character ‘X’, the Select All Output register must be the most
recent control register written AND must have been written within the previous 30 seconds.
P if Pulse All Outputs selection has been made.
0 if Latch All Outputs at 0 selection has been made.
1 if Latch All Outputs at 1 selection has been made.
L if programmable Logic selection has been made.
E if Enable All Outputs override control has been set.
D if Disable All Outputs override control has been set.
X if All Outputs control not selected or control timer has expired
Write: the desired ASCII character.
P to select Pulsing All Outputs.

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 37
 0 to select Latching All Outputs at 0.
1 to select Latching All Outputs at 1.
L to select programmable Logic.
E to select Enabling All Outputs override control.
D to select Disabling All Outputs override control.

40138 Operate All Outputs ASC(1)

Read: Current control.
E if All Outputs override control Enabled.
D if All Outputs override control Disabled.
Write: the desired ASCII character to alter control (corresponding Select register must contain same
value, written within previous 30 seconds).
P to Pulse All Outputs.
0 to Latch All Outputs at 0.
1 to Latch All Outputs at 1.
L to select programmable Logic.
E to Enable All Outputs override control. *
D to Disable All Outputs override control. *

40139 Select Output A ASC(1)

40141 Select Output 1 ASC(1)
40143 Select Output 2 ASC(1)
40145 Select Output 3 ASC(1)
40147 Select Output 4 ASC(1)
40149 Select Output 5 ASC(1)
Read: To read a value other than ASCII character ‘X’, the Select Output register must be the most
recent control register written AND must have been written within the previous 30 seconds.
P if Pulse Output selection has been made.
0 if Latch Output at 0 selection has been made.
1 if Latch Output at 1 selection has been made.
L if programmable Logic selection has been made.
E if Enable All Outputs serial control has been made.
D if Disable All Outputs serial control has been made.
X if Output control not selected or control timer has expired
Write: the desired ASCII character.
P to select Pulsing Output.
0 to select Latching Output at 0.
1 to select Latching Output at 1.
L to select programmable Logic.
E to select Enabling All Outputs override control.
D to select Disabling All Outputs override control.

40140 Operate Output A ASC(1)

40142 Operate Output 1 ASC(1)
40144 Operate Output 2 ASC(1)
40146 Operate Output 3 ASC(1)
40148 Operate Output 4 ASC(1)
40150 Operate Output 5 ASC(1)
Read: Current control.
P to Pulse Output.
0 to Latch Output at 0.
1 to Latch Output at 1.
D if All Outputs override control Disabled
Write: the desired ASCII character to alter control (corresponding Select register must contain same
value, written within previous 30 seconds).
P to Pulse Output.
0 to Latch Output at 0.
1 to Latch Output at 1.
L to select programmable Logic.
E to Enable All Outputs override control. *
D to Disable All Outputs override control. *

38 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

* requires an additional write of ‘Y’ to Exit register 40001 to allow these control settings to be saved to the
relay
internal EEPROM.

Group Setting Parameters

40269-70 50TP Pickup FP

40273-74 50TN Pickup FP
40277-78 50TQ Pickup FP
40281-82 150TP Pickup FP
40285-86 150TN Pickup FP
40289-90 150TQ Pickup FP
Read and Write: 0.50 to 150.00 Amps

40271-72 50TP Time Delay LI

40275-76 50TN Time Delay LI
40279-80 50TQ Time Delay LI
40283-84 150TP Time Delay LI
40287-88 150TN Time Delay LI
40291-92 150TQ Time Delay LI
Read and Write: 0 to 60,000 Milliseconds

40305-06 51P Pickup FP

40311-12 51N Pickup FP
40317-18 51Q Pickup FP
Read and Write: 0.50 to 16.00 Amps

40307-08 51P Time Dial FP

40313-14 51N Time Dial FP
40319-20 51Q Time Dial FP
Read and Write: 0.0 to 9.9

40309-10 51P Curve Type ASC(3)

40315-16 51N Curve Type ASC(3)
40321-22 51Q Curve Type ASC(3)
Read and Write: one of the following ASCII character strings
S1, S2, L1, L2, D, M, I1, I2, V1, V2, E1, E2,
S1R, S2R, L1R, L2R, DR, MR, I1R, I2R, V1R, V2R, E1R, E2R,
A, B, C, G, F, P,
AR, BR, CR, GR, FR, PR
40359-60 62 Time Delay 1 LI
40361-62 62 Time Delay 2 LI
40363-64 162 Time Delay 1 LI
40365-66 162 Time Delay 2 LI
Read and Write: 0 to 999,000 Milliseconds

40406-07 79 First Automatic Reclose Delay LI

40408-09 79 Second Automatic Reclose Delay LI
40410-11 79 Third Automatic Reclose Delay LI
40412-13 79 Fourth Automatic Reclose Delay LI
40414-15 79 Reset Time Delay LI
40416-17 79 Reclose Fail Time Delay LI
40418-19 79 Maximum Reclose Time LI
Read and Write: 100 to 600,000 Milliseconds

40420 79 Sequence Control BM(16)

Read and Write:
Bit 0 to Block Shot #1
 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 39
 Bit 1 to Block Shot #2
Bit 2 to Block Shot #3
Bit 3 to Block Shot #4
Bit 4 to Block Shot #5

Global Setting Parameters

40606-07 Breaker Fail Time Delay LI
Read and Write: 50 to 999 Milliseconds

40608-09 Programmable 51 Curve Constant A Delay FP

Read and Write: 0.0000 to 600.0000
40610-11 Programmable 51 Curve Constant B Delay FP
Read and Write: 0.0000 to 25.0000
40612-13 Programmable 51 Curve Constant C Delay FP
Read and Write: -1.0000 to +1.0000
40614-15 Programmable 51 Curve Constant N Delay FP
Read and Write: 0.5000 to 2.5000
40616-17 Programmable 51 Curve Constant R Delay FP
Read and Write: 0.0000 to 30.0000

40618 Input 1 Contact Recognition Time Delay SI

40619 Input 1 Contact Debounce Time Delay SI
40620 Input 2 Contact Recognition Time Delay SI
40621 Input 2 Contact Debounce Time Delay SI
40622 Input 3 Contact Recognition Time Delay SI
40623 Input 3 Contact Debounce Time Delay SI
40624 Input 4 Contact Recognition Time Delay SI
40625 Input 4 Contact Debounce Time Delay SI
Read and Write: 4 to 255 Milliseconds

40746-870 Contiguous Poll Block Assignments INT

Read and Write:
0 if Unassigned
1 to 9874: Holding Register 40001 to 49874
Note: To read the data from the registers programmed in this block,
Contiguous Poll Block registers 49875 to 49999 must be read.

40871 Setting Group Control On Time INT

Read and Write: 0 to 10 seconds

40872 Setting Group 1 Automatic Control Switch Time SI

40874 Setting Group 1 Automatic Control Return Time SI
40877 Setting Group 2 Automatic Control Switch Time SI
40879 Setting Group 2 Automatic Control Return Time SI
40882 Setting Group 3 Automatic Control Switch Time SI
40884 Setting Group 3 Automatic Control Return Time SI
Read and Write: 0 to 60 minutes

40873 Setting Group 1 Automatic Control Switch Level SI

40875 Setting Group 1 Automatic Control Return Level SI
40878 Setting Group 2 Automatic Control Switch Level SI
40880 Setting Group 2 Automatic Control Return Level SI
40883 Setting Group 3 Automatic Control Switch Level SI
40885 Setting Group 3 Automatic Control Return Level SI
Read and Write: 0 to 150%

Serial Port Setting Parameters

40962 Serial Port 0 Baud Rate INT

40 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
40971 Serial Port 1 Baud Rate INT
40980 Serial Port 2 Baud Rate INT
Read and Write:
0 – 300 Baud (Do not select for port 2 Modbus communications)
1 – 600 Baud (Do not select for port 2 Modbus communications)
2 – 1200 Baud (Do not select for port 2 Modbus communications)
3 – 2400 Baud
4 – 4800 Baud
5 – 9600 Baud
6 – 19K Baud

40972 Serial Port 1 Relay Address INT

40981 Serial Port 2 Relay Address INT
Read and Write: 0 to 65,534

40964 Serial Port 0 Software Flow Control SI

40973 Serial Port 1 Software Flow Control SI
Read:
0 if XON / XOFF Control is disabled
1 if XON / XOFF Control is enabled
Write:
0 to disable XON / XOFF Control
1 to 255 to enable XON / XOFF Control

40965 Serial Port 0 Page Length SI

40974 Serial Port 1 Page Length SI
Read and Write:
0 for disabled
1 to 40 for number of lines / page

40966 Serial Port 0 Acknowledgement Format SI

40975 Serial Port 1 Acknowledgement Format SI
Read:
0 if No acknowledge
1 if Acknowledge enabled
Write:
0 for No acknowledge
1 to 255 to enable acknowledge

40986 Serial Port 2 Modbus Parity SI

Read and Write:
0 for No parity
1 for Even parity
2 for Odd parity

40987 Serial Port 2 Modbus Remote Delay SI

Read and Write:
1 to 20: 10 to 200 Milliseconds

40988 Serial Port 2 Modbus Stop Bits SI

Read and Write:
1 for One stop bit
2 for Two stop bits

40989 Password Security SI

Read and Write:
Default value is disabled
1 to enable Password Security.
BE1-851 With Modbus  Protocol 41
 When Password Security is enabled, relay parameters can be changed via modbus only if
access is obtained via the Access Password and Access Request holding registers, and
released via the Exit register with value 89 (ASCII character ‘Y’).

0 to disable Password Security.

When Password Security is disabled, no access is required (Access Password, Access
Request, and Exit holding registers have no effect) and no password protection is used.
Global Parameters, holding registers 40080 – 40099 ( ASCII command GF-PW), have no
effect on the modbus serial port, COM2.

System Data Setting Parameters

41019 System Frequency SI

Read and Write:
50 for 50 Hertz
60 for 60 Hertz

41020 Phase Rotation SI

Read and Write:
1 for ABC
2 for ACB

41021 Phase CT Ratio INT

41022 Neutral CT Ratio INT
Read and Write: 1 to 50,000

Breaker Duty Setting Parameters

41092 Breaker Duty Type SI

Read and Write:
0 for Off
1 for Sum I, primary Centiamps
2 for Sum I², primary Centiamps

41093-94 Maximum Breaker Duty FP

Read and Write: 0 to 4.29E 07 Amps

41096 Programmable Breaker Alarm #1 Mode INT

41099 Programmable Breaker Alarm #2 Mode INT
41102 Programmable Breaker Alarm #3 Mode INT
Read and Write:
0 for Disabled
1 for Percent duty
2 for Breaker operations
3 for Clearing time

41097-98 Programmable Breaker Alarm #1 Limit FP

41100-01 Programmable Breaker Alarm #2 Limit FP
41103-04 Programmable Breaker Alarm #3 Limit FP
Read and Write:
If mode is 1: 0 to 100%
If mode is 2: 0 to 99,999
If mode is 3: 20 to 1000 Milliseconds

Relay Data Setting Parameters

41259-60 Phase Demand Alarm Level FP

41261-62 Neutral Demand Alarm Level FP
41263-64 Negative Sequence Demand Alarm Level FP
Read and Write: 0.00 to 16.00 Amps
42 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
41265 Major Alarm Mask MSBs BM(16)
41267 Minor Alarm Mask MSBs BM(16)
41269 Logic Alarm Mask MSBs BM(16)
Read and Write:
Bits 15 to 10 – Spare
Bit 9 – Changes Lost alarm
Bit 8 - Logic = None alarm
Bit 7 - Fault Record Time Out
Bit 6 - Virtual Output 15 alarm
Bit 5 - Virtual Output 14 alarm
Bit 4 - Virtual Output 13 alarm
Bit 3 - Setting Group Change Active alarm
Bit 2 - Loss of IRIG-B sync or IRIG-B decode problem
Bit 1 - An override is active in one or more outputs
Bit 0 - EEPROM Non fatal error

41266 Major Alarm Mask LSBs BM(16)

41268 Minor Alarm Mask LSBs BM(16)
41270 Logic Alarm Mask LSBs BM(16)
Read and Write:
Bit 15 - User settings changed, ( 'EXIT' with 'Y' )
Bit 14 - Power reset alarm, hard reset of MPU
Bit 13 - Clock problem, real time clock has not been set
Bit 12 - Communicating failure alarm, read error on serial port
Bit 11 - Operating System Overload detected alarm
Bit 10 - Setting group override in effect
Bit 9 - Excessive unbalance alarm, 50TQ unbalance output picked up
Bit 8 - Neutral demand alarm, neutral demand maximum exceeded
Bit 7 - Phase demand alarm, phase demand maximum exceeded
Bit 6 - Breaker alarm #3
Bit 5 - Breaker alarm #2
Bit 4 - Breaker alarm #1
Bit 3 - Recloser lockout, reclose in lockout state
Bit 2 - Reclose failure, reclose attempt failed
Bit 1 - Breaker fail alarm, breaker fail output picked up
Bit 0 - Trip Circuit Monitor continuity alarm

41272 Clock Format – Date ASC(1)

Read and Write:
M for mm/dd/yy format
D for dd/mm/yy format

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 43
41273 Clock Format – Time SI
Read and Write:
12 for 12 hour clock
24 for 24 hour clock

41275 Phase Demand Interval SI

41276 Neutral Demand Interval SI
41277 Negative Sequence Demand Interval SI
Read and Write: 0 to 60 minutes

41284 Output Hold Mask BM(8)

Read and Write:
Bit 7 - Spare
Bit 6 - Spare
Bit 5 - Output 5 Status
Bit 4 - Output 4 Status
Bit 3 - Output 3 Status
Bit 2 - Output 2 Status
Bit 1 - Output 1 Status
Bit 0 - Output A Status

41287 Target Mask MSBs BM(16)

Read and Write:
Bit 15 - BF
Bit 14 - 162
Bit 13 - 162
Bit 12 - 50TQ
Bit 11 - 50TN
Bit 10 - 50TC
Bit 9 - 50TB
Bit 8 - 50TA
Bit 7 - Spare
Bit 6 - Spare
Bit 5 - Spare
Bit 4 - 150TQ
Bit 3 - 150TN
Bit 2 - 150TC
Bit 1 - 150TB
Bit 0 - 150TA
41288 Target Mask LSBs BM(16)
Read and Write:
Bit 15 - Spare
Bit 14 - Spare
Bit 13 - Spare
Bit 12 - 51Q
Bit 11 - 51N
Bit 10 - 51C
Bit 9 - 51B
Bit 8 - 51A
Bits 7-0 - Spare

41291-94 Programmable Screen #1 ASC(7)

41295-98 Programmable Screen #2 ASC(7)
41299-302 Programmable Screen #3 ASC(7)
41303-06 Programmable Screen #4 ASC(7)
41307-10 Programmable Screen #5 ASC(7)
41311-14 Programmable Screen #6 ASC(7)
41315-18 Programmable Screen #7 ASC(7)
41319-22 Programmable Screen #8 ASC(7)
41323-26 Programmable Screen #9 ASC(7)
44 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
41327-30 Programmable Screen #10 ASC(7)
41331-34 Programmable Screen #11 ASC(7)
41335-38 Programmable Screen #12 ASC(7)
41339-42 Programmable Screen #13 ASC(7)
41343-46 Programmable Screen #14 ASC(7)
41347-50 Programmable Screen #15 ASC(7)
41351-54 Programmable Screen #16 ASC(7)
Read and Write: screen identifier. For example, the Output Status Screen would be 1.5.2

41435 Filter Type for Phase DSP ASC(1)

41436 Filter Type for Neutral DSP ASC(1)
Read and Write:
F for Fundamental
A for Average
R for True RMS

Custom Logic Setting Parameters

41465-68 User Custom Logic Name ASC(8)

Read: If programming, reads custom logic name; otherwise, reads active standard logic name.
Write: New custom logic name or standard logic name of logic scheme to be copied to custom
scheme.

41469-72 Current Active Logic Scheme ASC(8)

Read: Current active logic name.
Write: Name of logic scheme to which you desire to change.

41473-76 Custom Logic Name ASC(8)

Read: Custom logic name.

41477-80 Standard Logic #1 Name ASC(8)

Read: Standard logic name #1.

41481-84 Standard Logic #2 Name ASC(8)

Read: Standard logic name #2.

41485-88 Standard Logic #3 Name ASC(8)

Read: Standard logic name #3.

41489-92 Standard Logic #4 Name ASC(8)

Read: Standard logic name #4.

41493-96 Standard Logic #5 Name ASC(8)

Read: Standard logic name #5.

41497-500 Standard Logic #6 Name ASC(8)

Read: Standard logic name #6.

41501-04 Standard Logic #7 Name ASC(8)

Read: Standard logic name #7.

System Labels And Id Setting Parameters

All are Read and Write of ASCII characters.

Report Parameters

47274-77 Model Number ASC(8)

47282-89 Application SW Version # / Date ASC(16)
47296-302 Boot SW Version # / Date ASC(14)
BE1-851 With Modbus  Protocol 45
47310-16 Serial Number ASC(13)
47324-34 Style Number ASC(21)
Read Only: ASCII characters

47364 Date and Time – Day INT

Read and Write: any value (days since 01/01/1984).
47365-66 Date and Time – Milliseconds LI
Read and Write: 0 to 86,399,999 Milliseconds

47367 System Status (Logic Var 0 to 15) BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – 150Q picked-up
Bit 14 – 50Q picked-up
Bit 13 – 150 neutral picked-up
Bit 12 – 50 neutral picked-up
Bit 11 – 150 phase picked-up
Bit 10 – 50 phase picked-up
Bit 9 – 51Q tripped
Bit 8 – 51 neutral tripped
Bit 7 – 51 phase tripped
Bit 6 – BF tripped
Bit 5 – 150Q tripped
Bit 4 – 50Q tripped
Bit 3 – 150 neutral tripped
Bit 2 – 50 neutral tripped
Bit 1 – 150 phase tripped
Bit 0 – 50 phase tripped

47368 System Status (Logic Var 16 to 31) BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – Logic always false L-VOx=0
Bit 14 – 79 block output
Bit 13 – 79 reclose fail
Bit 12 – 79 lockout
Bit 11 – 79 enable / active / block tap changer
Bit 10 – 79 close
Bit 9 – Serial controlled switch 343
Bit 8 – Serial controlled switch 243
Bit 7 – Serial controlled switch 143
Bit 6 – Serial controlled switch 43
Bit 5 – 162 tripped
Bit 4 – 62 tripped
Bit 3 – 51Q picked-up
Bit 2 – 51 neutral picked-up
Bit 1 – 51 phase picked-up
Bit 0 – BF picked-up

47369 System Status (Logic Var 32 to 47) BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – Virtual Output 15 status
Bit 14 – Virtual Output 14 status
Bit 13 – Virtual Output 13 status
Bit 12 – Virtual Output 12 status
Bit 11 – Virtual Output 11 status
Bit 10 – Virtual Output 10 status
Bit 9 – Virtual Output 9 status
Bit 8 – Virtual Output 8 status
Bit 7 – Virtual Output 7 status
Bit 6 – Virtual Output 6 status
Bit 5 – Virtual Output 5 status
46 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
 Bit 4 – Virtual Output 4 status
Bit 3 – Virtual Output 3 status
Bit 2 – Virtual Output 2 status
Bit 1 – Virtual Output 1 status
Bit 0 – Virtual Output A status

47370 System Status (Logic Var 48 to 63) BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – Setting Group 3 active
Bit 14 – Setting Group 2 active
Bit 13 – Setting Group 1 active
Bit 12 – Setting Group 0 active
Bit 11 – Output 1 trip coil monitor
Bit 10 – Alarm minor
Bit 9 – Alarm major
Bit 8 – Alarm logic
Bit 7 – HMI reset key
Bit 6 – 101 slip contact
Bit 5 – 101 close
Bit 4 – 101 trip
Bit 3 – Input 4 status
Bit 2 – Input 3 status
Bit 1 – Input 2 status
Bit 0 – Input 1 status

47373 Current Active Group Setting SI

Read only: 0 to 3

47374 Current Group Control Setting ASC(1)

Read only: ASCII character 0, 1, 2, 3, L
47375 Current Output Control Settings (OutputPulse0) MSBs BM(16)
Read only:
Bits 15 to 6 - Spare
Bit 5 - Output 5 pulse low
Bit 4 - Output 4 pulse low
Bit 3 - Output 3 pulse low
Bit 2 - Output 2 pulse low
Bit 1 - Output 1 pulse low
Bit 0 - Output A pulse low

47376 Current Output Control Settings (OutputPulse1) LSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bits 15 to 6 - Spare
Bit 5 - Output 5 pulse high
Bit 4 - Output 4 pulse high
Bit 3 - Output 3 pulse high
Bit 2 - Output 2 pulse high
Bit 1 - Output 1 pulse high
Bit 0 - Output A pulse high
47377 Current Output Control Settings (OutputLatch0) MSBs BM(16)
Read only:
Bits 15 to 6 - Spare
Bit 5 - Output 5 latch low
Bit 4 - Output 4 latch low
Bit 3 - Output 3 latch low
Bit 2 - Output 2 latch low
Bit 1 - Output 1 latch low
Bit 0 - Output A latch low

47378 Current Output Control Settings (OutputLatch1) LSBs BM(16)

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 47
 Read only:
Bits 15 to 6 - Spare
Bit 5 - Output 5 latch high
Bit 4 - Output 4 latch high
Bit 3 - Output 3 latch high
Bit 2 - Output 2 latch high
Bit 1 - Output 1 latch high
Bit 0 - Output A latch high

47379 Current Output Contact Status BM(16)

Read only:
Bits 15 to 6 - Spare
Bit 5 - Output 5
Bit 4 - Output 4
Bit 3 - Output 3
Bit 2 - Output 2
Bit 1 - Output 1
Bit 0 - Output A

47380 Active Alarm Flags (SumFlags) MSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bits 15 to 0 – Spare

47381 Active Alarm Flags (SumFlags) LSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bits 15 to 10 – Spare
Bit 9 - Not implemented (Calibration defaults loaded)
Bit 8 - Not implemented (Setting defaults loaded)
Bit 7 - Not implemented (Watchdog Failure)
Bit 6 - Not implemented (Power Supply out of tolerance)
Bit 5 - Relay not calibrated or calibration checksum error
Bit 4 - Analog Problem detected
Bit 3 - EEPROM Read / Write Fatal error
Bit 2 - MPU Self-test error
Bit 1 - Not implemented (ROM (flash) Failure detected, CRC16 Failure)
Bit 0 - Not implemented (RAM Failure detected)

47382 Active Alarm Flags (ProgAlarms) MSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bits 15 to 10 - Spare
Bit 9 - Changes Lost alarm
Bit 8 - Logic = None alarm
Bit 7 - Fault Record Time Out
Bit 6 - Virtual Output 15 alarm
Bit 5 - Virtual Output 14 alarm
Bit 4 - Virtual Output 13 alarm
Bit 3 - Setting Group Change Active alarm
Bit 2 - Loss of IRIG-B sync or IRIG-B decode problem
Bit 1 - An override is active in one or more outputs
Bit 0 - EEPROM Non fatal error

47383 Active Alarm Flags (ProgAlarms) LSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 - User settings changed, ( 'EXIT' with 'Y' )
Bit 14 - Power reset alarm, hard reset of MPU
Bit 13 - Clock problem, real time clock has not been set
Bit 12 - Communicating failure alarm, read error on serial port
Bit 11 - Operating System Overload detected alarm
Bit 10 - Setting group override in effect
Bit 9 - Excessive unbalance alarm, 50TQ unbalance output picked up
48 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
 Bit 8 - Neutral demand alarm, neutral demand maximum exceeded
Bit 7 - Phase demand alarm, phase demand maximum exceeded
Bit 6 - Breaker alarm #3
Bit 5 - Breaker alarm #2
Bit 4 - Breaker alarm #1
Bit 3 - Recloser lockout, reclose in lockout state
Bit 2 - Reclose failure, reclose attempt failed
Bit 1 - Breaker fail alarm, breaker fail output picked up
Bit 0 - Trip Circuit Monitor continuity alarm

47384 Target Status MSBs BM(16)

Read:
Bit 15 - BF
Bit 14 - 162
Bit 13 - 62
Bit 12 - 50TQ
Bit 11 - 50TN
Bit 10 - 50TC
Bit 9 - 50TB
Bit 8 - 50TA
Bit 7 - Spare
Bit 6 - Spare
Bit 5 - Spare
Bit 4 - 150TQ
Bit 3 - 150TN
Bit 2 - 150TC
Bit 1 - 150TB
Bit 0 - 150TA
Write any value to either register to reset all

47385 Target Status LSBs BM(16)

Read:
Bit 15 - Spare
Bit 14 - Spare
Bit 13 - Spare
Bit 12 - 51Q
Bit 11 - 51N
Bit 10 - 51C
Bit 9 - 51B
Bit 8 - 51A
Bits 7-0 - Spare
Write any value to either register to reset all

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 49
47388 Current Breaker Status ASC(1)
Read only:
O for Open
C for Closed
D for Disabled (off)

47389-92 Current Active Logic ASC(8)

Read only: Current active logic name

47393 Reclose Status INT

Read only:
0 for Off
1 for Timing reclose #1
2 for Timing reclose #2
3 for Timing reclose #3
4 for Timing reclose #4
5 for Wait
6 for Lockout
7 for Reset
8 for Timing fail
9 for Timing reset

47394-95 Breaker Contact Duty Log – Phase A FP

47396-97 Breaker Contact Duty Log – Phase B FP
47398-99 Breaker Contact Duty Log – Phase C FP
Read: If Breaker Duty Type = Off or Maximum Breaker Duty = 0,
reads undefined floating point value of 0xFFFFFFFF. Otherwise,
reads 0.00 to 200.00%.
Write: 0 to 200%.

47400-01 Breaker Operation Counter LI

Read and Write:
0 to 99,999

47410-11 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current – Phase A FP

47415-16 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current – Phase B FP
47420-21 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current – Phase C FP
47425-26 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current – Neutral FP
47430-31 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current – Negative Seq FP
Read only: Any value (Amps)

47412 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT

47417 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT
47422 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT
47427 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT
47432 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT
Read only: any value (days since 01/01/1984).

47413-14 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI

47418-19 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI
47423-24 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI
47428-29 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI
47433-34 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI
Read only: 0 to 86,399,999 Milliseconds

47435-36 Today’s Peak Demand Current – Phase A FP

47440-41 Today’s Peak Demand Current – Phase B FP
47445-46 Today’s Peak Demand Current – Phase C FP
47450-51 Today’s Peak Demand Current – Neutral FP
47455-56 Today’s Peak Demand Current – Negative Seq FP
50 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
 Read only: Any value (Amps)

47437 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT

47442 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT
47447 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT
47452 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT
47457 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp - Day INT
Read only: any value (days since 01/01/1984).

47438-39 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI

47443-44 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI
47448-49 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI
47453-54 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI
47458-59 Today’s Peak Demand Timestamp – Millisecond LI
Read only: 0 to 86,399,999 Milliseconds

47460-61 Peak Demand Current Since Reset – Phase A FP

47465-66 Peak Demand Current Since Reset – Phase B FP
47470-71 Peak Demand Current Since Reset – Phase C FP
47475-76 Peak Demand Current Since Reset – Neutral FP
47480-81 Peak Demand Current Since Reset – Negative Seq FP
Read and Write: Any value (Amps)

47462 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp - Day INT

47467 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp - Day INT
47472 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp - Day INT
47477 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp - Day INT
47482 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp - Day INT
Read only: any value (days since 01/01/1984).

47463-64 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond LI

47468-69 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond LI
47473-74 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond LI
47478-79 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond LI
47483-84 Peak Demand Since Reset Timestamp – Millisecond LI
Read only: 0 to 86,399,999 Milliseconds

47486 Reset Logic Alarm Information SI

47487 Reset Major Alarm Information SI
47488 Reset Minor Alarm Information SI
47489 Reset Relay Alarm Information SI
47491 Clear Fault Log SI
47492 Trigger Fault Record SI
47493 Clear Events Report SI
Read: 0
Write: Any value will perform reset / trigger / clear.

47512 Fault Indicator SI

Read only: Most recent Fault number (1 – 255)

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 51
47513 Fault Template Status SI
Read only:
0: Template not valid for current Fault Selection (Refer to Register 40038). All FLT template
values will read 0.
1 to 255: Valid user selected Fault Number.

The following is the Fault Template (FLT)

47514 Fault Date and Time – Day INT

Read only: any value (days since 01/01/1984).

47515-16 Fault Date and Time – Milliseconds LI

Read only: 0 to 86,399,999 Milliseconds

47517 Fault Event Type BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 0 for Breaker Fail
Bit 1 for Trip
Bit 2 for Logic
Bit 3 for Pickup
Bit 4 for Fault Record Trigger (Refer to Register 47492)

47518 Fault Active Group SI

Read only: 0 to 3

47519 Fault Targets MSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – BF
Bit 14 – 162
Bit 13 – 62
Bit 12 – 50TQ
Bit 11 – 50TN
Bit 10 – 50TC
Bit 9 – 50TB
Bit 8 – 50TA
Bit 7 – Spare
Bit 6 – Spare
Bit 5 – Spare
Bit 4 – 150TQ
Bit 3 – 150TN
Bit 2 – 150TC
Bit 1 – 150TB
Bit 0 – 150TA

47520 Fault Targets LSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – Spare
Bit 14 – Spare
Bit 13 – Spare
Bit 12 – 51Q
Bit 11 – 51N
Bit 10 – 51C
Bit 9 – 51B
Bit 8 – 51A
Bit 7 – Spare
Bit 6 – Spare
Bit 5 – Spare
Bit 4 – Spare
Bit 3 – Spare
Bit 2 – Spare
52 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
 Bit 1 – Spare
Bit 0 – Spare

47523 Fault Recloser State BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – Timing Fail
Bit 14 – Reclose #4
Bit 13 – Reclose #3
Bit 12 – Reclose #2
Bit 11 – Reclose #1
Bit 10 – Spare
Bit 9 – Spare
Bit 8 – Spare
Bit 7 – Spare
Bit 6 – Recloser in sequence / Enabled
Bit 5 – Wait
Bit 4 – Lockout
Bit 3 – Spare
Bit 2 – Spare
Bit 1 – Reset
Bit 0 – Off

47524 Fault Clearing Time Status SI

Read only:
0 if Valid Fault Clearing Time (Registers 47525-26) value
1 if No pickup
2 if N/A; Out of range

47525-26 Fault Clearing Time FP

Read only:
0 if Fault Clearing Time Status is not 0 (not valid).
Time (xxx.xxx) in Seconds if Fault Clearing Time Status is 0 (valid).

47527 Fault Breaker Operate Time Status SI

Read only:
0 if Valid Fault Breaker Operate Time (Registers 47528-29) value
1 if Unknown
2 if N/A; Out of range
3 if No operation

47528-29 Fault Breaker Operate Time FP

Read only:
0 if Fault Breaker Operate Time Status is not 0 (not valid).
Time (xxx.xxx) in Seconds if Fault Breaker Operate Time Status is 0 (valid).

47530-31 Fault Phase A Current Magnitude FP

47533-34 Fault Phase B Current Magnitude FP
47536-37 Fault Phase C Current Magnitude FP
47539-40 Fault Residual Current Magnitude FP
47542-43 Fault Negative Seq. Current Magnitude FP
Read only: Value in Amps

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 53
The following is the Report Template (RPT)

47595-719 Report Text

Read only: ASCII characters ( Illegal message response generated for invalid Report Focus value ).

Metering Parameters

49720 Part Number INT

Read only: 0 to 999

49726-27 Phase A Current Magnitude FP

49729-30 Phase B Current Magnitude FP
49732-33 Phase C Current Magnitude FP
49735-36 Residual Current Magnitude FP
49738-39 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude FP
Read only: Value in Amps

49835-74 Error Details ASC(40)

Read only: ASCII characters

49875-999 Contiguous Poll Block Mixed

Read Only: Mixed values.

Legacy Map

The Range 44011 – 45626 is the original (legacy) BE1-851 Modbus map

Legacy: Product Information

44011-17 Application Software Version Number ASC(14)

44021-27 Boot Software Version and Date ASC(14)
44031-37 Serial Number ASC(14)
44046-56 Style Number ASC(22)
44081-85 Model Number ASC(10)
44171-86 Customer Identification 1 (Relay ID) ASC(32)
44187-202 Customer Identification 2 (Station ID) ASC(32)
Read only: ASCII characters

44061 Part Number INT

Read only: 0 to 999

Legacy: Time and Date

44241 Date and Time – Day INT

Read and Write: any value (days since 01/01/1984).

44242-43 Date and Time – Milliseconds DP

Read and Write: 0 to 86,400,000 Milliseconds

Legacy: Breaker Duty

44251-52 Breaker Duty Phase A DP

44253-54 Breaker Duty Phase B DP
44255-56 Breaker Duty Phase C DP
Read: 0.00 to 100.00%
Write: 0 to 100%

44261-62 Breaker Operations Counter DP

Read and Write: 0 to 99,999

54 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

Legacy: Select Before Operate (SBO) and Control Commands

44301 Control Select INT

44303 Control Operate INT
Read: 0 if control timer has expired, otherwise last value written to Control Select (see table below).
Write: See table below.

FUNCTION DATA FUNCTION DATA

OUTPUT A = 0 3001h ALL OUTPUTS = 0 3007h
OUTPUT A = 1 3101h ALL OUTPUTS = 1 3107h
OUTPUT A = L 4C01h ALL OUTPUTS = L 4C07h
OUTPUT A = P 5001h ALL OUTPUTS = P 5007h
OUTPUT 1 = 0 3002h GROUP SELECT = 0 3008h
OUTPUT 1 = 1 3102h GROUP SELECT = 1 3108h
OUTPUT 1 = L 4C02h GROUP SELECT = 2 3208h
OUTPUT 1 = P 5002h GROUP SELECT = 3 3308h
OUTPUT 2 = 0 3003h GROUP SELECT = L 4C08h
OUTPUT 2 = 1 3103h SWITCH 43 = 0 3009h
OUTPUT 2 = L 4C03h SWITCH 43 = 1 3109h
OUTPUT 2 = P 5003h SWITCH 43 = P 5009h
OUTPUT 3 = 0 3004h SWITCH 143 = 0 300Ah
OUTPUT 3 = 1 3104h SWITCH 143 = 1 310Ah
OUTPUT 3 = L 4C04h SWITCH 143 = P 500Ah
OUTPUT 3 = P 5004h SWITCH 243 = 0 300Bh
OUTPUT 4 = 0 3005h SWITCH 243 = 1 310Bh
OUTPUT 4 = 1 3105h SWITCH 243 = P 500Bh
OUTPUT 4 = L 4C05h SWITCH 343 = 0 300Ch
OUTPUT 4 = P 5005h SWITCH 343 = 1 310Ch
OUTPUT 5 = 0 3006h SWITCH 343 = P 500Ch
OUTPUT 5 = 1 3106h SWITCH 101 = C 430Dh
OUTPUT 5 = L 4C06h SWITCH 101 = T 540Dh
OUTPUT 5 = P 5006h

Legacy: Metering - Primary Parameters

44401-02 Phase A Current Magnitude DP

44404-05 Phase B Current Magnitude DP
44407-08 Phase C Current Magnitude DP
44410-11 Neutral Current Magnitude DP
44413-14 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude DP
Read only: 0 to 99,999,999 Centiamps

Legacy: Reporting

44601-02 Peak Demand Current - Phase A DP

44606-07 Peak Demand Current - Phase B DP
44611-12 Peak Demand Current - Phase C DP
44616-17 Peak Demand Current – Neutral DP
BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol 55
44621-22 Peak Demand Current – Negative Sequence DP
Read and Write: 0 to 99,999,999 Centiamps

44603 Peak Demand Current - Phase A DAY INT

44608 Peak Demand Current - Phase B DAY INT
44613 Peak Demand Current - Phase C DAY INT
44618 Peak Demand Current - Neutral DAY INT
44623 Peak Demand Current - Negative Sequence DAY INT
Read only: any value (days since 01/01/1984).

44604-05 Peak Demand Current - Phase A MSEC DP

44609-10 Peak Demand Current - Phase B MSEC DP
44614-15 Peak Demand Current - Phase C MSEC DP
44619-20 Peak Demand Current - Neutral MSEC DP
44624-25 Peak Demand Current - Negative Sequence MSEC DP
Read only: 0 to 86,400,000 Milliseconds

44631-32 Today’s Peak Demand Current - Phase A DP

44636-37 Today’s Peak Demand Current - Phase B DP
44641-42 Today’s Peak Demand Current - Phase C DP
44646-47 Today’s Peak Demand Current - Neutral DP
44651-52 Today’s Peak Demand Current – Negative Sequence DP
Read only: 0 to 99,999,999 Centiamps

44633 Today's Peak Demand Current - Phase A DAY INT

44638 Today's Peak Demand Current - Phase B DAY INT
44643 Today's Peak Demand Current - Phase C DAY INT
44648 Today's Peak Demand Current - Neutral DAY INT
44653 Today's Peak Demand Current - Neg Seq DAY INT
Read only: any value (days since 01/01/1984).

44634-35 Today's Peak Demand Current - Phase A MSEC DP

44639-40 Today's Peak Demand Current - Phase B MSEC DP
44644-45 Today's Peak Demand Current - Phase C MSEC DP
44649-50 Today's Peak Demand Current - Neutral MSEC DP
44654-55 Today's Peak Demand Current - Neg Seq MSECDP
Read only: 0 to 86,400,000 Milliseconds

44661-62 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Phase A DP

44666-67 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Phase B DP
44671-72 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Phase C DP
44676-77 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Neutral DP
44681-82 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current – Negative Seq DP
Read only: 0 to 99,999,999 Centiamps

44663 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Phase A DAY INT

44668 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Phase B DAY INT
44673 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Phase C DAY INT
44678 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Neutral DAY INT
44683 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Neg Seq DAY INT
Read only: any value (days since 01/01/1984).

44664-65 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Phase A MSEC DP

44669-70 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Phase B MSEC DP
44674-75 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Phase C MSEC DP
44679-80 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Neutral MSEC DP
44684-85 Yesterday’s Peak Demand Current - Neg Seq MSEC DP
Read only: 0 to 86,400,000 Milliseconds

45601 General Status MSBs BM(16)

56 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
 Read only:
Bit 15 – Spare
Bit 14 – Spare
Bit 13 – Spare
Bit 12 – Spare
Bit 11 – Spare
Bit 10 – Spare
Bit 9 – Setting Group Override Active
Bit 8 – Output Override Active
Bit 7 – Spare
Bit 6 – Spare
Bit 5 – New Targets Available
Bit 4 – Not Supported
Bit 3 – Not Supported
Bit 2 – Not Supported
Bit 1 – New Demand Data Available
Bit 0 – New Metering Data Available

45602 General Status LSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – Spare
Bit 14 – Not Supported
Bit 13 – Not Supported
Bit 12 – Not Supported
Bit 11 – Not Supported
Bit 10 – Recloser Status
Bit 9 – Relay Status
Bit 8 – Breaker Status
Bit 7 – Time Sync Requested
Bit 6 – Not Supported
Bit 5 – Not Supported
Bit 4 – Not Supported
Bit 3 – Service Request / Minor Alarm
Bit 2 – Device Trouble / Major Alarm
Bit 1 – Device Fail / Relay Trouble Alarm
Bit 0 – Device Restart / Microprocessor Reset

45603 Diagnostic Alarm Status MSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bits 15 to 0 – Spare

45604 Diagnostic Alarm Status LSBs BM(16)

Read only:
Bits 15 to 8 – Spare
Bit 7 – Watchdog Failure
Bit 6 – Power Supply out of tolerance
Bit 5 – Relay not calibrated or calibration checksum error
Bit 4 – Analog Problem detected
Bit 3 – EEPROM Read / Write Fatal error
Bit 2 – MPU Self-test error
Bit 1 – ROM (flash) Failure detected, CRC16 Failure
Bit 0 – RAM Failure detected

45605 Major Alarm Status MSBs BM(16)

45607 Minor Alarm Status MSBs BM(16)
Read only:
Bits 15 to 8 - Spare
Bit 7 - Spare
Bit 6 - Virtual Output 15 alarm
Bit 5 - Virtual Output 14 alarm
BE1-851 With Modbus  Protocol 57
 Bit 4 - Virtual Output 13 alarm
Bit 3 - Setting Group Change Active alarm
Bit 2 - Loss of IRIG-B sync or IRIG-B decode problem
Bit 1 - An override is active in one or more outputs
Bit 0 - EEPROM Non fatal error

45606 Major Alarm Status LSBs BM(16)

45608 Minor Alarm Status LSBs BM(16)
Read only:
Bit 15 - User settings changed, ( 'EXIT' with 'Y' )
Bit 14 - Power reset alarm, hard reset of MPU
Bit 13 - Clock problem, real time clock has not been set
Bit 12 - Communicating failure alarm, read error on serial port
Bit 11 - Operating System Overload detected alarm
Bit 10 - Setting group override in effect
Bit 9 - Excessive unbalance alarm, 50TQ unbalance output picked up
Bit 8 - Neutral demand alarm, neutral demand maximum exceeded
Bit 7 - Phase demand alarm, phase demand maximum exceeded
Bit 6 - Breaker alarm #3
Bit 5 - Breaker alarm #2
Bit 4 - Breaker alarm #1
Bit 3 - Recloser lockout, reclose in lockout state
Bit 2 - Reclose failure, reclose attempt failed
Bit 1 - Breaker fail alarm, breaker fail output picked up
Bit 0 - Trip Circuit Monitor continuity alarm

45609 System Status (Logic Var 16 to 31) BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – Logic always false L-VOx=0
Bit 14 – 79 block output
Bit 13 – 79 reclose fail
Bit 12 – 79 lockout
Bit 11 – 79 enable / active / block tap changer
Bit 10 – 79 close
Bit 9 – Serial controlled switch 343
Bit 8 – Serial controlled switch 243
Bit 7 – Serial controlled switch 143
Bit 6 – Serial controlled switch 43
Bit 5 – 162 tripped
Bit 4 – 62 tripped
Bit 3 – 51Q picked-up
Bit 2 – 51 neutral picked-up
Bit 1 – 51 phase picked-up
Bit 0 – BF picked-up

45610 System Status (Logic Var 00 to 15) BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – 150Q picked-up
Bit 14 – 50Q picked-up
Bit 13 – 150 neutral picked-up
Bit 12 – 50 neutral picked-up
Bit 11 – 150 phase picked-up
Bit 10 – 50 phase picked-up
Bit 9 – 51Q tripped
Bit 8 – 51 neutral tripped
Bit 7 – 51 phase tripped
Bit 6 – BF tripped
Bit 5 – 150Q tripped
Bit 4 – 50Q tripped
Bit 3 – 150 neutral tripped
58 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
 Bit 2 – 50 neutral tripped
Bit 1 – 150 phase tripped
Bit 0 – 50 phase tripped

45611 System Status (Logic Var 48 to 63) BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – Setting Group 3 active
Bit 14 – Setting Group 2 active
Bit 13 – Setting Group 1 active
Bit 12 – Setting Group 0 active
Bit 11 – Output 1 trip coil monitor
Bit 10 – Alarm minor
Bit 9 – Alarm major
Bit 8 – Alarm logic
Bit 7 – Spare
Bit 6 – 101 slip contact
Bit 5 – 101 close
Bit 4 – 101 trip
Bit 3 – Input 4 status
Bit 2 – Input 3 status
Bit 1 – Input 2 status
Bit 0 – Input 1 status

45612 System Status (Logic Var 32 to 47) BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 15 – Virtual Output 15 status
Bit 14 – Virtual Output 14 status
Bit 13 – Virtual Output 13 status
Bit 12 – Virtual Output 12 status
Bit 11 – Virtual Output 11 status
Bit 10 – Virtual Output 10 status
Bit 9 – Virtual Output 9 status
Bit 8 – Virtual Output 8 status
Bit 7 – Virtual Output 7 status
Bit 6 – Virtual Output 6 status
Bit 5 – Virtual Output 5 status
Bit 4 – Virtual Output 4 status
Bit 3 – Virtual Output 3 status
Bit 2 – Virtual Output 2 status
Bit 1 – Virtual Output 1 status
Bit 0 – Virtual Output A status

45617 Hardware Output Status BM(16)

Read only:
Bit 7 - Spare
Bit 6 - Spare
Bit 5 - Output 5 Status
Bit 4 - Output 4 Status
Bit 3 - Output 3 Status
Bit 2 - Output 2 Status
Bit 1 - Output 1 Status
Bit 0 - Output A Status

45618 Active Setting Group INT

Read only: 0 to 3

45619 Active Logic INT

Read only: 0 to 7

45620 Recloser Status BM(16)

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 59
 Read only:
Bit 15 for Reclose Timing fail
Bit 14 for Reclose Timing 4
Bit 13 for Reclose Timing 3
Bit 12 for Reclose Timing 2
Bit 11 for Reclose Timing 1
Bits 10 to 6 are Spares
Bit 5 for Reclose Wait
Bit 4 for Reclose Lockout
Bit 3 for Reclose Failure
Bit 2 for Reclose Timing Max
Bit 1 for Reclose Reset
Bit 0 for Recloser Active

45621 50 Target Status BM(16)

Read:
Bit 15 to 13 are Spares
Bit 12 for 150Q Target Status
Bit 11 for 150N Target Status
Bit 10 for 150C Target Status
Bit 9 for 150B Target Status
Bit 8 for 150A Target Status
Bit 7 to 5 are Spares
Bit 4 for 50Q Target Status
Bit 3 for 50N Target Status
Bit 2 for 50C Target Status
Bit 1 for 50B Target Status
Bit 0 for 50A Target Status
Write:
Any value to clear.

45623 51 Target Status BM(16)

Read:
Bit 15 to 5 are Spares
Bit 4 for 51Q Target Status
Bit 3 for 51N Target Status
Bit 2 for 51C Target Status
Bit 1 for 51B Target Status
Bit 0 for 51A Target Status
Write:
Any value to clear.

45625 BF Target Status BM(16)

Read:
Bit 15 to 3 are Spares
Bit 2 for BF Target Status
Bit 1 for BF Target Status
Bit 0 for BF Target Status
Write:
Any value to clear.

60 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

 ASCII COMMAND VERSUS MODBUS REGISTER CROSS REFERENCE

ASCII Command Modbus Registers

A=<password> 40002-40005
CO-101 40136
CO-43 40120
CO-143 40122
CO-243 40124
CO-343 40126
CO-GROUP=<settings group> 40118
CO-OUT1 40142
CO-OUT2 40144
CO-OUT3 40146
CO-OUT4 40148
CO-OUT5 40150
CO-OUTA 40140
CO-OUTALL 40138
CS-101 40135
CS-43 40119
CS-143 40121
CS-243 40123
CS-343 40125
CS-GROUP=<settings group> 40117
CS-OUT1 40141
CS-OUT2 40143
CS-OUT3 40145
CS-OUT4 40147
CS-OUT5 40149
CS-OUTA 40139
CS-OUTALL 40137
EXIT 40001
GS-PWC=<Control password>,<Control path> 40090-40093,40094
GS-PWG=<Global password>,<Global path> 40080-40083,40084
GS-PWR=<Report password>,<Report path> 40095-40098,40099
GS-PWS=<Settings password>,<Settings path> 40085-40088,40089
M-IA 49726-49727
M-IB 49729-49730
M-IC 49732-49733
M-IG 49744-49745
M-IQ 49738-49739
M-IN 49740-47741
M-VA 49756-49757
M-VB 49758-49759
M-VC 49760-47761
M-VAB 49762-49763
M-VBC 49764-49465
M-VCA 49766-49767
M-V2 49754-49755
M-3V0 49742-49753
M-VX 49770-49771
M-V3X 49768-49769
M-WATT 49746-49747
M-WATTA 49774-49775
M-WATTB 49776-49777
M-WATTC 49778-49779
M-VAR 49750-49751
 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 61
 ASCII Command Modbus Registers
M-VARA 49780-49781
M-VARB 49782-49783
M-VARC 49784-49785
M-S 49752-49753
M-PF 49748-49749
M-FREQG 49720-49721
M-FREQB 49722-49723
M-FREQS 49724-49725
RA-MAJ 47595-47719,40039
RA-MAJ=0 47487
RA-LGC 47595-47719,40039
RA-LGC=0 47486
RA-MIN 47595-47719,40039
RA-MIN=0 47488
RA-REL 47595-47719,40039
RA-REL=0 47489
RB-DUTYA=<% of duty> 47394-47395
RB-DUTYB=<% of duty> 47396-47397
RB-DUTYC=<% of duty> 47398-47399
RB-OPCNTR=<number of operations> 47400-47401
RD-PIA 47460-47461,47463-47464,47462
RD-PIB 47465-47466,47468-47469,47467
RD-PIC 47470-47471,47473-47474,47472
RD-PIN 47475-47476,47478-47479,47477
RD-PIQ 47480-47481,47483-47484,47482
RD-PVAR 47194-47195,47196,47197-47198,47199-
47200,47201,47202-47203
RD-PWATT 47204-47205,47206,47207-47208,47209-47210,
47211,47212-47213
RD-TIA 47435-47436,47438-47439,47437
RD-TIB 47440-47441,47443-47444,47442
RD-TIC 47445-47446,47448-47449,47447
RD-TIN 47450-47451,47453-47454,47452
RD-TIQ 47455-47456,47458-47459,47457
RD-TVAR 47214-47215,47216,47217-47218,47219-47220,
47221,47222-47223
RD-TWATT 47224-47225,47226,47227-47228,47229-47230,
47231,47232- 47233
RD-YIA 47410-47411,47413-47414,47412
RD-YIB 47415-47416,47418-47419,47417
RD-YIC 47420-47421,47423-47424,47422
RD-YIN 47425-47426,47428-47429,47427
RD-YIQ 47430-47431,47433-47434,47432
RD-YVAR 47234-47235,47236,47237-47238,47239-
47240,47241,47242-47243
RD-YWATT 47244-47245,47246,47247-47248,47249-47250,
47251,47252-47253
RF 47595-47719,40039
RF-# 47595-47719,40039,40040
RF-NEW 47595-47719,40039
RF=0 47491
RF=TRIG 47492
RG-DATE=<date> 47364
RG-STAT 47367-47383,47388-47392
RG-TARG 47384-47387

62 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol

 ASCII Command Modbus Registers
RG-TIME=<time> 47365-47366
RG-VER 47274-47277,47324-47334,47282-47289,47296-
47302, 47310-47316
RG-ADDR1 47362
RG-ADDR2 47363
RG-GRPACTIVE 47373
RG-GRPCNTRL 47374
RG-LOGIC 47389
RG-OUTCNTRL 47375-47376,47377-47378
RG-OUTSTAT 47379
RS 47595-47719,40039
RS-# 47595-47719,40039,40040
RS-F# 47595-47719,40039,40040
RS-NEW 47595-47719,40039
RS=0 47493
S#-50TN=<pickup>,<time delay>,<direction> 40264-40265,40266-40267,40268
S#-50TP=<pickup>,<time delay>,<direction> 40259-40260,40261-40262,40263
S#-50TQ=<pickup>,<time delay>,<direction> 40269-40270,40271-40272,40273
S#-150TN=<pickup>,<time delay>,<direction> 40279-40280,40281-40282,40283
S#-150TP=<pickup>,<time delay>,<direction> 40274-40275,40276-40277,40278
S#-150TQ=<pickup>,<time delay>,<direction> 40284-40285,40286-40287,40288
S#-51N=<pickup>,<time dial>,<curve>,<direction> 40308-40309,40310-40311,40312-40313,40314
S#-51P=<pickup>,<time dial>,<curve>,<direction> 40301-40302,40303-40304,40305-40306,40307
S#-51Q=<pickup>,<time dial>.<curve>,<direction> 40315-40316,40317-40318,40319-40320,40321
S#-151N=<pickup>,<time dial>. <curve>,<direction> 40322-40323,40324-40325,40326-40327,40328
S#-27R=<pickup>,<mode> 40429-40430,40431
S#-27P=<pickup>,<time delay> 40476-40477,40478-40479
S#-27X=<pickup>,<time delay> 40480-40481,40482-40483
S#-32 = <pickup>,<time delay>, <mode> 40511-40512,40513-40514,40515
S#-59P=<pickup>,<time delay> 40436-40437,40438-40439
S#-59X=<pickup>,<time delay> 40440-40441,40442-40443
S#-159X=<pickup>,<time delay> 40516-40617,40518-40519
S#-47=<pickup>,< time delay > 40432-40433,40434-40435
S#-791=<first auto reclose delay> 40406-40407
S#-792=<second auto reclose delay> 40408-40409
S#-793=<third auto reclose delay> 40410-40411
S#-794=<fourth auto reclose delay> 40412-40413
S#-79R=<reset time delay> 40414-40415
S#-79F=<reclose fail time delay> 40416-40417
S#-79M=<max reclose time> 40418-40419
S#-79SCB=<sequence control> 40420
S#-81=<pickup>,<time delay>,<mode> 40444-40445,40446-40447,40448
S#-181=<pickup>,<time delay>,<mode> 40449-40450,40451-40452,40453
S#-281=<pickup>,<time delay>,<mode> 40454-40455,40456-40457,40458
S#-381=<pickup>,<time delay>,<mode> 40459-40460,40461-40462,40463
S#-481=<pickup>,<time delay>,<mode> 40464-40465,40466-40467,40468
S#-581=<pickup>,<time delay>,<mode> 40469-40470,40471-40472,40473
S#-81INH=<inhibit setting> 40474-40475
S#-62=<time delay 1>,<time delay2> 40359-40360,40361-40362
S#-162=<time delay 1>,<time delay2> 40363-40364,40365-40366
S#-67=<neutral polarizing mode> 40507-40508
S#-24=<pickup>, <time delay>, <reset delay> 40484-40485, 40486-40487, 40488-40489
S#-25=<delta volts>, <phase angle>, <frequency>, 40490-40491, 40492-40493, 40494-40495, 40496
<mode>

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 63
 ASCII Command Modbus Registers
S#-25VM=<live volts>, <dead volts>, <time delay>, 40497-40498, 40499-40500, 40501-40502, 40503-
<mode1>, <mode2> 40504, 40505-40506
SA-BKR1=<mode>,<alarm limit> 41096,41097-41098
SA-BKR2=<mode>,<alarm limit> 41099,41100-41101
SA-BKR3=<mode>,<alarm limit> 41102,41103-41104
SA-DIN=<alarm level> 41261-41262
SA-DIP=<alarm level> 41259-41260
SA-DIQ=<alarm level> 41263-41264
SA-LGC=<alarm number> 41269-41270
SA-MAJ=<alarm number> 41265-41266
SA-MIN=<alarm number> 41267-41268
SA-RESET=<reset Alarm Logic> 41419-41424,41427-41432
SA-DVAR=<fwd var alm level>, 41251-41252,41253,41254
<rev var alm level>
SA-DWATT=<fwd watt alm level>, 41255-41256,41257-41258
<rev watt alm level>
SA-24 = <volts / Hertz alarm level> 41247
SB-DUTY=<mode>,<dmax.>,<blk bkr logic> 41092,41093-41094,41110-41115,41118-41123
SB-LOGIC=<breaker close logic equation> 41126-41129,41134-41137
SG-CLK=<date format>,<time format><dst enable> 41272,41273,41274
SG-COM0=<baud rate>,<flow control>, 40962,40964,40965,40966
<page length>,<ack>
SG-COM1=<baud rate>,<relay address>, 40971,40972,40973,40974,40975
<flow control>,<page length>,<ack>
SG-COM2=<baud rate>,<relay address>,,,,, 40980,40981,40986,40987,40988
<parity>,<remote delay>,<stop bits>
SG-CTP=<ratio> 41021
SG-CTG=<ratio> 41022
SG-VTP=<vt ratio>,<connection>, 41033-41034,41035-41036,41037-41038,41039-
<27/59 mode>,<51/27R mode> 41040
SG-VTX=<aux vt ratio>,<connection> 41041-41042,41043-41044,41045
SG-NOM=<Nom Volts>,<Nom Amps> 40602-40603,40604-40605
SG-DIN=<alarm interval>,<calculation method> 41276
SG-DIP=<alarm interval>,<calculation method> 41275
SG-DIQ=<alarm interval>,<calculation method> 41277
SG-FREQ=<frequency> 41018
SG-HOLD=<output hold enable> 41284
SG-ID=<relay ID>,<station ID> 43438-43442,43443-43457
SG-CLK=<date format>,<clock format><daylight 41272,41273,41274
savings format>
SG-IN1=<input recognition>,<input debounce > 40618,40619
SG-IN2=<input recognition>,<input debounce > 40620,40621
SG-IN3=<input recognition>,<input debounce > 40622,40623
SG-IN4=<input recognition>,<input debounce > 40624,40625
SG-PHROT=<rotation sequence> 41021
SG-SCREEN10=<menu screen> 41327-41330
SG-SCREEN11=<menu screen> 41331-41334
SG-SCREEN12=<menu screen> 41335-41338
SG-SCREEN13=<menu screen> 41339-41342
SG-SCREEN14=<menu screen> 41343-41346
SG-SCREEN15=<menu screen> 41347-41350
SG-SCREEN16=<menu screen> 41351-41354
SG-SCREEN1=<menu screen> 41291-41294
SG-SCREEN2=<menu screen> 41295-41298
SG-SCREEN3=<menu screen> 41299-41302
SG-SCREEN4=<menu screen> 41303-41306
64 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
 ASCII Command Modbus Registers
SG-SCREEN5=<menu screen> 41307-41310
SG-SCREEN6=<menu screen> 41311-41314
SG-SCREEN7=<menu screen> 41315-41318
SG-SCREEN8=<menu screen> 41319-41322
SG-SCREEN9=<menu screen> 41323-41326
SG-SGCON=<time> 40871
SG-TARG=<target list>,<reset Targ Logic> 41287-41290,41403-41408,41411-41416
SG-TRIG=<trip trigger logic equation>,<pu trigger logic 41355-41360,41363-41368,41371-41376,41379-
equation>,<logic trigger logic equation> 41384,41387-41392,41395-41400
SG-LOG = <load profile interval> 41045
SG-LINE = <Z1 mag>, <Z1 Angle>, <Z0 mag>, <Z0 41046-41047,41048-41049, 41050-41051,41052-
Angle>, <Line Length> 41053,41054
SL-43=<mode> 42091
SL-143=<mode> 42092
SL-243=<mode> 42093
SL-343=<mode> 42094
SL-101=<mode> 42099
SL-24 = <mode>, <block logic> 43355,43356-43361,43364-43369
SL-25 = <mode>, <block logic> 43372,43373-43378, 43381-43386
SL-150TN=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41573,41574-41579,41582-41587
SL-150TP=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41556,41557-41562,41565-41570
SL-150TQ=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41590,41591-41596,41599-41604
SL-162=<mode>,<ini logic equation>,<block logic 41877,41878-41883,41886-41891,41894-899,41902-
equation> 41907
SL-50TN=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41522,41523-41528,41531-41536
SL-50TP=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41505,41506-41511,41514-41519
SL-50TQ=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41539,41540-41545,41548-41553
SL-51N=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41708,41709-41714,41717-41722
SL-51P=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41691,41692-41697,41700-41705
SL-51Q=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41725,41726-41731,41734-41739
SL-151N=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41759,41760-41765,41768-41773
SL-27P=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41910,41911-41916,41919-41924
SL-27X=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41927, 41928-41933, 41936-41941
SL-59P=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41944,41945-41950,41953-41958
SL-59X=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41961,41962-41967,41970-41975
SL-159X=<mode>,<block logic equation> 41776,41777-41782,41785-41790
SL-47=<mode>,<block logic equation> 43338,43339-43944,43947-43952
SL-79=<mode>,<RI logic>,<Status logic>, 43173,43174-43179,43182-43187,43190-43195,
<Wait logic>,<Lockout logic> 43198-43203,43206-43211,43214-43219,43222-
43227, 43230-43235
SL-81=<mode>,<block logic> 43236,43237-43242,43245-43250
SL-181=<mode>,<block logic> 43253,432543-43259,43262-43267
SL-281=<mode>,<block logic> 43270,43271-43276,43279-43284
SL-381=<mode>,<block logic> 43287,43288-43293,43296-43301
SL-481=<mode>,<block logic> 43304,43305-43310,43313-43318
SL-581=<mode>,<block logic> 43321,43322-43327,43330-43335
SL-62=<mode>,< ini logic equation>, 41844,41845-41850,41853-41858,41861-
<block logic equation> 41866,41869-41874
SL-BF=<mode>,<ini logic equation>, 41658,41659-41664,41667-41672,41675-
<block logic equation> 41680,41683-41688
SL-GROUP=<mode>,<D0 logic equation>, 42010,42027-42032,42035-42040,42043-42048,
<D1 logic equation>,<D2 logic equation>, 42051-42056,42059-42064,42067-42072,42075-
<D3 logic equation>,<auto logic equation> 42080, 42083-42088,42011-42016,42019-42024
SL-N=<name> 41465-41468

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 65
 ASCII Command Modbus Registers
SL-VOA=<boolean logic equation> 42133,42134-42139,42142-42147,42150-42155,
42158-42163,42166-42171,42174-42179,42182-
42187, 42190-42195
SL-VO1=<boolean logic equation> 42198,42199-42204,42207-42212,42215-
42220,42223-42228,42231-42236,42239-
42244,42247-42252,42255-42260
SL-VO2=<boolean logic equation> 42263,42264-42269,42272-42277,42280-
42285,42288-42293,42296-42301,42304-
42309,42312-42317,42320-42325
SL-VO3=<boolean logic equation> 42328,42329-42334,42337-42342,42345-
42350,42353-42358,42361-42366,42369-
42374,42377-42382,42385-42390
SL-VO4=<boolean logic equation> 42393,42394-42399,42402-42407,42410-
42415,42418-42423,42426-42431,42434-
42439,42442-42447,42450-42455
SL-VO5=<boolean logic equation> 42458,42459-42464,42467-42472,42475-
42480,42483-42488,42491-42496,42499-
42504,42507-42512,42515-42520
SL-VO6=<boolean logic equation> 42523,42524-42529,42532-42537,42540-
42545,42548-42553,42556-42561,42564-
42569,42572-42577,42580-42585
SL-VO7=<boolean logic equation> 42588,42589-42594,42597-42602,42605-
42610,42613-42618,42621-42626,42629-
42634,42637-42642,42645-42650
SL-VO8=<boolean logic equation> 42653,42654-42659,42662-42667,42670-
42675,42678-42683,42686-42691,42694-
42699,42702-42707,42710-42715
SL-VO9=<boolean logic equation> 42718,42719-42724,42727-42732,42735-
42740,42743-42748,42751-42756,42759-
42764,42767-42772,42775-42780
SL-VO10=<boolean logic equation> 42783,42784-42789,42792-42797,42800-
42805,42808-42813,42816-42821,42824-
42829,42832-42837,42840-42845
SL-VO11=<boolean logic equation> 42848,42849-42854,42857-42862,42865-
42870,42873-42878,42881-42886,42889-
42894,42897-42902,42905-42910
SL-VO12=<boolean logic equation> 42913,42914-42919,42922-42927,42930-
42935,42938-42943,42946-42951,42954-
42959,42962-42967,42970-42975
SL-VO13=<boolean logic equation> 42978,42979-42984,42987-42992,42995-
43000,43003-42008,43011-43016,43019-
42024,43027-42032,43035-42040
SL-VO14=<boolean logic equation> 43043,43044-42049,43052-42057,43060-
42065,43068-42073,43076-43081,43084-
42089,43092-42097,43100-42105
SL-VO15=<boolean logic equation> 43108,43109-42114,43117-42122,43125-
42130,43133-42138,43141-43146,43149-
42154,43157-42162,43165-42170
SL: <custom logic>,<logic1>,<logic2>,<logic3>, 41473-41478,41477-41482,41481-41486,41485-
<logic4>,<logic5>,<logic6>,<logic7> 41490,
41489-41494,41493-41498,41497-41502,41501-
41506
SN-43=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43498-43502,43503-43506,43507-43510
SN-143=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43511-43515,43516-43519,43520-43523
SN-243=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43524-43528,43529-43532,43533-43536
SN-343=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43537-43541,43542-43545,43546-43549
SN-IN1=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43849-43853,43854-43857,43858-43861
66 BE1-851 With Modbus Protocol
 ASCII Command Modbus Registers
SN-IN2=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43862-43866,43867-43870,43871-43874
SN-IN3=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43875-43879,43880-43883,43884-43887
SN-IN4=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43888-43892,43893-43896,43897-43900
SN-VOA=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43602-43606,43607-43610,43611-43614
SN-VO1=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43615-43619,43620-43623,43624-43627
SN-VO2=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43628-43632,43633-43636,43637-43640
SN-VO3=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43641-43645,43646-43649,43650-43653
SN-VO4=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43654-43658,43659-43662,43663-43666
SN-VO5=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43667-43671,43672-43675,43676-43679
SN-VO6=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43680-43684,43685-43688,43689-43692
SN-VO7=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43693-43697,43698-43701,43702-43705
SN-VO8=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43706-43710,43711-43714,43715-43718
SN-VO9=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43719-43723,43724-43727,43728-43731
SN-VO10=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43732-43736,43737-43740,43741-43744
SN-VO11=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43745-43749,43750-43753,43754-43757
SN-VO12=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43758-43762,43763-43766,43767-43770
SN-VO13=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43771-43775,43776-43779,43780-43783
SN-VO14=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43784-43788,43789-43792,43793-43796
SN-VO15=<name>,<true label>,<false label> 43797-43801,43802-43805,43806-43809
SP-60FL=<I_Blk>,<V_Blk> 40903-40904,40905-40906
SP-79ZONE=<pickup logic> 40887-40892,40895-40900
SP-BF=<time delay> 40606-40607
SP-CURVE=<a>,<b>,<c>,<n>,<r> 40608-40609,40610-40611,40612-40613,40614-
40615,40616-40617
SP-GROUP1=<switch time>,<switch level>,<return 40872,40873,40874,40875,40876
time>,<return level>,<prot element>
SP-GROUP2=<switch time>,<switch evel>,<return 40877,40878,40879,40880,40881
time>,<return level>,,<prot element>
SP-GROUP3=<switch time>,<switch evel>,<return 40882,40883,40884,40885,40886
time>,<return level>,<prot element>

 Protocol
BE1-851 With Modbus 67
 ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE 618-654-2341 FAX 618-654-2351